ANSYS CFX Tutorials

ANSYS, Inc.
Southpointe
2600 ANSYS Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317
[email protected]
http://www.ansys.com
(T) 724-746-3304
(F) 724-514-9494

Release 17.0
January 2016
ANSYS, Inc. is
certified to ISO
9001:2008.

Copyright and Trademark Information

2015 SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.
ANSYS, ANSYS Workbench, Ansoft, AUTODYN, EKM, Engineering Knowledge Manager, CFX, FLUENT, HFSS, AIM
and any and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks
or trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries in the United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark
used by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product,
service and feature names or trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Disclaimer Notice
THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.
ANSYS, Inc. is certified to ISO 9001:2008.

U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).

Third-Party Software
See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, Contact ANSYS, Inc.
Published in the U.S.A.

Table of Contents
1. Introduction to the ANSYS CFX Tutorials ................................................................................................ 1
1.1. Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode ..................................... 3
1.2. Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench ..................................................................... 4
1.2.1. Setting Up the Project .............................................................................................................. 4
1.2.2. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ..................................................................................... 5
1.2.3. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ................................................................... 5
1.2.4. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .......................................................................................... 5
1.2.5. Creating CFX Component Systems for Multiple Simulations ...................................................... 5
1.2.6. Closing the Applications ........................................................................................................... 6
1.3. Playing a Session File ........................................................................................................................ 6
1.4. Changing the Display Colors ............................................................................................................. 7
1.5. Editor Buttons .................................................................................................................................. 7
1.6. Using Help ........................................................................................................................................ 7
2. Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode ........................................................ 9
2.1. Tutorial Features ............................................................................................................................... 9
2.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................... 10
2.3. Preparing the Working Directory ..................................................................................................... 11
2.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ..................................................................................................... 11
2.4.1. Starting Quick Setup Mode ..................................................................................................... 12
2.4.2. Setting the Physics Definition ................................................................................................. 12
2.4.3. Importing a Mesh ................................................................................................................... 13
2.4.4. Using the Viewer .................................................................................................................... 13
2.4.4.1. Using the Zoom Tools .................................................................................................... 13
2.4.4.2. Rotating the Geometry .................................................................................................. 13
2.4.5. Defining Model Data .............................................................................................................. 14
2.4.6. Defining Boundaries ............................................................................................................... 15
2.4.7. Setting Boundary Data ........................................................................................................... 15
2.4.8. Setting Flow Specification ...................................................................................................... 15
2.4.9. Setting Temperature Specification .......................................................................................... 15
2.4.10. Reviewing the Boundary Condition Definitions ..................................................................... 15
2.4.11. Creating the Second Inlet Boundary Definition ..................................................................... 16
2.4.12. Creating the Outlet Boundary Definition ............................................................................... 17
2.4.13. Moving to General Mode ...................................................................................................... 17
2.4.14. Setting Solver Control .......................................................................................................... 17
2.4.15. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................. 18
2.4.16. Playing the Session File and Starting CFX-Solver Manager ..................................................... 18
2.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .......................................................................... 19
2.5.1. Starting the Run ..................................................................................................................... 19
2.5.2. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post ....................................................................... 20
2.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ................................................................................................ 20
2.6.1. Setting the Edge Angle for a Wireframe Object ....................................................................... 21
2.6.2. Creating a Point for the Origin of the Streamline ..................................................................... 23
2.6.3. Creating a Streamline Originating from a Point ....................................................................... 24
2.6.4. Rearranging the Point ............................................................................................................ 25
2.6.5. Configuring a Default Legend ................................................................................................. 26
2.6.6. Creating a Slice Plane ............................................................................................................. 27
2.6.7. Defining Slice Plane Geometry ............................................................................................... 28
2.6.8. Configuring Slice Plane Views ................................................................................................. 28
2.6.9. Rendering Slice Planes ........................................................................................................... 29
2.6.10. Coloring the Slice Plane ........................................................................................................ 30
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

iii

Tutorials
2.6.11. Moving the Slice Plane ......................................................................................................... 31
2.6.12. Adding Contours .................................................................................................................. 31
2.6.13. Working with Animations ..................................................................................................... 32
2.6.13.1. Showing the Animation Dialog Box .............................................................................. 33
2.6.13.2. Creating the First Keyframe .......................................................................................... 33
2.6.13.3. Creating the Second Keyframe ..................................................................................... 34
2.6.13.4. Viewing the Animation ................................................................................................ 36
2.6.13.5. Modifying the Animation ............................................................................................. 37
2.6.13.6. Saving a Movie ............................................................................................................ 38
2.6.14. Quitting CFD-Post ................................................................................................................ 39
3. Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench ............................................................................ 41
3.1. Tutorial Features ............................................................................................................................. 41
3.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................... 42
3.3. Preparing the Working Directory ..................................................................................................... 43
3.4. Setting Up the Project ..................................................................................................................... 43
3.5. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ..................................................................................................... 43
3.5.1. Creating the Simulation Definition .......................................................................................... 45
3.5.2. Setting the Physics Definition ................................................................................................. 45
3.5.3. Defining Boundaries ............................................................................................................... 46
3.5.4. Setting Boundary Data ........................................................................................................... 46
3.5.5. Creating the Second Inlet Boundary Definition ....................................................................... 46
3.5.6. Creating the Outlet Boundary Definition ................................................................................. 47
3.5.7. Moving to General Mode ........................................................................................................ 47
3.5.8. Using the Viewer .................................................................................................................... 47
3.5.8.1. Using the Zoom Tools .................................................................................................... 47
3.5.8.2. Rotating the Geometry .................................................................................................. 48
3.5.9. Setting Solver Control ............................................................................................................ 49
3.6. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .......................................................................... 49
3.7. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ................................................................................................ 51
3.7.1. Setting the Edge Angle for a Wireframe Object ....................................................................... 52
3.7.2. Creating a Point for the Origin of the Streamline ..................................................................... 53
3.7.3. Creating a Streamline Originating from a Point ....................................................................... 54
3.7.4. Rearranging the Point ............................................................................................................ 55
3.7.5. Configuring a Default Legend ................................................................................................. 56
3.7.6. Creating a Slice Plane ............................................................................................................. 57
3.7.7. Defining Slice Plane Geometry ............................................................................................... 58
3.7.8. Configuring Slice Plane Views ................................................................................................. 58
3.7.9. Rendering Slice Planes ........................................................................................................... 59
3.7.10. Coloring the Slice Plane ........................................................................................................ 60
3.7.11. Moving the Slice Plane ......................................................................................................... 61
3.7.12. Adding Contours .................................................................................................................. 61
3.7.13. Working with Animations ..................................................................................................... 63
3.7.13.1. Showing the Animation Dialog Box .............................................................................. 63
3.7.13.2. Creating the First Keyframe .......................................................................................... 63
3.7.13.3. Creating the Second Keyframe ..................................................................................... 64
3.7.13.4. Viewing the Animation ................................................................................................ 66
3.7.13.5. Modifying the Animation ............................................................................................. 67
3.7.13.6. Saving a Movie ............................................................................................................ 68
3.7.14. Closing the Applications ....................................................................................................... 69
4. Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh) ................................................................................................... 71
4.1. Tutorial Features ............................................................................................................................. 71
4.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................... 72

iv

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
4.3. Preparing the Working Directory ..................................................................................................... 72
4.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ..................................................................................................... 73
4.4.1. Importing a Mesh ................................................................................................................... 73
4.4.2. Importing Settings from Tutorial 1 .......................................................................................... 74
4.4.3. Viewing Domain Settings ....................................................................................................... 75
4.4.4. Viewing the Boundary Condition Setting ................................................................................ 76
4.4.5. Defining Solver Parameters .................................................................................................... 76
4.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................... 77
4.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .......................................................................... 77
4.5.1. Starting the Run with an Initial Values File ............................................................................... 78
4.5.2. Confirming Results ................................................................................................................. 78
4.5.3. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post ....................................................................... 79
4.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ................................................................................................ 79
4.6.1. Creating a Slice Plane ............................................................................................................. 79
4.6.2. Coloring the Slice Plane .......................................................................................................... 80
4.6.3. Loading Results from Tutorial 1 for Comparison ...................................................................... 81
4.6.4. Comparing Slice Planes Using Multiple Views .......................................................................... 82
4.6.5. Viewing the Surface Mesh on the Outlet ................................................................................. 83
4.6.6. Looking at the Inflated Elements in Three Dimensions ............................................................. 83
4.6.7. Viewing the Surface Mesh on the Mixer Body .......................................................................... 85
4.6.8. Viewing the Layers of Inflated Elements on a Plane ................................................................. 85
4.6.9. Viewing the Mesh Statistics .................................................................................................... 86
4.6.10. Viewing the Mesh Elements with Largest Face Angle ............................................................. 86
4.6.11. Viewing the Mesh Elements with Largest Face Angle Using a Point ........................................ 87
4.6.12. Quitting CFD-Post ................................................................................................................ 87
5. Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe ................................................................................................ 89
5.1. Tutorial Features ............................................................................................................................. 89
5.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................... 90
5.3. Preparing the Working Directory ..................................................................................................... 91
5.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ..................................................................................................... 91
5.4.1. Importing a Mesh ................................................................................................................... 92
5.4.2. Setting Temperature-Dependent Material Properties .............................................................. 92
5.4.3. Plotting an Expression ............................................................................................................ 93
5.4.4. Evaluating an Expression ........................................................................................................ 94
5.4.5. Modify Material Properties ..................................................................................................... 94
5.4.6. Creating the Domain .............................................................................................................. 94
5.4.7. Creating the Side Inlet Boundary ............................................................................................ 95
5.4.8. Creating the Main Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................... 96
5.4.9. Creating the Main Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................ 98
5.4.10. Setting Initial Values ............................................................................................................. 98
5.4.11. Setting Solver Control .......................................................................................................... 99
5.4.12. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................. 99
5.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ........................................................................ 100
5.5.1. Starting the Run ................................................................................................................... 100
5.5.2. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post ...................................................................... 100
5.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .............................................................................................. 100
5.6.1. Modifying the Outline of the Geometry ................................................................................ 101
5.6.2. Creating and Modifying Streamlines Originating from the Main Inlet ..................................... 101
5.6.3. Modifying Streamline Color Ranges ...................................................................................... 101
5.6.4. Coloring Streamlines with a Constant Color .......................................................................... 102
5.6.5. Creating Streamlines Originating from the Side Inlet ............................................................. 102
5.6.6. Examining Turbulence Kinetic Energy ................................................................................... 103
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
5.6.7. Quitting CFD-Post ................................................................................................................ 104
6. Flow from a Circular Vent .................................................................................................................... 105
6.1. Tutorial Features ........................................................................................................................... 105
6.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................. 106
6.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................... 107
6.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................... 107
6.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................. 107
6.4.2. Creating an Additional Variable ............................................................................................. 108
6.4.3. Defining the Steady-State Analysis ........................................................................................ 108
6.4.3.1. Renaming the Analysis ................................................................................................. 108
6.4.3.2. Creating the Domain ................................................................................................... 108
6.4.3.3. Creating the Boundaries .............................................................................................. 109
6.4.3.3.1. Inlet Boundary .................................................................................................... 110
6.4.3.3.2. Opening Boundary ............................................................................................. 111
6.4.3.3.3. Inlet for the Vent ................................................................................................. 112
6.4.3.4. Setting Initial Values .................................................................................................... 113
6.4.3.5. Setting Solver Control .................................................................................................. 113
6.4.4. Defining the Transient Analysis ............................................................................................. 114
6.4.4.1. Creating the Analysis ................................................................................................... 114
6.4.4.2. Modifying the Analysis Type ......................................................................................... 114
6.4.4.3. Modifying the Boundary Conditions ............................................................................. 115
6.4.4.3.1. To Modify the Vent Inlet Boundary Condition ....................................................... 115
6.4.4.3.2. Plotting Smoke Concentration ............................................................................. 116
6.4.4.4. Initialization Values ...................................................................................................... 117
6.4.4.5. Modifying the Solver Control ....................................................................................... 118
6.4.4.6. Setting Output Control ................................................................................................ 118
6.4.5. Configuring Simulation Control ............................................................................................ 119
6.4.5.1. Configuration Control for the Steady State Analysis ...................................................... 119
6.4.5.2. Configuration Control for the Transient Analysis ........................................................... 120
6.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.mdef ) File .............................................................................. 121
6.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ........................................................................ 121
6.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .............................................................................................. 122
6.6.1. Displaying Smoke Density Using an Isosurface ...................................................................... 122
6.6.2. Viewing the Results at Different Time Steps ........................................................................... 123
6.6.3. Generating Titled Image Files ................................................................................................ 123
6.6.3.1. Adding a Title .............................................................................................................. 123
6.6.3.2. JPEG output ................................................................................................................ 124
6.6.4. Generating a Movie .............................................................................................................. 125
6.6.5. Viewing the Dispersion of Smoke at the Final Time Step ........................................................ 126
7. Flow Around a Blunt Body ................................................................................................................... 127
7.1. Tutorial Features ........................................................................................................................... 127
7.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................. 128
7.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................... 129
7.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................... 129
7.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................. 129
7.4.2. Creating the Domain ............................................................................................................ 130
7.4.3. Creating Composite Regions ................................................................................................ 131
7.4.4. Creating the Boundaries ....................................................................................................... 131
7.4.4.1. Inlet Boundary ............................................................................................................. 131
7.4.4.2. Outlet Boundary .......................................................................................................... 132
7.4.4.3. Free-Slip Wall Boundary ............................................................................................... 132
7.4.4.4. Symmetry Plane Boundary ........................................................................................... 133

vi

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
7.4.4.5. Wall Boundary on the Blunt Body Surface ..................................................................... 133
7.4.5. Setting Initial Values ............................................................................................................. 134
7.4.6. Setting Solver Control .......................................................................................................... 134
7.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................. 135
7.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ........................................................................ 135
7.5.1. Obtaining a Solution in Serial ............................................................................................... 136
7.5.2. Obtaining a Solution in Parallel ............................................................................................. 136
7.5.2.1. Background to Parallel Running in CFX ......................................................................... 136
7.5.2.2. Obtaining a Solution with Local Parallel ........................................................................ 136
7.5.2.3. Obtaining a Solution with Distributed Parallel .............................................................. 137
7.5.2.4.Text Output when Running in Parallel ........................................................................... 139
7.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .............................................................................................. 140
7.6.1. Using Symmetry Plane to Display the Full Geometry ............................................................. 140
7.6.1.1. Manipulating the Geometry ......................................................................................... 141
7.6.1.2. Creating an Instance Transform .................................................................................... 141
7.6.1.3. Using the Reflection Transform .................................................................................... 142
7.6.2. Creating Velocity Vectors ...................................................................................................... 142
7.6.2.1. Creating the Sampling Plane ........................................................................................ 142
7.6.2.2. Creating a Vector Plot Using Different Sampling Methods ............................................. 143
7.6.3. Displaying Pressure Distribution on Body and Symmetry Plane ............................................. 144
7.6.4. Creating Surface Streamlines to Display the Path of Air along the Surface of the Body ............ 145
7.6.5. Moving Objects .................................................................................................................... 146
7.6.6. Creating a Surface Plot of y+ ................................................................................................. 146
7.6.7. Demonstrating Power Syntax ............................................................................................... 147
7.6.8. Viewing the Mesh Partitions (Parallel Only) ............................................................................ 148
8. Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity .................................................................................................. 149
8.1. Tutorial Features ........................................................................................................................... 149
8.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................. 150
8.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................... 150
8.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................... 151
8.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................. 151
8.4.2. Analysis Type ........................................................................................................................ 152
8.4.3. Creating the Domain ............................................................................................................ 153
8.4.4. Creating the Boundaries ....................................................................................................... 154
8.4.4.1. Hot and Cold Wall Boundary ........................................................................................ 154
8.4.4.2. Symmetry Plane Boundary ........................................................................................... 155
8.4.5. Setting Initial Values ............................................................................................................. 156
8.4.6. Setting Output Control ......................................................................................................... 156
8.4.7. Setting Solver Control .......................................................................................................... 157
8.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................. 158
8.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ........................................................................ 158
8.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .............................................................................................. 159
8.6.1. Simple Report ...................................................................................................................... 159
8.6.2. Plots for Customized Reports ................................................................................................ 159
8.6.2.1. Contour Plot of Temperature ........................................................................................ 159
8.6.2.2. Point Locators .............................................................................................................. 160
8.6.2.3. Comment .................................................................................................................... 160
8.6.2.4. Figure .......................................................................................................................... 160
8.6.2.5.Time Chart of Temperature ........................................................................................... 161
8.6.2.6. Table of Temperature Values ......................................................................................... 162
8.6.3. Customized Report ............................................................................................................... 162
8.6.4. Animations .......................................................................................................................... 162
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

vii

Tutorials
8.6.5. Completion .......................................................................................................................... 162
9. Free Surface Flow Over a Bump .......................................................................................................... 163
9.1. Tutorial Features ........................................................................................................................... 163
9.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................. 164
9.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................... 165
9.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................... 165
9.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................. 165
9.4.2. Viewing the Region Labels .................................................................................................... 166
9.4.3. Creating Expressions for Initial and Boundary Conditions ...................................................... 166
9.4.3.1. Creating Expressions in CEL ......................................................................................... 167
9.4.3.2. Reading Expressions From a File ................................................................................... 167
9.4.4. Creating the Domain ............................................................................................................ 168
9.4.5. Creating the Boundaries ....................................................................................................... 170
9.4.5.1. Inlet Boundary ............................................................................................................. 170
9.4.5.2. Outlet Boundary .......................................................................................................... 170
9.4.5.3. Symmetry Boundaries .................................................................................................. 171
9.4.5.4. Opening and Wall Boundaries ...................................................................................... 171
9.4.6. Setting Initial Values ............................................................................................................. 173
9.4.7. Setting Mesh Adaption Parameters ....................................................................................... 174
9.4.8. Setting the Solver Controls ................................................................................................... 175
9.4.9. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................. 176
9.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ........................................................................ 176
9.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .............................................................................................. 177
9.6.1. Creating Velocity Vector Plots ............................................................................................... 178
9.6.2. Viewing Mesh Refinement .................................................................................................... 179
9.6.3. Creating an Isosurface to Show the Free Surface ................................................................... 182
9.6.4. Creating a Polyline that Follows the Free Surface ................................................................... 183
9.6.5. Creating a Chart to Show the Height of the Surface ............................................................... 183
9.6.6. Further Postprocessing ......................................................................................................... 184
9.7. Further Discussion ........................................................................................................................ 184
10. Supersonic Flow Over a Wing ............................................................................................................ 185
10.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 185
10.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 186
10.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 186
10.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 187
10.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 187
10.4.2. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 187
10.4.3. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 188
10.4.3.1. Creating an Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................ 188
10.4.3.2. Creating an Outlet Boundary ...................................................................................... 189
10.4.3.3. Creating the Symmetry Plane Boundaries ................................................................... 190
10.4.3.4. Creating a Free Slip Boundary .................................................................................... 190
10.4.3.5. Creating a Wall Boundary ........................................................................................... 191
10.4.4. Creating Domain Interfaces ................................................................................................ 191
10.4.5. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 191
10.4.6. Setting the Solver Controls ................................................................................................. 192
10.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 193
10.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 193
10.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 194
10.6.1. Displaying Mach Information .............................................................................................. 194
10.6.2. Displaying Pressure Information ......................................................................................... 194
10.6.3. Displaying Temperature Information ................................................................................... 195

viii

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
10.6.4. Displaying Pressure With User Vectors ................................................................................. 195
11. Flow Through a Butterfly Valve ......................................................................................................... 197
11.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 197
11.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 198
11.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 199
11.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 199
11.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 199
11.4.2. Defining the Properties of the Sand .................................................................................... 200
11.4.3. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 201
11.4.4. Creating the Inlet Velocity Profile ........................................................................................ 206
11.4.5. Creating the Boundary Conditions ...................................................................................... 207
11.4.5.1. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 207
11.4.5.2. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 210
11.4.5.3. Symmetry Plane Boundary ......................................................................................... 211
11.4.5.4. Pipe Wall Boundary .................................................................................................... 211
11.4.5.5. Editing the Default Boundary ..................................................................................... 212
11.4.6. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 213
11.4.7. Setting the Solver Controls ................................................................................................. 213
11.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 215
11.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 215
11.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 215
11.6.1. Erosion Due to Sand Particles .............................................................................................. 215
11.6.2. Displaying Erosion on the Pipe Wall .................................................................................... 216
11.6.3. Creating Particle Tracks ....................................................................................................... 216
11.6.4. Creating a Particle Track Animation ..................................................................................... 217
11.6.5. Determining Minimum, Maximum, and Average Pressure Values .......................................... 218
11.6.6. Other Features ................................................................................................................... 219
12. Flow in a Catalytic Converter ............................................................................................................ 221
12.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 221
12.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 222
12.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 223
12.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 223
12.4.1. Importing the Meshes and CCL File ..................................................................................... 224
12.4.1.1. Importing the Required Expressions From a CCL File ................................................... 224
12.4.1.2. Importing the Housing Mesh ..................................................................................... 225
12.4.1.3. Importing the Pipe and Flange Mesh .......................................................................... 225
12.4.1.4. Creating a Second Pipe and Flange Mesh ................................................................... 226
12.4.1.5. Creating a Single Region for Both Pipe and Flange Meshes ......................................... 226
12.4.2. Creating the Fluid Domain .................................................................................................. 227
12.4.3. Creating the Porous Domain ............................................................................................... 228
12.4.4. Creating and Editing the Boundaries ................................................................................... 231
12.4.4.1. Creating the Inlet Boundary ....................................................................................... 231
12.4.4.2. Creating the Outlet Boundary .................................................................................... 231
12.4.4.3. Editing the Housing Default Boundary ....................................................................... 232
12.4.5. Creating the Domain Interfaces .......................................................................................... 233
12.4.6. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 234
12.4.7. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 235
12.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 235
12.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 235
12.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 236
12.6.1. Viewing the Mesh on a GGI Interface ................................................................................... 236
12.6.2. Creating User Locations ...................................................................................................... 237
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

ix

Tutorials
12.6.2.1. Creating a Slice Plane ................................................................................................. 237
12.6.2.2. Creating a User Surface .............................................................................................. 238
12.6.2.3. Creating a Polyline ..................................................................................................... 239
12.6.3. Creating Plots ..................................................................................................................... 240
12.6.3.1. Creating a Contour Plot of Pressure ............................................................................ 240
12.6.3.2. Creating a Vector Plot on the Slice Plane ..................................................................... 241
12.6.3.3. Creating a Chart of Pressure versus the Z Coordinate .................................................. 241
12.6.4. Exporting Polyline Data ...................................................................................................... 242
13. Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus ........................................................................................ 245
13.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 245
13.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 245
13.3. Background Theory ..................................................................................................................... 246
13.4. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 247
13.5. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 248
13.5.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 248
13.5.2. Creating the Fluid ............................................................................................................... 248
13.5.3. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 250
13.5.4. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 250
13.5.4.1. Wall Boundary for the Inner Pipe ................................................................................ 250
13.5.4.2. Symmetry Plane Boundary ......................................................................................... 251
13.5.5. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 252
13.5.6. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 253
13.5.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 253
13.6. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 254
13.7. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 254
14. Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage .......................................................................................................... 257
14.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 257
14.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 258
14.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 260
14.4. Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model ................................................... 261
14.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 261
14.4.1.1. Basic Settings ............................................................................................................ 261
14.4.1.2. Component Definition ............................................................................................... 262
14.4.1.3. Physics Definition ...................................................................................................... 263
14.4.1.4. Interface Definition .................................................................................................... 265
14.4.1.5. Boundary Definition .................................................................................................. 265
14.4.1.6. Final Operations ........................................................................................................ 265
14.4.1.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 265
14.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 266
14.4.2.1. Obtaining a Solution in Serial ..................................................................................... 266
14.4.2.2. Obtaining a Solution With Local Parallel ..................................................................... 266
14.4.2.3. Obtaining a Solution with Distributed Parallel ............................................................ 267
14.4.2.4. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ........................................................................... 267
14.4.2.4.1. Initializing Turbo-Post ........................................................................................ 267
14.4.2.4.2. Viewing Three Domain Passages ........................................................................ 268
14.4.2.4.3. Blade Loading Turbo Chart ................................................................................ 269
14.4.3. Simulating the Stage with the Exit Corrected Mass Flow Rate Boundary Condition ............... 269
14.4.3.1. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 271
14.4.3.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ..................................................... 271
14.4.4. Comparing the Two Cases Using CFD-Post .......................................................................... 272
14.5. Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model ......................................................... 274
14.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 274

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
14.5.1.1. Modifying the Physics Definition ................................................................................ 274
14.5.1.2. Setting Output Control .............................................................................................. 276
14.5.1.3. Modifying Execution Control ...................................................................................... 277
14.5.1.4. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 277
14.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 277
14.5.2.1. Serial Solution ........................................................................................................... 277
14.5.2.2. Parallel Solution ......................................................................................................... 278
14.5.2.3. Monitoring the Run ................................................................................................... 278
14.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 278
14.5.3.1. Initializing Turbo-Post ................................................................................................ 278
14.5.3.2. Displaying a Surface of Constant Span ........................................................................ 279
14.5.3.3. Using Multiple Turbo Viewports ................................................................................. 279
14.5.3.4. Creating a Turbo Surface at Mid-Span ......................................................................... 279
14.5.3.5. Setting up Instancing Transformations ....................................................................... 280
14.5.3.6. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator ...................................... 280
14.5.3.7. Further Postprocessing .............................................................................................. 282
15. Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube ......................................................................................................... 283
15.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 283
15.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 284
15.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 286
15.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 286
15.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 287
15.4.2. Creating a Multicomponent Fluid ........................................................................................ 287
15.4.2.1. Acid Properties .......................................................................................................... 287
15.4.2.2. Alkali Properties ......................................................................................................... 289
15.4.2.3. Reaction Product Properties ....................................................................................... 291
15.4.2.4. Fluid Properties ......................................................................................................... 292
15.4.3. Creating an Additional Variable to Model pH ....................................................................... 293
15.4.4. Formulating the Reaction and pH as Expressions ................................................................. 293
15.4.4.1. Stoichiometric Ratio .................................................................................................. 293
15.4.4.2. Reaction Source Terms ............................................................................................... 295
15.4.4.3. Calculating pH ........................................................................................................... 297
15.4.4.4. Loading the Expressions to Model the Reaction and pH .............................................. 298
15.4.5. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 299
15.4.6. Creating a Subdomain to Model the Chemical Reactions ..................................................... 301
15.4.7. Creating the Boundary Conditions ...................................................................................... 304
15.4.7.1. Water Inlet Boundary ................................................................................................. 304
15.4.7.2. Acid Inlet Boundary ................................................................................................... 305
15.4.7.3. Alkali Inlet Boundary .................................................................................................. 306
15.4.7.4. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 307
15.4.7.5. Symmetry Boundary .................................................................................................. 307
15.4.7.6. Default Wall Boundary ............................................................................................... 308
15.4.8. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 308
15.4.9. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 310
15.4.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 310
15.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 311
15.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 311
16. Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil ..................................................................................................... 313
16.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 313
16.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 314
16.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 315
16.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 315
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xi

Tutorials
16.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 316
16.4.2. Editing the Material Properties ............................................................................................ 316
16.4.3. Defining the Calcium Carbonate Deposit Material ............................................................... 317
16.4.4. Creating the Domains ......................................................................................................... 318
16.4.4.1. Creating a Fluid Domain ............................................................................................ 318
16.4.4.2. Creating a Solid Domain ............................................................................................ 319
16.4.5. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 320
16.4.5.1. Heating Coil Boundaries ............................................................................................. 320
16.4.5.2. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 321
16.4.5.3. Opening Boundary .................................................................................................... 321
16.4.6. Creating the Domain Interface ............................................................................................ 322
16.4.7. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 323
16.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 324
16.5. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager ....................................................................... 324
16.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 324
16.6.1. Heating Coil Temperature Range ......................................................................................... 324
16.6.2. Creating a Cylindrical Locator ............................................................................................. 325
16.6.2.1. Expression ................................................................................................................. 325
16.6.2.2. Variable ..................................................................................................................... 325
16.6.2.3. Isosurface of the variable ........................................................................................... 326
16.6.2.4. Creating a Temperature Profile Chart .......................................................................... 327
16.6.3. Specular Lighting ............................................................................................................... 328
16.6.4. Moving the Light Source ..................................................................................................... 328
16.7. Exporting the Results to ANSYS ................................................................................................... 328
16.7.1. Thermal Data ...................................................................................................................... 329
16.7.2. Mechanical Stresses ............................................................................................................ 329
17. Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel .................................................................................................. 331
17.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 331
17.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 332
17.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 333
17.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 334
17.4.1. Importing the Meshes ........................................................................................................ 334
17.4.1.1. Importing the Mixer Tank Mesh .................................................................................. 335
17.4.1.2. Importing the Impeller Mesh ...................................................................................... 335
17.4.1.3. Relocating the Impeller Mesh ..................................................................................... 336
17.4.1.4. Viewing the Mesh at the Tank Periodic Boundary ........................................................ 336
17.4.2. Creating the Domains ......................................................................................................... 336
17.4.2.1. Rotating Domain for the Impeller ............................................................................... 337
17.4.2.2. Stationary Domain for the Main Tank .......................................................................... 341
17.4.3. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 341
17.4.3.1. Air Inlet Boundary ...................................................................................................... 342
17.4.3.2. Degassing Outlet Boundary ....................................................................................... 343
17.4.3.3. Thin Surface for the Baffle .......................................................................................... 344
17.4.3.4. Wall Boundary for the Shaft ........................................................................................ 345
17.4.3.5. Required Boundary in the Impeller Domain ................................................................ 346
17.4.3.6. Modifying the Default Wall Boundary ......................................................................... 347
17.4.4. Creating the Domain Interfaces .......................................................................................... 348
17.4.4.1. Modeling the Blade Using a Domain Interface ............................................................ 348
17.4.4.2. Rotational Periodic Interfaces ..................................................................................... 350
17.4.4.3. Frozen Rotor Interfaces .............................................................................................. 351
17.4.5. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 353
17.4.6. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 355

xii

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
17.4.7. Adding Monitor Points ....................................................................................................... 356
17.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 356
17.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 357
17.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 357
17.6.1. Creating a Plane Locator ..................................................................................................... 357
17.6.2. Plotting Velocity ................................................................................................................. 358
17.6.3. Plotting Pressure Distribution ............................................................................................. 359
17.6.4. Plotting Volume Fractions ................................................................................................... 359
17.6.5. Plotting Shear Strain Rate and Shear Stress ......................................................................... 359
17.6.6. Calculating Torque and Power Requirements ...................................................................... 360
18. Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor ................................................................................................ 363
18.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 363
18.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 364
18.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 365
18.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 365
18.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 366
18.4.2. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 366
18.4.3. Creating the Boundary Conditions ...................................................................................... 370
18.4.3.1. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 370
18.4.3.2. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 371
18.4.3.3. Draft Tube Boundaries ............................................................................................... 372
18.4.3.4. Symmetry Plane Boundary ......................................................................................... 373
18.4.3.5. Modifying the Default Boundary ................................................................................ 373
18.4.4. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 374
18.4.5. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 377
18.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 378
18.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 379
18.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 379
18.6.1. Creating Water Velocity Vector Plots .................................................................................... 379
18.6.2. Creating Volume Fraction Plots ........................................................................................... 380
18.6.3. Displaying the Entire Airlift Reactor Geometry ..................................................................... 382
18.7. Further Discussion ...................................................................................................................... 382
19. Air Conditioning Simulation ............................................................................................................. 385
19.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 385
19.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 386
19.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 388
19.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 388
19.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 389
19.4.2. Importing CEL Expressions ................................................................................................. 389
19.4.3. Compiling the Fortran Subroutine for the Thermostat ......................................................... 390
19.4.4. Creating a User CEL Function for the Thermostat ................................................................. 391
19.4.5. Setting the Analysis Type .................................................................................................... 392
19.4.6. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 393
19.4.7. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 395
19.4.7.1. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 395
19.4.7.2. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 396
19.4.7.3. Window Boundary ..................................................................................................... 397
19.4.7.4. Default Wall Boundary ............................................................................................... 398
19.4.8. Closet Wall Interface ........................................................................................................... 399
19.4.9. Creating a Logical Expression for the Conditional GGI Interface ........................................... 400
19.4.10. Creating a Conditional GGI Interface for the Closet Door .................................................... 400
19.4.11. Creating Space Under the Closet Door .............................................................................. 402
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xiii

Tutorials
19.4.12. Setting Initial Values ......................................................................................................... 402
19.4.13. Setting Solver Control ....................................................................................................... 404
19.4.14. Setting Output Control ..................................................................................................... 405
19.4.15. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 406
19.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 407
19.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 407
19.6.1. Creating Graphics Objects .................................................................................................. 408
19.6.1.1. Creating Planes .......................................................................................................... 408
19.6.1.2. Creating an Isosurface ................................................................................................ 408
19.6.1.3. Adjusting the Legend ................................................................................................ 409
19.6.1.4. Creating a Point for the Thermometer ........................................................................ 409
19.6.1.5. Creating a Text Label .................................................................................................. 409
19.6.2. Creating an Animation ........................................................................................................ 410
19.7. Further Discussion ...................................................................................................................... 411
20. Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor ............................................................................... 413
20.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 413
20.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 414
20.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 416
20.4. Simulating the Can Combustor with Eddy Dissipation Combustion and P1 Radiation .................... 417
20.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 417
20.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh ................................................................................................... 417
20.4.1.2. Creating a Reacting Mixture ....................................................................................... 417
20.4.1.2.1. To create the variable composition mixture ........................................................ 418
20.4.1.3. Creating the Domain ................................................................................................. 418
20.4.1.4. Creating the Boundaries ............................................................................................ 420
20.4.1.4.1. Fuel Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................... 420
20.4.1.4.2. Bottom Air Inlet Boundary ................................................................................. 420
20.4.1.4.3. Side Air Inlet Boundary ...................................................................................... 421
20.4.1.4.4. Outlet Boundary ............................................................................................... 422
20.4.1.4.5. Vanes Boundary ................................................................................................ 422
20.4.1.4.6. Default Wall Boundary ....................................................................................... 423
20.4.1.5. Setting Initial Values ................................................................................................... 423
20.4.1.6. Setting Solver Control ................................................................................................ 425
20.4.1.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 426
20.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 426
20.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 427
20.4.3.1. Temperature Within the Domain ................................................................................ 427
20.4.3.2. The NO Concentration in the Combustor .................................................................... 427
20.4.3.3. Printing a Greyscale Graphic ....................................................................................... 428
20.4.3.4. Calculating NO Mass Fraction at the Outlet ................................................................. 428
20.4.3.5. Viewing Flow Field ..................................................................................................... 428
20.4.3.6. Viewing Radiation ...................................................................................................... 430
20.5. Simulating the Can Combustor with Laminar Flamelet Combustion and Discrete Transfer Radiation .................................................................................................................................................. 430
20.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 431
20.5.1.1. Removing Old Reactions ............................................................................................ 432
20.5.1.2. Importing a New Reaction ......................................................................................... 432
20.5.1.3. Generating the Flamelet Library ................................................................................. 433
20.5.1.4. Modifying the Reacting Mixture ................................................................................. 434
20.5.1.5. Modifying the Default Domain ................................................................................... 435
20.5.1.6. Modifying the Boundaries .......................................................................................... 436
20.5.1.6.1. Fuel Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................... 436

xiv

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
20.5.1.6.2. Bottom Air Inlet Boundary ................................................................................. 437
20.5.1.6.3. Side Air Inlet Boundary ...................................................................................... 437
20.5.1.7. Setting Initial Values ................................................................................................... 438
20.5.1.8. Setting Solver Control ................................................................................................ 438
20.5.1.9. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 439
20.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 439
20.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 440
20.5.3.1. Viewing Temperature within the Domain .................................................................... 440
20.5.3.2. Viewing the NO Concentration in the Combustor ....................................................... 440
20.5.3.3. Calculating NO Concentration .................................................................................... 440
20.5.3.4. Viewing CO Concentration ......................................................................................... 441
20.5.3.5. Calculating CO Mass Fraction at the Outlet ................................................................. 441
20.5.3.6. Further Postprocessing .............................................................................................. 441
21. Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil .......................................................................................................... 443
21.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 443
21.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 444
21.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 444
21.4. Simulating the Hydrofoil without Cavitation ................................................................................ 445
21.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 445
21.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh ................................................................................................... 445
21.4.1.2. Loading Materials ...................................................................................................... 445
21.4.1.3. Creating the Domain ................................................................................................. 446
21.4.1.4. Creating the Boundaries ............................................................................................ 447
21.4.1.4.1. Inlet Boundary .................................................................................................. 447
21.4.1.4.2. Outlet Boundary ............................................................................................... 448
21.4.1.4.3. Free Slip Wall Boundary ..................................................................................... 448
21.4.1.4.4. Symmetry Plane Boundaries .............................................................................. 448
21.4.1.5. Setting Initial Values ................................................................................................... 449
21.4.1.6. Setting Solver Control ................................................................................................ 450
21.4.1.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 451
21.4.2. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 451
21.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 452
21.4.3.1. Plotting Pressure Distribution Data ............................................................................. 452
21.4.3.2. Exporting Pressure Distribution Data .......................................................................... 455
21.4.3.3. Saving the Postprocessing State ................................................................................. 455
21.5. Simulating the Hydrofoil with Cavitation ...................................................................................... 455
21.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 455
21.5.1.1. Adding Cavitation ...................................................................................................... 456
21.5.1.2. Modifying Solver Control ........................................................................................... 457
21.5.1.3. Modifying Execution Control ...................................................................................... 457
21.5.1.4. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 457
21.5.2. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 458
21.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 458
22. Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver ................... 463
22.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 463
22.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 464
22.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 465
22.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 465
22.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 465
22.4.2. Defining a Transient Simulation .......................................................................................... 466
22.4.3. Editing the Domain ............................................................................................................ 467
22.4.4. Creating a Coordinate Frame .............................................................................................. 469
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xv

Tutorials
22.4.5. Creating a Rigid Body ......................................................................................................... 470
22.4.6. Creating the Subdomain ..................................................................................................... 472
22.4.7. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 472
22.4.7.1. Ball Boundary ............................................................................................................ 473
22.4.7.2. Symmetry Boundary .................................................................................................. 473
22.4.7.3. Vertical Valve Wall Boundary ....................................................................................... 474
22.4.7.4. Tank Opening Boundary ............................................................................................ 474
22.4.7.5. Valve Opening Boundary ........................................................................................... 475
22.4.8. Setting Initial Values ........................................................................................................... 476
22.4.9. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 476
22.4.10. Setting Output Control ..................................................................................................... 477
22.4.11. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 478
22.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 478
22.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 479
22.6.1. Creating a Slice Plane ......................................................................................................... 479
22.6.2. Creating Points and a Vector Plot ........................................................................................ 480
22.6.3. Creating an Animation ........................................................................................................ 481
23. Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction ............................................................. 485
23.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 485
23.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 486
23.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 487
23.4. Setting up the Project ................................................................................................................. 487
23.5. Adding Analysis Systems to the Project ........................................................................................ 487
23.6. Adding a New Material for the Project ......................................................................................... 489
23.7. Adding Geometry to the Project .................................................................................................. 490
23.8. Defining the Physics in the Mechanical Application ...................................................................... 492
23.8.1. Generating the Mesh for the Structural System ................................................................... 492
23.8.2. Assigning the Material to Geometry .................................................................................... 492
23.8.3. Basic Analysis Settings ........................................................................................................ 492
23.8.4. Inserting Loads ................................................................................................................... 493
23.8.4.1. Fixed Support ............................................................................................................ 493
23.8.4.2. Fluid-Solid Interface ................................................................................................... 493
23.8.4.3. Pressure Load ............................................................................................................ 494
23.9. Completing the Setup for the Structural System ........................................................................... 494
23.10. Creating Named Selections on the Fluid Body ............................................................................ 495
23.11. Generating the Mesh for the Fluid System .................................................................................. 496
23.12. Defining the Physics and ANSYS Multi-field Settings in ANSYS CFX-Pre ....................................... 496
23.12.1. Setting the Analysis Type .................................................................................................. 497
23.12.2. Creating the Fluid ............................................................................................................. 498
23.12.3. Creating the Domain ........................................................................................................ 499
23.12.4. Creating the Boundaries ................................................................................................... 501
23.12.4.1. Fluid Solid External Boundary ................................................................................... 501
23.12.4.2. Symmetry Boundaries .............................................................................................. 502
23.12.5. Setting Initial Values ......................................................................................................... 502
23.12.6. Setting Solver Control ....................................................................................................... 503
23.12.7. Setting Output Control ..................................................................................................... 505
23.13. Obtaining a Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ........................................................................ 506
23.14. Viewing Results in CFD-Post ...................................................................................................... 507
23.14.1. Plotting Results on the Solid ............................................................................................. 507
23.14.2. Creating an Animation ...................................................................................................... 509
24. Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer ..................................................................................................... 511
24.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 511

xvi

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
24.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 512
24.3. Setting Up ANSYS Workbench ..................................................................................................... 513
24.4. Creating the Project .................................................................................................................... 513
24.5. Creating the Geometry in DesignModeler .................................................................................... 514
24.5.1. Creating the Solid ............................................................................................................... 514
24.5.1.1. Setting Up the Grid .................................................................................................... 514
24.5.1.2. Creating the Basic Geometry ...................................................................................... 515
24.5.1.3. Revolving the Sketch ................................................................................................. 516
24.5.1.4. Create the First Inlet Pipe ........................................................................................... 517
24.5.1.4.1. Extrude the First Side-pipe ................................................................................ 518
24.5.1.4.2. Make the Solid Visible ....................................................................................... 518
24.5.1.5. Create the Second Inlet Pipe ...................................................................................... 519
24.5.1.6. Create Named Selections ........................................................................................... 520
24.6. Creating the Mesh ....................................................................................................................... 522
24.7. Setting up the Case with CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 522
24.8. Setting the Output Parameter in CFD-Post ................................................................................... 526
24.9. Investigating the Impact of Changing Design Parameters Manually .............................................. 527
24.10. Using Design of Experiments ..................................................................................................... 529
24.11. Viewing the Response Surface ................................................................................................... 530
24.12. Viewing the Optimization .......................................................................................................... 531
25. Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor ......................................... 533
25.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 533
25.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 534
25.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 536
25.4. Setting Up the Project ................................................................................................................. 536
25.5. Defining the Geometry Using ANSYS BladeGen ........................................................................... 536
25.5.1. Changing the Blade Design Properties ................................................................................ 537
25.5.2. Reviewing the Geometry .................................................................................................... 538
25.6. Defining the Mesh ...................................................................................................................... 539
25.6.1. Defining the CFD Mesh Using ANSYS TurboGrid .................................................................. 539
25.6.1.1. Defining the Shroud Tip ............................................................................................. 539
25.6.1.2. Defining the Topology ............................................................................................... 540
25.6.1.3. Specifying the Mesh Data Settings ............................................................................. 540
25.6.1.4. Generating the Mesh ................................................................................................. 541
25.6.2. Defining the Structural Mesh Using Mechanical Model ........................................................ 541
25.6.2.1. Specifying the Global Mesh Controls .......................................................................... 542
25.6.2.2. Defining the Virtual Topology ..................................................................................... 542
25.6.2.3. Specifying the Sizing Controls .................................................................................... 545
25.6.2.4. Specifying the Face Meshing Controls ........................................................................ 549
25.6.2.5. Specifying the Method Controls ................................................................................. 550
25.6.2.6. Generating the Mesh ................................................................................................. 551
25.7. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 551
25.7.1. Defining the Fluid Region Using Turbo Mode ...................................................................... 552
25.7.1.1. Configuring the Basic Settings ................................................................................... 552
25.7.1.2. Defining the Components .......................................................................................... 553
25.7.1.3. Defining the Physics .................................................................................................. 554
25.7.1.4. Specifying the Domain Interfaces ............................................................................... 555
25.7.1.5. Specifying the Boundaries ......................................................................................... 555
25.7.1.6. Setting the Final Operations ....................................................................................... 556
25.7.2. Defining the Solid Region Using General Mode ................................................................... 556
25.7.2.1. Specifying the Domains ............................................................................................. 556
25.7.2.2. Specifying the Boundaries ......................................................................................... 557
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xvii

Tutorials
25.7.2.3. Specifying the Domain Interfaces ............................................................................... 557
25.8. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 558
25.9. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 559
25.10. Simulating the Structural Performance Using Static Structural .................................................... 560
25.10.1. Simulating the Structural Performance without Rotational Velocity .................................... 561
25.10.1.1. Importing the Loads ................................................................................................ 561
25.10.1.2. Specifying the Supports ........................................................................................... 562
25.10.1.3. Obtaining the Solution ............................................................................................. 563
25.10.2. Simulating the Structural Performance with Rotational Velocity ......................................... 563
25.10.2.1. Specifying the Loads ................................................................................................ 563
25.10.2.2. Obtaining the Solution ............................................................................................. 564
26. Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions ................................................ 565
26.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 565
26.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 567
26.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 568
26.4. Simulating the Equilibrium Phase Change Case ........................................................................... 569
26.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 569
26.4.1.1. Basic Settings ............................................................................................................ 569
26.4.1.2. Component Definition ............................................................................................... 570
26.4.1.3. Physics Definition ...................................................................................................... 571
26.4.1.4. Interface Definition .................................................................................................... 572
26.4.1.5. Boundary Definition .................................................................................................. 573
26.4.1.6. Final Operations ........................................................................................................ 573
26.4.1.7. Defining the Properties of Water ................................................................................ 573
26.4.1.8. Modifications to Domain and Boundary Conditions .................................................... 576
26.4.1.9. Setting Initial Values ................................................................................................... 577
26.4.1.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ..................................................................... 578
26.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 579
26.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 579
26.4.3.1. Specifying Locators for Plots ...................................................................................... 579
26.4.3.2. Static Pressure and Mass Fraction Contour Plots ......................................................... 580
26.4.3.3. Static Temperature Contour Plots ............................................................................... 580
26.5. Simulating the Non-equilibrium Phase Change Case .................................................................... 581
26.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 581
26.5.1.1. Modifying the Domains ............................................................................................. 582
26.5.1.2. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 586
26.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 587
26.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 587
26.5.3.1. Specifying Locators for Plots ...................................................................................... 588
26.5.3.2. Supercooling Contour Plot ......................................................................................... 588
26.5.3.3. Nucleation Rate and Droplet Number Contour Plots ................................................... 588
26.5.3.4. Mass Fraction and Particle Diameter Contour Plots ..................................................... 589
26.5.3.5. Gas and Condensed Phase Static Temperature Contour Plots ...................................... 590
27. Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid ............................................................................. 593
27.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 593
27.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 593
27.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 595
27.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 595
27.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 595
27.4.2. Creating Expressions for Time Step and Total Time .............................................................. 596
27.4.3. Setting the Analysis Type .................................................................................................... 596
27.4.4. Creating the Domains ......................................................................................................... 597

xviii

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
27.4.4.1. Creating an Immersed Solid Domain .......................................................................... 597
27.4.4.2. Creating the Stationary Fluid Domain ......................................................................... 598
27.4.4.3. Creating the Rotating Fluid Domain ........................................................................... 601
27.4.5. Creating the Domain Interface ............................................................................................ 602
27.4.6. Creating Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................ 605
27.4.6.1. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 605
27.4.6.2. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 606
27.4.7. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 606
27.4.8. Setting Output Control ....................................................................................................... 607
27.4.9. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 608
27.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 609
27.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 610
27.6.1. Creating a Chart of Mass Flow versus Time .......................................................................... 610
27.6.2. Creating a Velocity Vector Plot ............................................................................................ 611
27.6.3. Changing the Appearance in Preparation for an Animation ................................................. 612
27.6.4. Creating a Keyframe Animation .......................................................................................... 614
28. Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump ........................................................................................ 617
28.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 617
28.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 617
28.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 619
28.4. Simulating the Pump with High Inlet Pressure .............................................................................. 619
28.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 619
28.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh ................................................................................................... 619
28.4.1.2. Loading Materials ...................................................................................................... 620
28.4.1.3. Creating the Domain ................................................................................................. 620
28.4.1.4. Creating the Boundaries ............................................................................................ 621
28.4.1.4.1. Inlet Boundary .................................................................................................. 621
28.4.1.4.2. Outlet Boundary ............................................................................................... 622
28.4.1.4.3. Wall Boundaries ................................................................................................ 622
28.4.1.5. Creating Domain Interfaces ........................................................................................ 623
28.4.1.5.1. Inblock to Passage Interface .............................................................................. 623
28.4.1.5.2. Passage to Outblock Interface ........................................................................... 624
28.4.1.6. Setting Initial Values ................................................................................................... 624
28.4.1.7. Setting Solver Controls .............................................................................................. 626
28.4.1.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 627
28.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 627
28.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 627
28.5. Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and High Inlet Pressure ....................................................... 628
28.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 628
28.5.1.1. Modifying the Domain and Boundary Conditions ....................................................... 628
28.5.1.2. Creating Expressions .................................................................................................. 631
28.5.1.3. Adding Monitor Points ............................................................................................... 631
28.5.1.4. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 632
28.5.2. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 632
28.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 633
28.6. Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and a Range of Inlet Pressures ............................................ 634
28.6.1. Writing CFX-Solver Input (.def ) Files for Lower Inlet Pressures .............................................. 634
28.6.2. Obtaining the Solutions using CFX-Solver Manager ............................................................. 635
28.6.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 635
28.6.3.1. Generating a Drop Curve ........................................................................................... 636
28.6.3.1.1. Creating a Table of the Head and NPSH Values ................................................... 636
28.6.3.1.2. Creating a Head-versus-NPSH Chart ................................................................... 636
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xix

Tutorials
28.6.3.1.3. Viewing the Drop Curve .................................................................................... 637
28.6.3.1.4. Creating a Head-versus-NPSH Chart (Optional Exercise) ..................................... 638
28.6.3.1.5. Viewing the Drop Curve .................................................................................... 640
28.6.3.2. Visualizing the Cavitation Regions (Optional Exercise) ................................................. 641
28.6.3.3. Restoring CFX run history and multi-configuration options ......................................... 642
29. Spray Dryer ........................................................................................................................................ 643
29.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 643
29.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 644
29.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 645
29.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 645
29.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 646
29.4.2. Importing the Evaporating CCL Drops Model Template ....................................................... 646
29.4.3. Editing the Domain ............................................................................................................ 647
29.4.4. Creating and Editing the Boundary Conditions .................................................................... 648
29.4.4.1. Water Nozzle Boundary .............................................................................................. 649
29.4.4.2. Air Inlet Boundary ...................................................................................................... 650
29.4.4.3. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 651
29.4.4.4. Domain 1 Default ...................................................................................................... 652
29.4.5. Creating a Domain Interface ............................................................................................... 652
29.4.6. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 653
29.4.7. Setting Output Control ....................................................................................................... 654
29.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 654
29.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 655
29.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 655
29.6.1. Displaying the Temperature Using a Contour Plot ................................................................ 655
29.6.2. Displaying the Water Mass Fraction Using a Contour Plot ..................................................... 656
29.6.3. Displaying the Liquid Water Averaged Mean Particle Diameter Using a Contour Plot ............ 656
29.6.4. Displaying the Liquid Water Averaged Temperature Using a Contour Plot ............................ 656
29.6.5. Displaying the Liquid Water Temperature Using Particle Tracking ......................................... 656
29.6.6. Displaying the Diameter of a Water Drop Using Particle Tracking ......................................... 657
30. Coal Combustion ............................................................................................................................... 659
30.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 659
30.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 659
30.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 661
30.4. Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide ................................. 662
30.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 662
30.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh ................................................................................................... 662
30.4.1.2. Importing the Coal Combustion Materials CCL File ...................................................... 662
30.4.1.3. Creating the Domain ................................................................................................. 664
30.4.1.4. Creating the Boundary Conditions ............................................................................. 668
30.4.1.4.1. Coal Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................... 668
30.4.1.4.2. Air Inlet Boundary ............................................................................................. 671
30.4.1.4.3. Outlet Boundary ............................................................................................... 672
30.4.1.4.4. Coal Gun No-Slip Wall Boundary ........................................................................ 673
30.4.1.4.5. Coal Inlet No-Slip Wall Boundary ........................................................................ 673
30.4.1.4.6. Air Inlet No-Slip Wall Boundary .......................................................................... 674
30.4.1.4.7. Furnace No-Slip Wall Boundary .......................................................................... 675
30.4.1.4.8. Quarl No-Slip Wall Boundary .............................................................................. 675
30.4.1.4.9. Symmetry Plane Boundaries .............................................................................. 676
30.4.1.5. Setting Solver Control ................................................................................................ 676
30.4.1.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 678
30.4.2. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 679

xx

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
30.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 679
30.4.3.1. Displaying the Temperature on a Symmetry Plane ...................................................... 679
30.4.3.2. Displaying the Water Mass Fraction ............................................................................ 680
30.4.3.3. Displaying the Radiation Intensity .............................................................................. 680
30.4.3.4. Displaying the Temperature of the Fuel Particles ......................................................... 680
30.4.3.5. Displaying the Ash Mass Fraction using Particle Tracking ............................................ 680
30.5. Simulating the Coal Combustion with Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide ...................................... 681
30.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 681
30.5.1.1. Editing the Boundary Conditions ................................................................................ 681
30.5.1.1.1. Air Inlet Boundary ............................................................................................. 682
30.5.1.1.2. Outlet Boundary ............................................................................................... 682
30.5.1.1.3. Deleting the Symmetry Plane Boundaries .......................................................... 683
30.5.1.2. Creating a Domain Interface ...................................................................................... 683
30.5.1.3. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 683
30.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 683
30.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 684
30.5.3.1. Displaying the Temperature on a Periodic Interface .................................................... 684
30.5.3.2. Displaying the Water Mass Fraction ............................................................................ 684
30.5.3.3. Displaying the Radiation Intensity .............................................................................. 684
30.5.3.4. Displaying the Temperature using Particle Tracking .................................................... 685
30.5.3.5. Displaying the Ash Mass Fraction using Particle Tracking ............................................ 685
30.6. Simulating the Coal Combustion with Swirl and with Nitrogen Oxide ........................................... 685
30.6.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 685
30.6.1.1. Editing the Domain .................................................................................................... 686
30.6.1.2. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 687
30.6.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 687
30.6.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 688
31. Steam Jet ........................................................................................................................................... 689
31.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 689
31.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 690
31.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 691
31.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ................................................................................................. 691
31.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 691
31.4.2. Importing the Steam Jet CCL .............................................................................................. 692
31.4.3. Creating a Steady-State Analysis ......................................................................................... 693
31.4.4. Creating and Loading Materials .......................................................................................... 693
31.4.4.1. Loading the Steam3v, Steam3l, and Steam3vl Materials ............................................... 694
31.4.4.2. Creating the Gas Mixture Material .............................................................................. 694
31.4.4.3. Creating the Liquid Mixture Material .......................................................................... 695
31.4.5. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 695
31.4.6. Creating Subdomains ......................................................................................................... 699
31.4.6.1. Gas-to-Liquid Source Subdomain ............................................................................... 699
31.4.6.2. Liquid-to-Gas Source Subdomain ............................................................................... 705
31.4.7. Creating Boundaries ........................................................................................................... 710
31.4.7.1. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 711
31.4.7.2. Opening Boundary for the Outside Edges ................................................................... 712
31.4.7.3. Creating the Symmetry Plane Boundaries ................................................................... 714
31.4.8. Creating a Time Step Expression ......................................................................................... 715
31.4.9. Setting Solver Control ......................................................................................................... 716
31.4.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 717
31.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager ...................................................................... 717
31.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post ............................................................................................. 717
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xxi

Tutorials
31.6.1. Displaying the Steam Molar Fraction ................................................................................... 717
31.6.2. Displaying the Gas-to-Liquid Mass Transfer Rate .................................................................. 718
31.6.3. Displaying the Liquid-to-Gas Mass Transfer Rate .................................................................. 718
31.6.4. Displaying the Gas-to-Liquid and Liquid-to-Gas Phase Transfer Rates in Synchronous
Views ........................................................................................................................................... 718
31.6.5. Creating a Chart to Plot the False Time Step Along a Line ..................................................... 719
32. Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver ........................................................................... 721
32.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 721
32.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 722
32.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 723
32.4. Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion .................................................................. 724
32.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 724
32.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh ................................................................................................... 724
32.4.1.2. Importing the Required Expressions From a CCL File ................................................... 725
32.4.1.3. Defining a Transient Simulation .................................................................................. 725
32.4.1.4. Editing the Domain .................................................................................................... 727
32.4.1.5. Creating a Rigid Body ................................................................................................. 730
32.4.1.6. Creating the Boundary Conditions ............................................................................. 733
32.4.1.6.1. Symmetry Boundaries ....................................................................................... 733
32.4.1.6.2. Wall Boundaries ................................................................................................ 734
32.4.1.6.3. Opening Boundary ............................................................................................ 736
32.4.1.7. Setting Initial Values ................................................................................................... 737
32.4.1.8. Setting the Solver Control .......................................................................................... 740
32.4.1.9. Setting the Output Control ........................................................................................ 741
32.4.1.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ..................................................................... 743
32.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 743
32.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 744
32.4.3.1. Creating a Contour Plot .............................................................................................. 744
32.4.3.2. Creating a Keyframe Animation .................................................................................. 745
32.4.3.3. Calculating the Minimum Mesh Face Angle ................................................................ 747
32.5. Simulating the Buoy with Decoupled Mesh Motion ...................................................................... 747
32.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre ......................................................................................... 747
32.5.1.1. Creating a Subdomain ............................................................................................... 748
32.5.1.2. Editing the Domain Interfaces .................................................................................... 749
32.5.1.3. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ....................................................................... 750
32.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager .............................................................. 750
32.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post .................................................................................... 751
32.5.3.1. Loading a Contour Plot from the State File .................................................................. 751
32.5.3.2. Creating a Keyframe Animation .................................................................................. 751
32.5.3.3. Calculating the Minimum Mesh Face Angle ................................................................ 752
32.6. Comparing the Two Cases Using CFD-Post ................................................................................... 753
33. Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case ............................................................ 755
33.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 755
33.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 755
33.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 757
33.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre ....................................................................................... 758
33.4.1. Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................... 758
33.4.2. Components Definition ...................................................................................................... 758
33.4.3. Physics Definition ............................................................................................................... 759
33.4.4. Modifying the Fluid Model Settings .................................................................................... 760
33.4.5. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions ............................................................................... 760
33.4.6. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions ................................................................. 761

xxii

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
33.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 762
33.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case .............................................................................. 762
33.6. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre ........................................................................... 762
33.6.1. Opening the Existing Case .................................................................................................. 763
33.6.2. Modifying the Analysis Type ............................................................................................... 763
33.6.3. Creating the Local Rotating Coordinate Frame .................................................................... 763
33.6.4. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 764
33.6.5. Applying the Local Rotating Frame to the Inlet Boundary .................................................... 766
33.6.6. Setting the Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ..................................................... 766
33.6.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 768
33.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 769
33.8. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post .................................................................. 770
33.8.1. Creating a Turbo Surface ..................................................................................................... 770
33.8.2. Creating a Contour Plot ...................................................................................................... 770
33.8.3. Animating Temperature ...................................................................................................... 770
34. Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case ........................................................ 773
34.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 773
34.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 773
34.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 775
34.4. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre ........................................................................... 775
34.4.1. Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................... 776
34.4.2. Components Definition ...................................................................................................... 776
34.4.3. Physics Definition ............................................................................................................... 777
34.4.4. Disturbance Definition ....................................................................................................... 778
34.4.5. Modifying the Fluid Model Settings .................................................................................... 779
34.4.6. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions ............................................................................... 779
34.4.7. Creating the Local Rotating Coordinate Frame .................................................................... 780
34.4.8. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions ................................................................. 781
34.4.9. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 782
34.4.10. Setting the Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ................................................... 783
34.4.11. Setting the Execution Control ........................................................................................... 785
34.4.12. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 787
34.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 788
34.6. Viewing the Fourier Transformation Results in CFD-Post ............................................................... 788
34.6.1. Creating a Turbo Surface ..................................................................................................... 789
34.6.2. Creating a Contour Plot ...................................................................................................... 789
34.6.3. Animating Temperature ...................................................................................................... 789
35. Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case ...................................................... 791
35.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 791
35.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 791
35.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 793
35.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre ....................................................................................... 793
35.4.1. Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................... 794
35.4.2. Components Definition ...................................................................................................... 794
35.4.3. Physics Definition ............................................................................................................... 795
35.4.4. Additional Fluid Model Settings .......................................................................................... 796
35.4.5. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions ............................................................................... 796
35.4.6. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions ................................................................. 797
35.4.7. Visualizing the Profile Boundary Value ................................................................................. 799
35.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 799
35.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case .............................................................................. 799
35.6. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre ........................................................................... 800
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xxiii

Tutorials
35.6.1. Opening the Existing Case .................................................................................................. 800
35.6.2. Modifying the Analysis Type ............................................................................................... 800
35.6.3. Modifying the Rotorstator Interface .................................................................................. 801
35.6.4. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 801
35.6.5. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ........................................................... 802
35.6.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 804
35.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 805
35.8. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post .................................................................. 806
35.8.1. Creating a Turbo Surface ..................................................................................................... 806
35.8.2. Creating a Vector Plot ......................................................................................................... 806
35.8.3. Creating a Contour Plot ...................................................................................................... 807
35.8.4. Creating a Variable Time Chart ............................................................................................ 807
35.8.5. Setting up Data Instancing Transformations ........................................................................ 809
35.8.6. Setting up Graphical Instancing Transformations ................................................................. 809
35.8.7. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator ............................................... 810
36. Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer ...... 813
36.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 813
36.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 814
36.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 815
36.4. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer in CFX-Pre .............................. 816
36.4.1. Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................... 816
36.4.2. Components Definition ...................................................................................................... 817
36.4.3. Physics Definition ............................................................................................................... 817
36.4.4. Additional Fluid Model Settings .......................................................................................... 819
36.4.5. Importing the Solid Blade Mesh File .................................................................................... 819
36.4.6. Creating the Solid Blade Domain ........................................................................................ 820
36.4.7. Modifying the Boundary Conditions ................................................................................... 821
36.4.7.1. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions ...................................................................... 821
36.4.7.2. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions ........................................................ 822
36.4.7.3. Visualizing the Profile Boundary Value ........................................................................ 824
36.4.7.4. Creating the Blade Base Boundary .............................................................................. 824
36.4.8. Creating the Conjugate Heat Transfer Interface ................................................................... 824
36.4.9. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 825
36.4.10. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ......................................................... 826
36.4.11. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 828
36.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 829
36.6. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post .................................................................. 830
36.6.1. Creating a Slice Plane ......................................................................................................... 831
36.6.2. Creating a Contour Plot ...................................................................................................... 831
36.6.3. Creating a Variable Time Chart ............................................................................................ 832
36.6.4. Setting up Data Instancing Transformations ........................................................................ 833
37. Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case .................................................. 835
37.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 835
37.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 836
37.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 837
37.4. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre ........................................................................... 838
37.4.1. Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................... 838
37.4.2. Components Definition ...................................................................................................... 839
37.4.3. Physics Definition ............................................................................................................... 840
37.4.4. Disturbance Definition ....................................................................................................... 841
37.4.5. Additional Fluid Model Settings .......................................................................................... 842
37.4.6. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions ............................................................................... 842

xxiv

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Tutorials
37.4.7. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions ................................................................. 843
37.4.8. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 844
37.4.9. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ........................................................... 845
37.4.10. Setting the Execution Control ........................................................................................... 847
37.4.11. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File .............................................................................. 849
37.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 849
37.5.1. Confirming Convergence Using Derived Variables ............................................................... 850
37.6. Viewing the Fourier Transformation Results in CFD-Post ............................................................... 852
37.6.1. Creating a Turbo Surface ..................................................................................................... 852
37.6.2. Creating a Vector Plot ......................................................................................................... 853
37.6.3. Creating a Contour Plot ...................................................................................................... 854
37.6.4. Creating a Variable Time Chart ............................................................................................ 854
37.6.5. Setting up Data Instancing Transformations ........................................................................ 855
37.6.6. Setting up Graphical Instancing Transformations ................................................................. 856
37.6.7. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator ............................................... 856
38. Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case ................................................................. 859
38.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 859
38.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 859
38.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 862
38.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre ....................................................................................... 862
38.4.1. Importing the Mesh ............................................................................................................ 862
38.4.2. Expanding Profile Data ....................................................................................................... 863
38.4.3. Initializing Profile Data ........................................................................................................ 864
38.4.4. Creating the Domain .......................................................................................................... 864
38.4.5. Creating the Boundaries ..................................................................................................... 866
38.4.5.1. Inlet Boundary ........................................................................................................... 866
38.4.5.2. Outlet Boundary ........................................................................................................ 868
38.4.5.3. Wall Boundaries ......................................................................................................... 869
38.4.6. Creating Domain Interfaces ................................................................................................ 871
38.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 874
38.5. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre ........................................................................... 874
38.5.1. Opening the Existing Case .................................................................................................. 875
38.5.2. Modifying the Analysis Type ............................................................................................... 875
38.5.3. Modifying the Domain ........................................................................................................ 875
38.5.4. Creating Expressions for Frequency and Scaling Factor ........................................................ 876
38.5.5. Modifying the R1 Blade Boundary ....................................................................................... 876
38.5.6. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 879
38.5.7. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ........................................................... 880
38.5.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 885
38.6. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case .............................................................................. 885
38.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 886
38.8. Viewing the Fourier Transformation Blade Flutter Results in CFD-Post ........................................... 887
38.8.1. Displaying Total Wall Work on the Blade .............................................................................. 887
38.8.2. Creating a Contour Plot for Total Wall Work on the Blade ...................................................... 888
38.8.3. Creating an Animation for Total Wall Work on the Blade ....................................................... 888
39. Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case ...................................... 891
39.1. Tutorial Features ......................................................................................................................... 891
39.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve ................................................................................................ 891
39.3. Preparing the Working Directory ................................................................................................. 893
39.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre ....................................................................................... 893
39.4.1. Basic Settings ..................................................................................................................... 894
39.4.2. Components Definition ...................................................................................................... 894
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

xxv

Tutorials
39.4.3. Physics Definition ............................................................................................................... 895
39.4.4. Additional Fluid Model Settings .......................................................................................... 896
39.4.5. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions ............................................................................... 897
39.4.6. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions ................................................................. 897
39.4.7. Visualizing the Profile Boundary Value ................................................................................. 899
39.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 899
39.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case .............................................................................. 900
39.6. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre ........................................................................... 900
39.6.1. Opening the Existing Case .................................................................................................. 900
39.6.2. Modifying the Analysis Type ............................................................................................... 901
39.6.3. Modifying the Rotorstator Interfaces ................................................................................. 901
39.6.4. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model .............................................................................. 902
39.6.5. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points ........................................................... 903
39.6.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File ................................................................................ 906
39.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case .................................................................. 906
39.8. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post .................................................................. 907
39.8.1. Creating a Turbo Surface ..................................................................................................... 907
39.8.2. Creating a Vector Plot ......................................................................................................... 908
39.8.3. Creating a Blade-to-Blade Plot ............................................................................................ 909
39.8.4. Creating a Chart of Force on a Rotor Blade versus Time ........................................................ 909
39.8.5. Creating a Chart of a Solution Monitor and Fourier Coefficient Data for Pressure versus
Time ............................................................................................................................................. 910
39.8.6. Setting up Data Instancing Transformations ........................................................................ 912
39.8.7. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator ............................................... 913

xxvi

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 1: Introduction to the ANSYS CFX Tutorials

The CFX tutorials are designed to introduce general techniques used in CFX and to provide tips on
advanced modeling.
The initial tutorials introduce general principles used in CFX, including setting up the physical models,
running CFX-Solver and visualizing the results in CFD-Post; the later tutorials highlight specialized features
of CFX.
This manual contains the following tutorials:
Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 9) simulates a static mixer consisting
of two inlet pipes delivering water into a mixing vessel; the water exits through an outlet pipe. A general
workflow is established for analyzing the flow of fluid into and out of a mixer.
Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench (p. 41) simulates the previous tutorial using ANSYS
Workbench.
Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh) (p. 71) uses a refined mesh to obtain a better solution to the Static
Mixer problem created in the first tutorial.
Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe (p. 89) describes the general approach taken when working with an
existing mesh.
Flow from a Circular Vent (p. 105) simulates a chimney stack releasing smoke that is dispersed into the atmosphere with an oncoming side wind.
Flow Around a Blunt Body (p. 127) models the behavior of fluid flow around a generic vehicle body.
Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity (p. 149) models a buoyancy-driven flow that requires the inclusion of
gravitational effects.
Free Surface Flow Over a Bump (p. 163) demonstrates the simulation of a free surface flow in which the
bottom of the channel is interrupted by a semicircular bump.
Supersonic Flow Over a Wing (p. 185) simulates supersonic flow over a symmetric NACA0012 airfoil at an
angle of attack of 0.
Flow Through a Butterfly Valve (p. 197) investigates the detailed flow pattern around a valve to better understand why flow losses occur.
Flow in a Catalytic Converter (p. 221) models a catalytic converter in order to determine the pressure drop
and heat transfer through it.
Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus (p. 245) simulates a shear-thickening liquid rotating in a 2D eccentric
annular pipe gap.
Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage (p. 257) sets up a transient calculation of an axial turbine stage.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Introduction to the ANSYS CFX Tutorials

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube (p. 283) models basic reacting flows using a multicomponent fluid and CEL
expressions.
Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil (p. 313) models the transfer of thermal energy from an electrically-heated
solid copper coil to the water flowing around it.
Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel (p. 331) simulates the mixing of water and air in a mixing vessel.
Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor (p. 363)demonstrates the Eulerian-Eulerian multiphase model by simulating an airlift reactor (a tall, gas-liquid contacting vessel used in processes where gas absorption is important).
Air Conditioning Simulation (p. 385) simulates a room with a thermostat-controlled air conditioner.
Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor (p. 413) gives a qualitative impression of the flow and temperature distributions inside a can combustor that burns methane in air.
Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil (p. 443) demonstrates cavitation in the flow of water around a hydrofoil by
modeling a thin slice of the hydrofoil and using two symmetry boundary conditions.
Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver (p. 463) uses an example
of a ball check valve to demonstrate both two-way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) between a ball and a
fluid, as well as the mesh-deformation capabilities of ANSYS CFX.
Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (p. 485) uses an oscillating plate to simulate a twoway Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) in ANSYS Workbench.
Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer (p. 511) shows how to use Design Points and DesignXplorer to optimize
the static mixer first shown in Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 9).
Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor (p. 533) simulates the aerodynamic
and structural performance of a centrifugal compressor.
Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions (p. 565) uses an axial turbine to demonstrate
setting up and executing equilibrium and non-equilibrium steam calculations using the IAPWS water database
for properties.
Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid (p. 593) simulates a gear pump that drives a flow of water.
Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump (p. 617) uses a simple pump to illustrate the basic concepts of
setting up, running, and postprocessing a cavitation problem.
Spray Dryer (p. 643) models the way in which water drops are evaporated by a hot air flow.
Coal Combustion (p. 659) models coal combustion and radiation in a furnace.
Steam Jet (p. 689) simulates a high-speed wet steam jet into air.
Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver (p. 721) models the interaction between a rigid body
(represented by a buoy) and two fluids (air and water).
Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case (p. 755) sets up a transient blade row calculation
to model an inlet disturbance (frozen gust) in an axial turbine using the Time Transformation model.
Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case (p. 773) sets up a transient blade row calculation
to model an inlet disturbance (frozen gust) in an axial turbine using the Fourier Transformation model.
2

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode
Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case (p. 791) sets up a transient blade row calculation
using the Time Transformation model.
Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer (p. 813) sets up
a transient blade row calculation with conjugate heat transfer using the Time Transformation model.
Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case (p. 835) sets up a transient blade row calculation using the Fourier Transformation model.
Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case (p. 859) sets up a transient blade row simulation using
the Fourier Transformation model as part of blade flutter modeling.
Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case (p. 891) sets up a transient blade
row calculation with a multistage machine using the Time Transformation model.
You should review the following topics before attempting to start a tutorial for the first time:
1.1. Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode
1.2. Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench
1.3. Playing a Session File
1.4. Changing the Display Colors
1.5. Editor Buttons
1.6. Using Help

1.1. Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Standalone Mode
Before you start CFX-Pre, CFX-Solver Manager, or CFD-Post, set the working directory. The procedure
for setting the working directory and starting ANSYS CFX in stand-alone is listed below:
1.

Start the ANSYS CFX Launcher.

You can start the launcher in any of the following ways:
On Windows:
From the Start menu, select All Programs > ANSYS 17.0 > Fluid Dynamics > CFX 17.0.
In a DOS window that has its path set up correctly to run CFX, enter cfx5 (otherwise, you will need
to type the full pathname of the cfx5 command).
On Linux, enter cfx5 in a terminal window that has its path set up to run CFX.

2.

Specify the Working Directory in the launcher window.

3.

Click the CFX-Pre 17.0 button.

4.

If you were directed here at some point during a tutorial, return to that location.

Note
All tutorials assume that the CFX run history and multi-configuration options, under the
Load Results File dialog box in CFD-Post, is set to Load only the last results.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Introduction to the ANSYS CFX Tutorials

1.2. Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench

Most ANSYS CFX tutorials are written to work in stand-alone mode. This section includes the steps required to run these tutorials in ANSYS Workbench:
1.2.1. Setting Up the Project
1.2.2. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File
1.2.3. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
1.2.4. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post
1.2.5. Creating CFX Component Systems for Multiple Simulations
1.2.6. Closing the Applications

Tip
You may find it useful to open the ANSYS CFX help from the ANSYS CFX Launcher (which
does not take up a license).

1.2.1. Setting Up the Project

1.

Start ANSYS Workbench.

To launch ANSYS Workbench on Windows, click the Start menu, then select All Programs > ANSYS
17.0 > Workbench 17.0.
To launch ANSYS Workbench on Linux, open a command line interface, type the path to runwb2 (for
example, ~/ansys_inc/v170/Framework/bin/Linux64/runwb2), then press Enter.

2.

From the menu bar, click File > Save As and specify a name and directory for the project file, then click
Save.
The directory you choose will be referred to as the working directory.

3.

In the Toolbox pane, open Component Systems and double-click CFX. A CFX system opens in the Project
Schematic.

Note
You use a CFX component system because you are starting with a mesh. If you want
to create the geometry and mesh, you will start with a Fluid Flow (CFX) system.

4.

Type in the new name, such as System 1, to replace the highlighted text below the system.
Alternatively, you can right-click the first cell in the system and select Rename. The name will be
highlighted. Now you can change the highlighted text by typing in the new name.

5.

In the Project Schematic, right-click the Setup cell and select Edit to launch CFX-Pre.

6.

Continue from the section of the tutorial that provides instructions for defining the case using CFX-Pre.
The section is typically named Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench

1.2.2. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

When running ANSYS CFX within ANSYS Workbench, no action is required for this section of the tutorial.
The required files are automatically transferred between the cells within the CFX component system.
Continue from Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 5).

1.2.3. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Once the simulation setup is complete, the Solution cell prompts you to refresh it. To refresh that cell:

Right-click the Solution cell and select Refresh.

Note
If the Solution cell displays a prompt to perform an update, ignore it and proceed to
the next step.

To obtain a solution, you need to launch the CFX-Solver Manager and subsequently use it to start the
solver:
1.

Right-click the Solution cell and select Edit.

The CFX-Solver Manager appears with the Define Run dialog box displayed.

2.

Continue from the Obtaining a Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager section of the tutorial.

1.2.4. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

When CFX-Solver has finished, a completion message appears in a dialog box. Click OK.
Alternatively, a message saying This run of the ANSYS CFX-Solver has finished is
displayed in the final line of the *.out file in the CFX-Solver Manager.
Once CFX-Solver has finished, you can use CFD-Post to review the finished results. At this point, the
Results cell in ANSYS Workbench prompts you to refresh:
1.

Right-click the Results cell and select Refresh.

2.

When the refresh is complete, right-click the Results cell and select Edit to open CFD-Post.

3.

Continue from the Viewing the Results in CFD-Post section of the tutorial.

If this is the final section of your tutorial, continue from Closing the Applications (p. 6). If you are
running ANSYS CFX tutorials with a sequence of multiple simulations, continue from Creating CFX
Component Systems for Multiple Simulations (p. 5).

1.2.5. Creating CFX Component Systems for Multiple Simulations

Now that you have set the physics in the initial state, you will duplicate the CFX component system
created earlier and edit the physics in the new system. To duplicate the existing CFX component system:
1.

In the ANSYS Workbench Project Schematic, right-click the first cell in System 1 and select Duplicate.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Introduction to the ANSYS CFX Tutorials

A new system named Copy of System 1 will appear in the Project Schematic.
2.

Type in the new name System 2 to replace the highlighted text below the system.

3.

Click the Solution cell of System 1 and drag it to the Solution cell of System 2.
You will now see a line, indicating a transfer connection, going from Solution cell of System 1
to the Solution cell of System 2.

4.

Once you have set up the new CFX component system, continue from Step 5 of Setting Up the Project (p. 4).

Note
In the tutorial, ignore the steps that tell you to set the initial values file in the Define
Run dialog box for CFX-Solver Manager. Dragging the solution cell between systems
automatically sets the initialization options in CFX-Solver Manager.

1.2.6. Closing the Applications

Close ANSYS Workbench (and the applications it launched) by selecting File > Exit from ANSYS Workbench. ANSYS Workbench prompts you to save all your project files.

1.3. Playing a Session File

Every tutorial involves instructions for setting up one or more simulations in CFX-Pre. If you want to
skip past those instructions and have CFX-Pre set up a simulation automatically, you can run the corresponding session file.
To play a tutorial session file:
1.

If required, launch CFX-Pre.

2.

Select Session > Play Session.

3.

Select the session file (*.pre) for the simulation.

4.

Click Open.

5.

If an Information dialog box appears, click OK.

CFX-Pre writes a CFX-Solver input file (*.def) in the directory that is set as your working directory.
In CFX-Pre, select File > Quit.

6.

On the ANSYS CFX-17.0 Launcher click CFX-Solver Manager 17.0.

7.

On the CFX-Solver Manager menu, select File > Define Run.

The Define Run dialog box appears.

8.

On the Define Run dialog box, click Browse

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Using Help
9.

In the CFX-Solver File dialog box that appears, choose the *.def file and click Open.

10. If you were directed here at some point during a tutorial, return to that location.
The tutorial input files (which include tutorial session files) can be downloaded from the ANSYS Customer
Portal.
Session files and tutorial session files can be played only in ANSYS CFX stand-alone, not in ANSYS
Workbench. Some tutorials have more than one tutorial session file; each covers a particular set of CFXPre setup instructions.
Playing a session file may change the default settings under Case Options > General these
changes will be retained until the case is closed. To override these changes (to Automatic Default
Domain and Automatic Default Interfaces, for example) the settings must be changed from the
Outline tree view under Case Options > General rather than from the global options (Edit >
Options). Changes made to the global options are persistent and will not take effect until a new case
is opened.

1.4. Changing the Display Colors

If viewing objects in ANSYS CFX becomes difficult due to contrast with the background, you can change
the colors for improved viewing. The color options are set in different places, depending on how you
run CFX:
1.

Select Edit > Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

2.

Adjust the color settings under CFX-Pre > Graphics Style (for CFX-Pre) or CFD-Post > Viewer
(for CFD-Post).

3.

Click OK.

4.

If you were directed here at some point during a tutorial, return to that location.

1.5. Editor Buttons

The ANSYS CFX interface uses editors to enter the data required to set up and post-process a simulation.
The editors have standard buttons, which are described next:
Apply applies the information contained within all the tabs of an editor.
OK is the same as Apply, except that the editor automatically closes.
Cancel and Close both close the editor without applying or saving any changes.
Reset returns the settings for the object to those stored in the database for all the tabs. The settings are
stored in the database each time the Apply button is clicked.
Defaults restores the system default settings for all the tabs of the edited object.

1.6. Using Help

To open the ANSYS Help Viewer, select Help > Contents.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Introduction to the ANSYS CFX Tutorials

Context-sensitive help is provided for many of the details views and other parts of the interface. To invoke
the context-sensitive help for a particular details view or other feature, ensure that the window is active,
place the mouse pointer over the feature, and press F1. Not every area of the interface supports contextsensitive help.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 2: Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in

Stand-alone Mode
This tutorial includes:
2.1.Tutorial Features
2.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
2.3. Preparing the Working Directory
2.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
2.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
2.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post
This tutorial simulates a static mixer consisting of two inlet pipes delivering water into a mixing vessel;
the water exits through an outlet pipe. A general workflow is established for analyzing the flow of fluid
into and out of a mixer.

2.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using Quick Setup mode in CFX-Pre to set up a problem.
Using CFX-Solver Manager to obtain a solution.
Modifying the outline plot in CFD-Post.
Using streamlines in CFD-Post to trace the flow field from a point.
Viewing temperature using colored planes and contours in CFD-Post.
Creating an animation and saving it as a movie file.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Quick Setup Wizard

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

Component

Feature

Details

CFD-Post

Animation

Keyframe

Plots

Contour
Outline Plot (Wireframe)
Point
Slice Plane
Streamline

2.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial simulates a static mixer consisting of two inlet pipes delivering water into a mixing vessel;
the water exits through an outlet pipe. A general workflow is established for analyzing the flow of fluid
into and out of a mixer.
Water enters through both pipes at the same rate but at different temperatures. The first entry is at a
rate of 2 m/s and a temperature of 315 K and the second entry is at a rate of 2 m/s at a temperature
of 285 K. The radius of the mixer is 2 m.
Your goal in this tutorial is to understand how to use CFX to determine the speed and temperature of
the water when it exits the static mixer.
Figure 2.1: Static Mixer with 2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe

If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

10

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

StaticMixerMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

2.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Because you are starting with an existing mesh, you can immediately use CFX-Pre to define the simulation.
This is how CFX-Pre will look with the imported mesh:

The left pane of CFX-Pre displays the Outline workspace.

The tutorial follows this general workflow for Quick Setup mode in CFX-Pre:
2.4.1. Starting Quick Setup Mode
2.4.2. Setting the Physics Definition
2.4.3. Importing a Mesh

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

11

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

2.4.4. Using the Viewer
2.4.5. Defining Model Data
2.4.6. Defining Boundaries
2.4.7. Setting Boundary Data
2.4.8. Setting Flow Specification
2.4.9. Setting Temperature Specification
2.4.10. Reviewing the Boundary Condition Definitions
2.4.11. Creating the Second Inlet Boundary Definition
2.4.12. Creating the Outlet Boundary Definition
2.4.13. Moving to General Mode
2.4.14. Setting Solver Control
2.4.15. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File
2.4.16. Playing the Session File and Starting CFX-Solver Manager
You can optionally skip past the steps for setting up the simulation in CFX-Pre. If you want to set up
the case automatically, then proceed to Playing the Session File and Starting CFX-Solver Manager (p. 18).

2.4.1. Starting Quick Setup Mode

Quick Setup mode provides a simple wizard-like interface for setting up simple cases. This is useful for
getting familiar with the basic elements of a CFD problem setup. This section describes using Quick
Setup mode to develop a simulation in CFX-Pre.
1.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

The New Case File dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select Quick Setup and click OK.

Note
If this is the first time you are running this software, a message box will appear notifying
you that automatic generation of the default domain is active. To avoid seeing this
message again clear Show This Message Again.

3.

Select File > Save Case As.

4.

Under File name, type: StaticMixer

5.

Click Save.

2.4.2. Setting the Physics Definition

You need to specify the fluids used in a simulation. A variety of fluids are already defined as library
materials. For this tutorial you will use a prepared fluid, Water, which is defined to be water at 25C.
1.

Ensure that the Simulation Definition panel is displayed at the top of the details view.

2.

Under Working Fluid > Fluid select Water.

12

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.4.3. Importing a Mesh

At least one mesh must be imported before physics are applied.
1.

In the Simulation Definition panel, under Mesh Data > Mesh File, click Browse

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Under Files of type, select CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx).

3.

From your working directory, select StaticMixerMesh.gtm.

4.

Click Open.
The mesh loads.

5.

Click Next.

2.4.4. Using the Viewer

Now that the mesh is loaded, take a moment to explore how you can use the viewer toolbar to zoom
in or out and to rotate the object in the viewer.

2.4.4.1. Using the Zoom Tools

There are several icons available for controlling the level of zoom in the viewer.
1.

Click Zoom Box

2.

Click and drag a rectangular box over the geometry.

3.

Release the mouse button to zoom in on the selection.

The geometry zoom changes to display the selection at a greater resolution.

4.

Click Fit View

to re-center and re-scale the geometry.

2.4.4.2. Rotating the Geometry

If you need to rotate an object or to view it from a new angle, you can use the viewer toolbar.
1.

Click Rotate

on the viewer toolbar.

2.

Click and drag within the geometry repeatedly to test the rotation of the geometry.
The geometry rotates based on the direction of mouse movement and based on the initial mouse
cursor shape, which changes depending on where the mouse cursor is in the viewer. If the mouse
drag starts near a corner of the viewer window, the motion of the geometry will be constrained
to rotation about a single axis, as indicated by the mouse cursor shape.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

13

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

3.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -X.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z Up).
A clearer view of the mesh is displayed.

2.4.5. Defining Model Data

You need to define the type of flow and the physical models to use in the fluid domain.
You will specify the flow as steady-state with turbulence and heat transfer. Turbulence is modeled using
the - turbulence model and heat transfer using the thermal energy model. The - turbulence
model is a commonly used model and is suitable for a wide range of applications. The thermal energy
model neglects high speed energy effects and is therefore suitable for low speed flow applications.
1.

Ensure that the Physics Definition panel is displayed.

2.

Under Model Data, set Reference Pressure to 1 [atm].

All other pressure settings are relative to this reference pressure.

3.

Set Heat Transfer to Thermal Energy.

4.

Set Turbulence to k-Epsilon.

14

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

5.

Click Next.

2.4.6. Defining Boundaries

The CFD model requires the definition of conditions on the boundaries of the domain.
1.

Ensure that the Boundary Definition panel is displayed.

2.

Delete Inlet and Outlet from the list by right-clicking each and selecting Delete Boundary.

3.

Right-click in the blank area where Inlet and Outlet were listed, then select Add Boundary.

4.

Set Name to in1.

5.

Click OK.
The boundary is created and, when selected, properties related to the boundary are displayed.

2.4.7. Setting Boundary Data

Once boundaries are created, you need to create associated data. Based on Figure 2.1: Static Mixer with
2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe (p. 10), you will define the velocity and temperature for the first inlet.
1.

Ensure that in1 is displayed on the Boundary Definition panel.

2.

Set Boundary Type to Inlet.

3.

Set Location to in1.

2.4.8. Setting Flow Specification

Once boundary data is defined, the boundary needs to have the flow specification assigned.
1.

Ensure that Flow Specification is displayed on the Boundary Definition panel.

2.

Set Option to Normal Speed.

3.

Set Normal Speed to 2 [m s^-1].

2.4.9. Setting Temperature Specification

Once flow specification is defined, the boundary needs to have temperature assigned.
1.

Ensure that Temperature Specification is displayed on the Boundary Definition panel.

2.

Set Static Temperature to 315 [K].

2.4.10. Reviewing the Boundary Condition Definitions

Defining the boundary condition for in1 required several steps. Here the settings are reviewed for accuracy.
Based on Figure 2.1: Static Mixer with 2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe (p. 10), the first inlet boundary
condition consists of a velocity of 2 m/s and a temperature of 315 K at one of the side inlets.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

15

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

Review the boundary in1 settings on the Boundary Definition panel for accuracy. They should be as
follows:
Setting

Value

in1
> Boundary Type

Inlet

in1
> Location

in1

Flow Specification
> Option

Normal Speed

Flow Specification
> Normal Speed

2 [m s^-1]

Temperature Specification
> Static Temperature

315 [K]

2.4.11. Creating the Second Inlet Boundary Definition

Based on Figure 2.1: Static Mixer with 2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe (p. 10), you know the second inlet
boundary condition consists of a velocity of 2 m/s and a temperature of 285 K at one of the side inlets.
You will define that now.
1.

Under the Boundary Definition panel, right-click in the selector area and select Add Boundary.

2.

Create a new boundary named in2 with these settings:

Setting

Value

in2
> Boundary Type

Inlet

in2
> Location

in2

Flow Specification
> Option

Normal Speed

Flow Specification
> Normal Speed

2 [m s^-1]

Temperature Specification
> Static Temperature

16

285 [K]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.4.12. Creating the Outlet Boundary Definition

Now that the second inlet boundary has been created, the same concepts can be applied to building
the outlet boundary.
1.

Create a new boundary named out with these settings:

Setting

Value

out
> Boundary Type

Outlet

out
> Location

out

Flow Specification
> Option

Average Static Pressure

Flow Specification
> Relative Pressure

2.

0 [Pa]

Click Next.

2.4.13. Moving to General Mode

There are no further boundary conditions that need to be set. All 2D exterior regions that have not
been assigned to a boundary condition are automatically assigned to the default boundary condition.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode and click Finish.

The three boundary conditions are displayed in the viewer as sets of arrows at the boundary surfaces.
Inlet boundary arrows are directed into the domain. Outlet boundary arrows are directed out of
the domain.

2.4.14. Setting Solver Control

Solver Control parameters control aspects of the numerical solution generation process.
While an upwind advection scheme is less accurate than other advection schemes, it is also more robust.
This advection scheme is suitable for obtaining an initial set of results, but in general should not be
used to obtain final accurate results.
The time scale can be calculated automatically by the solver or set manually. The Automatic option
tends to be conservative, leading to reliable, but often slow, convergence. It is often possible to accelerate convergence by applying a time scale factor or by choosing a manual value that is more aggressive
than the Automatic option. In this tutorial, you will select a physical time scale, leading to convergence
that is twice as fast as the Automatic option.
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

On the Basic Settings tab, set Advection Scheme > Option to Upwind.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

17

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

3.

Set Convergence Control > Fluid Timescale Control > Timescale Control to Physical Timescale
and set the physical timescale value to 2 [s].

4.

Click OK.

2.4.15. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

The simulation file, StaticMixer.cfx, contains the simulation definition in a format that can be
loaded by CFX-Pre, enabling you to complete (if applicable), restore, and modify the simulation definition.
The simulation file differs from the CFX-Solver input file in that it can be saved at any time while defining
the simulation.
1.

Click Define Run

2.

Set File name to StaticMixer.def.

3.

Click Save.
The CFX-Solver input file (StaticMixer.def) is created. CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts
and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is set.

4.

If you are notified the file already exists, click Overwrite.

5.

When you are finished, select File > Quit in CFX-Pre.

6.

If prompted, click Yes or Save & Quit to save StaticMixer.cfx.

7.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 19).

2.4.16. Playing the Session File and Starting CFX-Solver Manager

Note
This task is required only if you are starting here with the session file that was provided with
the tutorial input files. If you have performed all the tasks in the previous steps, proceed
directly to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 19).
Events in CFX-Pre can be recorded to a session file and then played back at a later date to drive CFXPre. Session files have been created for each tutorial so that the problems can be set up rapidly in CFXPre.
1.

If required, launch CFX-Pre.

2.

Select Session > Play Session.

3.

Select StaticMixer.pre.

4.

Click Open.
A CFX-Solver input file is written.

5.

18

Select File > Quit.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

6.

Launch the CFX-Solver Manager from the ANSYS CFX Launcher.

7.

After the CFX-Solver starts, select File > Define Run.

8.

Under CFX-Solver Input File, click Browse

9.

Select StaticMixer.def, located in the working directory.

2.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

CFX-Solver Manager has a visual interface that displays a variety of results and should be used when
plotted data must be viewed during problem solving.
Two windows are displayed when CFX-Solver Manager runs. There is an adjustable split between the
windows, which is oriented either horizontally or vertically depending on the aspect ratio of the entire
CFX-Solver Manager window (also adjustable).

One window shows the convergence history plots and the other displays text output from CFX-Solver.
The text lists physical properties, boundary conditions and various other parameters used or calculated
in creating the model. All the text is written to the output file automatically (in this case, StaticMixer_001.out).

2.5.1. Starting the Run

The Define Run dialog box allows configuration of a run for processing by CFX-Solver.
When CFX-Solver Manager is launched automatically from CFX-Pre, all of the information required to
perform a new serial run (on a single processor) is entered automatically. You do not need to alter the
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

19

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

information in the Define Run dialog box. This is a very quick way to launch into CFX-Solver without
having to define settings and values.
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver launches and a split screen appears and displays the results of the run graphically and
as text. The panes continue to build as CFX-Solver Manager operates.

Note
Once the second iteration appears, data begins to plot. Plotting may take a long time
depending on the amount of data to process. Let the process run.

2.5.2. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post

Once CFX-Solver has finished, you can use CFD-Post to review the finished results.
1.

When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.

2.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

3.

Click OK. After a short pause, CFX-Solver Manager closes and CFD-Post opens.

2.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

When CFD-Post starts, the viewer and Outline workspace are displayed.

20

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The viewer displays an outline of the geometry and other graphic objects. You can use the mouse or
the toolbar icons to manipulate the view, exactly as in CFX-Pre.
The tutorial follows this general workflow for viewing results in CFD-Post:
2.6.1. Setting the Edge Angle for a Wireframe Object
2.6.2. Creating a Point for the Origin of the Streamline
2.6.3. Creating a Streamline Originating from a Point
2.6.4. Rearranging the Point
2.6.5. Configuring a Default Legend
2.6.6. Creating a Slice Plane
2.6.7. Defining Slice Plane Geometry
2.6.8. Configuring Slice Plane Views
2.6.9. Rendering Slice Planes
2.6.10. Coloring the Slice Plane
2.6.11. Moving the Slice Plane
2.6.12. Adding Contours
2.6.13. Working with Animations
2.6.14. Quitting CFD-Post

2.6.1. Setting the Edge Angle for a Wireframe Object

The outline of the geometry is called the wireframe or outline plot.
By default, CFD-Post displays only some of the surface mesh. This sometimes means that when you first
load your results file, the geometry outline is not displayed clearly. You can control the amount of the
surface mesh shown by editing the Wireframe object listed in the Outline tree view.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

21

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

The check boxes next to each object name in the Outline control the visibility of each object. Currently
only the Wireframe and Default Legend objects have visibility turned on.
The edge angle determines how much of the surface mesh is visible. If the angle between two adjacent
faces is greater than the edge angle, then that edge is drawn. If the edge angle is set to 0, the entire
surface mesh is drawn. If the edge angle is large, then only the most significant corner edges of the
geometry are drawn.
For this geometry, a setting of approximately 15 lets you view the model location without displaying
an excessive amount of the surface mesh.
In this module you can also modify the zoom settings and view of the wireframe.
1.

In the Outline, under User Locations and Plots, double-click Wireframe.

Tip
While it is not necessary to change the view to set the angle, do so to explore the
practical uses of this feature.

2.

Right-click a blank area anywhere in the viewer, select Predefined Camera from the shortcut menu, and
select Isometric View (Z up).

3.

In the Wireframe details view, under Definition, click in the Edge Angle box.
An embedded slider is displayed.

4.

Type a value of 10 [degree].

5.

Click Apply to update the object with the new setting.

Notice that more surface mesh is displayed.

22

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

6.

Drag the embedded slider to set the Edge Angle value to approximately 45 [degree].

7.

Click Apply to update the object with the new setting.

Less of the outline of the geometry is displayed.

8.

Type a value of 15 [degree].

9.

Click Apply to update the object with the new setting.

2.6.2. Creating a Point for the Origin of the Streamline

A streamline is the path that a particle of zero mass would follow through the domain.
1.

Select Insert > Location > Point from the main menu.
You can also use the toolbars to create a variety of objects. Later modules and tutorials explore
this further.

2.

Click OK.
This accepts the default name.

3.

Under Definition, ensure that Method is set to XYZ.

4.

Under Point, enter the following coordinates: -1, -1, 1.

This is a point near the first inlet.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

23

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

5.

Click Apply.
The point appears as a symbol in the viewer as a crosshair symbol.

2.6.3. Creating a Streamline Originating from a Point

Where applicable, streamlines can trace the flow direction forwards (downstream) and/or backwards
(upstream).
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Streamline.

2.

Click OK.

3.

Set Definition > Start From to Point 1.

Tip
To create streamlines originating from more than one location, click the Ellipsis
icon
to the right of the Start From box. This displays the Location Selector dialog box,
where you can use the Ctrl and Shift keys to pick multiple locators.

4.

Click the Color tab.

5.

Set Mode to Variable.

6.

Set Variable to Total Temperature.

7.

Set Range to Local.

8.

Click Apply.
The streamline shows the path of a zero mass particle from Point 1. The temperature is initially
high near the hot inlet, but as the fluid mixes the temperature drops.

24

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.6.4. Rearranging the Point

Once created, a point can be rearranged manually or by setting specific coordinates.

Tip
In this module, you may choose to display various views and zooms from the Predefined
Camera option in the shortcut menu (such as Isometric View (Z up) or View From -X) and
by using Zoom Box
1.

if you prefer to change the display.

In Outline, under User Locations and Plots double-click Point 1.

Properties for the selected user location are displayed.

2.

Under Point, set these coordinates: -1, -2.9, 1.

3.

Click Apply.
The point is moved and the streamline redrawn.

4.

In the viewer toolbar, click Select

and ensure that the adjacent toolbar icon is set to Single Select

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

25

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

While in select mode, you cannot use the left mouse button to re-orient the object in the viewer.
5.

In the viewer, drag Point 1 (appears as a yellow addition sign) to a new location within the mixer.
The point position is updated in the details view and the streamline is redrawn at the new location.
The point moves normal in relation to the viewing direction.

6.

Click Rotate

Tip
You can also click in the viewer area, and press the space bar to toggle between Select
and Viewing Mode. A way to pick objects from Viewing Mode is to hold down Ctrl +
Shift while clicking on an object with the left mouse button.

7.

Under Point, reset these coordinates: -1, -1, 1.

8.

Click Apply.
The point appears at its original location.

9.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -X.

2.6.5. Configuring a Default Legend

You can modify the appearance of the default legend.
The default legend appears whenever a plot is created that is colored by a variable. The streamline
color is based on temperature; therefore, the legend shows the temperature range. The color pattern
on the legends color bar is banded in accordance with the bands in the plot.

Note
If a user-specified range is used for the legend, one or more bands may represent values
beyond the legends range. In this case, these band colors are extrapolated slightly past the
range of colors shown in the legend.
The default legend displays values for the last eligible plot that was opened in the details view. To
maintain a legend definition during a CFD-Post session, you can create a new legend by clicking Legend
.

26

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Because there are many settings that can be customized for the legend, this module allows you the
freedom to experiment with them. In the last steps you will set up a legend, based on the default legend,
with a minor modification to the position.

Tip
When editing values, you can restore the values that were present when you began editing
by clicking Reset. To restore the factory-default values, click Default.
1.

Double-click Default Legend View 1.

The Definition tab of the default legend is displayed.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Title Mode

User Specified

Title

Streamline Temp.

Horizontal

(Selected)

Location
> Y Justification

3.

Bottom

Click Apply.
The appearance and position of the legend changes based on the settings specified.

4.

Modify various settings in Definition and click Apply after each change.

5.

Select the Appearance tab.

6.

Modify a variety of settings in the Appearance and click Apply after each change.

7.

Click Defaults.

8.

Click Apply.

9.

Under Outline, in User Locations and Plots, clear the check boxes for Point 1 and Streamline
1.
Since both are no longer visible, the associated legend no longer appears.

2.6.6. Creating a Slice Plane

Defining a slice plane allows you to obtain a cross-section of the geometry.
In CFD-Post you often view results by coloring a graphic object. The graphic object could be an
isosurface, a vector plot, or in this case, a plane. The object can be a fixed color or it can vary based on
the value of a variable.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

27

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

You already have some objects defined by default (listed in the Outline). You can view results on the
boundaries of the static mixer by coloring each boundary object by a variable. To view results within
the geometry (that is, on non-default locators), you will create new objects.
You can use the following methods to define a plane:
Three Points: creates a plane from three specified points.
Point and Normal: defines a plane from one point on the plane and a normal vector to the plane.
YZ Plane, ZX Plane, and XY Plane: similar to Point and Normal, except that the normal is defined
to be normal to the indicated plane.
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Location > Plane or click Location > Plane.

2.

In the Insert Plane window, type: Slice

3.

Click OK.
The Geometry, Color, Render, and View tabs enable you to switch between settings.

4.

Click the Geometry tab.

2.6.7. Defining Slice Plane Geometry

You need to choose the vector normal to the plane. You want the plane to lie in the x-y plane, hence
its normal vector points along the z-axis. You can specify any vector that points in the Z direction, but
you will choose the most obvious (0,0,1).
1.

If required, under Geometry, expand Definition.

2.

Under Method select Point and Normal.

3.

Under Point enter 0,0,1.

4.

Under Normal enter 0,0,1.

5.

Ensure that the Plane Type > Slice is selected.

6.

Click Apply.
Slice appears under User Locations and Plots. Rotate the view to see the plane.

2.6.8. Configuring Slice Plane Views

Depending on the view of the geometry, various objects may not appear because they fall in a 2D space
that cannot be seen.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).
The slice is now visible in the viewer.

28

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Click Zoom Box

3.

Click and drag a rectangular selection over the geometry.

4.

Release the mouse button to zoom in on the selection.

5.

Click Rotate

6.

Click and drag the mouse pointer down slightly to rotate the geometry towards you.

7.

Select Isometric View (Z up) as described earlier.

2.6.9. Rendering Slice Planes

Render settings determine how the plane is drawn.
1.

In the details view for Slice, select the Render tab.

2.

Clear Show Faces.

3.

Select Show Mesh Lines.

4.

Under Show Mesh Lines change Color Mode to User Specified.

5.

Click the current color in Line Color to change to a different color.

For a greater selection of colors, click the Ellipsis

icon to use the Select color dialog box.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

29

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Click Zoom Box

8.

Zoom in on the geometry to view it in greater detail.

The line segments show where the slice plane intersects with mesh element faces. The end points
of each line segment are located where the plane intersects mesh element edges.
9.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Z.
The image shown below can be used for comparison with Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined
Mesh) (p. 71) (in the section Creating a Slice Plane (p. 79)), where a refined mesh is used.

2.6.10. Coloring the Slice Plane

The Color panel is used to determine how the object faces are colored.
1.

Configure the following setting(s) of Slice:

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Show Faces

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

(Cleared)

Render

[a]

a. You can specify the variable (in this case, temperature) used to color the graphic
element. The Constant mode allows you to color the plane with a fixed color.

30

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Click Apply.
Hot water (red) enters from one inlet and cold water (blue) from the other.

2.6.11. Moving the Slice Plane

The plane can be moved to different locations.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

2.

Click the Geometry tab.

Review the settings in Definition under Point and under Normal.

3.

Click Single Select

4.

Click and drag the plane to a new location that intersects the domain.
As you drag the mouse, the viewer updates automatically. Note that Point updates with new settings.

5.

Set Point settings to 0,0,1.

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Click Rotate

8.

Turn off visibility of Slice by clearing the check box next to Slice in the Outline tree view.

2.6.12. Adding Contours

Contours connect all points of equal value for a scalar variable (for example, Temperature) and help
to visualize variable values and gradients. Colored bands fill the spaces between contour lines. Each
band is colored by the average color of its two bounding contour lines (even if the latter are not displayed).
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

2.

Select Insert > Contour from the main menu or click Contour

The Insert Contour dialog box is displayed.

3.

Set Name to Slice Contour.

4.

Click OK.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Slice

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

31

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

Tab
Render

6.

Setting

Value

Variable

Temperature

Show Contour Bands

(Selected)

Click Apply.

Important
The colors of 3D graphics object faces are slightly altered when lighting is on. To view
colors with highest accuracy, go to the Render tab and, under Show Contour Bands,
clear Lighting and click Apply.
The graphic element faces are visible, producing a contour plot as shown.

Note
Make sure that the visibility for Slice (in the Outline tree view) is turned off.

2.6.13. Working with Animations

Animations build transitions between views for development of video files.
The tutorial follows this general workflow for creating a keyframe animation:
2.6.13.1. Showing the Animation Dialog Box

32

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.6.13.2. Creating the First Keyframe
2.6.13.3. Creating the Second Keyframe
2.6.13.4. Viewing the Animation
2.6.13.5. Modifying the Animation
2.6.13.6. Saving a Movie

2.6.13.1. Showing the Animation Dialog Box

The Animation dialog box is used to define keyframes and to export to a video file.

Select Tools > Animation or click Animation

The Animation dialog box can be repositioned as required.

2.6.13.2. Creating the First Keyframe

Keyframes are required in order to produce an animation. You need to define the first viewer state, a
second (and final) viewer state, and set the number of interpolated intermediate frames.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

2.

In the Outline, under User Locations and Plots, turn off the visibility of Slice Contour and
turn on the visibility of Slice.

3.

Select the Keyframe Animation toggle.

4.

In the Animation dialog box, click New

A new keyframe named KeyframeNo1 is created. This represents the current image displayed in
the viewer.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

33

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

2.6.13.3. Creating the Second Keyframe

Define the second keyframe and the number of intermediate frames:
1.

In the Outline, under User Locations and Plots, double-click Slice.

2.

On the Geometry tab, set Point coordinate values to (0,0,-1.99).

3.

Click Apply.
The slice plane moves to the bottom of the mixer.

34

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.

In the Animation dialog box, click New

KeyframeNo2 is created and represents the image displayed in the viewer.

5.

Select KeyframeNo1.

6.

Set # of Frames (located below the list of keyframes) to 20.

This is the number of intermediate frames used when going from KeyframeNo1 to KeyframeNo2.
This number is displayed in the Frames column for KeyframeNo1.

7.

Press Enter.
The Frame # column shows the frame in which each keyframe appears. KeyframeNo1 appears
at frame 1 since it defines the start of the animation. KeyframeNo2 is at frame 22 since you have
20 intermediate frames (frames 2 to 21) in between KeyframeNo1 and KeyframeNo2.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

35

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

2.6.13.4. Viewing the Animation

More keyframes could be added, but this animation has only two keyframes (which is the minimum
possible).
The controls previously grayed-out in the Animation dialog box are now available. The number of intermediate frames between keyframes is listed beside the keyframe having the lowest number of the
pair. The number of frames listed beside the last keyframe is ignored.
1.

Click To Beginning

This ensures that the animation will begin at the first keyframe.

36

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Click Play the animation

The animation plays from frame 1 to frame 22. It plays relatively slowly because the slice plane
must be updated for each frame.

2.6.13.5. Modifying the Animation

To make the plane sweep through the whole geometry, you will set the starting position of the plane
to be at the top of the mixer. You will also modify the Range properties of the plane so that it shows
the temperature variation better. As the animation is played, you can see the hot and cold water entering
the mixer. Near the bottom of the mixer (where the water flows out) you can see that the temperature
is quite uniform. The new temperature range lets you view the mixing process more accurately than
the global range used in the first animation.
1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Slice:

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Point

0, 0, 1.99

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Range

User Specified

Min

295 [K]

Max

305 [K]

Click Apply.
The slice plane moves to the top of the static mixer.

Note
Do not double-click in the next step.

3.

In the Animation dialog box, single click (do not double-click) KeyframeNo1 to select it.
If you had double-clicked KeyFrameNo1, the plane and viewer states would have been redefined
according to the stored settings for KeyFrameNo1. If this happens, click Undo
to select the keyframe.

4.

Click Set Keyframe

and try again

The image in the viewer replaces the one previously associated with KeyframeNo1.
5.

Double-click KeyframeNo2.
The object properties for the slice plane are updated according to the settings in KeyFrameNo2.

6.

Configure the following setting(s) of Slice:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

37

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Range

User Specified

Min

295 [K]

Max

305 [K]

7.

Click Apply.

8.

In the Animation dialog box, single-click KeyframeNo2.

9.

Click Set Keyframe

to save the new settings to KeyframeNo2.

2.6.13.6. Saving a Movie

1.

Click More Animation Options

to view the additional options.

The Loop and Bounce option buttons determine what happens when the animation reaches the
last keyframe. When Loop is selected, the animation repeats itself the number of times defined by
Repeat. When Bounce is selected, every other cycle is played in reverse order, starting with the
second.
2.

Select the check box next to Save Movie.

3.

Set Format to MPEG1.

4.

Click Browse

5.

Under File name type: StaticMixer.mpg

6.

If required, set the path location to a different directory.

7.

Click Save.

next to Save Movie.

The movie filename (including path) has been set, but the animation has not yet been produced.
8.

Click To Beginning

9.

Click Play the animation

10. If prompted to overwrite an existing movie click Overwrite.

The animation plays and builds an MPEG file.
11. Click the Options button at the bottom of the Animation dialog box.
In Advanced, you can see that a Frame Rate of 24 frames per second was used to create the animation. The animation you produced contains a total of 22 frames, so it takes just under 1 second
to play in a media player.

38

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

12. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
13. Close the Animation dialog box.
14. Review the animation in third-party software as required.

2.6.14. Quitting CFD-Post

When finished with CFD-Post, exit the current window:
1.

When you are finished, select File > Quit to exit CFD-Post.

2.

Click Quit if prompted to save.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

39

40

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 3: Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

This tutorial simulates a static mixer consisting of two inlet pipes delivering water into a mixing vessel;
the water exits through an outlet pipe. A general workflow is established for analyzing the flow of fluid
into and out of a mixer using ANSYS Workbench.
This tutorial includes:
3.1.Tutorial Features
3.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
3.3. Preparing the Working Directory
3.4. Setting Up the Project
3.5. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
3.6. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
3.7. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

3.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using ANSYS Workbench to set up a project.
Using Quick Setup mode in CFX-Pre to set up a problem.
Using ANSYS CFX-Solver Manager to obtain a solution.
Modifying the outline plot in CFD-Post.
Using streamlines in CFD-Post to trace the flow field from a point.
Viewing temperature using colored planes and contours in CFD-Post.
Creating an animation and saving it as a movie file.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Quick Setup mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

41

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

Component
CFD-Post

Feature

Details

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Animation

Keyframe

Plots

Contour
Outline Plot (Wireframe)
Point
Slice Plane
Streamline

3.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial simulates a static mixer consisting of two inlet pipes delivering water into a mixing vessel;
the water exits through an outlet pipe. A general workflow is established for analyzing the flow of fluid
into and out of a mixer.
Water enters through both pipes at the same rate but at different temperatures. The first entry is at a
rate of 2 m/s and a temperature of 315 K and the second entry is at a rate of 2 m/s at a temperature
of 285 K. The radius of the mixer is 2 m.
Your goal in this tutorial is to understand how to use CFX in Workbench to determine the speed and
temperature of the water when it exits the static mixer.
Figure 3.1: Static Mixer with 2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe

If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

42

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

StaticMixerMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.4. Setting Up the Project

1.

Start ANSYS Workbench.

To launch ANSYS Workbench on Windows, click the Start menu, then select All Programs > ANSYS
17.0 > Workbench 17.0. To launch ANSYS Workbench on Linux, open a command line interface,
type the path to runwb2 (for example, ~/ansys_inc/v170/Framework/bin/Linux64/runwb2), then
press Enter.

2.

From the toolbar, click File > Save As.

3.

In the dialog box that appears, browse to the working directory, set File name to StaticMixer, and
click Save.

3.5. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Because you are starting with an existing mesh, you can immediately use CFX-Pre to define the simulation.
To launch CFX-Pre:
1.

In the Toolbox pane, open Component Systems and double-click CFX.

A CFX system opens in the Project Schematic.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

43

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

Note
You use a CFX component system because you are starting with a mesh. If you wanted
to create the geometry and mesh, you would start with a Fluid Flow (CFX) analysis
system.

2.

Right-click the blue CFX cell (A1) and select Rename.

3.

Change the name of the system to Static Mixer. Finish by pressing Enter or by clicking outside the
cell.

4.

In ANSYS Workbench, enable View > Files and View > Progress so that you can see the files that are
written and the time remaining to complete operations.

5.

In the Workbench Project Schematic, double-click the Setup cell of the CFX component system.
CFX-Pre opens.

6.

Optionally, change the background color of the viewer in CFX-Pre for improved viewing:
a.

Select Edit > Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

44

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

b.

Adjust the color settings under CFX-Pre > Graphics Style.

For example, you could set the Background > Color Type to Solid and the Color to white.

c.

Click OK.

3.5.1. Creating the Simulation Definition

Before importing and working with the mesh, you need to create a simulation; in this example, you will
use Quick Setup mode. Quick Setup mode provides a simple wizard-like interface for setting up simple
cases. This is useful for getting familiar with the basic elements of a CFD problem setup.
1.

In CFX-Pre, select Tools > Quick Setup Mode.

The Quick Setup Wizard opens, enabling you to define this single-phase simulation.

2.

Under Working Fluid > Fluid select Water.

This is a fluid already defined in the library of materials as water at 25C.

3.

Under Mesh Data > Mesh File, click Browse

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

4.

Under Files of type, select CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx).

5.

From your working directory, select StaticMixerMesh.gtm.

6.

Click Open.
The mesh loads, which enables you to apply physics.

7.

Click Next.

3.5.2. Setting the Physics Definition

You need to define the type of flow and the physical models to use in the fluid domain.
The flow is steady-state and you will specify the turbulence and heat transfer. Turbulence is modeled
using the - turbulence model and heat transfer using the thermal energy model. The - turbulence
model is a commonly used model and is suitable for a wide range of applications. The thermal energy
model neglects high speed energy effects and is therefore suitable for low speed flow applications.
1.

Under Model Data, note that the Reference Pressure is set to 1 [atm].
All other pressure settings are relative to this reference pressure.

2.

Set Heat Transfer to Thermal Energy.

3.

Leave Turbulence at its default setting, k-Epsilon.

4.

Click Next.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

45

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

3.5.3. Defining Boundaries

The CFD model requires the definition of conditions on the boundaries of the domain.
1.

Delete Inlet and Outlet from the list by right-clicking each and selecting Delete Boundary.

2.

Right-click in the blank area where Inlet and Outlet were listed, then select Add Boundary.

3.

Set Name to in1.

4.

Click OK.
The boundary is created and, when selected, properties related to the boundary are displayed.

3.5.4. Setting Boundary Data

Once boundaries are created, you need to create associated data. Based on Figure 3.1: Static Mixer with
2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe (p. 42), you will define the velocity and temperature for the first inlet.
1.

Set in1 > Boundary Type to Inlet.

2.

Set Location to in1.

3.

Set the Flow Specification > Option to Normal Speed and set Normal Speed to: 2 [m s^-1]

4.

Set the Temperature Specification > Static Temperature to 315 [K] (note the units).

3.5.5. Creating the Second Inlet Boundary Definition

Based on Figure 3.1: Static Mixer with 2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe (p. 42), you know the second inlet
boundary condition consists of a velocity of 2 m/s and a temperature of 285 K at one of the side inlets.
You will define that now.
1.

Under the Boundary Definition panel, right-click in the selector area and select Add Boundary.

2.

Create a new boundary named in2 with these settings:

Setting

Value

in2
> Boundary Type

Inlet

in2
> Location

in2

Flow Specification
> Option

Normal Speed

Flow Specification
> Normal Speed

2 [m s^-1]

Temperature Specification
> Static Temperature

46

285 [K]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.5.6. Creating the Outlet Boundary Definition

Now that the second inlet boundary has been created, the same concepts can be applied to building
the outlet boundary.
1.

Create a new boundary named out with these settings:

Setting

Value

out
> Boundary Type

Outlet

out
> Location

out

Flow Specification
> Option

Average Static Pressure

Flow Specification
> Relative Pressure

2.

0 [Pa]

Click Next.

3.5.7. Moving to General Mode

There are no further boundary conditions that need to be set. All 2D exterior regions that have not
been assigned to a boundary condition are automatically assigned to the default boundary condition.
1.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode.

2.

Click Finish.
The three boundary conditions are displayed in the viewer as sets of arrows at the boundary surfaces.
Inlet boundary arrows are directed into the domain. Outlet boundary arrows are directed out of
the domain.

3.5.8. Using the Viewer

Now that the simulation is loaded, take a moment to explore how you can use the viewer toolbar to
zoom in or out and to rotate the object in the viewer.

3.5.8.1. Using the Zoom Tools

There are several icons available for controlling the level of zoom in the viewer.
1.

Click Zoom Box

2.

Click and drag a rectangular box over the geometry.

3.

Release the mouse button to zoom in on the selection.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

47

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

The geometry zoom changes to display the selection at a greater resolution.
4.

Click Fit View

to re-center and re-scale the geometry.

3.5.8.2. Rotating the Geometry

If you need to rotate an object or to view it from a new angle, you can use the viewer toolbar.
1.

Click Rotate

on the viewer toolbar.

2.

Click and drag within the geometry repeatedly to test the rotation of the geometry.
The geometry rotates based on the direction of mouse movement and based on the initial mouse
cursor shape, which changes depending on where the mouse cursor is in the viewer. If the mouse
drag starts near a corner of the viewer window, the motion of the geometry will be constrained
to rotation about a single axis, as indicated by the mouse cursor shape.

3.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -X.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z Up).
A clearer view of the mesh is displayed.

48

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

3.5.9. Setting Solver Control

Solver Control parameters control aspects of the numerical solution generation process.
While an upwind advection scheme is less accurate than other advection schemes, it is also more robust.
This advection scheme is suitable for obtaining an initial set of results, but in general should not be
used to obtain final accurate results.
The time scale can be calculated automatically by the solver or set manually. The Automatic option
tends to be conservative, leading to reliable, but often slow, convergence. It is often possible to accelerate convergence by applying a time scale factor or by choosing a manual value that is more aggressive
than the Automatic option. In this tutorial, you will select a physical time scale, leading to convergence
that is twice as fast as the Automatic option.
1.

In the CFX-Pre toolbar, click Solver Control

2.

On the Basic Settings tab, set Advection Scheme > Option to Upwind.

3.

Set Convergence Control > Fluid Timescale Control > Timescale Control to Physical Timescale
and set the physical timescale value to 2 [s].

4.

Click OK.

3.6. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

To obtain a solution, you need to launch the CFX-Solver Manager and subsequently use it to start the
solver:
1.

Double-click the ANSYS Workbench Solution cell. The CFX-Solver Manager appears with the Define Run
dialog box displayed.
The Define Run dialog box enables configuration of a run for processing by CFX-Solver. In this
case, all of the information required to perform a new serial run (on a single processor) is entered
automatically. You do not need to alter the information in the Define Run dialog box.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver launches and a split screen appears and displays the results of the run graphically and
as text. The panes continue to build as CFX-Solver Manager operates.
One window shows the convergence history plots and the other displays text output from CFXSolver. The text lists physical properties, boundary conditions, and various other parameters used
or calculated in creating the model. All the text is written to the output file automatically (in this
case, StaticMixer_001.out).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

49

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

Note
Once the second iteration appears, data begins to plot. Plotting may take a long time
depending on the amount of data to process. Let the process run.

50

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

When CFX-Solver is finished, a message is displayed and the final line in the .out file (which you can
see in the CFX-Solver Manager) is:
This run of the ANSYS CFX Solver has finished.

3.7. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Once CFX-Solver has finished, you can use CFD-Post to review the finished results:
1.

In ANSYS Workbench, right-click the Results cell and select Refresh.

2.

When the refresh is complete, double-click the Results cell. CFD-Post appears.

When CFD-Post starts, the viewer and Outline workspace are displayed. Optionally, change the background color of the viewer for improved viewing:
1.

In CFD-Post, select Edit > Options. The Options dialog box appears.

2.

Adjust the color settings under CFD-Post > Viewer. For example, you could set the Background > Color
Type to Solid and the Color to white.

3.

Click OK.

The viewer displays an outline of the geometry and other graphic objects. You can use the mouse or
the toolbar icons to manipulate the view, exactly as in CFX-Pre.
The tutorial follows this general workflow for viewing results in CFD-Post:
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

51

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

3.7.1. Setting the Edge Angle for a Wireframe Object
3.7.2. Creating a Point for the Origin of the Streamline
3.7.3. Creating a Streamline Originating from a Point
3.7.4. Rearranging the Point
3.7.5. Configuring a Default Legend
3.7.6. Creating a Slice Plane
3.7.7. Defining Slice Plane Geometry
3.7.8. Configuring Slice Plane Views
3.7.9. Rendering Slice Planes
3.7.10. Coloring the Slice Plane
3.7.11. Moving the Slice Plane
3.7.12. Adding Contours
3.7.13. Working with Animations
3.7.14. Closing the Applications

3.7.1. Setting the Edge Angle for a Wireframe Object

The outline of the geometry is called the wireframe or outline plot.
By default, CFD-Post displays only some of the surface mesh. This sometimes means that when you first
load your results file, the geometry outline is not displayed clearly. You can control the amount of the
surface mesh shown by editing the Wireframe object listed in the Outline.
The check boxes next to each object name in the Outline tree view control the visibility of each object.
Currently only the Wireframe and Default Legend objects have visibility turned on.
The edge angle determines how much of the surface mesh is visible. If the angle between two adjacent
faces is greater than the edge angle, then that edge is drawn. If the edge angle is set to 0, the entire
surface mesh is drawn. If the edge angle is large, then only the most significant corner edges of the
geometry are drawn.
For this geometry, a setting of approximately 15 lets you view the model location without displaying
an excessive amount of the surface mesh.
In this module you can also modify the zoom settings and view of the wireframe.
1.

In the Outline, under User Locations and Plots, double-click Wireframe.

2.

Right-click a blank area anywhere in the viewer, select Predefined Camera from the shortcut menu, and
select Isometric View (Z up).

Tip
While it is not necessary to change the view to set the edge angle for the wireframe,
doing so enables you to explore the practical uses of this feature.

3.

In the Wireframe details view, under Definition, click in the Edge Angle box.
An embedded slider is displayed.

4.

Type a value of 10 [degree].

5.

Click Apply to update the object with the new setting.

52

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Notice that more surface mesh is displayed.

6.

Drag the embedded slider to set the Edge Angle value to approximately 45 [degree].

7.

Click Apply to update the object with the new setting.

Less of the outline of the geometry is displayed.

8.

Type a value of 15 [degree].

9.

Click Apply to update the object with the new setting.

3.7.2. Creating a Point for the Origin of the Streamline

A streamline is the path that a particle of zero mass would follow through the domain.
1.

Select Insert > Location > Point from the main menu.
You can also use the toolbars to create a variety of objects. Later modules and tutorials will explore
this further.

2.

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

53

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

This accepts the default name.
3.

Set Definition > Method to XYZ.

4.

Under Point, enter the following coordinates: -1, -1, 1.

This is a point near the first inlet.

5.

Click Apply.
The point appears as a symbol in the viewer as a crosshair symbol.

3.7.3. Creating a Streamline Originating from a Point

Where applicable, streamlines can trace the flow direction forwards (downstream) and/or backwards
(upstream).
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Streamline.

2.

Click OK.

3.

Set Definition > Start From to Point 1.

Tip
To create streamlines originating from more than one location, click the Ellipsis
icon
to the right of the Start From box. This displays the Location Selector dialog box,
where you can use the Ctrl and Shift keys to pick multiple locators.

4.

Click the Color tab.

5.

Set Mode to Variable.

6.

Set Variable to Total Temperature.

7.

Set Range to Local.

8.

Click Apply.
The streamline shows the path of a zero mass particle from Point 1. The temperature is initially
high near the hot inlet, but as the fluid mixes the temperature drops.

54

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

3.7.4. Rearranging the Point

Once created, a point can be rearranged manually or by setting specific coordinates.

Tip
In this module, you may choose to display various views and zooms from the Predefined
Camera option in the shortcut menu (such as Isometric View (Z up) or View From -X) and
by using Zoom Box
1.

if you prefer to change the display.

In Outline, under User Locations and Plots double-click Point 1.

Properties for the selected user location are displayed.

2.

Under Point, set these coordinates: -1, -2.9, 1.

3.

Click Apply.
The point is moved and the streamline redrawn.

4.

In the viewer toolbar, click Select

and ensure that the adjacent toolbar icon is set to Single Select

.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

55

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

While in select mode, you cannot use the left mouse button to re-orient the object in the viewer.
5.

In the viewer, drag Point 1 (appears as a yellow addition sign) to a new location within the mixer.
The point position is updated in the details view and the streamline is redrawn at the new location.
The point moves normal in relation to the viewing direction.

6.

Click Rotate

Tip
You can also click in the viewer area, and press the space bar to toggle between Select
and Viewing Mode. A way to pick objects from Viewing Mode is to hold down Ctrl +
Shift while clicking on an object with the left mouse button.

7.

Under Point, reset these coordinates: -1, -1, 1.

8.

Click Apply.
The point appears at its original location.

9.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -X.

3.7.5. Configuring a Default Legend

You can modify the appearance of the default legend.
The default legend appears whenever a plot is created that is colored by a variable. The streamline
color is based on temperature; therefore, the legend shows the temperature range. The color pattern
on the legends color bar is banded in accordance with the bands in the plot.

Note
If a user-specified range is used for the legend, one or more bands may represent values
beyond the legends range. In this case, these band colors are extrapolated slightly past the
range of colors shown in the legend.
The default legend displays values for the last eligible plot that was opened in the details view. To
maintain a legend definition during a CFD-Post session, you can create a new legend by clicking Legend
.

56

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Because there are many settings that can be customized for the legend, this module allows you the
freedom to experiment with them. In the last steps you will set up a legend, based on the default legend,
with a minor modification to the position.

Tip
When editing values, you can restore the values that were present when you began editing
by clicking Reset. To restore the factory-default values, click Default.
1.

Double-click Default Legend View 1.

The Definition tab of the default legend is displayed.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Title Mode

User Specified

Title

Streamline Temp.

Horizontal

(Selected)

Location
> Y Justification

3.

Bottom

Click Apply.
The appearance and position of the legend changes based on the settings specified.

4.

Modify various settings in Definition and click Apply after each change.

5.

Select Appearance.

6.

Modify a variety of settings in the Appearance and click Apply after each change.

7.

Click Defaults.

8.

Click Apply.

9.

Under Outline, in User Locations and Plots, clear the check boxes for Point 1 and Streamline
1.
Since both are no longer visible, the associated legend no longer appears.

3.7.6. Creating a Slice Plane

Defining a slice plane allows you to obtain a cross-section of the geometry.
In CFD-Post you often view results by coloring a graphic object. The graphic object could be an
isosurface, a vector plot, or in this case, a plane. The object can be a fixed color or it can vary based on
the value of a variable.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

57

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

You already have some objects defined by default (listed in the Outline). You can view results on the
boundaries of the static mixer by coloring each boundary object by a variable. To view results within
the geometry (that is, on non-default locators), you will create new objects.
You can use the following methods to define a plane:
Three Points: creates a plane from three specified points.
Point and Normal: defines a plane from one point on the plane and a normal vector to the plane.
YZ Plane, ZX Plane, and XY Plane: similar to Point and Normal, except that the normal is defined
to be normal to the indicated plane.
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Location > Plane or click Location > Plane.

2.

In the Insert Plane window, type: Slice

3.

Click OK.
The details view for the plane appears; the Geometry, Color, Render, and View tabs enable you
to configure the characteristics of the plane.

3.7.7. Defining Slice Plane Geometry

You need to choose the vector normal to the plane. You want the plane to lie in the x-y plane, hence
its normal vector points along the Z axis. You can specify any vector that points in the Z direction, but
you will choose the most obvious (0,0,1).
1.

On the Geometry tab, expand Definition.

2.

Under Method select Point and Normal.

3.

Under Point enter 0,0,1.

4.

Under Normal enter 0,0,1.

5.

Click Apply.
Slice appears under User Locations and Plots. Rotate the view to see the plane.

3.7.8. Configuring Slice Plane Views

Depending on the view of the geometry, various objects may not appear because they fall in a 2D space
that cannot be seen.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).
The slice is now visible in the viewer.

58

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Click Zoom Box

3.

Click and drag a rectangular selection over the geometry.

4.

Release the mouse button to zoom in on the selection.

5.

Click Rotate

6.

Click and drag the mouse pointer down slightly to rotate the geometry towards you.

7.

Select Isometric View (Z up) as described earlier.

3.7.9. Rendering Slice Planes

Render settings determine how the plane is drawn.
1.

In the details view for Slice, select the Render tab.

2.

Clear Show Faces.

3.

Select Show Mesh Lines.

4.

Under Show Mesh Lines change Color Mode to User Specified.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

59

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

5.

Click the current color in Line Color to change to a different color.

For a greater selection of colors, click the Ellipsis

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Click Zoom Box

8.

Zoom in on the geometry to view it in greater detail.

icon to use the Color selector dialog box.

The line segments show where the slice plane intersects with mesh element faces. The end points
of each line segment are located where the plane intersects mesh element edges.
9.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Z.
The image shown below can be used for comparison with Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined
Mesh) (p. 71) (in the section Creating a Slice Plane (p. 79)), where a refined mesh is used.

3.7.10. Coloring the Slice Plane

The Color panel is used to determine how the object faces are colored.
1.

Configure the following setting(s) of Slice:

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Show Faces

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

(Cleared)

Render

60

[a]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

a. You can specify the variable (in this case, temperature) used to color the graphic
element. The Constant mode allows you to color the plane with a fixed color.

2.

Click Apply.
Hot water (red) enters from one inlet and cold water (blue) from the other.

3.7.11. Moving the Slice Plane

You can move the plane to different locations:
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

2.

Click the Geometry tab.

Review the settings in Definition under Point and under Normal.

3.

Click Single Select

4.

Click and drag the plane to a new location that intersects the domain.
As you drag the mouse, the viewer updates automatically. Note that Point updates with new settings.

5.

Type in Point settings of 0,0,1.

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Click Rotate

8.

Turn off the visibility for Slice by clearing the check box next to Slice in the Outline tree view.

3.7.12. Adding Contours

Contours connect all points of equal value for a scalar variable (for example, Temperature) and help
to visualize variable values and gradients. Colored bands fill the spaces between contour lines. Each
band is colored by the average color of its two bounding contour lines (even if the latter are not displayed).
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

2.

Select Insert > Contour from the main menu or click Contour

The Insert Contour dialog box is displayed.

3.

Set Name to Slice Contour.

4.

Click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

61

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Slice

Variable

Temperature

Show Contour Lines

(Selected)

Render

6.

Click Apply.

Important
The colors of 3D graphics object faces are slightly altered when lighting is on. To view
colors with highest accuracy, go to the Render tab and, under Show Faces, clear
Lighting and click Apply.
The graphic element faces are visible, producing a contour plot as shown.

Note
Make sure that the visibility of Slice (in the Outline tree view) is turned off.

62

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

3.7.13. Working with Animations

Animations build transitions between views for development of video files.
The tutorial follows this general workflow for creating a keyframe animation:
3.7.13.1. Showing the Animation Dialog Box
3.7.13.2. Creating the First Keyframe
3.7.13.3. Creating the Second Keyframe
3.7.13.4. Viewing the Animation
3.7.13.5. Modifying the Animation
3.7.13.6. Saving a Movie

3.7.13.1. Showing the Animation Dialog Box

The Animation dialog box is used to define keyframes and to export to a video file.
1.

Select Tools > Animation or click Animation

2.

Select Keyframe Animation.

3.7.13.2. Creating the First Keyframe

Keyframes are required in order to produce a keyframe animation. You need to define the first viewer
state, a second (and final) viewer state, and set the number of interpolated intermediate frames.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

2.

In the Outline, under User Locations and Plots, turn off the visibility of Slice Contour and
turn on the visibility of Slice.

3.

In the Animation dialog box, click New

A new keyframe named KeyframeNo1 is created. This represents the current image displayed in
the viewer.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

63

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

3.7.13.3. Creating the Second Keyframe

Define the second keyframe and the number of intermediate frames:
1.

In the Outline, under User Locations and Plots, double-click Slice.

2.

On the Geometry tab, set Point coordinate values to (0,0,-1.99).

3.

Click Apply.
The slice plane moves to the bottom of the mixer.

64

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.

In the Animation dialog box, click New

KeyframeNo2 is created and represents the image displayed in the viewer.

5.

Select KeyframeNo1 so that you can set the number of frames to be interpolated between the two
keyframes.

6.

Set # of Frames (located below the list of keyframes) to 20.

This is the number of intermediate frames used when going from KeyframeNo1 to KeyframeNo2.
This number is displayed in the Frames column for KeyframeNo1.

7.

Press Enter.
The Frame # column shows the frame in which each keyframe appears. KeyframeNo1 appears
at frame 1 since it defines the start of the animation. KeyframeNo2 is at frame 22 since you have
20 intermediate frames (frames 2 to 21) in between KeyframeNo1 and KeyframeNo2.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

65

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

3.7.13.4. Viewing the Animation

More keyframes could be added, but this animation has only two keyframes (which is the minimum
possible).
The controls previously grayed-out in the Animation dialog box are now available. The number of intermediate frames between keyframes is listed beside the keyframe having the lowest number of the
pair. The number of frames listed beside the last keyframe is ignored.
1.

Click To Beginning

This ensures that the animation will begin at the first keyframe.

66

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Click Play the animation

The animation plays from frame 1 to frame 22. It plays relatively slowly because the slice plane
must be updated for each frame.

3.7.13.5. Modifying the Animation

To make the plane sweep through the whole geometry, you will set the starting position of the plane
to be at the top of the mixer. You will also modify the Range properties of the plane so that it shows
the temperature variation better. As the animation is played, you can see the hot and cold water entering
the mixer. Near the bottom of the mixer (where the water flows out) you can see that the temperature
is quite uniform. The new temperature range lets you view the mixing process more accurately than
the global range used in the first animation.
1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Slice:

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Point

0, 0, 1.99

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Range

User Specified

Min

295 [K]

Max

305 [K]

Click Apply.
The slice plane moves to the top of the static mixer.

Note
Do not double-click in the next step.

3.

In the Animation dialog box, single click (do not double-click) KeyframeNo1 to select it.
If you had double-clicked KeyFrameNo1, the plane and viewer states would have been redefined
according to the stored settings for KeyFrameNo1. If this happens, click Undo
to select the keyframe.

4.

Click Set Keyframe

and try again

The image in the viewer replaces the one previously associated with KeyframeNo1.
5.

Double-click KeyframeNo2.
The object properties for the slice plane are updated according to the settings in KeyFrameNo2.

6.

Configure the following setting(s) of Slice:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

67

Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using Workbench

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Range

User Specified

Min

295 [K]

Max

305 [K]

7.

Click Apply.

8.

In the Animation dialog box, single-click KeyframeNo2.

9.

Click Set Keyframe

to save the new settings to KeyframeNo2.

3.7.13.6. Saving a Movie

1.

Click More Animation Options

to view the additional options.

The Loop and Bounce option buttons determine what happens when the animation reaches the
last keyframe. When Loop is selected, the animation repeats itself the number of times defined by
Repeat. When Bounce is selected, every other cycle is played in reverse order, starting with the
second.
2.

Select Save Movie.

3.

Set Format to MPEG1.

4.

Click Browse

5.

Under File name type: StaticMixer.mpg

6.

If required, set the path location to a different directory. You may want to set the directory to your working
directory so that the animation will be in the same location as the project files.

7.

Click Save.

next to Save Movie.

The movie filename (including path) has been set, but the animation has not yet been produced.
8.

Click To Beginning

9.

Click Play the animation

10. If prompted to overwrite an existing movie click Overwrite.

The animation plays and builds an MPEG file.
11. Click the Options button at the bottom of the Animation dialog box.
In Advanced, you can see that a Frame Rate of 24 frames per second was used to create the animation. The animation you produced contains a total of 22 frames, so it takes just under 1 second
to play in a media player.
68

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

12. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
13. Close the Animation dialog box.
14. View the animation using a media player.

3.7.14. Closing the Applications

Before you close the project, take a moment to look at the files listed in the Files view. You will see
the project file, StaticMixer.wbpj, and the files that ANSYS Workbench created (such as CFXSolver Input, CFX-Solver Output, CFX-Solver Results, CFX-Pre Case, CFD-Post State, and Design Point
files).
Close ANSYS Workbench (and the applications it launched) by selecting File > Exit from ANSYS Workbench. ANSYS Workbench prompts you to save all of your project files.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

69

70

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 4: Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

This tutorial includes:
4.1.Tutorial Features
4.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
4.3. Preparing the Working Directory
4.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
4.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
4.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using the General mode of CFX-Pre (this mode is used for more complex cases).
Rerunning a problem with a refined mesh.
Importing a CCL (CFX Command Language) file to copy the definition of a different simulation into the
current simulation.
Viewing the mesh with a Sphere Volume locator and a Surface Plot.
Using the Report Viewer to analyze mesh quality.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Slice Plane
Sphere Volume

Other

Viewing the Mesh

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

71

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

4.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

In this tutorial, you use a refined mesh to obtain a better solution to the Static Mixer problem created
in Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 9). You establish a general
workflow for analyzing the flow of fluid into and out of a mixer. This tutorial uses a specific problem
to teach the general approach taken when working with an existing mesh.

You start a new simulation in CFX-Pre and import the refined mesh. This tutorial introduces General
mode (the mode used for most tutorials) in CFX-Pre. The physics for this tutorial are the same as for
Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 9); therefore, you can import the
physics settings used in that tutorial to save time.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

4.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

72

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
StaticMixerRefMesh.gtm
StaticMixer.def
StaticMixer_001.res
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

4.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The tutorial follows this general workflow for setting up the case in CFX-Pre:
4.4.1. Importing a Mesh
4.4.2. Importing Settings from Tutorial 1
4.4.3. Viewing Domain Settings
4.4.4. Viewing the Boundary Condition Setting
4.4.5. Defining Solver Parameters
4.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run StaticMixerRef.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 77).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General in the New Case dialog box and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type StaticMixerRef and click Save.

4.4.1. Importing a Mesh

At least one mesh must be imported before physics are applied.
1.

Select File > Import > Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

73

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

Setting

Value

File name

StaticMixerRefMesh.gtm

[a]

a. This mesh is more refined than the one used in the other Static Mixer tutorials
(StaticMixerMesh.gtm).

3.

Click Open.
The Mesh tree shows the regions in the StaticMixerRefMesh.gtm assembly in a tree structure.
The first tree branch displays the 3D regions and the level below each 3D region shows the 2D
regions associated with it. The check box next to each item in the Mesh tree indicates the visibility
status of the object in the viewer; you can click these to toggle visibility.

Note
An assembly is a group of mesh regions that are topologically connected. Each assembly
can contain only one mesh, but multiple assemblies are permitted.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

4.4.2. Importing Settings from Tutorial 1

Because the physics and region names for this simulation are very similar to that for Tutorial 1, you can
save time by importing the settings used there. You will be importing CCL from Tutorial 1 that contains
settings that reference mesh regions. For example, the outlet boundary condition references the mesh
region named out. In this tutorial, the name of the mesh regions are the same as in Tutorial 1, so you
can import the CCL without error.
1.

Select File > Import > CCL.

The Import CCL dialog box appears.

2.

Under Import Method, select Replace.

Replace is useful if you have defined physics and want to update or replace them with newly imported physics.

3.

Under Files of type, select CFX-Solver input files (*def *res).

4.

Select StaticMixer.def created in Tutorial 1. If you did not work through Tutorial 1, you can obtain
this file from the ANSYS Customer Portal.

5.

Click Open.

6.

View the Outline tab.

74

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The tree view displays a summary of the current simulation in a tree structure. Some items may
be recognized from Tutorial 1; for example the boundary condition objects in1, in2, and out.

Note
If you import CCL that references nonexistent mesh regions, you will get errors.
A number of file types can be used as sources to import CCL, including:
Simulation files (*.cfx)
Results files (*.res)
CFX-Solver input files (*.def)
The physics for a simulation can be saved to a CCL file at any time by selecting File > Export >
CCL.

4.4.3. Viewing Domain Settings

It is useful to review the options available in General mode.
Various domain settings can be set. These include:
Basic Settings
Specifies the location of the domain, coordinate frame settings and the fluids/solids that are present
in the domain. You also reference pressure, buoyancy and whether the domain is stationary or rotating.
Mesh motion can also be set.
Fluid Models
Sets models that apply to the fluid(s) in the domain, such as heat transfer, turbulence, combustion,
and radiation models. An option absent in Tutorial 1 is Turbulent Wall Functions, which is set to
Scalable. Wall functions model the flow in the near-wall region. For the k-epsilon turbulence model,
you should always use scalable wall functions.
Initialization
Sets the initial conditions for the current domain only. This is generally used when multiple domains
exist to enable setting different initial conditions in each domain, but can also be used to initialize
single-domain simulations. Global initialization allows the specification of initial conditions for all
domains that do not have domain-specific initialization.
1.

On the Outline tree view, under Simulation > Flow Analysis 1, double-click Default Domain.
The domain Default Domain is opened for editing.

2.

Click the Basic Settings tab and review, but do not change, the current settings.

3.

Click Fluid Models and review, but do not change, the current settings.

4.

Click Initialization and review, but do not change, the current settings.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

75

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

5.

Click Close.

4.4.4. Viewing the Boundary Condition Setting

For the k-epsilon turbulence model, you must specify the turbulent nature of the flow entering through
the inlet boundary. For this simulation, the default setting of Medium (Intensity = 5%) is used.
This is a sensible setting if you do not know the turbulence properties of the incoming flow.
1.

Under Default Domain, double-click in1.

2.

Click the Boundary Details tab and review the settings for Flow Regime, Mass and Momentum, Turbulence and Heat Transfer.

3.

Click Close.

4.4.5. Defining Solver Parameters

Solver Control parameters control aspects of the numerical-solution generation process.
In Tutorial 1 you set some solver control parameters, such as Advection Scheme and Timescale Control,
while other parameters were set automatically by CFX-Pre.
In this tutorial, High Resolution is used for the advection scheme. This is more accurate than the Upwind
Scheme used in Tutorial 1. You usually require a smaller time step when using this model. You can also
expect the solution to take a higher number of iterations to converge when using this model.
1.

Select Insert > Solver > Solver Control from the menu bar or click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

High Resolution

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

[a]

150

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

0.5 [s]

a. If your solution does not meet the convergence criteria after this number of time
steps, the CFX-Solver will stop.

76

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Click the Advanced Options tab.

Tip
To select Advanced Options you may need to click the navigation icons next to the
tabs to move forward or backward through the various tabs.

5.

Ensure that Global Dynamic Model Control is selected.

6.

Click OK.

4.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

Once all boundaries are created you move from CFX-Pre into CFX-Solver.
The simulation file, StaticMixerRef.cfx, contains the simulation definition in a format that can
be loaded by CFX-Pre, enabling you to complete (if applicable), restore, and modify the simulation
definition. The simulation file differs from the CFX-Solver input file in two important ways:
The simulation file can be saved at any time while defining the simulation.
The CFX-Solver input file is an encapsulated set of meshes and CCL defining a solver run, and is a subset of
the data in the simulation file.
1.

Click Define Run

The Write Solver Input File dialog box is displayed.

2.

If required, set the path to your working directory.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Setting

Value

File name

StaticMixerRef.def

Click Save.
The CFX-Solver input file (StaticMixerRef.def) is created. CFX-Solver Manager automatically
starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is set.

5.

If you are notified in CFX-Pre that the file already exists, click Overwrite.

6.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file.

4.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Two windows are displayed when CFX-Solver Manager runs. There is an adjustable split between the
windows that is oriented either horizontally or vertically, depending on the aspect ratio of the entire
CFX-Solver Manager window (also adjustable).
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

77

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

The tutorial follows this general workflow for generating the solution in CFX-Solver Manager:
4.5.1. Starting the Run with an Initial Values File
4.5.2. Confirming Results
4.5.3. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post

4.5.1. Starting the Run with an Initial Values File

In CFX-Solver Manager, the Define Run dialog box is visible and Solver Input File has automatically
been set to the CFX-Solver input file from CFX-Pre: StaticMixerRef.def.
Configure the settings so that the results from Tutorial 1 (contained in StaticMixer_001.res) will
be used to initialize the solution:
1.

Under the Initial Values tab, select Initial Values Specification.

2.

Set Initial Values Specification > Initial Values > Initial Values 1 > Initial Values 1 Settings > File
Name to StaticMixer_001.res.
If you did not complete the first tutorial, you can use StaticMixer_001.res from your working
directory.

3.

Set Use Mesh From to Solver Input File.

4.

Clear Initial Values Specification > Continue History From.

This will cause the CFX-Solver to use the results in the StaticMixer_001.res file as a basic
initial guess for the solution, and will cause the iteration count to start from 1 instead of from the
last iteration number in the initial values file.

5.

Click Start Run.

Note
Convergence information is plotted once the second outer loop iteration is complete.

4.5.2. Confirming Results

When the run is finished, specific information appears in the text window of CFX-Solver Manager.
To confirm that results interpolation was successful, look in the text window in CFX-Solver Manager.
The following text appears before the convergence history begins:
+----------------------------------------------------------+
| Initial Conditions Supplied by Fields in the Input Files |
+----------------------------------------------------------+

This lists the variables that were interpolated from the results file.
After the final iteration, a message similar to the following content appears in a message window:
StaticMixerRef_001 has completed normally.
Run concluded at: Fri Nov 27 11:57:57 2009

This indicates that CFX-Solver has successfully calculated the solution for the problem to the specified
accuracy or has run out of coefficient loops.
78

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

1.

In the Solver Run Finished Normally window, ensure that the check box next to Post-Process Results
is cleared to prevent CFD-Post from launching at this time.

2.

Click OK.

3.

Review the CFX-Solver Manager's Out File tab for details on the run results.

4.5.3. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post

Once CFX-Solver has finished, you can use CFD-Post to review the finished results.
1.

On the CFX-Solver Manager, select Tools > Post-Process Results or click Post-Process Results
toolbar.

2.

In the Start CFD-Post dialog box, next to Results File, ensure that StaticMixerRef_001.res is set.
If it is not, click Browse

3.

in the

and select StaticMixerRef_001.res (located in the working directory).

If using CFX-Solver in stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

This forces stand-alone CFX-Solver to close. This option is not required in Workbench.

4.

Click OK.
After a short pause, CFD-Post starts.

4.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In the following sections, you will explore the differences between the mesh and the results from this
tutorial and Tutorial 1.

4.6.1. Creating a Slice Plane

More information exists for use by CFD-Post in this tutorial than in Tutorial 1 because the slice plane is
more detailed.
Once a new slice plane is created it can be compared with Tutorial 1. There are three noticeable differences between the two slice planes.
Around the edges of the mixer geometry there are several layers of narrow rectangles. This is the region
where the mesh contains prismatic elements (which are created as inflation layers). The bulk of the geometry
contains tetrahedral elements.
There are more lines on the plane than there were in Tutorial 1. This is because the slice plane intersects
with more mesh elements.
The curves of the mixer are smoother than in Tutorial 1 because the finer mesh better represents the true
geometry.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

2.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Plane or under Location, click Plane.

3.

In the Insert Plane dialog box, type Slice and click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

79

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

The Geometry, Color, Render and View tabs enable you to switch between settings.
4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Domains

Default Domain

Definition
> Method

XY Plane

Definition

Render

>Z

1 [m]

Plane Type

Slice

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Z.

7.

If necessary, click Zoom Box

8.

Compare the on-screen image with the equivalent picture from Simulating Flow in a Static Mixer Using
CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 9) (in the section Rendering Slice Planes (p. 29)).

and zoom in on the geometry to view it in greater detail.

4.6.2. Coloring the Slice Plane

Here, you will color the plane by temperature.

80

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

1.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode [a]

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Range

Global

Show Faces

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

(Cleared)

Render

a. A mode setting of Constant would enable you to color the plane with a fixed
color.

2.

Click Apply.

4.6.3. Loading Results from Tutorial 1 for Comparison

In CFD-Post, you may load multiple results files into the same instance for comparison.
1.

To load the results file from Tutorial 1, select File > Load Results or click Load Results

2.

(Do not click Open until instructed to do so.) In the Load Results File dialog box, select StaticMixer_001.res from your working directory.

3.

On the right side of the dialog box, there are three frames:
Case options
Additional actions
CFX run history and multi-configuration options.
Under Case options, select Keep current cases loaded and ensure that Open in new view is selected.

4.

Under Additional actions, ensure that the Clear user state before loading check box is cleared.

5.

Under CFX run history and multi-configuration options, ensure that Load only the last results is selected.

6.

Click Open to load the results.

In the tree view, there is now a second group of domains, meshes and boundary conditions with
the heading StaticMixer_001.
In the 3D Viewer, there are two viewports named View 1 and View 2; the former shows StaticMixer_001 and the latter shows StaticMixerRef_001.

7.

Double-click the Wireframe object under User Locations and Plots.

8.

In the Definition tab, set Edge Angle to 5 [degree].

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

81

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

9.

Click Apply.

10. Click Synchronize camera in displayed views

so that all viewports maintain the same camera position.

11. Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).
Both meshes are now displayed in a line along the Y axis. Notice that one mesh is of a higher resolution than the other.
12. Set Edge Angle to 30 [degree].
13. Click Apply.

4.6.4. Comparing Slice Planes Using Multiple Views

The visibility status of each object is maintained separately for each viewport. This allows some planes
to be shown while others are hidden. However, you can also use the Synchronize visibility in displayed
views

to synchronize the visibility of objects that you add.

1.

Under User Locations and Plots, select the check box beside Slice.

2.

Right-click in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z.
Note the difference in temperature distribution.

3.

In the viewer toolbar, click Synchronize visibility in displayed views

4.

Click in View 1 in the 3D Viewer, then clear the visibility check box for Slice in the Outline tree view.

5.

Click in View 2. Note that the visibility check box for Slice has been re-selected as it describes the state
of the plane for View 2. Clear the visibility check box for Slice in this view.

6.

To return to a single viewport, select the option with a single rectangle.

7.

Ensure that the visibility check box for Slice is cleared.

8.

Right-click StaticMixer_001 in the tree view and select Unload.

82

to deselect the option.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.6.5. Viewing the Surface Mesh on the Outlet

In this part of the tutorial, you will view the mesh on the outlet. You will see five layers of inflated elements against the wall. You will also see the triangular faces of the tetrahedral elements closer to the
center of the outlet.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

2.

In the tree view, ensure that the visibility check box for StaticMixerRef_001 > Default Domain
> out is selected, then double-click out to open it for editing.
Because the boundary location geometry was defined in CFX-Pre, the details view does not display
a Geometry tab as it did for the planes.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Render

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh
Lines

(Selected)

Color Mode

User Specified

Line Color

(Select any light

color)

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Click Zoom Box

6.

Zoom in on the geometry to view out in greater detail.

7.

Click Rotate

8.

Rotate the image as required to clearly see the mesh.

on the Viewing Tools toolbar.

4.6.6. Looking at the Inflated Elements in Three Dimensions

To show more clearly what effect inflation has on the shape of the elements, you will use volume objects
to show two individual elements. The first element that will be shown is a normal tetrahedral element;
the second is a prismatic element from an inflation layer of the mesh.
Leave the surface mesh on the outlet visible to help see how surface and volume meshes are related.
1.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Volume or, under Location click Volume.

2.

In the Insert Volume dialog box, type Tet Volume and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

83

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

Tab

Setting

Value

> Method

Sphere

Definition
> Point

[a]

0.08, 0, -2

Definition
> Radius

0.14 [m]

Definition
> Mode

Below
Intersection

Inclusive [b]

(Cleared)

Color

Color

Red

Render

Show Faces
> Transparency

0.3

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Width

Show Mesh Lines

> Color Mode

User Specified

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Color

Grey

a. The z sliders minimum value corresponds to the minimum z value of the entire
geometry, which, in this case, occurs at the outlet.
b. Only elements that are entirely contained within the sphere volume will be
included.

4.

Click Apply to create the volume object.

5.

Right-click Tet Volume and choose Duplicate.

6.

In the Duplicate Tet Volume dialog box, type Prism Volume and click OK.

7.

Double-click Prism Volume.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Point

84

Value

-0.22, 0.4, -1.85

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Color

9.

> Radius

0.206 [m]

Color

Orange

Click Apply.

4.6.7. Viewing the Surface Mesh on the Mixer Body

1.

Double-click the Default Domain Default object.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Render

Show Faces

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Line Width

Click Apply.

4.6.8. Viewing the Layers of Inflated Elements on a Plane

You will see the layers of inflated elements on the wall of the main body of the mixer. Within the body
of the mixer, there will be many lines that are drawn wherever the face of a mesh element intersects
the slice plane.
1.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Plane or under Location, click Plane.

2.

In the Insert Plane dialog box, type Slice 2 and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

YZ Plane

Definition

Render

>X

0 [m]

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Turn off the visibility of all objects except Slice 2.

6.

To see the plane clearly, right-click in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -X.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

85

Flow in a Static Mixer (Refined Mesh)

4.6.9. Viewing the Mesh Statistics

You can use the Report Viewer to check the quality of your mesh. For example, you can load a .def
file into CFD-Post and check the mesh quality before running the .def file in the solver.
1.

Click the Report Viewer tab (located below the viewer window).
A report appears. Look at the table shown in the Mesh Report section.

2.

Double-click Report > Mesh Report in the Outline tree view.

3.

In the Mesh Report details view, select Statistics > Maximum Face Angle.

4.

Click Refresh Preview.

Note that a new table, showing the maximum face angle for all elements in the mesh, has been
added to the Mesh Report section of the report. The maximum face angle is reported as 148.95.

As a result of generating this mesh statistic for the report, a new variable, Maximum Face Angle,
has been created and stored at every node. This variable will be used in the next section.

4.6.10. Viewing the Mesh Elements with Largest Face Angle

In this section, you will visualize the mesh elements that have a Maximum Face Angle value greater
than 140.
1.

Click the 3D Viewer tab (located below the viewer window).

2.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

3.

In the Outline tree view, select the visibility check box of Wireframe.

4.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Volume or under Location, click Volume.

5.

In the Insert Volume dialog box, type Max Face Angle Volume and click OK.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Isovolume

Definition
> Variable

Maximum Face
Angle

[a]

Definition
> Mode

Above Value

Definition

86

> Value

140 [degree]

Inclusive [b]

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

a. Select Maximum Face Angle from the larger list of variables available by
clicking

to the right of the Variable box.

b. This includes any elements that have at least one node with a variable value
greater than or equal to the given value.

7.

Click Apply.
The volume object appears in the viewer.

4.6.11. Viewing the Mesh Elements with Largest Face Angle Using a Point
Next, you will create a point object to show a node that has the maximum value of Maximum Face
Angle. The point object will be represented by a 3D yellow crosshair symbol. In order to avoid obscuring
the point object with the volume object, you may want to turn off the visibility of the latter.
1.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Point or under Location, click Point.

2.

Click OK to use the default name.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Variable Maximum

Definition
> Location

Default Domain

Definition

Symbol

4.

> Variable

Maximum Face
Angle

Symbol Size

Click Apply.

4.6.12. Quitting CFD-Post

1.

When you are finished, select File > Quit to exit CFD-Post.

2.

If prompted by a dialog box, save the state at your discretion.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

87

88

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 5: Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

This tutorial includes:
5.1.Tutorial Features
5.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
5.3. Preparing the Working Directory
5.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
5.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
5.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

5.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Applying a profile boundary using data stored in a file.
Visualizing the velocity on a boundary in CFX-Pre.
Using the CFX Expression Language (CEL) to describe temperature-dependent fluid properties in CFX-Pre.
Using the k-epsilon turbulence model.
Using streamlines in CFD-Post to track flow through the domain.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Boundary Conditions

Boundary Profile
Visualization
Inlet (Profile)
Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

CEL (CFX Expression

Language)
CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Default Locators

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

89

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

Component

Feature

Details
Outline Plot (Wireframe)
Slice Plane
Streamline

Other

Changing the Color Range

Expression Details View
Legend
Viewing the Mesh

5.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

The goal of this tutorial is to understand the general approach taken when working with an existing
mesh. In this tutorial, you will go through the three main steps when solving a problem, which are defining a simulation using General mode in CFX-Pre, obtaining a solution using CFX-Solver Manager and
viewing the results in CFD-Post.
The injection mixing pipe, common in the process industry, is composed of two pipes: one with a larger
diameter than the other. Analyzing and optimizing the mixing process is often critical for many chemical processes. CFD is useful not only in identifying problem areas (where mixing is poor), but also in
testing new designs before they are implemented.
The geometry for this example consists of a circular pipe of diameter 1.0 m with a 90 bend, and a
smaller pipe of diameter 0.3 m which joins with the main pipe at an oblique angle. Water at 315.0 K
enters in the 0.3 m diameter pipe at a rate of 5.0 m/s while water at 285.0 K enters in the 1.0 m diameter
pipe at a rate of 0.5 m/s.
Figure 5.1: Injection Mixing Pipe

In this tutorial, you will establish a general workflow for analyzing the flow of the water fluid into and
out of an injection pipe. First, a simulation will be created and an existing mesh will be imported in
CFX-Pre. A viscosity expression will also be created, and will be used to modify the water properties
later on in this tutorial to increase the solution accuracy. Finally, initial values will be set and a solution

90

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

will be found using CFX-Solver Manager. The results will then be viewed in CFD-Post. Streamlines originating from the main inlet will be generated to show the flow of the water into and out of the injection
pipe.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

5.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
InjectMixerMesh.gtm
InjectMixer_velocity_profile.csv
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

5.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The tutorial follows this general workflow for setting up the case in CFX-Pre:
5.4.1. Importing a Mesh
5.4.2. Setting Temperature-Dependent Material Properties
5.4.3. Plotting an Expression
5.4.4. Evaluating an Expression
5.4.5. Modify Material Properties
5.4.6. Creating the Domain
5.4.7. Creating the Side Inlet Boundary
5.4.8. Creating the Main Inlet Boundary
5.4.9. Creating the Main Outlet Boundary
5.4.10. Setting Initial Values
5.4.11. Setting Solver Control
5.4.12. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run InjectMixer.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 100).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

91

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Ensure General is selected and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type InjectMixer.

6.

Click Save.

7.

Proceed to Importing a Mesh (p. 92).

5.4.1. Importing a Mesh

The following steps will demonstrate how to import a mesh.
1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

InjectMixerMesh.gtm

3.

Click Open.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Y up) from the
shortcut menu.

5.4.2. Setting Temperature-Dependent Material Properties

Viscosity varies with temperature, which implies that the water will behave differently when coming
through the 1.0 m and the 0.3 m diameter pipes. In the following steps, you will create an expression
for viscosity as a function of temperature. This expression will then be used to modify the properties
of the library material: Water to increase the accuracy of the solution. By setting temperature-dependent
material properties, Viscosity will be made to vary linearly with temperature between the following
conditions:

=1.8E-03 N s m-2 at T=275.0 K

=5.45E-04 N s m-2 at T=325.0 K

The variable T (Temperature) is a CFX System Variable recognized by CFX-Pre, denoting static temperature. All variables, expressions, locators, functions, and constants can be viewed by double-clicking
the appropriate entry (such as Additional Variables or Expressions) in the tree view.
All expressions must have consistent units. You should be careful if using temperature in an expression
with units other than [K].
The Expressions tab lets you define, modify, evaluate, plot, copy, delete and browse through expressions
used within CFX-Pre.

92

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > Expression.

2.

In the New Expression dialog box, type Tupper.

3.

Click OK.
The details view for the Tupper equation is displayed.

4.

Under Definition, type 325 [K].

5.

Click Apply to create the expression.

The expression is added to the list of existing expressions.

6.

Ensure that no expression is highlighted, then right-click in the Expressions workspace and select Insert
> Expression.

7.

In the New Expression dialog box, type Tlower.

8.

Click OK.

9.

Under Definition, type 275 [K].

10. Click Apply to create the expression.

The expression is added to the list of existing expressions.
11. Create expressions for Visupper, Vislower and VisT using the following values.
Name

Definition

Visupper

5.45E-04 [N s m^-2]

Vislower

1.8E-03 [N s m^-2]

VisT

Vislower+(Visupper-Vislower)*(T-Tlower)/(Tupper-Tlower)

5.4.3. Plotting an Expression

1.

Right-click VisT in the Expressions tree view, and then select Edit.
The Expressions details view for VisT appears.

Tip
Alternatively, double-clicking the expression also opens the Expressions details view.

2.

Click the Plot tab and configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Plot

Number of Points

10

(Selected)

Start of Range

275 [K]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

93

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

Tab

3.

Setting

Value

End of Range

325 [K]

Click Plot Expression.

A plot showing the variation of the expression VisT with the variable T is displayed.

5.4.4. Evaluating an Expression

1.

Click the Evaluate tab.

2.

In T, type 300 [K].

This is between the start and end range defined in the last module.

3.

Click Evaluate Expression.

A value of around 0.0011[kg m^-1 s^-1] for VisT at the given value of T appears in the Value
field.

5.4.5. Modify Material Properties

As mentioned earlier in this tutorial, the default material properties of Water will be modified using
the Viscosity expression to increase the accuracy of the solution.
1.

Click the Outline tab.

2.

Double-click Water under Materials to display the Basic Settings tab.

3.

Click the Material Properties tab.

4.

Expand Transport Properties.

5.

Select Dynamic Viscosity.

6.

Under Dynamic Viscosity, click in Dynamic Viscosity.

7.

Click Enter Expression

8.

Enter the expression VisT into the data box.

9.

Click OK.

5.4.6. Creating the Domain

The domain will be set to use the thermal energy heat transfer model, and the
model.

(k-epsilon) turbulence

Both Basic Settings and Fluid Models are changed in this module. The Initialization tab is for setting
domain-specific initial conditions, which are not used in this tutorial. Instead, global initialization is used
to set the starting conditions.

94

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Select Insert > Domain from the main menu or click Domain

2.

In the Insert Domain dialog box, type InjectMixer.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

B1.P3

Fluid and Particle

Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Fluid 1
> Material

Water

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

5.

Click Fluid Models.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

0 [atm]

Value

Heat Transfer
> Option

7.

Thermal Energy

Click OK.

5.4.7. Creating the Side Inlet Boundary

The side inlet boundary must be defined.
1.

Select Insert > Boundary from the main menu or click Boundary

2.

Set Name to side inlet.

Note
A boundary named after a region will use that region as its location by default.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

95

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

side inlet

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

5 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

5.

315 [K]

Click OK.

5.4.8. Creating the Main Inlet Boundary

The main inlet boundary for the large pipe must be defined. This inlet is defined using a velocity profile.
Profile data must be initialized before the boundary can be created.
You will create a plot showing the velocity profile data, marked by higher velocities near the center of
the inlet, and lower velocities near the inlet walls.
1.

Select Tools > Initialize Profile Data.

The Initialize Profile Data dialog box appears.

2.

Under Data File, click Browse

3.

From your working directory, select InjectMixer_velocity_profile.csv.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Click OK.
The profile data is read into memory.

Note
After profile data has been initialized from a file, the profile data file should not be deleted or otherwise removed from its directory. By default, the full file path to the profile
data file is stored in CFX-Pre, and the profile data file is read directly by CFX-Solver each
time the solver is started or restarted.

96

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

6.

Select Insert > Boundary from the main menu or click Boundary

7.

Set name Name to main inlet.

8.

Click OK.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

main inlet

Profile Boundary
Conditions
> Use Profile Data

(Selected)

Profile Boundary
Setup
> Profile Name

main inlet

10. Click Generate Values.

This causes the profile values of U, V, W to be applied at the nodes on the main inlet boundary,
and U, V, W entries to be made in Boundary Details. In order to later reset the velocity values at
the main inlet to match those that were originally read from the boundary condition profile file,
revisit Basic Settings for this boundary and click Generate Values.
11. Configure the following setting(s):
Tab

Setting

Boundary Details

Flow Regime
> Option

Value

Subsonic

Mass And
Momentum
> Option

Cart. Vel.
Components

Turbulence
> Option

Medium (Intensity
= 5%)

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer

Plot Options

> Static Temperature

285 [K]

Boundary Contour

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

97

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary Contour
> Profile Variable

12. Click OK.

13. Zoom into the main inlet to view the inlet velocity contour.

5.4.9. Creating the Main Outlet Boundary

In this module you create the outlet boundary. All other surfaces that have not been explicitly assigned
a boundary will remain in the InjectMixer Default object, which is shown in the tree view. This
boundary uses a No-Slip Adiabatic Wall by default.
1.

Select Insert > Boundary from the main menu or click Boundary

2.

Set Name to outlet.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

outlet

Boundary Details

Flow Regime
> Option

Subsonic

Mass and Momentum

5.

> Option

Average Static
Pressure

Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Click OK.

5.4.10. Setting Initial Values

For this tutorial, the initial values will be set automatically. An automatic guess is sufficient for this
particular problem.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Click Close.

98

and review, but do not change, the current settings.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

5.4.11. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

Value

High Resolution

Convergence
Control
> Max. Iterations

50

Convergence
Control
> Fluid Timescale
Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence
Control
> Fluid Timescale
Control
> Physical Timescale

2 [s]

[a]

Convergence
Criteria
> Residual Type

RMS

Convergence
Criteria
> Residual Target

1.E-4

[b]

a. The physical timescale that will be set up is derived from the pipe diameter (1
m) and the rate at which the water flows in the pipe (0.5 m/s).
b. An RMS value of at least 1.E-5 is usually required for adequate convergence, but
the default value is sufficient for demonstration purposes.

3.

Click OK.

5.4.12. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

Once the problem has been defined you move from General mode into CFX-Solver.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

99

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

InjectMixer.def

Click Save.
The CFX-Solver input file (InjectMixer.def) is created. CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts
and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is set.

4.

When you are finished, select File > Quit in CFX-Pre.

5.

Click Save & Quit if prompted, to save InjectMixer.cfx

6.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 100).

5.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

You will now generate a solution for the CFD simulation that you just prepared.

5.5.1. Starting the Run

At this point, CFX-Solver Manager is running, and the Define Run dialog box is displayed, with the CFXSolver input file set.
1.

Click Start Run.

2.

When the run ends, ensure that the check box next to Post-Process Results is cleared and click OK to
close the dialog box.

5.5.2. Moving from CFX-Solver Manager to CFD-Post

1.

Select Tools > Post-Process Results or click Post-Process Results

2.

If using CFX-Solver Manager in stand-alone mode, optionally select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

3.

Click OK.

5.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

When CFD-Post starts, the viewer and Outline workspace display by default.
The tutorial follows this general workflow for viewing results in CFD-Post:
5.6.1. Modifying the Outline of the Geometry
5.6.2. Creating and Modifying Streamlines Originating from the Main Inlet
5.6.3. Modifying Streamline Color Ranges
5.6.4. Coloring Streamlines with a Constant Color
5.6.5. Creating Streamlines Originating from the Side Inlet
5.6.6. Examining Turbulence Kinetic Energy

100

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

5.6.7. Quitting CFD-Post

5.6.1. Modifying the Outline of the Geometry

Throughout this and the following examples, use your mouse and the Viewing Tools toolbar to manipulate the geometry as required at any time.
1.

In the tree view, double-click Wireframe.

2.

Set the Edge Angle to 15 [degree].

3.

Click Apply.

5.6.2. Creating and Modifying Streamlines Originating from the Main Inlet
When you complete this module you will see streamlines (mainly blue and green) starting at the main
inlet of the geometry and proceeding to the outlet. Above where the side pipe meets the main pipe,
there is an area where the flow re-circulates rather than flowing roughly tangent to the direction of the
pipe walls.
1.

Select Insert > Streamline from the main menu or click Streamline

2.

Under Name, type MainStream.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Type

3D Streamline

Definition
> Start From

main inlet

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer, select Predefined Camera from the shortcut menu, then select
Isometric View (Y up).
The pipe is displayed with the main inlet in the bottom right of the viewer.

5.6.3. Modifying Streamline Color Ranges

You can change the appearance of the streamlines using the Range setting on the Color tab.
1.

Under User Locations and Plots, modify the streamline object MainStream by applying the following
settings
Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Range

Local

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

101

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

2.

Click Apply.
The color map is fitted to the range of velocities found along the streamlines. The streamlines
therefore collectively contain every color in the color map.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Range

User Specified

Min

0.2 [m s^-1]

Max

2.2 [m s^-1]

Note
Portions of streamlines that have values outside the range shown in the legend are
colored according to the color at the nearest end of the legend. When using tubes or
symbols (which contain faces), more accurate colors are obtained with lighting turned
off.

4.

Click Apply.
The streamlines are colored using the specified range of velocity values.

5.6.4. Coloring Streamlines with a Constant Color

1.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Constant

Color

(Green)

Color can be set to green by selecting it from the color pallet, or by repeatedly clicking on the
color box until it cycles through to the default green color.
2.

Click Apply.

5.6.5. Creating Streamlines Originating from the Side Inlet

The following steps illustrate using this feature to add a streamline object that originates at the side
inlet.
1.

Right-click MainStream and select Duplicate from the shortcut menu.

2.

In the Name window, type SideStream.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Double-click the newly created streamline, SideStream.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

102

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Color

6.

Value

> Start From

side inlet

Mode

Constant

Color

(Red)

Click Apply.
Red streamlines appear, starting from the side inlet.

7.

For better view, select Isometric View (Y up).

5.6.6. Examining Turbulence Kinetic Energy

Away from walls, turbulence kinetic energy has an influence on the level of mixing. A plane will be
created to view the Turbulence Kinetic Energy variable within the domain.

Note
This module has multiple changes compiled into single steps in preparation for other tutorials
that provide fewer specific instructions.
1.

Turn off the visibility of both the MainStream and the SideStream objects.

2.

Create a plane named Plane 1 that is normal to X and passing through the X = 0 Point. To do so, specific instructions follow.

3.

a.

From the main menu, select Insert > Location > Plane and click OK.

b.

In the details view, set Definition > Method to YZ Plane and X to 0 [m].

c.

Click Apply.

Color the plane using the variable Turbulence Kinetic Energy, to show regions of high turbulence.
To do so, apply the settings below.
Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Turbulence Kinetic
Energy

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Experiment with other variables to color this plane (for example, Temperature to show the temperature
mixing of the two streams).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

103

Flow in a Process Injection Mixing Pipe

Commonly used variables are in the drop-down menu. A full list of available variables can be viewed
by clicking

next to the Variable data box.

5.6.7. Quitting CFD-Post

1.

When you are finished, select File > Quit to exit CFD-Post.

2.

If prompted by a dialog box, save the state at your discretion.

104

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 6: Flow from a Circular Vent

This tutorial includes:
6.1.Tutorial Features
6.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
6.3. Preparing the Working Directory
6.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
6.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
6.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

6.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Setting up a transient problem in CFX-Pre.
Using an opening type boundary in CFX-Pre.
Making use of multiple configurations in CFX-Pre
Modeling smoke using additional variables in CFX-Pre.
Visualizing a smoke plume using an Isosurface in CFD-Post.
Creating an image for printing, and generating a movie in CFD-Post.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State
Transient

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Opening
Wall: No-Slip

Timestep

Auto Time Scale

Transient Example

Configuration

Multiple

Transient Results File

CFD-Post

Plots

Animation
Isosurface

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

105

Flow from a Circular Vent

Component

Feature

Details

Other

Auto Annotation
Movie Generation
Printing
Time Step Selection
Title/Text
Transient Animation

6.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

In this example, a chimney stack releases smoke that is dispersed into the atmosphere with an oncoming
side wind of 1 m/s. The turbulence will be set to intensity and length scale with a value of 0.05, which
corresponds to 5% turbulence, a medium level intensity, and with an eddy length scale value of 0.25
m. The goal of this tutorial is to model the dispersion of the smoke from the chimney stack over time.
Unlike previous tutorials, which were steady-state, this example is time-dependent. Initially, no smoke
is being released. Subsequently, the chimney starts to release smoke. As a postprocessing exercise, you
produce an animation that illustrates how the plume of smoke develops with time.

If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

106

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

6.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

CircVentMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

6.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

This section describes the step-by-step definition of the flow physics in CFX-Pre for a simulation with
two analyses. First is a steady-state analysis with no smoke being produced by the chimney. The second
analysis takes the setup for the steady-state and adapts it for a transient analysis. The results from the
steady-state analysis will be used as the initial guess for the transient analysis.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run CircVent.pre
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 121).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Set File name to CircVent.

6.

Click Save.

6.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

CircVentMesh.gtm

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

107

Flow from a Circular Vent

3.

Click Open.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

6.4.2. Creating an Additional Variable

In this tutorial an Additional Variable (non-reacting scalar component) will be used to model the dispersion of smoke from the vent.

Note
While smoke is not required for the steady-state simulation, including it here prevents you
from having to set up time value interpolation in the transient analysis.
1.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > Additional Variable.

2.

Set Name to smoke.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Set Variable Type to Volumetric.

5.

Set Units to [kg m^-3].

6.

Click OK.

6.4.3. Defining the Steady-State Analysis

The existing analysis will be set up as steady-state.

6.4.3.1. Renaming the Analysis

To rename the existing analysis:
1.

From the Outline Tree, right-click Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 and click Rename.

2.

Rename the analysis to Steady State Analysis.

6.4.3.2. Creating the Domain

You will create a fluid domain that includes support for smoke as an Additional Variable.
1.

Select Insert > Domain from the menu bar, or click Domain
click OK.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

> Location

108

, then set the name to CircVent and

Value

B1.P3

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Fluid 1
> Material

Air at 25 C

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid Models

0 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

None

Additional Variable Models

> Additional Variable

smoke

Additional Variable Models

> Additional Variable
> smoke

(Selected)

Additional Variable Models

> Additional Variable
> smoke
> Kinematic Diffusivity

(Selected)

Additional Variable Models

> Additional Variable
> smoke
> Kinematic Diffusivity
> Kinematic Diffusivity

1.0E-5 [m^2 s^-1]

[a]

a. 1.0E-5 [m^2 s^-1] is a representative kinematic diffusivity value for smoke in air.

3.

Click OK.

6.4.3.3. Creating the Boundaries

This is an example of external flow, since fluid is flowing over an object and not through an enclosure
such as a pipe network (which would be an example of internal flow). In external flow problems, some
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

109

Flow from a Circular Vent

inlets will be made sufficiently large that they do not affect the CFD solution. However, the length scale
values produced by the Default Intensity and AutoCompute Length Scale option for turbulence are
based on inlet size. They are appropriate for internal flow problems and particularly, cylindrical pipes.
In general, you need to set the turbulence intensity and length scale explicitly for large inlets in external
flow problems. If you do not have a value for the length scale, you can use a length scale based on a
typical length of the object over which the fluid is flowing. In this case, you will choose a turbulence
length scale that is one-tenth of the diameter of the vent.
For parts of the boundary where the flow direction changes, or is unknown, an opening boundary can
be used. An opening boundary allows flow to both enter and leave the fluid domain during the course
of the analysis.

6.4.3.3.1. Inlet Boundary

You will create the inlet boundary with velocity components set consistently with the problem description.
1.

Select Insert > Boundary from the menu bar or click Boundary

2.

Set Name to Wind.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

Wind

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Cart. Vel.
Components

Mass and Momentum

>U

1 [m s^-1]

Mass and Momentum

>V

0 [m s^-1]

Mass and Momentum

>W

0 [m s^-1]

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.05

[a]

Turbulence
> Eddy Length Scale

110

0.25 [m]

[a]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Option

Value

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Add. Var. Value

0 [kg m^-3]

[b]

a. From the problem description.

b. The smoke value that will be set up corresponds to no smoke at the inlet.

5.

Click OK.

Note
The boundary marker vectors used to display boundary conditions (inlets, outlets, openings)
are normal to the boundary surface regardless of the actual direction specification. To plot
vectors in the direction of flow, select Boundary Vector under the Plot Options tab for the
inlet boundary, and on the Labels and Markers Options tab (accessible from Case Options
> Labels and Markers on the Outline tree view), ensure that Settings > Show Boundary
Markers is selected and Show Inlet Markers is cleared.

6.4.3.3.2. Opening Boundary

You will create an opening boundary with pressure and flow direction specified. If fluid enters the domain
through the opening, it should have turbulence intensity and length scale, as well as smoke concentration,
set to the same values as for the inlet.
1.

Select Insert > Boundary from the menu bar or click Boundary

2.

Set Name to Atmosphere.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Opening

Location

Atmosphere

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Opening Pres. and

Dirn

Mass and Momentum

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

111

Flow from a Circular Vent

Tab

Setting

Value

> Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Flow Direction
> Option

Normal to
Boundary Condition

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.05

Turbulence
> Eddy Length Scale

0.25 [m]

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Option

Value

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Add. Var. Value

5.

0 [kg m^-3]

Click OK.

6.4.3.3.3. Inlet for the Vent

You will create the vent inlet boundary with a normal velocity of 0.01 m/s as prescribed in the problem
description and no smoke release. The turbulence level for the inlet vent will be determined from turbulence intensity and eddy viscosity ratio.
1.

Select Insert > Boundary from the menu bar or click Boundary

2.

Set Name to Vent.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

Vent

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Normal Speed

112

0.01 [m s^-1]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and Eddy

Viscosity Ratio

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.05

Turbulence
> Eddy Viscosity Ratio

10

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Option

Value

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Add. Var. Value

5.

0 [kg m^-3]

Click OK.

6.4.3.4. Setting Initial Values

For this tutorial, the automatic initial values are suitable. Review and apply the default settings:
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Review the settings for velocity, pressure, turbulence and the smoke.

3.

Click OK.

6.4.3.5. Setting Solver Control

CFX-Solver has the ability to calculate physical time step size for steady-state problems. If you do not
know the time step size to set for your problem, you can use the Auto Timescale option.
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

Value

75

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

113

Flow from a Circular Vent

3.

Note that Convergence Control > Fluid Timescale Control > Timescale Control is set to Auto
Timescale.

4.

Click OK.

6.4.4. Defining the Transient Analysis

In this part of the tutorial, you will duplicate the steady-state analysis and adapt it to set up a transient
flow analysis in CFX-Pre.

6.4.4.1. Creating the Analysis

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation > Steady State Analysis and select Duplicate.

2.

Right-click Simulation > Copy of Steady State Analysis and select Rename.

3.

Rename the analysis to Transient Analysis.

6.4.4.2. Modifying the Analysis Type

In this step you will set the new analysis to a type of transient. Later, you will set the concentration of
smoke for the transient analysis to rise asymptotically to its final concentration with time, so it is necessary
to ensure that the interval between the time steps is smaller at the beginning of the simulation than
at the end.
1.

In the Outline tree view, ensure that Simulation > Transient Analysis is expanded.

2.

Right-click Simulation > Transient Analysis > Analysis Type and select Edit.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Analysis Type
> Option

Value

Transient

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Option

Total Time

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Total Time

30 [s]

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Timesteps

4*0.25, 2*0.5, 2*1.0,

13*2.0 [s]

[a]

Analysis Type

114

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Initial Time

> Option

Automatic with Value

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Time

0 [s]

a. This list specifies 4 time steps of 0.25 [s], then 2 time steps of 0.5 [s], and so on.
Enter the list without the units, then set the units in the drop-down list. Do NOT
click Enter Expression

4.

to enter lists of values.

Click OK.

6.4.4.3. Modifying the Boundary Conditions

The only boundary condition that needs altering for the transient analysis is the Vent boundary condition. In the steady-state calculation, this boundary had a small amount of air flowing through it. In the
transient calculation, more air passes through the vent and there is a time-dependent concentration of
smoke in the air. This is initially zero, but builds up to a larger value. The smoke concentration will be
specified using the CFX Expression Language.

6.4.4.3.1. To Modify the Vent Inlet Boundary Condition

1.

In the Outline tree view, ensure that Simulation > Transient Analysis > CircVent is expanded.

2.

Right-click Simulation > Transient Analysis > CircVent > Vent and select Edit.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

Value

> Normal Speed

0.2 [m s^-1]

Leave the Vent details view open for now.

You are going to create an expression for smoke concentration. The concentration is zero for time
t=0 and builds up to a maximum of 1 kg m^-3.
4.

Create a new expression by selecting Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > Expression from
the menu bar. Set the name to TimeConstant.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Name

Definition

TimeConstant

3 [s]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

115

Flow from a Circular Vent

6.

Click Apply to create the expression.

7.

Create the following expressions with specific settings, remembering to click Apply after each is defined:
Name

Definition

FinalConcentration

1 [kg m^-3]

ExpFunction

FinalConcentration*abs(1-exp(-t/TimeConstant))
[a]

a. When entering this function, you can select most of the required items by
right-clicking in the Definition window in the Expression details view instead
of typing them. The names of the existing expressions are under the Expressions
menu. The exp and abs functions are under Functions > CEL. The variable t is
under Variables.

Note
The abs function takes the modulus (or magnitude) of its argument. Even though the
expression (1- exp (-t/TimeConstant)) can never be less than zero, the abs function is
included to ensure that the numerical error in evaluating it near to zero will never make
the expression evaluate to a negative number.

Next, you will visualize how the concentration of smoke issued from the vent varies with time.

6.4.4.3.2. Plotting Smoke Concentration

1.

Double-click ExpFunction in the Expressions tree view.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Plot

(Selected)

t
> Start of Range

0 [s]

t
> End of Range

3.

30 [s]

Click Plot Expression.

The button name then changes to Define Plot, as shown.

116

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

As can be seen, the smoke concentration rises to its asymptotic value reaching 90% of its final
value at around 7 seconds.
4.

Click the Boundary: Vent tab.

In the next step, you will apply the expression ExpFunction to the additional variable smoke
as it applies to the Transient Analysis boundary Vent.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary
Details

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Option

Value

Additional Variables
> smoke
> Add. Var. Value

ExpFunction
[a]

a. Click Enter Expression

6.

to enter text.

Click OK.

6.4.4.4. Initialization Values

When the Transient Analysis is run, the initial values to the CFX-Solver will be taken from the
results of the Steady State Analysis. The steady state and transient analyses will be sequenced
by setting up the configurations of these analyses in a subsequent step. For the moment, you can leave
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

117

Flow from a Circular Vent

all of the initialization data set for the Transient Analysis to Automatic and the initial values
will be read automatically from the Steady State Analysis results. Therefore, there is no need
to revisit the initialization settings.

6.4.4.5. Modifying the Solver Control

1.

In the Outline tree view, ensure that Simulation > Transient Analysis > Solver is expanded.

2.

Right-click Simulation > Transient Analysis > Solver > Solver Control and select Edit.

3.

Set Convergence Control > Max. Coeff. Loops to 3.

4.

Leave the other settings at their default values.

5.

Click OK to set the solver control parameters.

6.4.4.6. Setting Output Control

To enable results to be viewed at different time steps, it is necessary to create transient results files at
specified times. The transient results files do not have to contain all solution data. In this step, you will
create minimal transient results files.
1.

In the Outline tree view, double-click Simulation > Transient Analysis > Solver > Output
Control.

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

In the Transient Results tree view, click Add new item

click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of Transient Results 1:

, set Name to Transient Results 1, and

Setting

Value

Option

Selected Variables

Output Variables List

Pressure, Velocity, smoke

[a]

Output Frequency
> Option

Time List

Output Frequency
> Time List

1, 2, 3 [s]

[b]

a. Click the Ellipsis

icon to select items if they do not appear in the drop-down
list. Use the Ctrl key to select multiple items.
b. Do not click Enter Expression
to enter lists of values. Enter the list without
the units, then set the units in the drop-down list.

5.

118

Click Apply.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

6.

In the Transient Results tree view, click Add new item

click OK.

set Name to Transient Results 2, and

This creates a second transient results object. Each object can result in the production of many
transient results files.
7.

Configure the following setting(s) of Transient Results 2:

Setting

Value

Option

Selected Variables

Output Variables List

Pressure, Velocity, smoke

Output Frequency
> Option

Time Interval

Output Frequency
> Time Interval

4 [s]

[a]

a. A transient results file will be produced every 4 s (including 0 s) and at 1 s, 2 s

and 3 s. The files will contain no mesh, and data for only the three selected
variables. This reduces the size of the minimal results files. A full results file is
always written at the end of the run.

8.

Click OK.

6.4.5. Configuring Simulation Control

With two types of analysis for this simulation, configuration control is used to sequence these analyses.

6.4.5.1. Configuration Control for the Steady State Analysis

To set up the Steady State Analysis so that it will start at the beginning of the simulation:
1.

In the Outline tree view, ensure that Simulation Control is expanded.

2.

Right-click Simulation Control > Configurations and select Insert > Configuration.

3.

Set Name to Steady State.

4.

Click OK.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General
Settings

Flow Analysis

Steady State
Analysis

Activation Conditions
> Activation Condition 1

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

119

Flow from a Circular Vent

Tab

6.

Setting

Value

> Option

Start of Simulation

Click OK.

6.4.5.2. Configuration Control for the Transient Analysis

To set up the Transient Analysis so that it will start upon the completion of the Steady State
Analysis:
1.

Right-click Simulation Control > Configurations and select Insert > Configuration.

2.

Set Name to Transient.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General
Settings

Flow Analysis

Transient Analysis

Activation Conditions
> Activation Condition 1
> Option

End of
Configuration

Activation Conditions
> Activation Condition 1
> Configuration Name

Steady State

Run
Definition

Configuration Execution
Control

Selected

Initial
Values

Initial Values Specification

Selected

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values
> Initial Values 1
> Option

Configuration
Results

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values
> Initial Values 1
> Configuration Name

120

Steady State

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

5.

Click OK.

6.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.mdef) File

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation Control and select Write Solver Input File.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File of type

CFX-Solver Input Files (*.mdef )

File name

CircVent.mdef

Click Save.
This will create CircVent.mdef as well as a directory named CircVent that contains
SteadyState.cfg and Transient.cfg.

4.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the case (.cfx) file.

6.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

You can obtain a solution to the steady-state and transient configurations by using the following procedure.
1.

Start CFX-Solver Manager.

2.

From the menu bar, select File > Define Run.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Setting

Value

Solver Input File

CircVent.mdef

Edit Configuration

Global Settings

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver Manager will start with the solution of the steady-state configuration.

5.

In the Workspace drop-down menu, select SteadyState_001. The residual plots for six equations will
appear: U - Mom, V - Mom, W - Mom, P - Mass, K-TurbKE, and E-Diss.K (the three momentum conservation
equations, the mass conservation equation and equations for the turbulence kinetic energy and turbulence
eddy dissipation). The Momentum and Mass tab contains four of the plots and the other two are under
Turbulence Quantities. The residual for the smoke equation is also plotted but registers no values since
it is not initialized.

6.

Upon the successful completion of the steady-state configuration, the solution of the transient configuration starts automatically. Notice that the text output generated by the CFX-Solver in the Run Transient
001 Workspace will be more than you have seen for steady-state problems. This is because each time
step consists of several inner (coefficient) iterations. At the end of each time step, information about
various quantities is printed to the text output area. The residual for the smoke equation is now plotted
under the Additional Variables tab.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

121

Flow from a Circular Vent

7.

Upon the successful completion of the combined steady-state and transient configurations, ensure that
the check box beside Post-Process Results is cleared and click OK to close the message indicating the
successful completion of the simulation.

8.

In the CFX-Solver Manager, set Workspace to Run CircVent 001.

9.

From the menu bar, select Tools > Post-Process Results.

10. On the Start CFD-Post dialog box, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager and click OK.

6.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this part of the tutorial, you will:
Create an isosurface to illustrate the pattern of smoke concentration.
View results at different time steps.
Animate the results to view the dispersion of smoke from the vent over time.
Save the animation as an MPEG file.
Use volume rendering to show the visibility of smoke with its transparency.

6.6.1. Displaying Smoke Density Using an Isosurface

An isosurface is a surface of constant value of a variable. For instance, it could be a surface consisting
of all points where the velocity is 1 [m s^-1]. In this case, you are going to create an isosurface of smoke
concentration (smoke is the Additional Variable that you specified earlier).
1.

In CFD-Post, right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z
up).
This ensures that the view is set to a position that is best suited to display the results.

2.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Location > Isosurface, or under Location on the toolbar, click
Isosurface.

3.

Click OK to accept the default name.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

5.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Variable

smoke

Value

0.005 [kg m^-3]

Click Apply.
A bumpy surface is displayed, showing the smoke emanating from the vent.
The surface is rough because the mesh is coarse. For a smoother surface, you would re-run the problem
with a smaller mesh length scale.

122

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The surface will be a constant color because the default settings on the Color tab were used.
When Color Mode is set to either Constant or Use Plot Variable for an isosurface, the isosurface
is displayed in one color.
6.

In Geometry, experiment by changing the Value setting so that you can see the shape of the plume
more clearly.
Zoom in and rotate the geometry, as required.

7.

When you have finished, set Value to 0.002 [kg m^-3].

8.

Right-click a blank spot in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

6.6.2. Viewing the Results at Different Time Steps

When CFD-Post is loaded, the results that are immediately available are those at the final time step; in
this case, at t = 30 s (this is nominally designated Final State). The Timestep Selector shows the Configuration, the step of the Simulation, the Step (outer loop) number, the Time (simulated time in
seconds) of the configuration and the Type of results file that was saved at that time step for the configuration. You can see that Partial results files were saved (as requested in CFX-Pre) for all time steps
in the transient configuration except for the last one.
1.

Click Timestep Selector

2.

Load the results for a Time value of 2 s by double-clicking the appropriate row in the Timestep Selector.
After a short pause, the Loaded Timestep (located just below the title bar of the Timestep Selector)
will be updated with the new time step number.

3.

Load the time value of 4 s using the Timestep Selector.

The smoke has now spread out even more, and is being carried by the wind.

4.

Double-click some more time values to see how the smoke plume grows with time.

5.

Finish by loading a time value of 12 s.

6.6.3. Generating Titled Image Files

You can produce titled image output from CFD-Post.

6.6.3.1. Adding a Title

First, you will add text to the viewer so that the printed output has a title.
1.

Select Insert > Text from the menu bar or click Create text

2.

Click OK to accept default name.

3.

In the Text String box, enter the following text.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

123

Flow from a Circular Vent

Isosurface showing smoke concentration of 0.002 kg/m^3 after

Note
Further text will be added at a later stage to complete this title.

4.

Select Embed Auto Annotation.

5.

Set Type to Time Value.

In the text line, note that <aa> has been added to the end. This is where the time value will be
placed.

6.

Click Apply to create the title.

7.

Click the Location tab to modify the position of the title.

The default settings for text objects center text at the top of the screen. To experiment with the
position of the text, change the settings on the Location tab.

8.

Under the Appearance tab, change Color Mode to User Specified and select a new color.

9.

Click Apply.

6.6.3.2. JPEG output

CFD-Post can save images in several different formats. In this section you will save an image in JPEG
format.
1.

Select File > Save Picture, or click Save Picture

2.

Set Format to JPEG.

3.

Click Browse

4.

Browse to the directory where you want the file saved.

5.

Enter a name for the JPEG file.

6.

Click Save to set the file name and directory.

next to the File data box.

This sets the path and name for the file.

7.

To save the file, click Save on the Save Picture dialog box.
To view the file or make a hard copy, use an application that supports JPEG files.

8.

124

Turn off the visibility of the text object to hide it.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

6.6.4. Generating a Movie

You can generate an MPEG file to show the transient flow of the plume of smoke. To generate a movie
file, you use the Animation dialog box.
1.

In the Timestep Selector, ensure that a time value of 0 s is loaded.

2.

Click Animation

3.

Ensure that Quick Animation is selected.

4.

Position the geometry so that you will be able to see the plume of smoke.

5.

In the object tree of the Animation dialog box, click Timesteps.

6.

Click More Animation Options

7.

Ensure that the Repeat forever button

8.

Select Save Movie.

9.

Set Format to MPEG1.

10. Click Browse

to show more animation settings.

next to Repeat is not selected (not depressed).

next to Save Movie.

11. Set File name to CircVent.mpg.

12. If required, set the path location to a different directory.
13. Click Save.
The movie file name (including path) has been set, but the animation has not yet been produced.
14. Click Play the animation

The movie will be created as the animation proceeds.

This will be slow, because for each time step results will be loaded and objects will be created.
To view the movie file, you need to use a viewer that supports the MPEG format.

Note
To explore additional animation options, click the Options button. On the Advanced
tab of Animation Options, there is a check box called Save Frames As Image Files.
By selecting this check box, the JPEG or PPM files used to encode each frame of the
movie will persist after movie creation; otherwise, they will be deleted.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

125

Flow from a Circular Vent

6.6.5. Viewing the Dispersion of Smoke at the Final Time Step

The final time step has the greatest dispersion of smoke, so you will load only that time step, then view
the smoke using the Volume Rendering feature.
1.

Select File > Load Results.

2.

In the Load Results File dialog box, select Load only the last results (the other default settings should
remain unchanged) and ensure that File name is set to CircVent_001.mres. Click Open.

Note
A warning message appears. Click OK.

3.

If necessary, right-click a blank spot in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z
up).

4.

In the Outline view, clear Isosurface 1 and Text 1.

5.

Select Insert > Volume Rendering and set the Name to be SmokeVolume.

6.

In the details view, set the following values:

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Variable

smoke

Resolution

50

Transparency

.2

Mode

Variable

Variable

smoke

Color Map

Greyscale

Color

Click Apply.
7.

126

When you have finished, quit CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 7: Flow Around a Blunt Body

This tutorial includes:
7.1.Tutorial Features
7.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
7.3. Preparing the Working Directory
7.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
7.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
7.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

7.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Solving and postprocessing a case where the geometry has been omitted on one side of a symmetry plane.
Using free-slip wall boundaries as a compromise between accurate flow modeling and computational grid
size.
Accurately modeling the near-wall flow using Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence model.
Running the CFX-Solver in parallel (optional).
Creating vector plots in CFD-Post with uniform spacing between the vectors.
Creating a macro using power syntax in CFD-Post.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

Constant Property Gas

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

Shear Stress Transport

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Symmetry Plane
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Free-Slip

Timestep
CFX-Solver
Manager

Parallel Processing

CFD-Post

Plots

Physical Time Scale

Default Locators

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

127

Flow Around a Blunt Body

Component

Feature

Details
Outline Plot
(Wireframe)
Sampling Plane
Streamline
Vector
Volume

Other

Changing the Color

Range
Instancing
Transformation
Lighting Adjustment
Symmetry
Viewing the Mesh

7.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

In this tutorial, a generic vehicle body is placed into an oncoming side wind of 15 m/s. The turbulence
will be set to Intensity and Length scale with a value of 0.05, which corresponds to 5% turbulence, a
medium level intensity, and with an Eddy Length scale value of 0.1 m.
The goal of this tutorial is to set up, simulate, and then visualize the flow around the body. Since both
the geometry and the flow are symmetric about a vertical plane, you will only use half of the geometry
to find the solution. You will use free-slip wall boundaries on some sides of the domain to model external flow. The flow near the body is modeled using Shear Stress Transport. Since compressibility effects
are not expected to be significant, you can model this as incompressible flow.
Figure 7.1: External Air Flow Over a Generic Vehicle Body

If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

128

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

7.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
BluntBodyDist.cse
BluntBodyMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

7.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run BluntBody.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 135).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type BluntBody.

6.

Click Save.

7.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

BluntBodyMesh.gtm

Click Open.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

129

Flow Around a Blunt Body

7.4.2. Creating the Domain

The flow of air in the domain is expected to be turbulent. The Shear Stress Transport (SST) turbulence
model with automatic wall function treatment will be used because of its highly accurate predictions
of flow separation. To take advantage of the SST model, the boundary layer should be resolved with
at least 10 mesh nodes. In order to reduce computational time, the mesh in this tutorial is much
coarser than that.
As stated in the overview, this tutorial models incompressible flow. Incompressible flow is specified by
choosing an incompressible fluid. You will use Air at 25 C as the incompressible fluid.
As part of the domain settings, you will specify a reference pressure. CFX requires this when modeling
incompressible flow.
1.

Click Domain

, and set the name to BluntBody.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of BluntBody:

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

B1.P3

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Air at 25 C

[a]

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid
Models

1 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

None

Turbulence
> Option

a. Click the Ellipsis

drop-down menu.

3.

130

Shear Stress
Transport

icon if the required material does not appear in the

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

7.4.3. Creating Composite Regions

An imported mesh may contain many 2D regions. For the purpose of creating boundary conditions, it
can sometimes be useful to group several 2D regions together and apply a single boundary to the
composite 2D region. In this case, you are going to create a Union between two regions that both require
a free-slip wall boundary.
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Regions > Composite Region.

2.

Set the name to FreeWalls and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Dimension (Filter)

2D

4.

Click
beside the Region List dialog box, to display the Selection Dialog. Hold down the Ctrl key and
select Free1 and Free2.

5.

Click OK to confirm your selection.

6.

Click OK to create the composite region.

7.4.4. Creating the Boundaries

The simulation requires inlet, outlet, wall (no slip and free-slip) and symmetry plane boundaries. The
regions for these boundaries were defined when the mesh was created (except for the composite region
just created for the free-slip wall boundary).

7.4.4.1. Inlet Boundary

1.

Click Boundary

2.

Under Name, type Inlet.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

Inlet

Boundary
Details

Flow Regime
> Option

Subsonic

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

131

Flow Around a Blunt Body

Tab

Setting

Value

> Normal Speed

15 [m s^-1]

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.05

[a]

Turbulence
> Eddy Length Scale

0.1 [m]

[a]

a. From the problem description.

4.

Click OK.

7.4.4.2. Outlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named Outlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

Outlet

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

3.

0 [Pa]

Click OK.

7.4.4.3. Free-Slip Wall Boundary

The top and side surfaces of the rectangular region will use free-slip wall boundaries.
On free-slip walls the shear stress is set to zero so that the fluid is not retarded.
The velocity normal to the wall is also set to zero.
The velocity parallel to the wall is calculated during the solution.
This boundary is an approximation that may not accurately represent the true flow conditions. By using
a free-slip wall boundary, the flow modeling will be less accurate but the computational grid size can
be reduced by modeling less of the surroundings. If this case were modeling a wind tunnel experiment,
the geometry would match the size and shape of the wind tunnel and use no-slip walls. If this case

132

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

were modeling a blunt body open to the atmosphere, a much larger domain would be used to minimize
the effect of the far-field boundary, and the far-field boundary type would be set to either a free-slip
wall or a pressure-specified entrainment opening.
You will apply a single boundary to both walls by using the composite region defined earlier.
1.

Create a new boundary named FreeWalls.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

FreeWalls

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

3.

Free Slip Wall

Click OK.

7.4.4.4. Symmetry Plane Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named SymP.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SymP

Click OK.

7.4.4.5. Wall Boundary on the Blunt Body Surface

1.

Create a new boundary named Body.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Body

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

3.

No Slip Wall

Click OK.

The remaining 2D regions (in this case, just the low Z face) will be assigned the default boundary which
is an adiabatic, no-slip wall condition. In this case, the name of the default boundary is BluntBody
Default. Although the boundaries Body and BluntBody Default are identical (except for their locations),
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

133

Flow Around a Blunt Body

the Body boundary was created so that, during postprocessing, its location can be conveniently distinguished from the other adiabatic, no-slip wall surfaces.

7.4.5. Setting Initial Values

The initial conditions are consistent with inlet boundaries.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity Components

> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

15 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W

3.

0 [m s^-1]

Click OK.

7.4.6. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

Value

60

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control

134

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Tab

Setting

Value

> Timescale Control

Physical
Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

2 [s][a]

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

1e-05

a. Based on the air speed and the size of the object.

3.

Click OK.

7.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

BluntBody.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

7.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

This tutorial introduces the parallel solver capabilities of CFX.

Note
The results produced will be identical, whether produced by a parallel or serial run.
If you do not want to solve this tutorial in parallel (on more than one processor) or you do not have a
license to run the CFX-Solver in parallel, proceed to Obtaining a Solution in Serial (p. 136).
If you do not know if you have a license to run the CFX-Solver in parallel, you should either ask your
system administrator, or query the license server (see the ANSYS, Inc. Licensing Guide (which is installed
with the ANSYS License Manager) for details). Alternatively proceed to Obtaining a Solution in Serial (p. 136).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

135

Flow Around a Blunt Body

If you would like to solve this tutorial in parallel on the same machine, proceed to Obtaining a Solution
with Local Parallel (p. 136).
If you would like to solve this tutorial in parallel across different machines, proceed to Obtaining a
Solution with Distributed Parallel (p. 137).

7.5.1. Obtaining a Solution in Serial

When CFX-Solver Manager has started, you can obtain a solution to the CFD problem by using the following procedure.
1.

Click Start Run.

2.

When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

4.

Click OK. Continue this tutorial from Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post (p. 140).

7.5.2. Obtaining a Solution in Parallel

7.5.2.1. Background to Parallel Running in CFX
Using the parallel capability of the CFX-Solver enables you to divide a large CFD problem so that it can
run on more than one processor/machine at once. This saves time and, when multiple machines are
used, avoids problems that arise when a CFD calculation requires more memory than a single machine
has available. The partition (division) of the CFD problem is automatic.
A number of events occur when you set up a parallel run and then ask the CFX-Solver to calculate the
solution:
Your mesh will be divided into the number of partitions that you have chosen.
The CFX-Solver runs separately on each of the partitions on the selected machine(s).
The results that one CFX-Solver process calculates affects the other CFX-Solver processes at the interface
between the different sections of the mesh.
All of the CFX-Solver processes are required to communicate with each other and this is handled by the
master process.
The master process always runs on the machine that you are logged into when the parallel run starts. The
other CFX-Solver processes are slave processes and may be run on other machines.
After the problem has been solved, a single results file is written. It will be identical to a results file from the
same problem run as a serial process, with one exception: an extra variable Real partition number
will be available for the parallel run. This variable will be used later in this tutorial during post processing.

7.5.2.2. Obtaining a Solution with Local Parallel

In CFX-Solver Manager, the Define Run dialog box should already be open.
To run in local parallel mode:
1.
136

Leave Type of Run set to Full.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

If Type of Run was instead set to Partitioner Only, your mesh would be split into a number
of partitions but would not be run in the CFX-Solver afterwards.
2.

Set Run Mode to a parallel mode suitable for your configuration; for example, Platform MPI Local
Parallel.
This is the recommended method for most applications.

3.

If required, click Add Partition

to add more partitions.

By default,partitions are assigned. Ideally, the number of partitions should not exceed the number
of available processor cores.
4.

Select Show Advanced Controls.

5.

Click the Partitioner tab at the top of the dialog box.

6.

Use the default MeTiS partitioner.

Your model will be divided into a number of sections, with each section running in its own CFXSolver process. The default is the MeTiS partitioner because it produces more efficient partitions
than either Recursive Coordinate Bisection or User Specified Direction.

7.

Click Start Run.

8.

When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.

9.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

10. Click OK.

Continue this tutorial from Text Output when Running in Parallel (p. 139).

7.5.2.3. Obtaining a Solution with Distributed Parallel

Before running in Distributed Parallel mode, ensure that your system has been configured as described
in the installation documentation.
In CFX-Solver Manager, the Define Run dialog box should already be open.
1.

Leave Type of Run set to Full.

If Type of Run was instead set to Partitioner Only, your mesh would be split into a number
of partitions but would not be run in the CFX-Solver afterwards.

2.

Set Run Mode to a parallel mode suitable for your environment; for example, Platform MPI Dis
tributed Parallel.
The name of the machine that you are currently logged into should be in the Host Name list. You
are going to run with two partitions on two different machines, so another machine must be added.

3.

Click Insert Host

to specify a new host machine.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

137

Flow Around a Blunt Body

The Select Parallel Hosts dialog box is displayed. This is where you choose additional machines to run
your processes.
Your system administrator should have set up a hosts file containing a list of the machines that are
available to run the parallel CFX-Solver.
The Host Name column displays names of available hosts.
The second column shows the number of processors on that machine.
The third shows the relative processor speed: a processor on a machine with a relative speed of 1 would
typically be twice as fast as a machine with a relative speed of 0.5.
The last column displays operating system information.
This information is read from the hosts file; if any information is missing or incorrect your system administrator should correct the hosts file.

Note
The # processors, relative speed and system information does not have to be specified
to be able to run on a host.

4.

Select the name of another machine in the Host Name list.

Select a machine that you can log into.

5.

Click Add.
The name of the machine is added to the Host Name column.

Note
Ensure that the machine that you are currently logged into is in the Hosts Name list in
the Define Run dialog box.

6.

Close the Select Parallel Hosts dialog box.

7.

Select Show Advanced Controls.

8.

Click the Partitioner tab at the top of the dialog box.

9.

Use the default MeTiS partitioner.

Your model will be divided into two sections, with each section running in its own CFX-Solver
process. The default is the MeTiS partitioner because it produces more efficient partitions than
either Recursive Coordinate Bisection or User Specified Direction.

10. Click Start Run to begin the parallel run.

11. Click OK on the dialog box.

138

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

12. When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.
13. If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.
14. Click OK.

7.5.2.4. Text Output when Running in Parallel

The text output area shows what is being written to the output file. You will see information similar to
the following:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
Job Information at Start of Run
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
Run mode:

partitioning run

+------------------------------+------+--------+----------+----------+
| Host
| Mesh | PID
|
Job Started
|
|
| Part |
| DD/MM/YY | hh:mm:ss |
+------------------------------+------+--------+----------+----------+
| fastmachine1
|
1 |
5952 | 19/02/13 | 10:50:09 |
+------------------------------+------+--------+----------+----------+

This tells you that the information following is concerned with the partitioning. After the partitioning
job has finished, you will find:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
Partitioning Information
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
Partitioning information for domain: BluntBody
+------------------+------------------------+-----------------+
|
Elements
|
Vertices
|
Faces
|
+------+------------------+------------------------+-----------------+
| Part |
Number
%
|
Number
%
%Ovlp | Number
%
|
+------+------------------+------------------------+-----------------+
| Full |
131878
|
37048
|
11318
|
+------+------------------+------------------------+-----------------+
|
1 |
67873
50.4 |
19431
50.4
4.0 |
5705
49.5 |
|
2 |
66865
49.6 |
19151
49.6
4.0 |
5820
50.5 |
+------+------------------+------------------------+-----------------+
| Sum |
134738 100.0 |
38582 100.0
4.0 |
11525 100.0 |
+------+------------------+------------------------+-----------------+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
Partitioning CPU-Time Requirements
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
-

Preparations
Low-level mesh partitioning
Global partitioning information
Element and face partitioning information
Vertex partitioning information
Partitioning information compression
Summed CPU-time for mesh partitioning

3.689E-01
5.599E-02
9.998E-03
7.999E-03
0.000E+00
0.000E+00
4.609E-01

seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds
seconds

+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
Job Information at End of Run
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
+---------------------------+------+----------+----------+-----------+
| Host
| Mesh |
Job Finished
|
CPU
|
|
| Part | DD/MM/YY | hh:mm:ss | seconds |
+---------------------------+------+----------+----------+-----------+

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

139

Flow Around a Blunt Body

| fastmachine1
|
1 | 19/02/13 | 10:50:09 | 8.020E-01 |
+---------------------------+------+----------+----------+-----------+
Total wall clock time: 7.990E-01 seconds
or: (
0:
0:
(
Days:
Hours:

0:
Minutes:

0.799 )
Seconds )

This marks the end of the partitioning job. The CFX-Solver now begins to solve your parallel run:
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
Job Information at Start of Run
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------+
Run mode:

parallel run (Platform MPI)

+------------------------------+------+--------+----------+----------+
| Host
| Mesh | PID
|
Job Started
|
|
| Part |
| DD/MM/YY | hh:mm:ss |
+------------------------------+------+--------+----------+----------+
| fastmchine1
|
1 |
6044 | 19/02/13 | 10:50:11 |
|
|
2 |
3276 | 19/02/13 | 10:50:11 |
+------------------------------+------+--------+----------+----------+

The machine that you are logged into runs the master process, and controls the overall simulation. The
second machine selected will run the slave process. If you had more than two processes, each additional
process is run as a slave process.
The master process in this example is running on the mesh partition number 1 and the slave is running
on partition number 2. You can find out which nodes and elements are in each partition by using CFDPost later on in the tutorial.
When the CFX-Solver finishes, the output file displays the job information and a dialog box to indicate
completion of the run.

7.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In CFD-Post, you will:
Create an instance transform object to recreate the full geometry
Create a vector plot that shows how the flow behaves around the body
Create a pressure plot that shows the pressure distribution on the body
Make a surface streamline that shows the path of air along the surface of the body
Examine the values of the dimensionless wall distance
the walls

to make sure that the mesh is sufficiently fine near

7.6.1. Using Symmetry Plane to Display the Full Geometry

Earlier in this tutorial you used a symmetry plane boundary because the entire blunt body is symmetrical about a plane. Due to this symmetry, it was necessary to use only half of the full geometry to calculate the CFD results. However, for visualization purposes, it is helpful to use the full blunt body. CFDPost is able to recreate the full data set from the half that was originally calculated. This is done by
creating an Instance Transform object.

140

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

7.6.1.1. Manipulating the Geometry

You need to manipulate the geometry so that you will be able to see what happens when you use the
symmetry plane. The CFD-Post features that you have used in earlier tutorials will not be described in
detail. New features will be described in detail.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +X.

7.6.1.2. Creating an Instance Transform

Instance Transforms are used to visualize a full geometry representation in cases where the simulation
took advantage of symmetry to solve for only part of the geometry. There are three types of transforms
that you can use: Rotation, Translation, Reflection/Mirroring. In this tutorial, you will create a Reflection
transform located on a plane.
1.

Click Location > Plane and set the name to Reflection Plane.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

ZX Plane

Definition

Render

3.

>Y

0.0 [m]

Show Faces

(cleared)

Click Apply.
This creates a plane at y=0, the same location as the symmetry plane defined in CFX-Pre. Now the
instance transform can be created using this plane:

4.

From the main menu, select Insert > Instance Transform and accept the default name.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Instancing Info From Domain

(Cleared)

Apply Rotation

(Cleared)

Apply Reflection

(Selected)

Apply Reflection
> Plane

6.

Reflection Plane

Click Apply.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

141

Flow Around a Blunt Body

7.6.1.3. Using the Reflection Transform

You can apply the new transform to graphics objects. For example, you can modify the display of the
wireframe as follows:
1.

Under the Outline tab, in User Locations and Plots, configure the following setting(s) of
Wireframe:
Tab

Setting

View

Apply Instancing Transform

> Transform

2.

Click Apply.

3.

Zoom so that the geometry fills the Viewer.

Value

Instance Transform
1

You will see the full blunt body.

In this case, you created a new instance transform and applied it to the wireframe. This caused only
the wireframe object to be mirrored. If you had modified the default transform instead of creating a
new one, then all graphics (including those not yet made) would be mirrored by default.

7.6.2. Creating Velocity Vectors

You are now going to create a vector plot to show velocity vectors behind the blunt body. You need
to first create an object to act as a locator, which, in this case, will be a sampling plane. Then, create
the vector plot itself.

7.6.2.1. Creating the Sampling Plane

A sampling plane is a plane with evenly spaced sampling points on it.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Y.
This ensures that the changes can be seen.

2.

Create a new plane named Sample.

3.

Configure the following setting(s) to create a sampling plane that is parallel to the ZX plane and located
at x= 6 m, y= 0.001 m and z= 1 m relative to blunt object:
Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Point and Normal

Definition
> Point

6, -0.001, 1

Definition

142

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

> Normal

0, 1, 0

Plane Bounds
> Type

Rectangular

Plane Bounds
> X Size

2.5 [m]

Plane Bounds
> Y Size

2.5 [m]

Plane Type

Sample

Plane Type
> X Samples

20

Plane Type

Render

4.

> Y Samples

20

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Click Apply.
You can zoom in on the sampling plane to see the location of the sampling points (where lines
intersect). There are a total of 400 (20 * 20) sampling points on the plane. A vector can be created
at each sampling point.

5.

Turn off the visibility of Sample.

7.6.2.2. Creating a Vector Plot Using Different Sampling Methods

1.

Click Vector

and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

Value

Sample

Definition

Symbol

> Sampling

Vertex

Symbol Size

0.25

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Zoom until the vector plot is roughly the same size as the viewer.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

143

Flow Around a Blunt Body

You should be able to see a region of recirculation behind the blunt body.
5.

Ignore the vertices on the sampling plane and increase the density of the vectors by applying the following
settings:
Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Sampling

Value

Equally Spaced

Definition
> # of Points

1000

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Change the location of the Vector plot by applying the following setting:
Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

8.

Value

SymP

Click Apply.

7.6.3. Displaying Pressure Distribution on Body and Symmetry Plane

1.

Configure the following setting(s) of the boundary named Body:

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Pressure

View

Apply Instancing Transform

> Transform

2.

Click Apply.

3.

Configure the following setting(s) of SymP:

4.

144

Instance Transform
1

Tab

Setting

Value

Render

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Click Apply.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

You will be able to see the mesh around the blunt body, with the mesh length scale decreasing
near the body, but still coarse in the region of recirculation. By zooming in, you will be able to see
the layers of inflated elements near the body.

7.6.4. Creating Surface Streamlines to Display the Path of Air along the Surface
of the Body
In order to show the path of air along the surface of the blunt body, surface streamlines can be made
as follows:
1.

Turn off the visibility of Body, SymP and Vector 1.

2.

Create a new plane named Starter.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Value

> Method

YZ Plane

-0.1 [m]

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).
The plane appears just upstream of the blunt body.

6.

Turn off the visibility of the plane.

This hides the plane from view, although the plane still exists.

7.

Click Streamline

and click OK to accept the default name.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Type

Surface Streamline

Definition
> Surfaces

Body

Definition
> Start From

Locations

Definition
> Locations

Starter

Definition
> Max Points

100

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

145

Flow Around a Blunt Body

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition
> Direction

9.

Forward

Click Apply.

The surface streamlines appear on half of the surface of the blunt body. They start near the upstream
end because the starting points were formed by projecting nodes from the plane to the blunt body.

7.6.5. Moving Objects

In CFD-Post, you can reposition some locator objects directly in the viewer by using the mouse.
1.

Turn on the visibility of the plane named Starter.

2.

Select the

3.

In the viewer, click the Starter plane to select it, then drag it along the X axis.

Single Select mouse pointer from the Selection Tools toolbar.

Notice that the streamlines are redrawn as the plane moves. The rate at which the streamlines are
redrawn is dependent on your computer's speed. If the streamlines are updated infrequently, you
may find it useful to move the mouse very slowly.

7.6.6. Creating a Surface Plot of y+

The velocity next to a no-slip wall boundary changes rapidly from a value of zero at the wall to the free
stream value a short distance away from the wall. This layer of high velocity gradient is known as the
boundary layer. Many meshes are not fine enough near a wall to accurately resolve the velocity profile
in the boundary layer. Wall functions can be used in these cases to apply an assumed functional shape
of the velocity profile. Other grids are fine enough that they do not require wall functions, and application
of the latter has little effect. The majority of cases fall somewhere in between these two extremes, where
the boundary layer is partially resolved by nodes near the wall and wall functions are used to supplement
accuracy where the nodes are not sufficiently clustered near the wall.
One indicator of the closeness of the first node to the wall is the dimensionless wall distance . It is
good practice to examine the values of
at the end of your simulation. At the lower limit, a value of
less than or equal to 11 indicates that the first node is within the laminar sublayer of the boundary
flow. Values larger than this indicate that an assumed logarithmic shape of the velocity profile is being
used to model the boundary layer portion between the wall and the first node. Ideally you should
confirm that there are several nodes (3 or more) resolving the boundary layer profile. If this is not observed, it is highly recommended that more nodes be added near the wall surfaces in order to improve
simulation accuracy. In this tutorial, a coarse mesh is used to reduce the run time. Thus, the grid is far
too coarse to resolve any of the boundary layer profile, and the solution is not highly accurate.
A surface plot is one which colors a surface according to the values of a variable: in this case,
surface plot of
can be obtained as follows:
1.

Turn off the visibility of all previous plots.

2.

Under the Outline tab, configure the following settings of BluntBodyDefault:

146

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

.A

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Yplus

View

[a]

Apply Instancing Transform

> Transform

Instance Transform
1

a. Click the Ellipsis

icon to the right of the Variable dropdown menu to view
a full list of variables, including Yplus.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Under the Outline tab, configure the following settings of Body:

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Yplus

View

Apply Instancing Transform

> Transform

5.

Instance Transform
1

Click Apply.

7.6.7. Demonstrating Power Syntax

This section demonstrates a power syntax macro used to evaluate the variation of any variable in the
direction of the X axis. This is an example of power syntax programming in CFD-Post.
A macro containing CCL and power syntax will be loaded by playing a session file. This macro will be
run by entering a line of power syntax in the Command Editor dialog box. The macro tells CFD-Post
to create slice planes, normal to the X axis, at 20 evenly-spaced locations from the beginning to the
end of the domain. On each plane, it measures and prints the minimum, maximum, and average values
for a specified variable (using conservative values). The planes are colored using the specified variable.

Note
The CFD-Post engine can respond to CCL commands issued directly, or to commands issued
using the graphical user interface. The Command Editor dialog box can be used to enter
any valid CCL command directly.
1.

Play the session file named BluntBodyDist.cse.

2.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -X.

3.

Select Tools > Command Editor from the menu bar.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

147

Flow Around a Blunt Body

4.

Type the following line into the Command Editor dialog box (the quotation marks and the semi-colon
are required):
!BluntBodyDist("Velocity u");

5.

Click Process.
The minimum, maximum and average values of the variable at each X location are written to the
file BluntBody.txt. The results can be viewed by opening the file in a text editor.

You can also run the macro with a different variable.

To view the content of the session file (which contains explanatory comments), open the session file
in a text editor. It contains all of the CCL and power syntax commands and will provide a better understanding of how the macro works.

7.6.8. Viewing the Mesh Partitions (Parallel Only)

If you solved this tutorial in parallel, then an additional variable named Real partition number
will be available in CFD-Post
1.

Create an Isosurface of Real partition number equal to 1.

2.

Create a second Isosurface of Real partition number equal to 1.999.

The two Isosurfaces show the edges of the two partitions. The gap between the two plots shows the
overlap nodes. These were contained in both partitions 1 and 2.
When you have finished looking at the results, quit CFD-Post.

148

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 8: Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

This tutorial includes:
8.1.Tutorial Features
8.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
8.3. Preparing the Working Directory
8.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
8.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
8.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

8.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using CFX-4 Mesh Import.
Setting up a time dependent (transient) simulation.
Modeling buoyant flow.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Transient

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

Laminar

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Buoyant Flow
Boundary Conditions

Symmetry Plane
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic
Wall: Fixed
Temperature

Output Control
Timestep

Transient

Transient Results File

CFD-Post

Plots

Default Locators

Chart
Report
Other

Time Step Selection

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

149

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

Component

Feature

Details
Transient Animation

8.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

The goal of this tutorial is to model a buoyancy-driven flow that requires the inclusion of gravitational
effects.
The model is a 2D partitioned cavity containing air with properties defined at 25C. The bottom of the
cavity is kept at a constant temperature of 75C, while the top is held constant at 5C. The cavity is also
tilted at an angle of 30 degrees to the horizontal.

The overall approach for solving this problem is to set up a transient simulation to see how the flow
develops when starting from stationary conditions. Because you are starting from stationary conditions,
there is no need to solve a steady-state simulation for use as the initial guess. You will then model the
buoyant flow and create a report outlining the results in CFD-Post. You will also create an animation
to see changes in temperature with time.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

8.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.
150

Create a working directory.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.
2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

Buoyancy2D.geo
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

8.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run Buoyancy2D.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 158).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Create a new case by selecting General.

4.

Select File > Save Case As and set File name to Buoyancy2D.

5.

Click Save.

8.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > Other.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

CFX-4 (*geo)

File name

Buoyancy2D.geo

Options
> Mesh Units

3.

Click Open.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

151

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

8.4.2. Analysis Type

The default units and coordinate frame settings are suitable for this tutorial, but the analysis type must
be set to transient.
You will notice physics validation messages as the case is set to Transient. These errors will be fixed
later in the tutorial.
1.

Right-click Analysis Type in the Outline tree view and select Edit or click Analysis Type
toolbar.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Analysis Type
> Option

Value

Transient

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Total Time

2 [s]

[a]

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Timesteps

0.025 [s]

[b]

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Time

0 [s]

a. This is the total duration, in real time, for the simulation.

b. In this example the simulation moves forward in 0.025 s increments until the
total time is reached. The step size was determined as a function of the
temperature difference
and the length scale of the model

between the top and bottom of the cavity,

, according to:

, where is the gravity vector and is the

thermal expansivity. For details on computing a fluid time scale estimate, see
the theory guide.

3.

152

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

in the

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

8.4.3. Creating the Domain

You will model the cavity as if it were tilted at an angle of 30. You can do this by specifying horizontal
and vertical components of the gravity vector, which are aligned with the default coordinate axes, as
shown in the diagram above.
1.

Click Domain

, and set the name to Buoyancy2D.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Buoyancy2D:

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

Primitive 3D

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Air at 25 C

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

153

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Buoyant

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity X Dirn.

-4.9 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Y Dirn.

-8.5 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Z Dirn.

0.0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Buoy. Ref. Temp.
Fluid
Models

40 [C] [a]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Thermal
Energy

Turbulence
> Option

None
(Laminar)

a. This is an approximate representative domain temperature.

3.

Click OK.

8.4.4. Creating the Boundaries

8.4.4.1. Hot and Cold Wall Boundary
Create a wall boundary with a fixed temperature of 75 C on the bottom surface of the cavity, as follows:
1.

Create a new boundary named hot.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

154

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

WALLHOT

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer

Value

> Option

Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Fixed Temperature

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named cold.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

75 [C]

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

WALLCOLD

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer
> Option

Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Fixed Temperature

6.

5 [C]

Click OK.

8.4.4.2. Symmetry Plane Boundary

A single symmetry plane boundary can be used for the front and back of the cavity. Symmetry, which
can make a 3D problem into a 2D problem, can be used when the geometry and mesh are invariant
normal to the symmetry surface.
1.

Create a new boundary named SymP.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SYMMET1, SYMMET2

[a]

a. Use the Ctrl key to select more than one region.

3.

Click OK.
The default adiabatic wall boundary will be applied automatically to the remaining boundaries.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

155

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

8.4.5. Setting Initial Values

You should set initial settings using the Automatic with Value option when defining a transient
simulation. Using this option, the first run will use the specified initial conditions (the air is at rest with
a temperature of 5 C) while subsequent runs will use results file data for initial conditions.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option

Value

Automatic
with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

0 [m
s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m
s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W

0 [m
s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Initial Conditions
> Temperature
> Temperature

3.

5 [C]

Click OK.

8.4.6. Setting Output Control

1.

156

Click Output Control

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

In the Transient Results tree view, click Add new item

click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of Transient Results 1:

Setting

Value

Option

Selected Variables

Output Variables List

Pressure,
Temperature,
Velocity

, set Name to Transient Results 1, and

[a]

Output Frequency
> Option

Time Interval

Output Frequency
> Time Interval

0.1 [s]

[b]

a. Click the Ellipsis icon

to select items if they do not appear
in the drop-down list. Use the Ctrl key to select multiple
items.
b. The Time Interval option specifies the simulation time
interval between the writing of each file. The time interval
will be set to 0.1 s, which is 4 times the time step that was
set up earlier. There is no need to set a smaller time interval
because it does not affect the solution accuracy. Choosing
a smaller time interval would simply result in more output
files.

5.

Click OK.

8.4.7. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

Value

High Resolution

Convergence Control
> Max. Coeff. Loops

[a]

Convergence Criteria
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

157

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

Tab

Setting

Value

> Residual Type

RMS

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

1.E-4

[b]

a. The maximum coefficient loops option determines the maximum number of

iterations per time step. A value between 3 and 5 strikes a good balance between
solution quality and calculation time.
b. An RMS value of at least 1.E-5 is usually required for adequate convergence, but
the default value of 1.E-4 is sufficient for demonstration purposes.

3.

Click OK.

8.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

Buoyancy2D.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

8.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and CFX-Solver Manager has started, you can obtain a solution to the
CFD problem by using the following procedure.

Note
Recall that the output displayed on the Out File tab of the CFX-Solver Manager is more
complicated for transient problems than for steady-state problems. Each time step consists
of several iterations, and after the time step, information about various quantities is printed.
1.

Click Start Run.

2.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

158

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.

Click OK.

8.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will create a customized report in CFD-Post. You will also, optionally, make an animation to see changes in temperature with time.

8.6.1. Simple Report

First, you will view a report that is created with little effort:
1.

Click the Report Viewer tab. Note that the report loads with some automatically-generated statistical
information.

2.

In the Outline tree view, under Report, experiment with the various settings for Mesh Report,
Physics Report and other report objects. These settings control the report contents. On the Report
Viewer tab, you can click Refresh to see the changes to your report.

8.6.2. Plots for Customized Reports

Here, you will create the following objects in preparation for generating a more customized report:
Contour plot of temperature
Point locators (for observing temperature)
Comment
Figure showing the contour plot and point locator
Time chart showing the temperature at the point locator
Table.

8.6.2.1. Contour Plot of Temperature

1.

Click the 3D Viewer tab and right-click a blank area of the viewer, then select Predefined Camera > View
From -Z.

2.

Select Insert > Contour from the main menu.

3.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

4.

Set Locations to SymP.

5.

Set Variable to Temperature.

6.

Click Apply.

The contour plot shows the temperature at the end of the simulation, since CFD-Post loads values for
the last time step by default. You can load different time steps using the Timestep Selector dialog box,
accessible by selecting Tools > Timestep Selector from the main menu.
Before proceeding, turn off the visibility of the contour plot.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

159

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

8.6.2.2. Point Locators

Two points will be created to generate a time chart of temperature vs. time later on in this tutorial. The
two points were chosen to be located half way in between the bottom and top cavity, close to where
the average temperature is going to be.
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Location > Point.

2.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

3.

Set Method to XYZ.

4.

Set Point coordinates to 0.098, 0.05, 0.00125.

5.

Click Apply.
Note the location of Point 1 in the viewer.

6.

Right-click the Point 1 object in the tree view and select Duplicate from the shortcut menu.

7.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

8.

Right-click the Point 2 object in the tree view and select Edit from the shortcut menu.

9.

Change the x-coordinate to 0.052.

10. Click Apply.

Note the location of Point 2 in the viewer.

8.6.2.3. Comment
1.

Click Create comment

2.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

A comment object appears in the tree view, under the Report object.

3.

Set Heading to Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity.

4.

In the large text box, type:

This is a sample paragraph.

8.6.2.4. Figure
Figures are CCL objects that can be used to store and switch between different views in a given viewport.
By selecting a figure, the information contained in the figure, such as the camera angle, zoom level,
lighting and the visibility setting of each object in the tree view, is applied to the active viewport and
is usable in reports.
1.

Click the 3D Viewer tab.

2.

Select Insert > Figure from the main menu.

160

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

3.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

The Make copies of objects check box determines whether or not the objects that are visible in
the viewer are copied. If objects are copied, then the copies are used in the figure instead of the
originals. Since you are not using multiple views or figures, the check box setting does not matter.
A figure object will appear under the Report branch in the tree view.

8.6.2.5. Time Chart of Temperature

Time charts use expressions or a point locator to plot the variation of a scalar value with time. In this
tutorial, the variation of temperature versus time will be plotted.
1.

Select Insert > Chart from the main menu.

2.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

3.

Set Type to XY-Transient or Sequence.

4.

Set Title to Temperature versus Time.

5.

Click the Data Series tab.

6.

Set Name to Temperature at Point 1.

7.

Set Location to Point 1.

8.

Click the X Axis tab.

9.

Set Data Selection > Expression to Time.

10. Click the Y Axis tab.

11. Set Data Selection > Variable to Temperature.
12. Ensure that the Refresh chart on Apply check box (at the bottom of the details view) is selected.
This causes the chart to be regenerated in the Chart Viewer tab each time you apply changes in
the details view. (When the Refresh chart on Apply check box is cleared, the chart will be regenerated only when you manually refresh it. One way to refresh the chart is to click the Refresh
button at the top of the Chart Viewer tab.)
13. Click Apply.
A chart object will appear under the Report branch in the tree view.
It may take some time for the chart to appear because every transient results file will be loaded in
order to generate the time chart.
14. Click New

(on the Data Series tab).

15. Set Name to Temperature at Point 2.

16. Set Location to Point 2.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

161

Buoyant Flow in a Partitioned Cavity

17. Click Apply.
A second chart line will appear in the chart, representing the temperature at Point 2.

8.6.2.6. Table of Temperature Values

1.

Select Insert > Table from the main menu.

2.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

A table object will appear under the Report branch in the tree view.

3.

Set the following:

Cell

Value

A1

Location

A2

Point 1

A3

Point 2

B1

Temperature

B2

=probe(Temperature)@Point 1

B3

=probe(Temperature)@Point 2

The table shows temperatures at the end of the simulation, since CFD-Post loads values for the last
time step by default. You can load different time steps using the Timestep Selector dialog box, accessible
by selecting Tools > Timestep Selector.

8.6.3. Customized Report

Right-click the Report object and select Refresh Preview from the shortcut menu. Look at the report
in the Report Viewer tab. Note that, in addition to the automatically-generated objects that you saw
earlier when creating a simple report, this report also includes the customized figure, time chart and
table described above.

8.6.4. Animations
You may want to create an animation of the buoyant flow over time. Use the animation feature to see
the changing temperature field. The animation feature was used in Flow from a Circular Vent (p. 105).

8.6.5. Completion
When you have finished, quit CFD-Post.

162

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 9: Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

This tutorial includes:
9.1.Tutorial Features
9.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
9.3. Preparing the Working Directory
9.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
9.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
9.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post
9.7. Further Discussion

9.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will set up a 2D problem in which you:
Import a mesh.
Set up appropriate boundary conditions for a free surface simulation. (Free surface simulations are more
sensitive to incorrect boundary and initial guess settings than other more basic models.)
Use mesh adaption to refine the mesh where the volume fraction gradient is greatest. (The refined mesh
aids in the development of a sharp interface between the liquid and gas.)
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady-state

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Isothermal

Buoyant Flow
Multiphase

Homogeneous Model

Boundary Conditions

Inlet
Opening
Outlet
Symmetry Plane
Wall: No Slip

CEL (CFX Expression

Language)
Mesh Adaption
Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

163

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

Component

Feature

Details

CFD-Post

Plots

Default Locators
Isosurface
Polyline
Sampling Plane
Vector
Volume

Other

Chart Creation
Title/Text
Viewing the Mesh

9.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial demonstrates the simulation of a free surface flow.
The geometry consists of a 2D channel in which the bottom of the channel is interrupted by a semicircular bump of radius 30 mm. The problem environment comprises air at 1 Pa and isothermal water; the
normal inlet speed is 0.26 m/s; the incoming water has a turbulence intensity of 5%. The flow upstream
of the bump is subcritical. The downstream boundary conditions (the height of the water) were estimated
for this tutorial; you can do this using an analytical 1D calculation or data tables for flow over a bump.

A mesh is provided. You will create a two-phase homogeneous setting and the expressions that will
be used in setting initial values and boundary conditions. Later, you will use mesh adaption to improve
the accuracy of the downstream simulation.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)

164

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

9.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
Bump2DExpressions.ccl
Bump2Dpatran.out
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

9.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run Bump2D.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 176).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type Bump2D.

6.

Click Save.

9.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > Other.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

PATRAN Neutral (*out *neu)

Filename

Bump2Dpatran.out
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

165

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

Setting

Value

Options
> Mesh units

3.

Click Open.

4.

To best orient the view, right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From
-Z from the shortcut menu.

9.4.2. Viewing the Region Labels

Enable the display of region labels so that you can see where you will define boundaries later in this
tutorial:
1.

In the Outline tree view, edit Case Options > Labels and Markers.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Settings

Show Labels

(Selected)

Show Labels
> Show Primitive 3D Labels

(Selected)

Show Labels
> Show Primitive 2D Labels

3.

(Selected)

Click OK.

9.4.3. Creating Expressions for Initial and Boundary Conditions

Simulation of free surface flows usually requires defining boundary and initial conditions to set up appropriate pressure and volume fraction fields. You will need to create expressions using CEL (CFX Expression Language) to define these conditions.
In this simulation, the following conditions are set and require expressions:
An inlet boundary where the volume fraction above the free surface is 1 for air and 0 for water, and below
the free surface is 0 for air and 1 for water.
A pressure-specified outlet boundary, where the pressure above the free surface is constant and the pressure
below the free surface is a hydrostatic distribution. This requires you to know the approximate height of
the fluid at the outlet. In this case, an analytical solution for 1D flow over a bump was used to determine
the value for DownH in Creating Expressions in CEL (p. 167). The simulation is not sensitive to the exact outlet
fluid height, so an approximation is sufficient. You will examine the effect of the outlet boundary condition
in the postprocessing section and confirm that it does not affect the validity of the results. It is necessary to
specify such a boundary condition to force the flow downstream of the bump into the supercritical regime.
An initial pressure field for the domain with a similar pressure distribution to that of the outlet boundary.

166

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Either create expressions using the Expressions workspace or read in expressions from the example
file provided:
Creating Expressions in CEL (p. 167)
Reading Expressions From a File (p. 167)

9.4.3.1. Creating Expressions in CEL

The expressions you create in this step are the same as the ones provided in Reading Expressions From
a File (p. 167), so you can choose to follow either set of instructions.
1.

Right-click Expressions, Functions and Variables > Expressions in the tree view and
select Insert > Expression.

2.

Set the name to UpH and click OK to create the upstream free surface height.

3.

Set Definition to 0.069 [m], and then click Apply.

4.

Use the same method to create the expressions listed in the table below. These are expressions for the
downstream free surface height, the fluid density, the buoyancy reference density, the calculated density
of the fluid (density - buoyancy reference density), the upstream volume fractions of air and water, the
upstream pressure distribution, the downstream volume fractions of air and water, and the downstream
pressure distribution.

5.

Name

Definition

DownH

0.022 [m]

DenWater

997 [kg m^-3]

DenRef

1.185 [kg m^-3]

DenH

(DenWater - DenRef )

UpVFAir

step((y-UpH)/1[m])

UpVFWater

1-UpVFAir

UpPres

DenH*g*UpVFWater*(UpH-y)

DownVFAir

step((y-DownH)/1[m])

DownVFWater

1-DownVFAir

DownPres

DenH*g*DownVFWater*(DownH-y)

Proceed to Creating the Domain (p. 168).

9.4.3.2. Reading Expressions From a File

1.

Select File > Import > CCL.

2.

In the Import CCL dialog box, ensure that the Append option is selected.

3.

Select Bump2DExpressions.ccl.

4.

Click Open.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

167

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

5.

After the file has been imported, use the Expressions tree view to view the expressions that have been
created.

9.4.4. Creating the Domain

Set up a homogeneous, two-fluid environment:
1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on. A domain named Default Domain should appear under the Simulation > Flow
Analysis 1 branch.

2.

Double-click Default Domain.

3.

Under Fluid and Particle Definitions, delete Fluid 1 and create a new fluid named Air.

4.

Confirm that the following settings are configured:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Air

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Air
> Material

5.

Click Add new item

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Air at 25 C

and create a new fluid named Water.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Water

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Water
> Material

Water

[a]

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Option

Buoyant

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model

168

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Gravity X Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Y Dirn.[b]

-g

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Z Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Buoy. Ref. Density [c]
Fluid
Models

DenRef

Multiphase
> Homogeneous Model [d]

(Selected)

Multiphase
> Free Surface Model
> Option

Standard

Heat Transfer
> Option

Isothermal

Heat Transfer
> Fluid Temperature

25 [C]

Turbulence
> Option

k-Epsilon

a. The models selected here describe how the fluids interact. No mass transfer
between the phases occurs in this example. You do not need to model surface
tension.
b. You need to click Enter Expression

beside the field first.

c. Always set Buoyancy Reference Density to the density of the least dense fluid
in free surface calculations.
d. The homogeneous model solves for a single solution field.

7.

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

169

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

9.4.5. Creating the Boundaries

9.4.5.1. Inlet Boundary
1.

Create a new boundary named inflow.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

INFLOW

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

0.26 [m s^-1]

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.05

Turbulence

Fluid
Values

> Eddy Length Scale

UpH

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

UpVFAir

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

3.

UpVFWater

Click OK.

9.4.5.2. Outlet Boundary

1.

170

Create a new boundary named outflow.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

OUTFLOW

Boundary
Details

Flow Regime
> Option

Subsonic

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

3.

DownPres

Click OK.

9.4.5.3. Symmetry Boundaries

1.

Create a new boundary named front.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

FRONT

[a]

a. Symmetry, which makes a 3D problem into a 2D problem, can be used when

geometry and mesh are invariant normal to the symmetry surface.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named back.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

6.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

BACK

Click OK.

9.4.5.4. Opening and Wall Boundaries

1.

Create a new boundary named top.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

171

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Opening

Location

TOP

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Entrainment

Mass And Momentum

> Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Turbulence

Fluid Values

> Option

Zero Gradient

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

1.0

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named bottom.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

0.0

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

BOTTOM1, BOTTOM2,
BOTTOM3

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

No Slip Wall

Wall Roughness
> Option

6.

172

Smooth Wall

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

9.4.6. Setting Initial Values

Set up the initial values to be consistent with the inlet boundary conditions:
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity Components

> Option

Automatic
with Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

0.26 [m s^-1]
[a]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

[a]

0 [m s^-1]

[a]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W
Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure

Fluid
Settings

> Relative Pressure

UpPres

Fluid Specific Initialization

Air

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Air
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

173

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Automatic
with Value

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Air
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

UpVFAir

Fluid Specific Initialization

Water

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

UpVFWater

a. From the problem statement.

3.

Click OK.

9.4.7. Setting Mesh Adaption Parameters

To improve the resolution of the interface between the air and the water, set up the mesh adaption
settings:
1.

Click Mesh Adaption

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Activate Adaption

(Selected)

Save Intermediate Files

(Cleared)

Adaption Criteria

174

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Variables List

Air.Volume Fraction

Adaption Criteria
> Max. Num. Steps

Adaption Criteria
> Option

Multiple of Initial
Mesh

Adaption Criteria
> Node Factor

Adaption Convergence Criteria

Advanced
Options

3.

> Max. Iter. per Step

100

Node Alloc. Parameter

1.6

Number of Levels

Click OK.

9.4.8. Setting the Solver Controls

Note
Setting Max. Iterations to 200 (below) and Number of (Adaption) Levels to 2 with a Max.
Iter. per Step of 100 time steps each (in the previous section), results in a total maximum
number of time steps of 400 (2*100+200=400).

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

Value

200

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control

Advanced
Options

> Physical Timescale

0.25 [s]

Multiphase Control

(Selected)

[a]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

175

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

Tab

Setting

Value

Multiphase Control
> Volume Fraction Coupling

(Selected)

Multiphase Control
> Volume Fraction Coupling
> Option

Coupled

[b]

a. Estimated from the time it takes the water to flow over the bump.
b. The Coupled Volume Fraction solution algorithm typically converges better than
the Segregated Volume Faction algorithm for buoyancy-driven problems. The
Segregated Volume Faction algorithm would have required a significantly smaller
timescale (0.05 [s]).

Note
Selecting these options on the solver control activates the Coupled Volume Fraction
solution algorithm. This algorithm typically converges better than the Segregated Volume
Faction algorithm for buoyancy-driven problems such as this tutorial. The Segregated
Volume Faction algorithm would have required a 0.05 second timescale, as compared
with 0.25 seconds for the Coupled Volume Fraction algorithm.

3.

Click OK.

9.4.9. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

Bump2D.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

9.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Click Start Run.
Within 100 iterations after CFX-Solver Manager has started, the first adaption step is performed. Information written to the .out file includes the number of elements refined and the size of the new mesh.
176

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

After mesh refinement, there is a jump in the residual levels. This is because the solution from the old
mesh is interpolated onto the new mesh. A new residual plot also appears for the W-Mom-Bulk equation.
Hexahedral mesh elements are refined orthogonally, so the mesh is no longer 2D (it is more than 1
element thick in the Z direction). Convergence to the target residual level is achieved.

It is common for convergence in a residual sense to be difficult to obtain in a free surface simulation,
due to the presence of small waves at the surface preventing the residuals from dropping to the target
level. This is more frequently a problem in the subcritical flow regime, as the waves can travel upstream.
In the supercritical regime, the waves tend to get carried downstream and out the domain. To satisfy
convergence in these cases, monitor the value of a global quantity (for example, drag for flow around
a ships hull) to see when a steady-state value is reached.
Where there is no obvious global quantity to monitor, you should view the results to see where the
solution is changing. You can do this by running transient (with time steps that are small enough to
capture transient effects) for a few time steps, starting from a results file that you think is converged
or from backup results files you have written at different time steps.
In both cases, look to see where the results are changing (this could be due to the presence of small
transient waves). Also confirm that the value of quantities that you are interested in (for example,
downstream fluid height for this case) has reached a steady-state value.
1.

When a dialog box is displayed at the end of the run, select Post-Process Results.

2.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

3.

Click OK.

9.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Display the distribution of volume fraction of water in the domain:
1.

To best orient the view, right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From
-Z.

2.

Zoom in so the geometry fills the viewer.

3.

In the tree view, edit Bump2D_001 > Default Domain > front.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

177

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Water.Volume
Fraction

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Observe the plot, then clear the check box next to front.

9.6.1. Creating Velocity Vector Plots

The next step involves creating a sampling plane upon which to display velocity vectors for Water.
1.

Select Insert > Location > Plane to create a new plane named Plane 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

XY Plane

Plane Bounds
> Type

Rectangular

Plane Bounds
> X Size

1.25 [m]

[a]

Plane Bounds
> Y Size

0.3 [m]

Plane Bounds

Render

> X Angle

0 [degree]

Plane Type

Sample

X Samples

160

Y Samples

40

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

[b]

a. The Plane Bounds settings overlap the plane with the wireframe. You can
experiment with other values and click Apply to see the results.
b. The Plane Samples settings produce square elements. You can experiment with
other values and click Apply to see the results.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Clear the check box next to Plane 1.

178

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

5.

Create a new vector named Vector 1.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

Value

Plane 1

Definition

Symbol

> Variable [a]

Water.Velocity

Symbol Size

0.5

a. Because fluids in a free-surface calculation share the same velocity field, only
the velocity of the first non-vapor fluid is available. The other allowed velocities
are superficial velocities. For details, see Further Postprocessing (p. 184).

7.

Click Apply.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Symbol

9.

Value

> Variable

Air.Superficial
Velocity

Symbol Size

0.15

Normalize Symbols

(Selected)

Click Apply.

9.6.2. Viewing Mesh Refinement

In this section, you will view the surface mesh on one of the symmetry boundaries, create volume objects
to show where the mesh was modified, and create a vector plot to visualize the added mesh nodes.
1.

Clear the check box next to Vector 1.

2.

Zoom in so the geometry fills the Viewer.

3.

In Outline under Default Domain, edit front.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Constant

Render

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

179

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

5.

Click Apply.
The mesh has been refined near the free surface.
In the transition region between different levels of refinement, tetrahedral and pyramidal elements are
used because it is not possible to recreate hexahedral elements in CFX. Near the inlet, the aspect ratio
of these elements increases.
Avoid performing mesh refinement on high-aspect-ratio hex meshes as this will produce high aspect
ratio tetrahedral-elements and result in poor mesh quality.
Figure 9.1: Mesh around the bump

6.

Create a new volume named first refinement elements.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Isovolume

Definition
> Variable

Refinement Level

[a]

Definition
> Mode

At Value

Definition

Render

> Value

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Width

180

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

Show Mesh Lines

> Color Mode

User Specified

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Color
a. Click More variables

8.

(Green)

to access the Refinement Level value.

Click Apply.
You will see a band of green, which indicates the elements that include nodes added during the
first mesh adaption.

9.

Create a new volume named second refinement elements.

10. Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Isovolume

Definition
> Variable

Refinement Level

Definition
> Mode

At Value

Definition
> Value

Color

Color

White

Render

Show Faces

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Width

Show Mesh Lines

> Color Mode

User Specified

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Color

(Black)

11. Click Apply.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

181

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

You will see a band of white (with black lines); this indicates the elements that include nodes added
during the second mesh adaption.
12. Zoom in to a region where the mesh has been refined.
The Refinement Level variable holds an integer value at each node, which is either 0, 1, or 2 (because
you used a maximum of two adaption levels).
The nodal values of refinement level will be visualized next.
13. Create a new vector named Vector 2.
14. Configure the following setting(s):
Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

Value

Plane 1

Definition
> Variable

(Any Vector
Variable)

Color
Symbol

[a]

Mode

Variable

Variable

Refinement Level

Symbol

Cube

Symbol Size

0.02

Normalize Symbols

(Selected)

a. The variables magnitude and direction do not matter because you will change
the vector symbol to a cube with a normalized size.

15. Click Apply.

In Vector 2, Blue nodes (Refinement Level 0 according to the color legend) are part of the original
mesh. Green nodes (Refinement Level 1) were added during the first adaption step. Red nodes (Refinement Level 2) were added during the second adaption step. Note that some elements contain combinations of blue, green, and red nodes.

9.6.3. Creating an Isosurface to Show the Free Surface

Later in this tutorial, you will create a chart to show the variation in free surface height along the
channel. The data for the chart will be sampled along a polyline that follows the free surface. To make
the polyline, you will use the intersection between one of the symmetry planes and an isosurface that
follows the free surface. Start by creating an isosurface on the free surface:
1.

Turn off the visibility for all objects except Wireframe.

2.

Create a new isosurface named Isosurface 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

182

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Variable

Value

Water.Volume
Fraction

Definition
> Value

4.

0.5

Click Apply.
Creating isosurfaces using this method is a good way to visualize a free surface in a 3D simulation.

5.

Right-click any blank area in the viewer, select Predefined Camera, then select Isometric View (Y up).

9.6.4. Creating a Polyline that Follows the Free Surface

Create a polyline along the isosurface that you created in the previous step:
1.

Turn off the visibility of Isosurface 1.

2.

Create a new polyline named Polyline 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Method

Boundary
Intersection

Boundary List

front

Intersect With

Isosurface 1

Click Apply.
A green line is displayed that follows the high-Z edge of the isosurface.

9.6.5. Creating a Chart to Show the Height of the Surface

Create a chart that plots the free surface height using the polyline that you created in the previous
step:
1.

Create a new chart named Chart 1.

The Chart Viewer tab is selected.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General

Title

Free Surface Height

for Flow over a
Bump

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

183

Free Surface Flow Over a Bump

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Data Series

Name

free surface height

Location

Polyline 1

X Axis

Variable

Y Axis

Variable

Line Display

Symbols

Rectangle

Click Apply.

As discussed in Creating Expressions for Initial and Boundary Conditions (p. 166), an approximate outlet
elevation is imposed as part of the boundary, even though the flow is supercritical. The chart illustrates
the effect of this, in that the water level rises just before the exit plane. It is evident from this plot that
imposing the elevation does not affect the upstream flow.
The chart shows a wiggle in the elevation of the free surface interface at the inlet. This is related to an
over-specification of conditions at the inlet because both the inlet velocity and elevation were specified.
For a subcritical inlet, only the velocity or the total energy should be specified. The wiggle is due to a
small inconsistency between the specified elevation and the elevation computed by the solver to obtain
critical conditions at the bump. The wiggle is analogous to one found if pressure and velocity were
both specified at a subsonic inlet in a converging-diverging nozzle with choked flow at the throat.

9.6.6. Further Postprocessing

You may want to create some plots using the <Fluid>.Superficial Velocity variables. This is
the fluid volume fraction multiplied by the fluid velocity and is sometimes called the volume flux. It is
useful to use this variable for vector plots in separated multiphase flow, as you will only see a vector
where a significant amount of that phase exists.

Tip
You can right-click an existing vector plot and select a new vector variable.

9.7. Further Discussion

For supercritical free surface flows, the supercritical outlet boundary is usually the most appropriate
boundary for the outlet because it does not rely on the specification of the outlet pressure distribution
(which depends on an estimate of the free surface height at the outlet). The supercritical outlet
boundary requires a relative pressure specification for the gas only; no pressure information is required
for the liquid at the outlet. For this tutorial, the relative gas pressure at the outlet should be set to 0 Pa.
The supercritical outlet condition may admit multiple solutions. To find the supercritical solution, it is
often necessary to start with a static pressure outlet condition (as previously done in this tutorial) or
an average static pressure condition where the pressure is set consistent with an elevation to drive the
solution into the supercritical regime. The outlet condition can then be changed to the supercritical
option.

184

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 10: Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

This tutorial includes:
10.1.Tutorial Features
10.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
10.3. Preparing the Working Directory
10.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
10.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
10.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

10.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Setting up a supersonic flow simulation.
Using the Shear Stress Transport turbulence model to accurately resolve flow around a wing surface.
Defining a custom vector to display pressure distribution.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

Shear Stress Transport

Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Supersonic)
Outlet (Supersonic)
Symmetry Plane
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic
Wall: Free-Slip

CFD-Post

Domain Interfaces

Fluid-Fluid (No Frame

Change)

Timestep

Maximum Timescale

Plots

Contour
Vector

Other

Variable Details View

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

185

Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

10.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This example demonstrates the use of CFX in simulating supersonic flow over a symmetric NACA0012
airfoil at 0 angle of attack. A 2D section of the wing is modeled. A 2D hexahedral mesh is provided
that you will import into CFX-Pre.
The environment is 300 K air at 1 atmosphere that passes the wing at 600 m/s. The turbulence intensity
is low (.01) with an eddy length scale of .02 meters.

A mesh is provided. You will create a domain that contains three regions that will be connected by
fluid-fluid interfaces. To solve the simulation, you will start with a conservative time scale that gradually
increases towards the fluid residence time as the residuals decrease.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

10.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

WingSPSMesh.out

186

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.
3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

10.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run WingSPS.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 193).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type WingSPS.

6.

Click Save.

10.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > Other.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

PATRAN Neutral (*out *neu)

File name

WingSPSMesh.out

Options
> Mesh Units

3.

Click Open.

4.

To best orient the view, right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric
View (Y up) from the shortcut menu.

10.4.2. Creating the Domain

1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on. A domain named Default Domain should now appear under the Simulation branch.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

187

Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

2.

Edit Default Domain and configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

WING_Elements

Fluid and Particle

Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Fluid 1
> Material

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
[a]

Fluid Models

1 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Total Energy

[b]

Turbulence
> Option

Shear Stress Transport

a. When using an ideal gas, it is important to set an appropriate reference pressure

because some properties depend on the absolute pressure level.
b. The Total Energy model is appropriate for high-speed flows because it includes
kinetic energy effects.

3.

Click OK.

10.4.3. Creating the Boundaries

10.4.3.1. Creating an Inlet Boundary
1.

Create a new boundary named Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

INLET

Boundary
Details

Flow Regime
> Option

188

Supersonic

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Cart. Vel. & Pressure

Mass And Momentum

> Rel. Static Pres.

0 [Pa]

Mass And Momentum

>U

600 [m s^-1]

Mass And Momentum

>V

0 [m s^-1]

Mass And Momentum

>W

0 [m s^-1]

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.01

Turbulence
> Eddy Length Scale

0.02 [m]

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

3.

300 [K]

Click OK.

10.4.3.2. Creating an Outlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named Outlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

OUTLET

Boundary
Details

Flow Regime
> Option

3.

Supersonic

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

189

Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

10.4.3.3. Creating the Symmetry Plane Boundaries

1.

Create a new boundary named SymP1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SIDE1

[a]

a. Symmetry, which can make a 3D problem into a 2D problem, can be used when
geometry and mesh are invariant normal to the symmetry surface.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named SymP2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SIDE2

6.

Click OK.

7.

Create a new boundary named Bottom.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

9.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

BOTTOM

Click OK.

10.4.3.4. Creating a Free Slip Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named Top.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

TOP

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

190

Free Slip Wall

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.

Click OK.

10.4.3.5. Creating a Wall Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named WingSurface.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

WING_Nodes

[a]

a. If particular items do not appear in the drop-down list, click the Ellipsis
to see all available items.

3.

icon

Click OK.

10.4.4. Creating Domain Interfaces

The imported mesh contains three regions that will be connected with domain interfaces.
1.

Create a new domain interface named Domain Interface 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Primitive 2D A

Interface Side 2
> Region List

3.

Primitive 2D, Primitive 2D B

Click OK.

10.4.5. Setting Initial Values

For high-speed compressible flow, the CFX-Solver usually requires sensible initial conditions to be set
for the velocity field.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

191

Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

Tab

Setting

Value

> Cartesian Velocity Components

> Option

Automatic
with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

600 [m
s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m
s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W

0 [m
s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Temperature
> Option

Automatic
with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Temperature
> Temperature

3.

300 [K]

Click OK.

10.4.6. Setting the Solver Controls

The residence time for the fluid is the length of the domain divided by the speed of the fluid; using
values from the problem specification, the result is approximately:
70 [m] / 600 [m s^-1] = 0.117 [s]
In the next step, you will set a maximum timescale, then the solver will start with a conservative time
scale that gradually increases towards the fluid-residence time as the residuals decrease.
1.

192

Click Solver Control

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control

Value

> Fluid Timescale Control

> Maximum Timescale

(Selected)

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Maximum Timescale
> Maximum Timescale

0.1 [s]

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

3.

1.0e-05

Click OK.

10.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

WingSPS.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

10.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

At this point, CFX-Solver Manager is running, and the Define Run dialog box is displayed, with the CFXSolver input file set.
1.

Click Start Run.

2.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

4.

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

193

Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

10.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The following topics will be discussed:
Displaying Mach Information (p. 194)
Displaying Pressure Information (p. 194)
Displaying Temperature Information (p. 195)
Displaying Pressure With User Vectors (p. 195)

10.6.1. Displaying Mach Information

The first view configured shows that the bulk of the flow over the wing has a Mach Number of over
1.5.
1.

To best orient the view, select View From -Z by typing Shift +Z.

2.

Zoom in so the geometry fills the Viewer.

3.

Create a new contour named SymP2Mach.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

SymP2

Variable

Mach Number

Range

User Specified

Min

Max

# of Contours

21

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Clear the check box next to SymP2Mach.

10.6.2. Displaying Pressure Information

To display pressure information, create a contour plot that shows the pressure field:
1.

Create a new contour named SymP2Pressure.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

194

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

SymP2

Variable

Pressure

Range

Global

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Clear the check box next to SymP2Pressure.

10.6.3. Displaying Temperature Information

You can confirm that a significant energy loss occurs around the wing's leading edge by plotting temperature on SymP2.
1.

Create a new contour named SymP2Temperature.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

SymP2

Variable

Temperature

Range

Global

Click Apply.
The contour shows that the temperature at the wing's leading edge is approximately 180 K higher
than the inlet temperature.

4.

Clear the check box next to SymP2Temperature.

10.6.4. Displaying Pressure With User Vectors

You can also create a user vector to show the pressure acting on the wing:
1.

Create a new variable named Variable 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Name

Setting

Value

Variable
1

Vector

(Selected)

X Expression

(Pressure+101325[Pa])*Normal
X

Y Expression

(Pressure+101325[Pa])*Normal
Y

Z Expression

(Pressure+101325[Pa])*Normal
Z

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Create a new vector named Vector 1.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

195

Supersonic Flow Over a Wing

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

WingSurface

Variable

Variable 1

Symbol Size

0.04

Symbol

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Zoom in on the wing in order to see the created vector plot.

196

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 11: Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

This tutorial includes:
11.1.Tutorial Features
11.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
11.3. Preparing the Working Directory
11.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
11.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
11.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

11.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using a rough wall boundary in CFX-Pre to simulate the pipe wall
Creating a fully developed inlet velocity profile using the CFX Expression Language
Setting up a Particle Tracking simulation in CFX-Pre to trace sand particles
Animating particle tracks in CFD-Post to trace sand particles through the domain
Performing quantitative calculation of average static pressure in CFD-Post on the outlet boundary.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

None

Particle Tracking
Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Profile)
Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Symmetry Plane
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Rough

CEL (CFX Expression

Language)
CFD-Post

Timestep

Auto Time Scale

Plots

Animation

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

197

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Component

Feature

Details
Default Locators
Particle Track
Point
Slice Plane

Other

Changing the Color

Range
Movie Generation
Particle Track
Animation
Quantitative Calculation
Symmetry, Reflection
Plane

11.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

Pumps and compressors are commonplace. An estimate of the pumping requirement can be calculated
based on the height difference between source and destination and head loss estimates for the pipe
and any obstructions/joints along the way. Investigating the detailed flow pattern around a valve or
joint however, can lead to a better understanding of why these losses occur. Improvements in valve/joint
design can be simulated using CFD, and implemented to reduce pumping requirements and cost.

Flows can contain particulates that affect the flow and cause erosion to pipe and valve components.
You can use the particle-tracking capability of CFX to simulate these effects.
In this example, water flows at 5 m/s through a 20 mm radius pipe that has a rough internal surface.
The velocity profile is assumed to be fully developed at the pipe inlet. The flow, which is controlled by
a butterfly valve set at an angle of 55 to the vertical axis, contains sand particles ranging in size from
50 to 500 microns. The equivalent sand grain roughness is 0.2 mm.
The reference temperature is 300 K; the reference pressure is 1 atm.
A mesh is provided. You will create sand particles and a domain that contains water; for one part of
the simulation the water and sand will be fully coupled, and for the other part of the simulation they
will be one-way coupled. To increase the accuracy of the simulation, the inlet will be given a velocity
profile that simulates a fully-developed boundary layer.
To solve the simulation, you will create two sets of identical particles. The first set will be fully coupled
to predict the effect of the particles on the continuous phase flow field and enable the particles to influence the flow field. The second set will be one-way coupled but will contain a much higher number

198

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

of particles to provide a more accurate calculation of the particle volume fraction and local forces on
walls, but without affecting the flow field.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

11.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

PipeValveMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

11.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run PipeValve.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 215).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type PipeValve.

6.

Click Save.

11.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

199

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

PipeValveMesh.gtm

Click Open.

11.4.2. Defining the Properties of the Sand

The material properties of the sand particles used in the simulation need to be defined. Heat transfer
and radiation modeling are not used in this simulation, so the only properties that need to be defined
are the density of the sand and the diameter range.
To calculate the effect of the particles on the continuous fluid, between 100 and 1000 particles are
usually required. However, if accurate information about the particle volume fraction or local forces on
wall boundaries is required, then a much larger number of particles must be modeled.
When you create the domain, choose either full coupling or one-way coupling between the particle
and continuous phase. Full coupling is needed to predict the effect of the particles on the continuous
phase flow field but has a higher CPU cost than one-way coupling; one-way coupling simply predicts
the particle paths during postprocessing based on the flow field, but without affecting the flow field.
To optimize CPU usage, you can create two sets of identical particles. The first set should be fully coupled
and around 200 particles will be used. This allows the particles to influence the flow field. The second
set uses one-way coupling but contains 5000 particles. This provides a more accurate calculation of the
particle volume fraction and local forces on walls. (These values are defined in the inlet boundary
definition.)
For this tutorial you will create a "Sand Fully Coupled" boundary condition that has 200 particles moving
with a mass flow rate of 0.01 kg/s and a "Sand One Way Coupled" boundary condition that has 5000
particles moving with a mass flow rate of 0.01 kg/s. In both cases the sand density is 2300 [kg m^-3];
particle diameters range from 50 e-6 m to 500 e-6 m, with an average diameter of 250 e-6 m and a
standard deviation of 70 e-6 m. You will set a Finnie erosion model with a velocity power factor of 2
and a reference velocity of 1 m/s.
1.

Click Insert Material

then create a new material named Sand Fully Coupled.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Material Group

Particle Solids

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Material
Properties

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Density

2300 [kg m^-3]

[a]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity

200

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Specific Heat Capacity

0 [J kg^-1 K^-1]

[b]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Reference State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Reference State
> Option

Specified Point

Thermodynamic Properties
> Reference State
> Ref. Temperature

300 [K]

[a]

a. From the problem description.

b. Specific Heat Capacity is set to 0 because heat transfer is not modeled in this tutorial.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Under Materials, right-click Sand Fully Coupled and select Duplicate from the shortcut menu.

5.

Rename the duplicate as Sand One Way Coupled.

6.

Sand One Way Coupled is created with properties identical to Sand Fully Coupled.

11.4.3. Creating the Domain

Set up an environment that has water and sand defined in two ways; one in which the sand is fully
coupled, and one in which the sand is one-way coupled:
1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on. A domain named Default Domain should appear under the Simulation > Flow
Analysis 1 branch.

2.

Double-click Default Domain.

3.

Under Fluid and Particle Definitions, delete Fluid 1.

4.

Click Add new item

5.

Set Fluid and Particle Definitions > Water > Material to Water.

6.

Create a new fluid definition named Sand Fully Coupled.

to create a new fluid definition named Water.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

201

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

7.

Under Fluid and Particle Definitions > Sand Fully Coupled, configure the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Material

Sand Fully
Coupled

[a]

Morphology
> Option

Particle
Transport Solid

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution

(Selected)

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Option

Normal in
Diameter by
Mass

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Minimum Diameter

50e-6 [m]

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Maximum Diameter

500e-6 [m]

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Mean Diameter

250e-6 [m]

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Std. Deviation

70e-6 [m]

a. Click the Ellipsis

icon to open the Materials dialog box,
then select Particle Solids > Sand Fully Coupled.

8.

Create a new fluid definition named Sand One Way Coupled.

9.

Under Fluid and Particle Definitions > Sand One Way Coupled, configure the following setting(s):

202

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

Material

Sand One Way

Coupled

[a]

Morphology
> Option

Particle
Transport Solid

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution

(Selected)

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Option

Normal in
Diameter by
Mass

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Minimum Diameter

50e-6 [m]

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Maximum Diameter

500e-6 [m]

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Mean Diameter

250e-6 [m]

Morphology
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Std. Deviation

70e-6 [m]

a. Click the Ellipsis

icon to open the Materials dialog box,
then select Particle Solids > Sand One Way
Coupled.

10. Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Domain Models

Value

> Pressure

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

203

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Tab
Fluid
Models

Setting

Value

> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

None

Turbulence

Fluid
Specific
Models

> Option

k-Epsilon[a]

Fluid

Sand Fully
Coupled

Fluid
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Erosion Model
> Option

Finnie

Fluid
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Erosion Model
> Vel. Power Factor

2.0

Fluid
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Erosion Model
> Reference Velocity

1 [m s^-1]

Fluid
> Sand One Way Coupled

(Selected)

Fluid
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Erosion Model
> Option

Finnie

Fluid
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Erosion Model
> Vel. Power Factor

2.0

Fluid
> Sand One Way Coupled

204

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Erosion Model

Fluid Pair
Models

> Reference Velocity

1 [m s^-1]

Fluid Pair

Water | Sand
Fully Coupled

Fluid Pairs
> Water | Sand Fully Coupled
> Particle Coupling

Fully Coupled

Fluid Pairs
>Water | Sand Fully Coupled
> Momentum Transfer
> Drag Force
> Option

Schiller
Naumann

Fluid Pair

[b]

Water | Sand
One Way
Coupled

Fluid Pairs
> Water | Sand One Way Coupled
> Particle Coupling

One-way
Coupling

Fluid Pairs
> Water | Sand One Way Coupled
> Momentum Transfer
> Drag Force
> Option

Schiller
Naumann

[b]

a. The turbulence model applies only to the continuous phase and not the particle
phases.
b. The Schiller Naumann drag model is appropriate for sparsely-distributed, solid
spherical particles.

11. Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

205

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

11.4.4. Creating the Inlet Velocity Profile

In previous tutorials you have often defined a uniform velocity profile at an inlet boundary. This means
that the inlet velocity near to the walls is the same as that at the center of the inlet. If you look at the
results from these simulations, you will see that downstream of the inlet a boundary layer will develop,
so that the downstream near wall velocity is much lower than the inlet near wall velocity.
You can simulate an inlet more accurately by defining an inlet velocity profile, so that the boundary
layer is already fully developed at the inlet. The one seventh power law will be used in this tutorial to
describe the profile at the pipe inlet. The equation for this is:
(11.1)
where
centerline.

is the pipe centerline velocity,

is the pipe radius, and

is the distance from the pipe

You can create a non-uniform (profile) boundary condition by doing one of the following:
Creating an expression using CEL that describes the inlet profile. Using a CEL expression is the easiest way
to create the profile.
Creating a User CEL Function that uses a user subroutine (linked to the CFX-Solver during execution) to
describe the inlet profile. The User CEL Function method is more complex, but is provided here as an example
of how to use this feature.
Loading a boundary condition profile file (a file that contains boundary condition profile data).
Profiles created from data files are not used in this tutorial, but are used in the tutorial Flow in a
Process Injection Mixing Pipe (p. 89).

Note
For complex profiles, it may be necessary to use a User CEL Function or a boundary condition
profile file.
Use a CEL expression to define the velocity profile for the inlet boundary:
1.

Click Insert Expression

and create the following expressions using Equation 11.1 (p. 206) and values
from the problem description:
Name

Definition

Rmax

20 [mm]

Wmax

5 [m s^-1]

Wprof

Wmax*(abs(1-r/Rmax)^0.143)

In the definition of Wprof, the variable r (radius) is a CFX System Variable defined as:
(11.2)
In this equation, and are defined as directions 1 and 2 (X and Y for Cartesian coordinate frames)
respectively, in the selected reference coordinate frame.
206

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.

Continue with the tutorial at Creating the Boundary Conditions (p. 207).

11.4.5. Creating the Boundary Conditions

11.4.5.1. Inlet Boundary
1.

Create a new boundary named inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

inlet

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Cart. Vel.
Components

Mass And Momentum

>U

0 [m s^-1]

Mass And Momentum

>V

0 [m s^-1]

Mass And Momentum

Fluid
Values
[b]

>W

Wprof

Boundary Conditions

Sand Fully
Coupled

[a]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Particle Behavior
> Define Particle Behavior

(Selected)

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

Cart. Vel.
Components

[c]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Mass And Momentum
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

207

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Mass And Momentum
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Mass And Momentum
>W

Wprof

[a]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Particle Position
> Option

Uniform
Injection

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Particle Position
> Number of Positions
> Option

Direct
Specification

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Particle Position
> Number of Positions
> Number

200

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Particle Mass Flow
> Mass Flow Rate

0.01 [kg s^-1]

Boundary Conditions

Sand One Way

Coupled

Boundary Conditions

208

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Sand One Way Coupled

> Particle Behavior
> Define Particle Behavior

(Selected)

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

Cart. Vel.
Components

[c]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Mass And Momentum
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Mass And Momentum
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Mass And Momentum
>W

Wprof

[a]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Particle Position
> Option

Uniform
Injection

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Particle Position
> Number of Positions
> Option

Direct
Specification

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

209

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Particle Position
> Number of Positions
> Number

5000

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Particle Position
> Particle Mass Flow Rate
> Mass Flow Rate
a. Use the Expressions details view

0.01 [kg s^-1]

to enter Wprof.

b. Do not select Particle Diameter Distribution. The diameter distribution was

defined when creating the domain; this option would override those settings
for this boundary only.
c. Instead of manually specifying the same velocity profile as the fluid, you can
also select the Zero Slip Velocity option.

3.

Click OK.

One-way coupled particles are tracked as a function of the fluid flow field. The latter is not influenced
by the one-way coupled particles. The fluid flow will therefore be influenced by the 0.01 [kg s^-1] flow
of two-way coupled particles, but not by the 0.01 [kg s^-1] flow of one-way coupled particles.

11.4.5.2. Outlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named outlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

outlet

Boundary
Details

Flow Regime
> Option

Subsonic

Mass and Momentum

> Option

210

Average Static
Pressure

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

3.

0 [Pa]

Click OK.

11.4.5.3. Symmetry Plane Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named symP.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

symP

[a]

a. Symmetry can be used when geometry and mesh are invariant normal to the
symmetry surface.

3.

Click OK.

11.4.5.4. Pipe Wall Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named pipe wall.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

pipe wall

Boundary Wall Roughness

Details
> Option

Rough Wall

Wall Roughness

Fluid
Values

> Sand Grain Roughness

0.2 [mm]

Boundary Conditions

Sand Fully
Coupled

[a]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Velocity
> Option

Restitution
Coefficient

Boundary Conditions
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

211

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Tab

Setting

Value

> Sand Fully Coupled

> Velocity
> Perpendicular Coeff.

0.8

[b]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Velocity
> Parallel Coeff.

a. From the problem description. Make sure that you change the units to
millimeters. The thickness of the first element should be of the same order as
the roughness height.
b. This value would typically come from experimental or reference data.

3.

Apply the same setting values for Sand One Way Coupled as for Sand Fully Coupled.

4.

Click OK.

11.4.5.5. Editing the Default Boundary

1.

In the Outline tree view, edit the boundary named Default Domain Default.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Fluid
Values

Boundary Conditions

Sand Fully Coupled

Boundary Conditions
> Sand Fully Coupled
> Velocity
> Perpendicular Coeff.

0.9

Boundary Conditions

Sand One Way Coupled

[a]

Boundary Conditions
> Sand One Way Coupled
> Velocity
> Perpendicular Coeff.

0.9

a. This value would typically come from experimental or reference data. For this
tutorial, the pipe wall and butterfly valve are considered to be made of different
materials, so their perpendicular coefficients are different.

212

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.

Click OK.

11.4.6. Setting Initial Values

Set up the initial values to be consistent with the inlet boundary conditions:
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity Components

> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option
>W

3.

Wprof

Click OK.

11.4.7. Setting the Solver Controls

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Advection Scheme

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

213

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Tab

Particle
Control

Setting

Value

> Option

High
Resolution

Particle Integration
> Max. Particle Intg. Time Step

(Selected)

Particle Integration
> Max. Particle Intg. Time Step
> Value

1e+10 [s]

Particle Termination Control

(Selected)

Particle Termination Control

> Maximum Tracking Time

(Selected)

Particle Termination Control

> Maximum Tracking Time
> Value

10 [s]

Particle Termination Control

> Maximum Tracking Distance

(Selected)

Particle Termination Control

> Maximum Tracking Distance
> Value

10 [m]

Particle Termination Control

> Max. Num. Integration Steps

(Selected)

Particle Termination Control

> Max. Num. Integration Steps
> Value

10000

[a]

a. This value controls the number of mesh elements a particle is allowed to cross
and therefore must take into account the size and density of the mesh.

Note
The numeric values in the preceding table are all designed to put a high upper limit on
the amount of processing that will be done. For example, the tracking time of 10 seconds
would enable a particle to get caught in an eddy for a reasonable amount of time.

3.

214

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

11.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

PipeValve.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

11.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and CFX-Solver Manager has started, you can obtain a solution to the
CFD problem by using the procedure that follows.
1.

Ensure the Define Run dialog box is displayed and click Start Run.

2.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

4.

Click OK.

11.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will first plot erosion on the valve surface and side walls due to the sand particles.
You will then create an animation of particle tracks through the domain.

11.6.1. Erosion Due to Sand Particles

An important consideration in this simulation is erosion to the pipe wall and valve due to the sand
particles. A good indication of erosion is given by the Erosion Rate Density parameter, which
corresponds to pressure and shear stress due to the flow.
1.

Edit the object named Default Domain Default.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) using the Ellipsis

as required for variable selection:

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Sand One Way Coupled.Erosion Rate

Density

[a]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

215

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

Tab

Setting

Value

Range

User Specified

Min

0 [kg m^-2 s^-1]

Max

25 [kg m^-2 s^-1]

[b]

a. This is statistically better than Sand Fully Coupled.Erosion Rate

Density because many more particles were calculated for Sand One Way
Coupled.
b. This range is used to gain a better resolution of the wall shear stress values
around the edge of the valve surfaces.

3.

Click Apply.
As can be seen, the highest values occur on the edges of the valve where most particles strike.
Erosion of the low Z side of the valve would occur more quickly than for the high Z side.

11.6.2. Displaying Erosion on the Pipe Wall

Set the user specified range for coloring to resolve areas of stress on the pipe wall near of the valve:
1.

Ensure that the check box next to Res PT for Sand Fully Coupled is cleared.

2.

Clear the check box next to Default Domain Default.

3.

Edit the object named pipe wall.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Sand One Way Coupled.Erosion Rate

Density

Range

User Specified

Min

0 [kg m^-2 s^-1]

Max

25 [kg m^-2 s^-1]

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Optionally, fill the check box next to Default Domain Default to see how sand particles have deflected off the butterfly valve then to the pipe wall.

11.6.3. Creating Particle Tracks

Default particle track objects are created at the start of the session. One particle track is created for
each set of particles in the simulation. You are going to make use of the default object for Sand Fully
Coupled.

216

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The default object draws 25 tracks as lines from the inlet to outlet. The Info tab shows information
about the total number of tracks, the index range, and the track numbers that are drawn.
1.

Turn off the visibility for all objects except Wireframe.

2.

Edit the object named Res PT for Sand Fully Coupled.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Max Tracks

20

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Sand Fully Coupled.Velocity w

Show Symbols

(Selected)

Symbol

[a]

Show Symbols
> Max Time

0 [s]

Show Symbols
> Min Time

0 [s]

Show Symbols
> Interval

0.07 [s]

Show Symbols
> Symbol

Ball

Show Symbols
> Scale

1.2

a. This value improves the resolution of the tracks generated.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Right-click a blank area anywhere in the viewer, select Predefined Camera from the shortcut menu and
select View From +X to view the particle tracks.
Symbols can be seen at the start of each track.

11.6.4. Creating a Particle Track Animation

The following steps describe how to create a particle tracking animation using Quick Animation. Similar effects can be achieved in more detail using the Keyframe Animation option, which allows full
control over all aspects on an animation.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Y up) from the
shortcut menu.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

217

Flow Through a Butterfly Valve

2.

Right-click an edge of the flat side on the half cylinder and select Reflect/Mirror from the shortcut menu.
Click X Axis to choose it as the normal direction.

Note
Alternatively, you can apply Reflect/Mirror, by double-clicking Default Domain to
open the details view. In the Instancing tab enable Apply Reflection and select
Method to YZ Plane. Click Apply.

3.

Select Tools > Animation or click Animation

4.

Select Quick Animation.

5.

Select Res PT for Sand Fully Coupled:

6.

Click Options to display the Animation Options dialog box, then clear Override Symbol Settings to
ensure the symbol type and size are kept at their specified settings for the animation playback. Click OK.

Note
The arrow pointing downward in the bottom right corner of the Animation Window will
reveal the Options button if it is not immediately visible.

7.

Select Loop.

8.

Clear Repeat forever

9.

Select Save Movie.

and ensure Repeat is set to 1.

10. Set Format to MPEG1.

11. Click Browse

and enter tracks.mpg as the filename.

12. Click Play the animation

13. If prompted to overwrite an existing movie, click Overwrite.

The animation plays and builds an .mpg file.
14. Close the Animation dialog box.

11.6.5. Determining Minimum, Maximum, and Average Pressure Values

On the outlet boundary you created in CFX-Pre, you set the Average Static Pressure to 0.0 [Pa].
To see the effect of this:
1.

218

From the main menu select Tools > Function Calculator.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The Function Calculator is displayed. It enables you to perform a wide range of quantitative calculations on your results.

Note
You should use Conservative variable values when performing calculations and Hybrid
values for visualization purposes. Conservative values are set by default in CFD-Post but
you can manually change the setting for each variable in the Variables Workspace, or
the settings for all variables by using the Function Calculator.

2.

Set Function to maxVal.

3.

Set Location to outlet.

4.

Set Variable to Pressure.

5.

Click Calculate.
The result is the maximum value of pressure at the outlet.

6.

Perform the calculation again using minVal to obtain the minimum pressure at the outlet.

7.

Select areaAve, and then click Calculate.

This calculates the area weighted average of pressure.
The average pressure is approximately zero, as specified by the boundary.

11.6.6. Other Features

The geometry was created using a symmetry plane. In addition to the Reflect/Mirror option from the
shortcut menu, you also can display the other half of the geometry by creating a YZ Plane at X = 0 and
then editing the Default Transform object to use this plane as a reflection plane.
When you have finished viewing the results, quit CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

219

220

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 12: Flow in a Catalytic Converter

This tutorial includes:
12.1.Tutorial Features
12.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
12.3. Preparing the Working Directory
12.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
12.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
12.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

12.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using multiple meshes in CFX-Pre.
Joining meshes together using static fluid-fluid domain interfaces between the inlet/outlet flanges and the
central catalyst body.
Applying a source of resistance using a directional loss model.
Creating a chart to show pressure drop versus Z coordinate in CFD-Post.
Exporting data from a line locator to a file.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Domain Type

Multiple Domain
(Fluid, Porous)

Fluid Type

Ideal Gas

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip

CFD-Post

Domain Interfaces

Fluid-Porous

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Contour
Default Locators
Outline Plot
(Wireframe)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

221

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

Component

Feature

Details
Polyline
Slice Plane
Vector

Other

Chart Creation
Data Export
Title/Text
Viewing the Mesh

12.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

Catalytic converters are used on most vehicles on the road today. They reduce harmful emissions from
internal combustion engines (such as oxides of nitrogen, hydrocarbons, and carbon monoxide) that are
the result of incomplete combustion. Most new catalytic converters are the honeycomb ceramic type
and are usually coated with platinum, rhodium, or palladium.

In this tutorial, you will model a catalytic converter in order to determine the pressure drop and heat
transfer through it when air enters the inlet at 25 m/s and 500 K, and exits the outlet at a static pressure
of 1 atm. For simplicity, you will not model chemical reactions.
You are provided with a mesh for the passageways inside a pipe-and-flange structure. You will use this
mesh, and a copy of it, to model the pipe and flange portions of the flow field, at both ends of the
catalytic converter.
For the housing, you are provided with a hexahedral mesh that was created in ICEM-Hexa. This mesh
fills the entire 3D volume of the housing.
To model the presence of the honeycomb structure that exists in the housing, you will model porosity
and apply resistance to the flow. The honeycomb structure has a porosity of 70%, which means that

222

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

70% of the total volume is available for fluid flow, while the other 30% is occupied by the solid material
that comprises the honeycomb structure. The solid component of the structure will be steel. The honeycomb structure is lined up with the flow to prevent flow travel in the transverse direction. To model
resistance to the flow, you will apply a streamwise quadratic resistance coefficient of 650 kg m^-4. To
reduce the amount of transverse flow, apply a quadratic resistance coefficient of 6500 kg m^-4 in the
transverse direction. These given resistance coefficients are based on the superficial flow velocity, rather
than the true flow velocity.
The Inlet boundary has a static temperature of 500 K. You will model heat transfer through the solid
material in the porous domain. The heat transfer between the air and steel within the porous domain
is modeled using an interfacial area density of 360 m^-1 and a heat transfer coefficient of 50 W m^-2
K^-1. Thermal energy is lost to the environment through the midsection walls of the catalytic converter;
the rate of heat loss is defined by the heat transfer coefficient (20 W m^-2 K^-1) and the outside temperature (40 C).
You will first import the mesh for the housing. You will then import a mesh for one of the two flanges.
You will then produce another flange mesh by transforming the first. You will create one porous domain
for the housing, and one fluid domain for both flanges. You will model a honeycomb structure inside
the housing by specifying a porosity and applying a directional momentum loss model.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

12.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
CatConvHousing.hex
CatConvMesh.gtm
CatConv.ccl
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

12.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run CatConv.pre.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

223

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).
b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 235).

This tutorial requires that you are working with SI units. In particular, some coordinates used in the
specification of a mesh transformation (performed later in this tutorial) are given without units, and
CFX-Pre assumes that the working units apply. Before continuing, ensure that your units are set to SI
as follows:
1.

Select Edit > Options.

The Options dialog box appears.

2.

In the tree on the left side of the dialog box, select Common > Units.

3.

Set System to SI.

4.

Click OK.

5.

Select File > New Case.

6.

Select General and click OK.

7.

Select File > Save Case As.

8.

Under File name, type CatConv.

9.

Click Save.

12.4.1. Importing the Meshes and CCL File

The mesh for this catalytic converter comprises three distinct parts:
The outlet section (pipe and flange).
The inlet section (pipe and flange).
You will copy and rotate the outlet section through 180 degrees to create this section.
The catalyst (or monolith).
You will import a CFX Command Language (CCL) file defining mathematical expressions for this case.
Next you will import the catalyst housing and a generic inlet/outlet section from provided files.

12.4.1.1. Importing the Required Expressions From a CCL File

The CCL file you are going to import contains expressions that will be used to define parameters in the
simulation. These can be seen in the table below:
Expression

Value

AreaDen

360 [m^-1]

HTC

50 [W m^-2 K^-1]

HTCoutside

20 [W m^-2 K^-1]

224

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Expression

Value

0.4 [m]

Porosity

0.7

Tinlet

500[K]

Toutside

40 [C]

Import the CCL File to define relevant expressions:

1.

Select File > Import > CCL.

The Import CCL dialog box appears.

2.

Select CatConv.ccl

3.

Click Open.

4.

Expand the Expressions section in the Outline tree to see a list of the expressions that have been
imported.

12.4.1.2. Importing the Housing Mesh

The first mesh that you will import, CatConvHousing.hex, is a hexahedral mesh for the catalyst
housing. The mesh was originally created in ICEM-Hexa using mesh units of centimeters. Because this
type of mesh file does not specify the mesh units, you must specify them manually. The imported mesh
has a width in the X direction of 21 cm and a length in the Z direction of 20 cm.
1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > Other.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

All Types(*)

Mesh Format

ICEM CFD

File name

CatConvHousing.hex

Options
> Mesh Units

3.

cm

Click Open.

Later in this tutorial, you will create a porous domain for the housing in order to simulate flow through
a honeycomb structure.

12.4.1.3. Importing the Pipe and Flange Mesh

The second mesh that you will import, CatConvMesh.gtm, is a mesh for a pipe and flange. The mesh
has units of centimeters. Because this type of mesh file does specify the mesh units, there is no need
to specify them manually.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

225

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

CatConvMesh.gtm

Click Open.

You now have a pipe and flange on the outlet end of the housing. In the next step, you will create a
transformed copy of the pipe and flange for the inlet end.

12.4.1.4. Creating a Second Pipe and Flange Mesh

Create a transformed copy of the pipe and flange mesh:
1.

Right-click CatConvMesh.gtm and select Transform Mesh.

The Mesh Transformation Editor dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transformation

Rotation

Rotation Option

Rotation Axis

From

0, 0, 0.16

To

0, 1, 0.16

Rotation Angle Option

Specified

Rotation Angle

180 [degree]

Multiple Copies

(Selected)

Multiple Copies > # of

Copies

[a]

a. This specifies an axis located at the center of the housing parallel

to the Y axis.

3.

Click Apply.

Later in this tutorial, you will create a fluid domain for both pipe and flange sections.

12.4.1.5. Creating a Single Region for Both Pipe and Flange Meshes
The outlet pipe and flange region is B1.P3. The inlet pipe and flange region is B1.P3 2.
There are three basic options for creating fluid domains on these regions:
Create two similar domains: one that applies to B1.P3, and one that applies to B1.P3 2.

226

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Create one domain that applies to both B1.P3 and B1.P3 2.
Create one domain that applies to one composite region, the latter referring to B1.P3 and B1.P3 2.
For demonstration purposes, you will create a composite region and use it as the location for a single
fluid domain.
Create a single region that includes both pipe-flange regions:
1.

Create a new composite region by selecting Insert > Regions > Composite Region.

2.

In the Insert Region dialog box, set the name to CatConverter.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

5.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Dimension (Filter)

3D

Region List

B1.P3, B1.P3 2

Click OK.

12.4.2. Creating the Fluid Domain

For this simulation you will use a thermal energy heat transfer model and assume turbulent flow. Create
the fluid domain using the composite region that you created earlier:
1.

Create a new domain by selecting Insert > Domain, or click Domain

2.

In the Insert Domain dialog box, set the name to Pipes.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

CatConverter

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Fluid Domain

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Models

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

227

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

Tab

Setting

Value

> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid
Models

1 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

5.

Thermal Energy

Click OK.

12.4.3. Creating the Porous Domain

The catalyst-coated honeycomb structure will be modeled using a porous domain with a directional
source of quadratic resistance, as described in the problem description. The streamwise directional
resistance is aligned with the Z axis.
For quadratic resistances, the pressure drop is modeled using:
(12.1)

where

is the quadratic resistance coefficient,

is the local velocity in the direction, and

pressure drop gradient in the direction.

1.

Create a new domain by selecting Insert > Domain, or click Domain

2.

In the Insert Domain dialog box, set the name to Housing.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

LIVE

[a]

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Porous
Domain

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1

228

> Material

Air Ideal Gas

Solid Definitions

(Add a new
solid named
Steel)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

is the

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Solid Definitions
> Steel
> Material

Steel

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid
Models

Heat Transfer
> Option

Solid
Models

Thermal
Energy

Heat Transfer
> Option

Porosity
Settings

1 [atm]

Thermal
Energy

Volume Porosity
> Option

Value

Volume Porosity
> Volume Porosity

Porosity

[d]

Loss Model
> Option

Directional
Loss

Loss Model
> Loss Velocity Type

Superficial
[b]

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Streamwise Direction
> Option

Cartesian
Components

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Streamwise Direction
> X Component

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

229

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

Tab

Setting

Value

> Streamwise Direction

> Y Component

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Streamwise Direction
> Z Component

-1

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Streamwise Loss > Option

Linear and
Quadratic
Coeffs.

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Streamwise Loss
> Quadratic Resistance Coefficient

(Selected)

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Streamwise Loss
> Quadratic Resistance Coefficient
> Quadratic Coefficient

650 [kg
m^-4]

[c]

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Transverse Loss
> Option

Streamwise
Coeff.
Multiplier

Loss Model
> Directional Loss
> Transverse Loss
> Multiplier

10

[c]

Fluid Solid Area Density

230

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Interfacial Area Den.

AreaDen

[d]

Fluid Solid Heat Transfer

> Heat Trans. Coeff.

HTC

[d]

a. This is the entire housing section as predefined in the mesh.

b. Superficial velocity is the velocity at which the flow would travel if the porosity
of the domain were 100%. It is less than the true velocity.
c. From the problem description.
d. In order to enter an expression, you must first click Enter Expression

5.

Click OK.

12.4.4. Creating and Editing the Boundaries

Create the inlet and outlet boundaries using the values given in the problem description.

12.4.4.1. Creating the Inlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary in domain Pipes named Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

PipeEnd 2

Boundary

Mass and Momentum

Details

[a]

> Normal Speed

25 [m s^-1]

[b]

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

Tinlet

a. The default level of turbulence is suitable for this application.

b. From the problem description.

3.

Click OK.

12.4.4.2. Creating the Outlet Boundary

Set up the outlet with a static pressure boundary:
1.

Create a new boundary in domain Pipes named Outlet.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

231

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

PipeEnd

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

3.

0 [Pa]

Click OK.
The remaining outer surfaces are automatically assigned to the default (no slip wall) boundaries:
Housing Default and Pipes Default.

12.4.4.3. Editing the Housing Default Boundary

In order to model the heat transfer through the Housing domain, several parameters from the
Housing Default boundary need to be modified.
1.

In the Outline tree, right-click Housing Default and select Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer
> Option

Value

Heat Transfer
Coefficient

Heat Transfer
> Heat Trans. Coeff.

HTCoutside

Heat Transfer
> Outside Temperature
Solid Values

Toutside

Boundary Conditions
> Steel
> Heat Transfer
> Option

Heat Transfer
Coefficient

Boundary Conditions
> Steel
> Heat Transfer

232

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Heat Trans. Coeff.

HTCoutside

Boundary Conditions
> Steel
> Heat Transfer
> Outside Temperature

3.

Toutside

Click OK.

12.4.5. Creating the Domain Interfaces

You will next create a pair of domain interfaces to model the connection between the fluid and porous
domains. The meshes on the interfaces are dissimilar, so a General Grid Interface (GGI) connection
method is required. Domain interfaces are capable of modeling changes in reference frame as well as
other changes that are not applicable to this simulation.
Two interfaces are required, one to connect the inlet flange to the catalyst housing and one to connect
the outlet flange to the catalyst housing.
1.

Create a new domain interface by selecting Insert > Domain Interface, or click Domain Interface

2.

In the Insert Domain Interface dialog box, set the name to InletSide.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Porous

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

Pipes

Interface Side 1
> Region List

FlangeEnd 2

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

Housing

Interface Side 2
> Region List
Mesh
Connection

INLET

Mesh Connection Method

> Mesh Connection
> Option

GGI

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

233

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

5.

Click OK.

6.

Create a similar domain interface named OutletSide that connects FlangeEnd (in domain Pipes)
to OUTLET (in domain Housing).

12.4.6. Setting Initial Values

A sensible guess for the initial velocity is the expected velocity through the catalyst housing. You can
assume incompressible flow and apply conservation of mass to obtain an approximate velocity of
2.8 [m s^-1] through the housing based on the following known information:
The inlet velocity: 25 [m s^-1]
The cross-sectional area of the inlet and housing, which can be determined using the function calculator in
CFD-Post: 0.001913 m^2 and 0.024039 m^2 respectively
The porosity of the honeycomb structure: 70%
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity

Components
> Option

Automatic with Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>W

3.

234

-2.8 [m s^-1]

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

12.4.7. Setting Solver Control

Assuming velocities of 25 m/s in the inlet and outlet pipes, and 2.8 m/s in the catalyst housing, an approximate fluid residence time of 0.1 s can be calculated. A sensible time step is 1/4 to 1/2 of the fluid
residence time. In this case, use a time step of 0.04 s.
For the convergence criteria, an RMS value of at least 1e-05 is usually required for adequate convergence,
but the default value of 1e-04 is sufficient for demonstration purposes.
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control

Value

> Fluid Timescale Control

> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

3.

0.04 [s]

Click OK.

12.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

CatConv.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

12.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

At this point, CFX-Solver Manager is running.
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

235

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.
3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

12.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will inspect the GGI interface to see the lack of node alignment that characterizes
this type of interface. You will also create plots showing the distribution of temperature and pressure
on a flat plane that intersects the catalytic converter. You will then make a chart showing pressure
versus Z coordinate using data from a polyline that runs around the perimeter of the catalytic converter.
Finally, you will export data from the polyline to a file. Such a file could be used in other programs, or
could be loaded into CFD-Post (for example, to use as data for a chart line).
The topics in this section include:
12.6.1. Viewing the Mesh on a GGI Interface
12.6.2. Creating User Locations
12.6.3. Creating Plots
12.6.4. Exporting Polyline Data

12.6.1. Viewing the Mesh on a GGI Interface

In this section, you will examine a GGI interface. As a preliminary step, do the following:
1.

When CFD-Post opens, if you see the Domain Selector dialog box, ensure that both domains are selected,
then click OK.

2.

Edit User Locations and Plots > Wireframe.

3.

Set Edge Angle to 10 [degree] and click Apply to see more of the mesh surface.

4.

Turn off the visibility of User Locations and Plots > Wireframe.

5.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z.

In the Outline tree view, four interface sides are listed. There are two sides to the interface between
the housing and the inlet. Similarly, there are two sides to the corresponding interface on the outlet
side.
Examine the interface on the inlet side to see the nature of the GGI connection:
1.

In the Outline tree view, edit InletSide Side 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Render

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

236

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

> Color Mode

User Specified

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Color

3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Outline tree view, edit InletSide Side 2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

(Red)

Tab

Setting

Value

Render

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

> Color Mode

User Specified

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Color

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Click Fit View

(Green)

to re-center and re-scale the geometry.

You can now see the tetrahedral/prism and hexahedral mesh on each side of the GGI interface. This
interface was used to produce a connection between dissimilar meshes before the solution was calculated.
Notice that there are more tetrahedral/prism elements than hexahedral elements and that the extent
of the two meshes is not quite the same (this is most noticeable on the curved edges).

12.6.2. Creating User Locations

In this section, you will create locators that you will use to make plots.
To make it easier to see the locators, adjust the view as follows:
1.

Turn on the visibility of User Locations and Plots > Wireframe.

2.

Turn off the visibility of Pipes > InletSide Side 1 and Housing > InletSide Side 2.

12.6.2.1. Creating a Slice Plane

Later in this tutorial, you will produce a contour plot and a vector plot to observe pressure changes.
Both of these plots require a slice plane locator.
Create a slice plane through the geometry as follows:
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Y.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

237

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

2.

Create a new plane named Plane 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Value

> Method

ZX Plane

Definition

Color

>Y

0.0 [m]

Mode

Variable

Variable

Steel.Temperature[a]

Range

Global

a. If particular items do not appear in the drop-down list, click the Ellipsis icon
available items.

to see all

4.

Click Apply. Notice the temperature distribution in the steel throughout the catalytic converter housing.

5.

To see the temperature distribution in the fluid, change Variable to Temperature and click Apply.

6.

Turn off the visibility of User Locations and Plots > Plane 1 after you have analyzed the air
temperature variation on Plane 1.

12.6.2.2. Creating a User Surface

You will create a user surface to observe the different characteristics of steel and air at the catalytic
converter wall. Because the materials have different properties, the characteristics of each will vary
slightly.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Y Up).

2.

Click Location

3.

Click OK to accept the default name.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Method

Transformed Surface

Surface Name

Housing Default

Mode

Variable

Variable

Steel.Temperature

Range

Local

Color

5.
238

and select User Surface.

Click Apply.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Observe that the steel temperature decreases as it reaches the outlet pipe.
6.

Configure the following setting(s) to show the air temperature at the wall:
Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Variable

Temperature

Range

Local

7.

Click Apply.

8.

Configure the following setting(s) to show the steel heat flux at the wall:

9.

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Variable

Steel.Wall Heat Flux

Range

Local

Click Apply.
The values of the heat flux are negative because heat flow is directed away from the catalyst
housing. The magnitude of heat flux should be greatest where the inlet pipe meets the housing
body.

10. Configure the following setting(s) to show the air heat flux at the wall:
Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Variable

Wall Heat Flux

Range

Local

11. Click Apply.

The values of the heat flux are negative because heat flow is directed away from the catalyst converter. The magnitude of heat flux should be greatest where the inlet pipe meets the housing
body.
12. Turn off the visibility of User Locations and Plots > User Surface 1.

12.6.2.3. Creating a Polyline

Later in this tutorial, you will make a chart that plots data from a polyline.
The Method used to create the polyline can be From File, Boundary Intersection, or From
Contour. If you select From File, you must specify a file containing point definitions in the required
format.
In this tutorial, you will use the Boundary Intersection method. This creates a polyline from the
intersecting line between a boundary object and a location (for example, between a wall and a plane).
The points on the polyline are where the intersecting line cuts through a surface mesh edge.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

239

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

You will be able to see the polyline following the intersecting line between the wall, inlet and outlet
boundaries and the slice plane.
1.

Create a new polyline named Polyline 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Method

Boundary Intersection

Boundary List

Housing Default, Pipes

Default

Color
Render

[a]

Intersect With

Plane 1

Mode

Constant

Color

(Yellow)

Line Width

a. Click the Ellipsis icon

to select multiple items using the Ctrl key.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Turn off the visibility of User Locations and Plots > Polyline 1.

12.6.3. Creating Plots

In this section, you will make plots on the slice plane and polyline locators.

12.6.3.1. Creating a Contour Plot of Pressure

You will now create a contour plot to observe the pressure change throughout the main body of the
catalytic converter:
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Y.

2.

Clear Plane 1 in the Outline tab if you have not already done so.

3.

Create a new contour plot named Contour 1.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Plane 1

Variable

Pressure

Range

Global

# of Contours

30

Show Contour Bands

(Cleared)

Render

5.

240

Click Apply.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

From the contour plot, you can see that the pressure falls steadily through the main body of the
catalytic converter.

12.6.3.2. Creating a Vector Plot on the Slice Plane

Create a vector plot to display the recirculation zone:
1.

Create a new vector plot named Vector 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Plane 1

Symbol

Symbol Size

0.1

Normalize Symbols

(Selected)

Click Apply.

Notice that the flow separates from the walls, where the inlet pipe expands into the flange, setting up
a recirculation zone. The flow is uniform through the catalyst housing.

12.6.3.3. Creating a Chart of Pressure versus the Z Coordinate

In this section, you will make a chart to see if the pressure drop is, as expected, linear by plotting a line
graph of pressure against the z-coordinate. In this case you will use CFD-Post to produce the graph,
but you could also export the data, then read it into any standard plotting package.
1.

Create a new chart named Chart 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General

Title

Pressure Drop through a

Catalytic Converter

Data
Series

Name

Pressure Drop

Data Source
> Location

X Axis

Data Selection
> Variable

Y Axis

Line
Display

Polyline 1

Data Selection
> Variable

Pressure

Pressure Drop

(Selected)

[a]

Line Display
> Line Style [b]

None

Line Display
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

241

Flow in a Catalytic Converter

Tab

Chart
Display

Setting

Value

> Symbols [b]

Rectangle

Sizes
> Symbol

a. Click the Pressure Drop entry in the Specify the properties of each line
list to select it.
b. These options will only be revealed if you have successfully selected Pressure
Drop.

3.

Click Apply.
Through the main body of the catalytic converter you can see that the pressure drop is linear. This
is in the region from approximately Z=0.06 to Z=0.26. The two lines show the pressure on each
side of the wall. You can see a noticeable difference in pressure between the two walls on the inlet
side of the housing (at around Z=0.26).

4.

If required, in the Outline tree view, select Contour 1 and Vector 1.

5.

Click the 3D Viewer tab, then right-click a blank area and select Predefined Camera > View From +Y.
You should now see that the flow enters the housing from the inlet pipe at a slight angle, producing
a higher pressure on the high X wall of the housing.

12.6.4. Exporting Polyline Data

You can export data from a polyline for use in other software.
Export data as follows:
1.

From the main menu, select File > Export > Export.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Options

Locations

Polyline 1

Export Geometry Information

(Selected)

Select Variables

Pressure

Precision

Formatting

[a]

a. This ensures X, Y, and Z to be sent to the output file.

3.

Click Save.
The file export.csv will be written to the current working directory in a comma-separated variable
format. This file can be opened in any text editor. You can use the exported data file to plot charts
in other software such as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

242

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.

When finished, quit CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

243

244

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 13: Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

This tutorial includes:
13.1.Tutorial Features
13.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
13.3. Background Theory
13.4. Preparing the Working Directory
13.5. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
13.6. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
13.7. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

13.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Defining a non-Newtonian fluid.
Using the Moving Wall feature to apply a rotation to the fluid at a wall boundary.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

Laminar

Heat Transfer

None

Boundary Conditions

Symmetry Plane
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Moving

CFD-Post

Timestep

Auto Time Scale

Plots

Sampling Plane
Vector

13.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

In this tutorial, a shear-thickening liquid rotates in a 2D eccentric annular pipe gap. The outer pipe remains
stationary while the inner pipe rotates at a constant rate about its own axis, which is the Z axis. Both
pipes have nonslip surfaces.
The fluid used in this simulation has material properties that are not a function of temperature. The
ambient pressure is 1 atmosphere.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

245

Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

The shear-thickening liquid that is used in this tutorial obeys the Ostwald de Waele model with a viscosity consistency of 10.0 kg m-1 s-1, a Power Law index of 1.5, and a time constant of 1 s. This model
is assumed to be valid for shear-strain rates ranging from 1.0E-3 s-1 to 100 s-1. The fluid has a density
of 1.0E4 kg m-3. The viscosity is plotted over this range in Figure 13.2: Apparent Viscosity of a Shearthickening Fluid (p. 247).

13.3. Background Theory

A Newtonian fluid is a fluid for which shear stress is linearly proportional to shear-strain rate, with
temperature held constant. For such a fluid, the dynamic viscosity is constant and equal to the shear
stress divided by the shear-strain rate.
A non-Newtonian fluid is a fluid for which the shear stress in not linearly proportional to the shear-strain
rate. For such fluids, the apparent viscosity is the ratio of shear stress to shear-strain rate for a given
shear-strain rate.
A shear-thickening fluid is a type of non-Newtonian fluid for which the apparent viscosity increases
with increasing shear-strain rate.

246

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Preparing the Working Directory

Figure 13.1: Shear Stress of a Shear-thickening Fluid

Figure 13.2: Apparent Viscosity of a Shear-thickening Fluid

This tutorial involves a shear thickening fluid that obeys the Ostwald de Waele model between apparent
viscosity and shear-strain rate:
(13.1)
where is the apparent viscosity, is the viscosity consistency, is the shear-strain rate, is a normalizing time constant, and is the Power Law index. Note that the units for are not tied to the value
of because the quantity in parentheses is dimensionless.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

13.4. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

247

Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.
2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

NonNewtonMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

13.5. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run NonNewton.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 254).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type NonNewton.

6.

Click Save.

13.5.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

NonNewtonMesh.gtm

Click Open.

13.5.2. Creating the Fluid

As stated in the problem description, the shear-thickening liquid that is used in this tutorial obeys the
Ostwald de Waele model with a viscosity consistency ( ) of 10.0 kg m-1 s-1, a Power Law index ( ) of

248

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.5, and a time constant of 1 s. This model is assumed to be valid for shear-strain rates ranging from
1.0E-3 s-1 to 100 s-1. The fluid has a density of 1.0E4 kg m-3.
1.

Create a new material named myfluid.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic State
> Thermodynamic State

Material
Properties

Liquid

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Molar Mass

1.0 [kg
kmol^-1]

[a]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Density

1.0E+4 [kg
m^-3]

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Option

Non
Newtonian
Model

a. While this is not the correct molar mass, it is not a value used by CFX-Solver in
this particular case.

3.

Configure the following setting(s) under Transport Properties > Dynamic Viscosity > Non Newtonian
Viscosity Model:
Setting

Value

Option

Ostwald de Waele

Viscosity Consistency

10.0 [kg m^-1 s^1]

Min. Shear Strn. Rate

0.001 [s^-1]

Max. Shear Strn. Rate

100 [s^-1]

Time Constant

1 [s]

Power Law Index

1.5

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

249

Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

4.

Click OK.

13.5.3. Creating the Domain

The flow is expected to be laminar because the Reynolds number, based on the rotational speed, the
maximum width of the pipe gap, and a representative viscosity (calculated using the shear-strain rate
in the widest part of the gap, assuming a linear velocity profile), is approximately 30, which is well
within the laminar-flow range.
From the problem description, the ambient pressure is 1 atmosphere.
Create a fluid domain that uses the non-Newtonian fluid you created in the previous section, and specify
laminar flow with a reference pressure of 1 atmosphere:
1.

Click Domain

and set the name to NonNewton.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of NonNewton:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Location

B8

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material
Fluid
Models

myfluid

Heat Transfer
> Option

None

Turbulence
> Option

3.

None (Laminar)

Click OK.

13.5.4. Creating the Boundaries

The inner and outer pipes both have nonslip surfaces. A rotating-wall boundary is required for the inner
pipe. For the outer pipe, which is stationary, the default boundary is suitable. By not explicitly creating
a boundary for the outer pipe, the latter receives the default wall boundary.
This tutorial models 2D flow in a pipe gap, where the latter is infinite in the Z direction. The flow domain
models a thin 3D slice (in fact, just one layer of mesh elements) that has two surfaces of constant-Z
coordinate that each require a boundary. Symmetry boundary conditions are suitable in this case, since
there is no pressure gradient or velocity gradient in the Z direction.

13.5.4.1. Wall Boundary for the Inner Pipe

From the problem description, the inner pipe rotates at 31.33 rpm about the Z axis. Create a wall
boundary for the inner pipe that indicates this rotation:

250

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Create a new boundary named rotwall.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

rotwall

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

No Slip Wall

Mass And Momentum

> Wall Velocity

(Selected)

Mass And Momentum

> Wall Velocity
> Option

Rotating Wall

Mass And Momentum

> Wall Velocity
> Angular Velocity

31.33 [rev min^-1]

Mass And Momentum

> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Mass And Momentum

> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis

3.

Global Z

Click OK.

13.5.4.2. Symmetry Plane Boundary

In order to simulate the presence of an infinite number of identical 2D slices while ensuring that the
flow remains 2D, apply a symmetry boundary on the high-Z and low-Z sides of the domain:
1.

Create a new boundary named SymP1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SymP1

Click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

251

Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

4.

Create a new boundary named SymP2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

6.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SymP2

Click OK.
The outer annulus surfaces will default to the no-slip stationary wall boundary.

13.5.5. Setting Initial Values

A reasonable guess for the initial velocity field is a value of zero throughout the domain. In this case,
the problem converges adequately and quickly with such an initial guess. If this were not the case, you
could, in principle, create and use CEL expressions to specify a better approximation of the steady-state
flow field based on the information given in the problem description.
Set a static initial velocity field:
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Global Initial Conditions

Settings
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W

3.

252

0 [m s^-1]

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

13.5.6. Setting Solver Control

Because this flow is low-speed, laminar, and because of the nature of the geometry, the solution converges very well. For this reason, set the solver control settings for a high degree of accuracy and a
high degree of convergence.
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

Specified Blend
Factor

Advection Scheme
> Blend Factor

1.0

[a]

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

50

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Type

RMS

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

1e-05

[b]

a. This is the most accurate but least robust advection scheme.

b. This target demands a solution with a very high degree of convergence.

3.

Click OK.

13.5.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

NonNewton.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

253

Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

13.6. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and CFX-Solver Manager has started, you can obtain a solution to the
CFD problem by following the instructions below:
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

13.7. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The following steps instruct you on how to create a vector plot showing the velocity values in the domain.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z from the shortcut
menu.

2.

Create a new plane named Plane 1.

This plane will be used as a locator for a vector plot. To produce regularly-spaced sample points,
create a circular sample plane, centered on the inner pipe, with a radius sufficient to cover the
entire domain, and specify a reasonable number of sample points in the radial and theta directions.
Note that the sample points are generated over the entire plane, and only those that are in the
domain are usable in a vector plot.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Point and Normal

Definition
> Point

0, 0, 0.015

[a]

Definition
> Normal

0, 0, 1

Plane Bounds
> Type

Circular

Plane Bounds
> Radius
254

0.3 [m]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

Plane Type

Sample

Plane Type
> R Samples

32

Plane Type

Render

> Theta Samples

24

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

> Color Mode

User Specified

Line Color

(Choose green, or
some other color,
to distinguish the
sample plane from
the Wireframe
object.)

a. This is the point on the axis of the inner pipe, in the middle of the domain in the
Z direction.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Examine the sample plane. The sample points are located at the line intersections. Note that many of the
sample points are outside the domain. Only those points that are in the domain are usable for positioning
vectors in a vector plot.

6.

Turn off the visibility of Plane 1.

7.

Create a new vector plot named Vector 1 on Plane 1.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

Value

Plane 1

Definition
> Sampling

Vertex

[a]

Definition
> Reduction

Reduction Factor

Definition
> Factor

1.0

[b]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

255

Non-Newtonian Fluid Flow in an Annulus

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition
> Variable

Velocity

Definition

Symbol

> Boundary Data

Hybrid

Symbol Size

[c]

[d]

a. This causes the vectors to be located at the nodes of the sample plane you
created previously. Note that the vectors can alternatively be spaced using other
options that do not require a sample plane.
b. A reduction factor of 1.0 causes no reduction in the number of vectors so that
there will be one vector per sample point.
c. The hybrid values are modified at the boundaries for postprocessing purposes.
d. Because CFD-Post normalizes the size of the vectors based on the largest vector,
and because of the large variation of velocity in this case, the smallest velocity
vectors would normally be too small to see clearly.

9.

Click Apply.

In CFX-Pre, you created a shear-thickening liquid that obeys the Ostwald de Waele model for shearstrain rates ranging from 1.0E-3 s-1 to 100 s-1. The values of dynamic viscosity, which are a function of
the shear-strain rate, were calculated as part of the solution. You can post-process the solution using
these values, which are stored in the Dynamic Viscosity variable. For example, you can use this
variable to color graphics objects.
Color Plane 1 using the Dynamic Viscosity variable:
1.

Turn on the visibility of Plane 1.

2.

Edit Plane 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Dynamic Viscosity

Show Faces

(Selected)

Render

4.

Click Apply

Try plotting Shear Strain Rate on the same plane. Note that the distribution is somewhat different
than that of Dynamic Viscosity, as a consequence of the nonlinear relationship (see Figure 13.2: Apparent Viscosity of a Shear-thickening Fluid (p. 247)).
When you have finished, quit CFD-Post.
256

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 14: Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

This tutorial includes:
14.1.Tutorial Features
14.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
14.3. Preparing the Working Directory
14.4. Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model
14.5. Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model

14.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Using the Turbo Wizard in CFX-Pre to quickly specify a turbomachinery application.
Multiple Frames of Reference and Generalized Grid Interface.
Using a Frozen Rotor interface between the rotor and stator domains.
Modifying an existing simulation.
Setting up a transient calculation.
Using a Transient Rotor-Stator interface condition to replace a Frozen Rotor interface.
Creating a transient animation showing domain movement in CFD-Post.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Turbo Wizard

Analysis Type

Steady State
Transient

Fluid Type

Ideal Gas

Domain Type

Multiple Domain
Rotating Frame of
Reference

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

Domain Interfaces

Frozen Rotor
Periodic

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

257

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

Component

Feature

Details
Transient Rotor Stator

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Transient Example

Transient Results File

CFX-Solver
Manager

Restart

CFD-Post

Plots

Parallel Processing
Animation
Isosurface
Surface Group
Turbo Post
Other

Changing the Color

Range
Chart Creation
Instancing
Transformation
Movie Generation
Quantitative Calculation
Time Step Selection
Transient Animation

14.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

The goal of this tutorial is to set up a transient calculation of an axial turbine stage.
The stage contains 60 stator blades and 113 rotor blades. The following figure shows approximately
half of the full geometry. The Inflow and Outflow labels show the location of the modeled section in
Figure 14.1: Geometry subsection (p. 260).

258

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Overview of the Problem to Solve

The geometry to be modeled consists of a single stator blade passage and two rotor blade passages.
This is an approximation to the full geometry since the ratio of rotor blades to stator blades is close to,
but not exactly, 2:1. In the stator blade passage a 6 section is being modeled (360/60 blades), while
in the rotor blade passage, a 6.372 section is being modeled (2*360/113 blades). This produces a pitch
ratio at the interface between the stator and rotor of 0.942. As the flow crosses the interface, it is scaled
to enable this type of geometry to be modeled. This results in an approximation of the inflow to the
rotor passage. Furthermore, the flow across the interface will not appear continuous due to the scaling
applied.
You should always try to obtain a pitch ratio as close to 1 as possible in your model to minimize approximations, but this must be weighed against computational resources. A full machine analysis can be
performed (modeling all rotor and stator blades), which always eliminates any pitch change, but will
require significant computational time. For this geometry, a 1/4 machine section (28 rotor blades, 15
stator blades) would produce a pitch change of 1.009, but this would require a model about 15 times
larger than in this tutorial example.
In this example, the rotor rotates about the Z axis at 523.6 rad/s while the stator and shroud are stationary. The tip gap between the rotor blades and the shroud is not included in the mesh. Periodic
boundaries are used to enable only a small section of the full geometry to be modeled.
The important parameters of this problem are:
Total pressure = 0.265 bar

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

259

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

Static Pressure = 0.0662 bar
Total temperature = 328.5 K
Figure 14.1: Geometry subsection

The overall approach of this tutorial is to run a transient simulation using the Transient Rotor-Stator
interface model initialized with the results of a steady-state simulation that uses the Frozen Rotor interface
model. First, you will define a steady-state Frozen Rotor simulation using the Turbomachinery Wizard.
The results of this simulation will be viewed using the Turbo-Post feature. Next, you will rerun the
steady-state Frozen Rotor simulation using an Exit Corrected Mass Flow Rate boundary condition. You
will modify a copy of this steady-state Frozen Rotor simulation to define the transient simulation with
the Transient Rotor-Stator interface model. After running the Transient Rotor-Stator simulation, you will
create an animation showing domain movement.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

14.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

260

Create a working directory.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.
2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
rotor.grd
stator.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

14.4. Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model
You will first create the Frozen Rotor simulation.

14.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The Turbomachinery wizard is designed to simplify the setup of turbomachinery simulations.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run AxialIni.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 266).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select Turbomachinery and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type AxialIni.

6.

Click Save.

14.4.1.1. Basic Settings

1.

In the Basic Settings panel, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Machine Type

Axial Turbine

Analysis Type
> Type

2.

Steady State

Click Next.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

261

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

14.4.1.2. Component Definition

Two new components are required. As they are created, meshes are imported.
1.

Right-click in the blank area and select Add Component from the shortcut menu.

2.

Create a new component of type Stationary, named S1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Mesh
> File

stator.gtm

[a]

a. You may have to select the CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx) option under Files of
type.

4.

Create a new component of type Rotating, named R1.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Component Type
> Value

523.6 [radian s^-1]

Mesh
> File

rotor.grd

[a]

Options
> Mesh Units

a. You may have to select the CFX-TASCflow (*grd) option under Files of
Type.

Note
The components must be ordered as above (stator then rotor) in order for the interface
to be created correctly. The order of the two components can be changed by rightclicking on S1 and selecting Move Component Up.
When a component is defined, Turbo Mode will automatically select a list of regions that correspond
to certain boundary types. This information should be reviewed in the Region Information section
to ensure that all is correct. This information will be used to help set up boundary conditions and
interfaces. The upper case turbo regions that are selected (for example, HUB) correspond to the
region names in the CFX-TASCflow grd file. CFX-TASCflow turbomachinery meshes use these names
consistently.
6.

262

Click Passages and Alignment > Edit.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Passage and Alignment

> Passages/Mesh
> Passages per Mesh

Passage and Alignment

> Passages to Model

Passage and Alignment

> Passages in 360

8.

Click Passages and Alignment > Done.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

113

Setting

Value

Wall Configuration

(Selected)

Wall Configuration
> Tip Clearance at Shroud

Yes

[a]

No

[a]

Wall Configuration
> Tip Clearance at Hub

a. These settings configure the slip conditions on the walls such that the shroud
is counter-rotating with respect to the rotor, but the hub is not.

10. Click Next.

14.4.1.3. Physics Definition

In this section, you will set properties of the fluid domain and some solver parameters.
1.

In the Physics Definition panel, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Fluid

Air Ideal Gas

Model Data
> Reference Pressure

0.25 [atm]

Model Data
> Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Model Data

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

263

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

Setting

Value

> Turbulence

k-Epsilon

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> P-Total Inlet Mass Flow Outlet

(Selected)

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Inflow
> P-Total

0 [atm]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Inflow
> T-Total

340 [K]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Inflow
> Flow Direction

Normal to
Boundary

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Outflow
> Mass Flow

Per Component

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Outflow
> Mass Flow Rate

0.06 [kg s^-1]

Interface
> Default Type

Frozen Rotor

Solver Parameters

(Selected)

Solver Parameters
> Advection Scheme

High Resolution

Solver Parameters
> Convergence Control

Physical
Timescale

Solver Parameters
> Physical Timescale
a. This time scale is approximately equal to 1 /
rotating machinery applications.

2.
264

0.002 [s]

[a]

, which is often appropriate for

Click Next.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

14.4.1.4. Interface Definition

CFX-Pre will try to create appropriate interfaces using the region names presented previously in the
Region Information section. In this case, you should see that a periodic interface has been generated
for both the rotor and the stator. These are required when modeling a small section of the true geometry.
An interface is also required to connect the two components together across the frame change.
1.

Review the various interfaces but do not change them.

2.

Click Next.

14.4.1.5. Boundary Definition

CFX-Pre will try to create appropriate boundary conditions using the region names presented previously
in the Region Information section. In this case, you should see a list of boundary conditions that have
been generated. They can be edited or deleted in the same way as the interface connections that were
set up earlier.
1.

Review the various boundary definitions but do not change them.

2.

Click Next.

14.4.1.6. Final Operations

1.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode.

2.

Click Finish.
After you click Finish, a dialog box appears stating that the Turbo report will not be included in
the solver file because you are entering General mode.

3.

Click Yes to continue.

14.4.1.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

AxialIni.def

[a]

a. You do not need to set the full path unless you are saving the solver file
somewhere other than the working directory.

3.

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

265

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

14.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Compared to previous tutorials, the mesh for this tutorial contains many more nodes (although it is still
too coarse to perform a high quality CFD simulation). This results in a corresponding increase in solution
time for the problem. Solving this problem in parallel is recommended, if possible. Your machine should
have a minimum of 256 MB of memory to run this tutorial.
More detailed information about setting up CFX to run in parallel is available. For details, see Flow
Around a Blunt Body (p. 127).
You can solve this example using Serial, Local Parallel or Distributed Parallel.
Obtaining a Solution in Serial (p. 266)
Obtaining a Solution With Local Parallel (p. 266)
Obtaining a Solution with Distributed Parallel (p. 267)

14.4.2.1. Obtaining a Solution in Serial

If you do not have a license to run CFX in parallel you can run in serial by clicking the Start Run button
when CFX-Solver Manager has opened up. Solution time in serial is approximately 45 minutes on a 1
GHz processor.
1.

Click Start Run on the Define Run dialog box.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

2.

Select Post-Process Results.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

4.

Click OK.

When you are finished, proceed to Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post (p. 267).

14.4.2.2. Obtaining a Solution With Local Parallel

To run in local parallel mode:
1.

Set Run Mode to a parallel mode suitable for your environment; for example, Platform MPI Local
Parallel.

2.

If required, click Add Partition

to add more partitions.

By default, two partitions are assigned. Ideally, the number of partitions should not exceed the
number of available processor cores.
3.

Click Start Run.

4.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

266

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

5.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

6.

Click OK.

When you are finished, proceed to Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post (p. 267).

14.4.2.3. Obtaining a Solution with Distributed Parallel

1.

Set Run Mode to a parallel mode suitable for your environment; for example, Platform MPI Dis
tributed Parallel.
One partition should already be assigned to the host that you are logged into.

2.

Click Insert Host

to specify a new parallel host.

3.

In Select Parallel Hosts, select another host name (this should be a machine that you can log into using
the same user name).

4.

Click Add, and then Close.

The names of the two selected machines should be listed in the Host Name column of the Define
Run dialog box.

5.

Click Start Run.

6.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

7.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

8.

Click OK.

14.4.2.4. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

When CFD-Post starts, the Domain Selector dialog box might appear. If it does, ensure that both the
R1 and S1 domains are selected, then click OK to load the results from these domains.
The Turbo-Post feature will be demonstrated in the following sections. This feature is designed to greatly
reduce the effort taken to post-process turbomachinery simulations.

14.4.2.4.1. Initializing Turbo-Post

When initializing turbo components, span, a (axial), r (radial), and Theta coordinates are generated for
each component. Therefore, after entering the Turbo workspace and initializing the turbo components,
you will be ready to start using the turbo-specific features offered in the Turbo workspace immediately.
These features include Turbo Tree View, Turbo Surface, Turbo Line and Turbo Plots.
To initialize Turbo-Post, the properties of each component must be set up. This includes information
about the inlet, outlet, hub, shroud, blade, and periodic regions. It also includes information about the
number of instances of each turbo component needed to represent the full geometry around the rotation
axis, and the number of blade passages in the mesh for each turbo component.
1.

Click the Turbo tab.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

267

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

The Turbo Initialization dialog box is displayed, and asks you whether you want to auto-initialize
all components.

Note
If you do not see the Turbo Initialization dialog box, or as an alternative to using that
dialog box, you can initialize all components by clicking the Initialize All Components
button, which is visible initially by default, or after double-clicking the Initialization
object in the Turbo tree view.

2.

Click Yes.
In this case, the initialization works without problems. If there was a problem initializing a component, this would likely be indicated in the tree view.

14.4.2.4.2. Viewing Three Domain Passages

Next, you will create an instancing transformation to plot three domain passages; three blade passages
for the stator and six blade passages for the rotor. It was chosen to create three times the geometry
that was used in the simulation to help visualize the variation of pressure. Seeing neighboring passages
will give a better understanding of the pressure variation through the stage.
The instancing properties of each domain have already been entered during Initialization. In the next
steps, you will create a surface group plot to color the blade and hub surfaces with the same variable.
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Location > Surface Group.

2.

Click OK to accept the default name.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

R1 Blade, R1 Hub, S1 Blade, S1

Hub

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Pressure

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Click the Turbo tab.

6.

Open Plots > 3D View for editing.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

3D
View

Graphical Instancing
> Domain

Value

R1

Graphical Instancing

268

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

Tab

Setting

Value

> # of Copies

8.

Click Apply.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

3D
View

Graphical Instancing
> Domain

Value

S1

Graphical Instancing
> # of Copies

10. Click Apply.

11. Click the Outline tab to see the surface group.

14.4.2.4.3. Blade Loading Turbo Chart

In this section, you will create a plot of pressure around the stator blade at a given spanwise location.
1.

Click the Turbo tab.

2.

In the Turbo tree view, double-click Blade Loading.

3.

Click Apply.
This profile of the pressure curve is typical for turbomachinery applications.

4.

When you are finished viewing the chart, return to the Outline tab and keep CFD-Post open.

14.4.3. Simulating the Stage with the Exit Corrected Mass Flow Rate Boundary
Condition
You will now use a different outlet boundary condition, namely the Exit Corrected Mass Flow Rate
specification for the R1 Outlet boundary, that will enable you to specify the mass flow at the outlet
at corrected conditions. The Reference Pressure and Reference Temperature will be set to International
Standard Atmosphere (ISA) conditions (1 atm and 288.15 K).
The exit corrected mass flow is defined as:
(14.1)

where,
and
at the outlet.

are mass averaged values of total pressure and temperature in the stationary frame

The intent of this section is to obtain the same operating point with the exit corrected mass flow
boundary condition as with the previous setup that used the mass flow boundary condition at the
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

269

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

outlet. To do this you need to calculate, from the previous cases results, the mass averaged values of
total pressure and temperature at the outlet, in the stationary frame. These values along with the mass
flow (0.06 kg s^-1) and the reference values mentioned above are substituted into Equation 14.1 (p. 269).
The resulting value for the exit corrected mass flow is 0.3745 kg s^-1. You may want to verify this by
doing the calculation yourself.
1.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

AxialIni_001.res
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already open.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run AxialIni_Cor.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 271).

4.

Open the results file named AxialIni_001.res.

5.

Save the case as AxialIni_Cor.cfx in your working directory.

6.

In the tree view, open R1 Outlet for editing.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Value

Exit Corrected Mass

Flow Rate

Mass And Momentum

> Mass Flow Rate

0.3745 [kg s^-1]

Mass And Momentum

> Ref. Temperature

288.15 [K]

Mass And Momentum

> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

[a]

a. The Ref. Temperature and Reference Pressure values should be the default
settings but if they are not, ensure that they are the values given in the table.

8.
270

Click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

14.4.3.1. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Follow one of the next two procedures as appropriate:

Procedure 1: If Simulation Control > Execution Control does not appear in the outline tree view:
1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

AxialIni_Cor.def

Click Save.

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.
Procedure 2: If Simulation Control > Execution Control appears in the outline tree view:
1.

Click Execution Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Run
Definition

Solver Input File

AxialIni_Cor.def

3.

Click OK.

4.

Click Define Run

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.
2.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

14.4.3.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

As in the previous setup of the steady-state simulation for this case, solving the problem in parallel is
recommended, if possible.
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select Run Mode > Platform MPI Local Parallel and click Start Run.

3.

In CFX-Solver Manager, select Workspace > New Monitor in the main menu and click OK to accept the
default name.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

271

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

Tab

Setting

Plot Lines

Flow

Value

> Boundary
> R1 Outlet
> P-Mass Boundary Flow on
R1 Outlet (R1)

(Selected)

5.

Click OK.

6.

When the dialog box is displayed stating that the simulation has ended, click OK.

Note
The resulting plot of the P-Mass Boundary Flow on R1 Outlet (R1) vs. Accumulated Time
Step converges to 0.06 on the Y axis. The exit corrected mass flow rate entered (0.3745
kg s^-1) for this run yields the same physical mass flow as used in the previous steadystate setup; this is expected. The value is negative because the flow is leaving the domain.

If you would like to convince yourself that the results are identical, you can proceed to the following
section and do a case comparison in CFD-Post. If you do not want to compare the cases, proceed to
Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model (p. 274).

14.4.4. Comparing the Two Cases Using CFD-Post

In this section you will compare the domain passages of the two cases.
1.

With AxialIni_001.res already loaded in CFD-Post, select File > Load Results.

2.

In the Load Results File dialog box, select Keep current cases loaded, then select the file AxialIni_Cor_001.res. Click Open. If the Domain Selector dialog box appears, ensure that both the R1
and S1 domains are selected, and then click OK.

3.

You should see the two cases beside one another in the 3D Viewer. Click the synchronize active view icon
.

4.

Right-click within the 3D view and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Y up) to orient the views.
Click Fit View

5.

to scale the blades appropriately within the 3D Viewer.

Next, you will create an instancing transformation to plot three domain passages; three blade passages
for the stator and six blade passages for the rotor, as you did for the previous case.
The instancing properties of each domain have already been entered during Initialization. In the
next steps, you will create a surface group plot to color the blade and hub surfaces with the same
variable.

6.

272

Select Insert > Location > Surface Group from the main menu.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model

7.

Click OK to accept the default name.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Locations
> AxialIni_Cor_001

Value

R1 Blade, R1 Hub, S1 Blade, S1

Hub

Color

a. Click the

9.

[a]

Mode

Variable

Variable

Pressure

button beside the drop-down box to see all available items.

Click Apply.

10. Click the Turbo tab.

11. Open Plots > 3D View for editing.
12. Configure the following setting(s):
Tab

Setting

3D
View

Graphical Instancing
> Domain

Value

R1 (AxialIni_Cor_001)

Graphical Instancing
> # of Copies

13. Click Apply.

Note
If the image from the results of AxialIni_Cor_001 is not displayed in the 3D Viewer,
select it from the drop-down list at the top of the viewer.

14. Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

3D
View

Graphical Instancing
> Domain

Value

S1 (AxialIni_Cor_001)

Graphical Instancing
> # of Copies

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

273

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

15. Click Apply.
16. Click the Outline tab to see the surface group.
17. To see both images, click the viewport icon and select
. You may need to turn on the visibility of
Surface Group 1 in the tree view to compare the two surfaces.
After you have finished your comparison, close CFD-Post.

14.5. Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model

You will now create the Transient Rotor-Stator simulation. The existing steady-state Frozen Rotor simulation is modified to define the Transient Rotor-Stator simulation. If you have not already completed
the Frozen Rotor simulation, refer to Simulating the Stage with the Steady-State Frozen Rotor Model (p. 261) before proceeding with the Transient Rotor-Stator simulation.

14.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

This section describes the step-by-step definition of the flow physics in CFX-Pre.
This step involves opening the original simulation and saving it to a different location.
1.

Ensure the following file is in your working directory:

AxialIni_001.res

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already running.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run Axial.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6). The session file creates a new simulation named
Axial.cfx.

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 277).

4.

Open the results file named AxialIni_001.res.

5.

Save the case as Axial.cfx in your working directory.

14.5.1.1. Modifying the Physics Definition

You need to modify the domain to define a transient simulation. You are going to run for a time interval
such that the rotor blades pass through 1 pitch (6.372) using 10 time steps. This is generally too few

274

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model

time steps to obtain high quality results, but is sufficient for tutorial purposes. The time step size is
calculated as follows:

Note

Since 10 time steps are used over this interval each time step should be 2.124e-5 s.
1.

Select Tools > Turbo Mode.

Basic Settings is displayed.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Analysis Type
> Type

Transient

Analysis Type
> Total Time

2.124e-4 [s]

Analysis Type
> Time Steps

2.124e-5 [s]

[a]

a. This time step size will be used until the total time is reached, giving 10 time
steps, each 2.124e-5 s.

3.

Click Next.
Component Definition is displayed.

4.

Click Next.
Physics Definition is displayed.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Fluid

Air Ideal Gas

Interface

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

275

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

Setting

Value

> Default Type

Transient Rotor Stator

Note
A Transient Rotor-Stator calculation often runs long enough for the blades to pass
through more than one pitch. In these cases, it may be useful to look at variable data
averaged over the time interval required to complete 1 pitch. You can then compare
data for each pitch rotation to see if a steady state has been achieved, or if the flow
is still developing.

6.

Click Next.
A warning message is displayed.

7.

Click Yes.
Interface Definition is displayed.

8.

Click Next.
Boundary Definition is displayed.

9.

Click Next.
Final Operations is displayed.

10. Ensure that Operation is set to Enter General Mode.

11. Click Finish.
Initial values are required, but will be supplied later using a results file.

14.5.1.2. Setting Output Control

1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

In the Transient Results tree view, click Add new item

click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

, set Name to Transient Results 1, and

Setting

Value

Option

Selected Variables

Output Variables List

Pressure, Velocity, Velocity in Stn Frame

[a]

Output Frequency
> Option

276

Time Interval
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model

Setting

Value

Output Frequency
> Time Interval

2.124e-5 [s]

a. Use the Ctrl key to select more than one variable.

5.

Click OK.

14.5.1.3. Modifying Execution Control

1.

Click Execution Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Run
Definition

Solver Input File

Axial.def

[a]

a. You do not need to set the full path unless you are saving the solver file
somewhere other than the working directory.

3.

Confirm that the rest of the execution control settings are set appropriately.

4.

Click OK.

14.5.1.4. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

A warning will appear, due to a lack of initial values.

Initial values are required, but will be supplied later using a results file.
2.

Click Yes.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

14.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When the CFX-Solver Manager has started you will need to specify an initial values file before starting
the CFX-Solver.

14.5.2.1. Serial Solution

If you do not have a license, or do not want to run CFX in parallel, you can run it in serial. Solution time
in serial is similar to the first part of this tutorial.
1.

Under the Initial Values tab, select Initial Values Specification.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

277

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

2.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values, select Initial Values 1.

3.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values > Initial Values 1 Settings > File Name, click Browse
.

4.

Select AxialIni_001.res from your working directory.

5.

Click Open.

6.

Under Initial Values Specification > Use Mesh From, select Solver Input File.

7.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

8.

Select Post-Process Results.

9.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

10. Click OK. Continue this tutorial from Monitoring the Run (p. 278).

14.5.2.2. Parallel Solution

Follow the first 6 steps of the serial procedure above (in Serial Solution (p. 277)), then perform the local
parallel or distributed parallel procedure from the first part of this tutorial (in Obtaining the Solution
Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 266)).

14.5.2.3. Monitoring the Run

During the solution, look for the additional information that is provided for Transient Rotor-Stator runs.
Each time the rotor is rotated to its next position, the number of degrees of rotation and the fraction
of a pitch moved is given. You should see that after 10 time steps the rotor has been moved through
1 pitch.

14.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

To examine the transient interaction between the rotor and stator, you are going to create a blade-toblade animation of pressure. A turbo surface will be used as the basis for this plot.

14.5.3.1. Initializing Turbo-Post

All the preprocessing will be done during the initialization of the turbo components. Only a few steps
will therefore be required to display a surface of constant span and to create a turbo surface later on
in this tutorial.
1.

278

Click the Turbo tab.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model

The Turbo Initialization dialog box is displayed and asks you whether you want to auto-initialize
all components.

Note
If you do not see the Turbo Initialization dialog box, or as an alternative to using that
dialog box, you can initialize all components by clicking the Initialize All Components
button, which is visible initially by default, or after double-clicking the Initialization
object in the Turbo tree view.

2.

Click Yes.
Both components (domains) are now being initialized based on the automatically selected turbo
regions. When the process is complete, a green turbine icon appears next to each component entry
in the list. Also, the viewer displays a green background mesh for each initialized component.

3.

Double-click Component 1 (S1) and review the automatically-selected turbo regions and other data
in the details view.

4.

Double-click Component 2 (R1) and review the automatically-selected turbo regions and other data
in the details view (including the Passages per Component setting on the Instancing tab, which should
have a value of 2).

14.5.3.2. Displaying a Surface of Constant Span

1.

In the Turbo tree view, double-click Blade-to-Blade.

2.

Click Apply.
A surface of constant span appears, colored by pressure.

14.5.3.3. Using Multiple Turbo Viewports

1.

In the Turbo tree view, double-click Initialization.

2.

Click Three Views.

Left view is 3D View, top right is Blade-to-Blade and bottom right is Meridional view.

3.

Click Single View.

14.5.3.4. Creating a Turbo Surface at Mid-Span

1.

Create a Turbo Surface by selecting Insert > Location > Turbo Surface from the drop-down menu with
a Constant Span and value of 0.5.

2.

Under the Color tab select Variable and set it to Pressure with a user specified range of -10000 [Pa] to
-7000 [Pa].

3.

Click Apply.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

279

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

14.5.3.5. Setting up Instancing Transformations

Next, you will use instancing transformations to view a larger section of the model. The properties for
each domain have already been entered during the initialization phase, so only the number of instances
must be set.
1.

In the Turbo tree view, double-click the 3D View object.

2.

In the Instancing section of the form, set # of Copies to 6 for R1.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the Instancing section of the form, set # of Copies to 6 for S1.

5.

Click Apply.

6.

Return to the Outline tab and ensure that the turbo surface is visible again.

14.5.3.6. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator

Start by loading the first time step:
1.

Click Timestep Selector

2.

Select time value 0.

3.

Click Apply to load the time step. The rotor blades move to their starting positions. These positions are
exactly 1 pitch from the blade positions that were previously displayed, so the blades will appear to be
in the same positions.

4.

Turn off the visibility of Wireframe.

5.

Position the geometry as shown below, ready for the animation. During the animation the rotor blades
will move to the right. Make sure you have at least two rotor blades out of view to the left side of the
viewer. They will come into view during the animation.

280

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Stage with the Transient Rotor-Stator Model

6.

Click Animation

The Animation dialog box appears.

7.

In the Animation dialog box, select the Keyframe Animation option.

8.

Click New

9.

Select KeyframeNo1, then set # of Frames to 9, then press Enter while in the # of Frames box.

to create KeyFrameNo1.

Tip
Be sure to press Enter and confirm that the new number appears in the list before
continuing.

10. Use the Timestep Selector to load the final time step.
11. In the Animation dialog box, click New
12. Click More Animation Options

to create KeyframeNo2.

to expand the Animation dialog box.

13. Click Options and set Transient Case to TimeValue Interpolation. Click OK.
The animation now contains a total of 11 frames (9 intermediate frames plus the two Keyframes),
one for each of the available time values.
14. In the expanded Animation dialog box, select Save Movie.
15. Set Format to MPEG1.
16. Click Browse

, next to the Save Movie box and then set the file name to an appropriate file name.

17. If frame 1 is not loaded (shown in the F: text box at the bottom of the Animation dialog box), click
To Beginning

to load it.

Wait for CFD-Post to finish loading the objects for this frame before proceeding.
18. Click Play the animation

It takes a while for the animation to be completed.

To view the movie file, you will need to use a media player that supports the MPEG format.
You will be able to see from the animation, and from the plots created previously, that the flow is
not continuous across the interface. This is because a pitch change occurs. The relatively coarse
mesh and the small number of time steps used in the transient simulation also contribute to this.
The movie was created with a narrow pressure range compared to the global range, which exaggerates the differences across the interface.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

281

Flow in an Axial Turbine Stage

14.5.3.7. Further Postprocessing

You can produce a report for the turbine as follows:
1.

Click File > Report > Report Templates.

2.

In the Report Templates dialog box, select Turbine Report, then click Load.
The report will be generated automatically.

3.

Click the Report Viewer tab (located below the viewer window).
A report appears.

Note that a valid report depends on valid turbo initialization.

282

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 15: Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

This tutorial includes:
15.1.Tutorial Features
15.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
15.3. Preparing the Working Directory
15.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
15.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
15.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

15.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Creating and using a multicomponent fluid in CFX-Pre.
Using CEL to model a reaction in CFX-Pre.
Using an algebraic Additional Variable to model a scalar distribution.
Using a subdomain as the basis for component sources.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

Variable Composition
Mixture

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Particle Tracking

Component Source

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Symmetry Plane
Wall: Adiabatic

Additional Variables
CEL (CFX Expression
Language)
CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Isosurface
Slice Plane

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

283

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

15.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

Reaction engineering is one of the core components in the chemical industry. Optimizing reactor design
leads to higher yields, lower costs and, as a result, higher profit.
This example demonstrates the capability of ANSYS CFX to model basic reacting flows using a multicomponent fluid and CEL expressions.

The geometry consists of a mixing tube with three rings with twelve holes in each ring.
The main inlet has water entering at 2 m/s with a temperature of 300 K. The pressure at the outlet is
1 atm.
Through the ring of holes nearest the inlet, a solution of dilute sulfuric acid enters at 2 m/s with a
temperature of 300 K. Through each of the two other rings of holes, a solution of dilute sodium hydroxide
enters at 2.923 m/s with a temperature of 300 K. The properties of the solution of sulfuric acid are
shown in Table 15.1: Properties of the Dilute Sulfuric Acid Solution (p. 284):
Table 15.1: Properties of the Dilute Sulfuric Acid Solution
Property

Value

Molar mass

19.517 kg kmol^-1

Density

1078 kg m^-3

Specific heat capacity

4190 J kg^-1 K^-1

Dynamic Viscosity

0.001 kg m^-1 s^-1

Thermal Conductivity

0.6 W m^-1 K^-1

284

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Overview of the Problem to Solve

Through the remaining two rings of holes, a solution of dilute sodium hydroxide (an alkali) enters with
a temperature of 300 K. The properties of the solution of sodium hydroxide are shown in
Table 15.2: Properties of the Dilute Sodium Hydroxide Solution (p. 285).
Table 15.2: Properties of the Dilute Sodium Hydroxide Solution
Property

Value

Molar mass

18.292 kg kmol^-1

Density

1029 kg m^-3

Specific heat capacity

4190 J kg^-1 K^-1

Dynamic Viscosity

0.001 kg m^-1 s^-1

Thermal Conductivity

0.6 W m^-1 K^-1

The acid and alkali undergo an exothermic reaction to form a solution of sodium sulfate (a type of salt)
and water according to the reaction:

Mixing the acid and alkali solutions in a stoichiometric ratio (and enabling them to react completely)
would result in a salt water solution that would include water from each of the original solutions plus
water produced during the reaction. The properties of this salt water product are shown in
Table 15.3: Properties of the Salt Water Product (p. 285).
Table 15.3: Properties of the Salt Water Product
Property

Value

Molar mass

18.600 kg kmol^-1

Density

1031 kg m^-3

Specific heat capacity

4190 J kg^-1 K^-1

Dynamic Viscosity

0.001 kg m^-1 s^-1

Thermal Conductivity

0.6 W m^-1 K^-1

The heat of reaction is 460 kJ per kg of dilute acid solution.

The flow is assumed to be fully turbulent and turbulence is assumed to have a significant effect on the
reaction rate.
After running the simulation, you will plot the distribution of pH in the tube, and determine the extent
to which the pH is neutralized at the outlet. You will also plot mass fraction distributions of acid, alkali
and product.
In order to reduce memory requirements and solution time, only a 30 slice of the geometry will be
modeled, and symmetry boundary conditions will be applied to represent the remaining geometry.
The reaction between acid and alkali is represented as a single-step irreversible liquid-phase reaction:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

285

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Reagent (dilute sulfuric acid) is injected through a ring of holes near the start of the tube. As it flows
along the tube it reacts with Reagent (dilute sodium hydroxide), which is injected through a further
two rings of holes downstream. The product, , remains in solution.
You will create a variable-composition mixture that contains water, the reactants, and the product. To
model the reaction, you will use CEL expressions to govern the mass sources for the acid, alkali and
product components. You will also use CEL expressions to govern the thermal energy source. Providing
mass and energy sources over a volume requires a subdomain. Because the reaction may occur anywhere
in the domain, you will create a subdomain that occupies the entire flow domain.

Note
You can also model this type of reaction using a reacting mixture as your fluid. For details,
see Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor (p. 413).
To model the pH, you will create an algebraic Additional Variable that is governed by a CEL expression
for pH. The Additional Variable will be available in the solution results for analysis during postprocessing.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

15.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
ReactorExpressions.ccl
ReactorMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

15.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run Reactor.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.
286

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 311).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type Reactor.

6.

Click Save.

15.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

ReactorMesh.gtm

Click Open.

15.4.2. Creating a Multicomponent Fluid

In addition to providing template fluids, CFX allows you to create custom fluids for use in all your CFX
models. A custom fluid may be defined as a pure substance, but may also be defined as a mixture,
consisting of a number of transported fluid components. This type of fluid model is useful for applications
involving mixtures, reactions, and combustion.
In order to define custom fluids, CFX-Pre provides the Material details view. This tool allows you to
define your own fluids as pure substances, fixed composition mixtures or variable composition mixtures
using a range of template property sets defined for common materials.
The mixing tube application requires a fluid made up from four separate materials (or components).
The components are the reactants and products of a simple chemical reaction together with a neutral
carrier liquid. You are first going to define the materials that take part in the reaction (acid, alkali and
product) as pure substances. The neutral carrier liquid is water, and is already defined. Finally, you will
create a variable composition mixture consisting of these four materials. This is the fluid that you will
use in your simulation. A variable composition mixture (as opposed to a fixed composition mixture) is
required because the proportion of each component will change throughout the simulation due to the
reaction.

15.4.2.1. Acid Properties

The properties of the dilute sulfuric acid solution were stated in the problem description.
1.

Create a new material named acid.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

287

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Option

Pure
Substance

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic State

Material
Properties

> Thermodynamic State

Liquid

Option

General
Material

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Option

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Molar Mass

19.517 [kg
kmol^-1]

[a]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Density

1078 [kg
m^-3]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Option

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Specific Heat Capacity

4190 [J kg^-1
K^-1]

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Option

Value

Transport Properties

288

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Dynamic Viscosity

> Dynamic Viscosity

0.001 [kg
m^-1 s^-1]

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
> Option

Value

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
> Thermal Conductivity

0.6 [W m^-1
K^-1]

a. The Molar Masses for the three materials do not affect the solution except
through the post-processed variables Molar Concentration and Molar Fraction.

3.

Click OK.

15.4.2.2. Alkali Properties

The properties of the dilute sodium hydroxide solution were stated in the problem description.
1.

Create a new material named alkali.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Option

Pure
Substance

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic State

Material
Properties

> Thermodynamic State

Liquid

Option

General
Material

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Option

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

289

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> Molar Mass

18.292 [kg
kmol^-1]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Density

1029 [kg
m^-3]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Option

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Specific Heat Capacity

4190 [J kg^-1
K^-1]

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Option

Value

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Dynamic Viscosity

0.001 [kg
m^-1 s^-1]

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
> Option

Value

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
> Thermal Conductivity

290

0.6 [W m^-1
K^-1]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.

Click OK.

15.4.2.3. Reaction Product Properties

The properties of the salt water product were stated in the problem description.
1.

Create a new material named product.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Option

Pure
Substance

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic State

Material
Properties

> Thermodynamic State

Liquid

Option

General
Material

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Option

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Molar Mass

18.600 [kg
kmol^-1]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Density

1031 [kg
m^-3]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Option

Value

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Specific Heat Capacity

4190 [J kg^-1
K^-1]

Transport Properties
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

291

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> Dynamic Viscosity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Option

Value

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Dynamic Viscosity

0.001 [kg
m^-1 s^-1]

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
> Option

Value

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
> Thermal Conductivity

3.

0.6 [W m^-1
K^-1]

Click OK.

15.4.2.4. Fluid Properties

Define a variable composition mixture by combining water with the three materials you have defined:
acid, alkali, product.
1.

Create a new material named mixture.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Option

Variable Composition
Mixture

Material Group

User, Water Data

Materials List

Water, acid, alkali,

product

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic State
> Thermodynamic State

292

Liquid

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.

Click OK.

15.4.3. Creating an Additional Variable to Model pH

You are going to use an Additional Variable to model the distribution of pH in the mixing tube. You
can create Additional Variables and use them in selected fluids in your domain.
1.

Create a new Additional Variable named MixturePH.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Variable Type

Specific

Units

[]

Tensor Type

Scalar

Click OK.

This Additional Variable is now available for use when you create or modify a domain. You will set
other properties of the Additional Variable, including how it is calculated, when you apply it to the
domain later in this tutorial.

15.4.4. Formulating the Reaction and pH as Expressions

This section includes:
Stoichiometric Ratio (p. 293)
Reaction Source Terms (p. 295)
Calculating pH (p. 297)
Loading the Expressions to Model the Reaction and pH (p. 298)
The first section shows a derivation for the mass-based stoichiometric ratio of alkali solution to acid
solution. This ratio is used for calculating various quantities throughout this tutorial.
The second subsection (Reaction Source Terms (p. 295)) shows you how reactions and reaction kinetics
can be formulated using the Eddy Break Up (EBU) model.
The third subsection (Calculating pH (p. 297)), shows you how pH is calculated.
In the fourth subsection (Loading the Expressions to Model the Reaction and pH (p. 298)) you will use
a provided file to load CEL expressions for the reaction source terms and the pH.

15.4.4.1. Stoichiometric Ratio

The mass-based stoichiometric ratio of alkali solution to acid solution is a quantity that is used in several
calculations in this tutorial. It represents the mass ratio of alkali solution to acid solution which leads
to complete reaction with no excess alkali or acid (that is, neutral pH). This section of the tutorial shows
you how to calculate the stoichiometric ratio, and introduces other quantities that are used in this tutorial.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

293

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

The alkali solution contains water and sodium hydroxide. In the alkali solution, it is assumed that the
sodium hydroxide molecules completely dissociate into ions according to the following reaction:

The acid solution contains water and sulfuric acid. In the acid solution, it is assumed that the sulfuric
acid molecules completely dissociate into ions according to the following reaction:

The
ions and
reaction:

ions react to form sodium sulfate (a type of salt) and water according to the

Note that this reaction requires the ions from two molecules of sodium hydroxide and the ions from
one molecule of sulfuric acid. The stoichiometric ratio for the dry alkali and acid molecules is 2-to-1.
Instead of modeling dry molecules of alkali and acid, this tutorial models solutions that contain these
molecules (in dissociated form) plus water. The calculations used to model the alkali-acid reactions, and
to measure the pH, require a mass-based stoichiometric ratio, , that expresses the mass ratio between
the alkali solution and the acid solution required for complete reaction of all of the (dissociated) alkali
and acid molecules within them.
Using
to denote
two masses:

and

to denote

, the ratio can be computed as the ratio of the following

The mass of alkali solution required to contain 2 kmol of

The mass of acid solution required to contain 1 kmol of
A formula for calculating is:
(15.1)

where:

is the concentration of

is the concentration of

in kmol/kg solution (equal to the concentration of

in kmol/kg solution (equal to the concentration of

in kmol/kg solution).
in kmol/kg solution).

The molar mass of the alkali solution (given as 18.292 kg/kmol solution) is a weighted average of the
molar masses of water (18.015 kg/kmol) and dry sodium hydroxide (39.9971 kg/kmol), with the
weighting in proportion to the number of each type of molecule in the solution. You can compute the
fraction of the molecules in the solution that are sodium hydroxide as:

294

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

can then be calculated as follows:

The molar mass of the acid solution (given as 19.517 kg/kmol solution) is a weighted average of the
molar masses of water (18.015 kg/kmol) and dry sulfuric acid (98.07848 kg/kmol), with the weighting
in proportion to the number of each type of molecule in the solution. You can compute the fraction of
the molecules in the solution that are sulfuric acid as:

can then be calculated as follows:

Substituting the values for and

of alkali solution to acid solution:

into Equation 15.1 (p. 294) yields the mass-based stoichiometric ratio
.

15.4.4.2. Reaction Source Terms

The reaction and reaction rate are modeled using a basic Eddy Break Up formulation for the component
and energy sources. For example, the transport equation for the mass fraction of acid solution is:
(15.2)

where

is time,

is velocity,

is the local density of the variable composition mixture,

is the

mass fraction of the acid solution in the mixture,

is the kinematic diffusivity of the acid solution
through the mixture, and is the stoichiometric ratio of alkali solution to acid solution based on mass
fraction. The right-hand side represents the mass source term that is applied to the transport equation
for the acid solution. The left-hand side consists of the transient, advection and diffusion terms.
In addition to specifying the sources for the acid solution and alkali solution, source coefficients will
also be used in order to enhance solution convergence. For details, see the technical note at the end
of this section.
The reaction rate is computed as:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

295

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

where is the turbulence kinetic energy, and is the turbulence eddy dissipation. Note that the reaction
rate appears on the right-hand side of Equation 15.2 (p. 295). The reaction rate is also used to govern
the rate of thermal energy production according to the relation:

From the problem description, the heat of reaction is 460 kJ per kg of acid solution.

Note
This is a technical note, for reference only.
A source is fully specified by an expression for its value .
A source coefficient is optional, but can be specified to provide convergence enhancement
or stability for strongly-varying sources. The value of may affect the rate of convergence
but should not affect the converged results.
If no suitable value is available for , the solution time scale or time step can still be reduced
to help improve convergence of difficult source terms.

Important
must never be positive.
An optimal value for when solving an individual equation for a positive variable
source whose strength decreases with increasing is

with a

Where this derivative cannot be computed easily,

may be sufficient to ensure convergence. (This is the form used for the acid solution and alkali
solution mass source coefficients in this tutorial.)
Another useful formula for

is

where is a local estimate for the source time scale. Provided that the source time scale is
not excessively short compared to flow or mixing time scales, this may be a useful approach
for controlling sources with positive feedback (
) or sources that do not depend
directly on the solved variable .

296

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

15.4.4.3. Calculating pH
The pH (or acidity) of the mixture is a function of the volume-based concentration of
ions. The latter
can be computed using the following two equations, which are based on charge conservation and
equilibrium conditions, respectively:

(where

is the constant for the self-ionization of water (1.0E-14 kmol2 m-6)).

You can substitute one equation into the other to obtain the following quadratic equation:

which can be rearranged into standard quadratic form as:

The quadratic equation can be solved for

and

using the equation

where

The volume-based concentrations of

and
are required to calculate , and can be calculated from
the mass fractions of the components using the following expressions:

where:

is the concentration of
is the concentration of

in kmol/m^3.
in kmol/m^3.

is the concentration of

in kmol/kg solution (equal to the concentration of

is the concentration of

is the local density of the variable composition mixture.

is the mass-based stoichiometric ratio of alkali solution to acid solution.

in kmol/kg solution (equal to the concentration of

Note that the second expression above can be re-written by substituting for
The result is:

in kmol/kg solution).
in kmol/kg solution).

using Equation 15.1 (p. 294).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

297

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

After solving for the concentration of

ions, the pH can be computed as:

In order to set a limit on pH for calculation purposes, the following relation will be used in this tutorial:

15.4.4.4. Loading the Expressions to Model the Reaction and pH

Load the expressions required to model the reaction sources and pH:
1.

Select File > Import > CCL.

2.

Ensure that Import Method is set to Append.

3.

Select ReactorExpressions.ccl, which should be in your working directory.

4.

Click Open.

Observe the expressions listed in the tree view of CFX-Pre. Some expressions are used to support other
expressions. The main expressions are:
Expression
Name

Description

Supporting
Expressions

pH

The pH of the mixture.

Hions, a, b, c, Yions,
Xions, alpha, i

HeatSource

The thermal energy released

from the reaction.

HeatReaction, Rate

AcidSource

The rate of production of

acid due to the reaction
(always negative or zero).

Rate

AcidSourceCoeff

The source coefficient for

AcidSource (to enhance
convergence).

AcidSource

AlkaliSource

The rate of production of

alkali due to the reaction
(always negative or zero).

Rate

AlkaliSourceCoeff

The source coefficient for

AlkaliSource (to enhance
convergence).

AlkaliSource

ProductSource

The rate of production of salt

water product (always
positive or zero).

Rate

298

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Note that the expressions do not refer to a particular fluid since there is only a single fluid (which
happens to be a multicomponent fluid). In a multiphase simulation you must prefix variables with a
fluid name, for example Mixture.acid.mf instead of acid.mf.

15.4.5. Creating the Domain

In this section, you will create a fluid domain that contains the variable composition mixture and the
Additional Variable that you created earlier. The Additional Variable will be set up as an algebraic
equation with values calculated from the CEL expression for pH.
1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on.
A domain named Default Domain should now appear under the Simulation branch.

2.

Edit Default Domain.

3.

Under the Fluid and Particle Definitions setting, delete Fluid 1 and create a new fluid definition
called Mixture.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

B1.P3

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Fluid Domain

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Mixture

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Mixture
> Material

mixture

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid
Models

1 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Thermal Energy

Component Models
> Component

acid

Component Models
> Component
> acid

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

299

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Transport
Equation

Component Models
> Component
> acid
> Kinematic Diffusivity

(Selected)

Component Models
> Component
> acid
> Kinematic Diffusivity
> Kinematic Diffusivity

0.001 [m^2
s^-1]

5.

Use the same Option and Kinematic Diffusivity settings for alkali and product as you have just set
for acid.

6.

For Water, set Option to Constraint as follows:

Tab

Setting

Fluid
Models

Component Models

Value

> Component

Water

Component Models
> Component
> Water
> Option

Constraint

One component must always use Constraint. This is the component used to balance the mass
fraction equation; the sum of the mass fractions of all components of a fluid must equal unity.
7.

Configure the following setting(s) to apply the Additional Variable that you created earlier:
Tab

Setting

Fluid
Models

Additional Variable Models

Value

> Additional Variable

> MixturePH

(Selected)

Additional Variable Models

300

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Additional Variable

> MixturePH
> Option

Algebraic Equation

[a]

Additional Variable Models

> Additional Variable
> MixturePH
> Add. Var. Value

pH

a. The other possible options either involve a transport equation to transport the
Additional Variable in the flow field, or a Vector Algebraic Equation, which is for
vector quantities. The Algebraic Equation is suitable because it allows the
calculation of pH as a function of existing variables and expressions.

8.

Click OK.

15.4.6. Creating a Subdomain to Model the Chemical Reactions

To provide the correct modeling for the chemical reaction you need to define mass fraction sources for
the fluid components acid, alkali, and product. To do this, you need to create a subdomain where
the relevant sources can be specified. In this case, sources need to be provided within the entire domain
of the mixing tube since the reaction occurs throughout the domain.
1.

Ensure that you have loaded the CEL expressions from the provided file.
The expressions should be listed in the tree view.

2.

Create a new subdomain named sources.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Location

B1.P3

Sources

Sources

(Selected)

[a]

Sources
> Equation Sources

acid.mf

Sources
> Equation Sources
> acid.mf

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

301

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> acid.mf
> Option

Source

Sources
> Equation Sources
> acid.mf
> Source

AcidSource

Sources
> Equation Sources
> acid.mf
> Source Coefficient

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
> acid.mf
> Source Coefficient
> Source Coefficient

AcidSourceCoeff

Sources
> Equation Sources

alkali.mf

Sources
> Equation Sources
> alkali.mf

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
> alkali.mf
> Option

Source

Sources
> Equation Sources
> alkali.mf
> Source

AlkaliSource

Sources
> Equation Sources

302

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> alkali.mf
> Source Coefficient

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
> alkali.mf
> Source Coefficient
> Source Coefficient

AlkaliSourceCoeff

Sources
> Equation Sources

Energy

Sources
> Equation Sources
> Energy

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
> Energy
> Option

Source

Sources
> Equation Sources
> Energy
> Source

HeatSource

Sources
> Equation Sources

product.mf

Sources
> Equation Sources
> product.mf

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
> product.mf
> Option

Source

Sources

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

303

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> Equation Sources

> product.mf
> Source

ProductSource

Sources
> Equation Sources
> product.mf
> Source Coefficient

(Selected)

Sources
> Equation Sources
> product.mf
> Source Coefficient
> Source Coefficient

0 [kg m^-3
s^-1]

a. This is the 3D region that fills the domain.

4.

Click OK.

15.4.7. Creating the Boundary Conditions

Add boundary conditions for all boundaries except the mixing tube wall; the latter will receive the default
wall condition. Many of the required settings were given in the problem description. Since the fluid in
the domain is a multicomponent fluid, you can control which component enters at each inlet by setting
mass fractions appropriately. Note that water is the constraint material; its mass fraction is computed
as unity minus the sum of the mass fractions of the other components.

15.4.7.1. Water Inlet Boundary

Create a boundary for the water inlet using the given information:
1.

Create a new boundary named InWater.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

InWater

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

304

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Normal Speed

2 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

300 [K]

3.

Leave mass fractions for all components set to zero. Since Water is the constraint fluid, it will be automatically given a mass fraction of 1 on this inlet.

4.

Click OK.

15.4.7.2. Acid Inlet Boundary

Create a boundary for the acid solution inlet hole using the given information:
1.

Create a new boundary named InAcid.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

InAcid

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

2 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static
Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

300 [K]

Component Details

acid

Component Details
> acid
> Mass Fraction

1.0

Component Details

alkali

Component Details
> alkali

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

305

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> Mass Fraction

Component Details

product

Component Details
> product
> Mass Fraction

3.

Click OK.

15.4.7.3. Alkali Inlet Boundary

Create a boundary for the alkali solution inlet holes using the given information:
1.

Create a new boundary named InAlkali.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

InAlkali

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

2.923 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static
Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

300 [K]

Component Details
> acid

(Selected)

Component Details
> acid
> Mass Fraction

Component Details
> alkali

(Selected)

Component Details

306

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> alkali
> Mass Fraction

Component Details
> product

(Selected)

Component Details
> product
> Mass Fraction

3.

Click OK.

15.4.7.4. Outlet Boundary

Create a subsonic outlet at 1 atm (which is the reference pressure that was set in the domain definition):
1.

Create a new boundary named out.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

out

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

3.

0 [Pa]

Click OK.

15.4.7.5. Symmetry Boundary

The geometry models a 30 slice of the full geometry. Create two symmetry boundaries, one for each
side of the geometry, so that the simulation models the entire geometry.
1.

Create a new boundary named sym1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

sym1

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

307

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named sym2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

6.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

sym2

Click OK.

Note that, in this case, a periodic interface can be used as an alternative to the symmetry boundary
conditions.

15.4.7.6. Default Wall Boundary

The default adiabatic wall boundary applies automatically to the remaining unspecified boundary, which
is the mixer wall. The default boundary is a smooth, no-slip, adiabatic wall.

15.4.8. Setting Initial Values

The values for acid, alkali, and product will be initialized to 0. Since Water is the constrained
component, it will make up the remaining mass fraction which, in this case, is 1.
Since the inlet velocity is 2 m/s, a reasonable guess for the initial velocity is 2 m/s.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Global Initial Conditions

Settings
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

2 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components

308

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

>W

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Component Details

acid

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> acid
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> acid
> Mass Fraction

Initial Conditions
> Component Details

alkali

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> alkali
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> alkali
> Mass Fraction

Initial Conditions
> Component Details

product

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> product
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

309

Reacting Flow in a Mixing Tube

Tab

Setting

Value

> product
> Mass Fraction

3.

Click OK.

15.4.9. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

High Resolution

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

50

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

0.01 [s]

[a]

a. The length of mixing tube is 0.06 m and inlet velocity is 2 m/s. An estimate of
the dynamic timescale is 0.03 s. An appropriate time step would be between 1/4
and 1/2 of this estimate.

3.

Click OK.

15.4.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

310

Setting

Value

File name

Reactor.def

Click Save.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.
4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

15.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD problem as follows:
1.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

2.

Select Double Precision.

This provides the precision required to evaluate the expression for pH.

3.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

4.

Select Post-Process Results.

5.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

6.

Click OK.

15.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

To see the nature and extent of the reaction process, examine the pH, the mass fractions, and turbulence
quantities on a plane as follows:
1.

Create an XY slice plane through Z = 0.

2.

Turn off the visibility of the plane you just created.

3.

Create contour plots of the following variables on that plane:

MixturePH
acid.Mass Fraction
alkali.Mass Fraction
product.Mass Fraction
Turbulence Kinetic Energy
Turbulence Eddy Dissipation

4.

Create an expression for Turbulence Eddy Dissipation/Turbulence Kinetic Energy,

then create a variable using the expression (only variables can be plotted) and create a contour plot using
that variable. This quantity is an indicator of the reaction rate it represents 1 / mixing timescale.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

311

312

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 16: Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

This tutorial includes:
16.1.Tutorial Features
16.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
16.3. Preparing the Working Directory
16.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
16.5. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager
16.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post
16.7. Exporting the Results to ANSYS

16.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Creating and using a solid domain as a heating coil in CFX-Pre.
Creating a domain interface.
Modeling conjugate heat transfer in CFX-Pre.
Using electricity to power a heat source.
Plotting temperature on a cylindrical locator in CFD-Post.
Lighting in CFD-Post.
Exporting thermal and mechanical data to be used with ANSYS Multi-field solver.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Multiple Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon
Shear Stress Transport

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Heat Transfer Modeling

Conjugate Heat
Transfer (via Electrical
Resistance Heating)

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Opening
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

313

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

Component

Feature

Details

CEL (CFX Expression

Language)
CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Contour
Cylindrical Locator
Isosurface
Temperature Profile
Chart

Other

Changing the Color

Range
Expression Details View
Lighting Adjustment
Variable Details View
Exporting Results to
ANSYS

16.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial demonstrates the capability of ANSYS CFX to model conjugate heat transfer. In this tutorial,
a heat exchanger is used to model the transfer of thermal energy from an electrically-heated solid
copper coil to the water flowing around it.
There is a fluid domain for the water and a solid domain for the coil. The fluid domain is an annular
region that envelops the coil, and has water at an initial temperature of 300 K flowing through it at 0.4
m/s. The copper coil has a 4.4 V difference in electric potential from one end to the other end and is
given an initial temperature of 550 K. Assume that the copper has a uniform electrical conductivity of
59.6E+06 S/m and that there is a 1 mm thick calcium carbonate deposit on the heating coil.
The material parameters for the calcium carbonate deposit are:
Molar Mass = 100.087[kg kmol^-1]
Density = 2.71[g cm^-3]
Specific Heat Capacity = 0.9[J g^-1 K^-1]
Thermal Conductivity = 3.85[W m^-1 K^-1]

314

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

This tutorial also includes an optional step that demonstrates the use of the CFX to ANSYS Data Transfer
tool to export thermal and mechanical stress data for use with ANSYS Multi-field solver. A results file is
provided in case you want to skip the model creation and solution steps within ANSYS CFX.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

16.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

HeatingCoilMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

16.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

In this tutorial, you will create a solid copper coil with a 1 mm thick calcium carbonate deposit.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run HeatingCoil.pre.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

315

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).
b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 324).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type HeatingCoil.

6.

If you are notified the file already exists, click Overwrite.

7.

Click Save.

16.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

HeatingCoilMesh.gtm

3.

Click Open.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

16.4.2. Editing the Material Properties

1.

Expand Materials in the tree view, right-click Copper and select Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Copper:

Tab

Setting

Value

Material
Properties

Electromagnetic Properties

Expand the Electromagnetic

Properties frame
[a]

Electromagnetic Properties
> Electrical Conductivity

(Selected)

Electromagnetic Properties
> Electrical Conductivity
> Electrical Conductivity

316

59.6E+06 [S m^-1]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

a. Expand a section by clicking Roll Down

3.

Value
.

Click OK to apply these settings to Copper.

16.4.3. Defining the Calcium Carbonate Deposit Material

Create a new material definition that will be used to model the calcium carbonate deposit on the
heating coil:
1.

Click Material

and name the new material Calcium Carbonate.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Material Group

User

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

[a]

Thermodynamic State
> Thermodynamic State
Material
Properties

Solid

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Molar Mass

100.087 [kg
kmol^-1]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Equation of State
> Density

2.71 [g cm^-3]
[b]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Specific Heat Capacity
> Specific Heat Capacity

0.9 [J g^-1
K^-1]

[b]

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity

(Selected)

[c]

Transport Properties
> Thermal Conductivity
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

317

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

Tab

Setting

Value

> Thermal Conductivity

3.85 [W m^-1
K^-1]

a. The material properties for Calcium Carbonate defined in this table came
directly from the Overview of the Problem to Solve (p. 314) section at the
beginning of this tutorial.
b. Make sure that you change the units to those indicated.
c. You may need to first expand the Transport Properties frame by clicking
Roll Down

3.

Click OK to apply these settings.

16.4.4. Creating the Domains

This simulation requires both a fluid domain and a solid domain. First, you will create a fluid domain
for the annular region of the heat exchanger.

16.4.4.1. Creating a Fluid Domain

The fluid domain will include the region of fluid flow but exclude the solid copper heating coil.
1.

Click Domain

and set the name to WaterZone.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of WaterZone:

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

Annulus
[a]

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Water

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid Models

Initialization

318

1 [atm]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Thermal
Energy

Domain Initialization

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

a. This region name may be different depending on how the mesh was created.
You should pick the region that forms the exterior surface of the volume
surrounding the coil.

3.

Click OK to apply these settings to WaterZone.

16.4.4.2. Creating a Solid Domain

Since you know that the copper heating element will be much hotter than the fluid, you can initialize
the temperature to a reasonable value. The initialization option that is set when creating a domain applies
only to that domain.
Create the solid domain as follows:
1.

Create a new domain named SolidZone.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

Coil

[a]

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Solid Domain

Solid Definitions

Solid 1

Solid Definitions
> Solid 1
> Solid 1
> Material
Solid
Models

Copper

Heat Transfer
> Option

Thermal
Energy

Electromagnetic Model

(Selected)

Electromagnetic Model
> Electric Field Model
> Option

Electric
Potential

Initialization Domain Initialization

> Initial Conditions

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

319

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

Tab

Setting

Value

> Temperature
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Domain Initialization
> Initial Conditions
> Temperature
> Temperature

550 [K]

a. This region name may be different depending on how the mesh was created.
You should pick the region that forms the coil.

3.

Click OK to apply these settings.

16.4.5. Creating the Boundaries

You will now set the boundary conditions using the values given in the problem description.

16.4.5.1. Heating Coil Boundaries

In order to pass electricity through the heating coil, you are going to specify a voltage of 0 [V] at one
end of the coil and 4.4 [V] at the other end:
1.

Click Boundary

and select in SolidZone from the drop-down menu that appears.

2.

Name this new boundary Ground and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Coil End 1[a]

Boundary
Details

Electric Field
> Option

Voltage

Electric Field
> Voltage
a. You will need to click Multi-select from extended list

0 [V]
to see a list of all regions.

4.

Click OK to apply these settings.

5.

Create a similar boundary named Hot at the other end of the coil, Coil End 2, and apply a voltage of 4.4[V].

320

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

16.4.5.2. Inlet Boundary

You will now create an inlet boundary for the cooling fluid (Water).
1.

Create a new boundary in the WaterZone domain named inflow.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

inflow

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

0.4 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static
Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

3.

300 [K]

Click OK to apply these settings.

16.4.5.3. Opening Boundary

An opening boundary is appropriate for the exit in this case because, at some stage during the solution,
the coiled heating element will cause some recirculation at the exit. At an opening boundary you need
to set the temperature of fluid that enters through the boundary. In this case it is useful to base this
temperature on the fluid temperature at the outlet, since you expect the fluid to be flowing mostly out
through this opening.
1.

Insert a new expression by clicking Expression

2.

Name this new expression OutletTemperature and press the Enter key to continue.

3.

In the Definition entry box, type the formula areaAve(T)@outflow

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Close the Expressions view by clicking Close

6.

Create a new boundary in the WaterZone domain named outflow.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

at the top of the tree view.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

321

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Opening

Location

outflow

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Opening Pres. and

Dirn

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

OutletTemperature
[a]

a. In order to enter an expression, you need to click Enter Expression

8.

Click OK to apply these settings.

A default no slip, adiabatic wall boundary named WaterZone Default will be applied automatically
to the remaining unspecified external boundaries of the WaterZone domain.
Two more boundary conditions are generated automatically when a domain interface is created to
connect the fluid and solid domains. The domain interface is discussed in the next section.

16.4.6. Creating the Domain Interface

1.

Click Domain Interface

from the row of icons located along the top of the screen.

2.

Accept the default name Domain Interface 1 by clicking OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s) of Domain Interface 1:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Solid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

WaterZone

Interface Side 1
> Region List

coil surface

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

322

SolidZone

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Interface Side 2

Additional
Interface
Models

> Region List

F22.33, F30.33, F31.33,

F32.33, F34.33, F35.33

Heat Transfer

(Selected)

Heat Transfer
> Interface Model
> Option

Thin Material

Heat Transfer
> Interface Model
> Material

Calcium Carbonate

Heat Transfer
> Interface Model
> Thickness

1 [mm]

[a]

a. Make sure that you change the units to those indicated.

4.

Click OK to apply these settings.

16.4.7. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control

Value

> Fluid Timescale Control

> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

2 [s]

For the Convergence Criteria, an RMS value of at least 1e-05 is usually required for adequate
convergence, but the default value is sufficient for demonstration purposes.
3.

Click OK to apply these settings.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

323

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

16.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

HeatingCoil.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

16.5. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager

1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.
While the calculations proceed, you can see residual output for various equations in both the text
area and the plot area. Use the tabs to switch between different plots (for example, Heat Transfer,
Turbulence (KE), and so on) in the plot area. You can view residual plots for the fluid and solid
domains separately by editing the workspace properties (under Workspace > Workspace Properties).

3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

16.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The following topics will be discussed:
16.6.1. Heating Coil Temperature Range
16.6.2. Creating a Cylindrical Locator
16.6.3. Specular Lighting
16.6.4. Moving the Light Source

16.6.1. Heating Coil Temperature Range

To grasp the effect of the calcium carbonate deposit, it is beneficial to compare the temperature range
on either side of the deposit.
1.

324

When CFD-Post opens, if you see the Domain Selector dialog box, ensure that both domains are selected,
then click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Create a new contour named Contour 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Location

Domain Interface 1
Side 1

[a]

Variable

Temperature

Range

Local

Boundary Data
> Hybrid

(Selected)

a. This is the deposit side that is in contact with the water.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Take note of the temperature range displayed below the Range drop-down box. The temperature on the
outer surface of the deposit should range from around 380 [K] to 740 [K].

6.

Change the contour location to Domain Interface 1 Side 2 (the deposit side that is in contact
with the coil) and click Apply.
Notice how the temperature ranges from around 420 [K] to 815 [K] on the inner surface of the
deposit.

16.6.2. Creating a Cylindrical Locator

Next, you will create a cylindrical locator close to the outside wall of the annular domain. This can be
done by using an expression to specify radius and locating a particular radius with an isosurface.

16.6.2.1. Expression
1.

Create a new expression by clicking Expression

2.

Set the name of this new expression to expradius and press the Enter key to continue.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Setting

Value

Definition

(x^2 + y^2)^0.5

Click Apply.

16.6.2.2. Variable
1.

Create a new variable by clicking Variable

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

325

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

2.

Set the name of this new variable to radius and press the Enter key to continue.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Setting

Value

Expression

expradius

Click Apply.

16.6.2.3. Isosurface of the variable

1.

Insert a new isosurface by clicking Location

2.

Accept the default name Isosurface 1 by clicking OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Variable

>Isosurface.

Value

radius

Definition

Color

Render

> Value

0.8 [m]

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Range

User Specified

Min

299 [K]

Max

309 [K]

Show Faces

(Selected)

[a]

[b]

a. The maximum radius is 1 m, so a cylinder locator at a radius of 0.8 m is suitable.

b. The full temperature range is much larger due to temperature extremes on a
small fraction of the isosurface. By neglecting those extreme temperatures, more
colors are used over the range of interest.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Turn off the visibility of Contour 1 so that you have an unobstructed view of Isosurface 1.

Note
The default range legend now displayed is that of the isosurface and not the contour.
The default legend is set according to what is being edited in the details view.

326

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

16.6.2.4. Creating a Temperature Profile Chart

For a quantitative analysis of the temperature variation through the water and heating coil, it is beneficial
to create a temperature profile chart.
First, you will create a line that passes through two turns of the heating coil. You can then graphically
analyze the temperature variance along that line by creating a temperature chart.
1.

Insert a line by clicking Location

2.

Accept the default name Line 1 by clicking OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s) of Line 1

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

> Line.

Value

> Point 1

-0.75, 0, 0

Definition
> Point 2

-0.75, 0, 2.25

Line Type
> Sample

(Selected)

Line Type
> Samples

200

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Create a new chart by clicking Chart

6.

Name this chart Temperature Profile and press the Enter key to continue.

7.

Click the Data Series tab.

8.

Set Data Source > Location to Line 1.

9.

Click the Y Axis tab.

10. Set Data Selection > Variable to Temperature.

11. Click Apply.
You can see from the chart that the temperature spikes upward when entering the deposit region and
is at its maximum at the center of the coil turns.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

327

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

16.6.3. Specular Lighting

Specular lighting is on by default. Specular lighting allows glaring bright spots on the surface of an
object, depending on the orientation of the surface and the position of the light. You can disable
specular lighting as follows:
1.

Click the 3D Viewer tab at the bottom of the viewing pane.

2.

Edit Isosurface 1 in the Outline tree view.

Tab

Setting

Render

Show Faces
> Specular

3.

Value

(Cleared)

Click Apply.

16.6.4. Moving the Light Source

To move the light source, click within the 3D Viewer, then press and hold Shift while pressing the arrow
keys left, right, up or down.

Tip
If using the stand-alone version, you can move the light source by positioning the mouse
pointer in the viewer, holding down the Ctrl key, and dragging using the right mouse button.

16.7. Exporting the Results to ANSYS

This optional step involves generating an ANSYS .cdb data file from the results generated in CFXSolver. The .cdb file could then be used with the ANSYS Multi-field solver to measure the combined
effects of thermal and mechanical stresses on the solid heating coil.
There are two possible ways to export data to ANSYS:
Use CFX-Solver Manager to export data.
Use CFD-Post to export data. This involves:
1.

Importing a surface mesh from ANSYS into CFD-Post, and associating the surface with the corresponding
2D region in the CFX-Solver results file.

2.

Exporting the data to a file containing SFE commands that represent surface element thermal or
mechanical stress values.

3.

Loading the commands created in the previous step into ANSYS and visualizing the loads.

In this case, you will be using CFX-Solver Manager to export data. Since the heat transfer in the solid
domain was calculated in ANSYS CFX, the 3D thermal data will be exported using element type 3D
Thermal (70). The mechanical stresses are calculated on the liquid side of the liquid-solid interface.
These values will be exported using element type 2D Stress (154).

328

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Exporting the Results to ANSYS

16.7.1. Thermal Data

1.

Start CFX-Solver Manager.

2.

Select Tools > Export to ANSYS MultiField.

The Export to ANSYS MultiField Solver dialog box appears.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Results File

HeatingCoil_001.res

Export File

HeatingCoil_001_ansysfsi_70.cdb

Domain Name
> Domain

SolidZone

Domain Name
> Boundary

(Empty) [a]

Export Options
> ANSYS Element Type

3D Thermal (70)

a. Leave Boundary empty since the entire volume is exported for 3D data.

4.

Click Export.
When the export is complete, click OK to acknowledge the message and continue with the next
steps to export data for Mechanical Stresses (p. 329).

16.7.2. Mechanical Stresses

1.

Configure the following setting(s) in the Export to ANSYS MultiField Solver dialog box:
Setting

Value

Results File

HeatingCoil_001.res

Export File

HeatingCoil_001_ansysfsi_154.cdb

Domain Name
> Domain

WaterZone

Domain Name
> Boundary

WaterZone Default

Export Options
> ANSYS Element Type

2.

2D Stress (154)

Click Export.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

329

Heat Transfer from a Heating Coil

When the export is complete, click OK to acknowledge the message and continue.
3.

Click Close.

4.

Close CFX-Solver Manager.

You now have two exported files that can be used with ANSYS Multi-field solver. When you are finished,
close CFX-Solver Manager and CFD-Post.

330

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 17: Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

This tutorial includes:
17.1.Tutorial Features
17.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
17.3. Preparing the Working Directory
17.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
17.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
17.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

17.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Setting up a multiphase flow simulation involving air and water.
Importing meshes that have CFX-4 and CFX Mesh file formats.
Setting up a simulation using multiple frames of reference.
Using a fluid dependent turbulence model to set different turbulence options for each fluid.
Specifying buoyant flow.
Specifying a degassing outlet boundary to enable air, but not water, to escape from the boundary.
Connecting two domains (one for a tank and one for an impeller inside the tank) via Frozen Rotor interfaces.
Modeling rotational periodicity using periodic boundary conditions.
Using periodic GGI interfaces where the mesh does not match exactly.
Using thin surfaces for blade and baffle surfaces.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Multiple Domain
Rotating Frame of
Reference

Turbulence Model

Dispersed Phase Zero

Equation
Fluid-Dependent
k-Epsilon

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

331

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Component

Feature

Details

Heat Transfer

None

Buoyant Flow
Multiphase
Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Degassing)
Wall: Thin Surface
Wall: (Slip Depends on
Volume Fraction)

Domain Interfaces

Frozen Rotor
Periodic
Thin Surface Partners

Output Control
CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Default Locators
Slice Plane

Other

Quantitative Calculation

17.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This example simulates the mixing of water and air in a mixing vessel. The geometry consists of a mixing
tank vessel, an air injection pipe, four baffles, a rotating impeller, and a shaft that runs vertically through
the vessel. The impeller rotates at 84 rpm about the X axis (in the counterclockwise direction, when
viewed from above). Air is injected into the vessel through an inlet pipe located below the impeller at
a speed of 5 m/s. The inlet pipe diameter is 2.48 cm. Assume that both the water and air remain at a
constant temperature of 25C and that the air is incompressible, with a density equal to that at 25C
and 1 atmosphere. Also assume that the air bubbles are 3 mm in diameter.
Examine the steady-state distribution of air in the tank. Also calculate the torque and power required
to turn the impeller at 84 rpm.

332

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Preparing the Working Directory

Figure 17.1: Cut-away Diagram of the Mixer

The figure above shows the full geometry with part of the tank walls and one baffle cut away. The
symmetry of the vessel allows a 1/4 section of the full geometry to be modeled.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

17.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
MixerImpellerMesh.gtm
MixerTank.geo
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

333

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.
3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

17.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run MultiphaseMixer.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 357).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type MultiphaseMixer.

6.

Click Save.

17.4.1. Importing the Meshes

In this tutorial, two mesh files are provided: one for the mixer tank excluding the impeller, and one for
the impeller. These meshes fit together to occupy the entire tank. The region occupied by the impeller
mesh is indicated in Figure 17.2: Impeller Mesh Region (p. 334).
Figure 17.2: Impeller Mesh Region

334

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Next, you will import the mesh for the mixer tank, followed by the mesh for the impeller. The impeller
mesh, as provided, is not located in the correct spatial position relative to the tank mesh. After importing
the impeller mesh, you will move it to the correct position.

Note
This simulation involves the use of two domains: a stationary fluid domain on the main 3D
region of the tank mesh and a rotating fluid domain on the main 3D region of the impeller
mesh. It is not necessary to use separate meshes in this type of simulation, as long as there
are 3D regions available for locating these two domains.

17.4.1.1. Importing the Mixer Tank Mesh

The mixer tank mesh is provided as a CFX-4 mesh file (*.geo). Import it as follows:
1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > Other.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

CFX-4 (*geo)

File name

MixerTank.geo

Options
> Mesh Units

Advanced Options
> CFX-4 Options
> Create 3D Regions on
> Fluid Regions (USER3D, POROUS)

(Cleared)

[a]

a. In this case, the mesh file contains USER3D regions that you do not need.

3.

Click Open.

17.4.1.2. Importing the Impeller Mesh

The impeller mesh is provided as a CFX Mesh file (*.gtm). Import it as follows:
1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

335

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Setting

Value

File name

MixerImpellerMesh.gtm

3.

Click Open.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (X up) to view
the mesh assemblies.

17.4.1.3. Relocating the Impeller Mesh

In the next step you will move the impeller mesh to its correct position.
1.

Right-click MixerImpellerMesh.gtm and select Transform Mesh.

The Mesh Transformation Editor dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transformation

Translation

Method

Deltas

Dx, Dy, Dz

0.275, 0, 0

Click Apply then Close.

17.4.1.4. Viewing the Mesh at the Tank Periodic Boundary

1.

In the Outline workspace, expand the tree to show MixerTank.geo > Principal 3D Regions >
Primitive 3D > Principal 2D Regions.

2.

Click the primitive region BLKBDY_TANK_PER2.

You can now see the mesh on one of the periodic regions of the tank. To reduce the solution time for
this tutorial, the mesh used is very coarse. This is not a suitable mesh to obtain accurate results, but it
is sufficient for demonstration purposes.

Note
If you do not see the surface mesh, highlighting may be turned off. If highlighting is disabled,
toggle Highlighting
. The default highlight type will show the surface mesh for any selected
regions. If you see a different highlighting type, you can alter it by selecting Edit > Options
and browsing to CFX-Pre > Graphics Style.

17.4.2. Creating the Domains

The mixer requires two domains: a rotating impeller domain and a stationary tank domain. Both domains
contain water as a continuous phase and air as a dispersed phase. The domains will model turbulence,
buoyancy, and forces between the fluids.

336

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

17.4.2.1. Rotating Domain for the Impeller

As stated in the problem description, the impeller rotates at 84 rpm.
1.

Click Domain

and set the name to impeller.

2.

Under the Fluid and Particle Definitions setting, delete Fluid 1.

3.

Click Add new item

and name it Air

4.

Click Add new item

and name it Water

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

Main

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Air

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Air
> Material

Air at 25 C

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Air
> Morphology
> Option

Dispersed
Fluid

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Air
> Morphology
> Mean Diameter

3 [mm]

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Water

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Water
> Material

Water

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

337

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Tab

Setting

Value

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Option

Buoyant

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity X Dirn.

-9.81 [m
s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Y Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Z Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Buoy. Ref. Density

997 [kg
m^-3]

[a]

Domain Models
> Domain Motion > Option

Rotating

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Angular Velocity

84 [rev min
^-1]

[b]

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis
Fluid
Models

Global X

Multiphase
> Homogeneous Model

(Cleared)

[c]

Multiphase
> Free Surface Model > Option

None

Heat Transfer

338

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Homogeneous Model

(Cleared)

Heat Transfer
> Option

Isothermal

Heat Transfer
> Fluid Temperature

25 [C]

Turbulence
> Homogeneous Model

(Cleared)

Turbulence

Fluid
Pair
Models

> Option

Fluid
Dependent

Fluid Pair

Air | Water

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Surface Tension Coefficient

(Selected)

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Surface Tension Coefficient
> Surf. Tension Coeff.

0.073 [N
m^-1]

[d]

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer
> Drag Force
> Option

Grace

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer
> Drag Force
> Volume Fraction Correction Exponent

(Selected)

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

339

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Tab

Setting

Value

> Momentum Transfer

> Drag Force
> Volume Fraction Correction Exponent
> Value

[e]

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer
> Non-drag forces
> Turbulent Dispersion Force
> Option

Favre
Averaged
Drag Force

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer
> Non-drag forces
> Turbulent Dispersion Force
> Dispersion Coeff.

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Turbulence Transfer
> Option

Sato
Enhanced
Eddy
Viscosity

[f]

a. This buoyancy reference density value should always be used for dilute dispersed
multiphasic flow.
b. Ensure that you are using the correct unit.
c. Disabling the homogeneous model allows you to specify a unique velocity field
for each fluid.
d. This enables the Grace drag model.
e. A positive value is appropriate for large bubbles.

340

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab
f.

6.

Setting

Value

This models particle-induced turbulence.

Click OK.

17.4.2.2. Stationary Domain for the Main Tank

Next, you will create a stationary domain for the main tank by copying the properties of the existing
impeller domain.
1.

Right-click impeller and select Duplicate from the shortcut menu.

2.

Rename the duplicated domain to tank and then open it for editing.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

Primitive 3D

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Option

4.

Stationary

Click OK.

17.4.3. Creating the Boundaries

The following boundary conditions will be set:
An inlet through which air enters the mixer.
A degassing outlet, so that only the gas phase can leave the domain.
Thin surfaces for the baffle.
A wall for the hub and the portion of the shaft that is in the rotating domain. This wall will be rotating, and
therefore stationary relative to the rotating domain.
A wall for the portion of the shaft in the stationary domain. This wall will be rotating relative to the stationary
domain.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

341

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

When the default wall boundary is generated, the internal 2D regions of an imported mesh are ignored,
while the regions that form domain boundaries are included.

Note
The blade surfaces of the impeller will be modeled using domain interfaces later in the tutorial.

17.4.3.1. Air Inlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary in the domain tank named Airin.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

INLET_DIPTUBE

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

Fluid
Values

> Option

Fluid Dependent

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Velocity
> Option

Normal Speed

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Velocity
> Normal Speed

5 [m s^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
342

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Water
> Velocity
> Option

Normal Speed

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Velocity
> Normal Speed

5 [m s^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

3.

Click OK.

17.4.3.2. Degassing Outlet Boundary

Create a degassing outlet to represent the free surface where air bubbles escape. The continuous phase
(water) sees this boundary as a free-slip wall and does not leave the domain. The dispersed phase (air)
sees this boundary as an outlet.
1.

Create a new boundary in the domain tank named LiquidSurface.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

WALL_LIQUID_SURFACE

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

3.

Degassing
Condition

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

343

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Note that no pressure is specified for this boundary. The solver will compute a pressure distribution on
this fixed-position boundary to represent the surface height variations that would occur in the real flow.

17.4.3.3. Thin Surface for the Baffle

In CFX-Pre, thin surfaces can be created by specifying wall boundary conditions on both sides of internal
2D regions. Both sides of the baffle regions will be specified as walls in this case.
1.

Create a new boundary in the domain tank named Baffle.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

WALL_BAFFLES

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

[a]

Fluid Dependent

Wall Contact Model

Fluid
Values

> Option

Use Volume
Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

Free Slip Wall

Boundary Conditions

Water

[b]

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

No Slip Wall

a. The WALL_BAFFLES region includes the surfaces on both sides of the baffle.
You can confirm this by examining WALL_BAFFLES in the region selector.
b. The Free Slip Wall condition can be used for the gas phase since the
contact area with the walls is near zero for low gas phase volume fractions.

3.

344

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

17.4.3.4. Wall Boundary for the Shaft

You will now set up a boundary for the portions of the shaft that are in the tank domain. Since the tank
domain is not rotating, you need to specify a moving wall on the shaft to account for the shaft's rotation.
Part of the shaft is located directly above the air inlet, so the volume fraction of air in this location will
be high and the assumption of zero contact area for the gas phase is not physically correct. In this case,
a no slip boundary is more appropriate than a free slip condition for the air phase. When the volume
fraction of air in contact with a wall is low, a free slip condition is more appropriate for the air phase.
In cases where it is important to correctly model the dispersed phase slip properties at walls for all
volume fractions, you can declare both fluids as no slip, but set up an expression for the dispersed
phase wall area fraction. The expression should result in an area fraction of zero for dispersed phase
volume fractions from 0 to 0.3, for example, and then linearly increase to an area fraction of 1 as the
volume fraction increases to 1.
1.

Create a new boundary in the domain tank named TankShaft.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

WALL_SHAFT,
WALL_SHAFT_CENTER

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Fluid Dependent

Wall Contact Model

Fluid
Values

> Option

Use Volume
Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

No Slip Wall

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Wall Velocity

(Selected)

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

345

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Tab

Setting

Value

> Wall Velocity > Option

Rotating Wall

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Wall Velocity
> Angular Velocity

84 [rev min ^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Wall Velocity
> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Wall Velocity
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis

3.

Select Water and set the same values as for Air.

4.

Click OK.

Global X

17.4.3.5. Required Boundary in the Impeller Domain

1.

Create a new boundary in the domain impeller named HubShaft.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Hub,Shaft

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Fluid Dependent

Wall Contact Model

346

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Fluid
Values

Setting

Value

> Option

Use Volume
Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

Free Slip Wall

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

3.

No Slip Wall

Click OK.

17.4.3.6. Modifying the Default Wall Boundary

As mentioned previously, when the volume fraction of air in contact with a wall is low, a free slip condition is more appropriate for the air phase.
1.

In the tree view, open tank Default for editing.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Value

Fluid Dependent

Wall Contact Model

Fluid
Values

> Option

Use Volume
Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

Free Slip Wall

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

347

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Tab

Setting

Value

> Water
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

3.

No Slip Wall

Click OK.
It is not necessary to set the default boundary in the impeller domain since the remaining surfaces
will be assigned interface conditions in the next section.

17.4.4. Creating the Domain Interfaces

The following interfaces will be set:
Blade thin surface interface.
Rotational periodic domain interfaces for the periodic faces of the tank and impeller.
Frozen Rotor interfaces between the impeller and tank domains.

17.4.4.1. Modeling the Blade Using a Domain Interface

You can model thin surfaces using either wall boundaries or domain interfaces. There are some differences
between domain interfaces and ordinary wall boundaries; for example, CFX-Pre automatically detects
the matching domain boundary regions when setting up a domain interface.
Previously, the thin surface representation of the tank baffle was modeled using boundary conditions.
For demonstrational purposes, you will use a domain interface to model the thin surface representation
of the impeller blade (even though using wall boundary conditions would also work).
1.

Create a new domain interface named Blade Thin Surface.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (filter)

impeller

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Blade

Interface Side 2
> Domain (filter)

impeller

Interface Side 2
> Region List

348

Solid 3.3 2, Solid

3.6 2

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Additional
Interface
Models

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Value

Side Dependent

[a]

a. This option allows you to set a fluid dependent treatment on each side of the
interface.

3.

Click OK.
Two boundaries named Blade Thin Surface Side 1 and Blade Thin Surface Side
2 are created automatically.

4.

In the tree view, open Blade Thin Surface Side 1 for editing.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Value

Fluid Dependent

Wall Contact Model

Fluid
Values

> Option

Use Volume
Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

Free Slip Wall

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

No Slip Wall

6.

Click OK.

7.

In the tree view, open Blade Thin Surface Side 2 for editing.

8.

Apply the same settings as for Blade Thin Surface Side 1.

9.

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

349

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

17.4.4.2. Rotational Periodic Interfaces

Periodic domain interfaces can either be one-to-one or GGI interfaces. One-to-one transformations occur
for topologically similar meshes whose nodes match within a given tolerance. One-to-one periodic interfaces are more accurate and reduce CPU and memory requirements. Here, you will choose the
Automatic mesh connection method, to let ANSYS CFX choose between one-to-one and GGI.
1.

Create a new domain interface named ImpellerPeriodic.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

impeller

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Periodic1

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

impeller

Interface Side 2
> Region List

Periodic2

Interface Models
> Option

Rotational
Periodicity

Interface Models
> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Interface Models
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis
Mesh
Connection

Global X

Mesh Connection Method

> Mesh Connection
> Option

3.

Click OK.

1.

Create a new domain interface named TankPeriodic.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

350

Automatic

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

tank

Interface Side 1
> Region List

BLKBDY_TANK_PER1

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

tank

Interface Side 2
> Region List

BLKBDY_TANK_PER2

Interface Models
> Option

Rotational
Periodicity

Interface Models
> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Interface Models
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis
Mesh
Connection

Global X

Mesh Connection Method

> Mesh Connection
> Option

3.

Automatic

Click OK.

17.4.4.3. Frozen Rotor Interfaces

You will now create three Frozen Rotor interfaces for the regions connecting the two domains. In this
case three separate interfaces are created. You should not try to create a single domain interface for
multiple surfaces that lie in different planes.
1.

Create a new domain interface named Top.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

351

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Tab

Setting

Value

> Domain (Filter)

impeller

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Top

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

tank

Interface Side 2
> Region List

BLKBDY_TANK_TOP

Interface Models
> Option

General Connection

Interface Models
> Frame Change/Mixing Model
> Option

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new domain interface named Bottom.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Frozen Rotor

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

impeller

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Bottom

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

tank

Interface Side 2
> Region List

BLKBDY_TANK_BOT

Interface Models
> Option

General Connection

Interface Models
> Frame Change/Mixing Model
> Option

352

Frozen Rotor

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

6.

Click OK.

7.

Create a new domain interface named Outer.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

impeller

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Outer

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

tank

Interface Side 2
> Region List

BLKBDY_TANK_OUTER

Interface Models
> Option

General Connection

Interface Models
> Frame Change/Mixing Model
> Option

9.

Frozen Rotor

Click OK.

17.4.5. Setting Initial Values

You will set the initial volume fraction of air to 0, and enable the initial volume fraction of water to be
computed automatically. Since the volume fractions must sum to unity, the initial volume fraction of
water will be 1.
It is important to understand how the velocity is initialized in this tutorial. Here, both fluids use Auto
matic for the Cartesian Velocity Components option. When the Automatic option is used, the
initial velocity field will be based on the velocity values set at inlets, openings, and outlets. In this tutorial, the only boundary that has a set velocity value is the inlet, which specifies a velocity of 5 [m s^1] for both phases. Without setting the Velocity Scale parameter, the resulting initial guess would be
a uniform velocity of 5 [m s^-1] in the X direction throughout the domains for both phases. This is
clearly not suitable since the water phase is enclosed by the tank. When the boundary velocity conditions
are not representative of the expected domain velocities, the Velocity Scale parameter should be used
to set a representative domain velocity. In this case the velocity scale for water is set to zero, causing
the initial velocity for the water to be zero. The velocity scale is not set for air, resulting in an initial
velocity of 5 [m s^-1] in the X direction for the air. This should not be a problem since the initial volume
fraction of the air is zero everywhere.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

353

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Fluid
Settings

Fluid Specific Initialization

Air

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Air
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Air
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

Fluid Specific Initialization

Water

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option

Automatic

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Velocity Scale

(Selected)

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Velocity Scale

354

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

3.

Setting

Value

> Value

0 [m s^-1]

Click OK.

17.4.6. Setting Solver Control

Generally, two different time scales exist for multiphase mixers. The first is a small time scale based on
the rotational speed of the impeller, typically taken as 1 / , resulting in a time scale of 0.11 s for this
case. The second time scale is usually larger and based on the recirculation time of the continuous
phase in the mixer.
Using a time step based on the rotational speed of the impeller will be more robust, but convergence
will be slow since it takes time for the flow field in the mixer to develop. Using a larger time step reduces
the number of iterations required for the mixer flow field to develop, but reduces robustness. You will
need to experiment to find an optimum time step.
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

Value

High Resolution

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

100

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control

Advanced
Options

> Physical Timescale

1 [s]

Convergence Criteria

(Default)

Global Dynamic Model Control

(Selected)

Multiphase Control

(Selected)

[a]
[b]

Multiphase Control
> Volume Fraction Coupling

(Selected)

Multiphase Control
> Volume Fraction Coupling
> Option

Coupled

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

355

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Tab

Setting

Value

a. This is an aggressive time step for this case.

b. The default is an RMS value of 1.0E-04. If you are using a maximum edge length
of 0.005 m or less to produce a finer mesh, use a target residual of 1.0E-05 to
obtain a more accurate solution.

3.

Click OK.

17.4.7. Adding Monitor Points

You can monitor the value of an expression during the solver run so that you can view the volume
fraction of air in the tank (the gas hold up). The gas hold up is often used to judge convergence in
these types of simulations by converging until a steady-state value is achieved.
1.

Create the following expressions:

TankAirHoldUp = volumeAve(Air.vf)@tank
ImpellerAirHoldUp = volumeAve(Air.vf)@impeller
TotalAirHoldUp = (volume()@tank * TankAirHoldUp +
volume()@impeller * ImpellerAirHoldUp) /
(volume()@tank + volume()@impeller)

2.

Click Output Control

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Monitor

Monitor Objects

(Selected)

4.

Create a new Monitor Points and Expressions item named Total Air Holdup.

5.

Configure the following setting(s) of Total Air Holdup:

6.

Setting

Value

Option

Expression

Expression Value

TotalAirHoldUp

Click OK.

17.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

356

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

3.

Setting

Value

File name

MultiphaseMixer.def

Click Save.
If you are notified the file already exists, click Overwrite.

4.

Click OK.

5.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

17.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Start the simulation from CFX-Solver Manager:
1.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. This can take a long time depending on your
system.

3.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

17.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

When CFD-Post starts, the Domain Selector dialog box might appear. If it does, ensure that both the
impeller and tank domains are selected, then click OK to load the results from these domains. When
the mixer geometry appears in the viewer, orient the view so that the X axis points up as follows:
Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (X up).
You will create some plots showing the distributions of velocity and other variables. You will also calculate
the torque and power required to turn the impeller at 84 rpm.

17.6.1. Creating a Plane Locator

Create a vertical plane that extends from the shaft to the tank wall at a location far from the baffle. This
plane will be used as a locator for various plots, such as velocity vector plots and plots showing the
distribution of air.
1.

Create a new plane named Plane 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

357

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

Tab

Setting

Value

> Method

Three Points

Definition
> Point 1

1, 0, 0

Definition
> Point 2

0, 1, -0.9

Definition
> Point 3

3.

0, 0, 0

Click Apply.

17.6.2. Plotting Velocity

Recall that the homogeneous multiphase option was not used when specifying the domain settings
(see the setting for Fluid Models > Multiphase Options > Homogeneous Model in Rotating Domain
for the Impeller (p. 337)). As a consequence, the air and water velocity fields may differ from each other.
Plot the velocity of water, then air on Plane 1:
1.

Create a new vector plot named Vector 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Value

> Locations

Plane 1

Variable

Water.Velocity in
Stn Frame

Symbol

Symbol Size

0.2

Normalize Symbols

(Selected)

[a]

a. Using this variable, instead of Water.Velocity, results in the velocity vectors

appearing to be continuous at the interface between the rotating and stationary
domains. Velocity variables that do not include a frame specification always use
the local reference frame.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Turn off the visibility of Plane 1 to better see the vector plot.

5.

Observe the vector plot (in particular, near the top of the tank). Note that the water is not flowing out of
the domain.

6.

Change the variable to Air.Velocity in Stn Frame and click Apply.

358

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Observe this vector plot, noting how the air moves upward all the way to the water surface, where
it escapes.
7.

Turn off the visibility of Vector 1 in preparation for the next plots.

17.6.3. Plotting Pressure Distribution

Color Plane 1 to see the pressure distribution:
1.

Turn on the visibility of Plane 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Plane 1:

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Pressure

Range

Local

Click Apply.
Note that the pressure field computed by the solver excludes the hydrostatic pressure corresponding
to the specified buoyancy reference density. The pressure field including this hydrostatic component
(as well as the reference pressure) can by visualized by plotting Absolute Pressure.

17.6.4. Plotting Volume Fractions

To see the distribution of air, color Plane 1 by the volume fraction of air:
1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Plane 1:

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Air.Volume Fraction

Range

User Specified

Min

Max

0.04

Click Apply.

The user-specified range was made much narrower than the Global and Local ranges in order to better
show the variation.

17.6.5. Plotting Shear Strain Rate and Shear Stress

Areas of high shear strain rate or shear stress are typically also areas where the highest mixing occurs.
To see where the most of the mixing occurs, color Plane 1 by shear strain rate.
1.

Configure the following setting(s) of Plane 1:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

359

Multiphase Flow in a Mixing Vessel

2.

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Variable

Air.Shear Strain
Rate

Range

User Specified

Min

0 [s^-1]

Max

15 [s^-1]

Click Apply.
The user-specified range was made much narrower than the Global and Local ranges in order to
better show the variation.

3.

4.

Modify the coloring of the MultiphaseMixer_001 > tank > tank Default object by applying the
following settings:
Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Water.Wall Shear

Range

Local

Click Apply.

The legend for this plot shows the range of wall shear values.
The global maximum wall shear stress is much higher than the maximum value on the default walls.
The global maximum values occur on the TankShaft boundary directly above the inlet. Although
these values are very high, the shear force exerted on this boundary is small since the contact area
fraction of water is very small there.

17.6.6. Calculating Torque and Power Requirements

Calculate the torque and power required to spin the impeller at 84 rpm:
1.

Select Tools > Function Calculator from the main menu or click Function Calculator

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

360

Tab

Setting

Value

Function
Calculator

Function

torque

Location

Blade Thin Surface

Side 1

Axis

Global X

Fluid

All Fluids

Click Calculate to find the torque about the X axis imparted by both fluids on location Blade Thin
Surface Side 1.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.

Repeat the calculation, setting Location to Blade Thin Surface Side 2.

The sum of these two torques is approximately -72 [N m] about the X axis. Multiplying by -4 to find the
torque required by all of the impeller blades gives a required torque of approximately 288 [N m] about
the X axis. You could also include the contributions from the locations HubShaft and TankShaft;
however in this case their contributions are negligible.
The power requirement is simply the required torque multiplied by the rotational speed (84 rpm =
8.8 rad/s): Power = 288 N m * 8.8 rad/s = 2534.4 W.
Remember that this value is the power requirement for the work done on the fluids; it does not account
for any mechanical losses, motor efficiencies and so on. Also note that the accuracy of these results is
significantly affected by the coarseness of the mesh. You should not use a mesh of this length scale to
obtain accurate quantitative results.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

361

362

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 18: Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor

This tutorial includes:
18.1.Tutorial Features
18.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
18.3. Preparing the Working Directory
18.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
18.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
18.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post
18.7. Further Discussion

18.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Setting up a multiphase flow simulation involving air and water.
Using a fluid dependent turbulence model to set different turbulence options for each fluid.
Specifying buoyant flow.
Specifying a degassing outlet boundary to enable air, but not water, to escape from the boundary.
Using face culling in CFD-Post to turn off the visibility of one side of a surface.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

Dispersed Phase Zero

Equation
Fluid-Dependent
Turbulence Model
k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

None

Buoyant Flow
Multiphase
Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Degassing)
Symmetry Plane
Wall: (Slip Depends on
Volume Fraction)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

363

Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor

Component
CFD-Post

Feature

Details

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Default Locators
Vector

Other

Changing the Color

Range
Symmetry

18.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial demonstrates the Eulerian-Eulerian multiphase model in CFX by simulating an airlift reactor.
Airlift reactors are tall gas-liquid contacting vessels and are often used in processes where gas absorption
is important (for example, bioreactors to dissolve oxygen in broths) and to limit the exposure of microorganisms to excessive shear imparted by mechanically driven mixers.
Figure 18.1: Cut-away Diagram of the Airlift Reactor

This tutorial models the dispersion of air bubbles in water. Air is supplied through a sparger at the
bottom of the vessel and the rising action of the bubbles provides gentle agitation of the water. An
internal tube (draft tube) directs recirculation of the flow. The airlift reactor is shown in a cut-away
diagram in Figure 18.1: Cut-away Diagram of the Airlift Reactor (p. 364).
Simple airlift reactors that are without a draft tube tend to develop irregular flow patterns and poor
overall mixing. The draft tube in the airlift reactor helps to establish a regular flow pattern in the column
and to achieve better uniformity in temperature, concentration, and pH in the liquid phase, but sometimes
at the expense of decreased mass transfer from gas to liquid.
This tutorial also demonstrates the use of pairs of internal wall boundaries to model thin 3D features.
In this case, a pair of wall boundaries is used to model the draft tube. Other applications include baffles
and guide vanes. In the postprocessing section of this tutorial, you will learn how to use face culling

364

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

to hide one side of a boundary. This technique enables you to independently color each boundary of
a pair of back-to-back boundaries (located at the same position in 3D space, but with opposite orientation).
The airlift reactor that is modeled here is very similar to the laboratory bench scale prototype used by
Garca-Calvo and Letn.
A formal analysis of this simulation involving a finer mesh is available at the end of this tutorial. For
details, see Further Discussion (p. 382).
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

18.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

BubbleColumnMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

18.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run BubbleColumn.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 379)

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type BubbleColumn.

6.

Click Save.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

365

Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor

18.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

BubbleColumnMesh.gtm

Click Open.

18.4.2. Creating the Domain

1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on. A domain named Default Domain should now appear under the Simulation branch.

2.

Double-click Default Domain.

3.

In the Basic Settings tab, under Fluid and Particle Definitions, delete Fluid 1 and create a new fluid
definition called Air.

4.

Use the

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

button to create a new fluid named Water.

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

B1.P3,
B2.P3

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Air

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Air
> Material

Air at 25 C

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Air
> Morphology
> Option

Dispersed
Fluid

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Air
> Morphology

366

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Mean Diameter

6 [mm]

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Water

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Water
> Material

Water

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Option

Buoyant

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity X Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Y Dirn.

-9.81 [m
s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Z Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Buoy. Ref. Density

997 [kg
m^-3]

Fluid
Models

[a]

Multiphase
> Homogeneous Model

(Cleared)

[b]

Multiphase
> Free Surface Model > Option

None

Heat Transfer
> Homogeneous Model

(Cleared)

Heat Transfer
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

367

Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Isothermal

Heat Transfer
> Fluid Temperature

25 [C]

Turbulence
> Homogeneous Model

(Cleared)

Turbulence
> Option

Fluid
Dependent
[c]

Fluid
Pair
Models

Fluid Pair

Air | Water

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Surface Tension Coefficient

(Selected)

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Surface Tension Coefficient
> Surf. Tension Coeff.

0.072 [N
m^-1]

[d]

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer
> Drag Force
> Option

Grace

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer
> Drag Force
> Volume Fraction Correction Exponent

(Selected)

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer

368

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Drag Force

> Volume Fraction Correction Exponent
> Value

[e]

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer
> Non-drag forces
> Turbulent Dispersion Force
> Option

Favre
Averaged
Drag Force

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Momentum Transfer
> Non-drag forces
> Turbulent Dispersion Force
> Dispersion Coeff.

1.0

Fluid Pair
> Air | Water
> Turbulence Transfer
> Option

Sato
Enhanced
Eddy
Viscosity

[f]

a. This buoyancy reference density value should always be used for dilute dispersed
multiphasic flow.
b. Disabling the homogeneous model allows you to specify a unique velocity field
for each fluid.
c. The fluid-specific turbulence settings are defined in the Fluid Specific Models
tab. They are set to default values.
d. This enables the Grace drag model.
e. A positive value is appropriate for large bubbles.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

369

Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor

Tab
f.

6.

Setting

Value

This models particle-induced turbulence.

Click OK.

18.4.3. Creating the Boundary Conditions

For this simulation of the airlift reactor, the required boundary conditions are:
An inlet for air on the sparger.
A degassing outlet for air at the liquid surface.
A pair of wall boundaries for the draft tube.
An exterior wall for the outer wall, base and sparger tube.
Symmetry planes.

18.4.3.1. Inlet Boundary

At the sparger, create an inlet boundary that injects air at 0.3 m/s with a volume fraction of 0.25:
1.

Create a new boundary named Sparger.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

Sparger

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

Fluid
Values

> Option

Fluid Dependent

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Velocity
> Option

Normal Speed

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Velocity
> Normal Speed

0.3 [m s^-1]

Boundary Conditions

370

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Air
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

0.25

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Velocity
> Option

Normal Speed

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Velocity
> Normal Speed

0 [m s^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

3.

0.75

Click OK.

18.4.3.2. Outlet Boundary

Create a degassing outlet boundary at the top of the reactor:
1.

Create a new boundary named Top.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

371

Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

Top

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

3.

Degassing
Condition

Click OK.

18.4.3.3. Draft Tube Boundaries

The draft tube is an infinitely thin surface that requires a wall boundary on both sides; if only one side
has a boundary then CFX-Solver will fail.
The Free Slip condition can be used for the gas phase since the contact area with the walls is near
zero for low gas phase volume fractions.
The required boundary settings are the same for both sides of the draft tube. From the point of view
of solving the simulation, you could therefore define a single boundary and choose both sides of the
tube as the location. However, the postprocessing section of this tutorial requires the use of separate
boundaries in order to illustrate the use of face culling (a visualization technique), so you will create
two wall boundaries instead.
Start by creating a wall boundary for the outer side of the draft tube:
1.

Create a new boundary named DraftTube Downcomer Side.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

DraftTube

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Fluid Dependent

Wall Roughness
> Option

Smooth Wall

Wall Contact Model

Fluid
Values

> Option

Use Volume
Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum

372

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Free Slip Wall

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

3.

No Slip Wall

Click OK.

Now create a boundary named DraftTube Riser Side using the same settings, but located on
F10.B1.P3 (the riser side of the draft tube).

18.4.3.4. Symmetry Plane Boundary

To simulate the full geometry, create symmetry plane boundary conditions on the Symmetry1 and
Symmetry2 locators:
1.

Create a new boundary named SymP1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

Symmetry1

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named SymP2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

6.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

Symmetry2

Click OK.

18.4.3.5. Modifying the Default Boundary

The remaining external regions are assigned to the default wall boundary. As for the draft tube
boundary, set the air phase to use the free slip wall condition:
1.

Edit Default Domain Default.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

373

Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

Fluid
Values

Value

> Option

Fluid Dependent

Boundary Conditions

Air

Boundary Conditions
> Air
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

Free Slip Wall

Boundary Conditions

Water

Boundary Conditions
> Water
> Mass And Momentum
> Option

3.

No Slip Wall

Click OK.

The boundary specifications are now complete.

18.4.4. Setting Initial Values

It often helps to set an initial velocity for a dispersed phase that is different to that of the continuous
phase. This results in a nonzero drag between the phases that can help stability at the start of a simulation.
For some airlift reactor problems, improved convergence can be obtained by using CEL (CFX Expression
Language) to specify a nonzero volume fraction for air in the riser portion and a value of zero in the
downcomer portion. This should be done if two solutions are possible (for example, if the flow could
go up the downcomer and down the riser).
Set the initial values:
1.

Click Global Initialization

Since a single pressure field exists for a multiphase calculation, do not set pressure values on a
per-fluid basis.
2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Fluid
Settings

Fluid Specific Initialization

Air

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Air

374

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Initial Conditions

> Cartesian Velocity Components
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Air
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Air
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0.3 [m s^-1]

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Air
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W

0 [m s^-1]

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Air
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Automatic

Fluid Specific Initialization

Water

[a]

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

375

Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Automatic with
Value

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W

0 [m s^-1]

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

[b]

a. Since no water enters or leaves the domain, a stationary initial guess is

recommended.

376

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

b. The volume fractions must sum to unity over all fluids. Since a value has been
set for water, the volume fraction of air will be calculated as the remaining
difference, in this case, 0.

3.

Click OK.

18.4.5. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

Value

High Resolution

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

200

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

1 [s]

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Type

MAX

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

1.0E-05

[a]

Convergence Criteria
> Conservation Target

(Selected)

Convergence Criteria
> Conservation Target
> Value
Advanced
Options

0.01

Global Dynamic Model Control

> Multiphase Control

(Selected)

Global Dynamic Model Control

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

377

Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor

Tab

Setting

Value

> Multiphase Control

> Volume Fraction Coupling

(Selected)

Global Dynamic Model Control

> Multiphase Control
> Volume Fraction Coupling
> Option

Coupled

[b]

a. If you are using a maximum edge length of 0.005 m or less to produce a finer
mesh, a target residual of 1.0E-05 helps obtain a more accurate solution.
b. Volume Fraction Coupling is recommended when changes in volume fraction
have a large effect on momentum transport. This is the case in this tutorial,
because it employs a model for the turbulent dispersion in which the force is
proportional to the volume fraction gradient. Other cases where Volume Fraction
Coupling is recommended include those in which solid pressure forces are used
and those in which gravitational forces are significant (for example, free surface
flows).

3.

Click OK.

18.4.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

BubbleColumn.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

378

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

18.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Start the simulation from CFX-Solver Manager:

Note
If you are using a fine mesh for a formal quantitative analysis of the flow in the reactor, the
solution time will be significantly longer than for the coarse mesh. You can run the simulation
in parallel to reduce the solution time. For details, see Obtaining a Solution in Parallel (p. 136).
1.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. This can take a long time depending on your
system.

3.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

18.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

You will first create plots of velocity and volume fraction. You will then display the entire geometry.
Because the simulation in this tutorial is conducted on a coarse grid, the results are only suitable for a
qualitative demonstration of the multiphase capability of ANSYS CFX.
The following topics will be discussed:
18.6.1. Creating Water Velocity Vector Plots
18.6.2. Creating Volume Fraction Plots
18.6.3. Displaying the Entire Airlift Reactor Geometry

18.6.1. Creating Water Velocity Vector Plots

1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z.

2.

Create a new vector plot named Vector 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

Value

SymP1

Definition

Color

> Variable

Water.Velocity

Range

User Specified

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

379

Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor

Tab

Symbol

Setting

Value

Min

0 [m s^-1]

Max

1 [m s^-1]

Symbol Size

0.3

4.

Click Apply.

5.

In the tree view, right-click Vector 1, select Duplicate, and click OK to accept the default name, Vector
2.

6.

Edit Vector 2.

7.

On the Geometry tab, set Definition > Variable to Air.Velocity and click Apply.

8.

Compare Vector 1 and Vector 2 by toggling the visibility of each one.

Zoom in as required.
Observe that the air flows upward, leaving the tank, at the degassing outlet.

Note that the air rises faster than the water in the riser and descends slower than the water in the
downcomer.

18.6.2. Creating Volume Fraction Plots

Plot the volume fraction of air on the symmetry plane SymP1:
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z.

2.

Turn on the visibility of SymP1.

3.

Edit SymP1.

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of SymP1:

5.

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Air.Volume Fraction

Range

User Specified

Min

Max

0.025

Click Apply.
Observe the volume fraction values throughout the domain.

6.

Turn off the visibility of SymP1.

Next, plot the volume fraction of air on each side of the draft tube:

380

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Y up).

2.

Turn on the visibility of DraftTube Downcomer Side.

3.

Modify DraftTube Downcomer Side by applying the following settings:

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Air.Volume Fraction

Range

User Specified

Min

Max

0.025

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Rotate the plot in the viewer to see both sides of DraftTube Downcomer Side.
Notice that the plot appears on both sides of the DraftTube Downcomer Side boundary.
When viewing plots on internal surfaces, you must ensure that you are viewing the correct side.
You will make use of the face culling rendering feature to turn off the visibility of the plot on the
side of the boundary for which the plot does not apply.
The DraftTube Downcomer Side boundary represents the side of the internal surface in the
downcomer (in this case, outer) region of the reactor. To confirm this, you could make a vector
plot of the variable Normal (representing the face normal vectors) on the locator DraftTube
Downcomer Side; the fluid is on the side opposite the normal vectors.
In this case, you need to turn off the front faces of the plot; The front faces are, by definition, on
the same side of the plot as the normal vectors.

6.

Modify DraftTube Downcomer Side by applying the following settings:

Tab

Setting

Render

Show Faces
> Face Culling

Value

Front Faces

7.

Click Apply.

8.

Rotate the image in the viewer to see the effect of face culling on DraftTube Downcomer Side. You
should see that the color appears on the downcomer side only.

9.

Turn on the visibility of DraftTube Riser Side.

10. Color the DraftTube Riser Side object using the same color and rendering settings as for
DraftTube Downcomer Side.
The normal vectors for DraftTube Riser Side point opposite to those of DraftTube
Downcomer Side, so the faces on DraftTube Riser Side are plotted only on the riser (in
this case, inner) side of the airlift reactor.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

381

Gas-Liquid Flow in an Airlift Reactor

Rotating the geometry will now correctly show the air volume fraction on each side of the draft tube.
Face culling was needed to prevent interference between the plots on each side of the draft tube. To
demonstrate this, try turning off face culling for DraftTube Downcomer Side and watch the effect
on the riser side. You might notice that the plot from the downcomer side interferes with, or even
completely overrides, the riser-side plot. Results may vary, which is why face culling should always be
used to prevent possible interference.

18.6.3. Displaying the Entire Airlift Reactor Geometry

Display the entire airlift reactor geometry by expanding User Locations and Plots and doubleclicking the Default Transform object:
1.

Configure the following setting(s) of Default Transform:

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Instancing Info From Domain

(Cleared)

Number of Graphical Instances

12

Apply Rotation

(Selected)

Apply Rotation
> Method

Principal Axis

Apply Rotation
> Axis

Apply Rotation
> Number of Passages

2.

12

Click Apply.

18.7. Further Discussion

A formal analysis of this airlift reactor was carried out on a finer grid (having 21000+ nodes and a
maximum edge length of 0.005 m).
The analysis showed a region of air bubble recirculation at the top of the reactor on the downcomer
side. This was confirmed by zooming in on a vector plot of Air.Velocity on SymP1 near the top
of the downcomer. A similar plot of Water.Velocity revealed no recirculation of the water.
Other results of the simulation:
Due to their large 0.006 m diameter, the air bubbles quickly attained a significant terminal slip velocity
(that is, the terminal velocity relative to water). The resulting terminal slip velocity, obtained using the Grace
drag model, is consistent with the prediction by Maneri and Mendelson and the prediction by Baker and
Chao. These correlations predict a terminal slip velocity of about 0.23 m s-1 to 0.25 m s-1 for air bubbles
of the diameter specified.
The values of gas hold-up (the average volume fraction of air in the riser), the superficial gas velocity (the
rising velocity, relative to the reactor vessel, of gas bubbles in the riser, multiplied by the gas hold-up), and
the liquid velocity in the downcomer agree with the results reported by Garca-Calvo and Letn, for gas
382

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Further Discussion
hold-up values of 0.03 or less. At higher values of gas hold-up, the multifluid model does not account for
pressure-volume work transferred from gas to liquid due to isothermal expansion of the bubbles. The simulation therefore tends to under-predict both the superficial gas velocity in the riser, and the liquid velocity
in the downcomer for gas hold-up values greater than 0.03.

Note
Multiphase results files contain the vector variable Fluid.Superficial Velocity
defined as Fluid.Volume Fraction multiplied by Fluid.Velocity. This is sometimes also referred to as the fluid volume flux. The components of this vector variable are
available as scalar variables (for example, Fluid.Superficial Velocity X).

Many reference texts on airlift reactors cite the Hughmark correlation as a standard for gas hold-up and
superficial gas velocity in airlift reactors. However, the Hughmark correlation should not be used when
liquid flow is concurrent with gas at velocities exceeding 0.1 m/s. In the airlift reactor described in this
tutorial, the liquid velocity in the riser clearly exceeds 0.2 m/s, and the Hughmark correlation is therefore
not applicable.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

383

384

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 19: Air Conditioning Simulation

This tutorial includes:
19.1.Tutorial Features
19.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
19.3. Preparing the Working Directory
19.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
19.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
19.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post
19.7. Further Discussion

Important
You must have the required Fortran compiler installed and set in your system path in order
to run this tutorial. For details on which Fortran compiler is required for your platform, see
the applicable ANSYS, Inc. installation guide. If you are not sure which Fortran compiler is
installed on your system, try running the cfx5mkext command (found in <CFXROOT>/bin)
from the command line and read the output messages.

19.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Importing CEL expressions.
@REGION CEL syntax.
Setting up a user CEL function.
Setting up a monitor point to observe the temperature at a prescribed location.
Setting up an interface with conditional connection control.
Using the Monte Carlo radiation model with a directional source of radiation.
Postprocessing a transient simulation.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Transient

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

385

Air Conditioning Simulation

Component

Feature

Details

Radiation

Monte Carlo

Buoyant Flow
Boundary Conditions

Boundary Profile
Visualization
Inlet (Profile)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic
Wall: Fixed
Temperature

Domain Interface

Conditional GGI

Output Control

Transient Results Files

Monitor Points

CFD-Post

CEL (CFX Expression

Language)

User CEL Function

Plots

Animation
Isosurface
Point
Slice Plane

Other

Text Label with Auto

Annotation
Changing the Color
Range
Legend
Time Step Selection
Transient Animation
with Movie Generation

19.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial simulates a room with a thermostat-controlled air conditioner adjacent to a closet. The
closet door is initially closed and opens during the simulation.

386

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Overview of the Problem to Solve

The thermostat switches the air conditioner on and off based on the following data:
A set point of 22C (the temperature at or above which the air conditioner turns on)
A temperature tolerance of 1C (the amount by which cooling continues below the set point before the air
conditioner turns off )
The temperature at a wall-mounted thermometer
Air flows in steadily from an inlet vent on the ceiling, and flows out through a return-air vent near the
floor. When the air conditioner is turned on, the incoming air temperature is reduced compared to the
outgoing air temperature. When the air conditioner is turned off, the incoming air temperature is set
equal to the outgoing air temperature.
Two windows enable sunlight to enter and heat the room. The walls (except for the closet door and
part of the wall surrounding the closet door) and windows are assumed to be at a constant 26 C. The
simulation is transient, and continues long enough to enable the air conditioner to cycle on and off.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

387

Air Conditioning Simulation

Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

19.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
HVAC_expressions.ccl
HVACMesh.gtm
TStat_Control.F

Note
You must have a Fortran compiler installed on your system to perform this tutorial.

The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.
3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

19.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run HVAC.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).
The session file sets up the case then attempts to compile the Fortran subroutine. If the
compilation step fails, you will still be left with a valid solver (.def) file and a valid simulation
(.cfx) file. You can complete the compilation step (on a suitable computer) by following the
instructions in Compiling the Fortran Subroutine for the Thermostat (p. 390).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 407).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type HVAC.

6.

Click Save.

388

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

19.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

HVACMesh.gtm

3.

Click Open.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

19.4.2. Importing CEL Expressions

This tutorial uses several CEL expressions to store parameters and to evaluate other quantities that are
required by the simulation. Import all of the expressions from the provided file:
1.

Select File > Import > CCL.

2.

Ensure that Import Method is set to Append.

3.

Select HVAC_expressions.ccl, which should be in your working directory.

4.

Click Open.

The table below lists the expressions, along with the definition and information for each expression:
Expression
Name

Expression Definition

Information

ACOn

Thermostat
Function(TSensor,TSet,TTol,atstep)

On/off status of the air conditioner

(determined by calling a user CEL
function with the thermometer
temperature, thermostat set point, and
temperature tolerance).

Cool
TempCalc

TVentOut - (HeatRemoved /
(MassFlow * 1.004 [kJ kg^-1 K^-1 ]))

Temperature of air at the return-air vent

(determined by a CEL function).

Flowrate

0.06 [m^3 s^-1]

Volumetric flow rate of air entering the

room.

HeatRemoved 1000 [J s^-1]

Rate of thermal energy removal when the

air conditioner is on.

MassFlow

1.185 [kg m^-3] * Flowrate

Mass flow rate of air entering the room.

TIn

ACOn*CoolTempCalc+(1-ACOn)*TVentOut Temperature of inlet vent air (a function

of the air conditioner on/off status,
return-air vent temperature, thermal
energy removal rate, and mass flow rate).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

389

Air Conditioning Simulation

Expression
Name

Expression Definition

Information

TSensor

probe(T)@Thermometer

Thermometer temperature (determined

by a CEL function that gets temperature
data from a monitor point).

TSet

22 [C]

Thermometer set point.

TTol

1 [K]

Temperature tolerance.

TVentOut

areaAve(T)@REGION:VentOut

Temperature of outlet vent air.

XCompInlet

5*(x-0.05 [m]) / 1 [m]

ZCompInlet

-1+XCompInlet

Direction vector components for guiding

the inlet vent air in a diverging manner
as it enters the room.

tStep

3 [s]

Time step size.

tTotal

225 [s]

Total time.

The CEL function that evaluates the thermometer temperature relies on a monitor point that you will
create later in this tutorial.
The CEL expression for the air conditioner on/off status requires a compiled Fortran subroutine and a
user CEL function that uses the subroutine. These are created next, starting with the compiled subroutine.

Note
The expression for the return-air vent temperature, TVentOut, makes use of @REGION CEL
syntax, which indicates the mesh region named VentOut, rather than a boundary named
VentOut.

19.4.3. Compiling the Fortran Subroutine for the Thermostat

A Fortran subroutine that simulates the thermostat is provided with the tutorial input files. Before the
subroutine can be used, it must be compiled for your platform.
You can compile the subroutine at any time before running CFX-Solver. The operation is performed at
this point in the tutorial so that you have a better understanding of the values you need to specify in
CFX-Pre when creating a User CEL Function. The cfx5mkext command is used to compile the subroutine
as described below.
1.

Ensure that file TStat_Control.F is in your working directory.

You can examine the contents of this file in any text editor to gain a better understanding of the
subroutine it contains.

2.

Select Tools > Command Editor.

3.

Type the following command in the Command Editor dialog box (make sure you do not miss the semicolon
at the end of the line):
! system ("cfx5mkext TStat_Control.F") == 0 or die "cfx5mkext failed";

This is equivalent to executing the following at a command prompt:

cfx5mkext TStat_Control.F

390

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The ! indicates that the following line is to be interpreted as power syntax and not CCL. Everything
after the ! symbol is processed as Perl commands.
system is a Perl function to run a system command.
The == 0 or die will cause an error message to be returned if, for some reason, there is an error
in processing the command.
4.

Click Process to compile the subroutine.

Note
You can use the -double option to compile the subroutine for use with double precision
CFX-Solver executables. That is:
cfx5mkext -double TStat_Control.F

A subdirectory will have been created in your working directory whose name is system dependent (for
example, on Linux it is named linux). This subdirectory contains the shared object library.

Note
If you are running problems in parallel over multiple platforms then you will need to create
these subdirectories using the cfx5mkext command for each different platform.
You can view more details about the cfx5mkext command by running:
cfx5mkext -help

You can set a Library Name and Library Path using the -name and -dest options respectively.
If these are not specified, the default Library Name is that of your Fortran file and the default Library Path
is your current working directory.

Close the Command Editor dialog box.

19.4.4. Creating a User CEL Function for the Thermostat

The expression for the air conditioner on/off status is named ACOn. This expression consists of a call
to a user CEL function, Thermostat Function, which must be created.
Before you create the user CEL function, you will first create a user routine that holds basic information
about the compiled Fortran subroutine. You will then create a user function, Thermostat Function,
so that it is associated with the user routine.
Create the user routine:
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > User Routine or click User
Routine

2.

Set the name to Thermostat Routine.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

391

Air Conditioning Simulation

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Option

User CEL Function

Calling Name

ac_on

Library Name

TStat_Control

Library Path

(Working Directory)

[a]
[b]

[c]

a. This is the name of the subroutine within the Fortran file. Always use lower case
letters for the calling name, even if the subroutine name in the Fortran file is in
upper case.
b. This is the name passed to the cfx5mkext command by the -name option. If
the -name option is not specified, a default is used. The default is the Fortran
file name without the .F extension.
c. Set this to your working directory.

4.

Click OK.

Create the user CEL function:

1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > User Function or click
User Function

2.

Set the name to Thermostat Function.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Option

User Function

User Routine Name

Thermostat Routine

Argument Units

[K], [K], [K], []

Result Units

[]

[a]

[b]

a. These are the units for the four input arguments: TSensor, TSet, TTol, and atstep.
b. The result will be a dimensionless flag with a value of 0 or 1.

4.

Click OK.

19.4.5. Setting the Analysis Type

This is a transient simulation. The total time and time step are specified by expressions that you imported
earlier. Use these expressions to set up the Analysis Type information:

392

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Right-click Analysis Type in the Outline tree view and select Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Analysis Type
> Option

Value

Transient

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Option

Total Time

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Total Time

tTotal

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Option

Timesteps

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Timesteps

tStep

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Time

3.

0 [s]

Click OK.

19.4.6. Creating the Domain

The domain that models the room air should model buoyancy, given the expected temperature differences, air speeds, and the size and geometry of the room. The domain must model radiation, since
directional radiation (representing sunlight) will be emitted from the windows.
Create the domain:
1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

393

Air Conditioning Simulation

A domain named Default Domain should appear under the Simulation branch.
2.

Edit Default Domain and configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

B54,B64

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Option

Buoyant

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity X Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Y Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Z Dirn.

-g

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Buoy. Ref. Density
Fluid Models

1.2 [kg m^-3]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Thermal Energy

Thermal Radiation
> Option

394

Monte Carlo

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Thermal Radiation
> Number of Histories

3.

100000

Click OK.

Note
When using a statistical radiation model like Monte Carlo, the results can usually be improved
(at the expense of increased computational time) by increasing the number of histories.

19.4.7. Creating the Boundaries

In this section you will define several boundaries:
An inlet vent that injects air into the room.
A return-air vent that lets air leave the room.
Fixed-temperature windows that emit directed radiation.
Fixed-temperature walls.

19.4.7.1. Inlet Boundary

Create a boundary for the inlet vent, using the previously-loaded expressions for mass flow rate, flow
direction, and temperature:
1.

Create a boundary named Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

Inlet

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Mass Flow Rate

Mass and Momentum

> Mass Flow Rate

MassFlow

Flow Direction
> Option

Cartesian
Components

Flow Direction
> X Component

XCompInlet

Flow Direction
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

395

Air Conditioning Simulation

Tab

Setting

Value

> Y Component

Flow Direction
> Z Component

ZCompInlet

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer

Plot Options

> Static Temperature

TIn

Boundary Vector

(Selected)

Boundary Vector
> Profile Vec. Comps.

3.

Cartesian
Components

Click OK.
The viewer shows the inlet velocity profile applied at the inlet, which uses the expressions
XCompInlet and ZCompInlet to specify a diverging flow pattern.

Note
Ignore the physics errors that appear. They will be fixed by setting up the rest of the
simulation. The error concerning the expression TIn is due to a reference to Thermo
meter, which does not yet exist. A monitor point named Thermometer will be created
later as part of the output control settings.

19.4.7.2. Outlet Boundary

Create a boundary for the return-air vent, specifying a relative pressure of 0 Pa:
1.

Create a boundary named VentOut.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

VentOut

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Average Static
Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

396

0 [Pa]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.

Click OK.

19.4.7.3. Window Boundary

To model sunlight entering the room, the windows are required to emit directional radiation. To approximate the effect of the outdoor air temperature, assume that the windows have a fixed temperature of
26C.
Create a boundary for the windows using a fixed temperature of 26C and apply a radiation source of
600 W m^-2 in the (1, 1, -1) direction:
1.

Create a boundary named Windows.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Window1,Window2

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer
> Option

Temperature

Heat Transfer

Sources

> Fixed Temperature

26 [C]

Boundary Source

(Selected)

Boundary Source
> Sources

(Selected)

3.

Create a new radiation source item by clicking Add new item

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of Radiation Source 1:

and accepting the default name.

Setting

Value

Option

Directional Radiation Flux

Radiation Flux

600 [W m^-2]

Direction
> Option

Cartesian Components

Direction
> X Component

Direction
> Y Component

Direction
> Z Component

-1

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

397

Air Conditioning Simulation

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Plot Options

Boundary Vector

(Selected)

Boundary Vector
> Profile Vec. Comps.

6.

Cartesian
Components in
Radiation Source 1

Click OK.
The direction of the radiation is shown in the viewer.

19.4.7.4. Default Wall Boundary

The default boundary for any undefined surface in CFX-Pre is a no-slip, smooth, adiabatic wall. For this
simulation, assume that the walls have a fixed temperature of 26C. A more detailed simulation would
model heat transfer through the walls.
For radiation purposes, assume that the default wall is a perfectly absorbing and emitting surface
(emissivity = 1).
Set up the default wall boundary:
1.

Edit the boundary named Default Domain Default.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer
> Option

Value

Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Fixed Temperature

26 [C]

Thermal Radiation
> Option

Opaque

Thermal Radiation
> Emissivity

3.

Click OK.

Because this boundary is opaque with an emissivity of 1, all of the radiation is absorbed and none of
the radiation is reflected. With no reflected radiation, the Diffuse Fraction setting has no effect. For
lower values of emissivity, some radiation is reflected, and the Diffuse Fraction setting controls the
fraction of the reflected radiation that is diffuse, with the remainder being specular (directional).

398

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

19.4.8. Closet Wall Interface

1.

Click Domain Interface

, set Name to ClosetWall, and click OK.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Value

F51.54

Interface Side 2
> Region List
Additional
Interface
Models

F51.64

Mass And Momentum

> Option

No Slip Wall

Heat Transfer

(Selected)

Heat Transfer
> Option

Conservative
Interface Flux

Heat Transfer
> Interface Model
> Option

Thin Material

Heat Transfer
> Interface Model
> Material

Building Board
Hardwood

[a]

Heat Transfer
> Interface Model
> Thickness

12 [cm]

Thermal Radiation

(Selected)

Thermal Radiation
> Option

Opaque

Thermal Radiation
> Emissivity
a. Click the Ellipsis

icon to open the Material dialog box. Click Import Library

Data
. In the Select Library Data to Import dialog box, select Building
Board Hardwood under the CHT Solids branch and click OK. In the Mater-

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

399

Air Conditioning Simulation

Tab

Setting

Value

ial dialog box, select Building Board Hardwood under the CHT Solids
branch and click OK.

3.

Click OK.

19.4.9. Creating a Logical Expression for the Conditional GGI Interface

Create an expression named tOpen:
1.

In the Outline tree view, expand Expressions, Functions and Variables, right-click Expressions and
select Insert > Expression

2.

Give the new expression the name: tOpen

3.

In the Definition area, type t>150[s].

4.

Click Apply.

This expression will be used to indicate the point at which the closet door is to open during the simulation. In the next section, you will set up the door interface, and indicate that the interface should
change from closed to open when the expression tOpen evaluates to 1[] (true).

19.4.10. Creating a Conditional GGI Interface for the Closet Door

Create the interface:
1.

Click Domain Interface

, set Name to ClosetDoor, and click OK.

2.

Configure the following settings:

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Value

F53.54

Interface Side 2
> Region List
Additional
Interface
Models

F53.64

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Conservative
Interface Flux

Conditional Connection
Control

(Selected)

Conditional Connection
Control
> Option

400

Irreversible State
Change

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Conditional Connection
Control
> Logical Expression

tOpen

Conditional Connection
Control
> Initial State

3.

Closed

Click OK.

Next, set the properties of the closet door that will apply when the door is closed:
1.

Edit the boundary named ClosetDoor Side 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Nonoverlap
Conditions

Nonoverlap Conditions

(Selected)

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Boundary Type

Wall

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

No Slip Wall

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Heat Transfer
> Option

Adiabatic

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Thermal Radiation
> Option

Opaque

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Thermal Radiation
> Emissivity

3.

Click OK.

4.

Do the same for ClosetDoor Side 2.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

401

Air Conditioning Simulation

19.4.11. Creating Space Under the Closet Door

Create an interface under the closet door so that air can pass freely under the door. This connection
will prevent the air in the closet from becoming isolated, so that the pressure level in the closet will be
constrained.
1.

Click Domain Interface

, set Name to DoorSpace, and click OK.

2.

Configure the following settings:

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Value

F52.54

Interface Side 2
> Region List

3.

F52.64

Click OK.

19.4.12. Setting Initial Values

1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions
> Velocity Type

Value

Cartesian

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions

402

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Cartesian Velocity

Components
>W

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Initial Conditions
> Temperature
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Temperature
> Temperature

21.8 [C]

Initial Conditions
> Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Initial Conditions
> Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity
> Value

0.05

Initial Conditions
> Turbulence

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

403

Air Conditioning Simulation

Tab

Setting

Value

> Eddy Length Scale

> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Turbulence
> Eddy Length Scale
> Value

0.25 [m]

Initial Conditions
> Radiation Intensity
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Radiation Intensity
> Blackbody Temperature

(Selected)

Initial Conditions
> Radiation Intensity
> Blackbody Temperature
> Blackbody Temp.

21.8 [C]

[a]

a. The initial blackbody temperature of the air should be set to the initial
temperature of the air.

3.

Click OK.

19.4.13. Setting Solver Control

In a typical transient simulation, there should be sufficient coefficient loops per time step to achieve
convergence. In order to reduce the time required to run this particular simulation, reduce the maximum
number of coefficient loops per time step to 3:
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Convergence Control
> Max. Coeff. Loops

404

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.

Click OK.

19.4.14. Setting Output Control

Set up the solver to output transient results files that record pressure, radiation intensity, temperature,
and velocity, on every time step:
1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

In the Transient Results list box, click Add new item

click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of Transient Results 1:

, set Name to Transient Results 1, and

Setting

Value

Option

Selected Variables

Output Variables List

Pressure, Radiation
Intensity,
Temperature,
Velocity

Output Variable Operators

[a]

(Selected)

Output Variable Operators

> Output Var. Operators

All

[b]

Output Frequency
> Option

Every Timestep

a. Use the Ctrl key to select more than one variable.

b. This causes the gradients of the selected variables to be written
to the transient results files, along with other information.

To create the thermostat thermometer, set up a monitor point at the thermometer location. Also set
up monitors to track the expressions for the temperature at the inlet, the temperature at the outlet,
and the on/off status of the air conditioner.
1.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Monitor

Monitor Objects

(Selected)

2.

Create a new Monitor Points and Expressions item named Thermometer.

3.

Configure the following setting(s) of Thermometer:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

405

Air Conditioning Simulation

Setting

Value

Output Variables List

Temperature

Cartesian Coordinates

2.95, 1.5, 1.25

4.

Create a new Monitor Points and Expressions item named Temp at Inlet.

5.

Configure the following setting(s) of Temp at Inlet:

Setting

Value

Option

Expression

Expression Value

TIn

6.

Create a new Monitor Points and Expressions item named Temp at VentOut.

7.

Configure the following setting(s) of Temp at VentOut:

Setting

Value

Option

Expression

Expression Value

TVentOut

8.

Create a new Monitor Points and Expressions item named ACOnStatus.

9.

Configure the following setting(s) of ACOnStatus:

Setting

Value

Option

Expression

Expression Value

ACOn

10. Click OK.

19.4.15. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

HVAC.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

406

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

19.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and CFX-Solver Manager has started, start the solver and view the monitor points as the solution progresses:
1.

Click Start Run.

After a few minutes, a User Points tab will appear.
On that tab, plots will appear showing the values of the monitor points:
ACOnStatus
Temp at Inlet
Temp at VentOut
Thermometer (Temperature)

2.

Click one of the plot lines to see the value of the plot variable at that point.

3.

It is difficult to see the plot values because all of the monitor points are plotted on the same scale. To see
the plots in more detail, try displaying subsets of them as follows:
a.

Right-click in the plot area and select Monitor Properties from the shortcut menu.

b.

In the Monitor Properties dialog box, on the Plot Lines tab, expand the USER POINT branch in
the tree.

c.

Clear the check boxes beside all of the monitor points except ACOnStatus, then click Apply.

d.

Observe the plot for ACOnStatus.

You might have to move the dialog box out of the way to see the plot.

e.

In the Monitor Properties dialog box, toggle each of the check boxes beside the monitor points, so
that all of the monitor points are selected except for ACOnStatus, then click Apply.

f.

Observe the plots for Temp at Inlet, Temp at VentOut, and Thermometer (Temperat
ure).

g.

Click OK to close the Monitor Properties dialog box.

4.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

5.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

6.

Click OK.

19.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

You will first create some graphic objects to visualize the temperature distribution and the thermometer
location. You will then create an animation to show how the temperature distribution changes.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

407

Air Conditioning Simulation

19.6.1. Creating Graphics Objects

In this section, you will create two planes and an isosurface of constant temperature, all colored by
temperature. You will also create a color legend and a text label that reports the thermometer temperature.

19.6.1.1. Creating Planes

In order to show the key features of the temperature distribution, create two planes colored by temperature as follows:
1.

Load the res file (HVAC_001.res) if you did not elect to load the results directly from CFX-Solver Manager.

2.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer, select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

3.

Create a ZX-Plane named Plane 1 with Y=2.25 [m]. Color it by Temperature using a user specified
range from 19 [C] to 23 [C]. Turn off lighting (on the Render tab) so that the colors are accurate and
can be interpreted properly using the legend.

4.

Create an XY plane named Plane 2 with Z=0.35 [m]. Color it using the same settings as for the first
plane, and turn off lighting.

19.6.1.2. Creating an Isosurface

In order to show the plumes of cool air from the inlet vent, create a surface of constant temperature
as follows:
1.

Click Timestep Selector

. The Timestep Selector dialog box appears.

2.

Double-click the value: 69 s.

The time step is set to 69 s so that the cold air plume is visible.

3.

Create an isosurface named Cold Plume as a surface of Temperature = 19 C.

4.

Color the isosurface by Temperature (select Use Plot Variable) and use the same color range as
for the planes. Although the color of the isosurface will not show variation (by definition), it will be consistent with the coloration of the planes.

5.

On the Render tab for the isosurface, set Transparency to 0.5. Leave lighting turned on to help show
the 3D shape of the isosurface.

6.

Click Apply.

Note
The isosurface will not be visible in some time steps, but you will be able to see it when
playing the animation (a step carried out later).

408

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

19.6.1.3. Adjusting the Legend

The legend title should not name the locator of any particular object since all objects are colored by
the same variable and use the same range. Remove the locator name from the title and, in preparation
for making an MPEG video later in this tutorial, increase the text size:
1.

Edit Default Legend View 1.

2.

On the Definition tab, change Title Mode to Variable.

This will remove the locator name from the legend.

3.

4.

Click the Appearance tab, then:

a.

Change Precision to 2, Fixed.

b.

Change Text Height to 0.03.

Click Apply.

19.6.1.4. Creating a Point for the Thermometer

In the next section, you will create a text label that displays the value of the expression TSensor,
which represents the thermometer temperature. During the solver run, this expression was evaluated
using a monitor point named Thermometer. Although this monitor point data is stored in the results
file, it cannot be accessed. In order to support the expression for TSensor, create a point called
Thermometer at the same location:
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Location > Point.

2.

Set Name to Thermometer.

3.

Set Point to (2.95,1.5,1.25).

4.

Click the Color tab, then change Color to blue.

5.

Click Apply.
A marker appears at the thermometer location in the viewer. Note that you may have to rotate
the results data to see the point.

19.6.1.5. Creating a Text Label

Create a text label that shows the currently-selected time step and thermometer temperature.
1.

Click Text

2.

Accept the default name and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Text String

Time Elapsed:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

409

Air Conditioning Simulation

Tab

Setting

Value

Embed Auto Annotation

(Selected)

Type

Time Value

[a]

a. The full text string should now be Time Elapsed: <aa>. The <aa> string
represents the location where text is to be substituted.

4.

Click More to add a second line of text to the text object.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Text String (the second one)

Sensor
Temperature:

Embed Auto Annotation

(Selected)

Type

Expression

Expression

TSensor

Height

0.03

Appearance

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Ensure that the visibility for Text 1 is turned on.

The text label appears in the viewer, near the top.

19.6.2. Creating an Animation

1.

Ensure that the view is set to Isometric View (Z up).

2.

Click Timestep Selector

3.

Double-click the first time value (0 s).

4.

Click Animation

The Animation dialog box appears.

5.

In the Animation dialog box, select the Keyframe Animation option.

6.

Click New

7.

Select KeyframeNo1, then set # of Frames to 200, then press Enter while in the # of Frames box.

to create KeyframeNo1.

Tip
Be sure to press Enter and confirm that the new number appears in the list before
continuing.

410

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Further Discussion
This will place 200 intermediate frames between the first and (yet to be created) second key frames,
for a total of 202 frames. This will produce an animation lasting about 8.4 s since the frame rate
will be 24 frames per second. Since there are 76 unique frames, each frame will be shown at least
once.
8.

Use the Timestep Selector to load the last time value (225 s).

9.

In the Animation dialog box, click New

to create KeyframeNo2.

The # of Frames parameter has no effect for the last keyframe, so leave it at the default value.
10. Click More Animation Options

to expand the Animation dialog box.

11. Select Save Movie.

12. Set Format to MPEG1.
13. Specify a filename for the movie.
14. Click the Options button.
15. Change Image Size to 720 x 480 (or a similar resolution).
16. Click the Advanced tab, and note the Quality setting. If your movie player cannot play the resulting
MPEG, you can try using the Low or Custom quality settings.
17. Click OK.
18. Click To Beginning

to rewind the active key frame to KeyframeNo1.

19. Click Save animation state

and save the animation to a file. This will enable you to quickly restore the
animation in case you want to make changes. Animations are not restored by loading ordinary state files
(those with the .cst extension).
20. Click Play the animation

21. If prompted to overwrite an existing movie, click Overwrite.

The animation plays and builds an mpg file.
22. When you have finished, quit CFD-Post.

19.7. Further Discussion

This tutorial uses an aggressive flow rate of air, a coarse mesh, large time steps, and a low cap on the maximum number of coefficient loops per time step. Running this tutorial with a flow rate of air that is closer
to 5 changes of air per hour (0.03 m3 s-1), a finer mesh, smaller time steps, and a larger cap on the maximum
number of coefficient loops, will produce more accurate results.
Running this simulation for a longer total time will allow you to see more on/off cycles of the air conditioner.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

411

412

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 20: Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

This tutorial includes:
20.1.Tutorial Features
20.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
20.3. Preparing the Working Directory
20.4. Simulating the Can Combustor with Eddy Dissipation Combustion and P1 Radiation
20.5. Simulating the Can Combustor with Laminar Flamelet Combustion and Discrete Transfer Radiation

20.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Setting Up a Combustion Model in CFX-Pre.
Using a Reacting Mixture.
Using the Eddy Dissipation combustion model.
Using the P1 radiation model.
Creating thin surfaces for the inlet vanes.
Using the Laminar Flamelet model.
Generating a CFX-RIF library.
Using the Discrete Transfer radiation model.
Using chemistry postprocessing.
Changing object color maps in CFD-Post to prepare a grayscale image.
Using the function calculator in CFD-Post.
Creating a vector plot in CFD-Post.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

Reacting Mixture

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Combustion
Radiation
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

413

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

Component

Feature

Details

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic
Wall: Thin Surface

CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Outline Plot
(Wireframe)
Sampling Plane
Slice Plane
Vector

Other

Changing the Color

Range
Color map
Legend
Quantitative Calculation

20.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

The can combustor is a feature of the gas turbine engine. Arranged around a central annulus, can
combustors are designed to minimize emissions, burn very efficiently and keep wall temperatures as
low as possible. This tutorial is designed to give a qualitative impression of the flow and temperature
distributions inside a can combustor that burns methane in air. The basic geometry is shown below
with a section of the outer wall cut away.

414

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial demonstrates two combustion and radiation model combinations. The simulation in the
first part of this tutorial uses the Eddy Dissipation combustion model and the P1 radiation model. The
simulation in the second part of this tutorial uses the Laminar Flamelet combustion model with a CFXRIF-generated chemistry library, and the Discrete Transfer radiation model.
Different radiation models are used in this tutorial for demonstration purposes; the radiation models
are independent of the combustion models.
Due to the fact that the fuel (methane) and oxidizer (air) undergo fast combustion (whereby the
combustion rate is dominated by the rate of mixing of the materials), the Finite Rate Chemistry model
is not a suitable combustion model for the combustor in this tutorial. The Combined EDM/FRC model
capability is a superset of the Eddy Dissipation model capability, and has no benefit over the Eddy
Dissipation model in this case. In fact, the convergence behavior of the Combined EDM/FRC model may
be worse than that of the Eddy Dissipation model.
The Eddy Dissipation model, the Laminar Flamelet model, and the Burning Velocity model are suitable
for modeling fast combustion. The Burning Velocity model capability is a superset of the Flamelet
model capability, with the extra capability of being able to handle premixed fuel/oxidizer. Because the
combustor in this tutorial does not use premixed fuel/oxidizer, the extra capability of the Burning Velocity
model is not required and therefore it is sufficient to use the Flamelet model.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

415

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

The Eddy Dissipation model tracks each individual chemical species (except for the constraint material)
with its own transport equation. This model is flexible in that you can readily add new materials, such
as additional fuels, to the simulation without complications. A limitation of this model is that radical or
intermediate species, such as CO, cannot be calculated with adequate accuracy. This may lead to overprediction of flame temperature, in particular in fuel-rich regions.
The Laminar Flamelet model can simulate the products of incomplete combustion; for this reason, it
generally provides a more accurate solution than the Eddy Dissipation model. One drawback of the
Flamelet model is that it requires the availability of a flamelet library suited for the required fuel/oxidizer
combination over the pressure and temperature ranges of interest. In this tutorial, you will be generating
a CFX-RIF library.
NO is modeled in a similar way in both parts of this tutorial. The only difference is in how the O-radical
concentration is obtained for the 'Thermal NO' formation step:
Eddy Dissipation model: The O-radical is not a component of the mixture; instead, its concentration is estimated using the O2 concentration and temperature.
Flamelet model: The O-radical concentration is calculated from the flamelet library, where its concentration
information is directly available.
The Flamelet configuration will use chemistry postprocessing in solving for the concentration of NO.
This postprocessing will be one-way coupled to the main solution so that the formation of NO will be
driven by the main solution without affecting the latter. This approach is appropriate for this simulation
because the mass fraction and reaction rate of NO are sufficiently small, so the effect on the main
solution is negligible.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

20.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

CombustorMesh.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

416

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Eddy Dissipation Combustion and P1 Radiation

20.4. Simulating the Can Combustor with Eddy Dissipation Combustion

and P1 Radiation
In this first part of the tutorial, you will create a simulation that uses the Eddy Dissipation combustion
model and the P1 radiation model. If you want to use the Flamelet combustion model and Discrete
Transfer radiation model instead, see Simulating the Can Combustor with Laminar Flamelet Combustion
and Discrete Transfer Radiation (p. 430), otherwise continue from this point.

20.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

You will first define a domain that includes a variable composition mixture. These mixtures are used to
model combusting and reacting flows in CFX.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run CombustorEDM.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 426).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type CombustorEDM.

6.

Click Save.

7.

If prompted, click Overwrite.

20.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

CombustorMesh.gtm

Click Open.

20.4.1.2. Creating a Reacting Mixture

To enable combustion modeling, you must create a variable composition mixture.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

417

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

20.4.1.2.1. To create the variable composition mixture

1.

In the Outline tree, right-click Materials > Insert > Material.

2.

Set the name to Methane Air Mixture and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Option

Reacting Mixture

Material Group

Gas Phase
Combustion

Reactions List

Methane Air WD1

NO PDF

Mixture
Properties

Mixture Properties

[a]

(Selected)

Mixture Properties
> Radiation Properties
> Refractive Index

(Selected)

[b]

Mixture Properties
> Radiation Properties
> Absorption Coefficient

(Selected)

Mixture Properties
> Radiation Properties
> Scattering Coefficient

(Selected)

a. The Methane Air WD1 NO PDF reaction specifies complete combustion of

the fuel into its products in a single-step reaction. The formation of NO is also
modeled and occurs in an additional reaction step. Click
actions List dialog box, then click Import Library Data
appropriate reaction to import.

to display the Reand select the

b. Setting the radiation properties explicitly will significantly shorten the solution
time because the CFX-Solver will not have to calculate radiation mixture
properties.

4.

Click OK.

20.4.1.3. Creating the Domain

If Default Domain does not currently appear under Flow Analysis 1 in the Outline tree:
Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on.
418

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Eddy Dissipation Combustion and P1 Radiation
You now need to edit Default Domain so that it is representative of the Eddy Dissipation combustion
and P 1 radiation models.
1.

Edit Default Domain and configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

B152, B153,
B154, B155,
B156

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Methane Air
Mixture

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid
Models

1 [atm]

[a]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Thermal
Energy

Combustion
> Option

Eddy
Dissipation

Combustion
> Eddy Dissipation Model Coefficient B

(Selected)

Combustion
> Eddy Dissipation Model Coefficient B
> EDM Coeff. B

0.5

[b]

Thermal Radiation
> Option

P1

Component Models
> Component
> N2

(Selected)

Component Models
> N2

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

419

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Constraint

a. It is important to set a realistic reference pressure in this tutorial because the

components of Methane Air Mixture are ideal gases.
b. This includes a simple model for partial premixing effects by turning on the
Product Limiter. When it is selected, nonzero initial values are required for the
products. The products limiter is not recommended for multi-step eddy
dissipation reactions, and so is set for this single step reaction only.

2.

Click OK.

20.4.1.4. Creating the Boundaries

20.4.1.4.1. Fuel Inlet Boundary
1.

Create a new boundary by clicking Boundary

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

and set the name to fuelin.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

fuelin

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

40 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

300 [K]

Component Details
> CH4

(Selected)

Component Details
> CH4
> Mass Fraction

3.

1.0

Click OK.

20.4.1.4.2. Bottom Air Inlet Boundary

Two separate boundary conditions will be applied for the incoming air. The first is at the base of the
can combustor. The can combustor employs vanes downstream of the bottom air inlet to give the incoming air a swirling velocity.
1.

420

Create a new boundary named airin.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Eddy Dissipation Combustion and P1 Radiation
2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

airin

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

10 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

300 [K]

Component Details
> O2

(Selected)

Component Details
> O2
> Mass Fraction

0.232

[a]

a. The remaining mass fraction at the inlet will be made up from the constraint
component, N2.

3.

Click OK.

20.4.1.4.3. Side Air Inlet Boundary

The secondary air inlets are located on the side of the vessel and introduce extra air to aid combustion.
1.

Create a new boundary named secairin.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

secairin

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

6 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

300 [K]

Component Details
> O2

(Selected)

Component Details
> O2

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

421

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

Tab

Setting

Value

> Mass Fraction

0.232

[a]

a. The remaining mass fraction at the inlet will be made up from the constraint
component, N2.

3.

Click OK.

20.4.1.4.4. Outlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named out.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

out

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Average Static
Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

3.

0 [Pa]

Click OK.

20.4.1.4.5. Vanes Boundary

The vanes above the main air inlet are to be modeled as thin surfaces. To create a vane as a thin surface
in CFX-Pre, you must specify a wall boundary on each side of the vanes.
You will first create a new region that contains one side of each of the eight vanes.
1.

Create a new composite region by selecting Insert > Regions > Composite Region.

2.

Set the name of this composite region to Vane Surfaces.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Dimension (Filter)

2D

Region List

F129.152, F132.152,
F136.152, F138.152,
F141.152, F145.152,

[a]

F147.152, F150.152

[b]

a. This will filter out the 3D regions, leaving only 2D regions

422

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Eddy Dissipation Combustion and P1 Radiation
Tab

Setting

Value

b. Click Multi-select from extended list

to open the Selection Dialog box, then
hold the Ctrl key while selecting each item in this list. Click OK.

4.

Click OK.

5.

Create another composite region named Vane Surfaces Other Side.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Dimension (Filter)

2D

Region List

F129.153, F132.153,
F136.154, F138.154,
F141.155, F145.155,
F147.156, F150.156

7.

Click OK.

8.

Create a new boundary named vanes.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Vane Surfaces,
Vane Surfaces
Other Side

10. Click OK.

20.4.1.4.6. Default Wall Boundary

The default boundary for any undefined surface in CFX-Pre is a no-slip, smooth, adiabatic wall.
For radiation purposes, the wall is assumed to be a perfectly absorbing and emitting surface (emissivity = 1).
The wall is non-catalytic, that is, it does not take part in the reaction.
Since this tutorial serves as a basic model, heat transfer through the wall is neglected. As a result, no
further boundary conditions need to be defined.

20.4.1.5. Setting Initial Values

1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

423

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity Components

> Option

Automatic
with Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W

5 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> O2

(Selected)

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> O2
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> O2
> Mass Fraction

0.232

[a]

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> CO2

(Selected)

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> CO2

424

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Eddy Dissipation Combustion and P1 Radiation
Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Automatic
with Value

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> CO2
> Mass Fraction

0.01

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> H2O

(Selected)

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> H2O
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> H2O
> Mass Fraction

0.01

a. The initial conditions assume the domain consists mainly of air and the fraction
of oxygen in air is 0.232. A small mass fraction of reaction products (CO2 and
H2O) is needed for the EDM model to initiate combustion.

3.

Click OK.

20.4.1.6. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

Value

100

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

425

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

Tab

Setting

Value

> Timescale Control

Physical
Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

3.

0.025 [s]

Click OK.

20.4.1.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

CombustorEDM.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file.

20.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

The CFX-Solver Manager will be launched after CFX-Pre saves the CFX-Solver input file. You will be able
to obtain a solution to the CFD problem by following the instructions below.

Note
If a fine mesh is used for a formal quantitative analysis of the flow in the combustor, the
solution time will be significantly longer than for the coarse mesh. You can run the simulation
in parallel to reduce the solution time. For details, see Obtaining a Solution in Parallel (p. 136).
1.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

CFX-Solver Input File should be set to CombustorEDM.def.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

426

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Eddy Dissipation Combustion and P1 Radiation
5.

Click OK.

20.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

When CFD-Post opens, experiment with the Edge Angle setting for the Wireframe object and the
various rotation and zoom features in order to place the geometry in a sensible position. A setting of
about 8.25 should result in a detailed enough geometry for this exercise.

20.4.3.1. Temperature Within the Domain

1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Y.

2.

Create a new plane named Plane 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Color

Value

> Method

ZX Plane

Mode

Variable

Mode
> Variable

4.

Temperature

Click Apply.

The large area of high temperature through most of the vessel is due to forced convection.

Note
Later in this tutorial (see Simulating the Can Combustor with Laminar Flamelet Combustion
and Discrete Transfer Radiation (p. 430)), the Laminar Flamelet combustion model will be
used to simulate the combustion again, resulting in an even higher concentration of high
temperatures throughout the combustor.

20.4.3.2. The NO Concentration in the Combustor

In the next step you will color Plane 1 by the mass fraction of NO to view the distribution of NO
within the domain. The NO concentration is highest in the high temperature region close to the outlet
of the domain.
1.

Modify the plane named Plane 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Color

Mode
> Variable

Value

NO.Mass Fraction

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

427

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

3.

Click Apply.

20.4.3.3. Printing a Greyscale Graphic

Here you will change the color map (for Plane 1) to a grayscale map. The result will be a plot with
different levels of gray representing different mass fractions of NO. This technique is especially useful
for printing, to a black and white printer, any image that contains a color map. Conversion to grayscale
by conventional means (that is, using graphics software, or letting the printer do the conversion) will
generally cause color legends to change to a nonlinear distribution of levels of gray.
1.

Modify the plane named Plane 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Color Map

Inverse Greyscale

Click Apply.

20.4.3.4. Calculating NO Mass Fraction at the Outlet

The emission of pollutants into the atmosphere is always a design consideration for combustion applications. In the next step, you will calculate the mass fraction of NO in the outlet stream.
1.

Select Tools > Function Calculator or click the Calculators tab and select Function Calculator.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Function
Calculator

Function

massFlowAve

Location

out

Variable

NO.Mass Fraction

Click Calculate.

A small amount of NO is released from the outlet of the combustor. This amount is lower than can
normally be expected, and is mainly due to the coarse mesh and the short residence times in the
combustor.

20.4.3.5. Viewing Flow Field

To investigate the reasons behind the efficiency of the combustion process, you will next look at the
velocity vectors to show the flow field. You may notice a small recirculation in the center of the combustor. Running the problem with a finer mesh would show this region to be a larger recirculation zone.
The coarseness of the mesh in this tutorial means that this region of flow is not accurately resolved.
1.

Select the Outline tab.

2.

Under User Locations and Plots, clear Plane 1.

Plane 1 is no longer visible.

428

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Eddy Dissipation Combustion and P1 Radiation
3.

Create a new vector by clicking Vector

4.

Accept the default name of Vector 1.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Symbol

Value

> Locations

Plane 1

Symbol Size

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Create a new plane named Plane 2.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

XY Plane

Definition
>Z

0.03 [m]

Plane Bounds
> Type

Rectangular

Plane Bounds
> X Size

0.5 [m]

Plane Bounds
> Y Size

0.5 [m]

Plane Type
> Sample

(Selected)

Plane Type
> X Samples

30

Plane Type

Render

9.

> Y Samples

30

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Click Apply.

10. Modify Vector 1.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

429

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

11. Configure the following setting(s):
Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

Value

Plane 2

12. Click Apply.

To view the swirling velocity field, right-click in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From Z.
You may also want to turn off the wireframe visibility. In the region near the fuel and air inlets, the swirl
component of momentum (theta direction) results in increased mixing with the surrounding fluid and
a higher residence time in this region. As a result, more fuel is burned.

20.4.3.6. Viewing Radiation

Try examining the distribution of Incident Radiation and Radiation Intensity throughout
the domain.
When you are finished, quit CFD-Post.

20.5. Simulating the Can Combustor with Laminar Flamelet Combustion

and Discrete Transfer Radiation
In this second part of the tutorial, you will modify the simulation that was set up in the first part of the
tutorial to use the Laminar Flamelet combustion model and the Discrete Transfer radiation model.
Running the simulation a second time will demonstrate the differences in the combustion models, including the variance in carbon dioxide distribution, which is shown below.

430

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Laminar Flamelet Combustion and Discrete
Transfer Radiation

20.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

CombustorEDM.cfx
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run CombustorFlamelet.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.
4.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 439).

Load the simulation called CombustorEDM.cfx.

The simulation from the first part of this tutorial is loaded.

5.

Select File > Save Case As.

6.

Save the simulation as CombustorFlamelet.cfx.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

431

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

This creates a separate simulation file that will be modified to use the Laminar Flamelet and Discrete
Transfer models.

20.5.1.1. Removing Old Reactions

In the first part of this tutorial, the multi-step reaction responsible for the overall formation of NO, NO
Formation Methane PDF, referred to the single-step reaction, Thermal NO PDF, for thermal NO
formation. In this part of the tutorial, you will switch from using the Thermal NO PDF reaction to
using the Thermal NO O Radical PDF reaction. The latter makes use of O radical information
provided in the flamelet library. The Thermal NO PDF reaction is less suitable because it approximates
the O radical concentration.
Also in the first part of the tutorial, the material Methane Air Mixture referred to the multi-step
reaction Methane Air WD1 NO PDF. In this part of the tutorial, this material will be changed to
refer to a flamelet library, Methane300K, which you will generate using CFX-RIF.
Thus, in this section you are going to remove the Methane Air WD1 NO PDF and the Thermal
NO PDF reactions because you will be replacing each of these for the flamelet configuration.
1.

Expand the Reactions section in the Outline tree.

2.

Right-click Methane Air WD1 NO PDF and select Delete.

3.

Right-click Thermal NO PDF and select Delete.

Note
You will see a number of physics warnings appear at the bottom of the 3D Viewer. This is
normal because you have just removed a reaction that the Methane Air Mixture depended upon. The warnings will be addressed when you generate a new CFX-RIF reaction
and edit the Methane Air Mixture.

20.5.1.2. Importing a New Reaction

In this section, you will load the Thermal NO O Radical PDF reaction from a list of pre-generated
reaction libraries in CFX-Pre. You will then adjust the NO Formation Methane PDF multi-step reaction to reference this reaction.
1.

Right-click Reactions in the Outline tree and select Import Library Data.

2.

Select Thermal NO O Radical PDF from the list of reaction libraries to import.

3.

Click OK to import this reaction library into your simulation.

4.

Right-click NO Formation Methane PDF in the Outline tree and select Edit.

5.

Set Reactions List to Prompt NO Methane PDF, Thermal NO O Radical PDF.

Note
In order to select both reactions, you must click Multi-select from extended list
to
open the Selection Dialog box, then hold the Ctrl key while selecting both Prompt

432

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Laminar Flamelet Combustion and Discrete
Transfer Radiation
NO Methane PDF and Thermal NO O Radical PDF from this list, and click OK
to accept this selection.

6.

Click OK to apply this change.

20.5.1.3. Generating the Flamelet Library

You will generate a flamelet library for the methane-air reaction using CFX-RIF. You will then use this
library to modify the reacting mixture, Methane Air Mixture created in the first part of this tutorial.
1.

In the Outline tree, right-click Reactions and select Insert > CFX-RIF.

2.

Set the name to CFX RIF CH4at300K and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Library File

Methane300K

Fuel Module

CH4

Kinetic Scheme

C1 mechanism without NOx

Boundary
Conditions

[a]

[b]

Fuel Composition
> Component Details
> CH4
> Mass Fraction

1.0

Fuel Composition
> Component Details
> N2
> Mass Fraction

0.0

Oxidizer Composition
> Component Details
> N2
> Mass Fraction

0.767

Oxidizer Composition
> Component Details
> O2
> Mass Fraction

0.233

Pressure And Temperature

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

433

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

Tab

Setting

Value

> Fuel Temperature

300 [K]

Pressure And Temperature

> Oxidizer Temperature

300 [K]

Pressure And Temperature

> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

[c]

a. Methane300K will be used in the name of the flamelet library directory created inside of the
working directory for example, the directory might be named "Methane300K_001.dir.
b. Here you are choosing to generate the flamelet without the inclusion of NO. Instead, you will
introduce chemistry postprocessing for the modeling of NO when you modify the domain.
This will enable the solver to run faster, as the corresponding transport equation will be solved
using the final results from the main combustion reaction as a starting point, therefore requiring
fewer iterations to converge.
c. The reference pressure here is not the same as the reference pressure set for the solver, but
rather is the average expected operating pressure of the combustor.

4.

Click OK to apply these settings.

5.

In the Outline tree, right-click CFX RIF CH4at300K and select Start CFX-RIF Generation.

Note
An information message will appear shortly to tell you that the RIF process has successfully started, and initial data has been loaded into CFX-Pre. Click OK to continue.

Note
You will also see a warning in the bottom of the viewer informing you that the specified
Flamelet Library file cannot be opened for the reaction Methane300K. Continue on
with the tutorial. The library file (Methane300K.fll) will be generated as you work.

20.5.1.4. Modifying the Reacting Mixture

You will now use the CFX-RIF-generated library to modify the reacting mixture.
1.

Expand the Materials section in the Outline tree.

2.

Right-click Methane Air Mixture and select Edit.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

434

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Laminar Flamelet Combustion and Discrete
Transfer Radiation

4.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Reactions List

Methane 300K

Click OK to apply this change.

20.5.1.5. Modifying the Default Domain

1.

Double-click Default Domain.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Fluid
Models

Combustion
> Option

Value

PDF Flamelet

Combustion
> Chemistry Post Processing

(Selected)

Combustion
> Chemistry Post Processing
> Materials List

NO

Combustion
> Chemistry Post Processing
> Reactions List

NO Formation
Methane PDF

Thermal Radiation
> Option

Discrete Transfer

Component Models
> Component
> N2

(Selected)

Component Models
> Component
> N2
> Option

Constraint

Component Models
> Component
> NO

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

435

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

Tab

Setting

Value

Component Models
> Component
> NO
> Option

Transport Equation

Component Models
> Component
> (All Others)

(Selected one at a
time)

[a]

Component Models
> Component
> (All Others)
> Option

Automatic

a. Select these one at a time and verify each of them.

3.

Click OK to apply these settings.

20.5.1.6. Modifying the Boundaries

20.5.1.6.1. Fuel Inlet Boundary
1.

Right-click the boundary named fuelin and select Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mixture

Value

> Option

Fuel

Component Details

NO

Component Details
> NO
> Option

Mass Fraction

Component Details
> NO
> Mass Fraction

436

0.0

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

3.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Laminar Flamelet Combustion and Discrete
Transfer Radiation
Click OK to apply these settings.

20.5.1.6.2. Bottom Air Inlet Boundary

1.

Right-click the boundary named airin and select Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mixture

Value

> Option

Oxidizer

Component Details

NO

Component Details
> NO
> Option

Mass Fraction

Component Details
> NO
> Mass Fraction

3.

0.0

Click OK to apply these settings.

20.5.1.6.3. Side Air Inlet Boundary

1.

Right-click the boundary named secairin and select Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mixture

Value

> Option

Oxidizer

Component Details

NO

Component Details
> NO
> Option

Mass Fraction

Component Details
> NO
> Mass Fraction

0.0

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

437

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

3.

Click OK to apply these settings.

Note
At this point, you have modified the domain and all necessary boundary conditions to match
the changes made to Methane Air Mixture. Thus, the bottom window of the 3D
Viewer should now be clear of all warnings and error messages.

20.5.1.7. Setting Initial Values

1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Component Details

NO

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> NO
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> NO
> Mass Fraction

3.

0.0

Click OK to apply these settings.

20.5.1.8. Setting Solver Control

To reduce the amount of CPU time required for solving the radiation equations, you can select to solve
them only every 10 iterations.
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

438

Tab

Setting

Advanced
Options

Dynamic Model Control

Value

> Global Dynamic Model Control

(Selected)

Thermal Radiation Control

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Laminar Flamelet Combustion and Discrete
Transfer Radiation
Tab

Setting

Value

Thermal Radiation Control

> Iteration Interval

(Selected)

Thermal Radiation Control

> Iteration Interval
> Iteration Interval

3.

10

Click OK to apply these settings.

20.5.1.9. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

CombustorFlamelet.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, the Solver Input File
is set.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

20.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Solver Manager has started, you can obtain a solution to the CFD problem by using the following procedure:
1.

Ensure that the flamelet library calculation has finished by checking your working directory for the presence
of Methane300K.fll. The CFX-RIF generation process requires a couple of minutes from the time it is
started.

2.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

CFX-Solver Input File should be set to CombustorFlamelet.def.

3.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

4.

Select Post-Process Results.

5.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

6.

Click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

439

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

20.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will plot the Temperature in the Domain, the NO Concentration in the Combustor,
and the CO Concentration. You will also use the Function Calculator to calculate the NO Concentration,
and the CO Mass Fraction at the Outlet.

20.5.3.1. Viewing Temperature within the Domain

1.

Create a new plane named Plane 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

ZX Plane

Definition

Color

>Y

Mode

Variable

Mode
> Variable

3.

Temperature

Click Apply.

20.5.3.2. Viewing the NO Concentration in the Combustor

1.

Modify the plane named Plane 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Color

Mode
> Variable

3.

Value

NO.Mass Fraction

Click Apply.

20.5.3.3. Calculating NO Concentration

The next calculation shows the amount of NO at the outlet.
1.

Select Tools > Function Calculator or click the Calculators tab and select Function Calculator.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

440

Tab

Setting

Value

Function
Calculator

Function

massFlowAve

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Can Combustor with Laminar Flamelet Combustion and Discrete
Transfer Radiation
Tab

3.

Setting

Value

Location

out

Variable

NO.Mass Fraction

Click Calculate.

20.5.3.4. Viewing CO Concentration

The next plot will show the concentration of CO (carbon monoxide), which is a by-product of incomplete
combustion and is poisonous in significant concentrations. As you will see, the highest values are very
close to the fuel inlet and in the regions of highest temperature.
1.

Modify the plane named Plane 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Color

Mode

Value

> Variable

CO.Mass Fraction

Range

Local

Click Apply.

20.5.3.5. Calculating CO Mass Fraction at the Outlet

In the next step, you will calculate the mass fraction of CO in the outlet stream.
1.

Select Tools > Function Calculator or click the Calculators tab and select Function Calculator.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Function
Calculator

Function

massFlowAve

Location

out

Variable

CO.Mass Fraction

Click Calculate.
There is approximately 0.3% CO by mass in the outlet stream.

20.5.3.6. Further Postprocessing

1.

Try putting some plots of your choice into the Viewer. You can plot the concentration of other species
and compare values to those found for the Eddy Dissipation model.

2.

Examine the distribution of Incident Radiation and Radiation Intensity throughout the
domain.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

441

Combustion and Radiation in a Can Combustor

3.

442

Load one combustion model, then load the other using the Keep current cases loaded option in the
Load Results File dialog box. You can compare both models in the viewer at once, in terms of mass
fractions of various materials, as well as total temperature and other relevant measurements.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 21: Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil

This tutorial includes:
21.1.Tutorial Features
21.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
21.3. Preparing the Working Directory
21.4. Simulating the Hydrofoil without Cavitation
21.5. Simulating the Hydrofoil with Cavitation

21.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Modeling flow with cavitation.
Using vector reduction in CFD-Post to clarify a vector plot with many arrows.
Importing and exporting data along a polyline.
Plotting computed and experimental results.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Isothermal

Multiphase
Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Symmetry Plane
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Free-Slip

Timestep
CFX-Solver Manager

Restart

CFD-Post

Plots

Physical Time Scale

Contour
Line Locator
Polyline
Slice Plane
Streamline

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

443

Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil

Component

Feature

Details
Vector

Other

Chart Creation
Data Export
Printing
Title/Text
Variable Details View

21.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This example demonstrates cavitation in the flow of water around a hydrofoil. A two-dimensional
solution is obtained by modeling a thin slice of the hydrofoil and using two symmetry boundary conditions.

In this tutorial, an initial solution with no cavitation is generated to provide an accurate initial guess
for a full cavitation solution, which is generated afterwards.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

21.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
HydrofoilExperimentalCp.csv
HydrofoilGrid.def

444

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Hydrofoil without Cavitation

The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.
3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

21.4. Simulating the Hydrofoil without Cavitation

This section describes the step-by-step definition of the flow physics in CFX-Pre.

21.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run HydrofoilIni.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 451).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type HydrofoilIni.

6.

Click Save.

21.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX-Solver Input.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

HydrofoilGrid.def

3.

Click Open.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z.

21.4.1.2. Loading Materials

Since this tutorial uses Water Vapour at 25 C and Water at 25 C, you need to load these
materials.
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Materials and select Import Library Data.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

445

Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil

The Select Library Data to Import dialog box is displayed.
2.

Expand Water Data.

3.

Select both Water Vapour at 25 C and Water at 25 C by holding Ctrl when selecting.

4.

Click OK.

21.4.1.3. Creating the Domain

The fluid domain used for this simulation contains liquid water and water vapor. The volume fractions
are initially set so that the domain is filled entirely with liquid.
1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on. A domain named Default Domain should now appear under the Simulation > Flow
Analysis 1 branch.

2.

Double-click Default Domain.

3.

Under Fluid and Particle Definitions, delete Fluid 1 and create a new fluid definition called Liquid
Water.

4.

Use the

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

button to create another fluid named Water Vapor.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Liquid Water

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Liquid Water
> Material

Water at 25
C

Fluid and Particle Definitions

[a]

Water Vapor

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Water Vapor
> Material

Water
Vapour at 25
C

[a]

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluid
Models

0 [atm]

Multiphase
> Homogeneous Model

(Selected)

Heat Transfer

446

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Hydrofoil without Cavitation

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Isothermal

Heat Transfer
> Fluid Temperature

300 [K]

Turbulence
> Option

k-Epsilon

a. These two fluids have consistent reference enthalpies.

6.

Click OK.

21.4.1.4. Creating the Boundaries

The simulation requires inlet, outlet, wall and symmetry plane boundaries. The regions for these
boundaries were imported with the grid file.

21.4.1.4.1. Inlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

IN

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Normal Speed

16.91 [m s^-1]

Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity

0.03

Turbulence

Fluid
Values

> Eddy Length Scale

0.0076 [m]

Boundary Conditions

Liquid Water

Boundary Conditions
> Liquid Water
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Water Vapor

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

447

Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil

Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Water Vapor
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

3.

Click OK.

21.4.1.4.2. Outlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named Outlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

OUT

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass And Momentum

> Relative Pressure

3.

51957 [Pa]

Click OK.

21.4.1.4.3. Free Slip Wall Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named SlipWalls.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

BOT, TOP

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

3.

Free Slip Wall

Click OK.

21.4.1.4.4. Symmetry Plane Boundaries

1.

Create a new boundary named Sym1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

448

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Hydrofoil without Cavitation

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SYM1

3.

Click OK.

1.

Create a new boundary named Sym2.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SYM2

Click OK.

21.4.1.5. Setting Initial Values

1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity Components

> Option

Automatic
with Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

16.91 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components

Fluid
Settings

>W

0 [m s^-1]

Fluid Specific Initialization

Liquid Water

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Liquid Water

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

449

Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil

Tab

Setting

Value

> Initial Conditions

> Volume Fraction
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Liquid Water
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

Fluid Specific Initialization

Water Vapor

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water Vapor
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Automatic
with Value

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water Vapor
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

3.

Click OK.

21.4.1.6. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

Value

100

Convergence Control

450

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Hydrofoil without Cavitation

Tab

Setting

Value

> Fluid Timescale Control

> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

0.01 [s]

Note
For the Convergence Criteria, an RMS value of at least 1e-05 is usually required for
adequate convergence, but the default value is sufficient for demonstration purposes.

3.

Click OK.

21.4.1.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

HydrofoilIni.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

21.4.2. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager

While the calculations proceed, you can see residual output for various equations in both the text area
and the plot area. Use the tabs to switch between different plots (for example, Momentum and Mass,
Turbulence Quantities, and so on) in the plot area. You can view residual plots for the fluid and solid
domains separately by editing the workspace properties.
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

451

Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil

5.

Click OK.

21.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The following topics will be discussed:
21.4.3.1. Plotting Pressure Distribution Data
21.4.3.2. Exporting Pressure Distribution Data
21.4.3.3. Saving the Postprocessing State

21.4.3.1. Plotting Pressure Distribution Data

In this section, you will create a plot of the pressure coefficient distribution around the hydrofoil. The
data will then be exported to a file for later comparison with data from the cavitating flow case, which
will be run later in this tutorial.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z.

2.

Insert a new plane named Slice.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

XY Plane

Definition

Render

>Z

5e-5 [m]

Show Faces

(Cleared)

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Create a new polyline named Foil by selecting Insert > Location > Polyline from the main menu.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

7.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Method

Boundary
Intersection

Boundary List

Default Domain
Default

Intersect With

Slice

Click Apply.
Zoom in on the center of the hydrofoil (near the cavity) to confirm the polyline wraps around the
hydrofoil.

8.

452

Define the following expressions, remembering to click Apply after entering each definition:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Hydrofoil without Cavitation

Name

Definition

PCoef

(Pressure-51957[Pa])/(0.5*996.2[kg m^-3]*16.91[m s^-1]^2)

FoilChord

(X-minVal(X)@Foil)/(maxVal(X)@Foil-minVal(X)@Foil)

[a]

a. This creates a normalized chord, measured in the X direction, ranging from 0 at

the leading edge to 1 at the trailing edge of the hydrofoil.

9.

Create a new variable named Pressure Coefficient.

10. Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Method

Expression

Scalar

(Selected)

Expression

PCoef

11. Click Apply.

12. Create a new variable named Chord.
13. Configure the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Method

Expression

Scalar

(Selected)

Expression

FoilChord

14. Click Apply.

Note
Although the variables that were just created are only needed at points along the
polyline, they exist throughout the domain.

Now that the variables Chord and Pressure Coefficient exist, they can be associated with the
previously defined polyline (the locator) to form a chart line. This chart line will be added to the chart
object, which is created next.
1.

Select Insert > Chart from the main menu.

2.

Set the name to Pressure Coefficient Distribution.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

453

Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil

Tab

Setting

Value

General

Title

Pressure Coefficient
Distribution

Data
Series

Name

Solver Cp

Location

Foil

X
Axis

Data Selection
> Variable

Chord

Axis Range
> Determine ranges automatically

(Cleared)

Axis Range
> Min

Axis Range
> Max

Axis Labels
> Use data for axis labels

(Cleared)

Axis Labels
> Custom Label
Y
Axis

Normalized Chord
Position

Data Selection
> Variable

Pressure Coefficient

Axis Range
> Determine Ranges Automatically

(Cleared)

Axis Range
> Min

-0.5

Axis Range
> Max

0.4

Axis Range
> Invert Axis

(Selected)

Axis Labels
> Use data for axis labels

(Cleared)

Axis Labels
> Custom Label

454

Pressure Coefficient

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Hydrofoil with Cavitation

4.

Click Apply.

5.

The chart appears on the Chart Viewer tab.

21.4.3.2. Exporting Pressure Distribution Data

You will now export the chord and pressure coefficient data along the polyline. This data will be imported
and used in a chart later in this tutorial for comparison with the results for when cavitation is present.
1.

Select File > Export > Export. The Export dialog box appears

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Options

File

NoCavCpData.csv

Locations

Foil

Export Geometry Information

(Selected)

Select Variables

Chord, Pressure
Coefficient

[a]

a. This causes X, Y, Z data to be included in the export file.

3.

Click Save.
The file NoCavCpData.csv will be written in the working directory.

21.4.3.3. Saving the Postprocessing State

If you are running CFD-Post in stand-alone mode, you will need to save the postprocessing state for
use later in this tutorial, as follows:
1.

Select File > Save State As.

2.

Under File name type Cp_plot, then click Save.

In the next part of this tutorial, the solver will be run with cavitation turned on. Similar postprocessing
follows, and the effect of cavitation on the pressure distribution around the hydrofoil will be illustrated
in a chart.

21.5. Simulating the Hydrofoil with Cavitation

Earlier in this tutorial, you ran a simulation without cavitation. The solution from that simulation will
serve as the starting point for the next simulation, which involves cavitation.

21.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

HydrofoilIni_001.res

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

455

Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil

The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.
2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already running.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run Hydrofoil.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 458).

4.

Select File > Open Case.

5.

Select HydrofoilIni_001.res and click Open.

6.

Save the case as Hydrofoil.cfx.

21.5.1.1. Adding Cavitation

1.

Double-click Default Domain in the Outline tree view.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Fluid
Pair
Models

Fluid Pairs

Value

> Liquid Water | Water Vapor

> Mass Transfer
> Option

Cavitation

Fluid Pairs
> Liquid Water | Water Vapor
> Mass Transfer
> Cavitation
> Saturation Pressure

(Selected)

Fluid Pairs
> Liquid Water | Water Vapor
> Mass Transfer
> Cavitation
> Saturation Pressure

456

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Hydrofoil with Cavitation

Tab

Setting

Value

> Saturation Pressure

3574 [Pa]

[a]

a. Saturation pressure can also be set by creating homogeneous binary mixtures,

which are not used in this tutorial.

3.

Click OK.

21.5.1.2. Modifying Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

150

[a]

a. This allows up to 150 further iterations, when run as a restart.

3.

Click OK.

21.5.1.3. Modifying Execution Control

1.

Click Execution Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Run
Definition

Solver Input File

Hydrofoil.def

[a]

a. You do not need to set the full path unless you are saving the solver file
somewhere other than the working directory.

3.

Confirm that the rest of the execution control settings are set appropriately.

4.

Click OK.

21.5.1.4. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File and
the execution control settings are set.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

457

Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil

2.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

21.5.2. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager

1.

Ensure the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

CFX-Solver Input File should be set to Hydrofoil.def.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) for the initial values file:

Tab

Setting

Value

Initial
Values

Initial Values Specification

Selected

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values

Initial Values 1

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values
> Initial Values 1 Settings
> File Name [a]
a. Click Browse

HydrofoilIni_001.res

and select the file from the working directory.

This is the solution from the starting-point run.

3.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

4.

Select Post-Process Results.

5.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

6.

Click OK.

21.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

You will restore the state file saved earlier in this tutorial while preventing the first solution (which has
no cavitation) from loading. This will cause the plot of pressure distribution to use data from the currently
loaded solution (which has cavitation). Data from the first solution will be added to the chart object by
importing NoCavCpData.csv (the file that was exported earlier). A file containing experimental data

458

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Hydrofoil with Cavitation

will also be imported and added to the plot. The resulting chart will show all three sets of data (solver
data with cavitation, solver data without cavitation, and experimental data).

Note
The experimental data is provided in HydrofoilExperimentalCp.csv which must be
in your working directory before proceeding with this part of the tutorial.

Note
If using ANSYS Workbench, CFD-Post will already be in the state in which you left it in the
first part of this tutorial. In this case, proceed to step 5 below.
1.

Select File > Load State.

2.

Clear Load results.

3.

Select Cp_plot.cst.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Click the Chart Viewer tab.

6.

Edit Report > Pressure Coefficient Distribution.

7.

Click the Data Series tab.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Data
Series

Name

Solver Cp - with
cavitation

This reflects the fact that the user-defined variable Pressure Coefficient is now based on
the current results.
9.

Click Apply.
You will now add the chart line from the first simulation.

10. Create a new polyline named NoCavCpPolyline.

11. Configure the following setting(s):
Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

File

NoCavCpData.csv

12. Click Apply.

The data in the file is used to create a polyline with values of Pressure Coefficient and
Chord stored at each point on it.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

459

Cavitation Around a Hydrofoil

13. Edit Report > Pressure Coefficient Distribution.
14. Click the Data Series tab.
15. Click New

16. Select Series 2 from the list box.

17. Configure the following setting(s):
Tab

Setting

Value

Data
Series

Name

Solver Cp - no cavitation

Location

NoCavCpPolyline

Custom Data Selection

(Selected)

X Axis
> Variable

Chord on NoCavCpPolyline

Y Axis
> Variable

Pressure Coefficient on NoCavCpPolyline

18. Click Apply.

The chart line (containing data from the first solution) is created, added to the chart object, and
displayed on the Chart Viewer tab.
You will now add a chart line to show experimental results.
19. Click New

20. Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Data Series

Name

Experimental Cp with cavitation

Data Source
> File

(Selected)

Data Source
> File
Line Display

HydrofoilExperimentalCp.csv

Line Display
> Line Style

Automatic

Line Display
> Symbols

460

Rectangle

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Hydrofoil with Cavitation

21. Click Apply.
The chart line (containing experimental data) is created, added to the chart object, and displayed
on the Chart Viewer tab.
22. If you want to save an image of the chart, select File > Save Picture from the main menu while the Chart
Viewer tab is selected. This will enable you to save the chart to an image file.
23. When you are finished, close CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

461

462

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 22: Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation

and the CFX Rigid Body Solver
This tutorial includes:
22.1.Tutorial Features
22.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
22.3. Preparing the Working Directory
22.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
22.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
22.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

22.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Mesh motion and deformation.
Rigid body simulation.
Fluid structure interaction (without modeling solid deformation).
Animation creation.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Transient

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Isothermal

Boundary Conditions

Opening
Symmetry
Wall

Rigid Body

1 Degree of Freedom

Mesh Motion

Unspecified
Stationary
Rigid Body Solution

CFD-Post

Plots

Slice Plane
Point
Vector Plot
Animation

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

463

Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver

22.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial uses an example of a ball check valve to demonstrate two-way Fluid-Structure Interaction
(FSI) between a ball and a fluid, as well as mesh deformation capabilities using ANSYS CFX. A sketch of
the geometry, modeled in this tutorial as a 2D slice (0.1 mm thick), is shown below.

Check valves are commonly used to enforce unidirectional flow of liquids and act as pressure-relieving
devices. The check valve for this tutorial contains a ball connected to a spring with a stiffness constant
of 300 N/m. The ball is made of steel with a density of 7800 kg/m3 and is represented as a cavity region
in the mesh with a diameter of 4 mm. Initially the center of mass of the ball is located at the coordinate
point (0, 0.0023, 5e-05); this point is the spring origin, and all forces that interact with the ball are assumed to pass through this point. The tank region, located below the valve housing, is filled with
Methanol (CH4O) at 25C. High pressure from the liquid at the tank opening (6 atm relative pressure)
causes the ball to move up, therefore enabling the fluid to escape through the valve to the atmosphere
at an absolute pressure of 1 atm. The forces on the ball are: the force due to the spring (not shown in
the figure) and the force due to fluid flow. Gravity is neglected here for simplicity. The spring pushes
the ball downward to oppose the force of the pressure when the ball is raised above its initial position.
The pressure variation causes the ball to oscillate along the Y axis as a result of a dynamic imbalance
in the forces. The ball eventually stops oscillating when the forces acting on it are in equilibrium.

464

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

In this tutorial the deformation of the ball itself is not modeled; mesh deformation is employed to
modify the mesh as the ball moves. A rigid body simulation is used to predict the motion of the ball,
and will be based on the forces that act on it.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

22.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

ValveFSI.out
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

22.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

This section describes the step-by-step definition of the flow physics in CFX-Pre.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run ValveFSI.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 478).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type ValveFSI.

6.

Click Save.

22.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > Other.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

465

Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver
The Import Mesh dialog box appears.
2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Files of type

PATRAN Neutral (*out *neu)

File name

ValveFSI.out

Options
> Mesh Units

mm

[a]

a. This mesh was created using units of millimeters; however the units are not
stored with this type of mesh. Set Mesh Units to mm when importing the mesh
into CFX-Pre so that the mesh remains the intended size.

3.

Click Open.

22.4.2. Defining a Transient Simulation

1.

Right-click Analysis Type in the Outline tree view and select Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Analysis Type
> Option

Value

Transient

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Option

Total Time

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Total Time

7.5e-3 [s]

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Option

Timesteps

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Timesteps

5.0e-5 [s]

Analysis Type
> Initial Time

466

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Automatic with
Value

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Time

3.

0 [s]

Click OK.

Note
You may ignore the physics validation message regarding the lack of definition of transient
results files. You will set up the transient results files later.

22.4.3. Editing the Domain

In this section you will create the fluid domain, define the fluid and enable mesh motion.
1.

If Default Domain does not currently appear under Flow Analysis 1 in the Outline tree,
edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default
Domain is turned on and click OK.

2.

In the tree view, right-click Default Domain and select Edit.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

CV3D REGION,
CV3D SUB

[a]

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Fluid Domain

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Methanol CH4O

[b]

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

Domain Models

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

467

Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver
Tab

Setting

Value

> Mesh Deformation

> Option

Regions of Motion
Specified

[c]

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Displacement Rel. To

Previous Mesh

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Option

Displacement
Diffusion

[d] [e]

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Mesh Stiffness
> Option

Increase near Small

Volumes

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Mesh Stiffness
> Model Exponent

1[f]

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Mesh Stiffness
> Reference Volume
> Option
Fluid Models

Heat Transfer
> Option

468

Mean Control
Volume

Isothermal

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Heat Transfer
> Fluid Temperature

25 [C]

a. Click the Multi-select from extended list icon

to open the Selection Dialog dialog
box, then hold the Ctrl key while selecting both CV3D REGION and CV3D SUB
from this list. Click OK.
b. To make Methanol an available option:
i.

Click the Select from extended list icon

ii. Click the Import Library Data icon

dialog box.

to open the Material dialog box.

to open the Select Library Data to Import

iii. In that dialog box, expand Constant Property Liquids in the tree, select
Methanol CH4O and click OK.
iv. Select Methanol CH4O in the Material dialog box and click OK.
c. The Regions of Motion Specified option permits boundaries and
subdomains to move, and makes mesh motion settings available.
d. To see the additional mesh motion settings, you may need to click Roll Down
located beside Mesh Motion Model.
e. The Displacement Diffusion model for mesh motion attempts to preserve the relative
mesh distribution of the initial mesh.
f.

4.

An exponent value of 1 is chosen in order to limit the distortion of the coarse mesh.
If a finer mesh were used, the default value of 2 would most likely be appropriate.

Click OK.

22.4.4. Creating a Coordinate Frame

In this section, a secondary coordinate system will be created to define the center of mass of the ball.
This secondary coordinate system will be used to define certain parameters of the rigid body in the
next section.
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Coordinate Frames and select Insert > Coordinate Frame.

2.

Set the name to Coord 1 and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Option

Axis Points

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

469

Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver
Tab

4.

Setting

Value

Origin

(0, 0.0023, 5e-05)

Z Axis Point

(0, 0.0023, 1)

X-Z Plane Pt

(1, 0.0023, 0)

Select OK.

22.4.5. Creating a Rigid Body

A rigid body is a non-deformable object described by physical parameters: mass, center of mass, moment
of inertia, initial velocities and accelerations, and orientation. The rigid body solver uses the interacting
forces between the fluid and the rigid body and calculates the motion of the rigid body based upon
the defined physical parameters. The rigid body may have up to six degrees of freedom (three translational and three rotational). You may also specify external forces and torques acting on the rigid body.
In this section, you will define a rigid body with 1 degree of freedom, translation in the Y direction. The
rigid body definition will be applied to the wall boundary of the ball to define its motion. Further, you
will specify an external spring force by defining a spring constant and the initial origin of the spring;
in this simulation the origin is the center of mass of the ball. The force caused by the tank pressure will
cause an upward translation and the defined external spring force will resist this translation.
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Flow Analysis 1 and select Insert > Rigid Body.

2.

Set the name to rigidBall and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Mass

9.802e-6 [kg]

Location

BALL

Coordinate Frame

Coord 1

Mass Moment of Inertia

> XX Component

0 [kg m^2]

[a]

Mass Moment of Inertia

> YY Component

0 [kg m^2]

Mass Moment of Inertia

> ZZ Component

0 [kg m^2]

Mass Moment of Inertia

> XY Component

0 [kg m^2]

Mass Moment of Inertia

> XZ Component

0 [kg m^2]

Mass Moment of Inertia

> YZ Component

470

0 [kg m^2]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Dynamics

External Force Definitions

Create new external

force named
Spring Force

[b]

External Force Definitions

> Spring Force
> Option

Spring

External Force Definitions

> Spring Force
> Equilibrium Position
> X Component

0 [m]

External Force Definitions

> Spring Force
> Equilibrium Position
> Y Component

0 [m]

External Force Definitions

> Spring Force
> Equilibrium Position
> Z Component

0 [m]

External Force Definitions

> Spring Force
> Linear Spring Constant
> X Component

0 [N m^-1]

External Force Definitions

> Spring Force
> Linear Spring Constant
> Y Component

300 [N m^-1]

External Force Definitions

> Spring Force
> Linear Spring Constant
> Z Component

0 [N m^-1]

Degrees of Freedom
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

471

Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver
Tab

Setting

Value

> Translational Degrees of

Freedom
> Option

Y axis

Degrees of Freedom
> Rotational Degrees of
Freedom
> Option

None

a. The Mass Moment of Inertia settings can have any values; they have no effect on
the simulation because the rigid body has only a singular, translational, degree of
freedom.
b. To create a new item, you must first click the Add new item
name as required and click OK.

4.

icon, then enter the

Click OK.

22.4.6. Creating the Subdomain

1.

Select Insert > Subdomain from the main menu or click Subdomain

2.

Set the subdomain name to Tank and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Location

CV3D SUB

Mesh Motion

Mesh Motion
> Option

Stationary

[a]

a. The stationary option for the tank volume (subdomain) ensures that the mesh does
not fold at the sharp corners that exist where the valve joins the tank.

4.

Click OK.

22.4.7. Creating the Boundaries

In the following subsections, you will create the required boundary conditions, specifying the appropriate
mesh motion option for each.
In this tutorial, mesh motion specifications are applied to two and three dimensional regions of the
domain. For example, the Ball boundary specifies the mesh motion in the form of the rigid body
solution. However, mesh motion specifications are also used in this tutorial to help ensure that the

472

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

mesh does not fold, as set for the Tank subdomain earlier in the tutorial, and the TankOpen boundary
below. Two regions, VALVE HIGHX and VALVE LOWX, remain at the default boundary condition:
smooth, no slip walls and no mesh motion (stationary).

22.4.7.1. Ball Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named Ball.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

BALL

Boundary
Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Rigid Body Solution

Mesh Motion
> Rigid Body

rigidBall

Mass And Momentum

> Option

No Slip Wall

Mass And Momentum

> Wall Vel. Rel. To

3.

Mesh Motion

Click OK.

22.4.7.2. Symmetry Boundary

Because a 2D representation of the flow field is being modeled (using a 3D mesh, one element thick
in the Z direction), you must create symmetry boundaries on the low and high Z 2D regions of the
mesh.
1.

Create a new boundary named Sym.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

SYMP1, SYMP2

Boundary
Details

[a]

Mesh Motion
> Option

Unspecified

a. Hold the Ctrl key while selecting both SYMP1 and SYMP2 from the list.

3.

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

473

Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver

22.4.7.3. Vertical Valve Wall Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named ValveVertWalls.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

VPIPE HIGHX, VPIPE

LOWX

Boundary
Details

[a]

Mesh Motion
> Option

Unspecified

[b]

Mass And Momentum

> Option

No Slip Wall

Mass And Momentum

> Wall Vel. Rel. To

Boundary Frame

a. Hold the Ctrl key while selecting both VPIPE HIGHX and VPIPE LOWX from the
list.
b. The Unspecified setting allows the mesh nodes to move freely. The motion of
the mesh points on this boundary will be strongly influenced by the motion of the
ball. Because the ball moves vertically, the surrounding mesh nodes should also
move vertically, at a similar rate to the ball. This mesh motion specification helps to
preserve the quality of the mesh on the upper surface of the ball.

3.

Click OK.

22.4.7.4. Tank Opening Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named TankOpen.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Opening

Location

BOTTOM

Boundary
Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Stationary

[a]

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Entrainment

Mass And Momentum

474

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Relative Pressure

6 [atm]

[b]

Turbulence
> Option

Zero Gradient

a. The stationary option for the tank opening prevents the mesh nodes on this boundary
from moving. If the tank opening had unspecified mesh motion, these mesh nodes
would move vertically and separate from the non-vertical parts of the boundary.
b. As defined in the problem description. Note the units for this setting.

3.

Click OK.

22.4.7.5. Valve Opening Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named ValveOpen.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Opening

Location

TOP

Boundary
Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Stationary

[a]

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Entrainment

Mass And Momentum

> Relative Pressure

0 [atm]

[b]

Turbulence
> Option

Zero Gradient

a. The stationary option for the valve opening prevents the mesh nodes from moving.
b. This pressure value is relative to the fluid domain's reference pressure of 1 [atm].

3.

Click OK.

Note
Opening boundary types are used to enable the flow to leave and reenter the domain. This
behavior is expected due to the oscillatory motion of the ball and due to the potentially
large region of flow recirculation that may occur downstream from the ball.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

475

Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver

22.4.8. Setting Initial Values

Because a transient simulation is being modeled, initial values are required for all variables.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity

Components
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>V

0.1 [m s^-1]

[a]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>W

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Initial Conditions
> Turbulence
> Option

Medium (Intensity
= 5%)

a. This is an initial velocity to start a unidirectional fluid flow in the positive Y direction
and to prevent initial backflow in the check-valve, improving solution convergence.
Better values of velocity could be derived from the steady-state analysis (not
considered for this tutorial).

3.

Click OK.

22.4.9. Setting Solver Control

In this section you will edit the solver control settings to promote a quicker solution time and to enable
the frequency of when the rigid body solver is run.

476

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Transient Scheme
> Option

Second Order
Backward Euler

Convergence Control

Rigid Body
Control

> Max. Coeff. Loops

Rigid Body Control

(Selected)

Rigid Body Control

> Rigid Body Solver Coupling
Control
Every Coefficient
> Update Frequency

Loop

[a]

a. By setting the Update Frequency to Every Coefficient Loop you are telling
CFX-Solver to call the rigid body solver during every coefficient loop within each
time step.

3.

Click OK.

22.4.10. Setting Output Control

This step sets up transient results files to be written at set intervals.
1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

In the Transient Results tree view, click Add new item

click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of Transient Results 1:

Setting

Value

Option

Selected Variables

Output Variables List

Pressure, Velocity

Output Variable Operators

(Selected)

, set Name to Transient Results 1, and

Output Variable Operators

> Output Var. Operators

All

[a]

Output Frequency

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

477

Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver
Setting

Value

> Option

Time Interval

Output Frequency
> Time Interval

5.0e-5 [s]

a. This causes the gradients of the selected variables to be

written to the transient results files.

5.

Click the Monitor tab.

6.

Select Monitor Objects.

7.

Under Monitor Points and Expressions:

8.

a.

Click Add new item

b.

Set Name to Ball Displacement and click OK.

c.

Set Option to Expression.

d.

Set Expression Value to rbstate(Position Y)@rigidBall.

Click OK.

22.4.11. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

ValveFSI.def

3.

Click Save.

4.

CFX-Solver Manager starts automatically and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is set.

5.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file.

22.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and the CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD
problem by following the instructions below.
1.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

Solver Input File should be set to ValveFSI.def.

478

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. This can take a long time depending on your
system.

Note
You can ignore the warning message indicating a negative sector volume in your mesh.
This occurs as a result of large deformations in the mesh and will not significantly affect
the results for this case.

3.

While CFX-Solver Manager is running, you can check the progress of the monitor point you created in
CFX-Pre by clicking the User Points tab in CFX-Solver Manager. The graph shows the Y position of
the center of mass of the ball (in the global coordinate frame). Notice that the ball has a sinusoidal motion
that diminishes in amplitude over time and that the maximum displacement of the ball occurs at around
time step 17.

4.

Select Monitors > Rigid Body > Rigid Body Position from the main menu. The position of the rigid body
will be shown in the X, Y and Z directions relative to the global coordinate frame.

Note
This graph is identical to the graph obtained from under the User Points tab (although the scale may be different). Normally, creating the monitor point for position is
redundant since the rigid body positions are calculated automatically the monitor
point was created in this tutorial to demonstrate the rbstate function.

5.

When a dialog box is displayed at the end of the run, select Post-Process Results.

6.

Click OK.

22.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In the following subsections, you will create a user location, point and vector plots, and an animation
in CFD-Post. You will create an XY plane that lies midway between the two symmetry planes. The plane
will be used to show the mesh motion; it will also serve as the location for a vector plot that will be
used in the animation.
22.6.1. Creating a Slice Plane
22.6.2. Creating Points and a Vector Plot
22.6.3. Creating an Animation

22.6.1. Creating a Slice Plane

1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Z.

2.

Select Insert > Location > Plane from the main menu. Accept the default name and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

479

Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver
Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

XY Plane

Definition

Render

4.

>Z

5e-05 [m]

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Click Apply.

22.6.2. Creating Points and a Vector Plot

1.

Select Insert > Location > Point from the main menu. Accept the default name and click OK.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Symbol

3.

Value

> Method

XYZ

Point

(0, 0.0003, 0)

Symbol

Crosshair

Symbol Size

Click Apply to create the point.

This is a reference point for the minimum Y value of the ball at time step 0. However the final time
step is currently selected. This will be corrected in the proceeding steps.

4.

Select Insert > Location > Point from the main menu. Accept the default name and click OK.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Symbol

6.

Value

> Method

XYZ

Point

(0, 0.001266, 0)

Symbol

Crosshair

Symbol Size

Click Apply to create the point.

This is a reference point for the minimum Y value of the ball in the positive Y direction at the time
of maximum displacement.

480

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

7.

Click Timestep Selector

time.

and load the results for a few different time steps, selecting one entry at a

For example, double-click rows with the step values of 0, 10, 20, 50, and 90 to see the ball in different
positions. The mesh deformation will also be visible.
8.

Create a new vector named Vector 1.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Plane 1

Variable

Velocity

10. Click Apply to show the vector plot in the 3D Viewer.

22.6.3. Creating an Animation

You will create an animation showing the velocity in the domain as the ball moves.
1.

Turn off the visibility of Plane 1 to better see the vector plot.

2.

Click the Timestep Selector

3.

Click Animate timesteps

4.

In the Animation dialog box, select the Keyframe Animation option.

5.

Click New

6.

Select KeyframeNo1, then set # of Frames to 149, then press Enter while the cursor is in the # of Frames
box.

and load the 1st time step.

in the Timestep Selector dialog box.

to create KeyframeNo1.

Tip
Be sure to press Enter and confirm that the new number appears in the list before
continuing.

7.

Use the Timestep Selector to load the last time step.

8.

In the Animation dialog box, click New

to create KeyframeNo2.

Tip
The # of Frames parameter has no effect on the last keyframe, so leave it at the default
value.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

481

Modeling a Ball Check Valve using Mesh Deformation and the CFX Rigid Body Solver
9.

Ensure that More Animation Options

is pushed down to show more animation settings.

10. Select Loop.

11. Ensure that Repeat forever

(next to the Repeat setting) is not selected (not pushed down).

12. Click the Options button to open the Animation Options dialog box.
13. Configure the following setting(s):
Tab

Setting

Options

Print Options
> Image Size

Advanced

Value

720 x 480 (NTSC)

MPEG Options
> Quality

Custom

MPEG Options
> Variable Bit Rate

(Cleared)

MPEG Options
> Bit Rate

3000000

[a]

a. This limits the bit rate so that the movie will be playable in most players. You can
lower this value if your player cannot process at this bit rate.

14. Click OK.

15. Select Save Movie.
16. Set Format to MPEG1.
17. Click Browse

(next to Save Movie).

18. Set File name to ValveFSI.mpg.

If required, set the path to a different directory.
19. Click Save.
The movie file name (including the path) has been set, but the animation has not yet been produced.
20. Click To Beginning

This ensures that the animation will begin at the first keyframe.
21. After the first keyframe has been loaded, click Play the animation

The MPEG will be created as the animation proceeds.

482

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

This will be slow, since results for each time step will be loaded and objects will be created.
To view the movie file, you need to use a viewer that supports the MPEG format.

Note
To explore additional animation options, click the Options button. On the Advanced
tab of the Animation Options dialog box, there is a Save Frames As Image Files check
box. By selecting this check box, the JPEG or PPM files used to encode each frame of
the movie will persist after movie creation; otherwise, they will be deleted.

22. Close the Animation dialog box when the animation is complete.
23. When you have finished, close the Timestep Selector dialog box and quit CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

483

484

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 23: Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure

Interaction
This tutorial includes:
23.1.Tutorial Features
23.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
23.3. Preparing the Working Directory
23.4. Setting up the Project
23.5. Adding Analysis Systems to the Project
23.6. Adding a New Material for the Project
23.7. Adding Geometry to the Project
23.8. Defining the Physics in the Mechanical Application
23.9. Completing the Setup for the Structural System
23.10. Creating Named Selections on the Fluid Body
23.11. Generating the Mesh for the Fluid System
23.12. Defining the Physics and ANSYS Multi-field Settings in ANSYS CFX-Pre
23.13. Obtaining a Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
23.14. Viewing Results in CFD-Post

23.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Moving mesh
Fluid-structure interaction (including modeling structural deformation using ANSYS)
Running an ANSYS Multi-field (MFX) simulation
Postprocessing two results files simultaneously.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Transient
ANSYS Multi-field

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

Laminar

Heat Transfer

None

Output Control

Monitor Points
Transient Results File

Boundary Conditions

Wall: Mesh Motion =

ANSYS MultiField

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

485

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

Component

Feature

Details
Wall: No Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

CFD-Post

Timestep

Transient

Plots

Animation
Contour
Vector

23.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial uses an example of an oscillating plate to demonstrate how to set up and run a simulation
involving two-way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) in ANSYS Workbench. In this tutorial, the structural
physics is set up in the Transient Structural analysis system and the fluid physics is set up in Fluid Flow
(CFX) analysis system, but both structural and fluid physics are solved together under the Solution cell
of the Fluid system. Coupling between two analysis systems is required throughout the solution to
model the interaction between structural and fluid systems as time progresses. The framework for the
coupling is provided by the ANSYS Multi-field solver using the MFX setup.
The geometry consists of a 2D closed cavity and a thin plate, 1 m high, that is anchored to the bottom
of the cavity as shown below:

An initial pressure of 100 Pa is applied to one side of the thin plate for 0.5 seconds in order to distort
it. Once this pressure is released, the plate oscillates backwards and forwards as it attempts to regain
its equilibrium (vertical) position. The surrounding fluid damps the plate oscillations, thereby decreasing
the amplitude of oscillations with time. The CFX solver calculates how the fluid responds to the motion
of the plate, and the ANSYS solver calculates how the plate deforms as a result of both the initial applied
pressure and the pressure resulting from the presence of the fluid. Coupling between the two solvers
is required since the structural deformation affects the fluid solution, and the fluid solution affects the
structural deformation.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

486

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Adding Analysis Systems to the Project

23.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

OscillatingPlate.agdb
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

23.4. Setting up the Project

1.

Start ANSYS Workbench.

To launch ANSYS Workbench on Windows, click the Start menu, then select All Programs > ANSYS
17.0 > Workbench 17.0. To launch ANSYS Workbench on Linux, open a command line interface,
type the path to runwb2 (for example, ~/ansys_inc/v170/Framework/bin/Linux64/runwb2), then
press Enter.
The Project Schematic appears with an Unsaved Project. By default, ANSYS Workbench is configured
to show the Getting Started dialog box that describes basic operations in ANSYS Workbench. Click
the [X] icon to close this dialog box. To turn on or off this dialog box, select Tools > Options from
the main menu and set Project Management > Startup > Show Getting Started Dialog as desired.

2.

Select File > Save or click Save

A Save As dialog box appears.

3.

Select the path to your working directory to store files created during this tutorial.

4.

Under File name, type OscillatingPlate and click Save.

The project files and their associated directory locations appear under the Files View. To make the
Files View visible, select View > Files from the main menu of ANSYS Workbench.

23.5. Adding Analysis Systems to the Project

In ANSYS Workbench, a two-way FSI analysis can be performed by setting up a pair of coupled analysis
systems, the pair consisting of a Transient Structural system and a Fluid Flow (CFX) system, as outlined
in this section.
1.

Expand the Analysis Systems option in the toolbox, located on the left side of the ANSYS Workbench
window, and select the Transient Structural template. Double-click the template, or drag it onto the
Project Schematic to create a stand-alone system.
A Transient Structural system is added to the Project Schematic, with its name selected and ready
to be renamed.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

487

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

2.

Type in the new name, Structural, to replace the selected text. This name will be used while referring
to the Transient Structural system in this tutorial.
If you missed seeing the selected text, right-click the first cell in the system and select Rename as
shown in the following figure. The name will then be selected and ready to change.

3.

Now right-click the Setup cell in the Structural system and select Transfer Data to New > Fluid Flow
(CFX).
A Fluid Flow system, coupled to the ANSYS system, is added to the Project Schematic.

4.

Change the name of this system to Fluid; this name will be used while referring to the Fluid Flow (CFX)
system in this tutorial.

For this tutorial, the Solution and Results cells of the Structural system will be removed because they
are not used for this two-way FSI analysis. This tutorial relies on the solution and results generated in
the Fluid system, which you have already connected to the Structural system.
Remove the Solution and Results cells from the Structural system as follows:
1.

In the Structural system, right-click the Solution cell and select Delete.

2.

Click OK on the dialog box to confirm the deletion of the cell with the solution data from the Structural
system.
The Solution and Results cells disappear from the Structural system. The updated project is shown
in Figure 23.1: Project setup for two-way FSI analysis (p. 489).

488

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Adding a New Material for the Project

Figure 23.1: Project setup for two-way FSI analysis

3.

Now from the main menu, select File > Save to save the project setup.

The Structural and Fluid systems contain various cells. ANSYS Workbench provides visual indications of
a cell's state at any given time via icons on the right side of each cell. In Figure 23.1: Project setup for
two-way FSI analysis (p. 489), most cells appear with a blue question mark (?), indicating that cells need
to be set up before continuing the analysis. As these cells are set up, the data transfer occurs from top
to bottom. See Understanding States in ANSYS Workbench help for a description of various cell states.
Now the project is ready for further processing. A project with inter-connected systems enables you to
perform the analysis by adding a new material, sharing the geometry, setting up the physics in the
Structural system, and setting up the physics in the Fluid system. Later, the analysis will be performed
in the Fluid system for solving and viewing results.
In Figure 23.1: Project setup for two-way FSI analysis (p. 489), the Engineering Data cell appears in an
up-to-date state, because a default material definition is already available for the project. However, the
default material is not used in this tutorial. Thus, the next step in the analysis is to add a new material
with properties required for exhibiting an oscillation under the influence of external pressure, as outlined
in Overview of the Problem to Solve (p. 486). The new material can be created using the Engineering
Data application in ANSYS Workbench, as described in the next section.

23.6. Adding a New Material for the Project

This section describes how to create a new material named Plate, define its properties suitable for oscillation, and set it as the default material for the analysis.
1.

On the Project Schematic, double-click the Engineering Data cell in the Structural system.
The Outline and Properties windows appear.

2.

In the Outline of Schematic A2: Engineering Data window, click the empty row at the bottom of the
table to add a new material for the project. Type in the name Plate.
Plate is created and appears with a blue question mark (?), indicating that plate properties need
to be defined.

3.

Now from the toolbox located on the left side of the ANSYS Workbench window, expand Physical Properties. Select Density and drag it onto the cell containing Plate in the Outline of Schematic A2: Engineering Data window.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

489

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

Density is added as the plate property in the Properties of Outline Row 4: Plate window, as shown
in the following figure.

4.

In the Properties of Outline Row 4: Plate window, set Density to 2550 [kg m^-3].

5.

Similarly, from the Linear Elastic toolbox, drag Isotropic Elasticity onto Plate in the Outline of Schematic A2: Engineering Data window.
Isotropic Elasticity is added as the plate property in the Properties of Outline Row 4: Plate window.

6.

In the Properties of Outline Row 4: Plate window, expand Isotropic Elasticity by clicking on the plus
sign. Now set Youngs Modulus to 2.5e06 [Pa] and Poissons Ratio to 0.35.

Now the desired plate data is created and will be available to remaining cells in the Structural system.
The next step is to set Plate as the default material for the analysis as outlined below:
1.

In the Outline of Schematic A2: Engineering Data window, under Material, right-click Plate to open
the shortcut menu.

2.

In the shortcut menu, select Default Solid Material For Model.

3.

Now from the main menu, select File > Save to save material settings to the project.

Now click the Project tab to leave the Engineering Data workspace and return to the Project Schematic.

23.7. Adding Geometry to the Project

This section describes how to add geometry by importing an existing DesignModeler file and unsuppressing geometry parts in order to make the latter available for subsequent cells in the Structural and
Fluid systems.

490

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Adding Geometry to the Project

1.

On the Project Schematic, right-click the Geometry cell in the Structural system and select Import Geometry > Browse.

2.

In the Open dialog box, select OscillatingPlate.agdb from your working directory, and click Open.
For details, see Setting up the Project (p. 487).

3.

In the Structural system, double-click the Geometry cell to edit the geometry using DesignModeler.

Note
Because the Geometry cell in the Structural system shares its content with the Geometry
cell in the Fluid system, the latter cannot be edited.

In DesignModeler, the Tree Outline contains two bodies, Fluid and Solid, under the branch named 2
Parts, 2 Bodies, as shown in the following figure.

The Fluid body appears in a suppressed state, shown with an x mark, implying that the body is not
visible. When a body is suppressed in DesignModeler, its model data is not exported to subsequent
cells in the analysis systems.
For this tutorial, all bodies will be unsuppressed in DesignModeler so that all geometry data is transferred
to the subsequent cells in the Structural and Fluid systems. Later in the tutorial, the Fluid and Solid
bodies will be suppressed selectively in the Structural and Fluid systems, respectively, before generating
an appropriate structural or fluid mesh.
1.

In the Tree Outline, right-click the Fluid body and select Unsuppress Body.
The Fluid body is unsuppressed and a green check mark appears next to it in the Tree Outline.

2.

In the Tree Outline, select the branch named 2 Parts, 2 Bodies. Both the Fluid and Solid bodies should
be visible in the Graphics window. Click Zoom to Fit

to view the entire model in the Graphics window.

This finishes the geometry setup for the project. Save these changes by selecting File > Save Project
from the main menu in DesignModeler, and then select File > Close DesignModeler to return to the
Project Schematic.
Now the updated geometry is available for both the Structural and Fluid systems.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

491

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

23.8. Defining the Physics in the Mechanical Application

This section describes the step-by-step definition of the structural physics in the following sections:
23.8.1. Generating the Mesh for the Structural System
23.8.2. Assigning the Material to Geometry
23.8.3. Basic Analysis Settings
23.8.4. Inserting Loads

23.8.1. Generating the Mesh for the Structural System

This section describes how to generate mesh for the Structural system.
1.

On the Project Schematic, double-click the Model cell in the Structural system.
The Mechanical application appears.

2.

In the Mechanical application, expand Project > Model > Geometry in the tree view.
Two geometries, Fluid and Solid, appear in the tree view. Click Zoom to Fit
model in the Graphics window.

to view the entire

For the Structural system, the mesh must be generated from the Solid body. As such, the Fluid
body will be suppressed before the mesh generation operation.
3.

Right-click the Fluid geometry and select Suppress Body from the shortcut menu.
The Fluid body becomes suppressed and its status changes to an x mark. Click Zoom to Fit
re-size the model suitable for viewing in the Graphics window.

4.

to

In the tree view, right-click Mesh and select Generate Mesh from the shortcut menu.
The hex mesh is generated.

23.8.2. Assigning the Material to Geometry

1.

In the Mechanical application, expand Project > Model > Geometry in the tree view and select Solid.
The details of Solid appear in the details view below the Outline tree view.

2.

In the details view, ensure that Material > Assignment is set to Plate. Otherwise, click the material
name and use the arrow that appears next to the material name to make appropriate changes.

23.8.3. Basic Analysis Settings

This section outlines the steps to set up an ANSYS Multi-field run using the transient mechanical analysis, with a time step of 0.1 s and a time duration of 5 s. For the given material properties of the plate,
the time duration is chosen to enable the plate to oscillate just a few times, and the time step is chosen
to resolve those oscillations to a reasonable degree.
1.

In the Mechanical application, expand Project > Model > Transient in the tree view and select Analysis
Settings.
The details of Analysis Settings appear in the details view below the Outline tree view.

492

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Physics in the Mechanical Application

2.

In the details view, specify the following settings under Step Controls:

Note
Do not type in units while entering data for the time settings, Time Step and Step End
Time.
Set Step End Time to 5.
Set Auto Time Stepping to Off
Set Time Step to 0.1

23.8.4. Inserting Loads

The loads applied for the finite element analysis are equivalent to the boundary conditions in fluid
analysis. In this section, you will set a fixed support, a fluid-solid interface, and a pressure load. On the
surfaces of the plate that lie coincident with the symmetry planes, no loads are set. As a result, the default
of an unconstrained condition will be applied on these surfaces. For this particular application, this is
a reasonable approximation of the frictionless support that would otherwise be applied.

23.8.4.1. Fixed Support

The fixed support is required to hold the bottom of the thin plate in place.
1.

In the Mechanical application, expand Project > Model and right-click Transient in the tree view and
select Insert > Fixed Support from the shortcut menu.

2.

Rotate the geometry using the Rotate

then select Face

button so that the bottom (low-y) face of the solid is visible,

and click the low-y face.

That face should be highlighted to indicate the selection.

3.

In the details view, click Apply to set the fixed support.

The text next to the Geometry setting changes to 1 Face.
If the Apply button is not visible, select Fixed Support in the tree view and, in the details view,
click the text next to the Geometry setting to make the Apply button re-appear.

23.8.4.2. Fluid-Solid Interface

The fluid-solid interface defines the interface between the fluid in the Fluid system and the solid in the
Structural system. This interface is defined on regions in the structural model. Data is exchanged across
this interface during the execution of the simulation.
1.

In the Mechanical application, expand Project > Model and right-click Transient in the tree view and
select Insert > Fluid Solid Interface from the shortcut menu.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

493

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

2.

Using the same face-selection procedure described earlier in Fixed Support (p. 493), select the three faces
of the geometry that form the interface between the structural model and the fluid model (low-x, highy and high-x faces) by holding down Ctrl to select multiple faces.
Note that this load (fluid-solid interface) is automatically given an interface number of 1.

23.8.4.3. Pressure Load

The pressure load provides the initial additional pressure of 100 [Pa] for the first 0.5 seconds of the
simulation. It is defined using a step function.
1.

In the Mechanical application, expand Project > Model and right-click Transient in the tree view and
select Insert > Pressure from the shortcut menu.

2.

Select the low-x face for Geometry and click Apply.

3.

In the details view, select Magnitude, and using the arrow that appears, select Tabular data.

4.

Under Tabular Data at the bottom right of the Mechanical application window, set a pressure of 100 in
the table row corresponding to a time of 0.

Note
Do not type in units while entering the tabular data. The units for time and pressure in
this table are the global units of [s] and [Pa], respectively.

5.

You now need to add two new rows to the table. This can be done by typing the new time and pressure
data into the empty row at the bottom of the table, and rows will be automatically re-ordered based on
the time value. Enter a pressure of 100 for a time value of 0.499, and a pressure of 0 for a time value of
0.5.

This gives a step function for pressure that can be seen in the chart to the left of the table.
The settings for structural physics are now complete. Save these settings by selecting File > Save Project
from the main menu, and select File > Close Mechanical to close the Mechanical application and return
to the Project Schematic.

23.9. Completing the Setup for the Structural System

On the Project Schematic, the Setup cell in the Structural system appears in an update-required state.
This section describes how to update the Setup cell in the Structural system.
1.

494

In the Structural system, right-click the Setup cell and select Update from the shortcut menu.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Creating Named Selections on the Fluid Body

The status of the Setup cell changes to up-to-date. Now all cells in the Structural system should
appear in an up-to-date state.
2.

Now from the main menu, select File > Save to save the project.

This completes the setup for the Structural system. In the next section, the Fluid system will be set up.
As the Geometry cell is already up to date for both the Solid and Fluid systems, the next section begins
with the setup of Mesh cell. Before generating mesh for the Fluid system, geometry faces will be grouped
by creating Named Selections in the Meshing application as discussed in the next section.

23.10. Creating Named Selections on the Fluid Body

This section describes how to group geometry faces using Named Selections in the Meshing application.
Later, when a mesh is generated from the model containing Named Selections, the grouped geometry
faces are retained in the mesh and are accessible from within ANSYS CFX in the form of Regions.
1.

On the Project Schematic, right-click the Mesh cell in the Fluid system and select Edit to open the model
in the Meshing application.

2.

In the Meshing application, expand Project > Model > Geometry in the tree view.
Two items, Fluid and Solid, appear under the Geometry tree object.

3.

Right-click the Solid body and select Suppress Body from the shortcut menu.
The Solid body becomes suppressed and its status changes to an x mark.

4.

In the graphics window, rotate the geometry using the Rotate

geometry is visible, then select Face

button so that the high-z face of the

and click the high-z face.

5.

Right-click in the viewer and select Create Named Selection.

6.

Type in Sym1 for the name of the selection group and click OK.

7.

Following the same procedure, create Sym2 by selecting the low-z face.

8.

Finally, create a Named Selection named Interface, selecting the three faces that make contact with
the solid geometry (the plate).

Note
Hold the Ctrl key to select multiple faces.

This finishes the creation of Named Selections on the Fluid body. Do not close the Meshing application
yet; the tutorial continues to set up mesh settings and generate a mesh for the Fluid system in the next
section.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

495

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

23.11. Generating the Mesh for the Fluid System

1.

In the tree view, ensure that the Project > Model > Mesh branch does not contain any objects. Otherwise,
right-click such objects and select Delete from the shortcut menu.

2.

Ensure Mesh is selected in the tree view.

The details of Mesh appear in the details view below the tree view.

3.

In the details view, set Sizing > Use Advanced Size Function to Off.

4.

In the details view, set Sizing > Relevance Center to Medium.

This controls the grid resolution of the mesh.

5.

Now in the tree view, right-click Mesh and select Insert > Method from the shortcut menu.
Automatic Method is added to the Mesh branch in the tree view. In the details view, Apply and
Cancel buttons appear next to the Geometry property.

6.

Click anywhere on the geometry in the viewer to select the Fluid body.

7.

In the details view, click Apply (for the Geometry property).

Notice in the details view that Scope > Geometry is now set to 1 Body.

8.

In the details view, set the following mesh settings in the following order:
i.

Set Definition > Method to Sweep.

ii. Set Free Face Mesh Type to All Tri.

iii. Set Sweep Num Divs to 1.
9.

Now in the tree view, right-click Mesh and select Update from the shortcut menu.
The mesh is generated.

10. This finishes the mesh generation for the Fluid system. From the main menu, select File > Save Project
to save these changes to the project, and then select File > Close Meshing to return to the Project
Schematic.

23.12. Defining the Physics and ANSYS Multi-field Settings in ANSYS CFXPre
This section describes the step-by-step definition of the flow physics and ANSYS Multi-field settings in
the following sections:
23.12.1. Setting the Analysis Type
23.12.2. Creating the Fluid
23.12.3. Creating the Domain
23.12.4. Creating the Boundaries
23.12.5. Setting Initial Values
23.12.6. Setting Solver Control

496

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Physics and ANSYS Multi-field Settings in ANSYS CFX-Pre

23.12.7. Setting Output Control

23.12.1. Setting the Analysis Type

A transient ANSYS Multi-field run executes as a series of time steps. In ANSYS CFX-Pre, the Analysis
Type tab is used to enable both an ANSYS Multi-field run and to specify time-related settings for the
coupled solver run. ANSYS CFX-Pre reads the ANSYS input file, which is automatically passed by ANSYS
Workbench, in order to determine fluid-solid interfaces created in the Mechanical application.

Note
When ANSYS CFX-Pre is started, two errors will be displayed; these can be ignored because
they will be fixed in the next steps of the tutorial.
1.

On the Project Schematic, double-click the Setup cell in the Fluid system to launch the ANSYS CFX-Pre
application.

2.

In ANSYS CFX-Pre, right-click Analysis Type in the Outline tree view and select Edit.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

ANSYS Multifield Coupling

> Option

Value

ANSYS
MultiField

Coupling Time Control

> Coupling Time Duration
> Option

Total Time

Coupling Time Control

> Coupling Time Duration
> Total Time

5 [s]

Coupling Time Control

> Coupling Time Steps
> Option

Timesteps

Coupling Time Control

> Coupling Time Steps
> Timesteps

0.1 [s]

Analysis Type
> Option

Transient

Analysis Type

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

497

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

Tab

Setting

Value

> Time Duration

> Option

Coupling
Time
Duration

[a]

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Option

Coupling
Timesteps

[a]

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Option

Coupling
Initial Time
[a]

a. Once the time steps and time duration are specified for the ANSYS Multi-field
run (coupling run), CFX automatically picks up these settings and it is not possible
to set the time step and time duration independently. Hence the only option
available for Time Duration is Coupling Time Duration, and similarly for
the related settings Time Step and Initial Time.

4.

Click OK.

23.12.2. Creating the Fluid

A custom fluid is created with user-specified properties.
1.

Click Material

and set the name of the material to Fluid.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Option

Pure
Substance

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic State
> Thermodynamic State
Material
Properties

Liquid

Equation of State
> Molar Mass

1 [kg
kmol^-1]

[a]

Equation of State

498

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Physics and ANSYS Multi-field Settings in ANSYS CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Density

1 [kg m^-3]
[b]

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity

(Selected)

Transport Properties
> Dynamic Viscosity
> Dynamic Viscosity

0.2 [Pa s]

[b]

a. The molar mass is not used for this tutorial setup and has been set only for the
completeness of the fluid property.
b. Once the time steps and time duration are specified for the ANSYS Multi-field
run (coupling run), CFX automatically picks up these settings and it is not possible
to set the time step and time duration independently. Hence the only option
available for Time Duration is Coupling Time Duration, and similarly for
the related settings Time Step and Initial Time.

3.

Click OK.

23.12.3. Creating the Domain

In order to enable ANSYS Solver to communicate mesh displacements to CFX-Solver, mesh motion must
be activated in CFX.
1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on. A domain named Default Domain should now appear under the Simulation branch.

2.

Edit Default Domain and configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Fluid

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

[a]

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

499

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Regions of
Motion
Specified

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Displacement Rel. To

Previous Mesh

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Option

Displacement
Diffusion

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Mesh Stiffness
> Option

Increase near
Small Volumes

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Mesh Stiffness
> Model Exponent

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Mesh Stiffness
> Reference Volume
> Option
Fluid Models

Mean Control
Volume

Heat Transfer
> Option

None

Turbulence

500

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Physics and ANSYS Multi-field Settings in ANSYS CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

None (Laminar)

a. The reference pressure does not affect this simulation.

3.

Click OK.

23.12.4. Creating the Boundaries

In addition to the symmetry conditions, this tutorial requires boundary conditions for an external
boundary resulting from the fluid-solid interface as outlined below:
Fluid Solid External Boundary (p. 501)
Symmetry Boundaries (p. 502)

23.12.4.1. Fluid Solid External Boundary

The interface between ANSYS and CFX is considered as an external boundary in CFX-Solver with its
mesh displacement being defined by the ANSYS Multi-field coupling process. This section outlines the
steps to create a Boundary Type for CFX and specify a matching ANSYS interface. This specification
sets up CFX-Solver to pass forces to ANSYS solver on this boundary, and to receive the mesh displacement
calculations from the ANSYS solver under the effect of forces from CFX or other defined loads.
When an ANSYS Multi-field specification is being made in CFX-Pre, it is necessary to provide the name
and number of the matching Fluid Solid Interface that was created in the Mechanical application, in
the form of FSIN_#, where # is the interface number that was created in the Mechanical application.
Since the interface number in the Mechanical application was 1, the name in question is FSIN_1. (If
the interface number had been 2, then the name would have been FSIN_2, and so on.)
On this boundary, CFX will send ANSYS the forces on the interface, and ANSYS will send back the total
mesh displacement it calculates given the forces passed from CFX and the other defined loads.
1.

Create a new boundary named Interface.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Interface

Boundary
Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

ANSYS
MultiField

Mesh Motion
> Receive From ANSYS

Total Mesh
Displacement

Mesh Motion
> ANSYS Interface

FSIN_1

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

501

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

Tab

Setting

Value

Mesh Motion
> Send to ANSYS

3.

Total Force

Click OK.

23.12.4.2. Symmetry Boundaries

Since a 2D representation of the flow field is being modeled (using a 3D mesh with one element
thickness in the Z direction) symmetry boundaries will be created on the low and high Z 2D regions of
the mesh.
1.

Create a new boundary named Sym1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

Sym1

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named Sym2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

6.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

Sym2

Click OK.

23.12.5. Setting Initial Values

Since a transient simulation is being modeled, initial values are required for all variables.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Global Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity

Components
>U

502

0 [m s^-1]

[a]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Physics and ANSYS Multi-field Settings in ANSYS CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

[a]

0 [m s^-1]

[a]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>W
Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

[a]

a. These settings ensure that the fluid is at rest initially, and that the flow is
generated by the initial motion of the plate.

3.

Click OK.

23.12.6. Setting Solver Control

Various ANSYS Multi-field settings are contained under Solver Control under the External Coupling
tab. Most of these settings do not need to be changed for this simulation.
Within each time step, a series of coupling or stagger iterations are performed to ensure that CFX-Solver,
the Mechanical application and the data exchanged between the two solvers are all consistent. Within
each stagger iteration, the Mechanical application and CFX-Solver both run once each, but which one
runs first is a user-specifiable setting. In general, it is slightly more efficient to choose the solver that
drives the simulation to run first. In this case, the simulation is being driven by the initial pressure applied
in the Mechanical application, so the Mechanical application is set to solve before CFX-Solver within
each stagger iteration.
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Transient Scheme
> Option

Value

Second Order
Backward Euler

Convergence Control
> Max. Coeff. Loops

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

503

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

Tab

Setting

External
Coupling

Coupling Step Control

Value

> Solution Sequence Control

> Solve ANSYS Fields

Before CFX
Fields

Coupling Data Transfer Control

> Ansys Variable

FZ

Coupling Data Transfer Control

> Ansys Variable
> FZ

(Selected)

Coupling Data Transfer Control

> Ansys Variable
> FZ
> Convergence Target

(Selected)

Coupling Data Transfer Control

> Ansys Variable
> FZ
> Convergence Target
> Convergence Target

[a]

Coupling Data Transfer Control

> Ansys Variable

UZ

Coupling Data Transfer Control

> Ansys Variable
> UZ

(Selected)

Coupling Data Transfer Control

> Ansys Variable
> UZ
> Convergence Target

(Selected)

Coupling Data Transfer Control

> Ansys Variable
> UZ

504

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Physics and ANSYS Multi-field Settings in ANSYS CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Convergence Target

> Convergence Target

[a]

a. Since the Z component of both the force (FZ) and resultant displacement (UZ)
are negligible for this 2D case, their convergence targets are set to large values
in order to negate their influence when determining load convergence.

3.

Click OK.

23.12.7. Setting Output Control

This step sets up transient results files to be written at set intervals.
1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

In the Transient Results tree view, click Add new item

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

, accept the default name and click OK.

Setting

Value

Option

Selected Variables

Output Variable List

Pressure, Total Mesh

Displacement,
Velocity

Output Frequency
> Option

Every Coupling Step

[a]

a. This setting writes a transient results file every multi-field time

step.

5.

Click the Monitor tab.

6.

Select Monitor Objects.

7.

Under Monitor Points and Expressions:

a.

Click Add new item

and accept the default name.

b.

Set Option to Cartesian Coordinates.

c.

Set Output Variables List to Total Mesh Displacement X.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

505

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

d.

Set Cartesian Coordinates to [0, 1, 0].

This monitor point measures the x-component of the total mesh displacement at the top of
the plate.

8.

Click OK.

The settings for fluid physics are now complete. From the main menu, select File > Save Project to
save these changes to the project, and select File > Close CFX-Pre to close ANSYS CFX-Pre and return
to the Project Schematic.

23.13. Obtaining a Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

The execution of an ANSYS Multi-field simulation requires both the CFX and ANSYS solvers to be running
and communicating with each other. This section outlines the steps to launch both solvers and monitor
the output using ANSYS CFX-Solver Manager.
1.

On the Project Schematic, double-click the Solution cell in the Fluid system to launch the ANSYS CFXSolver Manager application.
ANSYS Workbench generates the CFX-Solver input file and passes it to ANSYS CFX-Solver Manager.

2.

In ANSYS CFX-Solver Manager, ensure that Define Run dialog box is displayed.
On the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is set automatically by ANSYS Workbench. The
CFX-Solver input file contains settings for an ANSYS Multi-field simulation, therefore MultiField
tab appears on the Define Run dialog box.

3.

On the MultiField tab, ANSYS Input File is set automatically by ANSYS Workbench.

4.

On Linux systems, you may need to manually specify where the ANSYS installation is if it is not in the
default location. In this case, you must provide the path to the v170/ansys directory.

5.

Click Start Run.

Note
On the Run Definition tab, the Initialization Option field is set to Current Solution Data
(if possible), its default setting. These runs use the results from any previous solution run
as initial values for a subsequent update. This may not be desirable when restarting transient
runs, which typically need to start from the initial conditions specified in the Setup cell.
The run begins by some initial processing of the ANSYS Multi-field input which results in the creation
of a file containing the necessary multi-field commands for ANSYS, and then the ANSYS Solver is started.
The CFX Solver is then started in such a way that it knows how to communicate with the ANSYS Solver.
After the run is under way, two new plots appear in ANSYS CFX-Solver Manager:
ANSYS Field Solver (Structural) This plot is produced only when the solid physics is set to use large displacements or when other non-linear analyses are performed. It shows convergence of the ANSYS Solver.
Full details of the quantities are described in the ANSYS user documentation. In general, the CRIT quantities
are the convergence criteria for each relevant variable, and the L2 quantities represent the L2 Norm of the
relevant variable. For convergence, the L2 Norm should be below the criteria. The X axis of the plot is the
506

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing Results in CFD-Post

cumulative iteration number for ANSYS, which does not correspond to either time steps or stagger iterations.
Several ANSYS iterations will be performed for each time step, depending on how quickly ANSYS converges.
You will usually see a somewhat spiky plot, as each quantity will be unconverged at the start of each time
step, and then convergence will improve.
ANSYS Interface Loads (Structural) This plot shows the convergence for each quantity that is part of the
data exchanged between the CFX and ANSYS Solvers. Six lines appear, corresponding to three force components (FX, FY, and FZ) and three displacement components (UX, UY, and UZ). Each quantity is converged
when the plot shows a negative value. The X axis of the plot corresponds to the cumulative number of
stagger iterations (coupling iterations) and there are several of these for every time step. Again, a spiky plot
is expected as the quantities will not be converged at the start of a time step.
The ANSYS out file is displayed in ANSYS CFX-Solver Manager as an extra tab. Similar to the CFX out
file, this is a text file recording output from ANSYS as the solution progresses.
1.

Click the User Points tab and watch how the top of the plate displaces as the solution develops.
When the solver run has finished, a completion message appears in a dialog box.

2.

Click OK.

From the main menu, select File > Close CFX-Solver Manager to close ANSYS CFX-Solver Manager
and return to the Project Schematic.

23.14. Viewing Results in CFD-Post

On the Project Schematic, double-click the Results cell in the Fluid system to launch the CFD-Post application.
Being an ANSYS Multi-field run, both the CFX and ANSYS results files will be opened up in CFD-Post.

23.14.1. Plotting Results on the Solid

When CFD-Post reads an ANSYS results file, all the ANSYS variables are available to plot on the solid,
including stresses and strains. The mesh regions available for plots by default are limited to the full
boundary of the solid, plus certain named regions that are automatically created when particular types
of load are added in Simulation. For example, any Fluid-Solid Interface will have a corresponding mesh
region with a name such as FSIN 1. In this case, there is also a named region corresponding to the
location of the fixed support, but in general pressure loads do not result in a named region.
You can add extra mesh regions for plotting by creating named selections in Simulation - see the Simulation product documentation for more details. Note that the named selection must have a name that
contains only English letters, numbers and underscores for the named mesh region to be successfully
created.
Note that when CFD-Post loads an ANSYS results file, the true global range for each variable is not
automatically calculated, as this would add a substantial amount of time depending on how long it
takes to load such a file (you can turn on this calculation using Edit > Options and using the Pre-calculate variable global ranges setting under CFD-Post > Files). When the global range is first used for
plotting a variable, it is calculated as the range within the current time step. As subsequent time steps
are loaded into CFD-Post, the Global Range is extended each time variable values are found outside
the previous Global Range.
1.

Turn on the visibility of ANSYS at 5s > Default Domain > Default Boundary.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

507

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

2.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Z.

3.

Zoom into the plate to see it clearly.

4.

Edit Default Boundary.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Von Mises Stress

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Select Tools > Timestep Selector.

The Timestep Selector dialog box appears.
Notice that a separate list of time steps is available for each results file loaded, although for this
case the lists are the same. By default, Sync Cases is set to By Time Value, which means that
each time you change the time step for one results file, CFD-Post will automatically load the results
corresponding to the same time value for all other results files.

8.

Set Match to Nearest Available.

9.

Change to a time value of 0.8 [s] and click Apply.

The corresponding transient results are loaded and you can see the mesh move in both the CFX and
ANSYS regions.
1.

Turn off the visibility of ANSYS at 0.8s > Default Domain > Default Boundary.

2.

Create a contour plot that has Locations set to:

ANSYS > Default Boundary
Fluid > Sym2
and Variable set to Total Mesh Displacement.

3.

Using the Timestep Selector dialog box, load time value 1 [s].
This is the time at which the maximum total mesh displacement occurs.

This verifies that the contours of Total Mesh Displacement are continuous through both the
ANSYS and CFX regions.
Many FSI cases will have only relatively small mesh displacements, which can make visualization of the
mesh displacement difficult. CFD-Post enables you to visually magnify the mesh deformation for ease
of viewing such displacements. Although it is not strictly necessary for this case, which has mesh displacements that are easily visible unmagnified, this is illustrated by the next few instructions.
1.

508

Using the Timestep Selector dialog box, load time value 0.1 [s].

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing Results in CFD-Post

2.

Right-click the viewer background and select Deformation > Auto.

Notice that the mesh displacements are now exaggerated. The Auto setting is calculated to make
the largest mesh displacement a fixed percentage of the domain size.

3.

Right-click and select Deformation > True Scale.

The mesh displacements return to their true scale

23.14.2. Creating an Animation

1.

Using the Timestep Selector dialog box, ensure that the time value of 0.1 [s] is loaded.

2.

Turn off the visibility of Contour 1.

3.

Turn on the visibility of Sym2.

4.

Edit Sym2

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Pressure

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Create a vector plot with Locations set to Sym1, Variable set to Velocity, Color set to Constant,
and a color of black.

8.

Turn on the visibility of ANSYS at 0.1s > Default Domain > Default Boundary.

9.

Set Color to blue.

10. Click Animation

The Animation dialog box appears.

11. Select Keyframe Animation.
12. In the Animation dialog box:
a.

Click New

to create KeyframeNo1.

b.

Highlight KeyframeNo1, then change # of Frames to 48.

c.

Load the last time step (50) using the Timestep Selector dialog box.

d.

Click New

to create KeyframeNo2.

The # of Frames parameter has no effect for the last keyframe, so leave it at the default value.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

509

Oscillating Plate with Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction

e.

Select Save Movie.

f.

Set Format to MPEG1.

g.

Click Browse

next to Save Movie to set a path and file name for the movie file.

If the file path is not given, the file will be saved in the directory from which CFD-Post was
launched.
h.

Click Save.
The movie file name (including path) will be set, but the movie will not be created yet.

i.

If frame 1 is not loaded (shown in the F: field in the middle of the Animation dialog box), click To
Beginning

to load it.

Wait for CFD-Post to finish loading the objects for this frame before proceeding.
j.

Click Play the animation

The movie will be created as the animation proceeds. This will be slow, since a time step must
be loaded and objects must be created for each frame. To view the movie file, you need to
use a viewer that supports the MPEG format.
k.

Save the results by selecting File > Save Project from the main menu.

When you are finished viewing results in CFD-Post, return to the Project Schematic and select File >
Exit to exit from ANSYS Workbench.

510

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 24: Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer

DesignXplorer is a Workbench component that you can use to examine the effect of changing parameters
in a system. In this example, you will see how changing the geometry and physics of a static mixer
changes the effectiveness of the mixing of water at two different temperatures. The measure of the
mixing effectiveness will be the output temperature range.
This tutorial includes:
24.1.Tutorial Features
24.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
24.3. Setting Up ANSYS Workbench
24.4. Creating the Project
24.5. Creating the Geometry in DesignModeler
24.6. Creating the Mesh
24.7. Setting up the Case with CFX-Pre
24.8. Setting the Output Parameter in CFD-Post
24.9. Investigating the Impact of Changing Design Parameters Manually
24.10. Using Design of Experiments
24.11. Viewing the Response Surface
24.12. Viewing the Optimization

Note
Some of the instructions in this tutorial assume that you have sufficient licensing to have
multiple applications open. If you do not have sufficient licensing, you may not be able to
keep as many of the applications open as this tutorial suggests. In this case, simply close the
applications as you finish with them.

24.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Creating a geometry in DesignModeler and creating a mesh.
Using General mode in CFX-Pre to set up a problem.
Using design points to manually vary characteristics of the problem to see how you can improve the mixing.
Using DesignXplorer to vary characteristics of the problem programmatically to find an optimal design.
Component
DesignModeler

Feature

Details
Geometry Creation
Named Selections

Meshing
Application

Mesh Creation

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

511

Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer

Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall: No-Slip
Wall: Adiabatic

Timescale

Physical Timescale

Expressions

Workbench input parameter

CFD-Post

Expressions

Workbench output
parameter

Parameters

Design Points

Manual changes

DesignXplorer

Response Surface
Optimization

Design of Experiments
Response Surface
Optimization

24.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial simulates a static mixer consisting of two inlet pipes delivering water into a mixing vessel;
the water exits through an outlet pipe. A general workflow is established for analyzing the flow of fluid
into and out of a mixer.
Initially, water enters through both pipes at the same rate but at different temperatures. The first inlet
has a mass flow rate that has an initial value of 1500 kg/s and a temperature of 315 K. The second inlet
also has a mass flow rate that has an initial value of 1500 kg/s, but at a temperature of 285 K. The radius
of the mixer is 2 m.
Your goal in this tutorial is to understand how to use Design Points and DesignXplorer to optimize the
amount of mixing of the water when it exits the static mixer, as measured by the distribution of the
waters temperature at the outlet.

512

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Creating the Project

Figure 24.1: Static Mixer with 2 Inlet Pipes and 1 Outlet Pipe

24.3. Setting Up ANSYS Workbench

Before you begin using ANSYS Workbench, you have to configure the Geometry Import option settings
for use with this tutorial:
1.

Launch ANSYS Workbench.

2.

From the ANSYS Workbench menu bar, select Tools > Options. The Options configuration dialog box
appears.

3.

In the Options configuration dialog box, select Geometry Import.

a.

Ensure Parameters is selected and remove the "DS" from Filtering Prefixes and Suffixes.

b.

Select Named Selections and remove the name "NS" from Filtering Prefixes.

c.

Click OK.

24.4. Creating the Project

To create the project, you save an empty project:
1.

From the ANSYS Workbench menu bar, select File > Save As and save the project as StaticMixer
DX.wbpj in the directory of your choice.

2.

From Toolbox > Analysis Systems, drag the Fluid Flow (CFX) system onto the Project Schematic.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

513

Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer

24.5. Creating the Geometry in DesignModeler

Now you can create a geometry by using DesignModeler:
1.

In the Fluid Flow (CFX) system, right-click Geometry and select New Geometry.
DesignModeler starts.

2.

If DesignModeler displays a dialog box for selecting the required length unit, select Meter as the required
length unit and click OK.
Note that this dialog box will not appear if you have previously set a default unit of measurement.

24.5.1. Creating the Solid

You create geometry in DesignModeler by creating two-dimensional sketches and extruding, revolving,
sweeping, or lofting these to add or remove material. To create the main body of the static mixer, you
will draw a sketch of a cross-section and revolve it.
1.

In the Tree Outline, click ZXPlane.

Each sketch is created in a plane. By selecting ZXPlane before creating a sketch, you ensure that
the sketch you are about to create is based on the ZX plane.

2.

Click New Sketch

on the Active Plane/Sketch toolbar, which is located above the Graphics window.

3.

In the Tree Outline, click Sketch1.

4.

Select the Sketching tab (below the Tree Outline) to view the available sketching toolboxes.

24.5.1.1. Setting Up the Grid

Before starting your sketch, set up a grid on the plane in which you will draw the sketch. The grid facilitates the precise positioning of points (when Snap is selected).
1.

Click Settings (in the Sketching tab) to open the Settings toolbox.

2.

Click Grid and select Show in 2D and Snap.

3.

Click Major Grid Spacing and set it to 1.

4.

Click Minor-Steps per Major and set it to 2.

5.

To see the effect of changing Minor-Steps per Major, press and hold the right mouse button above and
to the left of the plane center in the Graphics window, then drag the mouse down and right to make a
box around the plane center.
When you release the mouse button, the model is magnified to show the selected area.

514

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Creating the Geometry in DesignModeler

You now have a grid of squares with the smallest squares being 50 cm across. Because snap is selected,
you can select only points that are on this grid to build your geometry. Using snap can help you to
position objects correctly.
The triad at the center of the grid indicates the local coordinate frame. The color of the arrow indicates
the local axis: red for X, green for Y, and blue for Z.

24.5.1.2. Creating the Basic Geometry

Start by creating the main body of the mixer:
1.

From the Sketching tab, select the Draw toolbox.

2.

Click Polyline and then create the shape shown below as follows:
a.

Click the grid in the position where one of the points from the shape must be placed (it does not
matter which point, but a suggested order is given in the graphic below).

b.

Click each successive point to make the shape.

If at any time you click the wrong place, right-click over the Graphics window and select Back
from the shortcut menu to undo the last point selection.

c.

To close the polyline after selecting the last point, right-click and select Closed End from the shortcut
menu.

Information about the new sketch, Sketch1, appears in the details view. Note that the longest straight
line (4 m long) in the diagram below is along the local X axis (located at Y = 0 m). The numbers and
letters in the image below are added here for your convenience but do not appear in the software.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

515

Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer

24.5.1.3. Revolving the Sketch

You will now create the main body of the mixer by revolving the new sketch around the local X axis.
1.

Click Revolve

from the toolbar above the Graphics window.

Details of the Revolve feature are shown in the details view at the bottom left of the window.
2.

Leave the name of the Revolve feature at its default value: Revolve1.

3.

Click Apply in the details view under Details of Revolve1 > Geometry to select Sketch1 as the geometry
to be revolved.
The Geometry specifies which sketch is to be revolved.

4.

In the Details View you should see Apply and Cancel buttons next to the Axis property; if those buttons
are not displayed, double-click the word Axis.

5.

In the Graphics window, click the grid line that is aligned with the local X axis (the local X axis, represented
by a red arrow, is parallel to the global Z axis in this case), then click Apply in the Details View.

6.

Leave Operation set to Add Material because you need to create a solid (which will eventually represent
a fluid region).

7.

Ensure that Angle is set to 360 and leave the other settings at their defaults.

8.

Click Generate

to activate the Revolve operation.

You can select this from the 3D Features Toolbar, from the shortcut menu by right-clicking in the
Graphics window, or from the shortcut menu by right-clicking the Revolve1 object in the Tree
Outline.
After generation, you should find that you have a solid as shown below.

516

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Creating the Geometry in DesignModeler

24.5.1.4. Create the First Inlet Pipe

To create the inlet pipes, you will create two sketches and extrude them. For clear viewing of the grid
during sketching, you will hide the previously created geometry.
1.

In the Tree Outline, click the plus sign next to 1 Part, 1 Body to expand the tree structure.

2.

Right-click Solid and select Hide Body.

3.

Select ZXPlane in the Tree Outline.

4.

Click New Sketch

5.

From the Sketching tab, select the Draw toolbox.

6.

Click Circle and then create the circle shown below as follows:

7.

a.

Click and hold the left mouse button at the center of the circle.

b.

While still holding the mouse button, drag the mouse to set the radius.

c.

Release the mouse button.

Select the Dimensions toolbox, select General, click the circle in the sketch, then click near the circle to
set a dimension. In the Details View, select the check box beside D1. When prompted, rename the parameter to inDia and click OK. This dimension will be a parameter that is modified in DesignXplorer.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

517

Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer

24.5.1.4.1. Extrude the First Side-pipe

To create the first side-pipe extrude the sketch:
1.

Click Extrude

from the 3D Features toolbar, located above the Graphics window.

2.

In the Details View, change Direction to Reversed to reverse the direction of the extrusion (that is, click
the word Normal, then from the drop-down menu select Reversed).

3.

Change Depth to 3 (meters) and press Enter to set this value.

All other settings should remain at their default values. Note that the Operation property is set to
Add Material, which indicates that material is to be added to the existing solid.

4.

Click Generate

to perform the extrusion.

Initially, you will not see the geometry.

24.5.1.4.2. Make the Solid Visible

To see the result of the previous operation, make the solid visible:
1.

In the Tree Outline, right-click Solid and select Show Body.

2.

Click and hold the middle mouse button over the middle of the Graphics window and drag the mouse
to rotate the model. The solid should be similar to the one shown below.

518

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Creating the Geometry in DesignModeler

3.

Right-click Solid and select Hide Body.

24.5.1.5. Create the Second Inlet Pipe

You will create the second inlet so that the relative angle between the two inlets is controlled parametrically, enabling you to evaluate the effects of different relative inlet angles:
1.

In the Tree Outline, select ZXPlane.

2.

In the toolbar, click New Plane

The new plane (Plane4) appears in the Tree Outline.

3.

In the Details View, click beside Transform 1 (RMB) and choose the axis about which you want to rotate
the inlet: Rotate about X.

4.

Select the check box for the FD1, Value 1 property then, when prompted, set the name to in2Angle
and click OK.
This makes the angle of rotation of this plane a design parameter.

5.

Click Generate

6.

In the Tree Outline click Plane4.

7.

Create a new sketch (Sketch3) based on Plane4 by clicking New Sketch

8.

Select the Sketching tab.

9.

Click Settings to open the Settings toolbox.

10. Click Grid and select Show in 2D and Snap.

11. Click Major Grid Spacing and set it to 1.
12. Click Minor-Steps per Major and set it to 2.
13. Right-click over the Graphics window and select Isometric View to put the sketch into a sensible viewing
position.
14. Zoom in, if required, to see the level of detail in the image below.
15. From the Draw Toolbox, select Circle and create a circle as shown below:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

519

Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer

16. Select the Dimensions toolbox, click General, click the circle in the sketch, then click near the circle to
set a dimension.
17. In the Details View, select the check box for the D1 property then, when prompted, set the name to
inDia and click OK.
18. Click Extrude

19. In the Details View, ensure Direction is set to Normal in order to extrude in the same direction as the
plane normal.
20. Ensure that Depth is set to 3 (meters).
All other settings should remain at their default values.
21. Click Generate

to perform the extrusion.

22. Right-click Solid in the Tree Outline and select Show Body.
The geometry is now complete.

24.5.1.6. Create Named Selections

Named selections enable you to specify and control like-grouped items. Here, you will create named
selections so that you can specify boundary conditions in CFX-Pre for these specific regions.

Note
The Graphics window must be in viewing mode for you to be able to orient the geometry
and the Graphics window must be in "select mode" for you to be able to select a boundary
in the geometry. You set viewing mode or select mode by clicking the icons in the toolbar:

520

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Creating the Geometry in DesignModeler

Create named selections as follows:

1.

In viewing mode, orient the static mixer so that you can see the inlet that has the lowest value of (global)
Y-coordinate.
You can rotate the mixer by holding down the middle-mouse button (or the mouse scroll wheel)
while moving the mouse.

2.

In select mode, with Selection Filter: Model Faces (3D)

active (in the toolbar), click the inlet face to select
it, then right-click the inlet and select Named Selection.

3.

In the Details View, click Apply.

4.

Set Named Selection to in1.

5.

Click Generate

6.

In viewing mode, orient the static mixer so that you can see the inlet that has the highest value of (global)
Y-coordinate.

7.

In select mode, click the inlet face to select it, then right-click the inlet and select Named Selection.

8.

In the Details View, click Apply.

9.

Set Named Selection to in2.

10. Click Generate

11. In viewing mode, orient the static mixer so that you can see the outlet (the face with the lowest value of
(global) Z-coordinate).
12. In select mode, click the outlet face to select it, then right-click the outlet and select Named Selection.
13. In the Details View, click Apply.
14. Set Named Selection to out.
15. Click Generate

16. Click Save on the ANSYS Workbench toolbar.

This enables you to recover the work that you have performed to this point if needed (until the
next time you save the tutorial).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

521

Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer

24.6. Creating the Mesh

To create the mesh:
1.

In the Project Schematic view, right-click the Mesh cell and select Edit.
The Meshing application appears.

2.

Right-click Project > Model (A3) > Mesh and select Generate Mesh.

3.

After the mesh has been produced, return to the Project Schematic, right-click the Mesh cell, and select
Update.

4.

In the Meshing application, select File > Close Meshing.

24.7. Setting up the Case with CFX-Pre

Now that the mesh has been created, you can use CFX-Pre to define the simulation. To set up the case
with CFX-Pre:
1.

Double-click the Setup cell. CFX-Pre appears with the mesh file loaded.

2.

In CFX-Pre, create an expression named inMassFlow:

522

a.

In the Outline tree view, expand Expressions, Functions and Variables and right-click Expression
and select Insert > Expression.

b.

Give the new expression the name: inMassFlow

c.

In the Definition area, type: 1500 [kg s^-1]

d.

Click Apply.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Setting up the Case with CFX-Pre

3.

Right-click inMassFlow in the Expressions area and select Use as Workbench Input Parameter. A small
P with a right-pointing arrow appears on the expressions icon.

4.

Define the characteristics of the domain:

a.

Click the Outline tab.

b.

Double-click Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > Default Domain to open it for editing.

c.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Fluid 1
> Material

Water

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure
Fluids Models

Heat Transfer
> Option

d.
5.

1 [atm]

Thermal Energy

Click OK.

Create the first inlet boundary:

a.

From the CFX-Pre menu bar, select Insert > Boundary.

b.

In the Insert Boundary dialog box, name the new boundary in1 and click OK.

c.

Configure the following setting(s) of in1:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

523

Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

in1

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Mass Flow Rate

Mass Flow Rate

inMassFlow

[a]

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

315 [K]

a. To enter this expression name into the Mass Flow Rate field, click in the blank
field, click the Enter Expression
icon that appears, right-click in the blank
field, then select the inMassFlow expression that appears.

d.
6.

Click OK.

Create the second inlet boundary:

a.

From the CFX-Pre menu bar, select Insert > Boundary.

b.

In the Insert Boundary dialog box, name the new boundary in2 and click OK.

c.

Configure the following setting(s) of in2:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

in2

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Mass Flow Rate

Mass Flow Rate

inMassFlow

[a]

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

285 [K]

a. To enter this expression name into the Mass Flow Rate field, click in the blank
field, click the Enter Expression
icon that appears, right-click in the blank
field, then select the inMassFlow expression that appears.

d.
7.

524

Click OK.

Create the outlet boundary:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Setting up the Case with CFX-Pre

a.

From the CFX-Pre menu bar, select Insert > Boundary.

b.

In the Insert Boundary dialog box, name the new boundary out and click OK.

c.

Configure the following setting(s) of out:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

out

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

d.

0 [Pa]

Click OK.
CFX-Pre and ANSYS Workbench both update automatically. The three boundary conditions
are displayed in the viewer as sets of arrows at the boundary surfaces. Inlet boundary arrows
are directed into the domain; outlet boundary arrows are directed out of the domain.

8.

Solver Control parameters control aspects of the numerical solution generation process. Set the solver
controls as follows:
a.

Click Solver Control

b.

On the Basic Settings tab, set Advection Scheme > Option to Upwind.
While an upwind advection scheme is less accurate than other advection schemes, it is also
more robust. This advection scheme is suitable for obtaining an initial set of results, but in
general should not be used to obtain final results.

c.

Set Convergence Control > Min. Iterations to 5.

This change is required because when the solver is restarted from a previous converged
solution for each design point, the solver may think the solution is converged after one or
two iterations and halt the solution prematurely if the default setting (1) is maintained.

d.

Set Convergence Control > Fluid Timescale Control > Timescale Control to Physical
Timescale and set the physical timescale value to 2 [s].
The time scale can be calculated automatically by the solver or set manually. The Automatic
option tends to be conservative, leading to reliable, but often slow, convergence. It is often
possible to accelerate convergence by applying a time scale factor or by choosing a manual
value that is more aggressive than the Automatic option. By selecting a physical time scale,
you obtain a convergence that is at least twice as fast as the Automatic option.

e.

Click OK.
CFX-Pre and ANSYS Workbench both update automatically.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

525

Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer

9.

In the Project Schematic view, right-click the Solution cell and select Update. CFX-Solver obtains a
solution.

10. When the Solution cell shows an up-to-date state, right-click the Results cell and select Refresh. When
the refresh is complete, right-click the Results cell again and select Edit. CFD-Post starts.

24.8. Setting the Output Parameter in CFD-Post

When CFD-Post starts, it displays the 3D Viewer and the Outline workspace.

You need to create an expression for the response parameter to be examined (Outlet Temperature)
called OutTempRange, which will be the maximum output temperature minus the minimum output
temperature:
1.

On the Expressions tab, right-click Expressions > New.

2.

Type OutTempRange and click OK.

3.

In the Definition area:

526

a.

Right-click Functions > CFD-Post > maxVal.

b.

With the cursor between the parentheses, right-click and select Variables > Temperature.

c.

Click after the @, then right-click and select Locations > out.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Investigating the Impact of Changing Design Parameters Manually

That specifies the maximum output temperature.
d.

Now, complete the expression so that it appears as follows:

maxVal(Temperature)@out - minVal(Temperature)@out

e.

Click Apply.
The new expression appears in the Expressions list. Note the value of the expression.

4.

In the Expressions list, right-click OutTempRange and select Use as Workbench Output Parameter. A
small P with a right-pointing arrow appears on the expressions icon.

5.

Repeat the steps above for a second expression called OutTempAve. This expression will be used to
monitor the output temperature. The overall output temperature is expected to be the average of the
two input temperatures, given that the incoming mass flows are equal. Define this expression:
massFlowAve(Temperature)@out

Be sure to also set this expression to Use as Workbench Output Parameter. When you click Apply
note the value of the expression.
6.

Click Save on the ANSYS Workbench toolbar to save the project.

7.

In CFD-Post, select File > Close CFD-Post.

24.9. Investigating the Impact of Changing Design Parameters Manually

Now you will manually change the values of some design parameters to see what effect each has on
the rate of mixing. These combinations of parameter values where you perform calculations are called
design points. As you make changes to parameters in ANSYS Workbench, CFX-Pre and ANSYS DesignModeler will reflect the current value automatically; ensure that those programs are open so that you
can see the changes take place. In particular, ensure that CFX-Pre has the Expressions view open.
1.

In the Project Schematic view, right-click Parameters (cell A7) and select Edit. A Parameters tab appears.

2.

Resize the ANSYS Workbench window to be larger.

Tip
If necessary, you can close the Toolbox view to gain more space. To restore it, select
View > Toolbox.

When you edit the Parameters cell (cell A7), the new views that appear under the Parameters tab are:
Outline of Schematic A7: Parameters, which lists the input and output parameters and their values (which
match the values observed in previous steps).
Table of Design Points, which lists one design point named Current. Ensure that this view is wide enough
to display the Retain column.
Now you will change the design parameter values from the Outline of Schematic A7: Parameters
view:
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

527

Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer

1.

Under the Parameters tab, in the Outline of Schematic A7: Parameters view, change the in2Angle
value from 0 to 45 and press Enter.

2.

Switch to the Project tab.

3.

In the Project Schematic view, right-click Geometry and select Update. Notice how the geometry changes
in ANSYS DesignModeler.

4.

In ANSYS Workbench, switch to the Parameters tab. Then in the Outline of Schematic A7: Parameters
view, change the in2Angle value from 45 back to 0 and press Enter.

5.

In the Project Schematic view, update Geometry. Again, notice how the geometry changes in ANSYS
DesignModeler.

6.

Switch to the Parameters tab. Then in the Outline of Schematic A7: Parameters view, change the inMassFlow value from 1500 to 1600 and press Enter. Notice how the value of the expression has changed
in the Expressions tree view in CFX-Pre; (the change is not reflected in the Expressions Details view unless
you refresh the contents of the tab, for example by hiding and reopening it).

7.

Under the Parameters tab, in the Outline of Schematic A7: Parameters view, change the inMassFlow
value from 1600 back to 1500 and press Enter.

You have modified design parameter values and returned each to its original value. In doing this, the
Outline of Schematic A7: Parameters view's values and the Table of Design Points view's values
have become out-of date. Right-click any cell in the Table of Design Points view's Current row and
select Update Selected Design Points. This process updates the project and all of the ANSYS Workbench
views. ANSYS Workbench may also close any open ANSYS CFX applications and run them in the background. When the update is complete, all of the results cells show current values and all of the cells
that display status are marked as being up-to-date.
Now, you will make changes to design parameters as design points. You will create three design points,
each of which will change the value of one parameter:
1.

Under the Parameters tab, in the Table of Design Points view in the line under Current, make the following entries to create the first design point (DP 1). Notice that cells automatically populated with values
from the Current row, so you need to enter only the value that differs from that:
P1 inDia: 1
P2 in2Angle: -45
P3 inMassFlow: 1500
In the Table of Design Points > Retain column, select the check box.

Note
You should save the project once before you retain a design point.
Right-click in the row for DP 1 and select Update Selected Design Points.
ANSYS Workbench recalculates all of the values for the input and output parameters. All of the
views are updated.

528

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Using Design of Experiments

Because you selected the check box in the Retain column, the update process writes a copy of
the project (as project_name_dpdp_number.wbpj) so that you can refer back to the data for
that design point.
2.

Modify the design point (DP 1) using these values, including retaining the design point:
P1 inDia: 1.5
P2 in2Angle: 0
P3 inMassFlow: 1500
Right-click in the row for DP 1 and select Update Selected Design Points.
If you had not kept the check box in the Retain column selected, the data in the design point's
project file would not be rewritten and so the data in that file would not be consistent with the
updated results now shown in ANSYS Workbench.

3.

Repeat the previous step to create the second design point (DP 2) using these values:
P1 inDia: 1
P2 in2Angle: 0
P3 inMassFlow: 1600
In the ANSYS Workbench toolbar, click Update All Design Points. (This command updates any
out-of-date design points in a sequential fashion. In this case as only one design point is out of
date, only it will be updated.)

4.

Click Save on the ANSYS Workbench toolbar to save the project.

Recall that the goal of this design study is to maximize the mixing (which occurs when OutTempRange
reaches its minimum value). From these manual tests, it appears that the best results are obtained by
changing the input angle of one inlet. In all studies, the OutTempAve value stays very near a constant
300 K, as expected.
In the next section you will automate that manual process of repeatedly changing variable values by
using Design Exploration.

24.10. Using Design of Experiments

In this section you will use Design Exploration's Response Surface Optimization feature to minimize
the value of OutTempRange.
1.

Return to the Project tab.

2.

If you need to restore the Toolbox, select View > Toolbox. If no systems appear in the Toolbox, select
a cell in the Project Schematic view to refresh ANSYS Workbench.

3.

From the Design Exploration toolbox, drag a Response Surface Optimization system to the Project
Schematic (under the Parameter Set bar).

4.

Edit the Design of Experiments cell.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

529

Optimizing Flow in a Static Mixer

5.

Under the B2:Design of Experiments tab, in the Outline of Schematic B2: Design of Experiments view:
a.

Select the Enabled check box next to each of P2 in2Angle (cell A6) and P3 inMassFlow (cell A7);
clear the check box next to P1 inDia (cell A5).

b.

Select cell P3 inMassFlow (cell A7). In the Properties of Outline A7: P3 inMassFlow view that
appears below, set:
Lower Bound: 1000
Upper Bound: 2000

c.

Select cell P2 in2Angle (cell A6). In the Properties of Outline A6: P2 in2Angle view, set:
Lower Bound: 45
Upper Bound: 0

6.

In the ANSYS Workbench menu bar, ensure that View > Table is set.

7.

Under the B2:Design of Experiments tab, on the toolbar, click Preview.

8.

Observe the Table of Schematic B2: Design of Experiments view. This table has nine entries in the
Name column, each of which represents a solver run to be performed. Beside the Name column are
columns that have the values for the two input parameters, and a column to hold the value the solver
will obtain for the output parameter. This preview gives an indication of the time that the nine solver runs
will require.

9.

Under the Project tab, update the Design of Experiments cell in the Project Schematic view. You can
monitor the progress of the solver runs by clicking Show Progress in the lower-right corner of the ANSYS
Workbench window.
When the processing is complete, the Table of Schematic B2: Design of Experiments displays
the results. Click the down-arrow on the P4 OutTempRange (K) cell to sort in ascending order
and show the best combination of input angle and mass flow. Note that the best results are returned
from a low mass flow and the greatest difference in input angle.

24.11. Viewing the Response Surface

To view the response surface for this experiment:
1.

In the ANSYS Workbench menu bar, ensure View > Chart is selected.

2.

In the Project Schematic view, update the Response Surface.

3.

Right-click Response Surface > Edit to open the B3:Response Surface tab.

4.

In the Outline of Schematic B3: Response Surface view, select Response Surface > Response Points
> Response Point > Response. The results appear in various views:
The Toolbox shows the types of charts that are available.
The Response Chart for P4 - OutTempRange shows a 2D graph comparing OutTempRange to in2Angle.

530

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Optimization

The Properties of Outline A16: Response shows the values that are being used to display the 2D
graph. Note that the other variable that was considered in the Design of Experiments (inMassFlow) is
held at 1500.
5.

In the Properties of Outline A16: Response view, select Chart > Mode > 3D. A 3D chart appears that
shows the full range of inMassFlow results. The chart shows in more detail that the best results are returned
from a low mass flow and the greatest difference in input angle.

24.12. Viewing the Optimization

To view the optimization for this experiment:
1.

In the Project Schematic view, edit the Optimization cell.

2.

Under the B4:Optimization tab, in the Outline of Schematic B4: Optimization view, select Objectives
and Constraints.

3.

In the Table of Schematic B4: Optimization view, add the following objective:
Parameter: P4 OutTempRange
Type: Minimize
The Objective Name is automatically set to Minimize P4.

4.

In the Project Schematic view, right-click Optimization and select Update.

5.

Under the B4:Optimization tab, in Outline of Schematic B4: Optimization, select Optimization >
Results > Candidate Points. In the Table of Schematic B4: Optimization, Candidate Points view, three
design point candidates appear with their interpolated values.
Recall that design points are combinations of parameter values where you perform real calculations
(rather than relying on the interpolated values that appear in the response charts). All of the candidates are represented graphically in the Candidate Points chart.

6.

In Table of Schematic B4: Optimization, Candidate Points, right-click Candidate Point 1 and select
Insert as Design Point.

7.

Switch to the Parameters tab. The various views update and a new design point has appeared in the
Table of Design Points.

8.

In the Table of Design Points, the new design point (DP 3) has no values and requests an update. Rightclick the lightning icon and select Update Selected Design Points. You can follow the progress of the
update in the Project Schematic view while ANSYS Workbench reruns its calculations for the design
point parameters. Compare the P4 - OutTempRange value to the value given by the Design of Experiments
calculations.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

531

532

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 25: Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a

Centrifugal Compressor
This tutorial includes:
25.1.Tutorial Features
25.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
25.3. Preparing the Working Directory
25.4. Setting Up the Project
25.5. Defining the Geometry Using ANSYS BladeGen
25.6. Defining the Mesh
25.7. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
25.8. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
25.9. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post
25.10. Simulating the Structural Performance Using Static Structural

Note
Because this tutorial makes use of ANSYS BladeGen, it must be run on a Windows-based
machine.
As a prerequisite, the license preferences must be configured properly for ANSYS BladeModeler. For details, see the post-installation procedures in the installation documentation or the
section on configuring licenses in the documentation for BladeEditor.

25.1. Tutorial Features

This tutorial addresses the following features:
Component

Feature

Details

ANSYS BladeGen

Geometry

Transfer of geometry to
ANSYS TurboGrid and
Mechanical Model

ANSYS TurboGrid

Mesh

Shroud Tip defined by

Profile
ATM Optimized

Mechanical Model

Mesh

Virtual Topology
Edge Sizing
Face Meshing
Sweep Method

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Turbo mode
General mode

Machine Type

Centrifugal Compressor

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

533

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

Component

Feature

Details

Component Type

Rotating

Analysis Type

Steady State

Domain Type

Fluid Domain
Solid Domain

Fluid Type

Air Ideal Gas

Boundary Template

P-Total Inlet Mass Flow

Outlet

Flow Direction

Cylindrical Components

Solid Type

Steel

Heat Transfer

Thermal Energy

Domain Interface

Fluid Fluid
Fluid Solid

CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Timescale

Report

Computed Results
Table
Blade Loading Span 50
Streamwise Plot of Pt
and P
Velocity Streamlines
Stream Blade TE

Static Structural

Static Structural
Analysis

Importing CFX pressure

data
Importing CFX
temperature data
Fixed Support
Rotationally-induced
inertial effect

Static Structural
Solutions

Equivalent Stress
(von-Mises)
Total Deformation

25.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial makes use of several ANSYS software components to simulate the aerodynamic and
structural performance of a centrifugal compressor.

534

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Overview of the Problem to Solve

The compressor has 24 blades that revolve about the Z axis at 22360 RPM. A clearance gap exists
between the blades and the shroud of the compressor. The outer diameter of the blade row is approximately 40 cm.
To begin analysis of the aerodynamic performance, a mesh will be created in both ANSYS TurboGrid
and the Mechanical application using an existing design that is to be reviewed beforehand in ANSYS
BladeGen. Once the meshes have been created, initial parameters defining the aerodynamic simulation
will be set in CFX-Pre and then solved in CFX-Solver. The aerodynamic solution from the solver will then
be processed and displayed in CFD-Post.
You will then use the Mechanical application to simulate structural stresses and deformation on the
blade due to pressure and temperature loads from the aerodynamic analysis and rotationally-induced
inertial effects. You will view an animation that shows the resulting blade distortion.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

535

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

25.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

Centrifugal_Compressor.bgd
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

25.4. Setting Up the Project

1.

Start ANSYS Workbench.

To do this in Microsoft Windows, in the Start menu, select All Programs > ANSYS 17.0 > Workbench 17.0.

2.

In the main menu, select File > Save As.

3.

In the Save As dialog box, browse to the working directory and set File name to Compressor.

4.

Click Save.

25.5. Defining the Geometry Using ANSYS BladeGen

1.

In the Toolbox view, expand Component Systems and double-click BladeGen.

In the Project Schematic view, a BladeGen system opens and is ready to be given a name.

536

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Geometry Using ANSYS BladeGen

2.

In the name field, type Compressor and then either press Enter or click outside the name field to end
the rename operation.
If you need to begin a new rename operation, right-click the BladeGen cell (A1) and select Rename.
Now that renaming systems has been demonstrated, most of the other systems involved in this
tutorial will simply use default names.

25.5.1. Changing the Blade Design Properties

Change the Blade Design cell properties as follows:
1.

In the Project Schematic view, in the BladeGen system, right-click the Blade Design cell and select
Properties.
The properties view shows properties that control how the geometry is exported to downstream
systems.

2.

In the properties view, clear the Merge Blade Topology and Create Fluid Zone check boxes.
By clearing the Create Fluid Zone check box, you are specifying that only the blade geometry,
and not the volume around the blade, should be sent to downstream cells.

3.

Set Shroud Clearance to Relative Layer.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

537

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

This will make sure the tip clearance layer is not part of the geometry when it is transferred to the
Mechanical application.
The properties should appear as follows:

You now have a BladeGen system that contains a Blade Design cell; the latter is presently in an unfulfilled state, as indicated by the question mark. In the next section, you will fulfill the cell requirements
by loading the provided geometry file. In general, you could also fulfill the cell requirements by creating
a new geometry.

25.5.2. Reviewing the Geometry

In this section, you will load the geometry from the provided .bgd file, and then review the blade
design using ANSYS BladeGen. BladeGen is a geometry-creation tool specifically designed for turbomachinery blades.
1.

In the Project Schematic view, in the BladeGen system, right-click the Blade Design cell and select Edit
or double-click the cell.
BladeGen opens.

2.

In BladeGen, in the main menu, select File > Open.

3.

In the Open dialog box, browse to the working directory and select the file Centrifugal_Compressor.bgd.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Observe the blade design shown in BladeGen.

6.

Quit BladeGen.

538

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Mesh

To do this, in the main menu, select File > Exit.
7.

In the Project Schematic view, the Blade Design cell now displays a green check mark to indicate that
the cell is up-to-date. This means that you now have a geometry for the centrifugal compressor that is
ready to be used for meshing purposes.

In the next section, you will create a CFD-compatible mesh based on this geometry.

25.6. Defining the Mesh

You will create a mesh in both ANSYS TurboGrid and the Mechanical application. TurboGrid will create
a CFD mesh that will be part of the fluid domain. The Mechanical application will generate the solid
blade mesh that is required for solving for the volumetric temperature in the blade.

25.6.1. Defining the CFD Mesh Using ANSYS TurboGrid

TurboGrid is a mesh creation tool specifically designed for turbomachinery blades. In this section, you
will use TurboGrid to produce a CFD-compatible mesh based on the centrifugal compressor geometry.
1.

In the BladeGen system, right-click the Blade Design cell and select Transfer Data To New > TurboGrid.
A TurboGrid system opens and is ready to be given a name.

2.

Press Enter to accept the default name.

The Turbo Mesh cell displays a pair of green curved arrows to indicate that the cell has not received
the latest upstream data. Normally, you would right-click such a cell and select Refresh to transfer
data from the upstream cell. However, for a newly-added Turbo Mesh cell and whenever TurboGrid
is not open, this action is not necessary because TurboGrid always reads the upstream cell data
upon starting up.
If you were to refresh the Turbo Mesh cell, it would show a question mark to indicate that, although
the cell's inputs are current, further attention is required in order to bring the cell to an up-to-date
status; that further action would typically be to run TurboGrid and produce a mesh with it.

3.

In the TurboGrid system, right-click the Turbo Mesh cell and select Edit.
TurboGrid opens.

The next several sections guide you through the steps to create the CFD mesh.

25.6.1.1. Defining the Shroud Tip

For this compressor, the shroud is stationary and requires a clearance gap between the blade and
shroud. Define the tip of the blade using the second blade profile in the blade geometry.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

539

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

1.

In TurboGrid, in the object selector, right-click Geometry > Blade Set > Shroud Tip and select
Edit.

2.

In the object editor, configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Shroud Tip

Override Upstream Geometry Options

(Selected)

Tip Option

Profile Number

Tip Profile

Click Apply.
This defines the shroud tip of the blade (the surface of the blade that is nearest to the shroud).

25.6.1.2. Defining the Topology

In TurboGrid, you may choose a topology pattern based on the type of machine being analyzed.
1.

In the object selector, right-click Topology Set and select Edit.

Alternatively, in the toolbar, click Topology

2.

In the Definition tab, set Topology Definition > Placement to ATM Optimized.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

In the object selector, right-click Topology Set and clear Suspend Object Updates.
After a short time, the topology is generated. You can see a 2D preview of the mesh on each of
the two layers.

25.6.1.3. Specifying the Mesh Data Settings

The Mesh Data settings control the number and distribution of mesh elements.
1.

In the object selector, right-click Mesh Data and select Edit.

Alternatively, in the toolbar, click Edit Mesh Data

2.

540

In the object editor, configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Mesh
Size

Method

Target Passage
Mesh Size

Node Count

Medium
(100000)

Inlet Domain

(Selected)

Outlet Domain

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Mesh

Tab

Setting

Passage

Spanwise Blade Distribution Parameters

> Method

Value

Element Count
and Size

Spanwise Blade Distribution Parameters

> # of Elements

25

Spanwise Blade Distribution Parameters

> Const Elements
Inlet

11

Inlet Domain
> Define By

Target Number
of Elements

Inlet Domain
> # of Elements
Outlet

50

Outlet Domain
> Define By

Target Number
of Elements

Outlet Domain
> # of Elements

3.

25

Click Apply.

25.6.1.4. Generating the Mesh

With the topology and mesh data defined, the next step is to create a mesh.
1.

In the object selector, right-click 3D Mesh and select Create Mesh.

Alternatively, select Insert > Mesh in the main menu, or click Mesh

in the toolbar.

After a few moments, the mesh is generated.

2.

Select File > Close TurboGrid.

3.

Return to the Project Schematic view.

25.6.2. Defining the Structural Mesh Using Mechanical Model

A mesh is required for the solid blade geometry for CFX-Solver to solve for the volumetric temperature.
This volumetric temperature will later be exported to Static Structural to calculate the stresses on the
blade. In this section, you will use the Mechanical application to produce a solid blade mesh.
1.

In the BladeGen system, right-click the Blade Design cell and select Transfer Data To New > Mechanical Model.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

541

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

A Mechanical Model system opens and is ready to be given a name.

2.

Press Enter to accept the default name.

3.

In the Mechanical Model system, right-click the Geometry cell and select Update.
ANSYS DesignModeler runs in the background, and imports the geometry from the BladeGen
system.

4.

Right-click the Model cell and select Edit.

The Mechanical application opens.

The next several sections guide you through the steps to create the mesh.

25.6.2.1. Specifying the Global Mesh Controls

1.

In the Mechanical application, in the Outline tree view, select Project > Model (C4) > Mesh.

2.

In the details view, configure the following setting(s):

Group

Control

Value

Defaults

Physics Preference

Mechanical

25.6.2.2. Defining the Virtual Topology

The geometry has unnecessary small faces and edges, as shown in Figure 25.1: Small Face at the Leading
Edge of the Blade (p. 543), which can influence the mapping of the mesh. Creating a virtual topology
of virtual faces and edges will fix the problem by letting the Mechanical application ignore these geometry flaws.

542

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Mesh

Figure 25.1: Small Face at the Leading Edge of the Blade

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (C4) and select Insert > Virtual Topology.

2.

Right-click Project > Model (C4) > Virtual Topology and select Generate Virtual Cells.
This will automatically create most of the virtual cells for you. You will have to make the rest of
the virtual cells manually.

3.

In the viewer, right-click and select View > Back.

4.

Select the long thin face of the blade that is shown highlighted in green in Figure 25.2: Back View of the
Blade (p. 544).

5.

Zoom in on the trailing edge as shown in Figure 25.2: Back View of the Blade (p. 544).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

543

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

Figure 25.2: Back View of the Blade

6.

Hold Ctrl and select the small face at the trailing edge beside the long thin face shown in Figure 25.3: Small
Face at the Trailing Edge of the Blade (p. 544).
Figure 25.3: Small Face at the Trailing Edge of the Blade

7.

In the viewer, right-click and select Insert > Virtual Cell.

8.

In the viewer, right-click and select View > Bottom.

9.

Zoom in on the leading edge as shown in Figure 25.4: Bottom View of the Blade (p. 545).

544

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Mesh

Figure 25.4: Bottom View of the Blade

10. Hold Ctrl and select the three edges marked A,B and C in Figure 25.5: Three Edges at the Leading
Edge of the Blade (p. 545).
Figure 25.5: Three Edges at the Leading Edge of the Blade

11. In the viewer, right-click and select Insert > Virtual Cell.

25.6.2.3. Specifying the Sizing Controls

You will now apply local mesh sizing on four edges at the blade tip.
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (C4) > Mesh and select Insert > Sizing.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

545

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

2.

In the viewer, right-click and select View > Back so that the model is oriented similar to the one shown
in Figure 25.2: Back View of the Blade (p. 544).

3.

Hold Ctrl and select the two edges marked A and B in Figure 25.6: Two Edges on the Back of the
Blade (p. 546).
Figure 25.6: Two Edges on the Back of the Blade

4.

In the details view, click Apply in the field beside Scope > Geometry.
The field beside Scope > Geometry should now display 2 Edges. You have now chosen the two
edges on which to apply the Sizing control.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Definition
> Type

Number of
Divisions

Definition
> Number of Divisions

55

Definition

546

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Mesh

Setting

Value

> Behavior

Hard

[a]

Definition
> Bias Type [b]

_ __ ____ __ _

Definition
> Bias Factor [c]

10

a. Choosing the Hard option ensures that the number of

divisions and bias are fixed on the edge and cannot be
changed by the meshing algorithm.
b. Bias Type adjusts the spacing ratio of nodes on an edge.
c. Bias Type adjusts the ratio of the largest edge division to
the smallest edge division.

6.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (C4) > Mesh and select Insert > Sizing.

7.

Zoom in on the trailing edge as indicated in Figure 25.2: Back View of the Blade (p. 544).

8.

Select the edge marked C in Figure 25.7: Edge on the Trailing Edge of the Blade (p. 547).
Figure 25.7: Edge on the Trailing Edge of the Blade

9.

In the details view, click Apply in the field beside Scope > Geometry.
The field beside Scope > Geometry should now display 1 Edge.

10. Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

547

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

Setting

Value

Definition
> Type

Number of
Divisions

Definition
> Number of Divisions

Definition
> Behavior

Hard

Definition
> Bias Type

No Bias

11. In the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (C4) > Mesh and select Insert > Sizing.
12. In the viewer, right-click and select View > Top.
13. Zoom in on the leading edge as shown in Figure 25.8: Top View of the Blade (p. 548).
Figure 25.8: Top View of the Blade

14. Select the edge marked A in Figure 25.9: Leading Edge of the Blade (p. 549).

548

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Mesh

Figure 25.9: Leading Edge of the Blade

15. In the details view, click Apply in the field beside Scope > Geometry.
The field beside Scope > Geometry should now display 1 Edge.
16. Configure the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Definition
> Type

Number of
Divisions

Definition
> Number of Divisions

Definition
> Behavior

Hard

Definition
> Bias Type

____ __ _ __ ____

Definition
> Bias Factor

25.6.2.4. Specifying the Face Meshing Controls

You will now introduce a Face Meshing control on the blade tip that will generate a structured mesh
based on the Sizing controls that you just defined.
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (C4) > Mesh and select Insert > Face Meshing.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

549

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

2.

Select the virtual face at the top of the blade where you just defined the Sizing controls (the face that is
at the forefront of the displayed geometry in Figure 25.9: Leading Edge of the Blade (p. 549)).

3.

In the details view, click Apply in the field beside Scope > Geometry.
The field beside Scope > Geometry should now display 1 Face. This is the face at the blade tip.

25.6.2.5. Specifying the Method Controls

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (C4) > Mesh and select Show > Sweepable
Bodies.
This will select the sweepable bodies in the viewer; in this case, it is the whole blade geometry.

2.

Right-click Project > Model (C4) > Mesh and select Insert > Method.

3.

In the details view, set Definition > Method to Sweep.

4.

Set Definition > Src/Trg Selection to Manual Source and Target.

5.

In the details view, click the field beside Definition > Source where it says No Selection.
Two buttons appear in the field: Apply and Cancel.

6.

Select the virtual face at the top of the blade where you just defined the Face Meshing control (the face
that is at the forefront of the displayed geometry in Figure 25.9: Leading Edge of the Blade (p. 549)).
In the details view, click Apply in the field beside Definition > Source.
The face has been selected as the source for the sweep method.

7.

Follow a similar procedure for Definition > Target to set the bottom virtual face of the blade as the target
for the sweep method (the face that is attached to the hub and opposite to the virtual face at the top of
the blade).

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Definition
> Type

Number of
Divisions

Definition
> Sweep Num Divs

15

Definition
> Sweep Bias Type

_ __ ____ __ _

Definition
> Sweep Bias [a]

10

a. This is the same as Bias Factor.

550

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

25.6.2.6. Generating the Mesh

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (C4) > Mesh and select Update.
After a few moments, the mesh is generated. You will now observe the mesh statistics.

2.

Click Project > Model (C4) > Mesh.

3.

In the details view, expand Statistics.

Note the node and element count.

Note
To get better results, the mesh would require more number of elements especially
through the thickness of the blade; however, the current mesh is sufficient for the purpose of the tutorial.

4.

Set Mesh Metric to any option and observe the mesh metric bar graph that appears.

5.

Quit the Mechanical application.

To do this, in the main menu, select File > Close Mechanical.

6.

Return to the Project Schematic view.

25.7. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

This section involves using CFX-Pre in ANSYS Workbench. CFX-Pre is a CFD physics preprocessor that
has a Turbo mode facility for setting up turbomachinery CFD simulations. In this section, you will use
CFX-Pre in Turbo mode to define a CFD simulation based on the centrifugal compressor mesh that you
created earlier. Later in General mode, you will create a solid domain for the blade and make a fluidsolid interface.
1.

In the TurboGrid system, right-click the Turbo Mesh cell and select Transfer Data To New > CFX.
A CFX system opens and is ready to be given a name.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

551

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

2.

Press Enter to accept the default name.

3.

Drag the Model cell of the Mechanical Model system to the Setup cell of the CFX system.

4.

In the Mechanical Model system, right-click the Model cell and select Update.
The Mesh cell now displays a green check mark to indicate that the cell is up to date. This means
that the blade mesh is available for use in the CFD simulation. The Setup cell displays a pair of
green curved arrows to indicate that the cell has not received the latest upstream data. Since you
have not yet opened CFX-Pre, you can disregard the cell status; CFX-Pre will automatically read
the upstream cell data upon starting up from this cell for the first time.

5.

In the CFX system, right-click the Setup cell and select Edit.
CFX-Pre opens.

The next several sections guide you through the steps to create the CFD simulation.

25.7.1. Defining the Fluid Region Using Turbo Mode

You will define the fluid domain, boundaries and interfaces in Turbo mode.
In CFX-Pre, in the main menu, select Tools > Turbo Mode.

25.7.1.1. Configuring the Basic Settings

1.

In the Basic Settings panel, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Machine Type

Centrifugal
Compressor

Axes
> Rotation Axis

552

Z
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

Analysis Type
> Type

Steady State

Leave the other settings at their default values.

2.

Click Next.

25.7.1.2. Defining the Components

1.

In the Component Definition panel, right-click Components and select Add Component.

2.

In the New Component dialog box, set Name to R1 and Type to Rotating.

Note
If the Automatic Default Domain option in CFX-Pre is selected, a domain with the
name R1 will already be present under the Component Definition panel. In this case,
you do not need to create a new domain, and you can continue by editing the existing
R1 component

3.

Click OK.

4.

Select Components > R1 and configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Component Type
> Type

Rotating

Component Type
> Value

22360 [rev min^-1]

Mesh
> Available Volumes
> Volumes

Inlet, Outlet, Passage Main

Wall Configuration

(Selected)

Wall Configuration
> Tip Clearance at Shroud
> Yes

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

553

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

Leave the other settings at their default values.

Note
When a component is defined, Turbo mode will automatically select a list of regions
that correspond to certain boundary types. This information should be reviewed under
Region Information to ensure that all is correct.

5.

Click Next.

25.7.1.3. Defining the Physics

You will now set the properties of the fluid domain and some solver parameters.
1.

In the Physics Definition panel, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Fluid

Air Ideal Gas

Model Data
> Reference Pressure

1 [atm]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> P-Total Inlet Mass Flow Outlet

(Selected)

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> P-Total

0 [atm]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> T-Total

20 [C]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> Flow Direction

Cylindrical Components

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> Inflow Direction (a,r,t)

554

1, 0, 0

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Outflow
> Mass Flow

Per Component

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Outflow
> Mass Flow Rate

0.167 [kg s^-1]

Solver Parameters

(Selected)

Solver Parameters
> Convergence Control

Physical Timescale

Solver Parameters
> Physical Timescale

0.0002 [s]

Leave the other settings at their default values.

2.

Click Next.

25.7.1.4. Specifying the Domain Interfaces

CFX-Pre will try to create appropriate interfaces using the region names presented previously under
Region Information in the Component Definition panel.
1.

In the Interface Definition panel, verify that each interface is set correctly; select an interface listed in
the tree view and then examine the associated settings (shown in the lower portion of the panel) and
highlighted regions in the viewer.
If no regions appear highlighted in the viewer, ensure that highlighting is turned on in the viewer
toolbar.

2.

Click Next.

25.7.1.5. Specifying the Boundaries

CFX-Pre will try to create appropriate boundary conditions using the region names presented previously
under Region Information in the Component Definition panel.
1.

In the Boundary Definition panel, verify that each boundary is set correctly; select a boundary listed in
the tree view and then examine the associated settings and highlighted regions.

Note
Later, you will delete R1 Blade boundary in General mode after creating a fluid-solid
interface at the blade.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

555

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

2.

Click Next.

25.7.1.6. Setting the Final Operations

1.

In the Final Operations panel, set Operation to Enter General Mode.

2.

Click Finish.

25.7.2. Defining the Solid Region Using General Mode

You will need to create a solid domain for the blade followed by making a fluid-solid interface in General mode.

25.7.2.1. Specifying the Domains

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 and select Insert > Domain.

2.

In the Insert Domain dialog box, set Name to Solid Blade.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of Solid Blade:

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

B24

[a]

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Solid
Domain

Solid Definitions

Solid 1

Solid Definitions
> Solid 1
> Material

Steel

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Option

Rotating

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Angular Velocity

22360 [rev
min^-1]

Domain Models
> Domain Motion

556

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Axis Definition

> Option

Coordinate
Axis

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis
Solid Models

Global Z

Heat Transfer
> Option

Thermal
Energy

a. This is the mesh region that you generated using the Mechanical application.

5.

Click OK.

25.7.2.2. Specifying the Boundaries

You do not need to create any boundaries for the solid domain because the interfaces will make the
boundaries for you. The only surface that must be specified is the bottom of the blade at the hub. You
will review the default boundary because it will later represent the bottom of the blade after all the
interfaces have been specified.
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > Solid Blade > Solid
Blade Default and select Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Solid Blade Default:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer
> Option

3.

Adiabatic

Click OK.

25.7.2.3. Specifying the Domain Interfaces

An interface is required between the two meshes at the blade surface.
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 and select Insert > Domain
Interface.

2.

In the Insert Domain Interface dialog box, set Name to R1 to Solid Blade.

3.

Click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

557

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of R1 to Solid Blade:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Solid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

R1

Interface Side 1
> Region List

BLADE

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

Solid Blade

Interface Side 2
> Region List

F26.24,F28.24,F30.24,
F31.24,F49.24

[a]

Interface Models
> Option

General Connection
[b]

Mesh
Connection

Mesh Connection Method

> Mesh Connection
> Option

Automatic

a. The only region not selected is F47.24, which is the blade surface attached to
the hub.
b. As long as the connection is general, the interface will enable heat transfer.

5.

Click OK.
A warning message appears notifying that the region for R1 Blade has already been specified
as a boundary.

6.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > R1 > R1 Blade and select
Delete.
The warning message disappears.

7.

Quit CFX-Pre.
To do this, in the main menu, select File > Close CFX-Pre.

8.

Return to the Project Schematic view.

25.8. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

Generate a solution for the CFD simulation that you just prepared:
558

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

1.

In the CFX system, right-click the Solution cell and select Update.
After some time, a CFD solution will be generated. If the progress indicator is not visible, you can
display it by clicking
select Display Monitors.

2.

or, to see detailed output, right-click the Solution cell and

After the solution has been generated, return to the Project Schematic view.

25.9. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

CFD-Post enables you to view the results in various ways, including tables, charts, and figures. You can
present the results in the form of a report that can be viewed in CFD-Post, or exported for viewing in
another application.
Create a report and examine some of the results as follows:
1.

In the CFX system, right-click the Results cell and select Edit.
CFD-Post opens.

2.

In CFD-Post, select File > Report > Report Templates.

3.

In the Report Templates dialog box, select Centrifugal Compressor Rotor Report and click Load.

4.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Report > Compressor Performance Results Table and
select Edit.
This table presents measures of aerodynamic performance including required power and efficiencies.

5.

Right-click Report > Blade Loading Span 50 and select Edit.

This is a plot of the pressure vs. streamwise distance along both the pressure and suction sides of
the blade at mid-span.

6.

Right-click Report > Streamwise Plot of Pt and P and select Edit.

This is a plot of the streamwise variation of pressure and total pressure.

7.

Right-click Report > Velocity Streamlines Stream Blade TE View and select Edit.
This is a trailing-edge view of the streamlines that start upstream of the blade.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

559

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

8.

To view a full report, click the Report Viewer tab found near the bottom right of the window.
A report will be generated that includes all figures available under Report in the tree view. This
report can be viewed in CFD-Post or published to be viewed externally as an .html or .txt file.
Note that if you have visited the Report Viewer tab before loading the template, or have otherwise
made any changes to the report definition after first viewing the report, you need to click
in the Report Viewer to update the report as displayed.

9.

Quit CFD-Post.
To do this, in the main menu, select File > Close CFD-Post.

10. Return to the Project Schematic view.

25.10. Simulating the Structural Performance Using Static Structural

This section describes the steps required to simulate structural stresses and deformation on the blade
due to pressure and temperature loads from the aerodynamic analysis.
1.

Expand Analysis Systems in the Toolbox view and drag Static Structural to the Model cell of the
Mechanical Model system in the Project Schematic view.
In the Project Schematic view, a Static Structural system opens and is ready to be given a name.

560

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Structural Performance Using Static Structural

2.

Press Enter to accept the default name.

3.

Drag the Solution cell of the CFX system to the Setup cell of the Static Structural system.
This makes the CFD solution data available for use in the structural analysis.

4.

In the Static Structural system, right-click the Setup cell and select Edit.
The Mechanical application opens.

The next several sections guide you through the steps to create a structural simulation with and without
rotationally-induced inertial effects.

25.10.1. Simulating the Structural Performance without Rotational Velocity

This Static Structural system will be used to create the simulation without the inertial loads.

25.10.1.1. Importing the Loads

1.

In the Mechanical application, in the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (D4, E4) >
Static Structural (D5) > Imported Load (C3) and select Insert > Pressure.
After a short time, Project > Model (D4, E4) > Static Structural (D5) > Imported
Load (C3) > Imported Pressure will appear and will be selected.

2.

In the details view, click the field beside Scope > Geometry where it says No Selection.

3.

In the viewer, right-click and select Select All.

Alternatively, in the main menu, select Edit > Select All.

4.

In the viewer, right-click and select View > Bottom.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

561

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

5.

Hold Ctrl and select the long thin face of the blade that is at the forefront of the displayed geometry.
This is the surface that is attached to the hub.

6.

In the details view, click Apply in the field beside Scope > Geometry.
The field beside Scope > Geometry should now display 5 Faces. You have now chosen the
solid model surface onto which the CFD pressure data will be applied.

7.

Set Transfer Definition > CFD Surface to R1 to Solid Blade Side 1.

You have now chosen the CFD boundary from which to get the CFD pressure data. You will do
the same for the body temperature.

8.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (D4, E4) > Static Structural (D5)
> Imported Load (C3) and select Insert > Body Temperature.

9.

In the details view, click the field beside Scope > Geometry where it says No Selection.

10. In the viewer, right-click and select Select All.

11. In the details view, click Apply in the field beside Scope > Geometry.
The field beside Scope > Geometry should now display 1 Body. You have now chosen the solid
model onto which the CFD temperature data will be applied.
12. Set Transfer Definition > CFD Domain to Solid Blade.
You have now chosen the CFD domain from which to get the CFD temperature data.
13. In the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (D4, E4) > Static Structural (D5)
> Imported Load (C3) and select Import Load.
Wait for the Mechanical application to map the loads.
14. To verify that the pressure and temperature data were applied correctly to the blade, inspect Imported
Pressure > Imported Load Transfer Summary and Imported Body Temperature > Im
ported Load Transfer Summary under Project > Model (D4, E4) > Static Structural
(D5) > Imported Load (C3).
The slight discrepancy shown in the load transfer summary for the imported pressure is due to a
difference in the TurboGrid and Mechanical mesh. In general, accurate load mapping requires that
the surface mesh elements match.

25.10.1.2. Specifying the Supports

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (D4, E4) > Static Structural (D5)
and select Insert > Fixed Support.

2.

In the viewer, right-click and select View > Bottom.

3.

Select the long thin face of the blade that is at the forefront of the displayed geometry.

4.

In the details view, click Apply in the field beside Scope > Geometry.
The face that you selected is now connected to the hub.

562

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Structural Performance Using Static Structural

25.10.1.3. Obtaining the Solution

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (D4, E4) > Static Structural (D5)
> Solution (D6) and select Insert > Stress > Equivalent (von-Mises).

2.

Right-click Project > Model (D4, E4) > Static Structural (D5) > Solution (D6) and
select Insert > Deformation > Total.

3.

Right-click Project > Model (D4, E4) > Static Structural (D5) > Solution (D6) and
select Solve.
Alternatively, in the toolbar, click

Wait for the solver to finish.

4.

Select Project > Model (D4, E4) > Static Structural (D5) > Solution (D6) > Equi
valent Stress to prepare to examine the von-Mises stress results.

5.

In the Graph view, click Play

von-Mises stress results.

6.

In the Outline tree view, select Project > Model (D4, E4) > Static Structural (D5) >
Solution (D6) > Total Deformation to prepare to examine the total deformation solution.

7.

In the Graph view, click Play

8.

Quit the Mechanical application.

to animate the physical deformation of the blade along with the associated

to animate the physical deformation.

To do this, in the main menu, select File > Close Mechanical.

9.

Return to the Project Schematic view.

25.10.2. Simulating the Structural Performance with Rotational Velocity

This section shows how to add inertial effects due to rotation. You will duplicate the existing Static
Structural system and use the new system to solve for the simulation with rotationally-induced inertial
effects.
1.

Right-click the upper-left corner of the Static Structural system and select Duplicate.
A second Static Structural system appears.

2.

Rename the newly created system from Copy of Static Structural to With Rotation.

3.

In the new system, right-click the Setup cell and select Edit.
The Mechanical application opens.

25.10.2.1. Specifying the Loads

You will now specify the rotational velocity as the inertial load.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

563

Aerodynamic and Structural Performance of a Centrifugal Compressor

1.

In the Mechanical application, in the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (E4) > Static
Structural (E5) and select Insert > Rotational Velocity.

2.

In the main menu, select Units > RPM.

3.

In the details view, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Definition
> Define By

Components

Definition
> Z Component

22360

[a]

a. The value will become 22360 RPM (ramped) when

you finish entering the number.

25.10.2.2. Obtaining the Solution

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Project > Model (E4) > Static Structural (E5) >
Solution (E6) and select Solve.
Wait for the solver to finish.

2.

To animate the total deformation or equivalent stress of the blade, select the corresponding object (either
Total Deformation or Equivalent Stress, respectively) under Project > Model (E4) >
Static Structural (E5) > Solution (E6) and click Play

3.

in the Graph view.

Quit the Mechanical application.

To do this, in the main menu, select File > Close Mechanical.

4.

Return to the Project Schematic view.

5.

In the main menu, select File > Save.

Alternatively, in the toolbar, click Save Project

6.

Quit ANSYS Workbench.

To do this, in the main menu, select File > Exit.

564

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 26: Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam

Predictions
This tutorial includes:
26.1.Tutorial Features
26.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
26.3. Preparing the Working Directory
26.4. Simulating the Equilibrium Phase Change Case
26.5. Simulating the Non-equilibrium Phase Change Case

26.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Selection of material properties from the International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam
(IAPWS) database.
Setting property table ranges.
Setting up an equilibrium steam calculation.
Reviewing solution variables particular to the equilibrium solution.
Setting up a non-equilibrium steam calculation.
Postprocessing features special to the non-equilibrium solution.
Reviewing solution variables particular to the non-equilibrium solution.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Turbo Wizard

Machine Type

Axial Turbine

Fluid Type

Binary
Homogeneous
Mixture
(equilibrium
solution)
Multi-Fluid Model
(non-equilibrium
solution)

Domain Type

Multiple Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

565

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

Component

Feature

Details

Heat Transfer

Total Energy
(equilibrium
solution)
Fluid Dependent
(non-equilibrium
solution)

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (subsonic):
Total
Pressure/Temperature
and Mass
Fraction(s)
(equilibrium
solution)
Inlet (subsonic):
Total
Pressure/Temperature,
Volume Fractions
and Droplet
Number
(non-equilibrium
solution)
Outlet: Static
Pressure

Domain Interfaces

Frozen Rotor
Periodic

CFD-Post

566

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Material Properties

IAPWS Water
Database

Fluid Pair Models

Small droplet heat

transfer, small
droplet phase
change
(non-equilibrium
solution)

Fluid Models

Nucleation, small
droplet
temperature,
droplets with phase
change
(non-equilibrium
solution)

Location

Turbo Surface

Plots

Contour

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Overview of the Problem to Solve

26.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

The following tutorial uses an axial turbine to demonstrate setting up and executing equilibrium and
non-equilibrium steam calculations using the IAPWS water database for properties.
The full geometry contains 60 stator blades and 113 rotor blades. The following figure shows approximately half of the full geometry. The inflow average velocity is in the order of 100 m/s.

The geometry to be modeled consists of a single stator blade passage and two rotor blade passages.
This is an approximation to the full geometry since the ratio of rotor blades to stator blades is close to,
but not exactly, 2:1. In the stator blade passage a 6 section is being modeled (360/60 blades), while
in the rotor blade passage, a 6.372 section is being modeled (2*360/113 blades). This produces a pitch
ratio at the interface between the stator and rotor of 0.942. As the flow crosses the interface, it is scaled
to enable this type of geometry to be modeled. This results in an approximation of the inflow to the
rotor passage. Furthermore, the flow across the interface will not appear continuous due to the scaling
applied.
In this example, the rotor rotates at 523.6 rad/s about the Z axis while the stator is stationary. Periodic
boundaries are used to enable only a small section of the full geometry to be modeled.
The important problem parameters are:
Total inlet pressure = 0.265 bar

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

567

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

Static outlet pressure = 0.0662 bar
Total inlet temperature = 328.5 K

In this tutorial, you will generate two steady-state solutions: one using a multicomponent fluid consisting
of a homogeneous binary mixture of liquid water and water vapor, the other using two separate phases
to represent liquid water and water vapor in a non-equilibrium simulation. The solution variables particular to the equilibrium and non-equilibrium solutions will be processed in order to understand the
differences between the two solutions.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

26.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
stator.gtm

568

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Equilibrium Phase Change Case

rotor.grd
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.
3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

26.4. Simulating the Equilibrium Phase Change Case

In this section, you will simulate the equilibrium case where the fluid consists of a homogeneous binary
mixture of liquid water and water vapor.

26.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The following sections describe the equilibrium simulation setup in CFX-Pre.
This tutorial uses the Turbomachinery wizard in CFX-Pre. This preprocessing mode is designed to simplify the setup of turbomachinery simulations.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run WaterVaporEq.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 579).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select Turbomachinery and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type WaterVaporEq.

6.

If you are notified the file already exists, click Overwrite.

7.

Click Save.

26.4.1.1. Basic Settings

1.

In the Basic Settings panel, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Machine Type

Axial Turbine

Analysis Type
> Type

Steady State

Leave the other settings at their default values.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

569

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

2.

Click Next.

26.4.1.2. Component Definition

Create the stator and rotor components as follows:
1.

Right-click a blank area near the Component Definition tree and select Add Component from the
shortcut menu.

2.

Create a new component of type Stationary, named S1.

3.

Beside Mesh > File, click Browse

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

stator.gtm

[a]

a. You may have to select the CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx) option under Files of type in order
to see the file.

5.

Click Open.
Note that when a component is defined, Turbo Mode attempts to configure the Region Information
settings, which you can review and manually adjust as necessary.

6.

Create a new component of type Rotating, named R1.

7.

Set Component Type > Value to 523.6 [radian s^-1].

8.

Beside Mesh > File, click Browse

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

rotor.grd

[a]

Options
> Mesh Units

a. You may have to select the CFX-TASCflow (*grd) option under Files of type in order
to see the file.

10. Click Open.

11. Click Passages and Alignment > Edit.
570

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Equilibrium Phase Change Case

12. Configure the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Passage and Alignment

> Passages/Mesh
> Passages per Mesh

Passage and Alignment

> Passages to Model

Passage and Alignment

> Passages in 360

113

13. Click Passages and Alignment > Done.

14. Click Next.

Note
The components must be ordered as above (stator then rotor) in order for the interface to
be created correctly. The order of the two components can be changed, if necessary, by
right-clicking S1 and selecting Move Component Up.

26.4.1.3. Physics Definition

In this section, you will set properties of the fluid domain and some solver parameters. Note that initially
you will choose the fluid to be Water Ideal Gas, but later you will create a new fluid based on the
IAPWS database for water and override this initial setting with it.
1.

In the Physics Definition panel, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Fluid

Water Ideal Gas

Model Data
> Reference Pressure

0 [atm]

[a]

Model Data
> Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Model Data
> Turbulence

k-Epsilon

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> P-Total Inlet P-Static Outlet

(Selected)

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

571

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

Setting

Value

> Inflow
> P-Total

0.265 [bar]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Inflow
> T-Total

328.5 [K]

[b]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Inflow
> Flow Direction

Normal to
Boundary

Inflow/Outflow Boundary Templates

> Outflow
> P-Static

0.0662 [bar]

Interface
> Default Type

Frozen Rotor

Solver Parameters

(Selected)

Solver Parameters
> Convergence Control

Physical Timescale

Solver Parameters
> Physical Timescale

0.0005 [s]

[c]

a. Because this tutorial involves vaporization, you should use absolute pressures throughout.
This can be accomplished by setting the reference pressure to 0 atm.
b. From the problem description.
c. The physical timescale that will be set up is derived from the rotational speed of the 113
rotor blades.

2.

Click Next.

26.4.1.4. Interface Definition

CFX-Pre will try to create appropriate interfaces using the region names viewed previously in the Region
Information section (in the Component Definition setup screen). In this case, you should see that a
periodic interface has been generated for both the rotor and the stator. The generated periodic interface
can be edited or deleted. Interfaces are required when modeling a small section of the true geometry.
An interface is also needed to connect the two components together across the frame change.
1.

572

Review the various interfaces but do not change them.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Equilibrium Phase Change Case

2.

Click Next.

26.4.1.5. Boundary Definition

CFX-Pre will try to create appropriate boundary conditions using the region names presented previously
in the Region Information section. In this case, you should see a list of generated boundary conditions.
They can be edited or deleted in the same way as the interface connections that were set up earlier.
1.

Review the various boundary definitions but do not change them.

2.

Click Next.

26.4.1.6. Final Operations

1.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode.

2.

Click Finish.
After you click Finish, a dialog box appears stating that a Turbo report will not be included in the
solver file because you are entering General mode.

3.

Click Yes to continue.

26.4.1.7. Defining the Properties of Water

Earlier in the physics definition portion of the Turbomachinery wizard, you specified Water Ideal
Gas as the fluid in the domain. Here, you will specify a homogeneous binary mixture to replace it. To
create the mixture, you will take two pure fluids from the IAPWS database for water and combine them.
The pure fluids that will be combined are H2Og, representing water vapor, and H2Ol, representing liquid
water. The mixture will be named H2Olg.
The present simulations use the published IAPWS-IF97 (International Association for the Properties of
Water and Steam - Industrial Formulation 1997) water tables for properties. The published IAPWS-IF97
equations have been implemented in ANSYS CFX, enabling you to directly select them for use in your
simulations. The present example uses these properties in a tabular format requiring you to specify the
range of the properties (such as min/max pressure and temperature bounds) and the number of data
points in each table. Note that the IAPWS-IF97 properties have been tested for extrapolation into
metastable regions, a fact that will be used for the non-equilibrium calculations that require this kind
of state information.
1.

Click Material

2.

Name the new material H2Og.

3.

Enter the following settings for H2Og:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Material Group

IAPWS
IF97

Thermodynamic State

(Selected)

Thermodynamic State

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

573

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

Tab
Material
Properties

Setting

Value

> Thermodynamic State

Gas

Thermodynamic Properties
> Table Generation

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Table Generation
> Minimum Temperature

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Table Generation
> Minimum Temperature
> Min. Temperature

250 [K]
[a]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Table Generation
> Maximum Temperature

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Table Generation
> Maximum Temperature
> Max. Temperature

400 [K]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Table Generation
> Minimum Absolute Pressure

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Table Generation
> Minimum Absolute Pressure
> Min. Absolute Pres.

0.01 [bar]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Table Generation
> Maximum Absolute Pressure

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Table Generation
> Maximum Absolute Pressure

574

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Equilibrium Phase Change Case

Tab

Setting

Value

> Max. Absolute Pres.

0.6 [bar]

Thermodynamic Properties
> Table Generation
> Maximum Points

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Table Generation
> Maximum Points
> Maximum Points

100

a. The H2Og minimum temperature is set to 250 K as the vapor might possibly supercool
(in the NES calculations) to temperatures lower than the triple point temperature.

4.

Click OK.

5.

In the Outline tree, under Materials, right-click H2Og and select Duplicate.

6.

Rename Copy of H2Og to H2Ol (using the letter l as in liquid).

7.

Open H2Ol for editing.

8.

On the Basic Settings tab, change Thermodynamic State > Thermodynamic State from Gas to Liquid.

9.

Click OK

10. Create a new material named H2Olg.

11. Enter the following settings for H2Olg:
Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Options

Homogeneous Binary
Mixture

Material Group

IAPWS IF97

Material 1

H2Og

Material 2

H2Ol

Option

IAPWS Library

Table Generation

(Selected)

Saturation
Properties

Table Generation
> Minimum Temperature

(Selected)

Table Generation
> Minimum Temperature
> Min. Temperature

273.15 [K]

[a]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

575

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

Tab

Setting

Value

Table Generation
> Maximum Temperature

(Selected)

Table Generation
> Maximum Temperature
> Max. Temperature

400 [K]

Table Generation
> Minimum Absolute Pressure

(Selected)

Table Generation
> Minimum Absolute Pressure
> Min. Absolute Pres.

0.01 [bar]

Table Generation
> Maximum Absolute Pressure

(Selected)

Table Generation
> Maximum Absolute Pressure
> Max. Absolute Pres.

0.6 [bar]

Table Generation
> Maximum Points

(Selected)

Thermodynamic Properties
> Table Generation
> Maximum Points
> Maximum Points

100

a. The minimum temperature is set to 273.15 K due to the fact that the saturation properties
implied by H2Ogl are not likely to be used below the triple point temperature.

12. Click OK.

26.4.1.8. Modifications to Domain and Boundary Conditions

You now need to update the initial setting for the domain fluid (initially set while in the Turbomachinery
wizard) with the new homogeneous binary mixture fluid you have just created. This mixture (H2Olg)
acts as a container fluid identifying two child materials, H2Ol and H2Og, each representing the liquid
and vapor properties in the pure fluid system. The equilibrium solution uses the binary mixture fluid,
H2Olg, and assumes that equilibrium conditions relate H2Ol and H2Og at all times. In the non-equilibrium solution (in the second part of this tutorial), H2Ol and H2Og are each used separately to define
the fluids that are active in the domain; this is a requirement since the equilibrium constraint is no
longer applicable in that case.

576

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Equilibrium Phase Change Case

1.

Open domain R1 for editing.

2.

On the Basic Settings tab under Fluid and Particle Definitions, delete any existing items by selecting
them and clicking Remove selected item

3.

Click Add new item

4.

Set Name to H2Olg and click OK.

5.

Set Fluid and Particle Definitions > H2Olg > Material to H2Olg and click Apply.

6.

On the Fluid Models tab set Component Models > Component > H2Og > Option to Equilibrium
Fraction.

7.

Click OK.

8.

Open Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > S1 > S1 Inlet for editing.

9.

On the Boundary Details tab, set Component Details > H2Og > Mass Fraction to 1.0.

10. Click OK.

26.4.1.9. Setting Initial Values

1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Enter the following settings:

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity Components

> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity Components
>W

100 [m s^-1]

[a]

Initial Conditions
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

577

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

Tab

Setting

Value

> Static Pressure

> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Relative Pressure

0.2 [bar]

Initial Conditions
> Temperature
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Temperature
> Temperature

328.5 [K]

[a]

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> H2Og
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Component Details
> H2Og
> Mass Fraction

1.0

a. From the problem description.

3.

Click OK.

26.4.1.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

578

Setting

Value

File name

WaterVaporEq.def

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Equilibrium Phase Change Case

3.

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file.

26.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down, and CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD
problem by following the instructions below.
1.

In CFX-Solver Manager, click Start Run.

2.

At the end of the run, on the completion message that appears, select Post-Process Results.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

4.

Click OK.

26.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The equilibrium case produces solution variables unique to these model settings. The most important
ones are static pressure, mass fraction and temperature, which will be briefly described here.
1.

When CFD-Post starts, the Domain Selector dialog box might appear. If it does, ensure that both the R1
and S1 domains are selected, then click OK to load the results from these domains.

2.

Click the Turbo tab.

3.

The Turbo Initialization dialog box is displayed, and asks you whether you want to auto-initialize all
components. Click Yes.
The Turbo tree view shows the two components in domains R1 and S1. In this case, the initialization
works without problems. If there were any problems initializing a component, this would be indicated
in the tree view.

Note
If you do not see the Turbo Initialization dialog box, or as an alternative to using that
dialog box, you can initialize all components by clicking the Initialize All Components
button, which is visible initially by default, or after double-clicking the Initialization
object in the Turbo tree view.

26.4.3.1. Specifying Locators for Plots

Make a 2D surface at 50% span to be used as a locator for plots:
1.

On the main menu select Insert > Location > Turbo Surface and name it Turbo Surface 1.

2.

On the Geometry tab, set Method to Constant Span and Value to 0.5.

3.

Click Apply.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

579

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

4.

Turn off the visibility of Turbo Surface 1.

26.4.3.2. Static Pressure and Mass Fraction Contour Plots

In the equilibrium solution, phase transition occurs the moment saturation conditions are reached in
the flow. The amount of moisture ultimately created from phase transition is determined in the following
manner.
The static pressure solution field yields the saturation enthalpy through the function
, available
from the IAPWS database. During the solution, if the predicted mixture static enthalpy, , falls below
at any point, the mass fraction of the condensed phase (also called wetness) can be directly
calculated also based on the IAPWS properties. The degree to which wetness is generated depends on
the amount by which

is less than

Note that the mass fraction is predicted at each iteration in the solution, and is used to update other
two-phase mixture properties required at each step in the solution. The final results therefore include
all of the two-phase influences, but assuming equilibrium conditions. The equilibrium solution mass
fraction contour plot will be compared to the non-equilibrium solution one in Viewing the Results Using
CFD-Post (p. 587).
In the next step, you are asked to create the pressure and mass fraction contour plots.
1.

Create a static pressure contour plot on Turbo Surface 1:

a.

Create a new contour plot named Static Pressure.

b.

In the details view on the Geometry tab, set Locations to Turbo Surface 1 and Variable to
Pressure, then click Apply.

2.

Turn off the visibility of Static Pressure when you have finished observing the results.

3.

Create a contour plot on Turbo Surface 1 that shows the mass fraction of the liquid phase:

4.

a.

Create a new contour plot named Mass Fraction of Liquid Phase.

b.

In the details view on the Geometry tab, set Locations to Turbo Surface 1 and Variable to
H2Ol.Mass Fraction, then click Apply.

Turn off the visibility of Mass Fraction of Liquid Phase when you have finished observing the results.

26.4.3.3. Static Temperature Contour Plots

In the equilibrium solution, the condensed and gas phases share the same temperature and, as a result,
predictions of thermodynamic losses are not possible.
In the following step you are asked to view the temperature field in the solution, and note that, due
to the equilibrium constraint, it represents conditions for the mixture.
1.

Create a contour plot on Turbo Surface 1 that shows the static temperature.
a.

580

Create a new contour plot named Static Temperature.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Non-equilibrium Phase Change Case

b.

2.

In the details view on the Geometry tab, set Locations to Turbo Surface 1 and Variable to
Temperature, then click Apply.

Once you have observed the results save the state and exit CFD-Post.

26.5. Simulating the Non-equilibrium Phase Change Case

The non-equilibrium calculation introduces a number of additional transport equations to the equilibrium
solution, namely volume fractions for each phase and droplet number for all condensing phases. In
addition, energy equations need to be specified for each of the phases in the solution. The setup of
these equations is automated based on model selections to be described subsequently. Important to
the predictions are interphase heat and mass transfer between the vapor and condensed phases due
to small droplets created by homogeneous nucleation. Selection of the required phase pair conditions
is made easier by provision of special small droplet models (where small droplet implies droplet sizes
generally below one
). Phase transition is initiated based on predicted metastable state (measured
by supercooling level) conditions in the flow in conjunction with a classical homogeneous nucleation
model.
The non-equilibrium solution is therefore closely dependent on the evolving conditions along the flow
path leading to phase transition and subsequent strong interaction (by heat/mass transfer) between
phases.

26.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

WaterVaporEq.cfx
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already running.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run WaterVaporNonEq.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 587).

4.

Select File > Open Case.

5.

Select the simulation file WaterVaporEq.cfx.

6.

Click Open.

7.

Select File > Save Case As.

8.

Change the name to WaterVaporNonEq.cfx.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

581

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

9.

Click Save.

26.5.1.1. Modifying the Domains

The non-equilibrium case is different from the equilibrium case in that the creation of the second phase
(that is, the liquid water) is based on vapor supercooling in conjunction with fluid expansion rate and
a nucleation model. The location where the phase transition happens is not specified, but evolves as
part of the solution.
In this section, you will specify a nucleation model for the phase that is considered condensable.
You will also set the droplet number and volume fraction of the condensable phase to zero at the inlet.
The condensable phase will appear within the domain by homogeneous nucleation. If this case were
to involve wetness at the inlet, you would have a choice of specifying either droplet number or droplet
diameter as a boundary along with the volume fraction.
1.

Open domain R1.

2.

On the Basic Settings tab under Fluid and Particle Definitions, delete any existing items by selecting
them and clicking Remove selected item

3.

Create two new materials named H2Og and H2Ol by using the Add new item

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of domain R1:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Fluid and Particle Definitions

H2Og

icon.

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> H2Og
> Material

H2Og

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> H2Og
> Morphology
> Option

Continuous Fluid

Fluid and Particle Definitions

H2Ol

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> H2Ol
> Material

H2Ol

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> H2Ol
> Morphology

582

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Non-equilibrium Phase Change Case

Tab

Fluid
Models

Setting

Value

> Option

Droplets (Phase
Change)

Multiphase
> Homogeneous Model

(Selected)

Heat Transfer
> Homogeneous Model

(Cleared)

Heat Transfer

Fluid
Specific
Models

> Option

Fluid Dependent

Fluid

H2Og

Fluid
> H2Og
> Heat Transfer Model
> Option

Total Energy

Fluid

H2Ol

Fluid
> H2Ol
> Heat Transfer Model
> Option

Small Droplet
Temperature

Fluid
> H2Ol
> Nucleation Model

(Selected)

Fluid
> H2Ol
> Nucleation Model
> Option

Homogeneous

Fluid
> H2Ol
> Nucleation Model
> Nucleation Bulk Tension Factor

[a]

(Selected)

Fluid
> H2Ol
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

583

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

Tab

Setting

Value

> Nucleation Model

> Nucleation Bulk Tension Factor

Fluid
Pair
Models

> Nucleation Bulk Tension

1.0

Fluid Pair

H2Og | H2Ol

Fluid Pair
> H2Og | H2Ol
> Interphase Transfer
> Option

Particle Model

Fluid Pair
> H2Og | H2Ol
> Mass Transfer
> Option

Phase Change

Fluid Pair
> H2Og | H2Ol
> Mass Transfer
> Phase Change Model
> Option

Small Droplets

Fluid Pair
> H2Og | H2Ol
> Heat Transfer
> Option

Small Droplets

a. The Nucleation Bulk Tension Factor scales the bulk surface tension values used in the
nucleation model. Classical nucleation models are very sensitive to the bulk surface tension,
and only slight adjustments will modify the nucleation rate quite significantly. It is common
practice in CFD simulations to alter the bulk surface tension values slightly in order to
bring results in-line with experiment. Studies suggest that with the IAPWS database and
conditions less than 1 bar, a Nucleation Bulk Tension Factor of 1.0 is the best first setting.

Note
The small droplet setting for H2Ol heat transfer implies that the temperature is algebraically determined as a function of the droplet diameter, which in turn is calculated from
other solution variables such as H2Ol volume fraction and droplet number.

584

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Non-equilibrium Phase Change Case

5.

Click OK.

6.

Apply the same settings to domain S1.

Most of the settings will have been already copied from domain R1 to domain S1, however the
nucleation model settings must be set explicitly.

7.

Open S1 Inlet and enter the following settings:

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer

Fluid
Values

Value

> Option

Fluid Dependent

Boundary Conditions

H2Og

Boundary Conditions
> H2Og
> Heat Transfer
> Option

Total Temperature

Boundary Conditions
> H2Og
> Heat Transfer
> Total Temperature

328.5 [K]

Boundary Conditions
> H2Og
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Value

Boundary Conditions
> H2Og
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

1.0

Boundary Conditions

H2Ol

Boundary Conditions
> H2Ol
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Value

Boundary Conditions
> H2Ol
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

585

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

Tab

Setting

Value

> Volume Fraction

> Volume Fraction

Boundary Conditions
> H2Ol
> Droplet Number
> Option

Specified Number
[a]

Boundary Conditions
> H2Ol
> Droplet Number
> Droplet Number

0 [m^-3]

a. Not Specified Diameter.

8.

Click OK.

9.

Click Solver Control

10. On the Basic Settings tab, set Convergence Control > Fluid Timescale Control > Physical Timescale
to 5e-005 [s] and click OK.
Because the non-equilibrium simulation involves vapor and therefore tends to be unstable, it is
recommended that you set the physical timescale to a relatively small value. The value set here
was found to be suitable for this simulation by trial and error.

26.5.1.2. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

WaterVaporNonEq.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

586

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Non-equilibrium Phase Change Case

26.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

The Define Run dialog box will be displayed when CFX-Solver Manager launches. CFX-Solver Input
File will already be set to the name of the CFX-Solver input file just written.
1.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

Note
You may notice messages in the solver output regarding problems with evaluating
material properties. This is a result of the absolute pressure reaching values outside the
range of internal material property tables. In this case, the messages are temporary and
stop appearing well before convergence. If you encounter a simulation where the messages persist, or you otherwise suspect that the results might be adversely affected, you
can change the ranges of internal material property tables by editing the relevant materials in CFX-Pre.

2.

Select Post-Process Results.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

4.

Click OK.

26.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

The non-equilibrium calculation creates a number of solution variables. The most important ones, which
are briefly described in the following section, are supercooling, nucleation rate, droplet number, mass
fraction, and particle diameter.
1.

When CFD-Post starts, the Domain Selector dialog box might appear. If it does, ensure that both the R1
and S1 domains are selected, then click OK to load the results from these domains.

2.

Click the Turbo tab.

3.

The Turbo Initialization dialog box is displayed, and asks you whether you want to auto-initialize all
components. Click Yes.
The Turbo tree view shows the two components in domains R1 and S1. In this case, the initialization
works without problems. If there were any problems initializing a component, this would be indicated
in the tree view.

Note
If you do not see the Turbo Initialization dialog box, or as an alternative to using that
dialog box, you can initialize all components by clicking the Initialize All Components
button, which is visible initially by default, or after double-clicking the Initialization
object in the Turbo tree view.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

587

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

26.5.3.1. Specifying Locators for Plots

Make a 2D surface at 50% span to be used as a locator for plots:
1.

On the main menu select Insert > Location > Turbo Surface and name it Turbo Surface 1.

2.

On the Geometry tab, set Method to Constant Span and Value to 0.5.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Turn off the visibility of Turbo Surface 1.

26.5.3.2. Supercooling Contour Plot

The non-equilibrium solution provides considerable detail on conditions related to phase transition. In
particular, the solution tracks the evolution of metastable conditions in the flow through a supercooling
variable obtained on the basis of local pressure and gas phase temperature. The supercooling level is
the primary variable influencing the nucleation model. The nucleation model provides an estimate of
the rate of production of critically sized nuclei that are stable enough to grow in a supercooled vapor
flow.
In the next step, you will plot the degree of supercooling, where the supercooling represents the difference between the saturation temperature, set by the local pressure in the flow, and the associated
local gas phase temperature. At the inlet, supercooling is often shown as negative, indicating superheated
conditions. At equilibrium conditions, no supercooling is allowed since liquid and vapor phases always
share the same temperature. Also, critical homogeneous nucleation at pressures below one atmosphere
generally involves supercooling levels of up to 35 to 40 K, depending on rate of expansion in the flow.
1.

Create a supercooling contour plot on Turbo Surface 1.

This will display the degree of non-equilibrium conditions in the gas phase prior to homogeneous
phase transition.

2.

a.

Create a new contour plot named Degree of Supercooling.

b.

In the details view on the Geometry tab, set Locations to Turbo Surface 1 and Variable to
H2Og.Supercooling then click Apply.

Turn off the visibility of Degree of Supercooling when you have finished observing the results.

26.5.3.3. Nucleation Rate and Droplet Number Contour Plots

In the next step, you will plot the nucleation rate to show the level of nucleation attained, along with
the droplet number concentration that is present in the flow following nucleation. Note that the nucleation rates reach very high levels, with peak values remaining in the flow for only a short time (that is,
as long as supercooled conditions remain). The supercooled droplets released at nucleation grow rapidly,
taking mass from the vapor phase and releasing thermal energy, which acts to rapidly reduce vapor
supercooling to near zero. This fact removes further significant nucleation and is why the phase transition
process is limited to a narrow region in the flow in most cases.
1.

Create a nucleation rate contour plot on Turbo Surface 1.

This will display the nucleation front at the point of maximum supercooling.

588

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Non-equilibrium Phase Change Case

a.

Create a new contour plot named Nucleation Rate.

b.

In the details view on the Geometry tab, set Locations to Turbo Surface 1 and Variable to
H2Ol.Nucleation Rate.

c.

Set Range to Local and then click Apply.

2.

Turn off the visibility of Nucleation Rate when you have finished observing the results.

3.

Create a droplet number contour plot on Turbo Surface 1.

This will display the predicted droplet concentration resulting from phase transition.

4.

a.

Create a new contour plot named Droplet Number.

b.

In the details view on the Geometry tab, set Locations to Turbo Surface 1 and Variable to
H2Ol.Droplet Number.

c.

Click Apply.

Turn off the visibility of Droplet Number when you have finished observing the results.

26.5.3.4. Mass Fraction and Particle Diameter Contour Plots

In this section, you will plot the mass fraction (or wetness) of the condensed phase. From the mass
fraction and droplet number, it is possible to derive a particle diameter, which you will also plot in this
section. Notice that the particle diameters appear in the flow at very small sizes, in the range of 5.0E-9
m, but grow rapidly so that, when leaving the nucleation zone, they are approximately an order of
magnitude larger. Since the pressure is dropping through the turbine, droplet sizes continue to increase
along with the wetness. To emphasize the particle diameters proceeding out of the nucleation zone,
you will set the contour range for viewing. In flow regions near walls, where expansion rate is reduced,
small amounts of liquid may have droplet diameters that grow to large sizes relative to those coming
from the nucleation zone. Without setting the range, these particle diameters near the walls will be
emphasized.
1.

Create a contour plot showing the mass fraction of the condensed phase on Turbo Surface 1.
Condensed droplets grow in size and accumulate mass at the expense of the gas phase.
a.

Create a new contour plot named Mass Fraction of Condensed Phase H2Ol.

b.

In the details view on the Geometry tab, set Locations to Turbo Surface 1 and Variable to
H2Ol.Mass Fraction.

c.

Click Apply.
Comparing the mass fraction in the non-equilibrium case to the equilibrium solution previously
viewed, you can see that phase transition is considerably delayed such that it occurs in the
blade passages of the rotor rather than the stator. This is a typical consequence of non-equilibrium flow, and reflects real flow situations.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

589

Axial Turbine Equilibrium and Non-Equilibrium Steam Predictions

2.

Turn off the visibility of Mass Fraction of Condensed Phase H2Ol when you have finished observing the
results.

3.

Create a particle diameter contour plot on Turbo Surface 1.

The size of the condensed droplets is calculated from the droplet number and volume fraction of
the condensed phase.

4.

a.

Create a new contour plot named Particle Diameter.

b.

In the details view on the Geometry tab, set Locations to Turbo Surface 1 and Variable to
H2Ol.Particle Diameter.

c.

Set Range to User Specified then set Min to 0 [m] and Max to 1e-07 [m].

d.

Click Apply.

Turn off the visibility of Particle Diameter when you have finished observing the results.

26.5.3.5. Gas and Condensed Phase Static Temperature Contour Plots

In a non-equilibrium prediction, the gas phase temperature is different from the condensed phase
temperature. The former is determined from a transport equation and the latter from an algebraic relationship relating droplet temperature to its diameter (through a small droplet model already described).
In this section, you will plot the different temperature fields. It should be noted that, for the case of the
condensed phase temperature field, before droplets are actually formed, there is no meaningful droplet
temperature. At the point droplets are formed by nucleation, their temperature is at the gas phase.
Once the droplets have grown in size, their temperature is very close to the saturation temperature.
Because the non-equilibrium solution considers the condensed phase temperatures separate from the
gas phase, the influence of thermodynamic losses are included in the predictions. This is because it
becomes possible to account for heat flow between the vapor and condensed phases as they pass
through the domain. Due to this, non-equilibrium efficiency predictions are more accurate than ones
obtained using an equilibrium model.
1.

Create a gas phase static temperature contour plot on Turbo Surface 1:

a.

Create a new contour plot named Gas Phase Static Temperature.

b.

In the details view on the Geometry tab, set Locations to Turbo Surface 1 and Variable to
H2Og.Temperature.

c.

Click Apply.

2.

Turn off the visibility of Gas Phase Static Temperature when you have finished observing the results.

3.

Create a condensed phase static temperature contour plot on Turbo Surface 1.

590

a.

Create a new contour plot named Condensed Phase Static Temperature.

b.

In the details view on the Geometry tab, set Locations to Turbo Surface 1 and Variable to
H2Ol.Temperature.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Non-equilibrium Phase Change Case

c.
4.

Click Apply.

Once you have observed the results, save the state and exit CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

591

592

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 27: Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

This tutorial includes:
27.1.Tutorial Features
27.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
27.3. Preparing the Working Directory
27.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
27.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
27.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

27.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Setting up an immersed solids domain.
Applying a counter-rotating wall boundary.
Monitoring an expression during a solver run.
Creating an XY-transient chart in CFD-Post.
Creating a keyframe animation.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Domain Type

Immersed Solid
Fluid Domain

Analysis Type

Transient

Fluid Type

Continuous Fluid

Boundary Conditions

Inlet Boundary
Outlet Boundary

CFD-Post

Domain Interface

Fluid Fluid

Chart

Mass Flow Rate

Animation

Keyframe

27.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

In this tutorial, you will simulate a gear pump that drives a flow of water. This tutorial makes use of the
Immersed Solids capability of ANSYS CFX in order to model a solid that moves through a fluid.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

593

Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

The outlet has an average relative static pressure of 1 psi; the relative total pressure at the inlet is 0 psi.
The inner rotor (gear) rotates at a rate of 7 revolutions per second; the outer rotor rotates at 6 revolutions
per second. The diameter of the fluid region between the rotors is approximately 7.3 cm.
You will use an immersed solid domain to model the inner rotor, a rotating fluid domain to model the
water immediately surrounding the inner rotor, and a stationary fluid domain to model the water in
the inlet and outlet channels. To model the stationary pump housing (not shown in the figure), you
will apply a counter-rotating wall condition to the top (high Z) surface of the rotating fluid domain, on
the non-overlap portion (which lies between the inlet and outlet channels). To model the upper surfaces
of the teeth of the outer rotor, you will apply a rotating wall condition on the non-overlap portions of
the lower (low Z) surfaces of the inlet and outlet chambers.
The following conditions will be met to promote the establishment of a cyclic flow pattern:
The mesh of the rotating domain should be rotationally periodic so that it looks the same after each (outer)
rotor tooth passes.
The mesh on the outer boundary of the immersed solid domain should be rotationally periodic so that it
looks the same after each (inner) rotor tooth passes. (The mesh inside the immersed solid domain has no
effect in this tutorial.)
An integer number of time steps should pass as one rotor tooth passes.

594

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

27.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

ImmersedSolid.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

27.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

This section describes the step-by-step definition of the flow physics in CFX-Pre for a steady-state simulation.
1.

If you want to set up the case automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run ImmersedSolid.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 609).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type ImmersedSolid.

6.

Click Save.

27.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

595

Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

ImmersedSolid.gtm

Click Open.

27.4.2. Creating Expressions for Time Step and Total Time

Next, you will create an expression defining the time step size for this transient analysis. One tooth of
the inner (or outer) rotor passes every 1/42 s. Choose a time step that resolves this motion in 30 intervals.
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > Expression.

2.

In the Insert Expression dialog box, type dt.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Set Definition, to (1/42)[s]/30.

5.

Click Apply to create the expression.

Next, you will create an expression defining the total simulation time. Make the simulation run long
enough for 3 rotor teeth to pass: 3/42 s. This will give the solution time to establish a periodic nature.
1.

Create an expression called total time.

2.

Set Definition to (3/42)[s].

3.

Click Apply.

27.4.3. Setting the Analysis Type

Define the simulation as transient, using the expressions you created earlier.
1.

Under the Outline tab, edit Analysis Type

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

ANSYS Multifield Coupling

> Option

Value

None

Analysis Type
> Option

Transient

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Option

596

Total Time

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Total Time

total time

[a]

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Option

Timesteps

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Timesteps

dt

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Time
a. You first need to click the Enter Expression

3.

0 [s]
icon beside the field.

Click OK.

27.4.4. Creating the Domains

This simulation requires three domains: two fluid domains and one immersed solid domain. First you
will create an immersed solid domain.

27.4.4.1. Creating an Immersed Solid Domain

Create the immersed solid domain as follows:
1.

Select Insert > Domain from the main menu, or click Domain

2.

In the Insert Domain dialog box, set the name to ImmersedSolid and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

597

Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

Tab

Setting

Value

> Location

Inner Rotor

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Immersed Solid

Location and Type

> Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Option

Rotating

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Angular Velocity

7 [rev s^-1]

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Axis Definition
> Option

Two Points

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis From

0.00383, 0, 0

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis To

4.

0.00383, 0, 1

Click OK.

27.4.4.2. Creating the Stationary Fluid Domain

Create the stationary fluid domain according to the problem description:
1.

Create a new domain named StationaryFluid.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

598

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

Channels

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Fluid Domain

Location and Type

> Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Fluid 1
> Option

Material Library

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Fluid 1
> Material

Water

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Fluid 1
> Morphology
> Option

Continuous Fluid

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

0 [psi]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Models
> Option

Non Buoyant

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Option

Stationary

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

599

Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

Tab
Fluid Models

Setting

Value

> Option

None

Heat Transfer
> Option

None

Turbulence
> Option

k-Epsilon

Turbulence
> Wall Function

Scalable

Combustion
> Option

None

Thermal Radiation

Initialization

> Option

None

Domain Initialization

(Selected)

Domain Initialization
> Initial Conditions
> Velocity Type

Cartesian

Domain Initialization
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Domain Initialization
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Domain Initialization
> Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Domain Initialization
> Initial Conditions

600

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Cartesian Velocity

Components
>W

0 [m s^-1]

Domain Initialization
> Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Domain Initialization
> Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Relative Pressure

1 [psi] * step(-y/1
[cm])

[a]

Domain Initialization
> Initial Conditions
> Turbulence
> Option

Medium (Intensity
= 5%)

a. This initial condition improves numerical stability by avoiding an adverse pressure

gradient at the outlet.

3.

Click OK.

27.4.4.3. Creating the Rotating Fluid Domain

Create the rotating fluid domain according to the problem description:
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > StationaryFluid and
select Duplicate.

2.

Right-click Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > Copy of StationaryFluid and select Rename.

3.

Rename the domain to RotatingFluid.

4.

Edit RotatingFluid.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

601

Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

Tab

Setting

Value

> Location

Gear Chamber

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Option

Rotating

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Angular Velocity

6 [rev s^-1]

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis

6.

Global Z

Click OK.

27.4.5. Creating the Domain Interface

Add a domain interface that connects the StationaryFluid and RotatingFluid domains:
1.

Click Insert > Domain Interface from the main menu or click Domain Interface

2.

Accept the default domain interface name and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

StationaryFluid

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Channel Side

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

602

RotatingFluid

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Interface Side 2
> Region List

Chamber Side

Interface Models
> Option

General Connection

Interface Models
> Frame Change/Mixing Model
> Option

Transient Rotor
Stator

Interface Models
> Pitch Change
> Option[i]
Additional
Interface
Models

None

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Conservative
Interface Flux

Mass and Momentum

> Interface Model
> Option
Mesh
Connection

None

Mesh Connection Method

> Mesh Connection
> Option

i.

4.

GGI

Setting this option to None will generate a global warning in the message
window below the viewer. In this case, the warning can be ignored because the
full 360 are being modeled on both sides of the interface.

Click OK.

Apply a counter-rotating no-slip wall condition to the non-overlap portion of the domain interface on
the rotating domain side, because this surface represents part of the stationary housing of the pump.
1.

Edit RotatingFluid > Domain Interface 1 Side 2.

If this object does not appear in the tree view, then edit Case Options > General, select Show
Interface Boundaries in Outline Tree, and click OK.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

603

Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

Tab

Setting

Value

Nonoverlap
Conditions

Nonoverlap Conditions

(Selected)

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

No Slip Wall

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Mass and Momentum
> Wall Velocity

(Selected)

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Mass and Momentum
> Wall Velocity
> Option

3.

Counter Rotating
Wall

Click OK.

Apply a rotating no-slip wall condition to the non-overlap portions of the domain interface on the stationary domain side, because these surfaces represent faces of the rotor teeth of the outer rotor, and
the latter rotates at 6 rev/s about the Z axis.
1.

Edit StationaryFluid > Domain Interface 1 Side 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Nonoverlap
Conditions

Nonoverlap Conditions

(Selected)

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

No Slip Wall

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Mass and Momentum
> Wall Velocity

(Selected)

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Mass and Momentum
> Wall Velocity
> Option

Rotating Wall

Nonoverlap Conditions

604

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Mass and Momentum

> Wall Velocity
> Angular Velocity

6 [rev s^-1]

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Mass and Momentum
> Wall Velocity
> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Nonoverlap Conditions
> Mass and Momentum
> Wall Velocity
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis

3.

Global Z

Click OK.

27.4.6. Creating Boundary Conditions

This section outlines the steps to create the inlet and outlet boundary conditions, as specified in the
problem description.

27.4.6.1. Inlet Boundary

Create a total pressure inlet at a relative pressure of 0 psi:
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click StationaryFluid and select Insert > Boundary.

2.

Set Name to in and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

Inlet

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Total Pressure
(stable)

Mass And Momentum

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

605

Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

Tab

Setting

Value

> Relative Pressure

0 [psi]

Flow Direction
> Option

Normal to
Boundary Condition

Turbulence
> Option

4.

Medium (Intensity
= 5%)

Click OK.

27.4.6.2. Outlet Boundary

Create an outlet with a relative average static pressure of 1 psi:
1.

Create a boundary named out in the StationaryFluid domain.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

Outlet

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Average Static
Pressure

Mass And Momentum

> Relative Pressure

1 [psi]

Mass And Momentum

> Pres. Profile Blend

0.05

Pressure Averaging
> Option

3.

Average Over
Whole Outlet

Click OK.

27.4.7. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

606

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

Value

High Resolution

Transient Scheme
> Option

Second Order
Backward Euler

Transient Scheme
> Timestep Initialization
> Option

Automatic

Turbulence Numerics
> Option

First Order

Convergence Control
> Min. Coeff. Loops

Convergence Control
> Max. Coeff. Loops

10

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Timescale Control

Coefficient Loops

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Type

RMS

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

3.

1.0 E 4

Click OK.

27.4.8. Setting Output Control

Set up the solver to output transient results files that record pressure, velocity, and velocity in the stationary frame, on every time step:
1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

In the Transient Results list box, click Add new item

click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of Transient Results 1:

, set Name to Transient Results 1, and

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

607

Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

Setting

Value

Option

Selected Variables

File Compression

Default

Output Variables List

Pressure, Velocity,
Velocity in Stn
Frame

Output Boundary Flows

(Selected)

Output Boundary Flows

> Boundary Flows

All

Output Frequency
> Option

Every Timestep

5.

Click the Monitor tab.

6.

Select Monitor Objects.

7.

Under Monitor Points and Expressions:

8.

a.

Click Add new item

b.

Accept the default name and click OK.

c.

Set Option to Expression.

d.

Set Expression Value to massFlow()@in.

Click OK.

27.4.9. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

ImmersedSolid.def

Click Save.

Note
A warning message will appear due to the global warning that was mentioned earlier
in Creating the Domain Interface (p. 602). Click Yes.

608

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.
4.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

27.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and the CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD
problem by following the instructions below:
1.

In CFX-Solver Manager, ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.
If CFX-Solver Manager is launched from CFX-Pre, the information required to perform a solver run
is entered automatically in the Define Run dialog box.

2.

Click Start Run.

The solver run begins and the progress is displayed in a split screen.

3.

Click the User Points tab (which appears after the first time step has been computed) and monitor the
value of Monitor Point 1 as the solution proceeds.

4.

Rescale the monitor plot so that you can readily see the time-periodic oscillations in mass flow that occur
after the initial transient phase:
a.

Right-click anywhere in the User Points plot and select Monitor Properties.

b.

In the Monitor Properties: User Points dialog box, on the Range Settings tab, select Set Manual
Scale (Linear).

c.

Set the lower and upper bounds to 0.015 and 0.055 respectively.

d.

Click OK.

5.

Select the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

6.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

7.

Click OK.

Note
During the Solver Manager run, you may observe a notice at the 47th and 48th time steps
warning you that A wall has been placed at portion(s) of an OUTLET boundary condition ...
to prevent fluid from flowing into the domain. The mass flow at the inlet drops to its lowest
level throughout the cycle at this point, causing a reduction in the velocity at the outlet.
Because there is turbulence at the outlet, this reduced velocity allows a tiny vortex to produce
a small, virtually negligible, amount of backflow at the outlet. Figure 27.1: Velocity Vectors
on the Outlet (p. 610) shows velocity vectors at the outlet when the mass flow at the inlet is
lowest (48th time step) and when the mass flow is greatest (88th time step). In the figure,
you can see where this slight backflow occurs for the 48th time step.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

609

Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

Figure 27.1: Velocity Vectors on the Outlet

27.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will generate a chart to show the mass flow rate through the machine as a function
of time. You will also prepare an animation of the machine in operation, complete with velocity vectors.

27.6.1. Creating a Chart of Mass Flow versus Time

During the solver run, you observed a monitor plot that showed mass flow versus time step. Here, you
will make a similar plot of mass flow versus time. As you did in the monitor plot, adjust the vertical
axis range to focus on the time-periodic oscillations in mass flow that occur after the initial transient
phase.
1.

When CFD-Post starts, the Domain Selector dialog box might appear. If it does, ensure that the Immersed
Solid, RotatingFluid and StationaryFluid domains are selected, then click OK to load the
results from these domains.

2.

A dialog box will notify you that the case contains immersed solid domain. Click OK to continue.

3.

Create a new chart named Mass Flow Rate.

The Chart Viewer tab appears.

4.

610

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

General

Type

XY-Transient or
Sequence

Title

Mass Flow Rate at

the Inlet over Time

5.

Click the Data Series tab.

6.

If the Data Series list box is empty, right-click in it and select New, or click New

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Data Series

Series 1

(Selected)

Name

Inlet Mass Flow

Data Source
> Expression

(Selected)

Data Source
> Expression
Y Axis

massFlow()@in

[a]

Axis Range
> Determine ranges automatically

(Cleared)

Axis Range
> Min

0.015

Axis Range
> Max

0.055

a. You will have to either type it manually or right-click and choose Functions >
CFD-Post > massFlow()@ from the shortcut menu, then type in.

8.

Click Apply.

The mass flow rate settles into a repeating pattern with a period of 1/42 s, which is the time it takes a
rotor tooth to pass.

27.6.2. Creating a Velocity Vector Plot

Create a slice plane and then make a vector plot on the slice plane as follows:
1.

Click the 3D Viewer tab.

2.

Create a new plane named Plane 1.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

611

Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Domains

RotatingFluid

Definition
> Method

XY Plane

Definition
>Z

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Turn off the visibility of Plane 1.

6.

Create a new vector plot named Vector 1.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

0.003 [m]

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Domains

All Domains

Definition
> Locations

Plane 1

Definition
> Sampling

Rectangular Grid

Definition
> Spacing

0.03

Definition

Color

Symbol

8.

> Variable

Velocity

Mode

Use Plot Variable

Range

User Specified

Min

0 [m s^-1]

Max

0.8 [m s^-1]

Symbol

Arrow3D

Symbol Size

15

Normalized Symbols

(Cleared)

Click Apply.

27.6.3. Changing the Appearance in Preparation for an Animation

Make the inlet and outlet visible as follows:

612

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

1.

Edit StationaryFluid > in.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Render

Show Faces

(Cleared)

Show Mesh Lines

(Selected)

Show Mesh Lines

> Edge Angle

105 [degree]

Show Mesh Lines

> Line Width

Show Mesh Lines

> Color Mode

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Apply the same settings to StationaryFluid > out.

Default

Make the inlet and outlet channels visible as follows:

1.

Edit StationaryFluid > StationaryFluid Default.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Render

Show Faces

(Selected)

Show Faces

3.

> Transparency

0.8

Show Mesh Lines

(Cleared)

Click Apply.

Make the walls of the rotating fluid domain visible as follows:

1.

Edit RotatingFluid > RotatingFluid Default.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Constant

Color

(White)

Show Faces

(Selected)

Render

Show Faces
> Transparency

0.0

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

613

Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

Tab

3.

Setting

Value

Show Mesh Lines

(Cleared)

Click Apply.

Make the walls of the immersed solid domain visible as follows:

1.

Edit ImmersedSolid > ImmersedSolid Default.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Constant

Color

(Blue)

Show Faces

(Selected)

Render

Show Faces

3.

> Transparency

0.0

Show Mesh Lines

(Cleared)

Click Apply.

Make the following other changes in preparation for the animation that you will create in the next
section:
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Z.

2.

Rotate the view a few degrees so that you can see the 3D nature of the geometry.

3.

Turn off the visibility of User Locations and Plots > Wireframe.

27.6.4. Creating a Keyframe Animation

In this section, you will generate an animation that shows the changing velocity field on Plane 1. To
take advantage of the periodic nature of the solution, you will record a short animation that can be
played in a repeating loop in an MPEG player. Start the animation at the 61st time step (a time at which
the flow has settled into a repeating pattern) and end it at the 90th time step. The 60th time step corresponds with 2/42 s, and the 90th corresponds with 3/42 s; the 1/42 s interval is the period over which
the solution repeats. Because the 60th and 90th time steps look the same, the 60th time step is omitted
to avoid having a pair of adjacent identical frames in the animation when the latter is played in a repeating loop.
and load the 61st time step.

1.

Click Timestep Selector

2.

Click Animation

3.

In the Animation dialog box, select the Keyframe Animation option.

614

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.

Click New

to create KeyframeNo1.

5.

Select KeyframeNo1, then set # of Frames to 28, then press Enter while the cursor is in the # of Frames
box.

Tip
Be sure to press Enter and confirm that the new number appears in the list before
continuing.

6.

Use the Timestep Selector to load the 90th time step.

7.

In the Animation dialog box, click New

8.

Ensure that More Animation Options

9.

Select Loop.

10. Ensure that the Repeat forever button

to create KeyframeNo2.
is pushed down to show more animation settings.

next to Repeat is not selected (not pushed down).

11. Select Save Movie.

12. Set Format to MPEG1.
13. Click Browse

next to Save Movie.

14. Set File name to ImmersedSolid.mpg.

15. If required, set the path location to a different directory.
16. Click Save.
The movie file name (including path) has been set, but the animation has not yet been produced.
17. Click To Beginning

This ensures that the animation will begin at the first keyframe.
18. After the first keyframe has been loaded, click Play the animation

The MPEG will be created as the animation proceeds.

This will be slow, since results for each time step will be loaded and objects will be created.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

615

Modeling a Gear Pump using an Immersed Solid

To view the movie file, you need to use a viewer that supports the MPEG format.

Note
To explore additional animation options, click the Options button. On the Advanced
tab of the Animation Options dialog box, there is a Save Frames As Image Files check
box. By selecting this check box, the JPEG or PPM files used to encode each frame of
the movie will persist after movie creation; otherwise, they will be deleted.

19. When you have finished, quit CFD-Post.

616

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 28: Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

This tutorial includes:
28.1.Tutorial Features
28.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
28.3. Preparing the Working Directory
28.4. Simulating the Pump with High Inlet Pressure
28.5. Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and High Inlet Pressure
28.6. Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and a Range of Inlet Pressures

28.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Preparing and running a series of related simulations to generate cavitation performance data for a pump.
Creating a drop curve chart in CFD-Post.
Using isosurfaces in CFD-Post to visualize regions of cavitation.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

Water at 25 C
Water Vapour at 25 C

Fluid Models

Homogeneous Model

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Isothermal

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall (Counter Rotating)

CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Time Scale

Plots

Contour

28.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial uses a simple pump to illustrate the basic concepts of setting up, running, and postprocessing
a cavitation problem in ANSYS CFX.
When liquid is suddenly accelerated in order to move around an obstruction, a decrease in the local
pressure is present. Sometimes, this pressure decrease is substantial enough that the pressure falls below
the saturation pressure determined by the temperature of the liquid. In such cases, the fluid begins to
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

617

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

vaporize in a process called cavitation. Cavitation involves a very rapid increase in the volume occupied
by a given mass of fluid, and when significant, can influence the flow distribution and operating performance of the device. In addition, the vaporization of the liquid, and the subsequent collapse of the
vapor bubbles as the local pressure recovers, can cause damage to solid surfaces. For these reasons
(among others), it is desirable, in the design and operation of devices required to move liquid, to be
able to determine if cavitation is present, including where and the extent of the cavitation. Furthermore
it is also useful to examine this behavior for a range of conditions.
The model conditions for this example are turbulent and incompressible. The speed and direction of
rotation of the pump is 132 rad/sec about the Z axis (positive rotation following the right hand rule).
The relevant problem parameters are:
Inflow total pressure = 100000 Pa
Outflow mass flow = 16 kg/s
Inlet turbulence intensity = 0.03
Inlet length scale = 0.03 m

The SHF (Societe Hydraulique Francaise) pump has seven impeller blades. Due to the periodic nature
of the geometry, only a single blade passage of the original pump must be modeled, therefore minimizing the computer resources required to obtain a solution.
The objective of this tutorial is to show pump cavitation performance in the form of a drop curve. The
drop curve is a chart of Head versus Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH). This tutorial provides the data
for the drop curve, but also has instructions for optionally generating the data by running a series of
simulations with progressively lower inlet pressures. Each simulation is initialized with the results of the
previous simulation.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

618

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Pump with High Inlet Pressure

28.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

Cavitation.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

28.4. Simulating the Pump with High Inlet Pressure

A steady-state high-pressure (inlet pressure of 100,000 Pa) simulation of the pump without cavitation
(that is, simulation of the pump without water vapor) will first be set up to be used as an initial values
file for the cavitation simulation later on in the tutorial.

28.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run CavitationIni.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 627).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type CavitationIni.

6.

Click Save.

28.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

619

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

3.

Setting

Value

File name

Cavitation.gtm

Click Open.

28.4.1.2. Loading Materials

Because this tutorial uses water at 25 C and water vapor at 25 C, you need to load these materials.
Note that you will use only the liquid water for the first part of the tutorial. The vapor is being loaded
now in anticipation of using it for the cavitation model later in the tutorial.
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation > Materials and select Import Library Data.
The Select Library Data to Import dialog box is displayed.

2.

Expand Water Data.

3.

While holding down the Ctrl key, select both Water Vapour at 25 C and Water at 25 C.

4.

Click OK.

28.4.1.3. Creating the Domain

1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned on.
A domain named Default Domain should appear under the Simulation branch.

2.

Rename Default Domain to Pump.

3.

Edit Pump.

4.

Under Fluid and Particle Definitions, delete Fluid 1 and create a new fluid definition named Liquid
Water.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Liquid Water

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Liquid Water
> Material

Water at 25 C

[a]

Domain Models
> Pressure
> Reference Pressure

0 [atm]

Domain Models

620

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Pump with High Inlet Pressure

Tab

Setting

Value

> Domain Motion

> Option

Rotating

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Angular Velocity
a. Click the Ellipsis icon

6.

132 [radian s^-1]

to open the Material dialog box.

Click OK.

28.4.1.4. Creating the Boundaries

28.4.1.4.1. Inlet Boundary
1.

Create a new boundary named Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

INBlock INFLOW

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Stat. Frame Tot.

Press

Mass And Momentum

> Relative Pressure

100000 [Pa]

Flow Direction
> Option

Cartesian
Components

Flow Direction
> X Component

Flow Direction
> Y Component

Flow Direction
> Z Component

Turbulence

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

621

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Turbulence
> Option
> Fractional Intensity

0.03

Turbulence
> Option
> Eddy Length Scale

3.

0.03 [m]

Click OK.

28.4.1.4.2. Outlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named Outlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

OUTBlock
OUTFLOW

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Mass Flow Rate

Mass and Momentum

> Mass Flow Rate

3.

16 [kg/s]

Click OK.

28.4.1.4.3. Wall Boundaries

Set up the hub and shroud to be a stationary (non-rotating) wall.
1.

Create a new boundary named Stationary Wall.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Stationary Wall:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

OUTBlock HUB,
OUTBlock SHROUD
[a]

622

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Pump with High Inlet Pressure

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Wall Velocity

Value

(Selected)

Mass and Momentum

> Wall Velocity
> Option

Counter Rotating
Wall

a. Click the Ellipsis icon

to open the Selection Dialog dialog box. In that dialog
box, select multiple items while holding down the CTRL key. Click OK.

3.

Click OK.

28.4.1.5. Creating Domain Interfaces

1.

Click Insert > Domain Interface and, in the dialog box that appears, set Name to Periodic Interface
and click OK.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Periodic Interface:

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Value

INBlock PER1,
OUTBlock PER1,
Passage PER1

Interface Side 2
> Region List

INBlock PER2,
OUTBlock PER2,
Passage PER2

Interface Models
> Option

3.

Rotational
Periodicity

Click OK.

28.4.1.5.1. Inblock to Passage Interface

1.

Select Insert > Domain Interface and in the dialog box that appears, set Name to Inblock to Passage
Interface and click OK.

2.

Configure the following settings of Inblock to Passage Interface:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

623

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Value

OUTFLOW INBlock

Interface Side 2
> Region List
Mesh
Connection

INFLOW Passage

Mesh Connection Method

> Mesh Connection
> Option

3.

1:1

Click OK.

28.4.1.5.2. Passage to Outblock Interface

1.

Select Insert > Domain Interface and in the dialog box that appears, set the Name to Passage to
Outblock Interface and click OK.

2.

Configure the following settings of Passage to Outblock Interface:

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Value

OUTFLOW Passage

Interface Side 2
> Region List
Mesh
Connection

INFLOW OUTBlock

Mesh Connection Method

> Mesh Connection
> Option

3.

1:1

Click OK.

With the boundary conditions and domain interfaces defined above, the default boundary of a rotating
wall is applied to the blade and the upstream portions of the hub and shroud.

28.4.1.6. Setting Initial Values

The initial values that will be set up are consistent with the inlet boundary conditions settings.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

624

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Pump with High Inlet Pressure

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity

Components
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>U

0 [m/s]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>V

0 [m/s]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>W

1 [m/s]

Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Relative Pressure

100000 [Pa]

Initial Conditions
> Turbulence
> Option

Intensity and
Length Scale

Initial Conditions
> Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

625

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

Tab

Setting

Value

> Turbulence
> Fractional Intensity
> Value

0.03

Initial Conditions
> Turbulence
> Eddy Length Scale
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Turbulence
> Eddy Length Scale
> Value

3.

0.03 [m]

Click OK.

28.4.1.7. Setting Solver Controls

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Convergence Control
> Max Iterations

Value

500

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

1e-3[s]

[a]

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

7.5e-6

a. The physical timescale that will be set up is derived from the rotational speed
of the blades and the fact that there are 7 blades in the full machine.

626

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Pump with High Inlet Pressure

3.

Click OK.

28.4.1.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

CavitationIni.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

Save the simulation.

28.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

CFX-Solver Manager should be running. You will be able to obtain a solution to the CFD problem by
following the instructions below.
1.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

You may see a notice about an artificial wall at the inlet. This notice indicates that the flow is trying
to exit at the inlet. This can be ignored because the amount of reverse flow is very low.
CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

28.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

CFD-Post should be running.
This case is run with temperatures around 300 K. The vapor pressure of water at this temperature is
around 3574 Pa. To confirm that water vapor or cavitation is not likely for this operating condition of
the pump, an isosurface of pressure at 3574 Pa will be created.
Create an isosurface of pressure at 3574 [Pa]:
1.

Select Insert > Location > Isosurface and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) in the details view:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

627

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Variable

Value

Pressure

Definition
> Value

3.

3574 [Pa]

Click Apply.
Notice that the isosurface does not appear. There is no place in the blade passage where the
pressure is equal to 3574 Pa, which implies that there is no water vapor.

4.

Quit CFD-Post, saving the state at your discretion.

28.5. Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and High Inlet Pressure
The simulation will be modified in CFX-Pre to include water vapor and enable the cavitation model.
Monitor points will also be defined to observe the Net Positive Suction Head (NSPH) and pressure head
values.

28.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

The following topics are discussed:
28.5.1.1. Modifying the Domain and Boundary Conditions
28.5.1.2. Creating Expressions
28.5.1.3. Adding Monitor Points
28.5.1.4. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def ) File

28.5.1.1. Modifying the Domain and Boundary Conditions

1.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
CavitationIni.cfx
CavitationIni_001.res
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already running.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run Cavitation_100000.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

628

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 632).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and High Inlet Pressure

4.

Open CavitationIni.cfx and save it as Cavitation_100000.cfx.

100000 indicates the inlet pressure of the simulation.

5.

Open Pump for editing.

6.

In the Fluid and Particle Definitions section, click Add new item

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

and name it Water Vapor.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Liquid Water

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Liquid Water
> Material

Water at 25 C

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Water Vapor

[a]

Fluid and Particle Definitions

> Water Vapor
> Material
Fluid Models

Multiphase
> Homogeneous Model

Fluid Pair
Models

Water Vapour at 25
C

(Selected)

[b]

Fluid Pair
> Liquid Water | Water Vapor
> Mass Transfer
> Option

Cavitation

Fluid Pair
> Liquid Water | Water Vapor
> Mass Transfer
> Cavitation
> Option

Rayleigh Plesset

Fluid Pair
> Liquid Water | Water Vapor
> Mass Transfer

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

629

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

Tab

Setting

Value

> Cavitation
> Mean Diameter

2e-6 [m]

Fluid Pair
> Liquid Water | Water Vapor
> Mass Transfer
> Cavitation
> Saturation Pressure

(Selected)

Fluid Pair
> Liquid Water | Water Vapor
> Mass Transfer
> Cavitation
> Saturation Pressure
> Saturation Pressure

3574 [Pa]

[c]

a. Click the Ellipsis icon

to open the Material dialog box, then click the Import
Library Data icon to open the Select Library Data to Import dialog box. In that
dialog box, expand Water Data in the tree, then multi-select Water at 25
C and Water Vapour at 25 C and click OK.
b. The homogeneous model will be selected because the interphase transfer rate
is very large in the pump. This results in all fluids sharing a common flow field
and turbulence.
c. The pressure for a corresponding saturation temperature at which the water in
the pump will boil into its vapor phase is 3574 Pa.

8.

Click OK.
Error messages appear, but you will correct those problems in the next steps.

9.

Open Inlet for editing and configure the following setting(s):

Note that you are setting the inlet up to be 100% liquid water, hence a volume fraction of 1. Consequently, the volume fraction of the vapor is set to 0.
Tab

Setting

Value

Fluid Values

Boundary Conditions

Water Vapor

Boundary Conditions
> Water Vapor

630

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and High Inlet Pressure

Tab

Setting

Value

> Volume Fraction

> Volume Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Liquid Water

Boundary Conditions
> Liquid Water
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

10. Click OK.

11. Open Outlet for editing.
12. On the Boundary Details tab, set Mass and Momentum > Option to Bulk Mass Flow Rate and
Mass Flow Rate to 16 [kg s^-1].
13. Click OK.
The problems have been resolved and the error messages have disappeared.

28.5.1.2. Creating Expressions

Expressions defining the Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH) and Head are created in order to monitor
their values as the inlet pressure is decreased. By monitoring these values a drop curve can be produced.
Create the following expressions.
Name

Definition

Ptin

massFlowAve(Total Pressure
in Stn Frame)@Inlet

Ptout

massFlowAve(Total Pressure
in Stn Frame)@Outlet

Wden

996.82 [kg m^-3]

Head

(Ptout-Ptin)/(Wden*g)

NPSH

(Ptin- Pvap)/(Wden*g)

Pvap

3574 [Pa]

28.5.1.3. Adding Monitor Points

Two monitor points will be added to track the NPSH and head using the expressions created in the
previous step.
1.

Click Output Control

2.

On the Monitor tab, select Monitor Objects and click Add new item

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

631

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

3.

Enter NPSH Point as the name of the monitor point then enter the following settings:
Tab

Setting

Monitor

Monitor Objects

Value

> Monitor Points and

Expressions
> NPSH Point
> Option

Expression

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
> NPSH Point
> Expression Value

NPSH

4.

Create a second monitor point named Head Point with the same parameters as the first, with the exception that Expression Value is set to Head.

5.

Click OK.

28.5.1.4. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

Cavitation_100000.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

Save the simulation.

28.5.2. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager

CFX-Solver Manager should be running. Obtain a solution to the CFD problem by following these instructions:
1.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

2.

Under the Initial Values tab, select Initial Values Specification.

632

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and High Inlet Pressure

3.

Select CavitationIni_001.res for the initial values file using the Browse

4.

Click Start Run.

tool.

You may see a notice about an artificial wall at the inlet. This notice indicates that the flow is trying
to exit at the inlet. This can be ignored because the amount of reverse flow is very low.
CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. A dialog box is displayed stating that the simulation has ended.
5.

Select Post-Process Results.

6.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

7.

Click OK.

28.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

You will create an isosurface to observe the volume fraction of water vapor at 25 C. Note that the
pressure below the threshold is the same as found earlier in Simulating the Pump with High Inlet
Pressure (p. 619).
Create an isosurface for the volume fraction of water vapor at 25 C, at 0.1:
1.

CFD-Post should be running; start it if necessary.

2.

Click Insert > Location > Isosurface and accept the default name.

3.

Configure the following setting(s) in the details view:

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Variable

Value

Water
Vapor.Volume
Fraction

Definition
> Value

4.

0.1

Click Apply.
Notice that the isosurface is clear. There is no water vapor at 25 C in the blade passage for the
simulation with cavitation because at an inlet total pressure of 100000 Pa, the minimum static
pressure in the model is above the vapor pressure.

5.

Quit CFD-Post saving the state at your discretion.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

633

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

28.6. Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and a Range of Inlet Pressures
In order to construct a drop curve for this cavitation case, the inlet pressure must be decremented from
its initial value of 100000 Pa to 17500 Pa, and the Head and NPSH values must be recorded for each
simulation. The results are provided in Table 28.1: Pump Performance Data (p. 634).
Table 28.1: Pump Performance Data
Inlet Pressure

NPSH

Head

Pa

100000

9.859e+00

3.537e+01

80000

7.813e+00

3.535e+01

60000

5.767e+00

3.535e+01

40000

3.721e+00

3.536e+01

30000

2.698e+00

3.538e+01

20000

1.675e+00

3.534e+01

18000

1.470e+00

3.528e+01

17500

1.419e+00

3.184e+01

Optionally, if you want to generate the data shown in Table 28.1: Pump Performance Data (p. 634), then
follow the instructions in the following two sections (Writing CFX-Solver Input (.def ) Files for Lower Inlet
Pressures (p. 634) and Obtaining the Solutions using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 635)). Those instructions
involve running several simulations in order to obtain a set of results files. As a benefit to doing this,
you will have the results files required to complete an optional postprocessing exercise at the end of
this tutorial. This optional postprocessing exercise involves using isosurfaces to visualize the regions of
cavitation, and visually comparing these isosurfaces between different results files.
If you want to use the provided table data to produce a drop curve, proceed to Generating a Drop
Curve (p. 636).

28.6.1. Writing CFX-Solver Input (.def) Files for Lower Inlet Pressures
Produce a set of definition (.def) files for the simulation, with each definition file specifying a progressively lower value for the inlet pressure:
1.

CFX-Pre should be running; start it if necessary.

2.

Open Cavitation_100000.cfx.

3.

Open Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > Pump > Inlet.

4.

On the Boundary Details tab change Mass and Momentum > Relative Pressure to 80000 [Pa].

5.

Click OK.

6.

Right-click Simulation and select Write Solver Input File.

7.

Set File name to Cavitation_80000.def.

8.

Click Save.

634

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and a Range of Inlet Pressures

9.

Change the inlet pressure and save a corresponding CFX-Solver input file for each of the 6 other pressures:
60000 Pa, 40000 Pa, 30000 Pa, 20000 Pa, 18000 Pa, and 17500 Pa.

Note
There are other techniques for defining a set of related simulations. For example, you could
use configuration control, as demonstrated in Flow from a Circular Vent (p. 105).

28.6.2. Obtaining the Solutions using CFX-Solver Manager

Run each of the CFX-Solver input files that you created in the previous step:
1.

Start CFX-Solver Manager if it is not already running.

2.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

3.

Under Solver Input File, click Browse

4.

Under the Initial Values tab, select Initial Values Specification.

5.

Select Cavitation_100000_001.res for the initial values file using the Browse

6.

Click Start Run.

and select Cavitation_80000.def.

tool.

You may see a notice about an artificial wall at the inlet. This notice indicates that the flow is trying
to exit at the inlet. This can be ignored because the amount of reverse flow is very low.
CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.
7.

Clear Post-Process Results.

8.

Click OK.

9.

Repeat this process until you have run all the CFX-Solver input files for all 6 other inlet pressures: 60000
Pa, 40000 Pa, 30000 Pa, 20000 Pa, 18000 Pa, and 17500 Pa. The pump simulation with cavitation model
at an inlet pressure of 17500 Pa will converge poorly because the performance of the pump is decreasing
considerably around that pressure. Note that the initial values should be taken from the previously generated results (.res) file.

28.6.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

To see the pump performance, you will generate a drop curve to show the pump performance over a
range of inlet pressures. After generating the drop curve, there is an optional exercise for visualizing
the cavitation regions using isosurfaces.
The optional exercise of visualizing the cavitation regions requires the results files from the 60000 Pa,
40000 Pa, 20000 Pa, and 17500 Pa simulations. If you have not generated those results files and want
to complete the optional exercise, then generate the results files by following the instructions in:
Writing CFX-Solver Input (.def ) Files for Lower Inlet Pressures (p. 634)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

635

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

Obtaining the Solutions using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 635)

28.6.3.1. Generating a Drop Curve

To generate a drop curve, you will need the values for Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH) and head as
the inlet pressure decreases. This data is provided in Table 28.1: Pump Performance Data (p. 634). If you
want to use that data, proceed to Creating a Table of the Head and NPSH Values (p. 636). If you have
chosen to run all of the simulations and have obtained all of the results files, you can obtain the drop
curve data yourself by following the instructions in the Creating a Head-versus-NPSH Chart (Optional
Exercise) (p. 638) section.

28.6.3.1.1. Creating a Table of the Head and NPSH Values

1.

Start CFD-Post.

2.

Click Insert > Table and set the name to Drop Curve Values.

3.

Enter the values from Table 28.1: Pump Performance Data (p. 634) for the 8 inlet pressures in the table.
Enter the NPSH values in the left column and the head values in the right column.

4.

5.

Click Save Table

, and configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

Drop Curve Values

Files of type

Comma Separated Values

Excel Readable (*.csv)

Click Save.

28.6.3.1.2. Creating a Head-versus-NPSH Chart

1.

Click Insert > Chart.

2.

Set the name to Drop Curve and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General

Title

Drop Curve

Data Series

Data Source
> File

(Selected)

Data Source
> File
> Browse
X Axis

636

Drop Curve Values.csv

Axis Range

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

[a]

Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and a Range of Inlet Pressures

Tab

Setting

Value

> Determine ranges automatically

(Cleared)

Axis Range
> Min

Axis Range
> Max

10

Axis Labels
> Use data for axis labels

(Cleared)

Axis Labels
> Custom Label
Y Axis

NPSH [m]

Axis Range
> Determine ranges automatically

(Cleared)

Axis Range
> Min

Axis Range
> Max

45

Axis Labels
> Use data for axis labels

(Cleared)

Axis Labels
> Custom Label
Line Display

Head [m]

Line Display
> Symbols

Triangle

a. Created in previous steps.

4.

Click Apply and proceed to Viewing the Drop Curve (p. 637).

28.6.3.1.3. Viewing the Drop Curve

Here is what the drop curve created in the earlier steps should look like:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

637

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

You can see here that there is not significant degradation in the performance curve as the inlet total
pressure is dropped. This is due to the fact that, for a part of the test, the inlet total pressure is sufficiently
high to prevent cavitation, which implies that the normalized pressure rise across the pump is constant.
Also, although you may start at a high inlet pressure where there is no cavitation, as you drop the inlet
pressure, cavitation will appear but will have no significant impact on performance (incipient cavitation)
until the blade passage has sufficient blockage due to vapor. At that point, performance degrades
(rapidly in this case).
When the inlet total pressure reaches a sufficiently low value, cavitation occurs. The performance curve
then starts to drop at a pressure of 18000 Pa as you can see on the chart. What is called the point of
cavitation is often marked by the NPSH at which the pressure rise has fallen by a few percent, which is
around 17500 Pa in this case.
If you want to complete an optional exercise on visualizing the cavitation regions, proceed to Visualizing
the Cavitation Regions (Optional Exercise) (p. 641). Otherwise, quit CFD-Post, saving the state at your
discretion.

28.6.3.1.4. Creating a Head-versus-NPSH Chart (Optional Exercise)

1.

Start CFD-Post.

2.

To load the results file, select File > Load Results or click Load Results

638

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and a Range of Inlet Pressures

3.

On the right side of the Load Results File dialog box, note down the current setting under CFX run history
and multi-configuration options. Set this option to Load complete history as: > A single case, unless
already set.

Important
This setting, under CFX run history and multi-configuration options, persists when
you close CFD-Post. Ensure that you set this back to the original setting noted above,
as instructed to do so at the end of the tutorial. Not doing so could lead to undesirable
results when postprocessing other cases.

4.

In the Load Results File dialog box, select Cavitation_17500_001.res.

5.

Click Open.
When you started the CFX-Solver run using initial values, by default the Continue History From
option was on. This enables the results file to retain a reference to the initial value results file. When
the final results file is loaded into CFD-Post using the Load complete history as: A single case,
it includes results from all the initial values files as well as the final results. Each of the previous
initial values files is available as a time step (in this case a sequence) through the Timestep Selector.

6.

Click OK when prompted with a Process Multiple Results as a Sequence message.

7.

Click Insert > Chart or click Chart

8.

Set the name to Drop Curve and click OK.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General

Type

XY - Transient or Sequence

Title

Drop Curve

Data Series

Data Source
> Expression

(Selected)

Data Source
> Expression
X Axis

Data Selection
> Expression

Y Axis

Head

NPSH

Axis Range
> Determine ranges automatically

(Cleared)

Axis Range
> Min

Axis Range

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

639

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

Tab
Line Display

Setting

Value

> Max

45

Line Display
> Symbols

Triangle

10. Click Apply and proceed to Viewing the Drop Curve (p. 640).

28.6.3.1.5. Viewing the Drop Curve

Here is what the drop curve created in the earlier steps should look like:

You can see here that there is not significant degradation in the performance curve as the inlet total
pressure is dropped. This is due to the fact that, for a part of the test, the inlet total pressure is sufficiently
high to prevent cavitation, which implies that the normalized pressure rise across the pump is constant.
Also, although you may start at a high inlet pressure where there is no cavitation, as you drop the inlet
pressure, cavitation will appear but will have no significant impact on performance (incipient cavitation)
until the blade passage has sufficient blockage due to vapor. At that point, performance degrades
(rapidly in this case).
When the inlet total pressure reaches a sufficiently low value, cavitation occurs. The performance curve
then starts to drop at a pressure of 18000 Pa as you can see on the chart. What is called the point of

640

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Pump with Cavitation and a Range of Inlet Pressures

cavitation is often marked by the NPSH at which the pressure rise has fallen by a few percent, which is
around 17500 Pa in this case.

Important
If you want to complete an optional exercise on visualizing the cavitation regions, proceed
to Visualizing the Cavitation Regions (Optional Exercise) (p. 641). Otherwise, proceed to
Restoring CFX run history and multi-configuration options (p. 642).

28.6.3.2. Visualizing the Cavitation Regions (Optional Exercise)

This is an optional part of the tutorial that requires the results files from the 60000 Pa, 40000 Pa, 20000
Pa, and 17500 Pa simulations. If you have not generated those results files and want to complete this
optional exercise, then generate the results files by following the instructions in:
Writing CFX-Solver Input (.def ) Files for Lower Inlet Pressures (p. 634)
Obtaining the Solutions using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 635)
Cavitation does not occur for the 100000 Pa and 80000 Pa simulations. Create an isosurface for 10%
water vapor (by volume fraction), for the 60000 Pa, 40000 Pa, 20000 Pa, and 17500 Pa simulations:
1.

Use Cavitation_60000_001.res to create an isosurface:

a.

Launch CFD-Post and load Cavitation_60000_001.res.

b.

Select Insert > Location > Isosurface and accept the default name.

c.

Configure the following setting(s) in the details view:

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Variable

Value

Water Vapor.Volume Fraction

Definition
> Value

d.
2.

0.1

Click Apply.

Add Cavitation_40000_001.res to the current results:

a.

Select File > Load Results.

b.

Under Case options, select both Keep current cases loaded and Open in new view.

c.

Select Cavitation_40000_001.res.

d.

Click Open.

e.

Click a blank area inside the viewport named View 2 (which contains the results that you just loaded)
to make that viewport active, then turn on visibility for the isosurface in the Outline tree view.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

641

Drop Curve for Cavitating Flow in a Pump

3.

In a similar way, load Cavitation_20000_001.res and Cavitation_17500_001.res and make

the isosurface visible on these results.

4.

Click Synchronize camera in displayed views

5.

Rotate the view (from any viewport) to inspect the results.

so that all viewports maintain the same camera position.

Observe that the amount of water vapor increases as the inlet pressure decreases.

Important
If you created the drop curve by setting the CFX run history and multi-configuration options, proceed to Restoring CFX run history and multi-configuration options (p. 642). Otherwise,
quit CFD-Post, saving the state at your discretion.

28.6.3.3. Restoring CFX run history and multi-configuration options

As mentioned above the setting under CFX run history and multi-configuration options persists
when you close CFD-Post. This section outlines the steps to restore CFX run history and multi-configuration options to its original setting.
1.

Select File > Close to close the current file.

2.

Click Close if prompted to save.

3.

Load a results file by selecting File > Load Results or click Load Results

4.

On the right side of the Load Results File dialog box, restore the original settings under CFX run history
and multi-configuration options.

5.

In the Load Results File dialog box, select Cavitation_17500_001.res.

6.

Click Open.

7.

Quit CFD-Post, by selecting File > Quit.

642

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 29: Spray Dryer

This tutorial includes:
29.1.Tutorial Features
29.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
29.3. Preparing the Working Directory
29.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
29.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
29.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

29.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Importing a CCL file in CFX-Pre.
Editing and creating boundary conditions in CFX-Pre.
Adding particles that evaporate.
Creating a domain interface in CFX-Pre.
Creating contour plots and inserting particle tracking in CFD-Post.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Boundary Conditions

Water Nozzle
Air Inlet
Outlet
Domain 1 Default

CFD-Post

Domain Interface

Fluid Fluid

Timescale

Physical Timescale

Particle Coupling
Control

Selected

Extra Output Variables

List

Selected

Plots

Contour Plots
Particle Tracking

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

643

Spray Dryer

29.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

In this example, a spray dryer is modeled in which water drops are evaporated by a hot air flow. The
goal of this tutorial is to observe the variation of gas temperature and mass fraction of water vapor,
and of averaged values of mean droplet diameter and droplet temperature in the spray dryer, as well
as the temperature and size of individual water drops as they travel through the spray dryer.
The following figure shows approximately half of the full geometry. The spray dryer has two inlets
named Water Nozzle and Air Inlet, and one outlet named Outlet. The Water Nozzle is
where the liquid water enters in a primary air flow at a mass flow rate of 1.33e-4 kg/s. The Air Inlet
is for the swirling, drying air flow. The Water Nozzle inlet is located in the middle of the circular
Air Inlet. When the spray dryer is operating, the inlets are located at the top of the vessel and the
outlet at the bottom.

Periodic boundaries are used to enable only a small section of the full geometry to be modeled. The
geometry to be modeled consists of a 9 degree section of the axisymmetric dryer shape. The relevant
parameters of this problem are:
Static temperature at Water Nozzle = 300 K
Size distribution for the drops being created by the Water Nozzle is prescribed using discrete diameter values and associated fractions of the droplet mass flow rate.

644

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Air Inlet mass and momentum axial component = 30 m/s (downwards along the axis of the spray
dryer), Air Inlet mass and momentum radial component = 0 m/s, Air Inlet mass and momentum
theta component = 10 m/s
Static temperature at Air Inlet = 423 K
Relative pressure at Outlet = 0 Pa
Normal speed of Water = 10 m/s
The approach for solving this problem is to first import a CCL file with the fluid properties, domain and
boundary conditions in CFX-Pre. Minor changes will be made to the information imported from the
CCL file. Boundary conditions and a domain interface will also be added. In CFD-Post, contour plots will
be created to see the variation of temperature, mass fraction of water, average mean particle diameter
of liquid water, and averaged temperature of liquid water in the spray dryer. Finally, particle tracking
will be used for plotting the temperature of liquid water.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

29.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

spraydryer9.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

29.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

This section describes the step-by-step definition of the flow physics in CFX-Pre for a steady-state simulation.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run SprayDryer.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 655).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

645

Spray Dryer
2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view and ensure that Automatic Default Domain
is turned off.

5.

Click OK.

6.

Select File > Save Case As.

7.

Under File name, type SprayDryer.

8.

Click Save.

Later in this tutorial, you will import a template that sets up, among other things, a domain.

29.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

spraydryer9.gtm

Click Open.

29.4.2. Importing the Evaporating CCL Drops Model Template

ANSYS CFX Command Language (CCL) consists of commands used to carry out actions in CFX-Pre, CFXSolver Manager and CFD-Post. The physics for this simulation such as materials, domain, and domain
properties will be imported from a CCL file. Model library templates contain CCL physics definitions for
complex simulations and are located in the <CFXROOT>/etc/model-templates/ directory. You
will first analyze the evaporating_drops.ccl model template and then import it into the simulation.

Note
The physics for a simulation can be saved to a CCL (CFX Command Language) file at
any time by selecting File > Export > CCL.
1.

Browse to <CFXROOT>/etc/model-templates/, open evaporating_drops.ccl with a text

editor, and take the time to look at the information it contains.
The template sets up the materials water vapor H2O with a thermal conductivity of 193e-04 W/mK
and water liquid H2Ol, which enters from the Water Nozzle. Note that the water data could also
have been imported from the library in CFX-Pre. The template also creates a continuous gas phase
named Gas mixture containing H2O and Air Ideal Gas and a binary mixture of H2O and
H2Ol, which determines the rate of evaporation of the water. A domain named Domain 1 that

646

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

includes the Gas mixture and H2Ol as a fluid pair as well as an inlet boundary is also specified
in the CCL file. The inlet boundary is set up with a default static temperature of 573 K.

Note
When viewing a template file in a text editor, be careful to avoid modifying the original
file.

2.

Select File > Import > CCL

The Import CCL dialog box appears.

3.

Under Import Method, select Append. This will start with the existing CCL already generated and append
the imported CCL.

Note
Replace is useful if you have defined physics and want to update or replace them with
newly-imported physics.

4.

Browse to <CFXROOT>/etc/model-templates/ and select evaporating_drops.ccl.

5.

Click Open.

Note
An error message related to the parameter Location will appear in the message window.
This error occurs as the CCL contains a location placeholder that is not part of the mesh. Ignore
this error message as the issue will be addressed when Domain 1 is being edited.

29.4.3. Editing the Domain

The fluid domain imported in the CCL file will be edited in this section.
1.

In the tree view, right-click Domain 1, then click Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

B34

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Option

Buoyant

Domain Models

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

647

Spray Dryer
Tab

Setting

Value

> Buoyancy Model

> Gravity X Dirn.

0.0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Y Dirn.

-9.81 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Z Dirn.

0.0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model

Fluid Specific
Models

> Buoy. Ref. Density

1.2 [kg m^-3]

Fluid

Gas mixture

[a]

Fluid
> Gas mixture
> Fluid Buoyancy Model
> Option

Non Buoyant

Fluid

H2Ol

[b]

Fluid
> H2Ol
> Fluid Buoyancy Model
> Option

Density Difference

a. The buoyancy reference density is set to 1.2 as representative of air.

b. Because any natural convection in the gas can be neglected, you can set the
fluid to non buoyant.

3.

Click OK.

29.4.4. Creating and Editing the Boundary Conditions

In this section, the Inlet and Domain 1 Default boundary conditions that were imported in the
CCL file will be edited. Two boundary conditions, Air Inlet and Outlet will also be created for the
spray dryer simulation.

648

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

29.4.4.1. Water Nozzle Boundary

The inlet boundary where the water enters in a primary air flow will be renamed and edited with the
particle mass flow rate set consistent with the problem description. The particle diameter distribution
will be set to Discrete Diameter Distribution, which will enable us to have particles of more
than one specified diameter. Diameter values will be listed as specified in the problem description. A
mass fraction as well as a number fraction will be specified for each of the diameter entries. The total
of mass fractions and the total of number fractions will sum to unity.
1.

In the tree view, under Domain 1, right-click inlet, then click Rename. Set the new name to Water
Nozzle.

2.

In the tree view, right-click Water Nozzle, then click Edit.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

two fluid nozzle

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass and Momentum

> Normal Speed

10.0 [m s^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature
Fluid Values

300.0 K

H2Ol
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

Normal Speed

H2Ol
> Mass and Momentum
> Normal Speed

10.0 [m s^-1]

H2Ol
> Particle Position
> Number of Positions
> Number

500

[a]

H2Ol
> Particle Mass Flow
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

649

Spray Dryer
Tab

Setting

Value

> Mass Flow Rate

3.32e-6 [kg s^-1]

[b]

H2Ol
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Option

Discrete Diameter
Distribution

H2Ol
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Diameter List

5.9e-6, 1.25e-5,
1.39e-5, 1.54e-5,
1.7e-5, 1.88e-5,
2.09e-5, 2.27e-5,
2.48e-5, 3.11e-5 [m]

H2Ol
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Mass Fraction List

10*0.1

H2Ol
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Number Fraction List

10*0.1

H2Ol
> Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

H2Ol
> Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

300.0 K

a. The number of representative drops was chosen to be 500 through experience

of particle transport calculations.
b. Note that this mass flow is only 1/40th of the total mass flow rate of water because
only a 9 degree sector is modeled.

4.

Click OK.

29.4.4.2. Air Inlet Boundary

A second inlet in which the swirling, drying air flow will enter will be created with temperature component, mass and momentum axial, radial and theta components set consistent with the problem description.

650

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Select Insert > Boundary from the main menu or click Boundary

2.

Under Name, type Air Inlet.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

air inlet

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Cyl. Vel.
Components

Mass and Momentum

> Axial Component

-30.0 [m s^-1]

Mass and Momentum

> Radial Component

0.0 [m s^-1]

Mass and Momentum

> Theta Component

10.0 [m s^-1]

Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis

Global Y

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

5.

423.0 K

Click OK.

29.4.4.3. Outlet Boundary

The outlet boundary will be created as an opening with pressure as specified in the problem description.
1.

Select Insert > Boundary from the main menu or click Boundary

2.

Under Name, type Outlet.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

651

Spray Dryer
Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

outlet

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Average Static
Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

5.

0.0 [Pa]

Click OK.

29.4.4.4. Domain 1 Default

The Domain 1 Default boundary will be edited to use a heat transfer coefficient of 3.0 [W m^-2
K^-1] and an outside temperature of 300 K.
1.

In the tree view, right-click Domain 1 Default, then click Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer
> Option

Value

Heat Transfer
Coefficient

Heat Transfer
> Heat Trans. Coeff.

3.0 [W m^-2 K^-1]

Heat Transfer
> Outside Temperature

3.

300.0 [K]

Click OK.

29.4.5. Creating a Domain Interface

A domain interface will be created to connect the Domain 1, periodic1 and periodic 2 regions.
The two sides of the periodic interface, periodic1 and periodic 2, will be mapped by a single
rotational transformation about an axis.
1.

Select Insert > Domain Interface. Accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

652

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Domain (filter)

Domain 1

Interface Side 1
> Region List

periodic1

Interface Side 2
> Domain (filter)

Domain 1

Interface Side 2
> Region List

periodic 2

Interface Models
> Option

Rotational
Periodicity

Interface Models
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis
Mesh
Connection

Global Y

Mesh Connection Method

> Mesh Connection
> Option

3.

Automatic

Click OK.

29.4.6. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

Value

100

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

0.05 [s]

[a]

Convergence Criteria
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

653

Spray Dryer
Tab

Setting

Value

> Residual Type

RMS

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

1.E-4

a. Based on the air inlet speed and the size of the dryer.

3.

Click OK.

29.4.7. Setting Output Control

In this section, two additional variables, H2O1.Averaged Mean Particle Diameter and H2O1.Averaged
Temperature will be specified. These variables will be used when viewing the results in CFD-Post to
understand the flow behavior.
1.

Click Output Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Results

Extra Output Variables List

Selected

Extra Output Variables List

> Extra Output Var. List

H2Ol.Averaged
Mean Particle
Diameter,
H2Ol.Averaged
Temperature

[a]

a. Click the Ellipsis icon

to open the Extra Output Variable List dialog box,
then select H2Ol.Averaged Mean Particle Diameter and H2Ol.Av
eraged Temperature, holding the Ctrl key. Click OK.

3.

Click OK.

29.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

654

Setting

Value

File name

SprayDryer.def

Click Save.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.
4.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file.

29.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and the CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD
problem by following the instructions below.
1.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

CFX-Solver Input File should be set to SprayDryer.def.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

29.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, contour plots located on one of the periodic regions of the spray dryer will be created
to illustrate the variation of temperature, water mass fraction, liquid water average mean particle diameter and liquid water averaged temperature. Finally, particle tracking will be used for plotting the
temperature of liquid water. Particle tracking will trace the mean flow behavior in and around the
complex geometry of the spray dryer.

29.6.1. Displaying the Temperature Using a Contour Plot

A contour plot located at the Domain Interface 1 Side 1 region will first be created, and used
to show the temperature variation through the spray dryer.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z.
This ensures that the view is set to a position that is best suited to display the results.

2.

From the main menu, select Insert > Contour.

3.

Set the name to Temperature Contour. Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Location

Domain
Interface 1
Side 1

Variable

Temperature

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

655

Spray Dryer
5.

Click Apply.

6.

When you have finished, right-click the contour you just created in the tree view and select Hide.

29.6.2. Displaying the Water Mass Fraction Using a Contour Plot

A contour plot located at the Domain Interface 1 Side 1 region will be created and used to
show the H2O.Mass Fraction variation through the spray dryer.
Repeat steps 1-6 in the Displaying the Temperature Using a Contour Plot (p. 655) section. In step 3, change
the contour name to H2O Mass Fraction Contour. In step 4, change the variable to H2O.Mass
Fraction.

29.6.3. Displaying the Liquid Water Averaged Mean Particle Diameter Using
a Contour Plot
A contour plot located at the Domain Interface 1 Side 1 region will be created and used to
show the H2Ol.Averaged Mean Particle Diameter variation through the spray dryer.
Repeat steps 1-6 in the Displaying the Temperature Using a Contour Plot (p. 655) section. In step 3, change
the contour name to H2Ol Averaged Mean Particle Diameter Contour. In step 4, change the
variable to H2Ol.Averaged Mean Particle Diameter. Click the Ellipsis icon
Variable Selector dialog box in order to see the entire variable list.

to open the

29.6.4. Displaying the Liquid Water Averaged Temperature Using a Contour

Plot
A contour plot located at the Domain Interface 1 Side 1 region will be created and used to
show the H2Ol.Averaged Temperature variation through the spray dryer.
Repeat steps 1-6 in the Displaying the Temperature Using a Contour Plot (p. 655) section. In step 3, change
the contour name to H2Ol Averaged Temperature Contour. In step 4, change the variable to
H2Ol.Averaged Temperature.

29.6.5. Displaying the Liquid Water Temperature Using Particle Tracking

This section outlines the steps for using particle tracking to trace the variation of the water temperature.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).
This ensures that the view is set to a position that is best suited to display the results.

2.

From the main menu, select Insert > Particle Track.

3.

Set the name to H2Ol Temperature. Click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

656

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

H2Ol.Temperature

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

5.

Click Apply.
From the contours and particle tracks, notice that the water droplets entering the spray dryer
through the Water Nozzle recirculates in the region between the two inlets before merging in
with the stream of hot air entering the spray dryer through the Air Inlet. Based on this flow
of the water drop, the temperature of the hot gas coming from the Air Inlet decreases as the
process takes place. During the spray drying cycle, the air transfers its thermal energy to the liquid
water drops, leading to evaporation. As the air carries the thermal energy by convection, liquid
water droplets that are close to the Air Inlet see their temperature increase, which leads to
evaporation, resulting in a decrease in droplet diameter and an increase in the amount of water
vapor.

29.6.6. Displaying the Diameter of a Water Drop Using Particle Tracking

This section outlines the steps for using particle tracking to trace the variation of water droplet diameter.
1.

Repeat steps 2-5 in the Displaying the Liquid Water Temperature Using Particle Tracking (p. 656) section.
In step 3, change the name to H2Ol Mean Particle Diameter. In step 4, change the variable name
to H2Ol.Mean Particle Diameter
From the water drop diameter particle track, you can see that as the air from the Air Inlet
transfers its thermal energy to the liquid water, the diameter of water drops decreases as they
evaporate. So when the water drop move away from the Water Nozzle, its diameter decreases
as a function of the temperature increase.

2.

Quit CFD-Post, saving the state (.cst) file at your discretion.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

657

658

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 30: Coal Combustion

This tutorial includes:
30.1.Tutorial Features
30.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
30.3. Preparing the Working Directory
30.4. Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide
30.5. Simulating the Coal Combustion with Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide
30.6. Simulating the Coal Combustion with Swirl and with Nitrogen Oxide

30.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Importing a CCL file in CFX-Pre.
Setting up and using Proximate/Ultimate analysis for hydrocarbon fuels in CFX-Pre.
Viewing the results for nitrogen oxide in CFD-Post.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

Reacting Mixture,
Hydrocarbon Fuel

CCL File

Import

Domain Type

Single Domain

Boundaries

Coal Inlet
Air Inlet
Outlet
No-slip Wall
Periodic
Symmetry

CFD-Post

Plots

Particle Tracking

30.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

In this tutorial, you will model coal combustion and radiation in a furnace. Three different coal combustion
simulations will be set up:
Coal Combustion with no-swirl burners where there is no release of nitrogen oxide during the burning
process.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

659

Coal Combustion
Coal Combustion with swirl burners where there is no release of nitrogen oxide during the burning process.
Coal Combustion with swirl burners where there is release of nitrogen oxide during the burning process.
The following figure shows half of the full geometry. The coal furnace has two inlets: Coal Inlet
and Air Inlet, and one outlet. The Coal Inlet (see the inner yellow annulus shown in the figure
inset) has air entering at a mass flow rate of 1.624e-3 kg/s and pulverized coal particles entering at a
mass flow rate of 1.015e-3 kg/s. The Air Inlet (see the outer orange annulus shown in the figure
inset) is where heated air enters the coal furnace at a mass flow rate of 1.035e-2 kg/s. The outlet is
located at the opposite end of the furnace and is at a pressure of 1 atm.

The provided mesh occupies a 5 degree section of an axisymmetric coal furnace. Each simulation will
make use of either symmetric or periodic boundaries to model the effects of the remainder of the furnace.
In the case of non-swirling flow, a pair of symmetry boundaries is sufficient; in the case of flow with
swirl, a periodic boundary with rotational periodicity is required.
The relevant parameters of this problem are:
Coal Inlet static temperature = 343 K
Size distribution for the drops being created by the Coal Inlet = 12, 38, 62, 88

660

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Preparing the Working Directory

Air Inlet static temperature = 573 K
Outlet average static pressure = 0 Pa
Coal Gun wall fixed temperature = 800 K
Coal Inlet wall fixed temperature = 343 K
Air Inlet wall fixed temperature = 573 K
Furnace wall fixed temperature = 1400 K
O2 mass fraction = 0.232
Proximate/ultimate analysis data for the coal. Note that proximate/ultimate analysis data is used to characterize the properties of the coal including the content of moisture, volatile, free carbon, and ash, as well as
the mass fractions of carbon, hydrogen and oxygen (the major components), sulfur and nitrogen.
The approach for solving this problem is to first import, into CFX-Pre, a CCL file with the proximate/ultimate analysis data for the coal and the required materials and reactions. The first simulation will be
without nitrogen oxide or swirl. Only small changes to the boundary conditions will be made to create
the second simulation, which has swirl in the flow. After each of the first two simulations, you will use
CFD-Post to see the variation of temperature, water mass fraction and radiation intensity. You will examine particle tracks colored by temperature and by ash mass fraction. The last simulation has swirl
and also involves the release of nitrogen oxide. Finally, you will use CFD-Post to see the distribution of
nitrogen oxide in the third simulation.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

30.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
CoalCombustion.gtm
CoalCombustion_Reactions_Materials.ccl
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

661

Coal Combustion

30.4. Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen
Oxide
You will first create a simulation where there is no release of nitrogen oxide, a hazardous chemical,
during the process. Swirl burners will not be used in this simulation.

30.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run CoalCombustion_nonox.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 679).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Set File name to CoalCombustion_nonox.cfx.

6.

Click Save.

30.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

CoalCombustion.gtm

3.

Click Open.

4.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up) from the
shortcut menu.

30.4.1.2. Importing the Coal Combustion Materials CCL File

CFX Command Language (CCL) consists of commands used to carry out actions in CFX-Pre, CFX-Solver
Manager, and CFD-Post. The proximate/ultimate analysis data for the coal as well as the materials and

662

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide
reactions required for the combustion simulation will be imported from the CCL file. You will review,
then import, the contents of the CoalCombustion_Reactions_Materials.ccl file.

Note
The physics for a simulation can be saved to a CCL (CFX Command Language) file at
any time by selecting File > Export > CCL.
1.

Open CoalCombustion_Reactions_Materials.ccl with a text editor and take the time to look
at the information it contains.
The CCL sets up the following reactions:
Fuel Gas Oxygen
HC Fuel Char Field
HC Fuel Devolat
Prompt NO Fuel Gas PDF
Thermal NO PDF.
The CCL also sets up the following materials:
Ash
Char
Fuel Gas
Gas mixture
HC Fuel
HC Fuel Gas Binary Mixture
Raw Combustible
The reactions Prompt NO Fuel Gas PDF and Thermal NO PDF are used only in the third
simulation. Other pure substances required for the simulation will be loaded from the standard
CFX-Pre materials library.

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > Import > CCL.

The Import CCL dialog box appears.

3.

Under Import Method, select Replace.

This will replace the materials list in the current simulation with the ones in the newly imported
CCL.

4.

Under Import Method, select Auto-load materials.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

663

Coal Combustion
This will load pure materials such as CO2, H2O, N2, O2, and NO the materials referenced by the
imported mixtures and reactions from the CFX-Pre materials library.
5.

Select CoalCombustion_Reactions_Materials.ccl (the file you reviewed earlier).

6.

Click Open.

7.

Expand the Materials and Reactions branches under Simulation to make sure that all the materials and reactions described above are present.

30.4.1.3. Creating the Domain

Create a new domain named Furnace as follows:
1.

Right-click Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 in the Outline tree view and click Insert > Domain.

2.

Set Name to Furnace.

3.

Click OK

4.

On the Basic Settings, tab under Fluid and Particle Definitions, delete Fluid 1 and create a new fluid
definition named Gas Mixture.

5.

Click Add new item

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

and create a new fluid definition named HC Fuel.

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

B40

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Gas Mixture

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Gas Mixture
> Material

Gas Mixture

[a]

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Gas Mixture
> Morphology
> Option

Continuous Fluid

Fluid and Particle Definitions

HC Fuel

Fluid and Particle

Definitions

664

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide
Tab

Setting

Value

> HC Fuel
> Material

HC Fuel

[b]

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> HC Fuel
> Morphology
> Option

Particle Transport
Solid

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> HC Fuel
> Morphology
> Particle Diameter
Change

(Selected)

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> HC Fuel
> Morphology
> Particle Diameter Change
> Option
Fluid Models

Mass Equivalent[c]

Multiphase
> Multiphase Reactions

(Selected)

Multiphase
> Multiphase Reactions
> Reactions List

HC Fuel Char Field,

HC Fuel Devolat

Heat Transfer
> Option

Fluid Dependent

Combustion
> Option

Fluid Dependent

Thermal Radiation

Fluid Specific
Models

> Option

Fluid Dependent

Fluid

Gas Mixture

Fluid

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

665

Coal Combustion
Tab

Setting

Value

> Gas Mixture

> Heat Transfer
> Heat Transfer
> Option

Thermal Energy

Fluid
> Gas Mixture
> Thermal Radiation
> Option

Discrete Transfer

Fluid
> Gas Mixture
> Thermal Radiation
> Number of Rays

(Selected)

Fluid
> Gas Mixture
> Thermal Radiation
> Number of Rays
> Number of Rays

32

Fluid

HC Fuel

[d]

Fluid
> HC Fuel
> Heat Transfer
> Heat Transfer

Fluid Pair
Models

> Option

Particle
Temperature

Fluid Pair

Gas Mixture | HC
Fuel

Fluid Pair
> Gas Mixture | HC Fuel
> Particle Coupling

Fully Coupled

Fluid Pair
> Gas Mixture | HC Fuel

666

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide
Tab

Setting

Value

> Momentum Transfer

> Drag Force
> Option

Schiller Naumann

Fluid Pair
> Gas Mixture | HC Fuel
> Heat Transfer
> Option

Ranz Marshall

Fluid Pair
> Gas Mixture | HC Fuel
> Thermal Radiation
Transfer
> Option

Opaque

Fluid Pair
> Gas Mixture | HC Fuel
> Thermal Radiation
Transfer
> Emissivity

[e]

Fluid Pair
> Gas Mixture | HC Fuel
> Thermal Radiation
Transfer
> Particle Coupling

(Selected)

Fluid Pair
> Gas Mixture | HC Fuel
> Thermal Radiation
Transfer
> Particle Coupling
> Particle Coupling

Fully Coupled

a. Click the Ellipsis

icon to open the Material dialog box, then select Gas
Mixture under the Gas Phase Combustion branch. Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

667

Coal Combustion
Tab

Setting

Value

b. Click the Ellipsis

icon to open the Material dialog box, then select HC Fuel
under the Particle Solids branch. Click OK.
c. The use of the Mass Equivalent option for the particle diameter is used
here for demonstration only. A physically more sensible setting for coal particles,
which often stay the same size or get bigger during combustion, would be the
use of the Swelling Model option with a Swelling Factor of 0.0 (the default)
or larger.
d. Increasing the number of rays to 32 from the default 8, increases the number of
rays leaving the bounding surfaces and increases the accuracy of the thermal
radiation calculation.
e. With this setting, the particles are modeled as black bodies.

7.

Click OK.

30.4.1.4. Creating the Boundary Conditions

In this section you will create boundary conditions for the coal inlet, the air inlet, the outlet, and multiple
no-slip walls. You will also create two symmetry-plane boundary conditions for this no-swirl case.

30.4.1.4.1. Coal Inlet Boundary

You will create the coal inlet boundary with mass flow rate and static temperature set consistently with
the problem description. The particle diameter distribution will be set to Discrete Diameter
Distribution to model particles of more than one specified diameter. Diameter values will be listed
as specified in the problem description. A mass fraction as well as a number fraction will be specified
for each of the diameter entries. The total of mass fractions and the total of number fractions will sum
to unity.
1.

Create a boundary named Coal Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of Coal Inlet:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

CoalInlet

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Mass Flow Rate

Mass and Momentum

> Mass Flow Rate

0.001624 [kg s^-1]

Flow Direction
> Option

668

Normal to
Boundary Condition

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide
Tab

Setting

Value

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

343 [K]

Component Details

O2

Component Details
> O2
> Option

Mass Fraction

Component Details
> O2
> Mass Fraction
Fluid
Values

0.232

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Particle Behavior
> Define Particle Behavior

(Selected)

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Mass and Momentum
> Option

Zero Slip Velocity

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Particle Position
> Option

Uniform Injection

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Particle Position
> Particle Locations

(Selected)

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Particle Position

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

669

Coal Combustion
Tab

Setting

Value

> Particle Locations

> Particle Locations

Equally Spaced

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Particle Position
> Number of Positions
> Option

Direct Specification

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Particle Position
> Number of Positions
> Number

200

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Particle Mass Flow
> Mass Flow Rate

0.001015 [kg s^-1]

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Particle Diameter Distribution

(Selected)

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Option

Discrete Diameter
Distribution

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Diameter List

12, 38, 62, 88

[micron]

Boundary Conditions

670

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide
Tab

Setting

Value

> HC Fuel
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Mass Fraction List

0.18, 0.25, 0.21,

0.36

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Particle Diameter Distribution
> Number Fraction List

0.25, 0.25, 0.25,

0.25

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Boundary Conditions
> HC Fuel
> Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

3.

343 [K]

Click OK.

30.4.1.4.2. Air Inlet Boundary

Create the air inlet boundary with mass flow rate and static temperature set consistently with the
problem description, as follows:
1.

Create a new boundary named Air Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

AirInlet

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Mass Flow Rate

Mass and Momentum

> Mass Flow Rate

0.01035 [kg s^-1]

Flow Direction
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

671

Coal Combustion
Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Normal to
Boundary Condition

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Static Temperature

573 [K]

Component Details

O2

Component Details
> O2
> Option

Mass Fraction

Component Details
> O2
> Mass Fraction

3.

0.232

Click OK.

30.4.1.4.3. Outlet Boundary

Create the outlet boundary with pressure specified, as follows:
1.

Create a new boundary named Outlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

Outlet

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Average Static
Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

0[Pa]

Mass and Momentum

> Pres. Profile Blend

3.

672

0.05

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide

30.4.1.4.4. Coal Gun No-Slip Wall Boundary

Create the Coal Gun Wall boundary with a fixed temperature as specified in the problem description,
as follows:
1.

Create a new boundary named Coal Gun Wall.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

CoalGunWall

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer
> Option

Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Fixed Temperature

800 [K]

Thermal Radiation
> Option

Opaque

Thermal Radiation
> Emissivity

0.6

[a]

Thermal Radiation
> Diffuse Fraction

a. The wall has an emissivity value of 0.6 since about half of the radiation can travel
through the surface and half is reflected and/or absorbed at the surface.

3.

Click OK.

30.4.1.4.5. Coal Inlet No-Slip Wall Boundary

Create the Coal Inlet Wall boundary with fixed temperature as specified in the problem description,
as follows:
1.

Create a new boundary named Coal Inlet Wall.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

CoalInletInnerWall,
CoalInletOuterWall
[a]

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

673

Coal Combustion
Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Fixed Temperature

343 [K]

Thermal Radiation
> Option

Opaque

Thermal Radiation
> Emissivity

0.6

Thermal Radiation
> Diffuse Fraction

a. Click the Ellipsis

icon to open the Selection Dialog dialog box. Select multiple
items by holding the Ctrl key. Click OK.

3.

Click OK.

30.4.1.4.6. Air Inlet No-Slip Wall Boundary

Create the Air Inlet Wall boundary with fixed temperature as specified in the problem description,
as follows:
1.

Create a new boundary named Air Inlet Wall.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

AirInletInnerWall,
AirInletOuterWall

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer
> Option

Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Fixed Temperature

573 [K]

Thermal Radiation
> Option

Opaque

Thermal Radiation
> Emissivity

0.6

Thermal Radiation
> Diffuse Fraction

674

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide
3.

Click OK.

30.4.1.4.7. Furnace No-Slip Wall Boundary

Create the Furnace Wall boundary with a fixed temperature as specified in the problem description,
as follows:
1.

Create a new boundary named Furnace Wall.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

FurnaceFrontWall,
FurnaceOuterWall

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer
> Option

Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Fixed Temperature

1400 [K]

Thermal Radiation
> Option

Opaque

Thermal Radiation
> Emissivity

0.6

Thermal Radiation
> Diffuse Fraction

3.

Click OK.

30.4.1.4.8. Quarl No-Slip Wall Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named Quarl Wall.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

QuarlWall

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer
> Option

Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Fixed Temperature

1200 [K]

Thermal Radiation

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

675

Coal Combustion
Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Opaque

Thermal Radiation
> Emissivity

0.6

Thermal Radiation
> Diffuse Fraction

3.

Click OK.

30.4.1.4.9. Symmetry Plane Boundaries

You will use symmetry plane boundaries on the front and back regions of the cavity.
1.

Create a new boundary named Symmetry Plane 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

PeriodicSide1

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named Symmetry Plane 2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

6.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

PeriodicSide2

Click OK.

30.4.1.5. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Convergence Control
> Max. Iterations

Value

600

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
676

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide
Tab

Setting

Value

> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale
Particle
Control

0.005 [s]

[a]

Particle Coupling Control

> First Iteration for Particle
Calculation

(Selected)

Particle Coupling Control

> First Iteration for Particle
Calculation
> First Iteration

25

[b]

Particle Coupling Control

> Iteration Frequency

(Selected)

Particle Coupling Control

> Iteration Frequency
> Iteration Frequency

10

Particle Under Relaxation

Factors

(Selected)

[c]

Particle Under Relaxation

Factors
> Vel. Under Relaxation

0.75

Particle Under Relaxation

Factors
> Energy

0.75

Particle Under Relaxation

Factors
> Mass

0.75

Particle Ignition

(Selected)

Particle Ignition
> Ignition Temperature

1000 [K]

Particle Source Smoothing

(Selected)

Particle Source Smoothing

Advanced
Options

> Option

Smooth

Thermal Radiation Control

(Selected)

Thermal Radiation Control

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

677

Coal Combustion
Tab

Setting

Value

> Coarsening Control

(Selected)

Thermal Radiation Control

> Coarsening Control
> Target Coarsening Rate

(Selected)

Thermal Radiation Control

> Coarsening Control
> Target Coarsening Rate
> Rate

16

[d]

a. Based on the air inlet speed and the size of the combustor.
b. The First Iteration parameter sets the coefficient-loop iteration number at which
particles are first tracked; it allows the continuous-phase flow to develop before
tracking droplets through the flow. Experience has shown that the value usually
has to be increased to 25 from the default of 10.
c. The Iteration Frequency parameter is the frequency at which particles are injected
into the flow after the First Iteration for Particle Calculation iteration number.
The iteration frequency allows the continuous phase to settle down between
injections because it is affected by sources of momentum, heat, and mass from
the droplet phase. Experience has shown that the value usually has to be
increased to 10 from the default of 5.
d. The Target Coarsening Rate parameter controls the size of the radiation element
required for calculating Thermal Radiation. Decreasing the size of the element
to 16, from the default 64, increases the accuracy of the solution obtained, while
increasing the computing time required for the calculations.

3.

Click OK.

30.4.1.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

CoalCombustion_nonox.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

678

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion without Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide
4.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file.

30.4.2. Obtaining the Solution using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and the CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD
problem by following the instructions below:
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

Solver Input File should be set to CoalCombustion_nonox.def.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

30.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will make plots showing the variation of temperature, water mass fraction, and radiation intensity on the Symmetry Plane 1 boundary. You will also color the particle tracks, which
were produced by the solver and included in the results file, by temperature and by ash mass fraction.
The particle tracks help to illustrate the mean flow behavior in the coal furnace.

30.4.3.1. Displaying the Temperature on a Symmetry Plane

1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).
This orients the geometry with the inlets at the top, as shown at the beginning of this tutorial.

2.

Edit Cases > CoalCombustion_nonox_001 > Furnace > Symmetry Plane 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Show Faces

(Selected)

Lighting

(Cleared)

Render

[a]

a. Turning off the lighting makes the colors accurate in the 3D view, but can make
it more difficult to perceive depth. As an alternative to turning off the lighting,
you can try rotating the view to a different position.

4.

Click Apply.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

679

Coal Combustion
As expected for a non-swirling case, the flame appears a significant distance away from the burner.
The flame is likely unstable, as evidenced by the rate of solver convergence; the next simulation
in this tutorial involves swirl, which tends to stabilize the flame, and has much faster solver convergence.

30.4.3.2. Displaying the Water Mass Fraction

Change the variable used for coloring the plot to H2O.Mass Fraction and click Apply.
From the plot it can be seen that water is produced a significant distance away from the burner, as was
the flame in the previous plot. As expected, the mass fraction of water is high where the temperature
is high.

30.4.3.3. Displaying the Radiation Intensity

1.

Change the variable used for coloring the plot to Radiation Intensity and click Apply.
This plot is directly related to the temperature plot. This result is consistent with radiation being
proportional to temperature to the fourth power.

2.

When you are finished, right-click Symmetry Plane 1 in the Outline tree view and select Hide.

30.4.3.4. Displaying the Temperature of the Fuel Particles

Color the existing particle tracks for the solid particles by temperature:
1.

Edit Cases > CoalCombustion_nonox_001 > Res PT for HC Fuel.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

HC
Fuel.Temperature

Click Apply.
Observing the particle tracks, you can see that coal enters the chamber at a temperature of around
343 K. The temperature of the coal, as it moves away from the inlet, rises as it reacts with the air
entering from the inlet. The general location where the temperature of the coal increases rapidly
is close to the location where the flame appears to be according to the plots created earlier.
Downstream of this location, the temperature of the coal particles begins to drop.

30.4.3.5. Displaying the Ash Mass Fraction using Particle Tracking

1.

Change the plot of the particle tracks so that they are colored by HC Fuel.Ash.Mass Fraction.
The ashes form in the flame region, as expected.

2.

680

Quit CFD-Post, saving the state (.cst) file at your discretion.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion with Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide

30.5. Simulating the Coal Combustion with Swirl and without Nitrogen
Oxide
You will now create a simulation where swirl burners are used and where there is no release of nitrogen
oxide during the process. Swirl burners inject a fuel axially into the combustion chamber surrounded
by an annular flow of oxidant (normally air) that has, upon injection, some tangential momentum. This
rotational component, together with the usually divergent geometry of the burner mouth, cause two
important effects:
They promote intense mixing between fuel and air, which is important for an efficient and stable combustion,
and low emissions.
They originate a recirculation region, just at the burner mouth, which traps hot combustion products and
acts as a permanent ignition source, hence promoting the stability of the flame.

30.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

CoalCombustion_nonox.cfx
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already running.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run CoalCombustion_nonox_swirl.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 683).

4.

Select File > Open Case.

5.

From your working directory, select CoalCombustion_nonox.cfx and click Open.

6.

Select File > Save Case As.

7.

Set File name to CoalCombustion_nonox_swirl.cfx.

8.

Click Save.

30.5.1.1. Editing the Boundary Conditions

To add swirl to the flow, you will edit the Air Inlet boundary to change the flow direction specification from Normal to Boundary Condition to Cylindrical Components. You will also
edit the Outlet boundary to change the Pressure Profile Blend setting from 0.05 to 0; the
reason for this change is explained later. You will also delete the two symmetry plane boundary conditions
and replace them with a periodic domain interface.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

681

Coal Combustion

30.5.1.1.1. Air Inlet Boundary

1.

Edit Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > Furnace > Air Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Flow Direction
> Option

Value

Cylindrical
Components

Flow Direction
> Axial Component

0.88

Flow Direction
> Radial Component

Flow Direction
> Theta Component

Axis Definition
> Rotational Axis

3.

Global Z

Click OK.

30.5.1.1.2. Outlet Boundary

The average pressure boundary condition leaves the pressure profile unspecified while constraining
the average pressure to the specified value. In some situations, leaving the profile fully unspecified is
too weak and convergence difficulties may result. The 'Pressure Profile Blend' feature works around this
by blending between an unspecified pressure profile and a fully specified pressure profile. By default,
the pressure profile blend is 5%. For swirling flow, however, imposing any amount of a uniform pressure
profile is inconsistent with the radial pressure profile which should naturally develop in response to the
fluid rotation, and the pressure profile blend must be set to 0.
1.

Edit Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > Furnace > Outlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Value

Average Static
Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Pres. Profile Blend

3.

682

Click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion with Swirl and without Nitrogen Oxide

30.5.1.1.3. Deleting the Symmetry Plane Boundaries

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > Furnace > Symmetry
Plane 1, then select Delete.

2.

Repeat step 1 to delete Symmetry Plane 2.

30.5.1.2. Creating a Domain Interface

You will insert a domain interface to connect the Periodic Side 1 and Periodic Side 2 regions.
1.

Create a domain interface named Periodic.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Region List

PeriodicSide1

Interface Side 2
> Region List

PeriodicSide2

Interface Models
> Option

3.

Rotational
Periodicity

Click OK.

30.5.1.3. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

CoalCombustion_nonox_swirl.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file.

30.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and the CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD
problem by following the instructions below.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

683

Coal Combustion
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

Solver Input File should be set to CoalCombustion_nonox_swirl.def.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

30.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will make plots showing the variation of temperature, water mass fraction, and radiation intensity on the Periodic Side 1 boundary. You will also color the existing particle tracks
by temperature and by ash mass fraction.

30.5.3.1. Displaying the Temperature on a Periodic Interface

1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

2.

Edit Cases > CoalCombustion_nonox_swirl_001 > Furnace > Periodic Side 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

Temperature

Show Faces

(Selected)

Lighting

(Cleared)

Render

4.

Click Apply.
As expected, the flame appears much closer to the burner than in the previous simulation, which
had no swirl. This is due to the fact that the swirl component applied to the air from Air Inlet
tends to entrain coal particles and keep them near the burner for longer, therefore helping them
to burn.

30.5.3.2. Displaying the Water Mass Fraction

Change the variable used for coloring the plot to H2O.Mass Fraction and click Apply.
Similar to the no-swirl case, the mass fraction of water with swirl is directly proportional to the temperature of the furnace.

30.5.3.3. Displaying the Radiation Intensity

1.

684

Change the variable used for coloring the plot to Radiation Intensity and click Apply.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion with Swirl and with Nitrogen Oxide
2.

When you are finished, right-click Periodic Side 1 in the Outline tree view and select Hide.

30.5.3.4. Displaying the Temperature using Particle Tracking

1.

Edit Cases > CoalCombustion_nonox_swirl_001 > Res PT for HC Fuel.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

HC
Fuel.Temperature

Click Apply.

30.5.3.5. Displaying the Ash Mass Fraction using Particle Tracking

1.

Change the plot of the particle tracks so that they are colored by HC Fuel.Ash.Mass Fraction.

2.

Quit CFD-Post, saving the state (.cst) file at your discretion.

30.6. Simulating the Coal Combustion with Swirl and with Nitrogen Oxide
You will now create a simulation that involves both swirl and the release of nitrogen oxide. The CCL
file that was previously imported contains the nitrogen oxide material, NO, and reactions, Prompt NO
Fuel Gas PDF and Thermal NO PDF, required for this combustion simulation. Nitrogen oxide is
calculated as a postprocessing step in the solver.

30.6.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
CoalCombustion_nonox_swirl.cfx
CoalCombustion_nonox_swirl_001.res
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their input
files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already running.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run CoalCombustion_noxcpp_swirl.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.
4.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 687).

Select File > Open Case.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

685

Coal Combustion
5.

From your working directory, select CoalCombustion_nonox_swirl.cfx and click Open.

6.

Select File > Save Case As.

7.

Set File name to CoalCombustion_noxcpp_swirl.cfx.

8.

Click Save.

30.6.1.1. Editing the Domain

In this section, you will edit the Furnace domain by adding the new material NO to the materials list.
CFX-Solver requires that you specify enough information for the mass fraction of NO at each of the
system inlets. In this case, set the NO mass fraction at the air and coal inlets to zero.
1.

Edit Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > Furnace.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Fluid
Specific
Models

Fluid

Gas Mixture

Fluid
> Gas Mixture
> Combustion
> Chemistry Post Processing

(Selected)

Fluid
> Gas Mixture
> Combustion
> Chemistry Post Processing
> Materials List

NO

Fluid
> Gas Mixture
> Combustion
> Chemistry Post Processing
> Reactions List

Prompt NO Fuel
Gas PDF,Thermal
NO PDF

These settings enable the combustion simulation with nitrogen oxide (NO) as a postprocessing
step in the solver. The NO reactions are defined in the same way as any participating reaction but
the simulation of the NO reactions is performed after the combustion simulation of the air and
coal. With this one-way simulation, the NO will have no effect on the combustion simulation of
the air and coal.

686

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Coal Combustion with Swirl and with Nitrogen Oxide
3.

Click OK.

4.

Edit Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > Furnace > Air Inlet.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary
Details

Component Details

NO

Component Details
> NO
> Mass Fraction

0.0

6.

Click OK.

7.

Edit Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > Furnace > Coal Inlet.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary
Details

Component Details

NO

Component Details
> NO
> Mass Fraction

9.

0.0

Click OK.

30.6.1.2. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

CoalCombustion_noxcpp_swirl.def

3.

Click Save.

4.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation as CoalCombustion_noxcpp_swirl.cfx.

30.6.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and the CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD
problem by following the instructions below.
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

687

Coal Combustion
Solver Input File should be set to CoalCombustion_noxcpp_swirl.def.
2.

Under the Initial Values tab, select Initial Values Specification.

3.

Select CoalCombustion_nonox_swirl_001.res for the initial values file using the Browse

tool.

The fluid solution from the previous case has not changed for this simulation. Loading the results
from the previous case as an initial guess eliminates the need for the solver to solve for the fluids
solutions again.
4.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

5.

Select Post-Process Results.

6.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

7.

Click OK.

30.6.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will make a plot on the Periodic Side 1 region showing the variation of concentration of nitrogen oxide through the coal furnace.
1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > Isometric View (Z up).

2.

Edit Cases > CoalCombustion_noxcpp_swirl_001 > Furnace > Periodic Side 1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Color

Mode

Variable

Variable

NO.Mass
Fraction

Show Faces

(Selected)

Lighting

(Cleared)

Render

4.

Click Apply.
You can see that NO is produced in the high-temperature region near the inlet. Further downstream,
the mass fraction of NO is more uniform.

5.

688

Quit CFD-Post, saving the state (.cst) file at your discretion.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 31: Steam Jet

This tutorial includes:
31.1.Tutorial Features
31.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
31.3. Preparing the Working Directory
31.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre
31.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager
31.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

31.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Importing a CCL file in CFX-Pre.
High-speed multicomponent, multiphase flow with interphase mass transfer.
Model customization using CEL.
Handling mass sources based on species transfer.
Source linearization.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Domain Type

Single Domain

Analysis Type

Steady State

Fluid Type

Continuous Fluid
Dispersed Fluid

CCL File

Import

Boundary Conditions

Inlet Boundary
Opening Boundary
Outlet Boundary
Steam Jet Default
Symmetry Boundary

CFD-Post

Timestep

Physical Timescale

Plots

Default Locators
Line Locator

Other

Chart Creation

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

689

Steam Jet

31.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial investigates the simulation of a high-speed steam jet from a pipe. Steam at 373 K leaves
the pipe at 341 m s^-1 and contains some liquid water. The surrounding air temperature is 25 C.

Evaporation and condensation of water are modeled using mass sources and sinks applied to two
subdomains; one is used for evaporation and the other is used for condensation. The rate of mass
transfer is modeled using Sherwood number-based mass diffusion at the surface of liquid drops.
To take advantage of the symmetrical nature of the domain, a thin slice of the flow field is modeled
and symmetry boundaries are used to represent the rest of the flow field. An opening boundary is used
around the outside edges of the domain; the flow direction is restricted to be normal to this boundary
in order to provide sufficient constraints on the flow solution.
It is strongly recommended that you complete the previous tutorials before trying this one. However,
if this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

690

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

31.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
steam_jet.gtm
steam_jet_expressions.ccl
steam_jet_additional_variables.ccl
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

31.4. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

This section describes the step-by-step definition of the flow physics in CFX-Pre for a steady-state simulation.
1.

If you want to set up the case automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run SteamJet.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 717).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Set File name to SteamJet.cfx.

6.

Click Save.

31.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

691

Steam Jet

3.

Setting

Value

File name

steam_jet.gtm

Click Open.

31.4.2. Importing the Steam Jet CCL

CFX Command Language (CCL) consists of commands used to carry out actions in CFX-Pre, CFX-Solver
Manager, and CFD-Post. Expressions and Additional Variables required for the steam jet simulation will
be imported from CCL files. This section outlines the steps to analyze steam_jet_expressions.ccl
and steam_jet_additional_variables.ccl, and then import them into the simulation.

Note
The physics for a case can be saved to a CCL (CFX Command Language) file at any time
by selecting File > Export > CCL.
1.

Select CCL files from your working directory, and open them one at a time with a text editor and take the
time to look at the information they contain. The information contained in the CCL files is outlined below:
The CCL file steam_jet_expressions.ccl creates expressions required for setting up the following
data:
Liquid/gas interface
Interphase diffusive transport coefficient
Heats of vaporization
Liquid-gas mass transfer rate for water 1
Local false step linearization of the interphase mass transfer (IPMT).
The CCL file steam_jet_additional_variables.ccl creates the following Additional Variables:
Pressure linearization coefficient PCoef
Water IPMT flux liquid-to-gas WaFluxLG
Water IPMT flux gas-to-liquid WaFluxGL
Local IPMT false timestep FalseDt
Saturation temperature SatTemp
Saturation pressure SatPres

The expression to calculate the volumetric mass transfer rate of the phase on which the mass transfer is based (CMwa) is multiplied by
the ratio between the molecular weight of the absorbing species and the molecular weight of the phase on which the mass transfer is
based; that is, a two-component gas mixture and water, respectively. However, due to the variable composition of the gas mixture (according to Creating and Loading Materials (p. 693)), its molecular weight varies with time. This causes the ratio of the molecular weights
between water and the gas mixture to vary also. Thus, an expression that is used to calculate the molecular weight of the gas mixture
depends on the mole fractions of vapour and air in the gas mixture at any given time (as seen in steam_jet_expressions.ccl).

692

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Latent heat at saturation SatLHeat
These variables are recognizable by CFD-Post to enable plotting and further analysis during
postprocessing.
2.

Select File > Import > CCL

The Import CCL dialog box appears.

3.

Under Import Method, select Append. This option appends the changes to the existing case.

Note
The Replace option is useful if you have defined the physics and want to update or replace the existing physics using the newly imported CCL.

4.

From your working directory, select steam_jet_expressions.ccl.

5.

Click Open. The CCL is now loaded as indicated by the status bar in the bottom right corner of the window.
After a short pause, the CCL and the Outline tree view will be updated.

6.

Repeat steps 2 to 5 to import steam_jet_additional_variables.ccl.

7.

In the Outline tree view, expand the Additional Variables and Expressions branches under
Simulation > Expressions, Functions and Variables to confirm that new objects have
been added after importing the CCL files.

31.4.3. Creating a Steady-State Analysis

The characteristics of this case do not change as a function of time, and therefore a steady-state analysis
is appropriate.
1.

Right-click Analysis Type in the Outline tree view and select Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

ANSYS Multifield Coupling

> Option

Value

None

Analysis Type
> Option

3.

Steady State

Click OK.

31.4.4. Creating and Loading Materials

In addition to providing template fluids, CFX allows you to create custom fluids for use in all your CFX
models. A custom fluid may be defined as a pure substance, but may also be defined as a mixture,
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

693

Steam Jet
consisting of a number of transported fluid components. This type of fluid model is useful for applications
involving mixtures, reactions, and combustion.
In order to define custom fluids, CFX-Pre provides the Material details view. This tool allows you to
define your own fluids as pure substances, fixed composition mixtures or variable composition mixtures
using a range of template property sets defined for common materials.
The steam jet application requires two fluids: a variable-composition mixture containing the materials
Steam3v (which is dry steam) and Air Ideal Gas; a fixed-composition mixture containing only
the material Steam3l (which is liquid water). In a variable composition mixture, the proportion of each
component material will change throughout the simulation; while in a fixed composition mixture, the
proportion of each component material is fixed.

31.4.4.1. Loading the Steam3v, Steam3l, and Steam3vl Materials

You are first going to load some of the materials that take part in the process (Steam3v, Steam3l).
The only other material that takes part in the process, Air Ideal Gas, is already loaded.
Load the materials Steam3v and Steam3l from the CFX-Pre Materials Library by loading Steam3vl.
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation > Materials and select Import Library Data.
The Select Library Data to Import dialog box appears.

2.

Click the browse button

next to File to Import.

The Import CCL dialog box appears. If the dialog box opens behind any existing windows, reposition
it so that it is completely visible in order to complete the next step.
3.

Under Import Method, select Append. This option appends the CCL changes to the existing case.

4.

Select MATERIALS-iapws.ccl from the etc/materials-extra directory and click Open.

5.

In the Select Library Data to Import dialog box, expand Wet Steam and select Steam3vl.

6.

Click OK.

7.

In the Outline tree view, expand Simulation > Materials to confirm that Steam3v and Steam3l
have been added to the list.

In the next sections you will create the variable-composition mixture and the fixed-composition mixture.

31.4.4.2. Creating the Gas Mixture Material

Create a new material named Gas mixture that will be composed of Air Ideal Gas and Steam3v.
This material will be injected into the gas inlet during the steady-state simulation.
1.

Create a new material named Gas mixture.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

694

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Option

Variable
Composition
Mixture

Materials List

Air Ideal Gas,

Steam3v

[a]

a. Select multiple items from the drop-down list by holding the Ctrl key.

3.

Click OK.

31.4.4.3. Creating the Liquid Mixture Material

Create a new material named Liquid mixture that will be composed of Steam3l.
1.

Create a new material named Liquid mixture.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Option

Fixed Composition
Mixture

Materials List

Steam3l

Child Materials
> Steam3l
> Mass Fraction

3.

1.0

Click OK.

31.4.5. Creating the Domain

This section outlines the steps to create a new domain Steam Jet.
1.

Select Insert > Domain from the menu bar, or click Domain

2.

In the Insert Domain dialog box, set the name to Steam Jet and click OK.

3.

On the Basic Settings tab, configure the following setting(s) under Location and Type:
Setting

Value

Location

B26

Domain Type

Fluid Domain

Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

695

Steam Jet
4.

On the Basic Settings tab, delete any existing items under Fluid and Particle Definitions by selecting
them and clicking Remove selected item

5.

Under Fluid and Particle Definitions, create two fluid definitions named Gas and Liquid by using the
Add new item

icon.

The new fluids named Gas and Liquid appear under Fluid and Particle Definitions.
6.

On the Basic Settings tab, configure the following setting(s) under Fluid and Particle Definitions:
Setting

Value

(List Box)

Gas

Gas
> Material

Gas mixture

Gas
> Morphology
> Option

Continuous Fluid

(List Box)

Liquid

Liquid
> Material

Liquid mixture

Liquid
> Morphology
> Option

Dispersed Fluid

Liquid
> Morphology
> Mean Diameter
a. Click the Enter Expression icon
expression.

7.

liqLength

[a]

to specify the CEL

On the Fluid Models tab, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Heat Transfer
> Option

Fluid Dependent

Turbulence
> Option

Fluid Dependent

Combustion
696

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

> Option

None

Thermal Radiation
> Option

None

8.

On the Fluid Models tab under Additional Variable Models > Additional Variable, select FalseDt
and select the FalseDt check box.

9.

Make sure that Additional Variable Models > Additional Variable > FalseDt > Option is set to Fluid
Dependent.

10. Repeat the previous two steps for the rest of the Additional Variables (PCoef, SatLheat, SatPres, SatTemp,
WaFluxGL, WaFluxLG).
11. On the Fluid Specific Models tab, select Gas in the list box, then configure the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Heat Transfer Model

> Option

Total Energy

Turbulence
> Option

k-Epsilon

Turbulence
> Wall Function
> Wall Function

Scalable

Component Models
> Component

Air Ideal Gas

Component Models
> Component
> Air Ideal Gas
> Option

Constraint

Component Models
> Component

Steam3v

Component Models
> Component
> Steam3v
> Option

Transport Equation

Component Models

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

697

Steam Jet
Setting

Value

> Component
> Steam3v
> Kinematic Diffusivity

(Selected)

Component Models
> Component
> Steam3v
> Kinematic Diffusivity
> Kinematic Diffusivity

KinDiff

Additional Variable Models

PCoef

Additional Variable Models

> PCoef

(Selected)

Additional Variable Models

> PCoef
> Add. Var. Value

dFLUXwadp

12. On the Fluid Specific Models tab, select Liquid in the list box, then configure the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Heat Transfer Model

> Option

Total Energy

Turbulence
> Option

Dispersed Phase
Zero Equation

13. Under Additional Variable Models (for Liquid), select FalseDt in the list box, then configure the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

FalseDt

(Selected)

FalseDt
> Add. Var. Value

DtFalseMf

14. Repeat the previous step for the rest of the Additional Variables (PCoef, SatLheat, SatPres, SatTemp, WaFluxGL, WaFluxLG) using the following values:

698

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Additional Variable

Expression

PCoef

dFLUXwadp

SatLheat

HtVapwa

SatPres

VpWat

SatTemp

SatT

WaFluxGL

FLUXwa1

WaFluxLG

FLUXwa2

15. On the Fluid Pair Models tab, select Gas | Liquid in the list box, then configure the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Surface Tension Coefficient

(Selected)

Surface Tension Coefficient

> Surf. Tension Coeff.

srfTenCoef

Interphase Transfer
> Option

Particle Model

Momentum Transfer
> Drag Force
> Option

Schiller Naumann

Turbulence Transfer
> Option

None

Mass Transfer
> Option

None

Heat Transfer
> Option

Ranz Marshall

16. Click OK.

31.4.6. Creating Subdomains

To model evaporation and condensation, mass sources and sinks are defined for the materials Steam3v
and Steam3l, according to the expressions imported earlier. In the next two sections you will set up
two subdomains; one is used for evaporation and the other is used for condensation.

31.4.6.1. Gas-to-Liquid Source Subdomain

This section outlines the steps to create the subdomain GastoLiq. This subdomain will be defined in
a manner consistent with the process of condensation.
1.

Create a subdomain named GastoLiq.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

699

Steam Jet
2.

3.

On the Basic Settings tab, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Location

B26

Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

On the Fluid Sources tab, select Gas in the list box, then select the Gas check box and configure the
following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Equation Sources

Continuity

Equation Sources
> Continuity

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Option

Fluid Mass Source

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Source

-Liquid.WaFluxGL

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> MCF/Energy Sink Option

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> MCF/Energy Sink Option
> Sink Option

Spec. Mass Frac. and Loc.

Temp.

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Mass Source Volume Fraction Coefficient

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Mass Source Volume Fraction Coefficient
> Volume Frac. Coeff.

-Gas.density/DtFalseMf

Equation Sources

700

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

> Continuity
> Variables
> Steam3v.mf
> Option

Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Steam3v.mf
> Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Temperature
> Option

Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Temperature
> Value

Gas.T

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Turbulence Eddy Dissipation
> Option

Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Turbulence Eddy Dissipation
> Value

Gas.ed

Equation Sources
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

701

Steam Jet
Setting

Value

> Continuity
> Variables
> Turbulence Kinetic Energy
> Option

Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Turbulence Kinetic Energy
> Value

Gas.ke

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
> Option

Cartesian Vector
Components

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
>U

Gas.Velocity u

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
>V

Gas.Velocity v

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
>W

702

Gas.Velocity w
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

Equation Sources

Steam3v.mf

Equation Sources
> Steam3v.mf

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Steam3v.mf
> Option

Source

Equation Sources
> Steam3v.mf
> Source

0 [kg m^-3 s^-1]

Equation Sources
> Steam3v.mf
> Source Coefficient

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Steam3v.mf
> Source Coefficient
> Source Coefficient

dFLwadYG

[a]

a. This source coefficient is required only for the mass transfer rates between gas and liquid
phases. The source is set to 0 [kg m^3 s^-1] because there is no external source and
therefore no additional mass is transferred into the system. The source is defined only to
enable setting a linearization coefficient.

4.

On the Fluid Sources tab, select Liquid in the list box, then select the Liquid check box and configure
the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Equation Sources

Continuity

Equation Sources
> Continuity

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Option

Fluid Mass Source

Equation Sources
> Continuity

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

703

Steam Jet
Setting

Value

> Source

Liquid.WaFluxGL

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Mass Source Volume Fraction Coefficient

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Mass Source Volume Fraction Coefficient
> Volume Frac. Coeff.

-Liquid.density/DtFalseMf

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Temperature
> Option

Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Temperature
> Value

Gas.T

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
> Option

Cartesian Vector Components

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
>U

Gas.Velocity u

Equation Sources
> Continuity

704

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

> Variables
> Velocity
>V

Gas.Velocity v

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
>W

Gas.Velocity w

Equation Sources

Energy

Equation Sources
> Energy

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Energy
> Option

Source[a]

Equation Sources
> Energy
> Source

Liquid.WaFluxGL*HtVapwa

Equation Sources
> Energy
> Source Coefficient

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Energy
> Source Coefficient
> Source Coefficient

-Liquid.vf*Liquid.density*Liquid.Cp/DtFalseMf

a. The liquid energy source is defined to account for latent heat due to the phase change. The latent
heat is assumed to be transferred to the liquid.

5.

Click OK.

31.4.6.2. Liquid-to-Gas Source Subdomain

This section outlines the steps to create the subdomain LiqtoGas. This subdomain will be defined in
a manner consistent with the process of vaporization.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

705

Steam Jet
1.

Create a new subdomain named LiqtoGas.

2.

On the Basic Settings tab, configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

Location

B26

Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

On the Fluid Sources tab, select Gas in the list box, then select the Gas check box and configure the
following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Equation Sources

Continuity

Equation Sources
> Continuity

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Option

Fluid Mass Source

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Source

Liquid.WaFluxLG

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Steam3v.mf
> Option

Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Steam3v.mf
> Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Temperature

706

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

> Option

Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Temperature
> Value

SatT

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Turbulence Eddy Dissipation
> Option

Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Turbulence Eddy Dissipation
> Value

Gas.ed

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Turbulence Kinetic Energy
> Option

Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Turbulence Kinetic Energy
> Value

Gas.ke

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

707

Steam Jet
Setting

Value

> Option

Cartesian Vector Components

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
>U

Liquid.Velocity u

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
>V

Liquid.Velocity v

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
>W

4.

Liquid.Velocity w

On the Fluid Sources tab, select Liquid in the list box, then select the Liquid check box and configure
the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Equation Sources

Continuity

Equation Sources
> Continuity

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Option

Fluid Mass Source

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Source

-Liquid.WaFluxLG

Equation Sources
> Continuity

708

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

> MCF/Energy Sink Option

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> MCF/Energy Sink Option
> Sink Option

Spec. Mass Frac. and Temp.

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Temperature
> Option

Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Temperature
> Value

SatT

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
> Option

Cartesian Vector Components

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
>V

0 [m s^-1]
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

709

Steam Jet
Setting

Value

Equation Sources
> Continuity
> Variables
> Velocity
>W

0 [m s^-1]

Equation Sources

Energy

Equation Sources
> Energy

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Energy
> Option

Source[a]

Equation Sources
> Energy
> Source

-Liquid.WaFluxLG*HtVapwa

Equation Sources
> Energy
> Source Coefficient

(Selected)

Equation Sources
> Energy
> Source Coefficient
> Source Coefficient

-Liquid.vf*Liquid.density*Liquid.Cp/DtFalseMf

a. The liquid energy source is defined to account for latent heat due to the phase change. The latent
heat is assumed to come from the liquid.

5.

Click OK.

31.4.7. Creating Boundaries

This section outlines the steps to create the following boundaries: an inlet boundary, Gas Inlet, for
the location where the steam is injected, an opening boundary, Opening, for the outer edges of the
domain, and two symmetry boundaries. The wall of the injection pipe will assume the default boundary
(a smooth, no-slip wall).

710

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

31.4.7.1. Inlet Boundary

At the gas inlet, create an inlet boundary that injects wet steam at a normal speed and static temperature
set consistent with the problem description. The steam contains a liquid and vapor component whose
sum of volume fractions is unity.
1.

Create a new boundary named Gas Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Location

gas inlet

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Normal Speed

Mass And Momentum

> Normal Speed

341 [m s^-1]

Turbulence
> Option

Fluid Dependent

Heat Transfer
> Option

Static Temperature

Heat Transfer

Fluid Values

> Static Temperature

373 K

Boundary Conditions

Gas

Boundary Conditions
> Gas
> Turbulence
> Option

Low (Intensity =
1%)

Boundary Conditions
> Gas
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Gas
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

1-0.45*0.4/1000

[a]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

711

Steam Jet
Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Gas
> Component Details

Steam3v

Boundary Conditions
> Gas
> Component Details
> Steam3v
> Option

Mass Fraction

Boundary Conditions
> Gas
> Component Details
> Steam3v
> Mass Fraction

Boundary Conditions

Liquid

Boundary Conditions
> Liquid
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Liquid
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction
a. Click the Enter Expression icon

3.

0.45*0.4/1000

[a]

to specify the CEL expression.

Click OK.

31.4.7.2. Opening Boundary for the Outside Edges

For the outer edges of the domain, where dry air may be entrained into the flow, specify an opening
boundary with a fixed pressure and flow direction. The direction specification is necessary to sufficiently
constrain the velocity. At this opening boundary you need to set the temperature of air that may enter
through the boundary. Set the opening temperature to be consistent with the problem description.

712

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Create a new boundary named Opening.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Opening

Location

air inlet,outer
edge,outlet

Boundary
Details

[a]

Mass And Momentum

> Option

Opening Pres. and

Dirn

Mass And Momentum

> Relative Pressure

0 [Pa]

Flow Direction
> Option

Normal to
Boundary Condition

Turbulence
> Option

Medium (Intensity
= 5%)

Heat Transfer
> Option

Opening
Temperature

Heat Transfer

Fluid Values

> Opening Temperature

25 [C]

Boundary Conditions

Gas

[b]

Boundary Conditions
> Gas
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Gas
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

Boundary Conditions
> Gas
> Component Details

Steam3v

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

713

Steam Jet
Tab

Setting

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Gas
> Component Details
> Steam3v
> Option

Mass Fraction

Boundary Conditions
> Gas
> Component Details
> Steam3v
> Mass Fraction

0.0

Boundary Conditions

Liquid

Boundary Conditions
> Liquid
> Volume Fraction
> Option

Value

Boundary Conditions
> Liquid
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

a. Click the Ellipsis icon

to open the selection dialog box, then select multiple
items by holding the Ctrl key. Click OK.
b. Ensure that units are set to [C].

3.

Click OK.

31.4.7.3. Creating the Symmetry Plane Boundaries

1.

Create a new boundary named SymP1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

714

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

F29.26

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named SymP2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

6.

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

F27.26

Click OK.

Note
The gas-to-liquid and liquid-to-gas mass transfer model is not symmetric. Consequently, the
boundary layer between the liquid and gas acts as an interface that is not explicitly simulated.
For simplicity, the boundary layer is imagined to belong to the gas phase in which the mass
transfer is driven by a departure from equilibrium. The equilibrium condition must therefore
be known. For a pure liquid the equilibrium boundary layer vapor fraction is just the gas
saturation value. For a multicomponent liquid the boundary layer vapor fraction is related
to the liquid component mole fraction via Raoults law, for example. For this case the gas
saturation value of the partial pressure is used, which is the same as the ratio of the partial
pressure to the gas pressure if it is in terms of mole fraction.

31.4.8. Creating a Time Step Expression

The conditions at each boundary determine the size of the time scale used in the time step. Generally,
you can estimate an effective time step by dividing the displacement by the velocity at which a fluid
is traveling. In this case, however, the velocity at the gas inlet approaches the speed of sound and the
time step must be calculated by taking the height of the inlet and dividing it by the velocity at which
the steam enters the system. The lower velocities at the outlet and opening boundaries enable the time
step to be increased after the gas inlet properties have converged. Once all the values at the inlet,
outlet, and openings have converged, a much larger time step is used to enable the overall solution to
settle. In order to account for all these time step changes, an expression will be created.
Since the flow velocities are high at the jet inlet, you need to use a very small time step to capture the
property variations at this location. The flow velocity decreases as you move away from the jet inlet,
therefore the time step can be increased systematically for better efficiency. You will now create a time
step control expression called Dtstep that ramps up the time scale in stages:
1.

Right-click Expressions in the Outline tree view and select Insert > Expression.

2.

Set the name to Dtstep and click OK.

3.

In the Definition area, type or copy and paste the following expression:
if (aitern <= 20, 1.0E-5[s], 5.0E-3 [s])

4.

Click Apply.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

715

Steam Jet

31.4.9. Setting Solver Control

1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic
Settings

Advection Scheme
> Option

Value

High Resolution

Convergence Control
> Max Iterations

1500

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Timescale Control

Physical Timescale

Convergence Control
> Fluid Timescale Control
> Physical Timescale

Dtstep

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Type

RMS

Convergence Criteria
> Residual Target

1.0E-4

Convergence Criteria
> Conservation Target

(Selected)

Convergence Criteria
> Conservation Target
> Value
Advanced
Options

0.005

Dynamic Model Control

> Global Dynamic Model
Control

(Selected)

Multiphase Control

(Selected)

Multiphase Control
> Volume Fraction Coupling

(Selected)

Multiphase Control
> Volume Fraction Coupling
> Option

716

Segregated

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

3.

Click OK.

31.4.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

In the Write Solver Input File dialog box, set File name to SteamJet.def and click Save.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the case (.cfx) file at your discretion.

31.5. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and the CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD
problem by following the instructions below:
1.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

CFX-Solver Input File should be set to SteamJet.def

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

3.

Note the number of iterations required to obtain a solution.

4.

Select Post-Process Results.

5.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

6.

Click OK.

31.6. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, the steam molar fraction in the gas fluid, the gas-to-liquid and liquid-to-gas mass transfer
rates, and the false time step will be illustrated on various regions.

31.6.1. Displaying the Steam Molar Fraction

1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z.
This ensures that the view is set to a position that is best suited to display the results.

2.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Contour.

3.

Under Name, type Steam Molar Fraction and click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

SymP2

Variable

Gas.Steam3v.Molar
Fraction

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

717

Steam Jet
5.

Click Apply.

This will result in SymP2 shown colored by the molar fraction of steam.

31.6.2. Displaying the Gas-to-Liquid Mass Transfer Rate

1.

Turn off the visibility of Steam Molar Fraction.

2.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Contour.

3.

Under Name, type Gas to Liquid Flux and click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

5.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

SymP2

Variable

Liquid.WaFluxGL

Click Apply.

This will result in SymP2 shown colored by the gas-to-liquid mass transfer rate.

31.6.3. Displaying the Liquid-to-Gas Mass Transfer Rate

1.

Turn off the visibility of Gas to Liquid Flux.

2.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Contour.

3.

Under Name, type Liquid to Gas Flux and click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

5.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

SymP2

Variable

Liquid.WaFluxLG

Click Apply.

This will result in SymP2 shown colored by the liquid-to-gas mass transfer rate.

31.6.4. Displaying the Gas-to-Liquid and Liquid-to-Gas Phase Transfer Rates

in Synchronous Views
1.

In the viewer toolbar, open the viewport drop-down menu and click the option with two horizontal
viewports.

2.

In the viewer toolbar, disable Synchronize visibility in displayed views

3.

Click a blank area in View 2 so that it becomes the active view.

718

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

4.

In the tree view, select the check box beside Gas to Liquid Flux.

Note
You must disable Synchronize visibility in displayed views
be displayed in each viewport

to enable separate contours to

Under User Locations and Plots in the tree view, ensure that only Liquid to
Gas Flux is visible in View 1, and only Gas to Liquid Flux is visible in View 2.

5.

In View 2, right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From -Z.
This ensures that the view is set to a position that is best suited to display the results.

You may want to zoom in near the gas inlet to view the differences between the gas-to-liquid and liquidto-gas phase transfer rates.

31.6.5. Creating a Chart to Plot the False Time Step Along a Line
1.

In the tree view, right-click User Locations and Plots and select Insert > Location > Line.

2.

In the Insert Line dialog box, use the default name and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Two Points

Definition
> Point 1

0, 0.005,
0.0002

Definition
> Point 2

5, 0.005,
0.0002

Line Type
> Cut

4.

Click Apply.

5.

From the menu bar, select Insert > Chart.

6.

Name the chart False Time Step and click OK.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

719

Steam Jet
Tab

Setting

Value

General

Title

False Time
Step

Data Series

Data Source
> Location

X Axis

Data Selection
> Variable

Y Axis

Line 1

Data Selection
> Variable

Liquid.FalseDt

Axis Range
> Logarithmic Scale

8.

(Selected)

Click Apply.

The false time step peaks where the interphase mass transfer rate changes sign, and hence goes through
zero. This is true because the false time step is inversely proportional to the absolute mass transfer rate.
When you have finished viewing the chart, quit CFD-Post.

720

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 32: Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver
This tutorial includes:
32.1.Tutorial Features
32.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
32.3. Preparing the Working Directory
32.4. Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion
32.5. Simulating the Buoy with Decoupled Mesh Motion
32.6. Comparing the Two Cases Using CFD-Post

32.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Modeling a multiphase simulation in CFX-Pre.
Creating and editing a rigid body in CFX-Pre.
Creating and editing a subdomain in CFX-Pre.
Creating a keyframe animation in CFD-Post.
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Transient

Fluid Type

General Fluid

Domain Type

Single Domain

Turbulence Model

Shear Stress Transport

Heat Transfer

Isothermal

Buoyant Flow
Multiphase

Homogeneous Model

Rigid Body

3 degrees of freedom

Boundary Conditions

Symmetry Plane
Wall: No Slip
Wall (Specified
Displacement)
Opening
Mesh Motion option of
Rigid Body Solution

Subdomain

Mesh Motion option of

Rigid Body Solution

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

721

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

Component

CFD-Post

Feature

Details

ANSYS CFX Command

Language (CCL)

Importing Expressions

Plots

Contour Plot

Animations

Keyframe

32.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

In this tutorial you will model the interaction between a rigid body (represented by a buoy) and two
fluids (air and water) that make up the surrounding region, using a six degrees of freedom rigid-body
solver. In this case, the fluid forces acting on the buoy cause motion that is constrained to three degrees
of freedom: vertical and horizontal translation and rotation about an axis perpendicular to the translational directions. The motion of the floating buoy results from interactions between itself and the wave
motion of the surrounding fluid created by an initial contraction of the domain in the X direction.

The rigid body is surrounded by a fluid volume that is part air and part water (both at a static temperature of 25C). Because the rigid body has a density of 500 kg m^-3 less than that of water (997 kg
m^-3) it floats atop the water's surface. The right-side wall, highlighted yellow in the image above, is
given an initial velocity in the negative X direction, thereby causing the fluid domain to shrink. This in
turn causes waves in the water. An opening is required along the top face to enable air to move in and
out of the fluid region while the volume fraction of air and water are in a state of flux. Because of this
contraction of the fluid region, you will also need to define the mesh motion of the domain, subdomain,
and several of the boundary conditions.
A homogeneous, multiphase model will be used for this simulation because the air and water will
maintain a well-defined interface. When setting up the initial conditions for the simulation, CCL-defined

722

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Preparing the Working Directory

step functions will be used to determine the volume fractions of water and air defined by a function
of height.
The relevant fluid parameters of this problem are:
Density of water = 997 [kg m^-3]
Static temperature of water = 25 [C]
Density of air = 1.185 [kg m^-3]
Static temperature of air = 25 [C]
The relevant physical parameters of the rigid body are:
Mass = 39.39 [kg]
Density = 500 [kg m^-3]
Volume = 0.07878 [m^3]
Mass moment of inertia (XX, YY, ZZ, XY, XZ, YZ) = (4.5, 2.1, 6.36, 0, 0, 0) [kg m^2]
Initial Center of Mass (X, Y, Z) = (0, 0.1438, 0.05) [m]
The first step in solving this problem is to import a pre-existing mesh file into CFX-Pre. A CCL file containing several mathematical expressions for this simulation will also be imported into CFX-Pre. The
transient analysis conditions will then be defined and the default domain edited. A number of boundary
conditions will also be created within CFX-Pre. Mesh motion within the domain and several of the
boundary conditions will be specified because the domain will contract at the beginning of the simulation,
and because the buoy will move freely due to wave motion causing motion of the fluids and hence
the rigid body within the domain. In the first simulation, the motion of the mesh surrounding the rigid
body will be fully coupled to the motion of the buoy, including the rotation of the buoy; the mesh will
both rotate and translate with the buoy. In the second simulation the rotational and translational motion
will be decoupled, enabling the inner cylindrical subdomain to rotate at the same rate as the buoy
while the outer domain will deform solely with the translational motion of the buoy. In both simulations
in CFD-Post, a contour plot will be created to visualize the air/water makeup of the fluid region and
the mesh will be visible to observe the mesh when it deforms. In addition, one animation for each
simulation will be produced in order to show the complex motion of the rigid body and mesh deformation.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

32.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

723

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
Buoy.gtm
Buoy.ccl
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

32.4. Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion

In this simulation, the motion of the mesh surrounding the rigid body will be fully coupled to the motion
of the buoy, including the rotation of the buoy; the mesh will both rotate and translate with the buoy.

32.4.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

This section describes the step-by-step definition of the flow physics in CFX-Pre.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run Buoy.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 743).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type Buoy.

6.

Click Save.

32.4.1.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

Right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.

The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

3.

724

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

Buoy.gtm

Click Open.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion

32.4.1.2. Importing the Required Expressions From a CCL File

The mathematical expressions for this simulation will be imported from a CFX Command Language
(CCL) file. These expressions will be used to set a monitor point and the physical parameters of the
simulation: the fluid properties and the displacement of the walls and opening.

Note
The expressions or physics for a simulation can be saved to a CCL file at any time by selecting
File > Export > CCL.
1.

Select File > Import > CCL.

The Import CCL dialog box appears.

2.

Under Import Method, select Append. This will start with the existing CCL already generated by CFX-Pre
and append the imported CCL.

Note
Replace is useful if you have defined physics and want to update or replace them with
newly-imported physics.

3.

Select Buoy.ccl.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Double-click the Expressions section in the Outline tree to see a list of the expressions that have been
imported.
All expressions required for this simulation are displayed. Take a moment to look over each expression. A brief description of each expression will be provided wherever it is implemented within
this tutorial.

6.

Close the Expressions section by clicking Close

located at the top of the left workspace.

Note
Note that you could have entered these expressions manually into CFX-Pre by inserting
new expressions and defining each with an appropriate formula.

32.4.1.3. Defining a Transient Simulation

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Analysis Type and select Edit.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Analysis Type

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

725

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Transient

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Option

Total Time

Analysis Type
> Time Duration
> Total Time

7.0 [s]

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Option

Timesteps

Analysis Type
> Time Steps
> Timesteps

0.025 [s]

[a]

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Time

0 [s]

a. A total time of 7.0 [s] is implemented so that you get an adequate overview
of the rigid body motion during postprocessing. The 0.025 [s] time step
provides enough detail in the solution without requiring an excessive amount
of computation time for CFX-Solver.

3.

Click OK.

Note
You may ignore the physics validation messages regarding the lack of definition of transient
results files and the lack of initial condition values. You will set up the transient results files
and set the initial conditions later.

726

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion

32.4.1.4. Editing the Domain

In this section you will create the fluid domain to reflect the multiphase, homogeneous region surrounding the buoy, define the fluids, and enable mesh motion.
1.

Edit Case Options > General in the Outline tree view, ensure Automatic Default Domain and
Automatic Default Interfaces are both selected, and click OK.

2.

In the tree view, right-click Default Domain, select Rename, and set the new name to buoy.

3.

In the tree view, right-click the newly renamed domain and select Edit.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

Value

> Location

Assembly

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Delete Fluid 1

Fluid and Particle Definitions

Create a new fluid

named Air at
25 C

Fluid and Particle Definitions

[a]
[b]

[c]

Create a new fluid

named Water at
25 C

[c]

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Air at 25 C
> Material

Air at 25 C

Fluid and Particle

Definitions
> Water at 25 C
> Material

Water at 25 C

[d]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Option

Buoyant

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity X Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

727

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

Tab

Setting

Value

> Gravity Y Dirn.

-g

[e]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Gravity Z Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Domain Models
> Buoyancy Model
> Buoy. Ref. Density

denAir

[e][f]

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Option

Regions of Motion
Specified

[g]

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Option

Displacement
Diffusion

[h][i]

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Mesh Stiffness
> Option

Value

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Mesh Stiffness
> Mesh Stiffness

1.0 [m^5 s^-1] /

volcvol

Fluid Models

[e][j]

Multiphase
> Homogeneous Model

(Selected)

[k]

Multiphase
> Free Surface Model

728

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Standard

Multiphase
> Free Surface Model
> Interface Compression
Level

(Selected)

Multiphase
> Free Surface Model
> Interface Compression
Level
> Interface Compression

Heat Transfer
> Homogeneous Model

(Selected)

Turbulence
> Option
Fluid Pair
Models

Shear Stress
Transport

Fluid Pair
> Air at 25 C | Water at 25
C
> Interphase Transfer
> Option[l]

Mixture Model

Fluid Pair
> Air at 25 C | Water at 25
C
> Interphase Transfer
> Interface Len. Scale

1.0 [mm]

a. Click Multi-select from extended list

to open the Selection Dialog box, then
select Assembly from this list. Click OK.
b. Ensure that you have Fluid 1 selected and click Remove Selected Item
c. To create a new item, you must first click the Add new item
the name as required and click OK.

icon, then enter

d. Click Select from extended list

and then on Import Library Data
in the
upper right corner of the resulting Material dialog box. When the Select
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

729

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

Tab

Setting

Value

Library Data to Import box appears, click Expand

located beside
Water Data. Select Water at 25 C from the list. Click OK.
e. In order to enter an expression, you must first click Enter Expression
f.

The buoyancy reference density is set to 1.185 kg/m3, which is representative

of air.

g. This mesh deformation option enables you to specify the motion of the boundary
mesh nodes using user-defined expressions created in the CFX Expression
Language (CEL). These expressions of mesh motion are included in the CCL file
that was imported at the beginning of the tutorial.
h. To see the additional mesh motion settings, you may need to click Roll Down
located beside Mesh Motion Model.
i.

The Displacement Diffusion model for mesh motion preserves the relative mesh
distribution of the initial mesh.

j.

The variable volcvol (volume of finite volumes) is a predefined variable related

to the local mesh element volume. It is used here in the calculation of the mesh
stiffness value. In this example, the mesh stiffness is set to be inversely
proportional to volcvol, which results in higher stiffness in regions of smaller
element size; these are the regions that are most likely to experience mesh
folding. This is similar to the default setting of Mesh Stiffness > Option set to
Increase Near Small Volumes with Reference Volume > Option set
to Mean Control Volume.

k. In a homogeneous, multiphase model, all fluids share a flow field, turbulence

field, and so on. This is valid for models where the fluids have completely
stratified; this is the case in this simulation.
l.

5.

The interphase transfer model controls the calculation of interfacial area density,
which is required by certain interfacial transfer processes. In this case, the
homogeneous model is used and no other interfacial transfer processes are
active so the actual setting does not matter.

Click OK.

32.4.1.5. Creating a Rigid Body

In this section you will specify the properties of a rigid body with three degrees of freedom: translation
in the X and Y directions and rotation about the Z axis. The rigid body definition will be applied to the
wall boundary of the buoy to define the motion characteristics of the buoy. Further, you will specify
the direction of gravity that acts upon the buoy's mass. Aside from gravity, no external forces are specified
to act continuously on the buoy, however the motion of the buoy will be driven by fluid forces (from
both the air and water) acting on the surface of the rigid body.

730

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion

1.

It is very important to give the rigid body a coordinate frame that is centered on its center of mass. Create
a coordinate frame centered on the rigid body in its initial position, and oriented with its axes aligned
with the rigid body axes/global coordinate axes as follows:
a.

Select Insert > Coordinate Frame.

b.

In the dialog box that appears, set Name to RigidBodyCoordFrame and click OK. The Basic
Settings tab for the coordinate frame appears.

c.

Set Option to Axis Points.

d.

Set Origin to 0, 0.1438, 0.05.

e.

Set Z Axis Point to 0, 0.1438, 1.

f.

Set X-Z Plane Pt to 1, 0.1438, 0.05.

g.

Click OK.

2.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Flow Analysis 1 and select Insert > Rigid Body.

3.

Accept the default name, Rigid Body 1, by clicking OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Mass

39.39 [kg]

Location

BUOY

Coordinate Frame

RigidBodyCoordFrame

[a]

Mass Moment of Inertia

> XX Component

4.5 [kg m^2]

Mass Moment of Inertia

> YY Component

2.1 [kg m^2]

Mass Moment of Inertia

> ZZ Component

6.36 [kg m^2]

Mass Moment of Inertia

> XY Component

0 [kg m^2]

Mass Moment of Inertia

> XZ Component

0 [kg m^2]

Mass Moment of Inertia

> YZ Component
Dynamics

0 [kg m^2]

Degrees of Freedom
> Translational Degrees of
Freedom
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

731

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

X and Y axes

Degrees of Freedom
> Rotational Degrees of
Freedom
> Option

Z axis

Gravity

(Selected)

Gravity
> Option

Cartesian Components

Gravity
> Gravity X Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Gravity
> Gravity Y Dirn.

-g

[b]

Gravity

Initial
Conditions

> Gravity Z Dirn.

0 [m s^-2]

Center of Mass

(Selected)

Center of Mass
> Option

Automatic[c]

Linear Velocity

(Selected)

Linear Velocity
> Option

Automatic with Value

Linear Velocity
> X Component

0 [m s^-1]

Linear Velocity
> Y Component

0 [m s^-1]

Linear Velocity
> Z Component

0 [m s^-1]

Angular Velocity

(Selected)

Angular Velocity
> Option

Automatic with Value

Angular Velocity
> X Component

0 [radians s^-1]

Angular Velocity
> Y Component

732

0 [radians s^-1]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion

Tab

Setting

Value

Angular Velocity
> Z Component

0 [radians s^-1]

a. The values in this table are taken directly from the problem description found in
the Overview of the Problem to Solve (p. 722) section.
b. In order to enter an expression, you must first click Enter Expression

c. Setting this option to Automatic defaults the center of mass of the rigid body to
the origin of the RigidBodyCoordFrame. In most cases, this will be the correct
setting.

5.

Click OK.

32.4.1.6. Creating the Boundary Conditions

In this section symmetry boundaries will be created for the front and back planes of the given geometry;
this is required because a 2D representation of the flow field is being modeled. Wall boundaries will
also be created for the bottom, stationary side, moving side, and buoy body sections of the fluid region.
Because the right-side wall will be provided with an initial velocity in the negative X direction, you will
define mesh motion along this direction for the moving wall boundaries. An opening boundary will
also be created along the top of the fluid region to enable air to flow freely in and out of this region
because of the interactions between the air and water (as a result of the moving wall).

32.4.1.6.1. Symmetry Boundaries

The front and back planes each require a symmetry boundary.
1.

Create a new boundary named back.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

BACK A, BACK B

Boundary
Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Unspecified

[a]

[b]

a. Hold the Ctrl key while selecting both BACK A and BACK B from the list.
b. In the unspecified mesh motion option, no mesh motion constraints are applied
directly to the nodes. Instead, mesh motion is governed by the constraints in
other regions of the mesh.

3.

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

733

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

4.

Create a second boundary named front.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Symmetry

Location

FRONT A, FRONT B
[a]

Boundary
Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Unspecified[b]

a. Hold the Ctrl key while selecting both FRONT A and FRONT B from the list.
b. In the unspecified mesh motion option, no mesh motion constraints are applied
directly to the nodes. Instead, mesh motion is governed by the constraints in
other regions of the mesh.

6.

Click OK.

32.4.1.6.2. Wall Boundaries

The top, bottom, and sides of the fluid region all require wall boundaries. In addition, the surface
between the fluid region and the rigid body, Rigid Body 1, requires a wall boundary; this wall
boundary will move according to the rigid body solution.
1.

Create a new boundary named Buoy Surface.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

BUOY

Boundary
Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Rigid Body Solution

Mesh Motion
> Rigid Body

Rigid Body 1

Mass and Momentum

> Option

No Slip Wall

Wall Roughness
> Option

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named wall.

734

Smooth Wall

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

BOTTOM, S1, S2

Boundary
Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

[a]

Specified
Displacement

Mesh Motion
> Displacement
> Option

Cartesian
Components

Mesh Motion
> Displacement
> X Component

wallMeshMot

[b][c]

Mesh Motion
> Displacement
> Y Component

0.0 [m]

[d]

Mesh Motion
> Displacement
> Z Component

0.0 [m]

Mass and Momentum

> Option

No Slip Wall

a. Hold the Ctrl key while selecting BOTTOM, S1, and S2 from the list.
b. In order to enter an expression, you must first click Enter Expression

c. This displacement expression, defined in the CCL, will enable the mesh nodes
to shift in the X direction because the fluid domain is compressed in this direction
during the simulation. The X-coordinate runs from -4.0 m to 4.0 m, but this mesh
motion along the bottom of the fluid region only occurs when the X-coordinate
is between 0 m and 4.0 m. Thus, wallMeshMot uses a simple logical expression
to apply the mesh motion only when the X-coordinate is greater than or equal
to 0 m.
The second displacement expression that is present in the CCL, wxdisp,
allows the mesh nodes to shift in the X direction, because the right-side
wall will be moving and compressing the fluid region during the simulation.
It is defined in the CCL as a logical expression that remains steady at 0.0
[m] until it is turned on at time tOn, at which point a time-dependent,
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

735

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

Tab

Setting

Value

sinusoidally increasing displacement is applied. This displacement increases

until 1.0 seconds into the simulation, when it plateaus at this final value.
The expression wallMeshMot is dependent on wxdisp, as can be seen
in the CCL, and will therefore take the motion of the moving side wall
into account. This expression will have no effect on the stationary wall
because this wall has an X-coordinate that is outside the part of the
expression that specifies a displacement. Thus, wallMeshMot can be
applied to all three of these walls; it is equally applicable to each.
d. The left-side of the fluid region maintains its position throughout the simulation
and it is necessary to define mesh deformation of the bottom in the X direction
only. Therefore, set the mesh displacement in the Y and Z directions to 0.0
[m].

6.

Click OK.

32.4.1.6.3. Opening Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named top.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Boundary Type

Opening

Location

TOP

Boundary
Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Specified
Displacement

Mesh Motion
> Displacement
> Option

Cartesian
Components

Mesh Motion
> Displacement
> X Component

wallMeshMot

[a]

Mesh Motion
> Displacement
> Y Component

0.0 [m]

Mesh Motion
> Displacement

736

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion

Tab

Setting

Value

> Z Component

0.0 [m]

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Opening Pres. and

Dirn

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure
Fluid
Values

0 [Pa]

Boundary Conditions
> Air at 25 C
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

1.0

Boundary Conditions
> Water at 25 C
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

0.0

[b]

a. The same mesh motion is provided for the top boundary and the bottom
boundary. They will move in unison.
b. The top boundary comes into contact only with air, and not with water. The
volume fraction of the opening for air is set to 1.0 and that of water to 0.0,
therefore enabling only air to pass through the opening.

3.

Click OK.

Note
Opening boundary types are used to enable the flow to leave and re-enter the domain. This
behavior is expected due to the motion of the water and the interaction between the air
and water in the fluid region.

32.4.1.7. Setting Initial Values

Because a transient simulation is being modeled, initial values are required for all variables.
1.

Click Global Initialization

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

737

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

Tab

Setting

Global
Settings

Initial Conditions

Value

> Cartesian Velocity

Components
>U

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>V

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Cartesian Velocity
Components
>W

0 [m s^-1]

Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Option

Automatic with
Value

Initial Conditions
> Static Pressure
> Relative Pressure

hypres

[a][b]

Initial Conditions
> Turbulence
> Option
Fluid
Settings

Intensity and Eddy

Viscosity Ratio

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Air at 25 C
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction
> Volume Fraction

airvol

[a]

Fluid Specific Initialization

> Water at 25 C
> Initial Conditions
> Volume Fraction

738

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion

Tab

Setting

Value

> Volume Fraction

watvol

[a][c]

a. In order to enter an expression, you must first click Enter Expression

b. The expression hypres is defined in the CCL file and gives the relative pressure
as a function of the volume of water in the fluid region and the vertical distance
(Y direction value). The expression results in an initial pressure gradient that
linearly decreases when the value of the Y-coordinate increases (or the water
depth decreases). When the Y-coordinate reaches the interface between the air
and water, the initial pressure plateaus at a value of zero (due to the reliance of
the expression hypres on watvol). The initial pressure gradient produced by
this expression can be observed in the image below.

To create this plot in CFX-Pre:

i.

Double-click Expressions in the Outline tree view.

ii. Double-click the hypres expression.

iii. Select the Plot tab under Details of hypres.
iv. Select Expression Variables: Y.
v. Set the Start of Range to -2.0 [m] and End of Range to
2.0 [m].
vi. Click Plot Expression.
c. The airvol and watvol expressions were provided in the CCL file. The
expression watvol is a step function that returns a value of 1.0 for all
Y-coordinate values less than the initial water height (0.05 [m]), 0.0 for all
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

739

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

Tab

Setting

Value

Y-coordinate values greater than the initial water height, and 0.5 when the
Y-coordinate value is equal to the initial water height.

3.

Click OK.

32.4.1.8. Setting the Solver Control

In this section, you will adjust the solver control settings to promote a quicker solution time and to
enable the frequency of when the rigid body solver is run.
1.

Click Solver Control

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Equation
Class
Settings

Equation Class
> Mesh Displacement

Value

(Selected)

Equation Class
> Mesh Displacement
> Convergence Control

(Selected)

Equation Class
> Mesh Displacement
> Convergence Control
> Max. Coeff. Loops

[a]

Equation Class
> Mesh Displacement
> Convergence Control

Rigid Body
Control

> Min. Coeff. Loops

Rigid Body Control

(Selected)

Rigid Body Control

> Rigid Body Solver Coupling
Control
Every Coefficient
> Update Frequency

Loop

[b]

Rigid Body Control

> Angular Momentum Equation Control

740

(Selected)

[c]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion

Tab

Setting

Value

Advanced
Options

Multiphase Control

(Selected)

Multiphase Control
> Initial Volume Fraction
Smoothing

(Selected)

Multiphase Control
> Initial Volume Fraction
Smoothing
Volume-Weighted
> Option

[d]

a. The maximum number of coefficient loops is set to 4 and the minimum number
of coefficient loops to 2 to ensure that the solver completes at least 2 loops per
time step, and no more than 4. In this simulation it will ensure a relatively resolved
and accurate solution within a short period of time.
b. By setting the update frequency to every coefficient loop you are specifying that
CFX-Solver will call the rigid body solver during every coefficient loop within
each time step. This may increase total solution time, however the motion of
the rigid body will be better resolved.
c. This sets the integration scheme for the angular momentum equations to the
second-order Simo Wong scheme, which is robust and energy-conserving.
d. If the initial conditions for volume fraction have a discontinuity, startup
robustness problems may occur. Choosing volume-weighted smoothing of these
volume fractions may improve startup robustness.

3.

Click OK.

32.4.1.9. Setting the Output Control

In this section, you will set transient results for selected variables to be captured every three time steps.
You will also create two monitor points so that you can track the progress in CFX-Solver Manager.
1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

In the Transient Results editor, click Add new item

click OK.

4.

Configure the following setting(s) of Transient Results 1:

Setting

, set Name to Transient Results 1, and

Value

Transient Results 1
> Option

Selected Variables
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

741

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

Setting

Value

Transient Results 1
> Output Variables List

Pressure, Total Mesh Displacement, Velocity, Water at 25

C.Volume Fraction

[a]

Transient Results 1
> Output Frequency
> Option

Time Interval

Transient Results 1
> Output Frequency
> Time Interval

tOn[b]

a. Click Multi-select from extended list

beside the entry box, and make multiple selections in the
Output Variables List by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking on the required variables.
b. In order to enter an expression, you must first click Enter Expression

5.

Click the Monitor tab and configure the following setting(s):

Monitor Objects

(Selected)

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and Expressions

Create a new Monitor Point and enter the name Buoy

Force

[a][b]

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
> Buoy Force
> Option

Expression

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
> Buoy Force
> Expression Value

force_y()@Buoy Surface

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and Expressions

742

Create a new Monitor Point and enter the name Buoy

Torq

[a][c]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
> Buoy Torq
> Option

Expression

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
> Buoy Torq
> Expression Value

torque_z()@Buoy Surface

a. To create a new item, you must first click the Add new item
and click OK.

icon, then enter the name as required

b. This monitor point will track the force acting on the rigid body in the Y direction.
c. This monitor point will track the torque of the rigid body relative to the Z axis.

6.

Click OK.

32.4.1.10. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

Buoy.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file.

32.4.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and the CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD
problem by following the instructions below.
1.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

Solver Input File should be set to Buoy.def.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

743

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

Note
After the CFX-Solver Manager has run for a short time, you can track the monitor
points you created in CFX-Pre by clicking the User Points tab that appears at
the top of the graphical interface of CFX-Solver Manager. The two monitor points
Buoy Force and Buoy Torq are monitored in the global coordinate frame and
not the coordinate frame attached to the buoy. You can also view the level of
convergence of the rigid body solution through the Rigid Body Convergence
tab. Finally, the rigid body position and Euler angles can be displayed by going to
the main menu and selecting Monitors > Rigid Body > Rigid Body Position and
Monitors > Rigid Body > Rigid Body Euler Angles, respectively.

Note
New monitor points can be toggled within the current plot by right-clicking the
plot and selecting Monitor Properties. A window will display available plot line
variables. Select the box to the left of the property to display it the plot will
adjust the scale so that all properties appear.

3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

32.4.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will create a contour plot for this case. An animation will then be created to show
the movement of the rigid body in the fluid domain. Furthermore, the minimum face angle of the mesh
will be calculated for comparison purposes between the simulations.

32.4.3.1. Creating a Contour Plot

1.

Right-click a blank area in the viewer and select Predefined Camera > View From +Z.

2.

Create a new Plane and accept the default name.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

XY Plane

Definition
>Z
744

0.05 [m]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Fully Coupled Mesh Motion

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Create new contour and accept the default name.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Plane 1

Variable

Water at 25
C.Volume Fraction

Color Map

White to Blue

# of Contours

10

7.

Click Apply.

8.

Select File > Save State and choose the name Buoy.cst.

9.

Click Save.

32.4.3.2. Creating a Keyframe Animation

A short animation of the rigid body and surrounding fluid region, starting from rest and given an initial
velocity, will be created to show the complex motion of the rigid body and deformation of the mesh
because of the waves created in the fluid region. You will record a short animation that can be played
in an MPEG player.
1.

Ensure that Contour 1 is visible in the 3D Viewer (make sure there is a check mark beside Contour
1 in the Outline tree view).

2.

Turn off the visibility of Plane 1 and Default Legend View 1 to better see the movement of the
buoy.

3.

Edit Wireframe and configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Show surface mesh

(Selected)

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Click the Timestep Selector

6.

Click Animation

7.

In the Animation dialog box, select the Keyframe Animation option.

8.

Click New

in the toolbar. Select the 1st time step and click Apply.

in the Timestep Selector dialog box.

to create KeyframeNo1.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

745

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

9.

Select KeyframeNo1, then set # of Frames to 93, then press Enter while the cursor is in the # of Frames
box.

Tip
Be sure to press Enter and confirm that the new number appears in the list before
continuing.

10. In the Timestep Selector, select time step 280 and click Apply.
11. In the Animation dialog box, click New
12. Ensure that More Animation Options

to create KeyframeNo2.
is pushed down to show more animation settings.

13. Select Loop.

14. Ensure that Repeat forever

(next to Repeat) is not selected (not pushed down).

15. Select Save Movie.

16. Set Format to MPEG1.
17. Prepare to save the movie file:
a.

If you want to save the file in your working directory, set File name to Buoy.mpg in the field beside
Save Movie.

b.

If you want to save the file somewhere other than your working directory, click Browse
Save Movie) set the new path and movie filename. Click Save.

(next to

The movie filename (including the path) has been set, but the animation has not yet been
produced.

18. Click To Beginning

This ensures that the animation will begin at the first keyframe.
19. After the first keyframe has been loaded, click Play the animation

The MPEG will be created as the animation proceeds.

This will be slow, since results will be loaded and objects will be created for each time step.
To view the movie file, you need to use a viewer that supports the MPEG format.

Note
To explore additional animation options, click the Options button. On the Advanced
tab of the Animation Options dialog box, there is a Save Frames As Image Files check

746

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Decoupled Mesh Motion

box. By selecting this check box, the JPEG or PPM files used to encode each frame of
the movie will persist after movie creation; otherwise, they will be deleted.

20. Close the Animation dialog box when the animation is complete.

32.4.3.3. Calculating the Minimum Mesh Face Angle

In this step, you will calculate the Minimum Face Angle of the mesh which is an indicator of the overall
mesh quality during the deformation of the mesh. A Minimum Face Angle of greater than 15 is one
indicator of a good quality mesh. However an angle of between 10 and 15 is also acceptable but may
produce inaccuracies in that region of the mesh during the simulation.
, select the 162nd time step and click Apply.

1.

Click the Timestep Selector

2.

Select Tools > Mesh Calculator or click the Calculators tab and select Mesh Calculator.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Mesh
Calculator

Function

Minimum Face
Angle

4.

Click Calculate.

5.

When you have finished, close the Timestep Selector dialog box and exit from CFD-Post.

The 162nd time step was chosen arbitrarily to contrast the mesh quality between this simulation and
the following one. In this simulation the Minimum Face Angle during the 162nd time step is approximately
13.

32.5. Simulating the Buoy with Decoupled Mesh Motion

In this section you will use a subdomain to decouple rotation (that is, to enable independent rotation
of the mesh in each part of the domain). Furthermore, you will edit the domain interface boundaries
to restrict mesh deformation on the outer part of the domain to translational only; the inner cylindrical
part of the domain will rotate and translate at the same rate as the buoy.

32.5.1. Defining the Case Using CFX-Pre

1.

Ensure the following tutorial input file is in your working directory:

Buoy.cfx
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already running.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

747

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run Buoy_decoupled.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager (p. 750).

4.

Select File > Open Case.

5.

From your working directory, select Buoy.cfx and click Open.

6.

Select File > Save Case As.

7.

Set File name to Buoy_decoupled.cfx.

8.

Click Save.

32.5.1.1. Creating a Subdomain

The subdomain, domain interfaces, and buoy must share common rigid body characteristics. This is
necessary because the inner cylinder and the rigid body must translate and rotate at the same rate to
properly isolate the motions. All relative movement between the inner cylinder and the buoy will be
eliminated, causing zero mesh deformation within the inner cylinder. A subdomain is not strictly necessary
to decouple rotational motions. However, the subdomain increases the robustness of the simulation
by ensuring that the entire mesh within the inner cylinder has the same physical properties as the rigid
body, not just at the buoy boundary and inner cylinder domain interface (this will be set up in the next
step).
1.

Select Insert > Subdomain from the main menu or click Subdomain

2.

Set the subdomain name to rot_trans and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Location

B86

Mesh
Motion

Mesh Motion
> Option

Rigid Body Solution

Mesh Motion
> Rigid Body

Rigid Body 1

Mesh Motion
> Motion Constraints

(Selected)

Mesh Motion
> Motion Constraints
> Motion Constraints

748

None

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Decoupled Mesh Motion

4.

Click OK.

32.5.1.2. Editing the Domain Interfaces

You will edit the domain interfaces to restrict the rotational movement of the mesh surrounding the
subdomain. The mesh that is located on the inner cylindrical domain interface will be assigned the
same physical properties as that of the rigid body.
1.

Edit Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > buoy > Default Fluid Fluid Interface Side
1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Location

F74.27[a]

Boundary
Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Rigid Body Solution

Mesh Motion
> Rigid Body

Rigid Body 1

Mesh Motion
> Motion Constraints

(Selected)

Mesh Motion
> Motion Constraints
> Motion Constraints

Ignore Rotations[b]

a. This is the outer cylindrical domain interface.

b. Ignore Rotations constrains the outer domain interface to only translational
motion.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Edit Simulation > Flow Analysis 1 > buoy > Default Fluid Fluid Interface Side
2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic
Settings

Location

F89.86[a]

Boundary
Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Rigid Body Solution

Mesh Motion
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

749

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

Tab

Setting

Value

> Rigid Body

Rigid Body 1

Mesh Motion
> Motion Constraints

(Selected)

Mesh Motion
> Motion Constraints
> Motion Constraints

None

a. This is the inner cylindrical domain interface.

6.

Click OK.

32.5.1.3. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

Buoy_decoupled.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

Quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file.

32.5.2. Obtaining the Solution Using CFX-Solver Manager

When CFX-Pre has shut down and the CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD
problem by following the instructions below.
1.

Ensure Define Run is displayed.

Solver Input File should be set to Buoy_decoupled.def.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

3.

Select Post-Process Results.

4.

If using stand-alone mode, select Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

5.

Click OK.

750

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Simulating the Buoy with Decoupled Mesh Motion

32.5.3. Viewing the Results Using CFD-Post

In this section, you will create a contour plot of Water at 25 C.Volume Fraction to show the
water content of the fluid region, and to illustrate the interface between the air and water. An animation
will then be created to show the movement of the rigid body in the fluid domain. Furthermore, the
minimum face angle of the mesh will be calculated for comparison purposes between the simulations.

32.5.3.1. Loading a Contour Plot from the State File

In the first part of the tutorial, you created a plane and a contour plot, then saved a state file named
Buoy.cst. You will load the resulting state file so that you do not have to create a new plane and
contour plot:
1.

Select File > Load State and choose the name Buoy.cst.

2.

Click Open.

32.5.3.2. Creating a Keyframe Animation

A short animation of the rigid body and surrounding fluid region, starting from rest and given an initial
velocity, will be created to show the complex motion of the rigid body and deformation of the mesh
because of the waves created in the fluid region. You will record a short animation that can be played
in a MPEG player.
1.

Ensure that Contour 1 is visible in the 3D Viewer (make sure there is a check mark beside Contour
1 in the Outline tree view).

2.

Turn off the visibility of Plane 1 and Default Legend View 1 to better see the movement of the
buoy.

3.

Edit Wireframe and configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Definition

Show surface mesh

(Selected)

. Select the 1st time step and click Apply.

4.

Click the Timestep Selector

5.

Click Animation

6.

In the Animation dialog box, select the Keyframe Animation option.

7.

Click New

8.

Select KeyframeNo1, then set # of Frames to 93, then press Enter while the cursor is in the # of Frames
box.

in the Timestep Selector dialog box.

to create KeyframeNo1.

Tip
Be sure to press Enter and confirm that the new number appears in the list before
continuing.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

751

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

9.

Use the Timestep Selector to load the 280th time step.

10. In the Animation dialog box, click New

11. Ensure that More Animation Options

to create KeyframeNo2.
is pushed down to show more animation settings.

12. Select Loop.

13. Ensure that Repeat forever

(next to Repeat) is not selected (not pushed down).

14. Select Save Movie.

15. Set Format to MPEG1.
16. Set File name to Buoy_decoupled.mpg.
17. If you want to save the animation to a location other than your working directory, click Browse
to Save Movie) to set the path to a different directory and click Save.

(next

The movie filename (including the path) has been set, but the animation has not yet been produced.
18. Click To Beginning

This ensures that the animation will begin at the first keyframe.
19. After the first keyframe has been loaded, click Play the animation

The MPEG will be created as the animation proceeds.

20. Close the Animation dialog box when the animation is complete.

32.5.3.3. Calculating the Minimum Mesh Face Angle

In this section you will calculate the Minimum Face Angle of the mesh, which is an indicator of the
overall mesh quality during the deformation of the mesh. A Minimum Face Angle of greater than 15
is one indicator of a good quality mesh. However an angle of between 10 and 15 is also acceptable
but may produce inaccuracies in that region of the mesh during the simulation.
and load the 162nd time step.

1.

Click the Timestep Selector

2.

Select Tools > Mesh Calculator or click the Calculators tab and select Mesh Calculator.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

752

Tab

Setting

Value

Mesh
Calculator

Function

Minimum Face
Angle

Click Calculate.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Comparing the Two Cases Using CFD-Post

You can also check other time steps to calculate the mesh quality throughout the simulation.
5.

When you have finished, close the Timestep Selector dialog box.

32.6. Comparing the Two Cases Using CFD-Post

In this section you will compare two cases. First, compare the animations:
1.

With Buoy_decoupled_001.res already loaded in CFD-Post, select File > Load Results.

2.

In the Load Results File dialog box, select Keep current cases loaded, then select the file Buoy_001.res.
Click Open.

3.

Click the viewport icon

4.

Click the synchronize active view icon

5.

Right-click within the 3D view and select Predefined Camera > View from +Z to orient the view. Click
Fit View

and select

.
.

to scale the buoy appropriately within the 3D viewer.

6.

In the Outline tree, double-click Case Comparison.

7.

In the Case Comparison editor, select Case Comparison Active, then ensure that both cases are set to
Current Step: 0. Click Apply.

8.

Ensure that in each of the views:

Contour 1 is visible
The plane and default legend are hidden
Wireframe has Show surface mesh selected

Note
To show/hide plots, toggle the check box next to the plot name in the Outline tree
view. This toggles the visibility of the plot in the currently selected view. Because the
synchronization of active views has been enabled, this also modifies the visibility of all
other views to match the currently selected view.

9.

Click the Timestep Selector

10. Click Animation

in the Timestep Selector dialog box.

11. In the Animation dialog box, select the Keyframe Animation option.
12. Delete the two existing Keyframes using the delete icon
, because they display the results from only
one results file. Then set up the Keyframe Animation in the same way as for the animations you created
previously in this tutorial.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

753

Modeling a Buoy using the CFX Rigid Body Solver

13. Beside Save Movie, set the movie filename to Buoy_comparison.mpg.
14. Click Stop

, then click To Beginning

This ensures that the animation will begin at the first keyframe.
15. After the first keyframe has been loaded, click Play the animation

The MPEG will be created as the animation proceeds.

16. Close the Animation dialog box when the animation is complete.
Now compare the mesh deformations:
1.

Click the Timestep Selector

and load the 162nd time step.

The top two views show the differences in the mesh deformation.
2.

Select Tools > Mesh Calculator or click the Calculators tab and select Mesh Calculator.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Tab

Setting

Value

Mesh
Calculator

Function

Minimum Face
Angle

Click Calculate. Results from both cases appear.

You can also check other time steps to calculate the mesh quality throughout the simulation.

5.

754

When you have finished, close the Timestep Selector dialog box and exit from CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 33: Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance

Case
This tutorial includes:
33.1.Tutorial Features
33.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
33.3. Preparing the Working Directory
33.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre
33.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case
33.6. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre
33.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case
33.8. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

33.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Turbo Wizard
General Mode

Analysis Type

Transient Blade Row

Fluid Type

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Type

Single Domain
Stationary Frame

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)

CFD-Post

Plots

Contour
Animation

33.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

The goal of this tutorial is to set up a transient blade row calculation to model an inlet disturbance
(frozen gust) using the Time Transformation model. The tutorial uses an axial turbine to illustrate the
basic concepts of setting up, running, and monitoring a transient blade row problem in ANSYS CFX.
In this tutorial, the full geometry of the axial rotor-stator stage contains 21 stator blades and 28 rotor
blades. The schematic below shows three stator blades along with the profile boundary showing a
disturbance in the total temperature of the flow:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

755

Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

Rotational periodicity boundaries are used to enable only a small section of the full geometry to be
modeled.
In your model, you should always try to obtain a pitch ratio as close to unity as possible to minimize
approximations, but this must be weighted against computational resources. For this disturbance/passage
geometry, 1/7 of the full wheel (4 disturbance pulses and 3 passages) would produce a pitch ratio of
1.0, but this would require a model about 3 times larger than in this tutorial example.
Using the Time Transformation method, you can work with pitch ratios near unity in order to minimize
computational requirements, with little loss of accuracy. The acceptable range of pitch ratios varies,
depending on the case. In this tutorial, the geometry that will be modeled consists of just a single blade
passage from the stator, which is a 17.14 section (360/21 blades). With only one stator blade, the rotorstator pitch ratio is 4:3, which happens to fall within the acceptable range (as can be confirmed in the
Time Transformation stability limits section of the output file for the second part of this tutorial).
The rotor is upstream of the stator, and creates a disturbance in the total temperature of the flow. The
rotor will be modeled by applying a moving profile boundary condition at the inlet of the stator blade
passage. In this case, the profile is of total temperature in a Gaussian distribution with a maximum that
is 20% higher than the baseline value, and a pattern that repeats in the theta direction every 12.86
(360/28 blades). To create a moving disturbance, the profile boundary is applied on a moving coordinate
frame that rotates about the machine axis at 6300 rev/min. In this case, the machine axis is the Z axis.
756

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Preparing the Working Directory

The rotation direction is positive using the right-hand rule as applied to the machine axis. The total
temperature profile is implemented via CEL expressions that are provided in a .ccl file.
The outlet boundary condition is a static pressure profile, provided in a .csv file. It was obtained from
a previous simulation of a downstream stage.
The flow is modeled as being turbulent and compressible.
The overall approach to solving this problem is:
1.

Define the simulation using the Turbomachinery wizard in CFX-Pre.

2.

Import the stator mesh, which was created in ANSYS TurboGrid.

3.

Enter the basic model definition.

4.

Set the profile boundary conditions using CFX-Pre in General mode.

5.

Run the steady-state simulation.

6.

Modify the simulation to use the Time Transformation model.

7.

Run the transient blade row simulation using the steady-state results as an initial guess.

8.

Create contours of temperature and animate them in CFD-Post.

If this is the first tutorial you are running, it is important to review the following topics before beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

33.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
TBRInletDistCEL.ccl
TBRInletDistOutlet.csv
TBRInletDistStator.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

757

Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

33.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

This tutorial uses the Turbomachinery wizard in CFX-Pre. This preprocessing mode is designed to simplify the setup of turbomachinery simulations.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run TimeInletDistIni.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case (p. 762).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select TurboMachinery and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type TimeInletDistIni.

6.

Click Save.

7.

If you are notified that the file already exists, click Overwrite.

33.4.1. Basic Settings

1.

In the Basic Settings panel, configure the following:

Setting

Value

Machine Type

Axial Turbine

Axes
> Rotation Axis

Analysis Type
> Type

Steady State

Leave the other settings at their default values.

2.

Click Next.

33.4.2. Components Definition

As stated in the overview, this tutorial requires a single blade passage for the stator. You will define a
single component and import its mesh.
1.

Right-click in the blank area and select Add Component from the shortcut menu.

2.

Create a new component of type Stationary, named S1 and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

758

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

Mesh
> File

TBRInletDistStator.gtm[a]

a. You may have to select the CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx) option under Files of
type.

4.

Click Next.

33.4.3. Physics Definition

In this section, you will set properties of the fluid domain and some solver parameters.
1.

In the Physics Definition panel, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Fluid

Air Ideal Gas

Model Data
> Reference Pressure

0 [atm]

[a]

Model Data
> Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Model Data
> Turbulence

k-Epsilon

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> P-Total Inlet P-Static Outlet

(Selected)

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> P-Total

200000 [Pa]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> T-Total

500 [K]

[b]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> Flow Direction

Cylindrical Components

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

759

Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

Setting

Value

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow Direction (a,r,t)

1, 0, 0.4

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Outflow
> P-Static

175000 [Pa]

[b]

a. To define the simulation using absolute pressure, set this value to 0 atm.
b. These values are temporary. They will be replaced with profile data later in the
tutorial.

2.

Continue to click Next until you reach Final Operations.

3.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode because you will continue to define the simulation through
settings not available in the Turbomachinery wizard.

4.

Click Finish.

33.4.4. Modifying the Fluid Model Settings

You will include additional settings to improve the accuracy of the simulation.
1.

Edit S1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Fluid Models

Heat Transfer
> Incl. Viscous Work Term

Value

(Selected)

Turbulence
> High Speed (compressible) Wall Heat Transfer
Model

3.

(Selected)

Click OK.

33.4.5. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions

The inlet and outlet boundary conditions are defined using profiles found in the examples directory.
Boundary profile data must be initialized before they can be used for boundary conditions.
1.

760

Select File > Import > CCL.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

2.

Select Import Method > Append.

3.

From your working directory, select TBRInletDistCEL.ccl.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Select Tools > Initialize Profile Data.

The Initialize Profile Data dialog box appears.

6.

Under Data File, click Browse

7.

From your working directory, select TBRInletDistOutlet.csv.

8.

Click Open.

9.

Click OK.
The profile data is read into memory.

Note
After profile data has been initialized from a file, the profile data file should not be deleted
or otherwise removed from its directory. By default, the full file path to the profile data file
is stored in CFX-Pre, and the profile data file is read directly by CFX-Solver each time the
solver is started or restarted.

33.4.6. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions

Here, you will apply profiles to the inlet and outlet boundary conditions.
1.

Edit S1 Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Heat Transfer

Value

> Option

Total Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Total Temperature
a. Click the Enter Expression icon

3.

Click OK.

4.

Edit S1 Outlet.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

TINLET

[a]

to specify the CEL expression.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

761

Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Profile Boundary Conditions

> Use Profile Data

(Selected)

Profile Boundary Setup

> Profile Name

6.

Click Generate Values.

7.

Click OK.

outlet

33.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

TimeInletDistIni.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, the Solver Input File
is set.

4.

Save the simulation.

33.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case

At this point, CFX-Solver Manager is running.
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. This may take a long time, depending on your
system. Eventually a dialog box is displayed.

3.

Clear the check box next to Post-Process Results when the completion message appears at the end of
the run.

4.

Click OK.

5.

If using Standalone mode, quit CFX-Solver Manager.

33.6. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

In this second part of the tutorial, you will modify the simulation from the first part of the tutorial in
order to model the transient blade row.

762

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

33.6.1. Opening the Existing Case

This step involves opening the original simulation and saving it to a different location.
1.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
TBRInletDistOutlet.csv
TimeInletDistIni.cfx
TimeInletDistIni_001.res
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if is it not already running.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run TimeInletDist.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case (p. 769).

4.

If the original simulation is not already opened, then open TimeInletDistIni.cfx.

5.

Save the case as TimeInletDist.cfx in your working directory.

33.6.2. Modifying the Analysis Type

Modify the analysis type as follows:
1.

Edit Analysis Type.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Analysis Type
> Option

3.

Transient Blade Row

Click OK.

33.6.3. Creating the Local Rotating Coordinate Frame

Create a local rotating coordinate frame that will be applied to the inlet boundary in order to cause
the inlet boundary condition to rotate:
1.

Select Insert > Coordinate Frame.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

763

Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

2.

Accept the default name and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Option

Axis Points

Coordinate Frame Type

Cartesian

Ref. Coord. Frame

Coord 0

Origin

0, 0, 0

Z Axis Point

0, 0, 1

X-Z Plane Pt

1, 0, 0

Frame Motion

(Selected)

Frame Motion
> Option

Rotating

Frame Motion
> Angular Velocity

VSignal

[a]

Frame Motion
> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Frame Motion
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis

Global Z

a. Click the Enter Expression icon

4.

to specify the CEL expression.

Click OK.

33.6.4. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model

You will set the simulation to be solved using the Time Transformation method.
1.

Edit Transient Blade Row Models.

2.

Set Transient Blade Row Model > Option to Time Transformation.

3.

Under Time Transformation, click Add new item

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

, accept the default name, and click OK.

Value

Time Transformation

764

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

> Time Transformation 1

> Option

Rotational Flow Boundary

Disturbance

Time Transformation
> Time Transformation 1
> Domain Name

S1

Time Transformation
> Time Transformation 1
> Signal Motion
> Option

Rotating

Time Transformation
> Time Transformation 1
> Signal Motion
> Coordinate Frame

Coord 1

Time Transformation
> Time Transformation 1
> External Passage Definition
> Passages in 360

28

Time Transformation
> Time Transformation 1
> External Passage Definition
> Pass. in Component

Transient Method
> Time Period
> Option

Passing Period[a]

Transient Method
> Time Steps
> Option

Number of Timesteps per

Period

Transient Method
> Time Steps
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

765

Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

Setting

Value

> Timesteps/Period[b]

60[c]

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Option

Number of Periods per Run

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Periods per Run

a. The passing period is automatically calculated as: 2 * pi / (Passages in 360 * Signal

Angular Velocity). The Passing Period setting cannot be edited.
b. The number of time steps per period should always be larger than 2 * Number
of Fourier Coefficients + 1 to be used for postprocessing.
c. The time step size is also automatically calculated as: Passing Period / Number
of Timesteps per Period. The Timestep setting cannot be edited.

5.

Click OK.

33.6.5. Applying the Local Rotating Frame to the Inlet Boundary

You can create a moving disturbance by applying a moving coordinate frame to a boundary.
Add rotational motion to the boundary condition values on the inlet by applying the local rotating coordinate frame that you made earlier:
1.

Edit S1 Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Coordinate Frame

(Selected)

Coordinate Frame
> Coordinate Frame

3.

Coord 1

Click OK.

33.6.6. Setting the Output Control and Creating Monitor Points

For transient blade row calculations, a minimal set of variables are selected to be computed using
Fourier coefficients. It is convenient to postprocess total (stagnation) variables as well. Here, you will
add Total Pressure and Total Temperature variables to the default list.

766

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

In addition, monitor points can be used to effectively compare the Time Transformation results against
a reference case. They provide useful information on the quality of the reference phase and frequency
produced in the simulation. They should also be used to monitor convergence and, as the simulation
converges, the user points should display a periodic pattern.

Note
When comparing to the reference case, make sure monitor points are placed in the same relative
locations with respect to the initial configuration in both cases.
It is important to check that the solver equations are being solved correctly. Monitoring pressure
provides feedback on the momentum equations while monitoring temperature provides feedback
on the energy equations.

Set up the output control and create monitor points as follows:

1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables List

(Selected)

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables List
> Extra Output Var. List

Total Pressure, Total

Temperature[a]

a. Click Multi-select from extended list

each of the listed variables.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Click the Monitor tab.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting

Value

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and Expressions

Create a monitor point named Monitor

Point 1[a]

Monitor Objects
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

767

Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

Setting

Value

> Monitor Points and

Expressions
> Monitor Point 1
Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,
> Output Variables List

Total Temperature[b]

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
> Monitor Point 1
> Cartesian Coordinates

(0.31878, 0.02789, 0.1)

a. To create a new item, you must first click the Add new item
the name as required and click OK.
b. Click Multi-select from extended list
each of the listed variables.

7.

8.

icon, then enter

and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting

Create additional monitor points with the same output variables. The names and Cartesian coordinates
are listed below:
Name

Cartesian Coordinates

Monitor Point 2

(0.319220, 0.022322, 0.16)

Monitor Point 3

(0.312644, 0.064226, 0.162409)

Monitor Point 4

(0.316970, -0.0359315, 0.06)

Click OK.

33.6.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

TimeInletDist.def

3.

Click Save.

4.

Ignore the error message (the initial values will be specified in CFX-Solver Manager) and click Yes to
continue.

768

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.
5.

If using Standalone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

33.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case

When CFX-Pre has shut down and the CFX-Solver Manager has started, obtain a solution to the CFD
problem by following the instructions below. To reduce the simulation time, the simulation will be initialized using a steady-state case.
1.

Ensure that Define Run is displayed.

2.

Ensure that Solver Input File is set to TimeInletDist.def.

3.

Under the Initial Values tab, select Initial Values Specification.

4.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values, select Initial Values 1.

5.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values > Initial Values 1 Settings > File Name, click Browse
.

6.

Select TimeInletDistIni_001.res from your working directory.

7.

Click Open.

8.

Under Initial Values Specification > Use Mesh From, select Solver Input File.

9.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. This can take a long time depending on your
system. Eventually a dialog box is displayed.

Note
Before the simulation begins, the Transient Blade Row Post-processing Information
summary in the .out file will display the time step range over which the solver will
accumulate the Fourier coefficients.
Similarly, the Time Transformation Stability summary in the .out file displays
whether the Passage/Signal pitch ratio is within the acceptable range.
After the CFX-Solver Manager has run for a short time, you can track the monitor points
you created in CFX-Pre by clicking the Time Corrected User Points tab that appears
at the top of the graphical interface of CFX-Solver Manager.
After the simulation has proceeded for some time, observe the periodic nature of the
monitor point values.

10. When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.
11. Click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

769

Time Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

33.8. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

In this section, you will work with the Fourier coefficients compressed data in transient blade row analysis. The solution variables are automatically set to the transient position corresponding to the end of
the simulation.

33.8.1. Creating a Turbo Surface

1.

You will see a dialog box named Transient Blade Row Post-processing. Click OK.

2.

You will see a dialog box named Report Template Auto-Load. Click No.

3.

Click the Turbo tab.

4.

A dialog box will ask if you want to auto-initialize all turbo components. Click Yes.

5.

Select Insert > Location > Turbo Surface.

6.

Change the name to Span 50.

7.

Click OK.

8.

Click Apply.

9.

Turn off the visibility of Span 50.

33.8.2. Creating a Contour Plot

1.

Click Insert > Contour and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Span 50

Variable

Temperature

Range

User Specified

Min

465 [K]

Max

605 [K]

# of Contours

21

Click Apply.

33.8.3. Animating Temperature

Create a quick animation of the contour plot:
1.

Click Animation

2.

Select Timestep Animation.

770

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

3.

Click To First Timestep

in order to load the first time step.

4.

Click Play the animation

5.

When you have finished, quit CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

771

772

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 34: Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance

Case
This tutorial includes:
34.1.Tutorial Features
34.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
34.3. Preparing the Working Directory
34.4. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre
34.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case
34.6. Viewing the Fourier Transformation Results in CFD-Post

34.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Turbo Wizard
General Mode

Analysis Type

Transient Blade Row

Fluid Type

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Type

Single Domain
Stationary Frame

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)

CFD-Post

Plots

Contour
Animation

34.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

The goal of this tutorial is to set up a transient blade row calculation to model an inlet disturbance
(frozen gust) using the Fourier Transformation model. The tutorial uses an axial turbine to illustrate the
basic concepts of setting up, running, and monitoring a transient blade row problem in ANSYS CFX.
The full geometry of the axial rotor-stator stage contains 21 stator blades and 28 rotor blades.
In this tutorial, rotational phase-shifted periodic boundaries are used to enable only a small section of
the full geometry to be modeled. The schematic below shows three stator blades along with the profile
boundary showing a disturbance in the total temperature of the flow:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

773

Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

The geometry to be modeled consists of the stator blade row. When using the Fourier Transformation
model, two passages of the bladed geometry must be used. This is required to enable a clean signal
to accumulate at the sampling interface between the two passages where the Fourier coefficients will
also be accumulated. In the stator blade component, a 34.28 section is being modeled (2*360/21
blades). The rotor is upstream of the stator and creates a disturbance in the total temperature of the
flow, which is then imposed at the inlet.
The flow is modeled as being turbulent and compressible. The inlet boundary condition serves to
model the disturbance coming from the upstream rotor. It consists of a total temperature Gaussian
profile with a pitch of 12.86 (360/28 blades) and rotating about the Z axis at 6300 [rev min^-1]. The
outlet boundary condition is a static pressure profile. The inlet and outlet boundary profiles are provided
in .csv files. The outlet boundary profile was obtained from a previous simulation of a downstream
stage.
When starting a new run, it is good practice to initialize Transient Blade Row simulations using results
from steady-state cases. In this case, you will incorporate the steady-state results obtained from a previous tutorial. You will also use the Turbomachinery wizard feature, which facilitates the setup of a
Fourier Transformation simulation. In order to do this, you have to:
1.

774

Define the Transient Blade Row simulation using the Turbomachinery wizard in CFX-Pre.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

2.

Import the stator mesh, which was created in ANSYS TurboGrid.

3.

Enter the basic model definition.

4.

Set the profile boundary conditions using CFX-Pre in General mode.

5.

Run the transient blade row simulation using the steady-state results from Time Transformation Method
for an Inlet Disturbance Case (p. 755) as an initial guess.

If this is the first tutorial you are running, it is important to review the following topics before beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

34.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
TBRInletDistInlet.csv
TBRInletDistOutlet.csv
TBRInletDistStator.gtm
TimeInletDistIni_001.res
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

34.4. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

The following sections describe the transient blade row simulation setup in CFX-Pre.
This tutorial uses the Turbomachinery wizard in CFX-Pre. This preprocessing mode is designed to simplify the setup of turbomachinery simulations.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run FourierInletDist.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.
2.

Proceed to Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case (p. 788).

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

775

Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

3.

Select TurboMachinery and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type FourierInletDist.

6.

Click Save.

34.4.1. Basic Settings

1.

In the Basic Settings panel, configure the following:

Setting

Value

Machine Type

Axial Turbine

Axes
> Rotation Axis

Analysis Type
> Type

Transient Blade Row

Analysis Type
> Method

2.

Fourier Transformation

Click Next.

34.4.2. Components Definition

The Fourier Transformation method requires two stator blade passages. You will define a new component
and import the stator mesh.
1.

Right-click in the blank area and select Add Component from the shortcut menu.

2.

Create a new component of type Stationary, named S1 and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Mesh
> File

TBRInletDistStator.gtm[a]

a. You may have to select the CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx) option under Files of
type.

4.

Expand the Passages and Alignment section.

5.

Click Edit.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

776

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

Passages and Alignment

> Passages to Model

7.

Click Done
You will see that the stator blade passage is correctly replicated and the resulting mesh now contains
two stator blade passages. This will also create the Sampling Interface (S1 Internal Interface 1)
required for the Fourier Transformation model.

8.

Click Next.

34.4.3. Physics Definition

In this section, you will set properties of the fluid domain and some solver parameters.
1.

In the Physics Definition panel, configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Fluid

Air Ideal Gas

Model Data
> Reference Pressure

0 [atm][a]

Model Data
> Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Model Data
> Turbulence

k-Epsilon

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> P-Total Inlet P-Static Outlet

(Selected)

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> P-Total

200000 [Pa]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> T-Total

500 [K]

[b]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

777

Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

Setting

Value

> Flow Direction

Cylindrical Components

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow Direction (a,r,t)

1, 0, 0.4

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Outflow
> P-Static

175000 [Pa]

[b]

a. To define the simulation using absolute pressure, set this value to 0 atm.
b. These values are temporary. They will be replaced with profile data later in the
tutorial.

2.

Click Next.
Under the Interface Definition section you can observe that both the Fourier coefficient sampling
interface S1 Internal Interface 1 as well as the phase shifted interface S1 to S1 Periodic 1 are
automatically created.

3.

Click Next.

34.4.4. Disturbance Definition

In this section, you will specify the periodicity of the disturbance being imposed. In this case the inlet
profile has a pitch of 12.857 [Degrees] or 1/28 of the wheel, so you need to specify 28 for the value of
Passages in 360.
1.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Disturbances
> External Boundary
> Passages in 360

28

2.

Continue clicking Next until the Final Operations panel is reached.

3.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode because you will continue to define the simulation through
settings not available in the TurboMachinery wizard

778

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

4.

Click Finish.

Note
You may ignore the physics validation errors for the moment. You will correct these errors
in the steps that follow.

34.4.5. Modifying the Fluid Model Settings

You will include additional settings to improve the accuracy of the simulation.
1.

Edit S1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Fluid Models

Heat Transfer
> Incl. Viscous Work Term

(Selected)

Turbulence
> High Speed (compressible) Wall Heat Transfer
Model

3.

(Selected)

Click OK.

34.4.6. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions

The inlet and outlet boundary conditions are defined using profiles in your working directory. Boundary
profile data must be initialized before they can be used for boundary conditions.
1.

Select Tools > Initialize Profile Data.

The Initialize Profile Data dialog box appears.

2.

Under Data File, click Browse

3.

From your working directory, select TBRInletDistOutlet.csv.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Click OK.
These steps result in the outlet profile data being read into memory.
To set the inlet profile you will need to perform a few extra steps. Since the profile in the supplied
TBRInletDistInlet.csv file only covers a single passage, you need to expand the profile so
that it covers at least both passages. In this case you will expand the profile so that it covers the
full wheel.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

779

Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

6.

Select Tools > Expand Profile Data.

7.

Under Data File To Expand, click Browse

8.

From your working directory, select TBRInletDistInlet.csv.

9.

Click Open.

10. Set Write to Profile to TBRInletDistInlet_FullWheel.csv.

11. Set Passages in 360 to 28.
12. Click OK.
You will now initialize the inlet profile data with this latest expanded profile.
1.

Select Tools > Initialize Profile Data.

The Initialize Profile Data dialog box appears.

2.

Under Data File, click Browse

3.

From your working directory, select TBRInletDistInlet_FullWheel.csv.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Click OK.

Note
After profile data has been initialized from a file, the profile data file should not be deleted
or otherwise removed from its directory. By default, the full file path to the profile data file
is stored in CFX-Pre, and the profile data file is read directly by CFX-Solver each time the
solver is started or restarted.

34.4.7. Creating the Local Rotating Coordinate Frame

Create a local rotating coordinate frame that will be applied to the inlet boundary in order to cause it
to rotate:
1.

Select Insert > Coordinate Frame.

2.

Accept the default name and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

780

Setting

Value

Option

Axis Points

Coordinate Frame Type

Cartesian

Ref Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

Origin

0, 0, 0

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

Z Axis Point

0, 0, 1

X-Z Plane Pt

1, 0, 0

Frame Motion

(Selected)

Frame Motion
> Option

Rotating

Frame Motion
> Angular Velocity

6300 [rev min^-1]

Frame Motion
> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate Axis

Frame Motion
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis

4.

Global Z

Click OK.

34.4.8. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions

Here, you will apply profiles to the inlet and outlet boundary conditions. In addition to this, you will
also be applying the local rotating frame to the inlet boundary.
1.

Edit S1 Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Profile Boundary Conditions

> Use Profile Data

Value

(Selected)

Profile Boundary Setup

> Profile Name

3.

inletTo

Click Generate Values.

You can create a moving disturbance by applying a moving coordinate frame to a boundary. Add rotational motion to the boundary condition values on the inlet by applying the local rotating coordinate
frame that you made earlier:
1.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

781

Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Coordinate Frame

(Selected)

Coordinate Frame
> Coordinate Frame

2.

Click OK.

3.

Edit S1 Outlet.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Coord 1

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Profile Boundary Conditions

> Use Profile Data

(Selected)

Profile Boundary Setup

> Profile Name

5.

Click Generate Values.

6.

Click OK.

outlet

34.4.9. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model

In this section, you will make some modifications to the Transient Blade Row Models object:
1.

Edit Transient Blade Row Models.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Fourier Transformation
> Fourier Transformation 1
> Signal Motion
> Option

Rotating

Fourier Transformation
> Fourier Transformation 1
> Signal Motion
> Coordinate Frame

Coord 1

Transient Method
> Time Period

782

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

> Option[a]

Automatic

Transient Method
> Time Steps
> Timestep Multiplier[b][c]

20

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Option

Number of Periods per Run

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Periods per Run

10

a. The passing period is automatically calculated as: 2 * pi / (Passages in 360 * Signal Angular
Velocity). The Passing Period setting cannot be edited.
b. The number of time steps per period should always be larger than 2 * Number of Fourier
Coefficients + 1 to be used for postprocessing.
c. The time step size is also automatically calculated as: Passing Period / Number of Timesteps
per Period. The Timestep setting cannot be edited.

3.

Click OK.

34.4.10. Setting the Output Control and Creating Monitor Points

For transient blade row calculations, a minimal set of variables are selected to be computed using
Fourier coefficients. It is convenient to postprocess total (stagnation) variables as well. Here, you will
add Total Pressure and Total Temperature variables to the default list.
Monitor points can be used to effectively compare the Fourier Transformation results against a reference
case. They provide useful information on the quality of the reference phase and frequency produced
in the simulation. They should also be used to monitor convergence and, as the simulation converges,
the user points should display a periodic pattern.

Note
When comparing to the reference case, make sure monitor points are placed in the same
relative locations with respect to the initial configuration in both cases.
It is important to check that the solver equations are being solved correctly. Monitoring
pressure provides feedback on the momentum equations while monitoring temperature
provides feedback on the energy equations.
Set up the output control and create monitor points as follows:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

783

Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables List

(Selected)

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables List
> Extra Output Var. List

Total Pressure, Total

Temperature[a]

a. Click Multi-select from extended list

each of the listed variables.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Click the Monitor tab.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting

Value

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and Expressions

Create a monitor point named Monitor

Point 1[a]

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
> Monitor Point 1
> Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
> Monitor Point 1
Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,
> Output Variables List

Total Temperature[b]

Monitor Objects

784

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

> Monitor Points and

Expressions
> Monitor Point 1
> Position Axial Comp.

0.1 [m]

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
> Monitor Point 1
> Position Radial Comp.

0.32 [m]

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
> Monitor Point 1
> Position Theta Comp.

5 [degree]

a. To create a new item, you must first click the Add new item
the name as required and click OK.
b. Click Multi-select from extended list
each of the listed variables.

7.

icon, then enter

and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting

Create additional monitor points with the same output variables. The names and Cylindrical coordinates
are listed below:
Name

Cylindrical Coordinates

Monitor Point 2

0.16 [m], 0.32 [m], 4 [degrees]

Monitor Point 3

0.16 [m], 0.32 [m], 11.6 [degrees]

Monitor Point 4

0.06 [m], 0.32 [m], -6.5 [degrees]

8.

Click OK.

9.

Save the simulation.

34.4.11. Setting the Execution Control

Here you will prepare the case for execution and initialize the solution with steady-state results. Instead
of obtaining steady-state results by setting up and running the steady-state solution for this case, which
has a double passage configuration, you will import a results file from another steady-state simulation,
which happens to have a single passage (see Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre (p. 758)). Because

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

785

Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

that other simulation involves only a single passage, you will use replication control settings to apply
those results to both passages in this simulation.
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation Control and select Insert > Execution Control.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Run Definition

Double Precision

(Selected)

Initial Values

Initial Values Specification

(Selected)

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values

Initial Values 1

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values
> Initial Values 1
> File Name

TimeInletDistIni_001.res
[a]

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values
> Initial Values 1
> Interpolation Mapping

Create an
interpolation mapping
object named Inter
polation Mapping
1

[b]

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values
> Initial Values 1
> Interpolation Mapping
> Interpolation Mapping
1
> Replication Control

(Selected)

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values
> Initial Values 1
> Interpolation Mapping

786

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Interpolation Mapping

1
> Replication Control
> Passages in 360

21

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values
> Initial Values 1
> Interpolation Mapping
> Interpolation Mapping
1
> Replication Control
> Total Num. Instances

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values Control

(Selected)

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values Control
> Continue History From

(Selected)

a. You can select a file to load by clicking Browse

and selecting the appropriate
file from your working directory, then clicking Open.
b. Add an item by clicking the Add New Item
default name.

3.

icon and clicking OK to accept the

Click OK.

34.4.12. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

The CFX-Solver input file FourierInletDist.def is created.

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.
2.

Ignore the message and click Yes to continue.

3.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

787

Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

34.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed in CFX-Solver Manager.
1.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. This can take a long time depending on your
system. Eventually a dialog box is displayed.

Note
Before the simulation begins, the Transient Blade Row Post-processing Information
summary in the .out file displays the time step range over which the solver will accumulate the Fourier coefficients.
The .out file contains a Fourier Transformation Information summary as well as the
time step at which the full Fourier Transformation Model is activated.
Monitor points of similar values can be grouped together by right-clicking to the right
of the User Points tab, selecting New Monitor, and clicking OK. In the New Monitor
dialog box, you can set the name for the new monitor point and select the variables
you want to monitor in the Monitor Properties dialog box.
After the simulation has proceeded for some time, observe the periodic nature of the
monitor point values.
If the monitor points do not establish a periodic nature in a Fourier Transformation run,
you can try applying frequency filtering.
Frequency filtering is a powerful tool to deal with instabilities. It filters out all
frequencies that are not harmonics of the blade passing frequency (or blade vibration frequency for flutter cases) and that could trigger instabilities. These
typically occur in elongated domains where the amplitude of the periodic signal
becomes very weak at the furthest point away from the source of the disturbance.
To apply frequency filtering in CFX-Pre, edit the Transient Blade Row
Models object; in the details view, on the Advanced Options tab, select Fourier
Transformation Control > Frequency Filtering.

2.

When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.

3.

Click OK.

34.6. Viewing the Fourier Transformation Results in CFD-Post

In this section, you will work with the Fourier coefficients compressed data in transient blade row analysis. The solution variables are automatically set to the transient position corresponding to the end of
the simulation.

788

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Fourier Transformation Results in CFD-Post

34.6.1. Creating a Turbo Surface

1.

You will see a dialog box named Transient Blade Row Post-processing. Click OK.

2.

You will see a dialog box named Report Template Auto-Load. Click No.

3.

Click the Turbo tab.

4.

Click Initialize All Components.

5.

A dialog box will ask if you want to auto-initialize all turbo components. Click Yes.

6.

Select Insert > Location > Turbo Surface.

7.

Change the name to Span 50.

8.

Click OK.

9.

Click Apply.

10. Turn off the visibility of Span 50.

34.6.2. Creating a Contour Plot

1.

Click Insert > Contour and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Span 50

Variable

Temperature

Range

User Specified

Min

465 [K]

Max

605 [K]

# of Contours

21

Click Apply.

34.6.3. Animating Temperature

Create a quick animation of the contour plot:
1.

Click Animation

2.

Select Timestep Animation.

3.

Click To First Timestep

4.

Click Play the animation

in order to load the first time step.

.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

789

Fourier Transformation Method for an Inlet Disturbance Case

5.

790

When you have finished, quit CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 35: Time Transformation Method for a Transient

Rotor-stator Case
This tutorial includes:
35.1.Tutorial Features
35.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
35.3. Preparing the Working Directory
35.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre
35.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case
35.6. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre
35.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case
35.8. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

35.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Turbo Wizard
General mode

Analysis Type

Transient Blade Row

Fluid Type

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Type

Multiple Domains
Rotating Frame of
Reference

Turbulence Model

Shear Stress Transport

Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall (Counter Rotating)

CFD-Post

Plots

Vector Plot
Contour
Data Instancing
Time Chart
Animation

35.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial sets up a transient blade row calculation using the Time Transformation model. It uses an
axial turbine to illustrate the basic concepts of setting up, running, and monitoring a transient blade

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

791

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

row problem in ANSYS CFX. It also describes the postprocessing of transient blade row results using
the tools provided in CFD-Post for this type of calculation.
The full geometry of the axial rotor-stator stage selected for modeling contains 36 stator blades and
42 rotor blades.

The geometry to be modeled consists of a single rotor blade passage and a single stator blade passage.
Each rotor blade passage is an 8.571 section (360/42 blades), while each stator blade passage is a 10
section (360/36 blades). The pitch ratio at the interface between the rotor passage and the stator
passage is 0.8571 (that is, 6/7).
For the Time Transformation method, you should always maintain an ensemble pitch ratio within a
range of 0.75 to 1.4. Note that the range of permissible pitch ratios narrows significantly with slower
rotation speed. A full machine analysis can be performed (modeling all rotor and stator blades), which
always eliminates any pitch change, but will require significant computational time. For this rotor-stator
geometry, a 1/6 machine section (7 rotor blades, 6 stator blades) would produce a pitch ratio of 1.0,
but this would require a model about 7 times larger than in this tutorial example.
In this example, the rotor rotates about the Z axis at 3500 rev/min (positive rotation following the right
hand rule) while the stator is stationary. Rotational periodicity boundaries are used to enable only a
small section of the full geometry to be modeled.

792

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

The flow is modeled as being turbulent and compressible. Profile boundary conditions are used at the
inlet and outlet. In this tutorial, the profiles are a function of the radial coordinate only. These profiles
were obtained from previous simulations of the upstream and downstream stages.
The overall approach of this tutorial is to run a transient blade row simulation initialized with the results
of a steady-state simulation. First, you will define a steady-state simulation using the Turbomachinery
Wizard followed by General mode. While the steady-state simulation is running, you will modify a copy
of it to define a transient blade row simulation that uses the Time Transformation model. After running
the transient blade row simulation, you will create contour plots and an animation showing blade rotation.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

35.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
TBRTurbineRotor.gtm
TBRTurbineStator.gtm
TBRInletProfile.csv
TBROutletProfile.csv
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

35.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

This tutorial uses the Turbomachinery wizard in CFX-Pre. This preprocessing mode is designed to simplify the setup of turbomachinery simulations.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run TimeBladeRowIni.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case (p. 799).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

793

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select Turbomachinery and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type TimeBladeRowIni.

6.

Click Save.

7.

If you are notified that the file already exists, click Overwrite.

35.4.1. Basic Settings

1.

In the Basic Settings panel, configure the following settings:

Setting

Value

Machine Type

Axial Turbine

Axes
> Rotation Axis

Analysis Type
> Type

Steady State

2.

Leave the other settings at their default values.

3.

Click Next.

35.4.2. Components Definition

You will define two new components and import their respective meshes.
1.

Right-click in the blank area and select Add Component from the shortcut menu.

2.

Create a new component of type Stationary named S1 and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Mesh
> File

TBRTurbineStator.gtm

[a]

a. You may have to select the CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx) option under Files of
type.

4.

Create a new component of type Rotating, named R1 and click OK.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

794

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

Component Type
> Value

3500 [rev min^-1]

[a]

Mesh
> File

TBRTurbineRotor.gtm

a. From the problem description.

6.

Click Next.

35.4.3. Physics Definition

In this section you will set properties of the fluid domain and some solver parameters.
1.

In the Physics Definition panel, configure the following:

Setting

Value

Fluid

Air Ideal Gas

Model Data
> Reference Pressure

0 [atm]

[a]

Model Data
> Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Model Data
> Turbulence

Shear Stress Transport

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> P-Total Inlet P-Static Outlet

(Selected)

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
169000 [Pa][b]

> P-Total
Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow

306 [K][b]

> T-Total
Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

795

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

Setting

Value

> Inflow
> Flow Direction

Normal to Boundary

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Outflow
110000 [Pa][b]

> P-Static
Interface
> Default Type

Stage (Mixing-Plane)

a. To define the simulation using absolute pressure, set this value to 0 atm.
b. These values are temporary. They will be replaced with profile data later in the
tutorial.

2.

Continue to click Next until you reach Final Operations.

3.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode because you will continue to define the simulation through
settings not available in the Turbomachinery wizard.

4.

Click Finish.

35.4.4. Additional Fluid Model Settings

Verify the following settings, which affect the accuracy of the simulation:
1.

Edit R1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Domain Models

Value

> Domain Motion

> Alternate Rotation Model
Fluid Models

Heat Transfer
> Incl. Viscous Work Term

3.

(Selected)

(Selected)

Click OK.

35.4.5. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions

The inlet and outlet boundary conditions are defined using profiles in your working directory. Boundary
profile data must be initialized before they can be used for boundary conditions.

796

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

1.

Select Tools > Initialize Profile Data.

The Initialize Profile Data dialog box appears.

2.

Under Data File, click Browse

3.

From your working directory, select TBRInletProfile.csv.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Click Apply.
The profile data is read into memory.

6.

Under Data File, click Browse

7.

From your working directory, select TBROutletProfile.csv.

8.

Click Open.

9.

Click OK.

Note
After profile data has been initialized from a file, the profile data file should not be deleted
or otherwise removed from its directory. By default, the full filepath to the profile data file
is stored in CFX-Pre, and the profile data file is read directly by CFX-Solver each time the
solver is started or restarted.

35.4.6. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions

1.

Edit S1 Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Profile Boundary Conditions

> Use Profile Data

Value

(Selected)

Profile Boundary Setup

> Profile Name

3.

inlet

Click Generate Values.

This causes the profile values of Total Pressure and Total Temperature to be applied
at the nodes on the inlet boundary. It also causes entries to be made in the Boundary Details tab.
In order to later reset the velocity values at the main inlet to match those that were originally read
from the profile data file, revisit the Basic Settings tab for this boundary and click Generate Values.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

797

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Value

Total Pressure
(stable)

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

inlet.Total
Pressure(r)

Flow Direction
> Option

Cylindrical
Components

Flow Direction
> Axial Component

Flow Direction
> Radial Component

Flow Direction
> Theta Component

Heat Transfer
> Total Temperature

5.

Click OK.

6.

Edit R1 Outlet.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

inlet.Total
Temperature(r)

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Frame Type

Rotating

Profile Boundary Conditions

> Use Profile Data

(Selected)

Profile Boundary Setup

> Profile Name

8.

Click Generate Values.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

798

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

outlet

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

outlet.Pressure(r)

10. Click OK.

35.4.7. Visualizing the Profile Boundary Value

You can plot scalar profile values and vectors on inlet and outlet boundaries. In this section, you will
edit a boundary so that you can visualize the pressure profile values at the inlet.
1.

Edit S1 Inlet

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Plot Options

Boundary Contour

(Selected)

Profile Variable

Relative Pressure

Click Apply

CFX-Pre plots the total pressure radial profile at the inlet with the pressure values displayed in a legend.

35.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

TimeBladeRowIni.def

Click Save.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

4.

Save the simulation.

35.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed in CFX-Solver Manager.
1.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

799

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

2.

Ensure that the Post-Process Results check box is cleared.

3.

Click OK.

35.6. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

In the second part of the tutorial, you will modify the simulation from the first part of the tutorial to
model the transient blade row.

35.6.1. Opening the Existing Case

This step involves opening the original simulation and saving it to a different location.
1.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
TBRInletProfile.csv
TBROutletProfile.csv
TimeBladeRowIni.cfx
TimeBladeRowIni_001.res
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already running.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run TimeBladeRow.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case (p. 805).

4.

If the original simulation is not already opened, then open TimeBladeRowIni.cfx.

5.

Save the case as TimeBladeRow.cfx in your working directory.

35.6.2. Modifying the Analysis Type

In this section, you will make use of the transient blade row feature.
Modify the analysis type as follows:
1.

Edit Analysis Type.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Analysis Type

800

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

> Option

Transient Blade Row

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Option

Automatic with Value

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Time

3.

0 [s]

Click OK.

35.6.3. Modifying the Rotorstator Interface

1.

Edit R1 to S1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Interface Models
> Frame Change/Mixing
Model
> Option

3.

Transient Rotor Stator

Click OK.

35.6.4. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model

You will set the simulation to be solved using the Time Transformation method.
1.

Edit Transient Blade Row Models.

2.

Set Transient Blade Row Model > Option to Time Transformation.

3.

Under Time Transformation, click Add new item

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

, accept the default name, and click OK.

Value

Transient Method
> Time Period
> Option

Passing Period

Transient Method
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

801

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

Setting

Value

> Time Period

> Domain

S1

Transient Method
> Time Steps
> Option

Number of Timesteps per Period

Transient Method
> Time Steps
> Timesteps/Period

35

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Option

Number of Periods per Run

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Periods per Run

10

Note
The passing period is automatically calculated as: 2 * pi / (Passages in 360 * Signal Angular
Velocity). The Passing Period setting cannot be edited.
The number of time steps per period should always be larger than 2 * Number of Fourier
Coefficients + 1 to be used for postprocessing.
The time step size is also automatically calculated as: Passing Period / Number of Timesteps
per Period. The Timestep setting cannot be edited.

5.

Click OK.

35.6.5. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points

For transient blade row calculations, a minimal set of variables are selected to be computed using
Fourier coefficients. It is convenient to postprocess variables in the stationary frame when multiple
frames of reference are present. Here, you will add the Velocity in Stn Frame and Mach Number
in Stn Frame variables to the default list.
In addition, monitor points can be used to effectively compare the Time Transformation results against
a reference case. They provide useful information on the quality of the reference phase and frequency

802

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

produced in the simulation. They should be used to monitor convergence and, as the simulation converges, the user points should display a periodic pattern.

Note
When comparing to the reference case, make sure monitor points are placed in the same relative
locations with respect to the initial configuration in both cases.
It is important to check that the solver equations are being solved correctly. Monitoring pressure
provides feedback on the momentum equations while monitoring temperature provides feedback
on the energy equations.

Set up the output control and create monitor points as follows:

1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables
List

(Selected)

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables List
> Extra Output Var. List

Velocity in Stn Frame, Mach Number in

Stn Frame[a]

a. Click Multi-select from extended list

each of the listed variables.

4.

Click the Monitor tab.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting

Setting

Value

Monitor Objects

(Selected)

Monitor Objects
> Efficiency Output

(Cleared)

6.

Create a monitor point named rotor_P1.

7.

Under Monitor Objects > Monitor Points and Expressions > rotor_P1, configure the following settings:
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

803

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

Setting

Value

Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Output Variables List

Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,

Total Temperature, Velocity

Position Axial Comp.

0.211 [m]

Position Radial Comp.

0.2755 [m]

Position Theta Comp.

182 [degree]

8.

Create an additional monitor point named stator_P1.

9.

Under Monitor Objects > Monitor Points and Expressions > stator_P1, configure the following settings:
Setting

Value

Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Output Variables List

Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,

Total Temperature, Velocity

Position Axial Comp.

0.202 [m]

Position Radial Comp.

0.2755 [m]

Position Theta Comp.

178 [degree]

Note
Transient blade row cases use monitor points to monitor the periodic fluctuating variable
values. For diagnostic purposes, you should have several monitor points. Here, two
monitor points will be used for demonstration purposes.

10. Click OK.

35.6.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

TimeBladeRow.def

3.

Click Save.

4.

Ignore the error message (the initial values will be specified in CFX-Solver Manager) and click Yes to
continue.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

804

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case

5.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

35.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case

At this point, CFX-Pre has been shut down, and the Define Run dialog box is displayed in CFX-Solver
Manager. You will now obtain a solution to the CFD problem. To reduce the simulation time, the simulation will be initialized using a steady-state case.
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed. If an error message appears, ignore it and click Yes
to continue.
Solver Input File should be set to TimeBladeRow.def.

2.

Under the Initial Values tab, select Initial Values Specification.

3.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values, select Initial Values 1.

4.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values > Initial Values 1 Settings > File Name, click Browse
.

5.

Select TimeBladeRowIni_001.res from your working directory.

6.

Click Open.

7.

Under Initial Values Specification > Use Mesh From, select Solver Input File.

8.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

Note
Before the simulation begins, the Transient Blade Row Post-processing Information
summary in the .out file will display the time step range over which the solver will
accumulate the Fourier coefficients.
Similarly, the Time Transformation Stability summary in the .out file displays
whether the rotorstator pitch ratio is within the acceptable range.
After the CFX-Solver Manager has run for a short time, you can track the monitor points
you created in CFX-Pre by clicking the Time Corrected User Points tab that appears
at the top of the graphical interface of CFX-Solver Manager.
After the simulation has proceeded for some time, observe the periodic nature of the
monitor point values.

9.

When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.

10. Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

805

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

35.8. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

In a transient blade row run, flow field variables are compressed using the Fourier coefficient method.
These variables are accumulated at the end of the simulation. This enables you to navigate through
any time instance, within the common period, without having to load multiple transient results files.
By default CFD-Post displays results corresponding to the end the simulation.
To get started, follow these steps:
1.

Start CFD-Post and load TimeBladeRow_001.res.

2.

When CFD-Post opens, if you see the Domain Selector dialog box, ensure that all the domains are selected,
then click OK to load the results from these domains.

3.

If you see a message regarding transient blade row postprocessing, click OK.

35.8.1. Creating a Turbo Surface

Create a turbo surface to be used for making plots:
1.

Click the Turbo tab.

2.

If you see the Turbo Initialization dialog box, click Yes, otherwise click the Initialize All Components
button, which is visible initially by default, or after double-clicking the Initialization object in the Turbo
tree view.

3.

Select Insert > Location > Turbo Surface.

4.

Change the name to Span 50.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Constant Span

Definition
> Value

0.5

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Turn off the visibility of Span 50 by clearing its check box in the Outline tree view.

35.8.2. Creating a Vector Plot

1.

Click Insert > Vector and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

806

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition

Value

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

> Locations

Span 50

Definition
> Variable

3.

Velocity in
Stationary Frame

Click Apply.
The vector plot shows Velocity in Stationary Frame values corresponding to the end
of a common period.
The rotor domain is in the angular position corresponding to its location after 10 passing periods.
Now you will place the rotor aligned with the stator, as they were in the solver input file.

4.

Click Timestep Selector

5.

Select the 1st time step.

6.

Click Apply to load the time step, and then click Close to exit the dialog box.
The rotor blades move to their starting positions.

35.8.3. Creating a Contour Plot

1.

Turn off the visibility of Vector 1.

2.

Click Insert > Contour and accept the default name.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Span 50

Variable

Pressure

Range

Local

# of Contours

21

Click Apply.

The contour plot shows Pressure values corresponding to the specified time step.

35.8.4. Creating a Variable Time Chart

In this section, you will compute and plot the magnitude of the forces that the flow applies on the rotor
blade. For a transient blade row case, CFD-Post automatically reconstructs variables for the flow solution
time based on the last time step. Intermediate time steps for time instances in the common period are
located in the Timestep Selector. In Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model (p. 801), you set 35 time
steps per stator blade passing period and there are six rotor blade passing periods in a common period.
Therefore, the total number of intermediate time steps in the common period is 210. For this case, the
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

807

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

solver has reconstructed results over two common periods (420 time steps). You will reduce the total
number of time steps to 140 to speed up the generation of the time chart.
Reduce the number of time steps in the period:
1.

Click Timestep Selector

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Timestep
Selector

Timestep Sampling

Uniform

Number of Timesteps

70

Click Apply.
The Timestep Selector now shows a total of 140 steps over two common periods (shown under
the Phase column).

Compute the forces on the blade:

1.

Select Insert > Expression.

2.

In the Insert Expression dialog box, type forces on rotor blade.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Set Definition, to sqrt(force_x()@ R1 Blade ^2 + force_y()@ R1 Blade ^2 +

force_z()@ R1 Blade ^2)

5.

Click Apply to create the expression.

Create a transient chart showing force:

1.

Select Insert > Chart and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General

XY - Transient or Sequence

(Selected)

Data Series

Series 1
> Data Source
> Expression

Data Series

(Selected)

Series 1
> Data Source
> Expression

808

forces on rotor
blade

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

3.

Click Apply.
A chart showing force on a single rotor blade against time is created, added to the chart object,
and displayed on the Chart Viewer tab.

35.8.5. Setting up Data Instancing Transformations

In this section, you will create additional copies of the original passages that replicate mesh nodes at
different locations with correct space and time interpolation values. After the data instancing process,
CFD-Post will create additional mesh nodes proportional to the number of extra passages created, and
populate them with solution variables correctly updated to their corresponding position in time and
space.
1.

From the Outline tree view, edit R1.

2.

In the Data Instancing tab, set Number of Data Instances to 7.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

From the Outline tree view, edit S1.

5.

In the Data Instancing tab, set Number of Data Instances to 6.

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Turn off the visibility of Wireframe.

On the 3D Viewer tab, CFD-Post displays the group of blades corresponding to 1/6 of a full wheel (the
minimum number of blades that makes a unity pitch ratio between stator and rotor passages).
The data-dependent transient forces on rotor blade on Chart 1 is still showing the result
computed on a single blade passage. After you expand the number of rotor blades in the rotor passage
to 7, the R1 Blade groups all 7 rotor blades together and the total force should be updated. To update
the chart, click the Refresh button at the top of the Chart Viewer tab.
The forces on rotor blade expression is now being computed on all 7 blades in the extended
number of passages in the rotor.

35.8.6. Setting up Graphical Instancing Transformations

In this section, you will create additional copies of the original domain passage. For the current example,
the original passage was replicated by a number to assemble 1/6 of the wheel using the Data Instancing
tool. Therefore, by applying the graphical instancing on R1 and S1 you will be making copies of the
extended version of these passages.
1.

From the Outline tree view, edit R1.

2.

In the Instancing tab configure the following settings:

Tab

Setting

Value

Instancing

Number of Graphical Instances

Instance Definition

Custom

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

809

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

Tab

Setting

Value

Passages per Component

3.

Click Apply.

4.

From the Outline tree view, edit S1.

5.

In the Instancing tab configure the following settings:

6.

Tab

Setting

Value

Instancing

Number of Graphical Instances

Instance Definition

Custom

Passages per Component

Click Apply.
The Graphics Instancing feature makes graphical copies of objects and places them at an angular
position computed using the Number of Passages and Number of Passages per Component on
the Instancing panel. To complete the full wheel, you replicated the 1/6 wheel sector, which was
obtained using data instancing, six times. On the 3D Viewer tab, CFD-Post displays the pressure
plot on Span 50 over the full wheel.

35.8.7. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator

With the Timestep Selector set to time step 0, you will make an animation showing the relative motion
starting from this time step and lasting for one stator blade passing period.
1.

Select the 3D Viewer tab.

2.

Position the geometry for the animation by right-clicking on a blank area in the viewer and selecting
Predefined Camera > View From -X.

3.

Click Animation

The Animation dialog box appears.

4.

In the Animation dialog box, select Keyframe Animation.

5.

Click New

6.

Select KeyframeNo1, then set # of Frames to 70, then press Enter while in the # of Frames box.

to create KeyframeNo1.

Tip
Be sure to press Enter and confirm that the new number appears in the list before
continuing.
This will place 70 intermediate frames between the keyframes, for a total of 72 frames.

810

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

7.

Use the Timestep Selector to load time step 70 and then close the dialog box.

8.

In the Animation dialog box, click New to create KeyframeNo2.

9.

Click More Animation Options

to expand the Animation dialog box.

10. Select Save Movie.

11. Specify a filename for the movie.
12. Set Format to MPEG1.
13. Click To Beginning

to rewind the active keyframe to KeyframeNo1.

Note
The active keyframe is indicated by the value appearing in the F: field in the middle of
the Animation dialog box. In this case it will be 1.
Wait for CFD-Post to finish loading the objects for this frame before proceeding.
14. Click Save animation state
and save the animation to a file. This will enable you to quickly restore the
animation in case you want to make changes. Animations are not restored by loading ordinary state files
(those with the .cst extension).
15. Click Play the animation

Note
It takes a while for the animation to be completed. To view the movie file, you will need
to use a media player that supports the MPEG format.
From the animation and plots, you can see that the flow is continuous across the interface. This is
because CFD-Post is capable of interpolating the flow field variables to the correct time and position
using the computed Fourier coefficients.
16. When you have finished, close the Animation dialog box and then close CFD-Post, saving the animation
state at your discretion.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

811

812

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 36: Time Transformation Method for a Transient

Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer
This tutorial includes:
36.1.Tutorial Features
36.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
36.3. Preparing the Working Directory
36.4. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer in CFX-Pre
36.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case
36.6. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

36.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Turbo Wizard
General mode

Analysis Type

Transient Blade Row

Fluid Type

Air Ideal Gas

CCL File

Import

Domain Type

Multiple Domains
Rotating Frame of
Reference

Turbulence Model

Shear Stress Transport

Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall (Counter Rotating)

Domain Interface

Fluid Solid

Domain Solver Control

Timescale Factor

CFX-Solver
Manager

Derived Variable

Average solid
temperature

CFD-Post

Plots

Contour
Data Instancing
Time Chart

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

813

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat
Transfer

36.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial sets up a transient blade row calculation with conjugate heat transfer using the Time
Transformation model. It uses an axial turbine to illustrate the basic concepts of setting up, running,
and monitoring a transient blade row problem with conjugate heat transfer in ANSYS CFX. It also describes the postprocessing of transient blade row and conjugate heat transfer results using the tools
provided in CFD-Post for this type of calculation.
The full geometry of the axial rotor-stator stage selected for modeling contains 36 stator blades and
42 rotor blades.

The geometry to be modeled consists of a single rotor blade passage, a single stator blade passage,
and a single solid rotor blade. Each rotor blade passage is an 8.571 section (360/42 blades), while each
stator blade passage is a 10 section (360/36 blades). The pitch ratio at the interface between the rotor
passage and the stator passage is 0.8571 (that is, 6/7).
For the Time Transformation method, you should always maintain an ensemble pitch ratio within a
range of 0.75 to 1.4. Note that the range of permissible pitch ratios narrows significantly with slower
rotation speed. A full machine analysis can be performed (modeling all rotor and stator blades), which
always eliminates any pitch change, but will require significant computational time. For this rotor-stator
geometry, a 1/6 machine section (7 rotor blades, 6 stator blades) would produce a pitch ratio of 1.0,
but this would require a model about 7 times larger than in this tutorial example.

814

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Preparing the Working Directory

In this example, the rotor rotates about the Z axis at 3500 rev/min (positive rotation following the right
hand rule) while the stator is stationary. Rotational periodicity boundaries are used to enable only a
small section of the full geometry to be modeled.
The flow is modeled as being turbulent and compressible. Profile boundary conditions are used at the
inlet and outlet. These profiles were obtained from previous simulations of the upstream and downstream
stages. In this tutorial, a separate total temperature profile is applied to the stator inlet via CEL expressions
that are provided in a .ccl file. This profile is of total temperature in a Gaussian distribution with a
maximum that is 50% higher than the baseline value.
In this tutorial, conjugate heat transfer is modeled between the rotor blade passage and the solid rotor
blade. The solid rotor blade domain is defined and the conjugate heat transfer interface is created. The
timescale factor setting is adjusted in the domain solver control settings for the solid rotor blade to
accelerate the solid thermal diffusion convergence.
The following steps outline the overall approach:
1.

Define the transient blade row simulation using the Turbomachinery wizard in CFX-Pre.

2.

Import the stator and rotor meshes, which were created in ANSYS TurboGrid.

3.

Enter the basic model definition.

4.

Import the solid blade mesh, which was created in ICEM CFD.

5.

Set the profile boundary conditions using CFX-Pre in General mode.

6.

Create a fluid-solid interface to model conjugate heat transfer between the rotor blade passage and the
solid rotor blade

7.

Set the timescale factor in domain solver control for the solid rotor blade.

8.

Run the transient blade row simulation using the steady-state results from Time Transformation Method
for a Transient Rotor-stator Case (p. 791) as an initial guess.

If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

36.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
TBRCHTCEL.ccl
TBRInletProfile.csv

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

815

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat
Transfer
TBROutletProfile.csv
TBRTurbineRotor.gtm
TBRTurbineSolid.cfx5
TBRTurbineStator.gtm
TimeBladeRowIni_001.res
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.
3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

36.4. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer
in CFX-Pre
This tutorial uses the Turbomachinery wizard in CFX-Pre. This preprocessing mode is designed to simplify the setup of turbomachinery simulations.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run TimeBladeRowCHT.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case (p. 829).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select Turbomachinery and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type TimeBladeRowCHT.

6.

Click Save.

7.

If you are notified that the file already exists, click Overwrite.

36.4.1. Basic Settings

1.

In the Basic Settings panel, configure the following settings:

Setting

Value

Machine Type

Axial Turbine

Axes
> Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

Axes

816

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer in CFX-Pre
Setting

Value

> Rotation Axis

Analysis Type
> Type

Transient Blade Row

Analysis Type
> Method

2.

Time Transformation

Click Next.

36.4.2. Components Definition

You will define two new components and import their respective meshes.
1.

Right-click in the blank area and select Add Component from the shortcut menu.

2.

Create a new component of type Stationary named S1 and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Mesh
> File

TBRTurbineStator.gtm

[a]

a. You may have to select the CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx) option under Files of
type.

4.

Create a new component of type Rotating, named R1 and click OK.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Component Type
> Value

3500 [rev min^-1]

[a]

Mesh
> File

TBRTurbineRotor.gtm

a. From the problem description.

6.

Click Next.

36.4.3. Physics Definition

In this section you will set properties of the fluid domain and some solver parameters.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

817

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat
Transfer
1. In the Physics Definition panel, configure the following:
Setting

Value

Fluid

Air Ideal Gas

Model Data
> Reference Pressure

0 [atm]

[a]

Model Data
> Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Model Data
> Turbulence

Shear Stress Transport

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> P-Total Inlet P-Static Outlet

(Selected)

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
169000 [Pa][b]

> P-Total
Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow

306 [K][b]

> T-Total
Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> Flow Direction

Normal to Boundary

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Outflow
> P-Static

110000 [Pa][b]

Interface
> Default Type

Transient Rotor Stator

a. To define the simulation using absolute pressure, set this value to 0 atm.
b. These values are temporary. They will be replaced with profile data later in the
tutorial.

818

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer in CFX-Pre
2.

Continue to click Next until you reach Final Operations.

3.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode because you will continue to define the simulation through
settings not available in the Turbomachinery wizard.

4.

Click Finish.

36.4.4. Additional Fluid Model Settings

Verify the following settings, which affect the accuracy of the simulation:
1.

Edit R1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Domain Models

Value

> Domain Motion

> Alternate Rotation Model
Fluid Models

Heat Transfer
> Incl. Viscous Work Term

3.

(Selected)

(Selected)

Click OK.

36.4.5. Importing the Solid Blade Mesh File

1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > ICEM CFD.
The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

TBRTurbineSolid.cfx5

Options
> Mesh Units

m[a]

a. This mesh was created using units of meters; however the units are not stored
with this type of mesh. Set Mesh Units to m when importing the mesh into
CFX-Pre so that the mesh remains the intended size.

3.

Click Open.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

819

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat
Transfer

36.4.6. Creating the Solid Blade Domain

In this section you will define the solid domain for the blade and initialize the domain temperature to
a reasonable value. You will also adjust the Timescale Factor setting in the solver control options. This
setting is used in transient cases involving conjugate heat transfer to increase the thermal response of
the solid. This is done to compensate for the large disparity in time scales between fluid convection
and solid diffusion, which makes transient modeling of such problems otherwise impractical. The initialization and solver control options that are set when creating a domain apply only to that domain.
1.

Rename Default Domain to Rotor Solid Blade.

2.

Edit Rotor Solid Blade.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

> Domain Type

Value

Solid Domain

Solid Definitions
> Solid 1
> Material

Aluminum

[a]

Domain Models
> Domain Models
> Option

Rotating

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Angular Velocity

3500 [rev min^-1]

Domain Models
> Passage Definition
> Pass. in Component

Domain Models
> Passage Definition

Initialization

> Passages in 360

42

Domain Initialization

(Selected)

Domain Initialization
> Initial Conditions
> Temperature

820

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer in CFX-Pre
Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Automatic with
Value

Domain Initialization
> Initial Conditions
> Temperature

Solver
Control

> Temperature

300 [K]

Domain Solver Control

(Selected)

Domain Solver Control

> Timescale Control
> Timescale Factor

a. Click the Ellipsis icon

1.0e6[b]

to open the Material dialog box.

b. The timescale factor is defined as: solid time scale /

, where
is the
simulation time-step size necessary to resolve flow features of interest. Increasing
the timescale factor to 1.0e6 from the default 1 increases the physical time scale
of this transient run inside the solid domain by a factor of 1.0e6.

4.

Click OK.

36.4.7. Modifying the Boundary Conditions

36.4.7.1. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions
The inlet and outlet boundary conditions are defined using profiles in your working directory and several CEL expressions. Boundary profile data must be initialized before they can be used for boundary
conditions.
1.

Select Tools > Initialize Profile Data.

The Initialize Profile Data dialog box appears.

2.

Under Data File, click Browse

3.

From your working directory, select TBRInletProfile.csv.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Click Apply.
The profile data is read into memory.

6.

Under Data File, click Browse

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

821

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat
Transfer
7. From your working directory, select TBROutletProfile.csv.
8.

Click Open.

9.

Click OK.

10. Select File > Import > CCL.

11. Ensure that Import Method is set to Append.
12. Select TBRCHTCEL.ccl.
13. Click Open.

Note
After profile data has been initialized from a file, the profile data file should not be deleted
or otherwise removed from its directory. By default, the full filepath to the profile data file
is stored in CFX-Pre, and the profile data file is read directly by CFX-Solver each time the
solver is started or restarted.

36.4.7.2. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions

1.

Edit S1 Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Profile Boundary Conditions

> Use Profile Data

Value

(Selected)

Profile Boundary Setup

> Profile Name

3.

inlet

Click Generate Values.

This causes the profile values of Total Pressure and Total Temperature to be applied
at the nodes on the inlet boundary. It also causes entries to be made in the Boundary Details tab.
In order to later reset the velocity values at the main inlet to match those that were originally read
from the profile data file, revisit the Basic Settings tab for this boundary and click Generate Values.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Value

Total Pressure
(stable)

Mass and Momentum

822

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer in CFX-Pre
Tab

Setting

Value

> Relative Pressure

inlet.Total
Pressure(r)

Flow Direction
> Option

Cylindrical
Components

Flow Direction
> Axial Component

Flow Direction
> Radial Component

Flow Direction
> Theta Component

Heat Transfer
> Total Temperature

5.

Click OK.

6.

Edit R1 Outlet.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

TINLET

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Frame Type

Rotating

Profile Boundary Conditions

> Use Profile Data

(Selected)

Profile Boundary Setup

> Profile Name

8.

Click Generate Values.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

> Option

outlet

Value

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

outlet.Pressure(r)

10. Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

823

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat
Transfer

36.4.7.3. Visualizing the Profile Boundary Value

You can plot scalar profile values and vectors on inlet and outlet boundaries. In this section, you will
edit a boundary so that you can visualize the pressure profile values at the inlet.
1.

Edit S1 Inlet

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Plot Options

Boundary Contour

(Selected)

Profile Variable

Total Temperature

Click Apply

CFX-Pre plots the Total Pressure radial profile at the inlet with the pressure values displayed in a legend.

36.4.7.4. Creating the Blade Base Boundary

Here you will edit the default boundary in Rotor Solid Blade to create the hub boundary for the
blade.
1.

Rename Rotor Solid Blade Default to Blade Base.

2.

Edit Blade Base.

3.

On the Basic Settings tab, set Location to Hub 2.

4.

On the Boundary Details tab, ensure that Heat Transfer > Option is set to Adiabatic.

5.

Click OK.

36.4.8. Creating the Conjugate Heat Transfer Interface

1.

Click Insert > Domain Interface and, in the dialog box that appears, set Name to CHT Interface and
click OK.

2.

Configure the following setting(s) of CHT Interface:

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Solid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

Rotor Solid Blade

Interface Side 1
> Region List

R1_BLADE, TE, TIP

[a]

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

824

R1

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer in CFX-Pre
Tab

Setting

Value

Interface Side 2
> Region List

BLADE 2

Interface Models
> Option

General
Connection[b]

a. The only region not selected is HUB 2, which is the blade surface attached to
the hub.
b. As long as the connection is general, the interface will enable heat transfer.

3.

Click OK.
An error message related to the domain R1 will appear in the message window. This error occurs
because the 2D Region BLADE 2 in R1 is being used in both a boundary and a domain interface.
This error is resolved in the next step.

4.

Delete the boundary R1 Blade in the domain R1.

36.4.9. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model

You will set the simulation to be solved using the Time Transformation method.
1.

Edit Transient Blade Row Models.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transient Method
> Time Period
> Option

Passing Period

Transient Method
> Time Period
> Domain

S1

Transient Method
> Time Steps
> Option

Number of Timesteps per Period

Transient Method
> Time Steps
> Timesteps/Period

35

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

825

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat
Transfer
Setting

Value

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Option

Number of Periods per Run

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Periods per Run

10

Note
The passing period is automatically calculated as: 2 * pi / (Passages in 360 * Signal Angular
Velocity). The Passing Period setting cannot be edited.
The number of time steps per period should always be larger than 2 * Number of Fourier
Coefficients + 1 to be used for postprocessing.
The time step size is also automatically calculated as: Passing Period / Number of Timesteps
per Period. The Timestep setting cannot be edited.

3.

Click OK.

36.4.10. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points

For transient blade row calculations, a minimal set of variables are selected to be computed using
Fourier coefficients. It is convenient to postprocess variables in the stationary frame when multiple
frames of reference are present. Here, you will add the Velocity in Stn Frame and Mach Number
in Stn Frame variables to the default list. You will also add the Wall Heat Flux variable to the
default list to observe the results of the conjugate heat transfer.
In addition, monitor points can be used to effectively compare the Time Transformation results against
a reference case. They provide useful information on the quality of the reference phase and frequency
produced in the simulation. They should be used to monitor convergence and, as the simulation converges, the user points should display a periodic pattern.

Note
When comparing to the reference case, make sure monitor points are placed in the same relative
locations with respect to the initial configuration in both cases.
It is important to check that the solver equations are being solved correctly. Monitoring pressure
provides feedback on the momentum equations while monitoring temperature provides feedback
on the energy equations.

Set up the output control and create monitor points as follows:

826

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case with Conjugate Heat Transfer in CFX-Pre

1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables
List

(Selected)

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables List
> Extra Output Var. List

Velocity in Stn Frame, Mach Number in

Stn Frame, Wall Heat Flux[a]

a. Click Multi-select from extended list

each of the listed variables.

4.

Click the Monitor tab.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting

Setting

Value

Monitor Objects

(Selected)

Monitor Objects
> Efficiency Output

(Cleared)

6.

Create a monitor point named rotor_P1.

7.

Under Monitor Objects > Monitor Points and Expressions > rotor_P1, configure the following settings:
Setting

Value

Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Output Variables List

Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,

Total Temperature, Velocity

Position Axial Comp.

0.211 [m]

Position Radial Comp.

0.2755 [m]

Position Theta Comp.

182 [degree]

8.

Create an additional monitor point named stator_P1.

9.

Under Monitor Objects > Monitor Points and Expressions > stator_P1, configure the following settings:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

827

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat
Transfer
Setting

Value

Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Output Variables List

Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,

Total Temperature, Velocity

Position Axial Comp.

0.202 [m]

Position Radial Comp.

0.2755 [m]

Position Theta Comp.

178 [degree]

10. Create an additional monitor point named solid_P1.

11. Under Monitor Objects > Monitor Points and Expressions > solid_P1, configure the following settings:
Setting

Value

Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Output Variables List

Temperature

Position Axial Comp.

0.224 [m]

Position Radial Comp.

0.2755 [m]

Position Theta Comp.

181 [degree]

Note
Transient blade row cases use monitor points to monitor the periodic fluctuating variable
values. For diagnostic purposes, you should have several monitor points. Here, three
monitor points will be used for demonstration purposes.

12. Click OK.

36.4.11. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

TimeBladeRowCHT.def

3.

Click Save.

4.

Ignore the error message (the initial values for R1 and S1 will be specified in CFX-Solver Manager) and
click Yes to continue.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

5.

828

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case

36.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case

At this point, CFX-Pre has been shut down, and the Define Run dialog box is displayed in CFX-Solver
Manager. You will now obtain a solution to the CFD problem. To reduce the simulation time, the simulation will be initialized using a steady-state case.
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed. If an error message appears, ignore it and click Yes
to continue.
Solver Input File should be set to TimeBladeRowCHT.def.

2.

Under the Initial Values tab, select Initial Values Specification.

3.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values, select Initial Values 1.

4.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values > Initial Values 1 Settings > File Name, click Browse
.

5.

Select TimeBladeRowIni_001.res from your working directory.

6.

Click Open.

7.

Under Initial Values Specification > Use Mesh From, select Solver Input File.

8.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

Note
Before the simulation begins, the Transient Blade Row Post-processing Information
summary in the .out file will display the time step range over which the solver will
accumulate the Fourier coefficients.
Similarly, the Time Transformation Stability summary in the .out file displays
whether the rotorstator pitch ratio is within the acceptable range.
After the CFX-Solver Manager has run for a short time, you can track the monitor points
you created in CFX-Pre by clicking the Time Corrected User Points tab that appears
at the top of the graphical interface of CFX-Solver Manager.
After the simulation has proceeded for some time, observe the periodic nature of the
monitor point values.

9.

While the solver is running, create and then monitor a derived variable for the average solid temperature
over the last period:
a.

Open the New Derived Variable dialog box in any of these ways:
Select Workspace > New Derived Variable.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

829

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat
Transfer
Select Workspace > Workspace Properties.
The Workspace Properties dialog box appears.
Select the Derived Variables tab.
Click New

Right-click in the chart area and select Monitor Properties from the context menu.
The Monitor Properties dialog box appears.
Select the Derived Variables tab.
Click New
b.

Set Name to Moving Average and click OK.

The Derived Variable Properties dialog box appears.

c.

Set Statistics > Statistics Type to Arithmetic Average.

d.

Ensure that the settings specify that the average is over a moving interval of one time period, then
click OK.
The derived variable is created.

e.

Click OK to dismiss the Workspace Properties dialog box, if applicable.

f.

In the Monitor Properties dialog box (right-click in the chart area and select Monitor Properties
from the context menu), select the Plot Lines tab.

g.

Expand the tree to USER POINT > Temperature > solid_P1, then right-click solid_P1 and
select Add Derived Plot Line For Variable > Moving Average.

h.

Click OK to dismiss the Monitor Properties dialog box.

i.

After at least one interval has passed, observe that the User Points tab shows a plot for solid_P1
(Temperature), Moving Average.

10. When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.
11. Click OK.

36.6. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

In a transient blade row run, flow field variables are compressed using the Fourier coefficient method.
These variables are accumulated at the end of the simulation. This enables you to navigate through
any time instance, within the common period, without having to load multiple transient results files.
By default CFD-Post displays results corresponding to the end the simulation.
To get started, follow these steps:

830

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

1.

Start CFD-Post and load TimeBladeRowCHT_001.res.

2.

When CFD-Post opens, if you see the Domain Selector dialog box, ensure that all the domains are selected,
then click OK to load the results from these domains.

3.

If you see a message regarding transient blade row postprocessing, click OK.

4.

Click Timestep Selector

5.

Select the 1st time step.

6.

Click Apply to load the time step, and then click Close to exit the dialog box.

The rotor blades move to their starting positions.

36.6.1. Creating a Slice Plane

Create a plane to be used for making plots:
1.

Select Insert > Location > Plane. Accept the default name and click OK.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Domains

Rotor Solid Blade

Definition
> Method

YZ Plane

Definition
>X

-0.27 [m]

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Turn off the visibility of Plane 1 by clearing its check box in the Outline tree view.

36.6.2. Creating a Contour Plot

1.

Click Insert > Contour and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Plane 1

Variable

Temperature.Trnavg[a]

Range

Local

# of Contours

31

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

831

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat
Transfer
Tab

Setting

Value

a. Click the Ellipsis icon

to open the selection dialog box, then select Temper
ature.Trnavg under the Transient Statistics > Arithmetic
Average branch. Click OK.

3.

Click Apply.
The contour plot shows Temperature values corresponding to arithmetic averages calculated
using the results from all time steps.

36.6.3. Creating a Variable Time Chart

In this section, you will compute and plot the magnitude of the heat flow on the rotor blade. For a
transient blade row case, CFD-Post automatically reconstructs variables for the flow solution time based
on the last time step. Intermediate time steps for time instances in the common period are located in
the Timestep Selector. In Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model (p. 825), you set 35 time steps per
stator blade passing period and there are six stator blade passing periods in a common period. Therefore,
the total number of intermediate time steps in the common period is 210. For this case, the solver has
reconstructed results over two common periods (420 time steps). You will reduce the total number of
time steps to 140 to speed up the generation of the time chart.
Reduce the number of time steps in the period:
1.

Click Timestep Selector

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Timestep
Selector

Timestep Sampling

Uniform

Number of Timesteps

70

Click Apply.
The Timestep Selector now shows a total of 140 steps over two common periods (shown under
the Phase column).

Compute the heat flow on the blade:

1.

Select Insert > Expression.

2.

In the Insert Expression dialog box, type heat flow on solid blade.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Set Definition, to areaInt(Wall Heat Flux)@CHT Interface Side 1

5.

Click Apply to create the expression.

Create a transient chart showing heat flow:

832

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

1.

Select Insert > Chart and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General

XY - Transient or Sequence

(Selected)

Data Series

Series 1
> Data Source
> Expression

Data Series

(Selected)

Series 1
> Data Source
> Expression

3.

heat flow on
solid blade

Click Apply.
A chart showing heat flow on a single rotor blade against time is created, added to the chart object,
and displayed on the Chart Viewer tab.

36.6.4. Setting up Data Instancing Transformations

In this section, you will create additional copies of the original passages that replicate mesh nodes at
different locations with correct space and time interpolation values. After the data instancing process,
CFD-Post will create additional mesh nodes proportional to the number of extra passages created, and
populate them with solution variables correctly updated to their corresponding position in time and
space.
1.

From the Outline tree view, edit Contour 1.

2.

In the Geometry tab, set Location to CHT Interface Side 1.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

From the Outline tree view, edit Rotor Solid Blade.

5.

In the Data Instancing tab, set Number of Data Instances to 7.

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Turn off the visibility of Wireframe.

On the 3D Viewer tab, CFD-Post displays the group of rotor blades corresponding to 1/6 of a full wheel
(the minimum number of blades that makes a unity pitch ratio between stator and rotor passages).
The data-dependent transient heat flow on solid blade on Chart 1 is still showing the result
computed on a single solid blade. After you expand the number of solid rotor blades to 7, the CHT
Interface Side 1 groups all 7 rotor blades together and the total heat flow should be updated.
To update the chart, click the Refresh button at the top of the Chart Viewer tab.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

833

Time Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case with Conjugate Heat
Transfer
The heat flow on solid blade expression is now being computed on all 7 solid rotor blades.

834

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 37: Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient

Rotor-stator Case
A single-stage turbomachinery configuration with pitch-change can be modeled using the Fourier
Transformation method. This method is particularly useful for modeling a large pitch-change configuration and when it is not possible to use Time-transformation method.
This tutorial includes:
37.1.Tutorial Features
37.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
37.3. Preparing the Working Directory
37.4. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre
37.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case
37.6. Viewing the Fourier Transformation Results in CFD-Post

37.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Turbo Wizard
General mode

Analysis Type

Transient Blade Row

Fluid Type

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Type

Multiple Domains
Rotating Frame of
Reference

Turbulence Model

Shear Stress Transport

Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall (Counter Rotating)

CFD-Post

Plots

Vector Plot
Contour
Data Instancing
Time Chart
Animation

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

835

Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

37.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

The goal of this tutorial is to set up a transient blade row calculation using the Fourier Transformation
model. It uses an axial turbine to illustrate the basic concepts of setting up, running, and monitoring a
transient blade row problem in ANSYS CFX. It also describes the postprocessing of transient blade row
results using the tools provided in CFD-Post for this type of calculation.
The full geometry of the axial rotor-stator stage selected for modeling contains 36 stator blades and
42 rotor blades.

The geometry to be modeled consists of a pair of rotor blade passages and a pair of stator blade passages.
Pairs of passages are needed because the Fourier Transformation method uses a double-passage strategy.
Each rotor blade passage is an 8.571 section (360/42 blades), while each stator blade passage is a 10
section (360/36 blades). The pitch ratio at the interface between the pair of rotor passages and the
pair of stator passages is 0.8571 (that is, 6/7).
You should always try to obtain a pitch ratio as close to 1 as possible in your model to minimize approximations, but this must be weighed against computational resources. A full machine analysis (modeling
all rotor and stator blades) eliminates pitch change, but requires significant computational time. For
this rotor-stator geometry, a 1/6 machine section (7 rotor blades, 6 stator blades) would produce a pitch
ratio of 1.0, but this would require a model about 3 times larger than in this tutorial example.

836

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Preparing the Working Directory

In this example, the rotor rotates about the Z axis at 3500 rev/min (positive rotation following the right
hand rule) while the stator is stationary. Rotational periodicity boundaries with phase lag are used to
enable only a small section of the full geometry to be modeled.
The flow is modeled as being turbulent and compressible. Profile boundary conditions are used at the
inlet and outlet. In this tutorial, the profiles are a function of radial coordinate only. These profiles were
obtained from previous simulations of the upstream and downstream stages.
The following steps outline the overall approach:
1.

Define the transient blade row simulation using the Turbomachinery wizard in CFX-Pre.

2.

Import the stator and rotor meshes, which were created in ANSYS TurboGrid.

3.

Enter the basic model definition.

4.

Set the profile boundary conditions using CFX-Pre in General mode.

5.

Run the transient blade row simulation using the steady-state results from Time Transformation Method
for a Transient Rotor-stator Case (p. 791) as an initial guess.

If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

37.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
TBRInletProfile.csv
TBROutletProfile.csv
TBRTurbineRotor.gtm
TBRTurbineStator.gtm
TimeBladeRowIni_001.res
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

837

Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

37.4. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

This tutorial uses the Turbomachinery wizard in CFX-Pre. This preprocessing mode is designed to simplify the setup of turbomachinery simulations.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run FourierBladeRow.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case (p. 849).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select Turbomachinery and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type FourierBladeRow.

6.

Click Save.

7.

If you are notified that the file already exists, click Overwrite.

37.4.1. Basic Settings

1.

In the Basic Settings panel, configure the following settings:

Setting

Value

Machine Type

Axial Turbine

Axes
> Coordinate Frame

Coord 0

Axes
> Rotation Axis

Analysis Type
> Type

Transient Blade
Row

Analysis Type
> Method

2.

838

Fourier
Transformation

Click Next.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

37.4.2. Components Definition

The Fourier Transformation method requires two rotor blade passages and two stator blade passages.
You will define two new components and import their respective meshes.
1.

Right-click in the blank area and select Add Component from the shortcut menu.

2.

Create a new component of type Stationary named S1 and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Mesh
> File

TBRTurbineStator.gtm

[a]

a. You may have to select the CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx) option under Files of
type.

4.

Expand the Passage and Alignment section and click Edit.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Passage and Alignment

> Passages to Model

After clicking Done, you will see that the stator blade passage is correctly replicated and the resulting mesh contains two stator blade passages as required by the Fourier Transformation model.
This also creates the Sampling Interface (S1 Internal Interface 1).
6.

Right-click in the blank area and select Add Component from the shortcut menu.

7.

Create a new component of type Rotating, named R1 and click OK.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Component Type
> Value

3500 [rev min^-1]

[a]

Mesh
> File

TBRTurbineRotor.gtm

a. From the problem description.

9.

Expand the Passage and Alignment section and click Edit.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

839

Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

10. Configure the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Passage and Alignment

> Passages to Model

After clicking Done, you will see that the rotor blade passage is correctly replicated and the resulting
mesh contains two rotor blade passages as required by the Fourier Transformation model. This
also creates the Sampling Interface (R1 Internal Interface 1).
11. Click Next.

37.4.3. Physics Definition

In this section, you will set properties of the fluid domain and some solver parameters.
1.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Fluid

Air Ideal Gas

Model Data
> Reference Pressure

0 [atm]

[a]

Model Data
> Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Model Data
> Turbulence

Shear Stress Transport

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> P-Total Inlet P-Static Outlet

(Selected)

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> P-Total

169000 [Pa]

[b]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> T-Total

306 [K]

[b]

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow

840

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

> Flow Direction

Normal to Boundary

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Outflow
> P-Static

110000 [Pa]

[b]

Interface
> Default Type

Transient Rotor Stator

a. A reference pressure of 0 atm defines the simulation in absolute pressure.

b. These values are temporary. They will be replaced with profile data later in the
tutorial.

2.

Click Next.
Under the Interface Definition section, you can observe that both the Fourier coefficient sampling
interfaces S1 Internal Interface 1 and R1 Internal Interface 1, as well as, the Phase-shifted interfaces
S1 to S1 Periodic 1 and R1 to R1 Periodic 1 are automatically created.

3.

Click Next.

37.4.4. Disturbance Definition

In this section, you will specify the type of disturbance being imposed.
1.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Disturbance
> Fourier Transformation
> Type

Rotor Stator

Disturbance
> Fourier Transformation
> Domain Interface

R1 to S1

2.

Continue to click Next until you reach Final Operations.

3.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode because you will continue to define the simulation through
settings not available in the Turbomachinery wizard.

4.

Click Finish.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

841

Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

37.4.5. Additional Fluid Model Settings

Verify the following settings, which affect the accuracy of the simulation:
1.

Edit R1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Alternate Rotation Model

Fluid Models

Heat Transfer
> Incl. Viscous Work Term

3.

(Selected)

(Selected)

Click OK.

37.4.6. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions

The inlet and outlet boundary conditions are defined using profiles in your working directory. Boundary
profile data must be initialized before they can be used for boundary conditions.
1.

Select Tools > Initialize Profile Data.

The Initialize Profile Data dialog box appears.

2.

Under Data File, click Browse

3.

From your working directory, select TBRInletProfile.csv.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Click Apply.
The profile data is read into memory.

6.

Under Data File, click Browse

7.

From your working directory, select TBROutletProfile.csv.

8.

Click Open.

9.

Click OK.

Note
After profile data has been initialized from a file, the profile data file should not be deleted
or otherwise removed from its directory. By default, the full file path to the profile data file

842

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

is stored in CFX-Pre, and the profile data file is read directly by CFX-Solver each time the
solver is started or restarted.

37.4.7. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions

1.

Edit S1 Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Profile Boundary Conditions

> Use Profile Data

Value

(Selected)

Profile Boundary Setup

> Profile Name

3.

inlet

Click Generate Values.

This causes the profile values of Total Pressure and Total Temperature to be applied
at the nodes on the inlet boundary. It also causes entries to be made in the Boundary Details tab.
In order to later reset the velocity values at the main inlet to match those that were originally read
from the profile data file, revisit the Basic Settings tab for this boundary and click Generate Values.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Value

Total Pressure
(stable)

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

inlet.Total
Pressure(r)

Flow Direction
> Option

Cylindrical
Components

Flow Direction
> Axial Component

Flow Direction
> Radial Component

Flow Direction
> Theta Component

Heat Transfer
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

843

Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

Tab

Setting

Value

> Option

Total Temperature

Heat Transfer
> Total Temperature

5.

Click OK.

6.

Edit R1 Outlet.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

inlet.Total
Temperature(r)

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Frame Type

Rotating

Profile Boundary Conditions

> Use Profile Data

(Selected)

Profile Boundary Setup

> Profile Name

8.

Click Generate Values.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

outlet

Value

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

outlet.Pressure(r)

10. Click OK.

37.4.8. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model

You will set the simulation to be solved using the Fourier Transformation method.
1.

Edit Transient Blade Row Models.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transient Method
> Time Period

844

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

> Option

Automatic

Transient Method
> Time Steps
> Option

Timestep Multiplier

Transient Method
> Time Steps
> Timestep Multiplier

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Option

Number of Periods per Run

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Periods per Run

20

Note
The passing period is automatically calculated as: 2 * pi / (Number of Blades * Angular Velocity). The Passing Period setting cannot be edited.
The number of time steps per period should always be larger than 2 * Number of Fourier
Coefficients + 1 to be used for postprocessing. When the time step size is set using the
Timestep Multiplier option, the number of time steps per period is the product of
the values of Min Timesteps / Per. and Timestep Multiplier.
The time step size is also automatically calculated as: Passing Period / Number of Time Steps
per Period. The Timestep setting cannot be edited.

3.

Click OK.

37.4.9. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points

For transient blade row calculations, a minimal set of variables are selected to be computed using
Fourier coefficients. It is convenient to postprocess variables in the stationary frame when multiple
frames of reference are present. Here, you will add the Velocity in Stn Frame and Mach Number
in Stn Frame variables to the default list.
In addition, monitor points can be used to effectively compare the Fourier Transformation results against
a reference case. They provide useful information on the quality of the reference phase and frequency

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

845

Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

produced in the simulation. As the simulation converges, the user points should display a periodic
pattern.

Note
When comparing to the reference case, make sure monitor points are placed in the same relative
locations with respect to the initial configuration in both cases.
It is important to check that the solver equations are being solved correctly. Monitoring pressure
provides feedback on the momentum equations while monitoring temperature provides feedback
on the energy equations.
For diagnostic purposes, you should have several monitor points. Here, two monitor points will
be used for demonstration purposes.

Set up the output control and create monitor points as follows:

1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables
List

(Selected)

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables List
> Extra Output Var. List

Velocity in Stn Frame, Mach Number in

Stn Frame[a]

a. Click Multi-select from extended list

each of the listed variables.

4.

Click the Monitor tab.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting

Setting

Value

Monitor Objects

(Selected)

Monitor Objects
> Efficiency Output

846

(Cleared)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

6.

Create a monitor point named rotor_P1.

7.

Under Monitor Objects > Monitor Points and Expressions > rotor_P1, configure the following settings:
Setting

Value

Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Output Variables List

Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,

Total Temperature, Velocity

Position Axial Comp.

0.211 [m]

Position Radial Comp.

0.2755 [m]

Position Theta Comp.

182 [degree]

8.

Create an additional monitor point named stator_P1.

9.

Under Monitor Objects > Monitor Points and Expressions > stator_P1, configure the following settings:
Setting

Value

Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Output Variables List

Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,

Total Temperature, Velocity

Position Axial Comp.

0.202 [m]

Position Radial Comp.

0.2755 [m]

Position Theta Comp.

178 [degree]

10. Click OK.

11. Save the simulation.

37.4.10. Setting the Execution Control

Here you will prepare the case for execution and initialize the solution with steady-state results. Instead
of obtaining steady-state results by setting up and running the steady-state solution for this case, which
has a double passage configuration, you will import a results file from another steady-state simulation,
which happens to have a single passage (see Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre (p. 758)). Because
that other simulation involves only a single passage, you will use replication control settings to apply
those results to both passages in this simulation.
1.

In the Outline tree view, right-click Simulation Control and select Insert > Execution Control.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Run Definition

Run Settings

Initial Values

Value

> Double Precision

(Selected)

Initial Values Specification

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

847

Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

Tab

Setting

Value

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values

Initial Values 1

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values
> Initial Values 1
> File Name

TimeBladeRowIni_001.res
[a]

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values Control

(Selected)

Initial Values Specification

> Initial Values Control
> Continue History From

(Selected)

a. You can select a file to load by clicking Browse

and selecting the appropriate
file from your working directory, then clicking Open.

3.

On the Initial Values tab, create an interpolation mapping item named R1 Interpolation.

4.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values > Initial Values 1 > Interpolation Mapping > R1
Interpolation, configure the following settings:
Setting

Value

Source Location

R1

Target Location

R1

Replication Control

(Selected)

Replication Control
> Passages in 360

42

Replication Control
> Total Num. Instances

5.

Create a second interpolation mapping item named S1 Interpolation.

6.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values > Initial Values 1 > Interpolation Mapping > S1
Interpolation, configure the following settings:

848

Setting

Value

Source Location

S1

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case

Setting

Value

Target Location

S1

Replication Control

(Selected)

Replication Control
> Passages in 360

36

Replication Control
> Total Num. Instances

7.

Click OK.

37.4.11. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

The CFX-Solver input file FourierBladeRow.def is created by default.

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, the Solver Input File
is set.
2.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

37.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case

At this point, CFX-Pre has been shut down, and the Define Run dialog box is displayed in CFX-Solver
Manager. The initial values file has already been specified (see Setting the Execution Control (p. 847)).
You will now obtain a solution to the CFD problem.
1.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. This can take a long time depending on your
system. Eventually a dialog box is displayed.

Note
Before the simulation begins, the Transient Blade Row Post-processing Information
summary in the .out file will display the time step range over which the solver will
accumulate the Fourier coefficients.
During the run, the Fourier Transformation Information summary in the .out file
displays the time step at which the full Fourier Transformation Model is activated.
Monitor points of similar values can be grouped together by right-clicking to the right
of the User Points tab, selecting New Monitor, and clicking OK. In the New Monitor
dialog box, you can name the new monitor point and select the variables to monitor
in the Monitor Properties dialog box.
After the simulation has proceeded for some time, observe the periodic nature of the
monitor point values.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

849

Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

2.

When CFX-Solver is finished, clear the check box next to Post-Process Results.

3.

Click OK.

37.5.1. Confirming Convergence Using Derived Variables

If you did not observe periodic monitor behavior within 20 passing periods of the stator, you should
create statistical derived variables to verify that the solution approaches periodicity by following the
procedure below:
1.

Select Workspace > New Monitor.

2.

Change the name to Stator Pressure.

3.

Click OK.
The Monitor Properties dialog box appears.

4.

On the Plot Lines tab, select USER POINTS > Pressure > stator_P1.

5.

Click Apply.
A plot line of pressure (in Pa) at stator_P1 versus accumulated time step appears.

6.

Click the Derived Variables tab.

7.

Create a derived variable named Avg Over Passing Period.

The Derived Variable Properties dialog box appears.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Statistics
> Statistics Type

Arithmetic Average

Statistics
> Interval Option

Moving Interval

Statistics
> Interval Definition
> Option

Timesteps

Statistics
> Interval Definition
> Number of Timesteps

9.

30

Click OK.

10. Return to the Monitor Properties dialog box.

850

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case

11. In the Workspace Derived Variables list box, select Avg Over Passing Period.
12. Click Apply.
A plot line of the average pressure at stator_P1 over a moving passing period appears.
13. Create a derived variable named Max Over Passing Period.
The Derived Variable Properties dialog box appears.
14. Configure the following setting(s):
Setting

Value

Statistics
> Statistics Type

Maximum

Statistics
> Interval Option

Moving Interval

Statistics
> Interval Definition
> Option

Timesteps

Statistics
> Interval Definition
> Number of Timesteps

30

15. Click OK.

16. Return to the Monitor Properties dialog box.
17. In the Workspace Derived Variables list box, select Max Over Passing Period.
18. Click OK.
A plot line of the maximum pressure at stator_P1 over a moving passing period appears.
Both derived variable plot lines should appear to approach stable values. If you had set the simulation
to run for 25 passing periods, the plot monitor would resemble the image below:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

851

Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

37.6. Viewing the Fourier Transformation Results in CFD-Post

In a transient blade row run, flow field variables are compressed using the Fourier coefficient method.
These variables are accumulated at the end of the simulation. This enables you to navigate through
any time instance, within the common period, without having to load multiple transient results files.
By default CFD-Post displays results corresponding to the end the simulation.
To get started, follow these steps:
1.

Start CFD-Post and load FourierBladeRow_001.res.

2.

When CFD-Post opens, if you see the Domain Selector dialog box, ensure that all the domains are selected,
then click OK to load the results from these domains.

3.

If you see a message regarding transient blade row postprocessing, click OK.

37.6.1. Creating a Turbo Surface

Create a turbo surface to be used for making plots:
1.

852

Click the Turbo tab.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Fourier Transformation Results in CFD-Post

2.

If you see the Turbo Initialization dialog box, click Yes, otherwise click the Initialize All Components
button, which is visible initially by default, or after double-clicking the Initialization object in the Turbo
tree view.

3.

Select Insert > Location > Turbo Surface.

4.

Change the name to Span 50.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Constant Span

Definition
> Value

0.5

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Turn off the visibility of Span 50 by clearing its check box in the Outline tree view.

37.6.2. Creating a Vector Plot

1.

Click Insert > Vector and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

Value

Span 50

Definition
> Variable

3.

Velocity in Stn
Frame

Click Apply.
The vector plot shows Velocity in Stationary Frame values corresponding to the end
of a common period.
The rotor domain is in the angular position corresponding to its location after 20 passing periods.
Now you will place the rotor aligned with the stator, as they were in the solver input file.

4.

Click Timestep Selector

5.

Select the 1st time step.

6.

Click Apply to load the time step, and then click Close to exit the dialog box.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

853

Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

The rotor blades move to their starting positions.

37.6.3. Creating a Contour Plot

1.

Turn off the visibility of Vector 1.

2.

Click Insert > Contour and accept the default name.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

Span 50

Variable

Pressure

Range

Local

# of Contours

21

Click Apply.

The contour plot shows Pressure values corresponding to the specified time step.

37.6.4. Creating a Variable Time Chart

In this section, you will compute and plot the magnitude of the forces that the flow applies on the rotor
blade. For a transient blade row case, CFD-Post automatically reconstructs variables for the flow solution
time based on the last time step. Intermediate time steps for time instances in the common period are
located in the Timestep Selector. In Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model (p. 844), you set 35 time
steps per stator blade passing period and there are six stator blade passing periods in a common period.
Therefore, the total number of intermediate time steps in the common period is 210. For this case, the
solver has reconstructed results over four common periods (840 time steps). You will reduce the total
number of time steps to 280 to speed up the generation of the time chart.
Reduce the number of time steps in the period:
1.

Click Timestep Selector

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Timestep Selector

Timestep Sampling

Uniform

Number of Timesteps

70

Click Apply.
The Timestep Selector now shows a total of 280 steps over four common periods (shown under
the Phase column).

Compute the forces on the blade:

1.

854

Select Insert > Expression.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Fourier Transformation Results in CFD-Post

2.

In the Insert Expression dialog box, type forces on rotor blade.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Set Definition, to sqrt(force_x()@ R1 Blade ^2 + force_y()@ R1 Blade ^2 +

force_z()@ R1 Blade ^2)

5.

Click Apply to create the expression.

Create a transient chart showing force:

1.

Select Insert > Chart and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General

XY - Transient or Sequence

(Selected)

Data Series

Series 1
> Data Source
> Expression

Data Series

(Selected)

Series 1
> Data Source
> Expression

3.

forces on rotor
blade

Click Apply.
A chart showing force on both rotor blades against time is created, added to the chart object, and
displayed on the Chart Viewer tab.

37.6.5. Setting up Data Instancing Transformations

Data instancing uses Fourier interpolation to reproduce other passages that are not included in a simulation. In this section, you will use data instancing to replicate enough passages in the rotor and stator
domains to recover unity pitch ratio across the rotor-stator interface.
1.

From the Outline tree view, edit R1.

2.

In the Data Instancing tab, set Number of Data Instances to 7.

3.

Click Apply.
On the 3D Viewer tab, CFD-Post displays 14 rotor blades.

4.

From the Outline tree view, edit S1.

5.

In the Data Instancing tab, set Number of Data Instances to 6.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

855

Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

6.

Click Apply.
On the 3D Viewer tab, CFD-Post displays 12 stator blades.

CFD-Post now computes forces on rotor blade on all 14 blade instances in R1 Blade. However,
Chart 1 will not reflect this change automatically. To update Chart 1:

At the top of the Chart Viewer tab, click the Refresh button.

37.6.6. Setting up Graphical Instancing Transformations

In this section, you will use graphical instancing to visually complete the full wheel. You will make
copies of the wheel segment that was completed using data instancing.
1.

From the Outline tree view, turn off the visibility of Wireframe.

2.

Edit R1.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Instancing

Number of Graphical Instances

Instance Definition

Custom

Passages per Component

14

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Edit S1.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

7.

Tab

Setting

Value

Instancing

Number of Graphical Instances

Instance Definition

Custom

Passages per Component

12

Click Apply.
The Graphics Instancing feature makes graphical copies of objects and places them at an angular
position computed using the Number of Passages and Number of Passages per Component on
the Instancing panel. To complete the full wheel, you replicated the 1/3 wheel sector, which was
obtained using data instancing, three times. On the 3D Viewer tab, CFD-Post displays the pressure
plot on Span 50 over the full wheel.

37.6.7. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator

With the Timestep Selector set to time step 0, you will make an animation showing the relative motion
starting from this time step and lasting for one stator blade passing period.
1.

856

Select the 3D Viewer tab.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Fourier Transformation Results in CFD-Post

2.

Position the geometry for the animation by right-clicking on a blank area in the viewer and selecting
Predefined Camera > View From -X.

3.

Click Animation

The Animation dialog box appears.

4.

In the Animation dialog box, select Keyframe Animation.

5.

Click New

6.

Select KeyframeNo1, then set # of Frames to 70, then press Enter while in the # of Frames box.

to create KeyframeNo1.

Tip
Be sure to press Enter and confirm that the new number appears in the list before
continuing.
This will place 70 intermediate frames between the keyframes, for a total of 72 frames.
7.

Use the Timestep Selector to load time step 70 and then close the dialog box.

8.

In the Animation dialog box, click New to create KeyframeNo2.

9.

Click More Animation Options

to expand the Animation dialog box.

10. Select Save Movie.

11. Specify a filename for the movie.
12. Set Format to MPEG1.
13. Click To Beginning

to rewind the active keyframe to KeyframeNo1.

Note
The active keyframe is indicated by the value appearing in the F: field in the middle of
the Animation dialog box. In this case it will be 1.
Wait for CFD-Post to finish loading the objects for this frame before proceeding.
14. Click Save animation state
and save the animation to a file. This will enable you to quickly restore the
animation in case you want to make changes. Animations are not restored by loading ordinary state files
(those with the .cst extension).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

857

Fourier Transformation Method for a Transient Rotor-stator Case

15. Click Play the animation

Note
It takes a while for the animation to be completed. To view the movie file, you will need
to use a media player that supports the MPEG format.
From the animation and plots, you will see that the flow is continuous across the interface. This is
because CFD-Post is capable of interpolating the flow field variables to the correct time and position
using the computed Fourier coefficients.
16. When you have finished, close the Animation dialog box and then close CFD-Post, saving the animation
state at your discretion.

858

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 38: Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

This tutorial includes:
38.1.Tutorial Features
38.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
38.3. Preparing the Working Directory
38.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre
38.5. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre
38.6. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case
38.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case
38.8. Viewing the Fourier Transformation Blade Flutter Results in CFD-Post

38.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

General mode

Analysis Type

Transient Blade Row

Fluid Type

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Type

Multiple Domains
Rotating Frame of
Reference

Turbulence Model

k-Epsilon

Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall (Counter
Rotating)

Mesh Motion

Periodic Motion
Sliding Mesh

CFD-Post

Plots

Contour
Isosurface
Vectors
Transient Blade Row
Expansion

38.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

The goal of this tutorial is to set up a transient blade row simulation using the Fourier Transformation
model as part of blade flutter modeling. An integral step of blade flutter modeling is the calculation of
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

859

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

the aerodynamic damping factor as a function of the possible nodal diameters (radial lines of symmetry
around the circumference) for the component being modeled. When the number of passages in the
component is an integer multiplier of the nodal diameter, the number of blade passages required to
model a given nodal diameter can be substantially reduced by using the rotational periodic boundary
conditions. This eliminates the need to model the full component. By using the Fourier Transformation
model, the number of passages required can be kept to a minimum of two for all nodal diameters.
This tutorial uses an axial compressor to illustrate the basic concepts of setting up, running, and monitoring a transient blade row calculation with blade motion in CFX. The full geometry consists of one
rotor containing 36 blades as seen in Figure 38.1: Single Row Reference Case Containing 36 Blades (p. 860)
below.
Figure 38.1: Single Row Reference Case Containing 36 Blades

For non-zero nodal diameters, there is a finite inter-blade phase angle (IBPA), between neighboring
blades. This phase difference between the blades, is defined as:

where,

The following table compares the number of passages per component required to model a given nodal
diameter when using periodic boundary conditions or the Fourier Transformation approach:

860

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Overview of the Problem to Solve

Nodal Diameter

IBPA
[deg]

Number of Passages per Component

to Model
Reference Case

Fourier
Transformations

(Rotational
Periodicity)
0

10

36

20

18

30

12

40

50

36

60

70

36

80

90

For this tutorial, you will model a nodal diameter (ND) of four using the Fourier transformation approach
with only two passages. The equivalent model using the periodic boundary conditions (reference case)
requires nine passages, that is, a quarter of the original rotor.
The machine is rotating at 1800 [rad s^-1]. The inlet boundary condition is modeled as Total Pressure
and Total Temperature in the stationary frame, with a specified flow direction in the cylindrical components. The outlet boundary condition is set to an average static pressure of 138 [kPa], varying in the radial direction only. The inlet boundary profile is provided in a .csv file.
The blade vibration is modeled as forced periodic motion at a fixed frequency with a specified interblade phase angle. The frequency and displacement profile (mode shape) are obtained from cyclic
symmetry calculations in ANSYS Mechanical using a single blade model, and exported to a .csv file.
For this case the vibration frequency is 1152.13 [Hz], and the maximum displacement for the mode
shape is 0.00129 [m]. In order to use this single blade mode shape for multiple blade flow simulations,
the profile must be replicated around the machine axis. This replicated profile contains a sector number
identifying every copied section from the original profile. This sector number increases following the
right hand rule around the machine axis. The sector number information can be used to determine the
direction of the phase shift; that is, it can be used to determine whether the blade displacement is initiated on the blade with the higher or lower theta position.
The surface of revolution mesh motion boundary condition is used at the shroud to model the sliding
of the mesh along the surface.
The phase angle multiplier (PAM) has the same magnitude as the Nodal Diameter, but carries a sign
convention. A positive PAM indicates blades with higher theta value are leading the motion lagged by
the other blades with the lower theta position. The hub surface nodes are set as stationary, while the
shroud surface nodes are allowed to follow the blade displacement.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

861

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

38.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
R37ATM_60k.gtm
R37_inlet.csv
R37_mode1_1p.csv
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

38.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

The following section describes the steady-state simulation setup for blade flutter in CFX-Pre. Although,
the effect of mesh motion on a steady-state run is minimal, it will provide you with the initial conditions
for the Fourier Transformation Blade Flutter case.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run FourierBladeFlutterIni.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre (p. 874).

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select General and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Set File name to FourierBladeFlutterIni.cfx.

6.

Click Save.

38.4.1. Importing the Mesh

1.

In the Outline tree right-click Mesh and select Import Mesh > CFX Mesh.
The Import Mesh dialog box appears.

862

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

2.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Filename

R37ATM_60k.gtm

Click Open.
This file contains a single passage mesh. The Fourier Transformation method requires two passages
for any IBPA number.

4.

Right-click R37ATM_60k.gtm under Outline > Mesh and select Transform Mesh.

5.

Under the Mesh Transformation Editor, select Transformation > Turbo Rotation.

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

7.

Setting

Value

Rotation Option

Principal Axis

Axis

Passages per Mesh

Passages to Model

Passages in 360

36

Click Apply and close the Mesh Transformation Editor dialog box.

38.4.2. Expanding Profile Data

The profile describing the frequency and blade mode shape for one blade is provided with this tutorial.
As you are modeling more than one blade, this profile must be expanded before it can be initialized
and used for boundary condition specifications.
1.

Select Tools > Expand Profile Data.

2.

Under Data File to Expand, click Browse

3.

From your working directory, select R37_mode1_1p.csv.

4.

Under Write to Profile, enter R37_mode1_36p.csv.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Section

Setting

Value

Passage Definition

Passages in Profile

Passages in 360

36

Rotation Axis

Global Z

In addition to the original section, the new profile file will have 35 new sections, one below the
other, without any separators. Each section corresponds to a passage of 36 blades in the rotor. The
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

863

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

node coordinates are rotated accordingly for each passage and displacement vector component.
A new column named Sector Tag is added to the profile file. This column indicated the number of
the sector or passage the node is in.
6.

Click OK.

38.4.3. Initializing Profile Data

The inflow and mode1 functions are defined using profiles found in the .csv files in your working
directory. Profile data must be initialized before they can be used for inflow and mode1 functions.
1.

Select Tools > Initialize Profile Data.

The Initialize Profile Data dialog box appears.

2.

Under Data File, click Browse

3.

From your working directory, select R37_inlet.csv.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Click Apply.
The inflow profile data is read into memory.

6.

Under Data File, click Browse

7.

From your working directory, select R37_mode1_36p.csv.

8.

Click Open.

9.

Click OK.

Note
After profile data has been initialized from a file, the profile data file should not be deleted
or otherwise removed from its directory. By default, the full file path to the profile data file
is stored in CFX-Pre, and the profile data file is read directly by CFX-Solver each time the
solver is started or restarted.

38.4.4. Creating the Domain

The fluid domain used for this simulation contains Air as an Ideal Gas. In addition to this, you will also
set mesh motion for the blades.
1.

Select Insert > Domain from the main menu.

2.

In the Insert Domain dialog box, type R1.

3.

Click OK to create the new domain.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

864

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Location and Type

> Location

Value

Entire Rotor
Passage

Fluids and Particle

Definitions...
> Fluid 1
> Material

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Models
> Reference Pressure

0 [Pa]

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Option

Rotating

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Angular Velocity

-1800 [radians
s^-1][a]

Domain Models
> Domain Motion
> Alternate Rotation
Model

(Selected)

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Option

Regions of
Motion
Specified

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Displacement Relative To

Initial Mesh

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Option

Displacement
Diffusion

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

865

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

Tab

Setting

Value

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Mesh Stiffness
> Option

Value

Domain Models
> Mesh Deformation
> Mesh Motion Model
> Mesh Stiffness
> Mesh Stiffness

1 [m^2
s^-1]*(1.0E-6
[m^3] /
Volume of
Finite
Volumes)^2
[b][c]

Fluid Models

Heat Transfer
> Option

Total Energy

a. Notice that a negative angular velocity is used because the machine rotates
clockwise with respect to the axis of rotation
b. An expression for the mesh stiffness based on the size of the control volumes
is provided to improve mesh robustness of the mesh morphing algorithms.
c. Click the Enter Expression icon

5.

to specify the CEL expression.

Click OK.

38.4.5. Creating the Boundaries

38.4.5.1. Inlet Boundary
1.

Create a new boundary named R1 Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

866

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Inlet

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Location

Entire Rotor
INFLOW

Frame Type

Stationary

Profile Boundary
Conditions
> Use Profile Data

(Selected)

Profile Boundary
Conditions
> Profile Boundary
Setup
> Profile Name

3.

Inflow

Click Generate Values.

This causes profile values to be applied at the nodes on the inlet boundary. It also causes entries
to be made in the Boundary Details tab. In order to later reset the velocity values at the inlet to
match those that were originally read from the BC Profile file, revisit the Basic Settings tab for this
boundary and click Generate Values.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Value

Stationary

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Stat. Frame Tot. Press.

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

Inflow.Total
Pressure(r)[a]

Flow Direction
> Option

Cylindrical
Components

Flow Direction
> Axial Component

Inflow.Velocity
Axial(r)[a]

Flow Direction
> Radial Component

Inflow.Velocity
Radial(r)[a]

Flow Direction
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

867

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

Tab

Setting

Value

> Theta Component

Inflow.Velocity
Circumferential(r)[a]

Turbulence
> Option

Medium (Intensity =
5%)

Heat Transfer
> Option

Stat. Frame Total Temp.

Heat Transfer
> Stat. Frame Total
Temp.
a. Click the Enter Expression icon

5.

Inflow.Total
Temperature(r)[a]

to specify the CEL expression.

Click OK.

38.4.5.2. Outlet Boundary

1.

Create a new boundary named R1 Outlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Outlet

Location

Entire Rotor
OUTFLOW

Frame Type

Stationary

Boundary Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Stationary

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Average Static
Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

138 [kPa]

Mass and Momentum

> Pres. Profile Blend

Pressure Averaging
> Option

868

Radial
Equilibrium

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Pressure Averaging
> Radial Reference
Position
> Option

Specified
Radius

Pressure Averaging
> Radial Reference
Position
> Specified Radius

3.

0.215699 [m]

Click OK.

38.4.5.3. Wall Boundaries

The hub, shroud and blade of the fluid region all require wall boundaries.
1.

Create a new boundary named R1 Hub.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Entire Rotor
HUB

Frame Type

Rotating

Boundary Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

3.

Click OK.

4.

Create a new boundary named R1 Shroud.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Stationary

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Entire Rotor
SHROUD

Frame Type

Rotating

Boundary Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Surface of
Revolution

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

869

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

Tab

Setting

Value

Mesh Motion
> Axis Definition
> Option

Coordinate
Axis

Mesh Motion
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis

Global Z

Mass and Momentum

> Wall Velocity

(Select)

Mass and Momentum

> Wall Velocity
> Option

6.

Click OK.

7.

Create a new boundary named R1 Blade.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Counter
Rotating Wall

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Entire Rotor
BLADE

Frame Type

Rotating

Profile Boundary
Conditions
> Use Profile Data

(Selected)

Profile Boundary
Conditions
> Profile Boundary
Setup
> Profile Name
Boundary Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

9.

870

mode1

Stationary

Click OK.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

38.4.6. Creating Domain Interfaces

You will now create a pair of fluid-fluid domain interfaces along the tip gap for each blade.
1.

Click Insert > Domain Interface and, in the dialog box that appears, set Name to R1 Blade Tip Gap.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

R1

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Rotor SHROUD
TIP GGI SIDE 1

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

R1

Interface Side 2
> Region List

Rotor SHROUD
TIP GGI SIDE 2

Interface Models
> Option
Mesh Connection

General
Connection

Mesh Connection
Method
> Mesh Connection
> Option

GGI

3.

Click OK.

4.

Click Insert > Domain Interface and, in the dialog box that appears, set Name to R1 Blade Tip Gap
2.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

R1

Interface Side 1

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

871

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

Tab

Setting

Value

> Region List

Rotor SHROUD
TIP GGI SIDE 1
2

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

R1

Interface Side 2
> Region List

Rotor SHROUD
TIP GGI SIDE 2
2

Interface Models
> Option
Mesh Connection

General
Connection

Mesh Connection
Method
> Mesh Connection
> Option

GGI

6.

Click OK.

7.

Click Insert > Domain Interface and, in the dialog box that appears, set Name to R1 to R1 Periodic.

8.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

R1

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Rotor PER1

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

R1

Interface Side 2
> Region List

Rotor PER2 2

Interface Models
> Option

Rotational
Periodicity

Interface Models

872

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

> Axis Definition

> Option

Coordinate
Axis

Interface Models
> Axis Definition
> Rotation Axis
Mesh Connection

Global Z

Mesh Connection
Method
> Mesh Connection
> Option

9.

GGI

Click OK.
In addition to the two fluid-fluid interfaces, the Fourier Transformation method requires a domain
interface between the two passages. This interface method will be used by the Fourier Transformation method to collect information about the flow. The data will then be transferred back to the
rotational periodic boundaries with the proper time lag.

Note
The periodic and sampling interfaces must use the GGI mesh connection.

10. Click Insert > Domain Interface and, in the dialog box that appears, set Name to R1 Sampling In
terface.
11. Configure the following setting(s):
Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Interface Type

Fluid Fluid

Interface Side 1
> Domain (Filter)

R1

Interface Side 1
> Region List

Rotor PER2

Interface Side 2
> Domain (Filter)

R1

Interface Side 2
> Region List

Rotor PER1 2

Interface Models

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

873

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

Tab

Mesh Connection

Setting

Value

> Option

General
Connection

Mesh Connection
Method
> Mesh Connection
> Option

GGI

12. Click OK.

Fourier Transformation periodic boundary condition mappings are affected by the mesh motion applied
to the periodic interfaces. You can prevent this by changing the mesh motion options for the Periodic
and Sampling interfaces to stationary.
1.

In the outline tree, edit R1 to R1 Periodic Side 1 under Flow Analysis 1 > R1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Value

Stationary

3.

Click OK.

4.

Repeat step 2 for R1 to R1 Periodic Side 2, R1 Sampling Interface Side 1, and R1

Sampling Interface Side 2.

38.4.7. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Write Solver Input File

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

FourierBladeFlutterIni.def

3.

Click Save.

4.

Save the simulation.

38.5. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

In this second part of the tutorial, you will modify the steady-state simulation from the first part of the
tutorial in order to model the transient blade row. The result from the steady-state simulation is used
as an initial guess to speed up the convergence for the transient simulation.

874

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

38.5.1. Opening the Existing Case

This step involves opening the original simulation and saving it to a different location.
1.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
FourierBladeFlutterIni.cfx
FourierBladeFlutterIni_001.res
R37_mode1_1p.csv
R37_inlet.csv
R37_mode1_36p.csv
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already running.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run FourierBladeFlutter.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case (p. 885).

4.

If the original simulation is not already opened, then open FourierBladeFlutterIni.cfx.

5.

Save the case as FourierBladeFlutter.cfx in your working directory.

38.5.2. Modifying the Analysis Type

Modify the analysis type as follows:
1.

Edit Analysis Type.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Analysis Type
> Option

3.

Transient Blade Row

Click OK.

38.5.3. Modifying the Domain

Modify the domain as follows:
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

875

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

1.

Edit R1, in the Outline tree under Flow Analysis 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Passage Definition
> Pass. in Component

Value

Passage Definition
> Passages in 360

3.

36

Click OK.

38.5.4. Creating Expressions for Frequency and Scaling Factor

Next, you will create expressions defining the Frequency, Maximum Periodic Displacement and Scaling
Factor that will be used in the blade boundary definition.
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Expressions, Functions and Variables > Expression.

2.

In the Insert Expression dialog box, type VibrationFrequency.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Set Definition, to 1152.13 [Hz].

5.

Click Apply to create the expression.

You will create an expression defining the maximum periodic displacement.

1.

Create an expression called MaxPeriodicDisplacement.

2.

Set Definition to 0.0015 [m].

3.

Click Apply.

You will use the maximum periodic displacement from above to calculate the scaling factor. The scaling
factor is chosen as the maximum amplitude the blade will deform, normalized by the maximum amplitude
of the mode shape provided. The maximum amplitude for the blade is chosen approximately to 2% of
the maximum span of the blade.
1.

Create an expression called ScalingFactor.

2.

Set Definition to MaxPeriodicDisplacement/0.00129[m].

3.

Click Apply.

38.5.5. Modifying the R1 Blade Boundary

1.

Edit R1 Blade, in the Outline tree under Flow Analysis 1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

876

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Basic Settings

Boundary Type

Wall

Location

Entire Rotor
BLADE

Frame Type

Rotating

Profile Boundary
Conditions
> Use Profile Data

(Selected)

Profile Boundary
Conditions
> Profile Boundary
Setup
> Profile Name

3.

mode1

Click Generate Values.

This fills up the options under the Boundary Details tab.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary Details

Mesh Motion
> Option

Value

Periodic
Displacement

Mesh Motion
> Periodic
Displacement
> Option

Cartesian
Components

Mesh Motion
> Periodic
Displacement
> X Component

mode1.meshdisptot
x(Initial X,Initial
Y,Initial Z)

Mesh Motion
> Periodic
Displacement
> Y Component

mode1.meshdisptot
y(Initial X,Initial
Y,Initial Z)

Mesh Motion

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

877

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

Tab

Setting

Value

> Periodic
Displacement
> Z Component

mode1.meshdisptot
z(Initial X,Initial
Y,Initial Z)

Mesh Motion
> Periodic
Displacement
> Frequency

VibrationFrequency[a]

Mesh Motion
> Periodic
Displacement
> Scaling

ScalingFactor[a]

Mesh Motion
> Periodic
Displacement
> Phase Angle
> Option

Phase Angle
Multiplier

Mesh Motion
> Periodic
Displacement
> Phase Angle
> Phase Angle Multiplier

Mesh Motion
> Periodic
Displacement
> Phase Angle
> Passage Number

a. Click the Enter Expression icon

5.

878

mode1.Sector
Tag(Initial
X,Initial Y,Initial
Z)

to specify the CEL expression.

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

38.5.6. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model

In this section, you will set the simulation to be solved using the Fourier Transformation method.
1.

Edit Transient Blade Row Models.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transient Blade Row Model

> Option

Fourier Transformation

3.

Under Fourier Transformation, click Add new item

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

icon, accept the default name and click OK

Value

Fourier Transformation 1
> Option

Blade Flutter

Fourier Transformation 1
> Phase Corrected Intf.

R1 to R1 Periodic

Fourier Transformation 1
> Sampling Domain Intf.

R1 Sampling Interface

Fourier Transformation 1
> Blade Boundary

R1 Blade

Transient Method
> Time Period
> Option

Value

Transient Method
> Time Period
> Period

1/VibrationFrequency[a]

Transient Method
> Time Steps
> Option

Number of Timesteps per

Period

Transient Method
> Time Steps

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

879

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

Setting

Value

> Timesteps/Period

72[b]

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Option

Number of Periods per Run

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Periods per Run

10

a. Click the Enter Expression icon

to specify the CEL expression.

b. The number of time steps per period is an integer that is a multiple of the number
of blades divided by the nodal diameter. This guarantees that both blades will
go through the same deformations within the period.

5.

Click OK.

38.5.7. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points

In this section you will create monitor points to monitor flow properties, integrated flow quantities, and
mesh displacement. Monitor points provide useful information on the quality of the reference phase
and frequency produced by the simulation. These monitor points should also be used to monitor convergence and patterns during the simulation.

Note
When comparing your Fourier Transformation plots to those from the reference case, make
sure the monitor points are placed in the same relative locations with respect to the initial
configuration in both cases.
Monitoring pressure and velocity provides feedback on the momentum equations, while
monitoring temperature provides feedback on the energy equations. Monitor points help
check that the solver equations are being solved correctly.

Set up the solver to output transient results file to analyze the imposed mesh motion values. The transient blade row analysis type offers the Fourier compression method of storing transient periodic data.
1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

880

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables List

(Selected)

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables List
> Extra Output Var. List

Total Pressure, Total

Temperature, Total Mesh
Displacement, Wall Work
Density, Wall Power
Density[a]

a. Click Multi-select from extended list

each of the listed variables.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

Click the Monitor tab.

and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting

You will set up three types of monitor points for this simulation. Firstly, you will create a set of
monitor points to monitor variables at specific cylindrical coordinates within the domain. Cylindrical
coordinates are useful in turbomachinery applications because they allow you to place monitor
points with the same relative position inside different passages by shifting the theta component
by the equivalent passage pitch. Next, you will create a second set of monitor points to monitor
the values of expressions. Finally, you will create a third set of monitor points to monitor aerodynamic damping.
6.

Select Monitor Objects.

7.

Create monitor points by configuring the following settings:

Setting

Value

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and Expressions

Create a monitor point named

LE1pass1[a]

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
> LE1pass1
> Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

881

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

Setting

Value

> LE1pass1
> Output Variables List

Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,

Total Temperature, Velocity, Velocity in
Stn Frame[b]

Monitor Objects
> Monitor Points and
Expressions
> LE1pass1
> Output Variables List
> Cylindrical Coordinates

(0 [m], 0.23 [m], -7.5 [degree])

a. To create a new item, you must first click the Add new item
the name as required and click OK.
b. Click Multi-select from extended list
each of the listed variables.

icon, then enter

and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting

8.

Click Apply.

9.

Create additional monitor points with the same output variables. The names and cylindrical coordinates
are listed below:
Name

Coordinates

LE1pass2

(0 [m], 0.23 [m], 2.5 [degree])

LE2pass1

(0 [m], 0.23 [m], -2.5 [degree])

LE2pass2

(0 [m], 0.23 [m], 7.5 [degree])

TE1pass1

(0.05 [m], 0.23 [m], 0 [degree])

TE1pass2

(0.05 [m], 0.23 [m], 10 [degree])

TE2pass1

(0.05 [m], 0.23 [m], 5 [degree])

TE2pass2

(0.05 [m], 0.23 [m], 15 [degree])

10. Click Apply after each monitor point.

11. Create additional monitor points with the following expressions:

882

Name

Expression

Force on Blade

force()@REGION:Rotor BLADE

Force on Blade 2

force()@REGION:Rotor BLADE 2

Max Displ Blade

maxVal(Total Mesh
Displacement)@REGION:Rotor BLADE
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Name

Expression

Max Displ Blade 2

maxVal(Total Mesh
Displacement)@REGION:Rotor BLADE 2

Power on Blade

areaInt(Wall Power Density)@REGION:Rotor

BLADE

Power on Blade 2

areaInt(Wall Power Density)@REGION:Rotor

BLADE 2

Work on Blade

areaInt(Wall Work Density)@REGION:Rotor

BLADE

Work on Blade 2

areaInt(Wall Work Density)@REGION:Rotor

BLADE 2

12. Create aerodynamic damping monitors by configuring the following settings:

Setting

Value

Monitor Objects
> Aerodynamic Damping

Create an aerodynamic damping object

named Aerodynamic Damping 1.

Monitor Objects
> Aerodynamic Damping
> Aerodynamic Damping
1
> Option

Full Period Integration

Monitor Objects
> Aerodynamic Damping
> Aerodynamic Damping
1
> Location Type
> Option

Mesh Regions

Monitor Objects
> Aerodynamic Damping
> Aerodynamic Damping
1
> Location Type
> Location

Rotor BLADE

Monitor Objects

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

883

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

Setting

Value

> Aerodynamic Damping

Create an aerodynamic damping object

named Aerodynamic Damping 2.

Monitor Objects
> Aerodynamic Damping
> Aerodynamic Damping
2
> Option

Full Period Integration

Monitor Objects
> Aerodynamic Damping
> Aerodynamic Damping
2
> Location Type
> Option

Mesh Regions

Monitor Objects
> Aerodynamic Damping
> Aerodynamic Damping
2
> Location Type
> Location

Rotor BLADE 2

Monitor Objects
> Aerodynamic Damping

Create an aerodynamic damping object

named Aerodynamic Damping 3.

Monitor Objects
> Aerodynamic Damping
> Aerodynamic Damping
3
> Option

Moving Integration Interval

Monitor Objects
> Aerodynamic Damping
> Aerodynamic Damping
3
> Location Type
> Option

884

Mesh Regions
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case

Setting

Value

Monitor Objects
> Aerodynamic Damping
> Aerodynamic Damping
3
> Location Type
> Location

Rotor BLADE

13. Click OK.

38.5.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Write Solver Input File

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

FourierBladeFlutter.def

Click Save.

38.6. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case

From the ANSYS CFX launcher, start the CFX-Solver Manager.
1.

Select File > Define Run

The Define Run dialog box is displayed.

2.

Under Solver Input File, click Browse

3.

Select Double Precision.

4.

Click Start Run.

and select FourierBladeFlutterIni.def.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.
5.

Clear Post-Process Results.

6.

If using stand-alone mode, ensure that Shut down CFX-Solver Manager is cleared.

7.

Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

885

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

38.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case

To reduce the simulation time for the blade flutter case, the simulation will be initialized using a steadystate case.
1.

Click File > Define Run.

2.

Under Solver Input File, click Browse

3.

Select Double Precision.

4.

Under the Initial Values tab, select Initial Values Specification.

5.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values, select Initial Values 1.

6.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values > Initial Values 1 Settings > File Name, click Browse

and select FourierBladeFlutter.def.

.
7.

Select FourierBladeFlutterIni_001.res from your working directory.

8.

Click Open.

9.

Set Initial Values Specification > Use Mesh From, to Solver Input File.

10. Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. This can take a long time depending on your
system. Eventually a dialog box is displayed.

Note
Before the simulation begins, the Transient Blade Row Post-processing Information
summary in the .out file will display the time step range over which the solver will
accumulate the Fourier coefficients.
Similarly, a Fourier Transformation Stability summary in the .out file as well as the
time step at which the full Fourier Transformation Model is activated.
Monitor points of similar values can be grouped together by right-clicking to the right
of the User Points tab, selecting New Monitor, and clicking OK. In the New Monitor
dialog box, you can set the name for the new monitor point and select the variables
you want to monitor in the Monitor Properties dialog box.
After the simulation has proceeded for some time, observe the periodic nature of the
monitor point values.

You can observe the evolution of the specified expressions. Plot the forces on each blade with respect
to the displacement on the blade as follows:
1.

886

Select Workspace > New Monitor and accept the default name.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Fourier Transformation Blade Flutter Results in CFD-Post

2.

Under the Plot Lines tab, expand the USER POINT branch and select Work on Blade.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Under the Range Settings tab, in the Plot Data By section, select Simulation Time.
This displays a simulation time history of the work on blade 1.
Note that you could repeat the process for blade 2 by replacing the variables Work on Blade
to Work on Blade 2.

Observe the monitors related to aerodynamic damping as follows:

1.

Select Workspace > New Monitor and accept the default name.

2.

Under the Plot Lines tab, expand the AERODYNAMIC DAMPING branch and select all the damping
coefficients that you made earlier.

3.

Click Apply.

Observe the plot lines. The monitor values represent mechanical work done by the blade on the fluid
over the last period of mesh motion. If the monitor values remain positive (after the case has converged),
then the vibration is damped (for the frequency being studied).
When CFX-Solver is finished, continue on to postprocessing:
1.

Select Post-Process Results.

2.

If using stand-alone mode, select the check box next to Shut down CFX-Solver Manager.

3.

Click OK.

38.8. Viewing the Fourier Transformation Blade Flutter Results in CFDPost

A transient blade row analysis calculation creates a number of solution variables in addition to those
added in Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points (p. 880). These variables are compressed
using a discrete Fourier Transformation and the corresponding coefficients are stored in the results file.
CFD-Post will expand this transformation for the variable of interest at any desired time value. The time
step selector will show time values that are representative of the values used by the solver. In addition
to the existing time values, additional time values can be added or removed as deemed necessary.
In this section, you will create a few plots to illustrate the use of the time step selector for transient
blade row analysis. You will also create a user defined variable for total wall work, and use the variable
to create a contour and an animation of the blade motion.
To get started, follow these steps:

When CFD-Post starts, you may see a message regarding transient blade row postprocessing, click OK.

38.8.1. Displaying Total Wall Work on the Blade

1.

Select Insert > Variable and set the name to Total Wall Work.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

887

Fourier Transformation Method for a Blade Flutter Case

3.

Name

Setting

Value

Total Wall Work

Method

Expression

Scalar

(Selected)

Expression

Wall Work Density * Area

Calculate Global
Range

(Selected)

Click Apply to create the new variable.

You can review the new Total Wall Work variable on the Variables tab, under the User
Defined branch.

38.8.2. Creating a Contour Plot for Total Wall Work on the Blade
1.

Click Insert > Contour and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

Geometry

Locations

R1 Blade

Variable

Total Wall Work

Range

Local

# of Contours

21

Show Contour Lines

(Selected)

Constant Coloring

(Selected)

Color Mode

Default

Render

3.

Click Apply.

The contour plot shows instantaneous values for Total Wall Work.

38.8.3. Creating an Animation for Total Wall Work on the Blade

Using the contour plot created above, you will now create an animation of the Total Wall Work
on the blade for the first phase.
1.

Using the Timestep Selector dialog box, ensure the time value of 0 [s] is selected.

2.

Under Timestep Sampling select Uniform.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Select Tools > Animation or click Animation

The Animation dialog box appears.

5.

888

Select Keyframe Animation.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Fourier Transformation Blade Flutter Results in CFD-Post

6.

Click New

to create KeyframeNo1.

7.

Highlight KeyframeNo1, then change # of Frames to 48.

8.

Select the time step for the first phase (time step number 10) using the Timestep Selector dialog box.

9.

Click New

to create KeyframeNo2.

The # of Frames parameter has no effect for the last keyframe, so leave it at the default value.
10. Select Save Movie.
11. Set Format to MPEG1.
12. Click Browse

next to Save Movie to set a path and filename for the movie file.

If the filepath is not given, the file will be saved in the directory from which CFD-Post was launched.
13. Click Save.
The movie filename (including path) will be set, but the movie will not be created yet.
14. If frame 1 is not loaded (shown in the F: text box in the middle of the Animation dialog box), click To
Beginning

to load it.

Wait for CFD-Post to finish loading the objects for this frame before proceeding.
15. Click Play the animation

The movie will be created as the animation proceeds. This will be slow, since a time step must be
loaded and objects must be created for each frame. To view the movie file, you need to use a
viewer that supports the MPEG format.
16. When you have finished, close CFD-Post.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

889

890

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Chapter 39: Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient

Rotor-stator Case
This tutorial includes:
39.1.Tutorial Features
39.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve
39.3. Preparing the Working Directory
39.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre
39.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case
39.6. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre
39.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case
39.8. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

39.1. Tutorial Features

In this tutorial you will learn about:
Component

Feature

Details

CFX-Pre

User Mode

Turbo Wizard
General mode

Analysis Type

Transient Blade Row

Fluid Type

Air Ideal Gas

Domain Type

Multiple Domains
Rotating Frame of
Reference

Turbulence Model

Shear Stress Transport

Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Boundary Conditions

Inlet (Subsonic)
Outlet (Subsonic)
Wall (Counter Rotating)

CFD-Post

Plots

Vector Plot
Contour
Data Instancing
Time Chart
Animation

39.2. Overview of the Problem to Solve

This tutorial sets up a 1.5-stage transient blade row calculation using the Time Transformation model.
It uses a 1.5-stage machine to illustrate the basic concepts of setting up, running, and monitoring a

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

891

Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case

transient blade row problem in ANSYS CFX. It also describes the postprocessing of multistage transient
blade row results using the tools provided in CFD-Post for this type of calculation.
The full geometry of the 1.5 stages selected for modeling contains 36 blades in the first stator row, 42
blades in the rotor row, and 37 blades in the second stator row.

The geometry to be modeled consists of a single rotor blade passage and two stator blade passages
(one from each stator row). Each rotor blade passage is an 8.571 section (360/42 blades), while the
blade passages from the first stator row are 10 sections (360/36 blades) and the blade passages from
the second stator row are 9.730 sections (360/37 blades). The pitch ratio at the interface between the
rotor passage and the first stator passage is 0.8571 (that is, 6/7). The pitch ratio at the interface between
the rotor passage and the second stator passage is 0.8810 (that is, 37/42).
For the Time Transformation method, you should always maintain an ensemble pitch ratio within a
range of 0.75 to 1.4. Note that the range of permissible pitch ratios narrows significantly with slower
rotation speed. A full machine analysis can be performed (modeling all rotor and stator blades), which
always eliminates any pitch change, but will require significant computational time. For this geometry,
only a full machine analysis can produce a pitch ratio of 1.0.
In this example, the rotor rotates about the Z axis at 3500 rev/min (positive rotation following the right
hand rule) while the stator rows are stationary. Rotational periodicity boundaries are used to enable
only a small section of the full geometry to be modeled.

892

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

The flow is modeled as being turbulent and compressible. Profile boundary conditions are used at the
inlet and outlet. In this tutorial, the profiles are a function of the radial coordinate only. These profiles
were obtained from previous simulations of the upstream and downstream stages.
The overall approach of this tutorial is to run a transient blade row simulation initialized with the results
of a steady-state simulation. First, you will define a steady-state simulation using the Turbomachinery
Wizard followed by General mode. While the steady-state simulation is running, you will modify a copy
of it to define a transient blade row simulation that uses the Time Transformation model. After running
the transient blade row simulation, you will create contour plots and an animation showing blade rotation.
If this is the first tutorial you are working with, it is important to review the following topics before
beginning:
Running ANSYS CFX Tutorials Using ANSYS Workbench (p. 4)
Changing the Display Colors (p. 7)

39.3. Preparing the Working Directory

1.

Create a working directory.

ANSYS CFX uses a working directory as the default location for loading and saving files for a particular session or project.

2.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
TBRInletProfile.csv
TBROutlet2Profile.csv
TBRTurbineRotor.gtm
TBRTurbineStator.gtm
TBRTurbineStator2.gtm
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

3.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre.

For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

39.4. Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

This tutorial uses the Turbomachinery wizard in CFX-Pre. This preprocessing mode is designed to simplify the setup of turbomachinery simulations.
1.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run MTimeBladeRowIni.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.

Proceed to Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case (p. 900).

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

893

Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case

2.

In CFX-Pre, select File > New Case.

3.

Select Turbomachinery and click OK.

4.

Select File > Save Case As.

5.

Under File name, type MTimeBladeRowIni.

6.

Click Save.

7.

If you are notified that the file already exists, click Overwrite.

39.4.1. Basic Settings

1.

In the Basic Settings panel, configure the following settings:

Setting

Value

Machine Type

Axial Turbine

Axes
> Rotation Axis

Analysis Type
> Type

Steady State

2.

Leave the other settings at their default values.

3.

Click Next.

39.4.2. Components Definition

You will define three new components and import their respective meshes.
1.

Right-click in the blank area and select Add Component from the shortcut menu.

2.

Create a new component of type Stationary named S1 and click OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Mesh
> File

TBRTurbineStator.gtm

[a]

a. You may have to select the CFX Mesh (*gtm *cfx) option under Files of
type.

4.

Create a new component of type Rotating, named R1 and click OK.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

894

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

Component Type
> Value

3500 [rev min^-1]

[a]

Mesh
> File

TBRTurbineRotor.gtm

a. From the problem description.

6.

Create a new component of type Stationary named S2 and click OK.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Mesh
> File

8.

TBRTurbineStator2.gtm

Click Next.

39.4.3. Physics Definition

In this section you will set properties of the fluid domain and some solver parameters.
1.

In the Physics Definition panel, configure the following:

Setting

Value

Fluid

Air Ideal Gas

Model Data
> Reference Pressure

0 [atm]

[a]

Model Data
> Heat Transfer

Total Energy

Model Data
> Turbulence

Shear Stress Transport

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> P-Total Inlet P-Static Outlet

(Selected)

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
169000 [Pa][b]

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

895

Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case

Setting

Value

> P-Total
Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
306 [K][b]

> T-Total
Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Inflow
> Flow Direction

Normal to Boundary

Inflow/Outflow Boundary
Templates
> Outflow
110000 [Pa][b]

> P-Static
Interface
> Default Type

Stage

a. To define the simulation using absolute pressure, set this value to 0 atm.
b. These values are temporary. They will be replaced with profile data later in the
tutorial.

2.

Continue to click Next until you reach Final Operations.

3.

Set Operation to Enter General Mode because you will continue to define the simulation through
settings not available in the Turbomachinery wizard.

4.

Click Finish.

39.4.4. Additional Fluid Model Settings

Verify the following settings, which affect the accuracy of the simulation:
1.

Edit R1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Domain Models

Value

> Domain Motion

> Alternate Rotation Model
Fluid Models

896

(Selected)

Heat Transfer
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

Tab

3.

Setting

Value

> Incl. Viscous Work Term

(Selected)

Click OK.

39.4.5. Initializing Profile Boundary Conditions

The inlet and outlet boundary conditions are defined using profiles in your working directory. Boundary
profile data must be initialized before they can be used for boundary conditions.
1.

Select Tools > Initialize Profile Data.

The Initialize Profile Data dialog box appears.

2.

Under Data File, click Browse

3.

From your working directory, select TBRInletProfile.csv.

4.

Click Open.

5.

Click Apply.
The profile data is read into memory.

6.

Under Data File, click Browse

7.

From your working directory, select TBROutlet2Profile.csv.

8.

Click Open.

9.

Click OK.

Note
After profile data has been initialized from a file, the profile data file should not be deleted
or otherwise removed from its directory. By default, the full filepath to the profile data file
is stored in CFX-Pre, and the profile data file is read directly by CFX-Solver each time the
solver is started or restarted.

39.4.6. Modifying Inlet and Outlet Boundary Conditions

1.

Edit S1 Inlet.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Profile Boundary Conditions

> Use Profile Data

Value

(Selected)

Profile Boundary Setup

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

897

Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case

Tab

3.

Setting

Value

> Profile Name

inlet

Click Generate Values.

This causes the profile values of Total Pressure and Total Temperature to be applied
at the nodes on the inlet boundary. It also causes entries to be made in the Boundary Details tab.
In order to later reset the velocity values at the main inlet to match those that were originally read
from the profile data file, revisit the Basic Settings tab for this boundary and click Generate Values.

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass and Momentum

> Option

Value

Total Pressure
(stable)

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

inlet.Total
Pressure(r)

Flow Direction
> Option

Cylindrical
Components

Flow Direction
> Axial Component

Flow Direction
> Radial Component

Flow Direction
> Theta Component

Heat Transfer
> Total Temperature

5.

Click OK.

6.

Edit S2 Outlet.

7.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Basic Settings

Profile Boundary Conditions

> Use Profile Data

898

inlet.Total
Temperature(r)

Value

(Selected)

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Steady-state Case in CFX-Pre

Tab

Setting

Value

Profile Boundary Setup

> Profile Name

8.

Click Generate Values.

9.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Boundary
Details

Mass And Momentum

outlet

Value

> Option

Static Pressure

Mass and Momentum

> Relative Pressure

outlet.Pressure(r)

10. Click OK.

39.4.7. Visualizing the Profile Boundary Value

You can plot scalar profile values and vectors on inlet and outlet boundaries. In this section, you will
edit a boundary so that you can visualize the pressure profile values at the inlet.
1.

Edit S1 Inlet

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Plot Options

Boundary Contour

(Selected)

Profile Variable

Relative Pressure

Click Apply

CFX-Pre plots the Total Pressure radial profile at the inlet with the pressure values displayed in a legend.

39.4.8. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Setting

Value

File name

MTimeBladeRowIni.def

Click Save.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

899

Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case

CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.
4.

Save the simulation.

39.5. Obtaining a Solution to the Steady-state Case

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed in CFX-Solver Manager.
1.

Click Start Run.

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

2.

Ensure that the Post-Process Results check box is cleared.

3.

Click OK.

39.6. Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

In the second part of the tutorial, you will modify the simulation from the first part of the tutorial to
model the transient blade row.

39.6.1. Opening the Existing Case

This step involves opening the original simulation and saving it to a different location.
1.

Ensure the following tutorial input files are in your working directory:
MTimeBladeRowIni.cfx
MTimeBladeRowIni_001.res
TBRInletProfile.csv
TBROutlet2Profile.csv
The tutorial input files are available from the ANSYS Customer Portal. To access tutorials and their
input files on the ANSYS Customer Portal, go to http://support.ansys.com/training.

2.

Set the working directory and start CFX-Pre if it is not already running.
For details, see Setting the Working Directory and Starting ANSYS CFX in Stand-alone Mode (p. 3).

3.

If you want to set up the simulation automatically using a tutorial session file:
a.

Run MTimeBladeRow.pre.
For details, see Playing a Session File (p. 6).

b.
4.

900

Proceed to Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case (p. 906).

If the original simulation is not already opened, then open MTimeBladeRowIni.cfx.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

5.

Save the case as MTimeBladeRow.cfx in your working directory.

39.6.2. Modifying the Analysis Type

In this section, you will make use of the transient blade row feature.
Modify the analysis type as follows:
1.

Edit Analysis Type.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Analysis Type
> Option

Transient Blade Row

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Option

Automatic with Value

Analysis Type
> Initial Time
> Time

3.

0 [s]

Click OK.

39.6.3. Modifying the Rotorstator Interfaces

1.

Edit R1 to S1.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Interface Models
> Frame Change/Mixing
Model
> Option

Transient Rotor Stator

3.

Click OK.

4.

Edit S2 to R1.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Interface Models
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

901

Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case

Setting

Value

> Frame Change/Mixing

Model
> Option

6.

Transient Rotor Stator

Click OK.

39.6.4. Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model

You will set the simulation to be solved using the Time Transformation method.
1.

Edit Transient Blade Row Models.

2.

Set Transient Blade Row Model > Option to Time Transformation.

3.

Under Time Transformation, click Add new item

4.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

, accept the default name, and click OK.

Value

Transient Method
> Time Period
> Option

Passing Period

Transient Method
> Time Period
> Domain

R1

Transient Method
> Time Steps
> Option

Number of Timesteps per Period

Transient Method
> Time Steps
> Timesteps/Period

60

Transient Method
> Time Duration
> Option

Number of Periods per Run

Transient Method
> Time Duration

902

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

Setting

Value

> Periods per Run

10

Note
The passing period is automatically calculated using 2 * pi / (Number of Blades * Angular
Velocity). The Passing Period setting cannot be edited.
The number of time steps per period should always be larger than 2 * Number of Fourier
Coefficients + 1 for use during postprocessing.
The time step size is also automatically calculated as: Passing Period / Number of Timesteps
per Period. The Timestep setting cannot be edited.

5.

Under Time Transformation, click Add new item

6.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

, accept the default name, and click OK.

Value

Time Transformation
> Time Transformation 2

(Selected)

Time Transformation 2
> Domain Interface

7.

S2 to R1

Click OK.

39.6.5. Setting Output Control and Creating Monitor Points

For transient blade row calculations, a minimal set of variables are selected to be computed using
Fourier coefficients. It is convenient to postprocess variables in the stationary frame when multiple
frames of reference are present. Here, you will add the Velocity in Stn Frame and Mach Number
in Stn Frame variables to the default list.
In addition, monitor points can be used to effectively compare the Time Transformation results against
a reference case. They provide useful information on the quality of the reference phase and frequency
produced in the simulation. They should be used to monitor convergence and, as the simulation converges, the user points should display a periodic pattern.

Note
When comparing to the reference case, make sure monitor points are placed in the same relative
locations with respect to the initial configuration in both cases.
It is important to check that the solver equations are being solved correctly. Monitoring pressure
provides feedback on the momentum equations while monitoring temperature provides feedback
on the energy equations.
Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

903

Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case

Set up the output control and create monitor points as follows:
1.

Click Output Control

2.

Click the Trn Results tab.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables
List

(Selected)

Transient Blade Row Results

> Extra Output Variables List
> Extra Output Var. List

Velocity in Stn Frame, Mach Number in

Stn Frame[a]

a. Click Multi-select from extended list

each of the listed variables.

4.

Click the Monitor tab.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

and hold down the Ctrl key while selecting

Setting

Value

Monitor Objects

(Selected)

Monitor Objects
> Efficiency Output

(Cleared)

6.

Create a monitor point named rotor_P1.

7.

Under Monitor Objects > Monitor Points and Expressions > rotor_P1, configure the following settings:

8.

904

Setting

Value

Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Output Variables List

Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,

Total Temperature, Velocity

Position Axial Comp.

0.211 [m]

Position Radial Comp.

0.2755 [m]

Position Theta Comp.

182 [degree]

Create an additional monitor point named stator_P1.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Defining a Transient Blade Row Case in CFX-Pre

9.

Under Monitor Objects > Monitor Points and Expressions > stator_P1, configure the following settings:
Setting

Value

Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Output Variables List

Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,

Total Temperature, Velocity

Position Axial Comp.

0.202 [m]

Position Radial Comp.

0.2755 [m]

Position Theta Comp.

178 [degree]

10. Create an additional monitor point named rotor_P2.

11. Under Monitor Objects > Monitor Points and Expressions > rotor_P2, configure the following settings:
Setting

Value

Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Output Variables List

Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,

Total Temperature, Velocity

Position Axial Comp.

0.27 [m]

Position Radial Comp.

0.2755 [m]

Position Theta Comp.

176 [degree]

12. Create an additional monitor point named stator_P2.

13. Under Monitor Objects > Monitor Points and Expressions > stator_P2, configure the following settings:
Setting

Value

Option

Cylindrical Coordinates

Output Variables List

Pressure, Temperature, Total Pressure,

Total Temperature, Velocity

Position Axial Comp.

0.28 [m]

Position Radial Comp.

0.2755 [m]

Position Theta Comp.

174 [degree]

Note
Transient blade row cases use monitor points to monitor the periodic fluctuating variable
values. For diagnostic purposes, you should have several monitor points. Here, four
monitor points are used for demonstration purposes.

14. Click OK.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

905

Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case

39.6.6. Writing the CFX-Solver Input (.def) File

1.

Click Define Run

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Setting

Value

File name

MTimeBladeRow.def

3.

Click Save.

4.

Ignore the error message (the initial values will be specified in CFX-Solver Manager) and click Yes to
continue.
CFX-Solver Manager automatically starts and, on the Define Run dialog box, Solver Input File is
set.

5.

If using stand-alone mode, quit CFX-Pre, saving the simulation (.cfx) file at your discretion.

39.7. Obtaining a Solution to the Transient Blade Row Case

At this point, CFX-Pre has been shut down, and the Define Run dialog box is displayed in CFX-Solver
Manager. You will now obtain a solution to the CFD problem. To reduce the simulation time, the simulation will be initialized using a steady-state case.
1.

Ensure that the Define Run dialog box is displayed. If an error message appears, ignore it and click Yes
to continue.
Solver Input File should be set to MTimeBladeRow.def.

2.

Under the Initial Values tab, select Initial Values Specification.

3.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values, select Initial Values 1.

4.

Under Initial Values Specification > Initial Values > Initial Values 1 Settings > File Name, click Browse
.

5.

Select MTimeBladeRowIni_001.res from your working directory.

6.

Click Open.

7.

Under Initial Values Specification > Use Mesh From, select Solver Input File.

8.

Click Start Run.

906

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

CFX-Solver runs and attempts to obtain a solution. At the end of the run, a dialog box is displayed
stating that the simulation has ended.

Note
Before the simulation begins, the Transient Blade Row Post-processing Information
summary in the .out file will display the time step range over which the solver will
accumulate the Fourier coefficients.
Similarly, the Time Transformation Stability summary in the .out file displays
whether the rotor-stator pitch ratio is within the acceptable range.
After the CFX-Solver Manager has run for a short time, you can track the monitor points
you created in CFX-Pre by clicking the Time Corrected User Points tab that appears
at the top of the graphical interface of CFX-Solver Manager.
Monitor points of similar values can be grouped together by right-clicking on any
monitor tab and selecting New Monitor. Change Type to Plot Monitor and click
OK. Expand USER POINT and select the points of interest (for example, all the pressure
points), then click OK.
After the simulation has proceeded for some time, observe the periodic nature of the
monitor point values.

9.

When CFX-Solver is finished, select the check box next to Post-Process Results.

10. Click OK.

39.8. Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

In a transient blade row run, flow field variables are compressed using the Fourier coefficient method.
These variables are accumulated at the end of the simulation. This enables you to navigate through
any time instance, within the common period, without having to load multiple transient results files.
By default CFD-Post displays results corresponding to the end the simulation.
To get started, follow these steps:
1.

Start CFD-Post and load MTimeBladeRow_001.res.

2.

When CFD-Post opens, if you see the Domain Selector dialog box, ensure that all the domains are selected,
then click OK to load the results from these domains.

3.

If you see a message regarding transient blade row postprocessing, click OK.

39.8.1. Creating a Turbo Surface

Create a turbo surface to be used for making plots:
1.

Click the Turbo tab.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

907

Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case

2.

If you see the Turbo Initialization dialog box, click Yes, otherwise click the Initialize All Components
button, which is visible initially by default, or after double-clicking the Initialization object in the Turbo
tree view.

3.

Select Insert > Location > Turbo Surface.

4.

Change the name to Span 50.

5.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Method

Value

Constant Span

Definition
> Value

0.5

6.

Click Apply.

7.

Turn off the visibility of Span 50 by clearing its check box in the Outline tree view.

39.8.2. Creating a Vector Plot

1.

Click Insert > Vector and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Geometry

Definition
> Locations

Value

Span 50

Definition
> Variable

3.

Velocity in
Stationary Frame

Click Apply.
The vector plot shows Velocity in Stationary Frame values corresponding to the end
of a common period.
The rotor domain is in the angular position corresponding to its location after 10 passing periods.
Now you will place the rotor aligned with the stator, as they were in the solver input file.

4.

Click Timestep Selector

5.

Select the 1st time step.

6.

Click Apply to load the time step, and then click Close to exit the dialog box.

908

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

The rotor blades move to their starting positions.

39.8.3. Creating a Blade-to-Blade Plot

1.

Turn off the visibility of Vector 1.

2.

In the Turbo tab, edit Plots > Blade-to-Blade.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

4.

Setting

Value

Span

0.5

Plot Type

Contour

Variable

Pressure

Range

Local

# of Contours

21

Click Apply.

The contour plot shows Pressure values corresponding to the specified time step.

39.8.4. Creating a Chart of Force on a Rotor Blade versus Time

In this section, you will compute and plot the magnitude of the forces that the flow applies on the rotor
blade. For a transient blade row case, CFD-Post automatically reconstructs variables for the flow solution
time based on the last time step. Intermediate time steps for time instances in the common period are
located in the Timestep Selector. In Setting up a Transient Blade Row Model (p. 902), you set 60 time
steps per rotor blade passing period and there are 42 rotor blade passing periods in a common period.
Therefore, the total number of intermediate time steps in the common period is 2520. For this case,
the solver has reconstructed results over one common period (2520 time steps). You will reduce the
total number of time steps to 420 to speed up the generation of the time chart.
Reduce the number of time steps in the period:
1.

Click Timestep Selector

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

3.

Tab

Setting

Value

Timestep
Selector

Timestep Sampling

Uniform

Number of Timesteps

420

Click Apply.
The Timestep Selector now shows a total of 420 steps over one common periods (shown under
the Phase column).

Compute the forces on the blade:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

909

Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case

1.

Select Insert > Expression.

2.

In the Insert Expression dialog box, type forces on rotor blade.

3.

Click OK.

4.

Set Definition to sqrt(force_x()@ R1 Blade ^2 + force_y()@ R1 Blade ^2 +

force_z()@ R1 Blade ^2)

5.

Click Apply to create the expression.

Create a transient chart showing force:

1.

Select Insert > Chart and accept the default name.

2.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Value

General

XY - Transient or Sequence

(Selected)

Data Series

Series 1
> Data Source
> Expression

(Selected)

Series 1
> Data Source
> Expression

3.

forces on rotor
blade

Click Apply.
A chart showing the force on a single rotor blade versus time is created and displayed on the Chart
Viewer tab.

39.8.5. Creating a Chart of a Solution Monitor and Fourier Coefficient Data

for Pressure versus Time
In this section, you will plot a solution monitor.
First, create a chart of the pressure at monitor point stator_P1 versus time:
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Chart.

2.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

910

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

Tab

Setting

Value

General

XY - Transient or Sequence

(Selected)

Data Series

Series 1
> Name

stator_P1
Pressure Solver
Data

stator_P1 Pressure Solver

Data
> Data Source
> Monitor Data

(Selected)

stator_P1 Pressure Solver

Data
> Monitor Variable Selection
> Y Axis
> Variable

Monitor Point:
stator_P1
(Pressure)

[a]

a. Click Browse Variables

to open the Monitor Data Y Variable dialog box.
From the tree in the dialog box, select User Point > Pressure >
stator_P1. Click OK.

4.

Click Apply.
A chart showing the raw solver pressure data at monitor point stator_P1 versus time is created
and displayed on the Chart Viewer tab.

Next, create another data series that will show the pressure signal reconstructed from Fourier coefficients
at the same point in the stator as monitor point stator_P1.
Start by adding a point:
1.

From the main menu, select Insert > Location > Point.

2.

Accept the default name by clicking OK.

3.

Set Method to XYZ.

4.

Set Point coordinates to -0.2778, 0.01044, 0.2021.

5.

Click Apply.
Note the location of Point 1 in the viewer.

Next, create the chart series:

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

911

Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case

1.

Edit Chart 2.

2.

In the Chart 2 details view, click New

3.

Configure the following setting(s):

Tab

Setting

Data Series

Series 2

to add a new series.

> Name

Value

stator_P1
Pressure Fourier
Coefficients

stator_P1 Pressure Fourier

Coefficients
> Data Source
> Location
Y Axis

Point 1

Data Selection
> Variable

Pressure

Axis Range
> Determine ranges automatically

(Cleared)

Axis Range
> Min

Axis Range
> Max

4.

0.00415405

Click Apply.
The chart now also shows the pressure at point Point 1 versus time, as represented by the
Fourier coefficient data. The reconstructed pressure signal is based on Fourier coefficients and the
blade passing period and is therefore an approximation of the raw solver pressure data.

39.8.6. Setting up Data Instancing Transformations

In this section, you will create additional copies of the original passages that replicate mesh nodes at
different locations with correct space and time interpolation values. After the data instancing process,
CFD-Post will create additional mesh nodes proportional to the number of extra passages created, and
populate them with solution variables correctly updated to their corresponding position in time and
space.
1.

From the Outline tree view, edit R1.

2.

In the Data Instancing tab, set Number of Data Instances to 42.

3.

Click Apply.

912

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

Viewing the Time Transformation Results in CFD-Post

4.

From the Outline tree view, edit S1.

5.

In the Data Instancing tab, set Number of Data Instances to 36.

6.

Click Apply.

7.

From the Outline tree view, edit S2.

8.

In the Data Instancing tab, set Number of Data Instances to 37.

9.

Click Apply.

10. Turn off the visibility of Wireframe.

On the 3D Viewer tab, CFD-Post displays the group of blades corresponding to a full wheel (the minimum number of blades that makes a unity pitch ratio between stator and rotor passages).
If you click the Turbo tab, then the 3D Viewer tab shows the contour plot that you made earlier. Notice
that the contour plot is now expanded to include the full wheel. Notice also that the solution varies
around the wheel.
The data-dependent transient forces on rotor blade on Chart 1 is still showing the result
computed on a single blade passage. After you expand the number of rotor blades in the rotor passage
to 42, the R1 Blade groups all 42 rotor blades together and the total force should be updated. To
update the chart, click the Refresh button at the top of the Chart Viewer tab.
The forces on rotor blade expression is now being computed on all 42 blades in the extended
number of passages in the rotor.

39.8.7. Animating the Movement of the Rotor Relative to the Stator

With the Timestep Selector set to time step 0, you will make an animation showing the relative motion
starting from this time step and lasting for one stator blade passing period.
1.

Select the 3D Viewer tab.

2.

Position the geometry for the animation by right-clicking on a blank area in the viewer and selecting
Predefined Camera > View From -X.

3.

Click Animation

The Animation dialog box appears.

4.

In the Animation dialog box, select Keyframe Animation.

5.

Click New

6.

Select KeyframeNo1, then set # of Frames to 70, then press Enter while in the # of Frames box.

to create KeyframeNo1.

Tip
Be sure to press Enter and confirm that the new number appears in the list before
continuing.

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.

913

Time Transformation Method for a 1.5-stage Transient Rotor-stator Case

This will place 70 intermediate frames between the keyframes, for a total of 72 frames.
7.

Use the Timestep Selector to load time step 70 and then close the dialog box.

8.

In the Animation dialog box, click New to create KeyframeNo2.

9.

Click More Animation Options

to expand the Animation dialog box.

10. Select Save Movie.

11. Specify a filename for the movie.
12. Set Format to MPEG1.
13. Click To Beginning

to rewind the active keyframe to KeyframeNo1.

Note
The active keyframe is indicated by the value appearing in the F: field in the middle of
the Animation dialog box. In this case it will be 1.
Wait for CFD-Post to finish loading the objects for this frame before proceeding.
14. Click Save animation state
and save the animation to a file. This will enable you to quickly restore the
animation in case you want to make changes. Animations are not restored by loading ordinary state files
(those with the .cst extension).
15. Click Play the animation

Note
It takes a while for the animation to be completed. To view the movie file, you will need
to use a media player that supports the MPEG format.
From the animation and plots, you can see that the flow is continuous across the interface. This is
because CFD-Post is capable of interpolating the flow field variables to the correct time and position
using the computed Fourier coefficients.
16. When you have finished, close the Animation dialog box and then close CFD-Post, saving the animation
state at your discretion.

914

Release 17.0 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.